V3 in &i r***^ ?Nh «KT NaBP**1^ ^,-*i 72* f\(Y)6 0^7 Uibrarg ai % Slus^um OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY, AT HARVARD COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, MASS. No. -f&¥f PROCEEDINGS AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXIII. JANUARY TO DECEMBER, 1886. PHILADELPHIA : PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY" BY M'CALLA & 8TAVELY. 1886. April 17, 188.5.] x [Cope. PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXIII. January, 1886. No. 121. A Contribution to the Vertebrate Paleontology of Brazil. By E. D. Cope. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 17, 18S5. ) Professor Orville A. Derby, Director of the Geological Section of the National Museum of Brazil, has desired me to furnish to the museum an account of the extinct Vertebrata from the various strata found within the limits of the Empire, which are preserved in the Museo Nacional at Rio de Janeiro. I have also received a considerable collection made in the neighborhood of Bahia by Mr. Joseph Mawson, of London, England, which has aided me much in the determination of the extinct fauna of that region. The horizons from which the species now enumerated have been derived are the Pliocene, the Cretaceous and the Carboniferous. The work hitherto done in this field is small in amount. The researches of Lund and Rein- hardt into the foasils of the caves of Brazil are well known. Professor Owen has determined the existence of Crocodilia and Dinosauria in the Cretaceous beds near Bahia ; and Professor Marsh has described a gavial from the same horizon and locality. Professor J. S. Newberry has iden- tified some fishes from Ceara in Eastern Brazil as of Jurassic age ; and I have described a genus and species from the same locality. In more detail, tbe localities and horizons from which the specimens of vertebrate fossils of the Museo Nacional have been derived, are the following, so far as determined : Pliocene, Pampean. North-eastern pt. of Province of Bahia ; Toxodon expansidens, sp. nov. Cretaceous ? Laramie. Near Bahia. Diplomystus longico status, sp. nov. Chiromystus matosoni, sp. nov. Fox Hills. Province of Pernambuco. Eyposaurus derbianus, sp. nov. ; PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. A. PRINTED SEPTEMBER 26,1885. Cope.l j <* [April 17, Enchodus subcequilateralis, sp. nov. ; Oaleocerdo pristodontus Agass. ; Apocopodon sericeus, sp. nov. ? . Province of Sergipe del Rey. Pycnodus flabellatus, sp. nov. Jukassic. Province of Ceara. Ancedopogon tenuidens Cope. Aspido- rhynchus, sp. Carboniferous. Province of San Paolo. Stereosternum tumidum, sp. nov. The following pages contain the detailed descriptions of the new species, and the determination of their affinities. Others yet remain to he deter- mined. PISCES. Apocopodon sericeus, gen. et sp. nov. Myliohatidorum. Char. gen. Founded on teeth which formed a pavement like that of Myliobatis, but which are mostly separated in the specimen. These con- sist of longer ones of a median series, and smaller ones of the lateral series. The teeth of the median series are shorter than in the typical forms referred to Myliobatis, having rather the proportions characteristic of Zygobatis. They differ from the corresponding teeth in both genera in being exactly parallelogrammic in outline ; that is, the extremities are truncated instead of angulated as in those genera.* The lateral teeth display the usual an- gulation among themselves, though doubtless joined by a straight suture to the middle row. The roots are well distinguished from the crowns, and are short. Their grooves are very shallow, or merely indicated. The triturating surface is covered by a dense layer which is wrinkled like the sides of the crown, and is continuous with it. Char, specif. The teeth are robust and indicate a species of considerable size. The crowns are considerably more elevated than the roots, and have perpendicular sides. The sutural surfaces are straight, and marked by fine grooving which runs at right angles to the grinding face, and is continu- ous with the wrinkling of the latter on the long sides of the crown. From this it follows that the wrinkling crosses the grinding face at right angles to its long diameter. There are in the wrinkling six ridges to a millimeter. The roots are constricted from the crowns by a groove, which is itself divided by a narrow collar-like rib, resembling cement, which is ex- pressed on the junction of two pieces by pressure, grown cold. The sizes of the teeth diminish externally. The roots of those of the antepe- nultimate are crossed by four shallow grooves, and those of the penulti- mate by two. External row lost. Six grooves cross the root of one of the larger teeth. Measurements. M. (transverse 024 anteroposterior 013 vertical 021 Vertical diameter of root of do 006 •Que end of one of the large teeth has the usual two face?. J 885.] u I Cope. Diameters of root of antepenult tooth Diana, of root of penultimate of row Measurements. M. transverse 015 anteroposterior .010 transverse 007 anteroposterior . . .010 From Maria Farinha, Province of Pernambuco. Probably of Fox Hills or Maestrichtian Cretaceous age. Coll., No. 306. Enchodus sub^equilateralis, sp. nov. This species is represented by a prernaxillary bone bearing the long laniary tooth characteristic of the genus, and by another osseous fragment bearing a similar tooth, which may perhaps belong to the distal part of the dentary bone. I describe the first-named specimen. The fragment of the prernaxillary is so small that little can be said of it, except that its surface is smooth, and but slightly convex, and that it projects but little beyond the long tooth. The tooth is long and slender, and has a very slight sig- moid fore and aft curvature. It has two opposite cutting edges, the ante • rior of which reaches to its base, and the posterior for half of its length. The inner face of the tooth begins to be more convex than the external at about the middle of its length, but this convexity is not much marked beyond the basal fourth. The surface of the tooth is smooth everywhere. This species is readily distinguished from such species as E. mortoni, where the edges are not opposite. From the E. carinatus and E. gladiolus, where the edges are opposite, the smooth surface separates it. In the allied E. doliclius* the posterior cutting edge only extends one-quarter the length of the tooth. Length of crown M. .022 ; diameters at middle, long, .004 ; short, .0023. DlPLOMYSTUS LONGICOSTATCS, Sp. nOV. This herring is represented by numerous specimens, and possesses well- marked characters. These may be stated in general thus: The caudal part of the vertebral column is very short. The abdomen is very deep and the ribs are long. The caudal fin is deeply forked, and has long acute lobes. The other fins are very small. The scales are so attenuated as not to be countable. The scutes of the median dorsal line are longer than wide, and are emarginate behind, and hence cordate. The superior surface of two of them is roughened with radiating ridges. The inferior surfaces are smooth. None behind the dorsal fin. The dorsal outline rises gradually to the dorsal fin, and then gradually descends to the caudal peduncle. The general convexity is slight. On the other hand the abdominal convexity is very great, and is especially protuberant below the dorsal fin. The depth at this point enters the total length, minus the caudal fin, one and five-sixth times. The length of the head enters the same three times. The superior surface of the head *See Report on Cretacequs Vertebrata of the West, E. D. Cope, p. 300. Cope.] * [April 17, slopes gently from the dorsal line ; hence the pectoral outline is very steep. The head is a good deal injured in the typical specimen, but it is somewhat longer than deep. The middle of the base of the pectoral fin is half-way between the ver- tebral column and pectoral border inclusive. The dorsal fin begins along the anterior border of the fourteenth vertebra. It is elevated in front, and, having a short base, has a rapidly descending posterior outline. The anal fin originates much behind the posterior border of the dorsal. It is also short and weak. Formula, D. 10 ; C. -f 18 -f ; A. 8. Vertebrae, Abd. 24 ; C. 10 ; only one included between the external caudal rays. Neural and haemal spines weak and rather short. Ribs long and robust. Abdom- inal scuta rather large, and with a free posterior accumination. The sup- plementary ribs, if they ever existed, are not preserved. Ventral fins lost from the typical specimen. Measurements. M. Total length (axial) 126 Length to basis of caudal fin 096 Depth at free edge of operculum 044 " " " " " dorsal 1st ray 055 " " " " " anal " " 020 Length of dorsal fin \ in front 016 (. on base 014 Length of anal finjiafront 007 *- on base 010 Length of a caudal lobe from base 035 " " abdominal vertebrae 056 " " caudal " 020 The specimens are from the coast near Bahia. The type comes from near Itacaranha, where it was found by Mr. Joseph Mawson. Other specimens are from the same locality, while others are from Plataforma and Agua Comprida. In none but the type do I find the dorsal scuta pre- served. This genus has hitherto been only known from the Lower lacustrine Eocene of North America. Its occurrence in this supposed marine forma- tion indicates that, like its close ally Clupea, Diplomystus has considerable range in time and space. The D. longicostatus falls into the section of the genus represented by D. humilis Leidy. From this and the allied D. altus, it differs in the more numerous abdominal and less numerous caudal ver- tebrae, and the longer lobed more deeply furcate caudal fin. Ciiiromystus mawsoni, gen. et sp. nov. This new genus and species are indicated by a single large specimen from the same horizon as the Diplomystus longicostatus. It is nearly com- plete, with the important exception that the head and a few anterior dor- sal vertebrae are wanting. The impression of the scapular arch, however, gives the position of the skull, and the anterior ribs give a clue tp the 1885.] ° [Cope. character of the anterior dorsal vertebrae. From these it appears that the genus is Isospondylous and not Plectospondylous. Char. gen. Dorsal fin small, above the anal, which is moderate. Pecto- ral fin with several superior rays thickened and robust. Caudal fin fur- cate. Ventrals small. No ventral or dorsal scuta. Scales much attenua- ted. No basilar interneurals or haeinals. This genus may belong either to the Hyodontidm or CMrocentridm so far as the characters given by authors are concerned, since the only distinc- tions given are found in the soft parts. I have pointed out* that the parie- tals are in contact, and the caudal fin embraces two vertebrae in the Hyo- dontidcB, while in the Chirocentridce the parietals are separated by the supra- occipital, and there is but one caudal-fin vertebra as in the Clupeidm. I can only observe the caudal fin in Chiromystus, and find that it includes two vertebrae, as in the Hyodontidm. Char, specif. The form is rather elongate. The depth of the longest ribs, and vertebra corresponding, enter the length, exclusive of the head and caudal fin, four and a third times. Vertebrae, Abd. 28 ; C. 22. The anterior dorsals are obtained by counting the ribs, and three are added to the caudals visible, in order to fill up an interruption caused by fracture. The centra are longer than deep, and have two lateral longitudinal fossae, bounded above and below by a narrow rib, and separated by a flattened rib. The posterior part and apex of the dorsal fin are wanting, so that its characters cannot be given, except by stating that the rays are slender and weak. The anal fin is injured at its posterior extremity, but by counting the interhaemal bones I find the rays to number sixteen. The four superior pectoral rays are very robust, the inferior most so. The three upper are preserved, and it can be seen that they are compressed and smooth, and not segmented. The caudal fin is very deeply forked, and the lobes are long. Each one consists of six strong external rays, besides the fulcral rays, and a number of very fine rays on the inner side of these, giving each lobe a narrow form. The scales are extremely attenuated, and cannot be counted. The ventral fins are quite small, and the rays may not all be preserved, although those that are visible are in place. They number only four. Measurements. M. Length of vertebral column 310 " " a lobe of the caudal fin 100 " from base of ventral to base anal 081 " " " anal to base caudal 085 " " " " dorsal to base caudal 063 " superior spine pectoral fin 065 of ventral fin 027 Diameters of last abdominal vertebra \ longitudinal. .. .008 c vertical 0075 • Proceedings Anier. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Vol. xx, p. 333. Cope.] t> [April 17, The specimen was obtained near Agua Coraprida, near Bahia, by Mr. Joseph Mawson. I dedicate the species to him with much pleasure, in recognition of the valuable service rendered by his collection in the pres- ent investigation. PVCNODUS FLABELIiATUS, Sp. nOV. A slab of limestone contains a skeleton of this fish, but the latter is in several points imperfect. The head anterior to the orbit is wanting, and the superior half of the anterior dorsal region is broken away. The ven- tral fins are lost. Some isolated teeth are of the proper size to belong to this species, and will be mentioned later. The outline of the profile of the body is discoidal, and the axis of the skull (vomer, etc.) is directed obliquely downwards at an obtuse angle with the vertebral column. This requires an extensive production of tbe operculum above and posterior to its articulation with the hyomandibular. The clavicle is slender, while the coracoid is produced backwards be- low the pectoral fin, its superior border being concave to the first rib, which is overlapped by the posterior edge. The coracoid also extends downwards and forwards as usual. The four basilar bones of the pectoral fin are rod-like, and are moderately expanded distally. The determina- tion of this point is of much importance in fixing the position of the Pyc- nodontidce in the system. The basis of the dorsal and ventral fins de- scend steeply downwards to a narrow and very short caudal peduncle. The caudal fin is of characteristic form. Its lobes are long, but they di- verge so widely that the posterior edge of the fin is slightly convex from tip to tip. Radii, D. 53 ; C. 3 + 40 + 2 ; A. 24. The constitution of the vertebral column is not easy to make out. Only the anterior half is preserved. This displays the usual superior and inferior plates. In the present species the edges of these are in contact, so that the condition of the centrum, if there be any, as to ossification, is not posi- tively determinable. The neural spines above their basal expansions are connected by a series of longitudinal teeth which interlock closely so as to resemble a series of ribs. On examination it is found that half of these originate from one neural arch, and half from the other, there being six or seven in all. A slight protuberance, probably for the rib-head, ap- pears 3 mm. below them. The true ribs are broadly alate, so as to form a continuous wall. The rhabdopleurs agree in number with the vertebra;, and are present to the end of the vertical fins. On the caudal region they extend downwards .66 the length of the haemal spines. The latter ex- tend to the superior apices of the interhamials. The rhabdopleurs are not segmented as is represented in some species of this family. The caudal fin includes one or two vertebrae. There are two short, widely ex- panded hypurals, much as in Physoclystous fishes where they are distinct. Vertebra;, D. 19 ; C. 15 or 16. Measurements. M. Total length to anterior edge of orbit 172 Longitudinal diameter of orbit 016 7 1885-1 [Cope. Measurements. M. Distance from orbit to free edge of operculum 022 Length of vertebral column 116 t^. . c t i ^ (anteroposterior 027 Diameters of caudal fin < . * nnn ( vertical 093 Depth above rib-heads at front of dorsal fin 055 " below hsenial plates, front of anal fin 044 The teeth preserved are loose medians, and perhaps laterals, but the reference of the latter is uncertain. The crowns of the former are a little more tban twice as wide as long, and have the extremities a little oblique. The summit is a little flattened, and the sides project a little beyond the base. The surface smooth. Length, M. .010 ; width, .0045. The peculiar form of the caudal fin distinguishes this species from most of the known members of the family Pymodontidw. The feeble dorsal and anal fins distinguish it from others, and the discoidal form from still others. The structural characters observed in the specimen described have been instructive, especially those of the pectoral fin. These confirm alto- gether my reference of the family of the Pycnodontidce to the Isospondyti as distinguished from the HalecomorpM.* The typical and only specimen of this species in the collection is from the southern centre of the Province of Sergipe del Key. It is on a slab of cream-colored calcareous rock which has a coarse slaty cleavage, and probably belongs to the Cretaceous formation, and is of marine origin. ? BATRACHIA. Stereosternum tumiduii, gen. et sp. nov. Char, gen., etc. This genus is known from numerous vertebrae and ribs, sometimes forming consecutive series, but more frequently isolated ; but especially from two slabs, which exhibit the posterior part of a skeleton ; i. e., dorsal vertebrae and ribs, pelvis and posterior limbs, and caudal ver- tebrae. The dorsal vertebrae present some of the general characters of the rep- tiles and batrachians of the Permian period. One of these is the existence of a notochordal canal. The small size of the vertebral centrum as com- pared with the arch and its appendages constitutes a resemblance to the batrachian class ; as also do the horizontal position and weak development of the zygapophyses. On the other hand the simple articulation of the ribs resembles that of the Lacertilia in general, though not of any known group of that order ; and has no resemblance to any known reptile of the Carboniferous period. The vertebral articular surfaces are both funnel-shaped, the anterior deeply, the posterior shallowly excavated. The dorsal centra are undi- * On the classification of the Extinct Fishes of the Lower Types. Proceeds. Araer, Assoc. Adv. Science, 1S7S, p. 292. Cope.] o [April 17, vided, and the notochordal canal is small. The caudal vertebra have a groove, more or less obliterated by coosification, surrounding the middle of the centrum, and cutting off a part of the base of the neural spine above. This looks as though the genus possesses intercentra, which were primi- tively separated by the protovertebral fissure. The posterior part of the cen- trum carries chevron bones, which are distinct from it. Besides the zyga- pophyses, there is, in the dorsal vertebrae, a modified form of zygosphen, though there is no zygantrum. The former consists of a roof-like projec- tion of the neural arch above each prezygapophysis, which is applied to the superior surface of the postzygapophyses. In some of the vertebrae, this zygosphenal roof is horizontal ; in others it is slightly oblique, rising out- wards on each side, in the manner of a true zygosphen. It differs further from a true zygosphen in being fissured vertically, above the neural arch, but there is no corresponding process of the adjacent vertebra to occupy it. On the contrary there is a corresponding fossa of the posterior side of the vertebra in front. These fossae may be points of insertion of ligaments which strengthen an articulation otherwise weak. The ribs appear to be coossified with the centra, so that it is difficult to say whether they are truly ribs or diapophyses. In one specimen, the proximal ends of the ribs are seen to be expanded, and applied to the cen- trum so as to embrace it. These expanded extremities are simple and are separated on the median line of the centrum by a narrow space. Others are not so expanded proximally, but contract to their connection with the cen- trum. In some of the centra each side is produced into a depressed coni- cal apex in the position of a diapophysis. The position of these vertebrae is uncertain. The ribs are long, cylindric, curved and remarkably robust, having characters like those of the genus Ischyrosaurus of the Laramie formation, or of Mesosaurus of Gervais. They could not have had any movement on the vertebrae. The scapular arch is represented by a coracoid bone, which though isola- ted, is lying on a slab with numerous remains of this genus. As no other form is represented on the slab, I suppose the coracoid to belong to Stereo- sternum. It is expanded fore and aft, most so posteriorly, and possesses a supracoracoid foramen. Its internal border presents a deep notch oppo- site the glenoid cavity. Portions of several humeri are preserved. They demonstrate either that the head is subround, or that if expanded it is at right angles to the distal end. The latter is perforated near one of its borders by an epicondylar foramen, but whether entepicondylar or ectepicondylar, I cannot ascer- tain. The opposite foramen is represented by a shallow groove at the dis- tal end of the opposite side. There are no well marked condyles of the humerus. The head of the femur is truncate and subround, and without trochan- ter. The shaft is subround and is of considerable length. There are no distinct condyles, but the articular surface is convex anteroposteriorly. The tibia is a stouter bone than the fibula, and its distal extremity is ex- Q 1885.] ° [Cope. paneled outwards. Its tarsal articular suface forms an acute angle with the long axis of the shaft, presenting outwards. It has besides a slight distal transverse truncation. The fibula has a robust head and is slender distally. The tarsus consists of seven bones. These are a tibiale, an in- termedio-centralo-fibulare, and a tarsale corresponding to each of the five metatarsals. There is a foraminal notch on the internal edge of the inter- medio-centralo-fibulare, next to the tibiale. The bones of the foot beyond the tarsus are well distinguished from each other. The metatarsals are rather slender, and are considerably longer than the phalanges of the first row. The phalanges are not much shortened, but diminish in length regularly to the end. The ungual phalanges are not preserved in a per- fect condition on any of them. The proximal portion remains on the second digit, and it is depressed, offering no indication of a claw. The first toe is not shortened, and appears to be longer than the second. Its distal segments are lost. Neither the metatarsals nor the phalanges have distinct condyles, but are truncate in the vertical direction. Abdominal protective armature is present in the form of osseous rods. Several of these rods form a single girdle. They are not connected with the ribs. The pelvis is partially preserved in the specimen on the slab. Both pubes and ischia are well developed, and if there is any obturator foramen it is very small and median in position. It probably does not exist, but I am precluded from certainty by the condition of the specimen at the point of crossing of the median and transverse sutures. The pubis is not so large as the ischium, and has a foramen near its posterior border. The ilia have less transverse, and greater longitudinal expanse than the pubes, and are in contact on the middle line throughout most of their length. Affinities. It is not easy to decide as to the position of this genus. While many of its characters are reptilian, some of them are batra- chian. Of especial interest in this connection is the structure of the pel- vis. Its characters are only like those of some of the Urodele Batrachia, and the Theromorphous Reptilia. It is, however, quite certain that it does not belong to any known family of either class. The vertebrae might be those of a Theromorph reptile, and the pelvis also agrees with that of those animals. The abdominal rods are found in species of that order referred to the genus Theropleura. The ribs and tarsus are however of an en- tirely different type. The former would refer the genus to the Rhyncho- cephalia or the Sauropterygia, and there is nothing known in its structure which positively forbids either reference, unless it be the character of the pelvis. It differs from the types of the Batrachia which it most resem- bles, the Protonopsidoa, in the replacement of the cartilaginous plate which represents the pubis by two osseous plates. It presents a near resemblance in important characters to the genus Ichthycanthus* which * I refer to the Ichthycanthus ohiensis from the description and from memory, as the specimen is not at present accessible. The I. platypus is one of the Rhach- itomi, and has in the tarsus, astragalus, calcaneum, navicular, and five dis- tinct tarsals of the second row. PROC. AMEB. PIIILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. R. PRINTED SEPTEMBER 20, 1885. Cope.l 10 [April 17, I described from specimens procured by Professor Newberry, in the coal measures of Linton, Ohio.* The peculiar structure of the tarsus is identical as to the number of its elements, and the other characters agree in general. There are important differences also, which would refer Ichthycanthus to another family. Thus the dorsal vertebrae have the centra deeper than long, and the ribs are free. In the absence of the skull, it is not possible to be sure as to which of the classes, Reptilia and Batrachia, these genera represent. Another form presents some important points of resemblance ; that is the genus Mesosaurus of Gervais.f The M. tenuidens Gerv. was brought by Verreaux from an undetermined formation of Griqualand, South Africa. The specimen, like that of the Stereosternum tumidum, is exposed on a slab, and embraces only the head, neck, thorax and anterior limbs. As the dorsal vertebra? are obscured by matrix the only point in which actual comparison can be made is the ribs. These are quite identical in the two types, but the articulations with the vertebral centra are invisible in the Mesosaurus. There are apparently impressions of abdominal dermal rib- lets, but they are suspected by Gervais to be the tracks of Annelids. Ger- vais thinks the skull has but a single condyle. The scapular arch consists of coossified scapula and coracoid, but clavicle, prsesternum and sternum are not visible. The coracoid is different in form from that of Stereoster- num. The humerus is, on the other hand, almost identical, and the carpus is nearly what one would expect to find in the Brazilian form. There are in the first carpal row, two large bones, and in the second, four small ones. Habits. — The structure of the limb articulations and those of the ele- ments of the posterior foot show that this was a genus of aquatic habits. The firm attachment of the ribs shows further that this type had no inter- costal respiration, but used its sublingual or its abdominal muscles, or both, in the act of inhaling air. We may suppose that in its aquatic habi- tat it retained air in the lungs for considerable periods, and only respired on reaching the surface of the water ; or later investigation may show that it is branchiate. Geological position. — The peculiar characters of this form and the diffi- culty of determining its true position in the system, present an obstacle to the interpretation of its probable geological age. It has a good many resemblances to the suborder Choristodera of the order Khynchoce- phalia (represented by the Champsosauridse). This type first appears in the Laramie or latest Cretaceous, and continues only to the top of the lower Eocene. The order Rhynchocephalia is an unsatisfactory one for geological purposes. It still exists in one genus, the llatteria of New Zea- land, and may have existed in the Trias ; although this is not certain. Prof. Derby informs me that some specimens of Schizodus have been found in the same beds, and he therefore iufers that their age may belong ♦Proceedings Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1887, p. 573. tUeuerul Zoology and Paleontology. 1885.] -*--*- [Cope. to the Coal Measures or to the Permian. There is nothing in the charac- ters of the genus Stereosternum to contradict such a supposition. The primitive characters of various parts of the skeleton and the obvious re- semblances to Ichthycanthus, add probability to such a view. Specific characters. — These may be first drawn from the specimen of the slab already alluded to. The relative length of the body is not certainly known, as it is only par- tially preserved in the specimens sent by Prof. Derby. To judge from the one above referred to, it has the ordinary proportions of a lacertilian. The hind legs are well developed, as for example in an Iguana. The tail is well developed, but its length is not determinable as the distal por- tions are lost. In the slab specimen the dorsal vertebrae are split or otherwise damaged, so that I describe them preferably from other specimens. The few that are well preserved show characters identical with the latter. I derive the fol- lowing however from the slab specimen. The dorsal vertebra? have the neural spines well developed but not much elevated. In profile their ver- tical diameter is about equal to their anteroposterior, and the superior bor- der is squarely truncate. They diminish in height posteriorly. The spines are present at the lumbar vertebra?. The shafts of the ribs have a round section. The proximal portions are for a short distance abruptly incurved to the vertebral body. The distal extremity is pointed. The tissue is dense, and there is no medullary cavity. In the lumbar vertebra? the rib is much more slender, and is shorter. It is coossified with the centrum. The caudal vertebrae have strong diapophyses, which are acuminate and de- pressed. In the anterior caudals they are recurved at the extremity, but shorten rapidly posteriorly and are transverse. In the specimen they are all separated from the centrum by a fissure which appears to be too constant and too regular to be regarded as a fracture. I suspect therefore that the diapophyses are free, and are joined to the centrum by a simple truncate head, which has an outline nearly round. This view is confirmed by the presence on each side of the centrum of the median caudal vertebra?, of a bone which resembles the sesamoids of the feet of Mammalia, which is quite free from the centrum, and is applied longitudinally to its anterior half. It is probably the rudimental diapophysis. The posterior caudals have no diapophyses. The latter are the only ones in the specimen which are well preserved. The bodies of the caudal vertebra? have a low ridge in the place ot the fissure which is seen in some other specimens to divide them into equal an- terior and posterior halves. The entire centrum is longer than deep or wide, and is a little deeper than wide in section. The neural arch is divided into two parts by the characters of the surface. The anterior half is swollen and roughened by minute pits, and is separated from the less prominent posterior half by a pair of small fossa?, one above the other. The neural spine stands entirely on the posterior half, and is thus widely removed from the prezygapophysis, which is above the anterior border of Cope.] 1^ [April 17, the centrum. The neural spine is slender and rather elevated, and is sub- cylindric at the base, and has a narrow compressed apex, with rounded extremity. The chevron bones are quite slender. The shaft of the femur is nearly straight, and its distal half is moderate- ly compressed from before backwards. The tibia is generally flattened. Its interosseous border is shorter than its internal border, and is strongly concave. The internal border is gently convex. The shaft is narrower than the proximal end, which is narrower than the distal end. The fibula has an enlarged subtriangular head. The shaft is gently curved, the concav- ity being, as in the case of the tibia, on the interosseous side. The inter - medio-calcaneum, or, according toBaur's view, the astragalocalcaneum, is much the largest bone of the foot. It has a truncate side in contact with the tibia, and a concave interosseous border. The rest of the outline is con- vex, with a slight truncation for the fibula, and one between the tibial border and the posterior notch. The greatest extent of the bone is trans- verse, and the greatest longitudinal diameter is in line with the fibula. The tibiale has a T-shaped outline, but the spaces below the transverse extrem- ity and the shaft are filled to the truncate narrower extremity of the shaft. The wide end also has the angles rounded off. The tarsals of the second row are longitudinal wide ovals, excepting the first, or internal, which is round. The extremities of the metatarsals are depressed ovals, and are wider than the middle of the shafts. The phalanges are more depressed. The metatarsals and phalanges of the fifth digit are the shortest, and the lengths of these elements steadily increase to the first. The phalanges of the first digit are lost excepting the first ; and the ungual pbalanges of the third, fourth and fifth are wanting. Adding the latter, we have the following number of phalanges for the digits from the second to the fifth conclusive, 4_4_4-3. The anterior border of the pubes is concave, leaving a lateral convex border in front of the acetabulum. The pubes of opposite sides meet at an entrant right-angle. The external posterior angles of the ischia are rounded and prominent, since the posterior borders are oblique and meet each other at a deep entrant right-angle. Measurements of slab specimen. M. Length of a series of five consecutive dorsal vertebra. .041 Length of second of this series 007 Elevation " " " 015 Length of neural spine of do 0065 Elevation " " " to neural canal 009 Diameters of a vertebra without spine \ l n „ <- transverse 0105 Diameters of separate centrum of do. < nJ* t- trans verse 004 Length of chord of a rib ; apex restored 040 Width of shaft of do. at middle 0035 Diameters of a pubis Diameters of an ischium 1885.1 [Cope. Measurements of slab specimen. M. Elevation of a lumbar vertebra with spine 017 " " spine of do 006 Width of centrum at base of ribs , 0075 Length of rib 0152 anteroposterior 014 transverse 0176 anteroposterior 019 transverse 012 Length of femur 038 Diameters of shaft of femur at middle 004 Length of tibia 025 (proximal 005 at middle 003 distal 0055 Width of sole, including tibia and fibula 0125 " " intermediocalcaneum 009 Lengthof " at middle 006 "tibiale 007 Width " " 005 Length " tarsale 1 0038 " II 0040 " ", metatarsale 1 0175 II 016 III 014 IV...., 012 V 009 " " second digit, minus end of unguis 036 " " " " first phalange 0085 " " " " second phalange 004 " third phalange 0035 " " ten proximal caudal vertebrae 075 Transverse extent of diapophyses of second of do 040 Length of six distal caudal centra 047 Depth of one centrum of do 0037 Elevation of neural arch with spine 0115 " " " " without spine 003 A number of vertebras are preserved on fragments of a softer rock of darker color than the specimen above described. It is possible that they belong to another species of the genus, as I observe some peculiarity in the caudal vertebra. The base of the neural spine is so robust as to cover the anterior section of the centrum, and does not therefore present the appear- ance of coming off from the posterior section alone, as is the case in the typical specimen. I have, however, not seen the arches of the anterior caudals of the latter. A marked character of the dorsal vertebras, is the appearance of hyperos- Cope.] 14: [April 17, tosis presented by the neural arch and its parts, and in some degree by the centrum. The outline of the latter viewed from below is barrel -shaped, and the space between the inferior surface of the centrum and the extrem- ity of the diapophysis is filled with osseous tissue, so as to be bounded by a nearly straight line connecting the points in question. The diapophyses, where not continued into ribs, are somewhat flattened cones. Tbe neura- pophyses are greatly thickened, having more than twice the transverse diameter of the small neural canal. The zygapophyses are mere ledges ; the prezygapophyses of the neurapophyses ; the postzygapophyses of the neural roof. The latter is expanded and thickened, an anterior thickening on each side, constituting the zygosphen. The neural spine is moderately a little elevated, and is compressed ; its base extending the length of the neural arch. The prezygapophyses are opposite the middle of the neural canal. The postzygapophyses are connected by a thin prolongation ot the roof of the neural canal, which is not interrupted in any of the ver- tebras at my disposal. The anterior caudal vertebra is flattened below, and has a median shal- low fossa. A large basis for a rib marks the upper part of the anterior half of the centrum, and below it is a low tuberosity. Between the latter, on the ? intercentral half, is a short accuminate tubercle directed forwards. The posterior articular face is supplemented by two facets below, as if for separate chevron bones. A more posterior caudal vertebra has a longer, and compressed centrum, without transverse processes or tubercles. The inferior surface has a ridge on each side, which are interrupted by the constriction already mentioned. Those of the posterior half are continued into coossified chevron bones. The postzygapophyses are more elevated on the dorsal vertebras, and the neural spine is robust and is directed strongly backwards. The surfaces of the dorsal vertebrae are smooth ; that of the anterior caudal is minutely punctate, and at some points wrinkled. Measurements of Vertebra. No. 1 (with rib). M. Total elevation 0125 Elevation of centrum anteriorly 0040 " to prezygapophysis 0055 " " zygosphen 0070 " " highest base of neural spine 0090 Width of centrum anteriorly 0035 " " prezygapophyses 0090 No. 2 (without ribs). Total elevation 0160 Length of centrum 0080 Elevation to neural canal posteriorly 0038 " "postzygapophyses 0058 " " neural spine 0100 1885.] ±tJ [Cope. Measurements of Vertebra,. No. 2 (without ribs). M. Width of centrum posteriorly 0040 ' ' at diapophyses inclusive 0180 " " postzygapophyses 0100 No. 3 (without rib). f longitudinal 0072 Diameters centrum \ vertical anteriorly 0035 (.transverse anteriorly 0035 Width at diapophyses inclusive 0170 ' ' of postzygapophyses , . .0094 No. 3 ; posterior caudal. Length centrum 0070 Width at middle 0035 ■r.. *•<•♦/ vertical 0040 Diameters centrum in front < nnAn ( transverse 0040 Elevation to postzygapophysis 0065 Width of neural spine at postzygapophysis 00G5 This species was probably of elongate form. Prof. Derby informs me that he has seen considerable series of consecutive vertebrae. The speci- mens sent me indicate that the size of the body is about equal to that of the fully grown Tejus lizards now inhabiting Brazil. The specimens are from four localities in the province of Sao Paolo ; viz : Rio Claro, Limeria, Itapetininga and Tiete. These localities are a considerable distance apart, and represent the considerable extent of the formation from which the bones have been procured. As a Lepidoden- dron and a Schizodus have been obtained from the same beds, they are probably of Carboniferous or Permian age. The specimen preserved on the slab belongs to the private collection of Madam Ribeira de Andrada, to whom science owes a debt of thanks for the opportunity of determining its characters which she has given by lend- ing it to the Museo Nacional. REPTILIA. Hypos aurxjs derbianus, sp. nov. The genus Hyposaurus has been hitherto represented by but one well known species, the H. rodgersi Owen, of the green sand of Cretaceous No. 5, of New Jersey. Specimens in my possession demonstrate that the genus Hyposaurus belongs to the Teleosauridse, and that its nearest ally is the Steneosaurus of St. Hilaire. It differs from Metriorhynchus Meyer, in the presence of distinct lachrymal bones, and in the relatively small size of the prefontals. From Teleosaurus proper it differs in the robust size and vertical directions of the teeth. The orbits are vertical, and the sagittal region is a keel. In the H. rodgersi the frontal bone is nar- rower than in any of the species of Teleosauridse figured or described by Cope.] It) [April 17, Deslongchamps. The palatal foramina extend forwards to the line of the posterior maxillary teeth, and the anterior border is rounded, not acute as in most of the species of the family.* The specimens are not sufficiently com- plete to enable me to state postively the generic distinction from Steneo- saurus. In Teleosaurus the vertebral hypapophyses only appear on the first and second dorsal vertebra, while, as Owen observes,! they are pres- ent on many of the dorsals in Hyposaurus. This peculiarity, and the great contraction of the frontal bone, render it very probable that the genus is distinct from Steneosaurus, but the diagnostic character yet remains to be discovered. The Brazilian Hyposaurus is represented in the collection of the Museo Nacional, by the left malar and quadratojugal bones ; by a nearly entire lower jaw ; by several vertebra? from the middle and posterior parts of the column ; by a humerus ; a coracoid bone ; and by several dermal bones, all belonging to one individual. There are several isolated teeth of the same animal, and others which probably belong to the same species, as they closely resemble those which are contained in the lower jaw mentioned. The mandibular rami early unite into a long slender symphyseal por- tion. There are twenty alveoli in each, and only five of these are in the portion of the ramus which is posterior to the symphysis. The free por- tion of the ramus is compressed ; both of them are broken off from the coro- noid region, inclusive, posteriorly. The symphyseal region has a semi- circular section, which is a little angulate ; that is, is flattened laterally and below. The splenial bones appear on the inferior surface as far anteriorly as opposite to the fourth tooth from the beginning of the symphysis. The teeth have a lenticular section in the posterior part of the series, and the section becomes rounder, that of the first pair being entirely round. All display a more or less distinct cutting edge in front, and one opposite to it on the posterior face of the crown. The enamel surface is marked with rather close, straight, longitudinal ridges on the internal side of the crown. The middle of the external side is quite smooth. The crowns are acute at the apex and slightly recurved. Those of the more posterior teeth are shorter, becoming little higher than wide anteroposteriorly. Measurements of Ramus and Teeth. M. Length of symphysis 336 Width at posterior end of symphysis 075 Depth " " " 037 ( transverse 037 Diameters symphysis at middle j vertical ^, [[.... .., .030 f tr&nsvcrsG • ••• .043 Diameters at second pair of teeth \ vertjcai 021 * These comparisons are rendered possible by the admirable monograph of these reptiles by M. Eudes Deslongchamps in Vol. x, Bulletin Soc. LinnCenne de Normandie, 1866. t Quarterly Journal, Qeol. Society, London, 1849, p. 383. STEREOSTERNUM TUMIDUM COPE 17 / 1885.1 Li |Cope. Measurements of Ramus and Teeth. M. Diameters of base of seventh J anteroposterior Oil tooth from end ( transverse 0085 Length of crown of a loose tooth (same animal) 0225 Diameters middle crown of a J anteroposterior 080 loose tooth ( transverse ~. . . .050 From these measurements it is evident that the anterior extremity of the lower jaw is not expanded. The teeth of the anterior pair are directed rather more anteriorly than exteriorly. At the symphysis a horizontal figure oo shaped fossa marks the junction of the splenial and dentary bones, and the inferior side of the former is grooved on the middle line tor 15 mm. in front of the symphysis. The malar bone is elongate and strongly compressed, showing the great obliquity of the os quadratum. It sends upwards a postorbital branch, which is external as in other Teleosauridae, and not internal as in Croco- dilidse. The surface is marked with shallow longitudinal fossae like those of the lower jaw. Length from postorbital branch to quadratojugal, upper edge, .120 ; lower edge, .165; depth at middle, .024; thickness, .010. In the most anterior dorsal preserved, the diapophyses are entirely on the neurapophyses. The articular faces of the centrum are shallowly concave, and the sides between them are flattened but not very concave. The hypapophysis has a long compressed base, which ceases 10 mm. an- terior to the posterior extremity of the centrum. The neurapophysial suture is very little decurved in the middle. The diapophysis displays a capitular articular process, with small facet, which originates just above the suture with the centrum. The tubercular facet is at the extremity of a robust process, whose posterior edge originates near the posterior edge of the neurapophysis, and is wide at the base, enclosing a fossa. A sec- tion of the base of the diapophysis is subquadrate, with the superior or anterior angle rounded, and the inferior anterior produced downwards and forwards for the base of the capitular portion, like the tail of a comma. The general form of the tubercular part of the diapophysis is subcorneal. A convexity proceeds from its anterior base, its continuation forming the lateral convex face of the prezygapophysis. The latter is small, and its superior or articular face is on a level with the roof of the neural arch, thus having a rather low position. The arch rises steeply to the neural spine. The latter is moderately elevated, and is much compressed and thin, having a narrow anterior edge, and a posterior edge not quite so nar- row. The summit is not thickened, as is the case in Teleosaurus cadomen- sis, according to Deslongchamps, and is wide anteroposteriorly. Both anterior and posterior edges of the spine are a little thickened, and are medially grooved for a short distance above the neural canal. The neural canal is ample, and is a little wider than high at its anterior extremity. In a dorsal vertebra near that last described in the series, the capitular part of the diapophysis is carried nearer to the tubercular portion, and the base of the two combined is less robust, the section having an elon- PROC. AMKR. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. C. PRINTED OCTOBER 10, 1885. Cope.] 1" [April 17, gate triangular outline, the base anterior. The capitular portion is still decurved so as to present below the tubercular, and is narrow. The pre- zygapophyses are small. The postzygapophyses are close together, and are separated by a deep groove. The articular faces are shallowly and equally concave, and are vertical to the long axis of the centrum. The hypapophysis occupies the anterior three-quarters of the middle line of the centrum. In a dorsal posterior to the one last described, the diapophysis is still more depressed at the base, which is oblique to the long axis by about 25°. The postzygapophyses are concave on their articular faces, the concavity extending as a shallow groove to the posterior base of the diapophysis. They are separated by a vertical groove of the base of the neural spine still deeper than in the vertebra last described. The centrum is less com- pressed than in those more anterior, and there is not even a keel to repre- sent the hypapophysis. The neural spine is less elevated than in the other dorsals described, and its summit is rounded off in front, and is compressed. The dorsal which precedes this one in the series is repre- sented by a centrum only. This has an inferior median angle represent- ing the hypapophysis. An anterior caudal has a diapophysis of medium length, depressed, and when viewed from above, displaying an outline of an elongate cone with truncate apex. The zygapophyses are fairly well developed, and the neural spine is large, especially anteroposteriorly. The chevron facets are large and close together. The median line of the inferior face of the centrum is concave. The articular faces of the centrum are slightly con- cave, and the anterior is deeper than wide. Measurements of Vertebra. M. Total elevation of No. 1 114 Diameters of centrum posteriorly \ ver ica I transverse 039 c vertical 0^7 Diameters neural canal posteriorly ] (transverse 023 From centrum to face of postzygapophysis 031 Length centrum at base neural canal 048 Anteroposterior width neural spine above postzyga- pophyses 040 ^ anteroposterior 049 Diameters centrum dorsal No. 2 1 vertical (front) 037 ' transverse (front) 038 Length diapophysis from base, below 038 Width at postzygapophyses, inclusive 030 {anteroposterior 048 vertical (behind) 040 transverse (behind) 040 Diameters neural canal posteriorly \ vert,cal 015 I- transverse 018 1885.] 1^ [Cope. Measurements of Vertebra. M. Elevation neural spine from canal 054 Length diapophysis below 038 Width at postzygapophyses 030 (anteroposterior 045 vertical (front) 037 transverse (front) 035 Length diapophysis below 033 Width at postzygaphyses 023 Length of base neural spine above postzygapophyses. . . .030 The coracoid bone has an expanded proximal extremity, which contracts on the external side abruptly, into a slender shaft which continues to the distal end, which is but little expanded. The coracoid foramen is well within the external border, and is small. The distal end is flattened below, and has a convex margin. The shaft has an oval section. This element is much more slender than in the Alligator mississippiensis, and even more so than in the Teleosaurus eadomensis, according to Deslongchamps. Measurements of Coracoid. M. Total length 165 Long diameter of proximal end 065 Thickness of proximal end at glenoid facet 023 Diameter of shaft \ vertical °J° c transverse 015 Width of distal end 0295 The humerus is rather elongate, and is but little curved. The head is directed a little inwards and forwards, and the condyles (which are lost) a little backwards. The section of the shaft is nearly round from below the deltoid crest to near the condyles. The head is flattened and its artic- ular extremity is convex and narrow. Near the internal border of the anterior side is a shallow fossa. The deltoid crest is elongate, and lies on the external edge of the posterior face. Its elevation increases distal, i. e., to a point nearly two-fifths the length from the head. Measurements of Humerus. M. Length of part preserved 220 Diameters of head 5 anteroposterior 019 C transverse 051 Diameters shaft 3 cm. below crest {anteroposterior... .025 ». transverse 027 General Remarks. — The characters of this species are much like those of H. rodgersi, so far as they are known. I observe the following differ- ences on comparison with several individuals of that species. The artic- ular faces of the vertebral centra, are less concave than in the Northern species. The symphyseal part of the mandible is a part of a cylinder in the H. rodgersi, while it is flattened below and at the sides in the Brazilian Cope.] -^ [April 17 species. The bones of the limbs are relatively less robust in the II. derbi- anus.* The differences, especially in the humerus, are well marked. I name this species in honor of Prof. Orville A. Derby, in charge of the department of Geology in the Museo National of Brazil. MAMMALIA. TOXODON EXPANSIDENS Sp. nOV. The incisors of the first and second places of the upper jaw, represent this species. Comparison with the corresponding teeth of the known species, reveals well-marked distinctive characters. The incisor of the median pair has greater transverse, and less antero- posterior, diameter than in any of the known species. Its diameters are uniform. The cutting edge is five and a half times as long transversely as it is auteroposteriorly. The anterior enameled face has two planes, a wide exterior one which is concave, and a narrower inner one which re- treats inwards, and is plane to the convex inner (median) edge. The enamel extends round the narrow external edge, but disappears at the middle of the inner beveled faces. The angle between the two faces forms a rib, parallel with the borders of the tooth. No enamel on the internal face. Enamel surface with rather coarse obsolete longitudinal grooves. The external incisor is a robust, prismatic, rodent-like tooth, strongly curved. Its section is triangular, the posterior (enameled) face being convex. The external face is flat, and its plane forms less than a right angle with the anterior face, from which it is separated by a convex inter- mediate surface. The prominence of the latter causes the anterior face to be slightly concave. The angle is the most prominent portion of the cut- ting edge. The enamel ceases a little short of the narrow internal edge of the tooth ; its surface is marked with obsolete longitudinal grooves. Measurements of Teeth. M. First incisor. r vertical 080 Diameters of crown J transverse 059 I . . fat middle Oil anteroposterior { L (- at angle 015 Width of internal level 022 Second incisor. (vertical on curve 150 transverse 033 anteroposterior (externally) 021 This species is as large as the Toxodon platensis Owen. As compared with that animal, the median incisors have much greater transverse ex- tent, and relatively smaller anteroposterior diameter. These teeth are ♦For figures of humerus and femur of IT. rodgersi, see Transac. Amer. Philos. Soc. xiv, PI. iv, figs. 10-11, 1879. 1886.] "■*■ rstokes. still more different from those of 1. burmeisteri. The external incisors are, on the other hand, more like those of the latter species in their trian- gular form, though their inner angle is not produced as in that species. Explanation of Plate. The figures represent the Stereosterum tumidum in various pieces ; all of the natural size excepting fig. 1, which is three-fourths natural size. • Fig. 1. The typical specimen on a slab of calcareous shale of the car- boniferous formation ; the anterior part of the skeleton wanting ; viewed from below, nc, notochordal canal exposed by the splitting of the verte- bral centrum. Fig. 2. Vertebrse in a piece of weathered rock of darker color than the slab. Fig. 3. A lumbar vertebra from the piece of matrix represented in fig. 2, anterior view ; a, inferior view Fig. 4. A caudal vertebra from the same piece of stone, left side ; a, in- ferior side. Fig. 5. A dorsal vertebra with proximal portions of ribs embracing the centrum ; from a different piece of matrix. Fig. 6. A vertebra of uncertain position, with descending processes, an - terior view ; a, the same lateral view. Fig. 7. Humerus, the proximal portion represented by a mould ; from a separate piece. Fig. 8. Coracoid bone from a separate piece. All the specimens are preserved in Museo National of Rio Janeiro, ex- cepting that represented in fig. 1, which is in the collection of Madame Ribeira de Andrada. Some new Hypotrichosis Infusoria. By Dr. Alfred O. Stokes. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, June 19, 1885.) Wet Sphagnum seems to be a favorite haunt for certain fresh-water pro- tozoa. Dr. Leidy found it an unfailing source of supply for many of the Rhizopoda, some of the most interesting forms described by that illustrious naturalist being obtained from a little bunch of the moss. In my own vicinage the beautiful plant is comparatively rare, but a single marsh of not extended dimensions does happily exist here, with the pale Sphagnum in some abundance greenly glimmering beneath the shallow water, while the shadows of elder, azalea and serviceberry, and the broad leaves of tangled smilax vines make the neighboring thicket dim and cool even when the hot sun smites the furrowed field that borders it. Among these pleasing surroundings the Rhizopoda are in numbers excelled only by the Infusoria, as the following previously undescribed forms testify. And it is Stokes.] 22 [june 19, a fact worthy of note that the greater proportion of the Infusoria thus far there obtained belong to one family, the Oxytrichidae of Ehrenberg. With the exception of certain forms mentioned in this paper, there are but four genera included in the Oxytrichidae without that posterior cluster of appendages named from their position the anal styles. Their presence or absence is therefore of diagnostic value. It is their absence that sep- arates Hemicycliostyla from Urostyla, which it otherwise closely resembles, even in form and movements. Its position in the family group is evidently lower than that of Urostyla, simply because these posterior ventral appen- dages have not been developed, Hemicycliostyla (jj/j-ckukXco^^ semicircular; aruluq^ a style), gen. nov. Animalcules free-swimming, more or less elongate-ovate, soft, flexible and elastic, the extremities rounded ; frontal styles twenty or more, arranged in two more or less semicircular rows ; adoral ciliary fringe beginning near the center of the right-hand side of the peristome-field ; ventral surface entirely clothed with fine setae arranged in closely approximated longitu- dinal rows ; anal styles absent ; contractile vesicle single or double ; nucleus multiple. Hemicycliostyla sphagni, sp. nov. (Figl). Body elongate-ovate, soft, flex- ible and extensile, four times as long as broad, widest behind the center ; tapering to the rounded posterior extremity and to the convex, narrower frontal extremity which is curved toward the left-hand side ; frontal styles about twenty, in two semicircular rows ; marginal setae not differing from the ventral, scarcely projecting beyond the body-margin except at the posterior border ; peristome-field confined to the anterior third of the ven- tral surface, the right-hand margin ciliate and bearing a membrane ; ado- ral cilia short ; nucleus multiple, the nodules ovate or subspherical, small, numerous and scattered ; contractile vesicle double, spherical, placed near the left-hand side of the anterior body-half ; anal aperture dorsal, near the posterior extremity ; parenchyma vacuolar ; hispid dorsal setae small. Length of body 1-50 to 1-60 inch. Habitat. — Marsh water, with Sphag- num. There is another form (Fig. 2) resembling this in a general way, but readily distinguishable from it, not only in shape and size, but chiefly by the presence of a single contractile vesicle, the greater abundance of the nuclear nodules, the absence of vacuolar spaces within the endoplasm, and the development of a conspicuous series of par-oral cilia on the inner edge of the left-hand border of the peristome-field. The body is also less extensile than in H. sphagni, and the Infusorian is somewhat less active in its movements. In both the endoplasm is usually made dark and almost opaque by the great quantity of granular matter crowding it centrally. Hemicycliostlya trichota, sp. nov. (Fig. 2). Body elongate-ovate, some- what extensile, about three times as long as broad, widest posteriorly, ta- pering to the anterior extremity, which is slightly curved toward the left- hand side ; frontal styles and ventral setae essentially as in H. sphagni; peristome-field confined to the anterior half of the ventral surface, a series 1885.] £S [Stokes. of par-oral cilia developed on the left-hand margin, a membrane and a pra3-oral ciliary fringe on the right-hand border ; nucleus multiple, the nodules small, ovate or sub-spherical, scattered throughout the entire body ; contractile vesicle single, spherical, near the center of the left-hand side of the peristome-field; immotile hispid dorsal setae very small and fine ; par- enchyma not vacuolar. Length of body 1-60 inch. Habitat. —Marsh water, with Sphagnum. In Urostyla gigas (Fig. 3) we have the largest member of the genus and a giant among Infusoria. Its movements too are correspondingly slow, with much doubling and twisting of the body. And its appetite seems also in proportion to its size, very little that can be forced through the oral aperture coming amiss, even angular grains of sand being occasionally swept into the endoplasm. The parenchyma is as conspicuously vacuolar as in Hemicycliostyla sphagni, the trabecular structure being most extensively developed at the extremities. This condition is constant, none of the numerous individuals observed being without it. In appearance it resembles the similar condi- tion of the parenchyma in Loxodes rostrum Ehr. and Trachelitis ovum Ehr., probably being nearer that of the former, inasmuch as the pseudo-cellular structure does not vary in the same individual, at least while under obser- vation, whereas in Trachelius ovum changes in size, position and arrange- ment of the trabecular are frequently made under the eye of the investi- gator, and two individuals are seldom captured with precisely the same plan of vacuolar distribution. But with U. gigas from this vicinity, one arrangement seems quite general and constant. Whether this will obtain in others from a different locality is conjectural. The nuclei are wonderfully numerous. I have found it impossible to count them with the same result twice in succession, since they are not only irregularly distributed in different planes, but because the animalcule's writhing and twisting movements make such attempts impracticable. They number, however, from forty to sixty. That they are connected by a funiculus, either in the present forms or in Hemicycliostyla sphagni or H. trichota, I have been unable to ascertain. But if a connecting thread exists, it must be very frail, since the nuclear nodules float out freely and separately from the disintegrated dead body. Aside from these peculiarities the Inf usorian can be easily recognized by the arrangement of the double row of curved vibratile seta? on the poste- rior extremity. They add much to the creature's attractiveness, and when quiescent are about the first part of the great Infusorian to catch the eye. Urostyla gigas, sp. nov. (Fig. 3). Body elongate, extensile, very soft and flexible, when extended five times as long as broad, widest centrally, tapering toward both extremities, the posterior rounded and slightly curved toward the left-hand side, the anterior narrower, rounded and curved toward the right hand side ; frontal styles five or six ; ventral seta? clothing the entire lower surface in closely approximated lines ; anal styles six, small, slender, fimbriated, not projecting beyond the body ; marginal Stokes.] J& [June 19, setae longest and most abundantly developed about the posterior extremity, the right-hand border of which bears two oblique rows of long arcuate vibratile setae, one series originating on the dorsal surface ; peristome-field confined to the anterior one-fourth of the ventral surface, the right-hand border ciliate, and an endoral series depending centrally ; contractile vesi- cle single, spherical, on the left-hand side of the peristome-field ; nucleus multiple ; anal aperture opening on the dorsal surface at some distance from the posterior extremity ; parenchyma vacuolar ; hispid immotile dor- sal setae short. Length of extended body 1-30 inch. Habitat. — Marsh water, with Sphagnum. Another species of this same genus (Fig 4), resembling the preceding, yet sufficiently dissimilar to warrant the formation of a new specific title for its reception, is not uncommon in the Sphagnum. It, too, is compara- tively gigantic, but the general aspect, aside from minute structural char- acteristics, renders it readily recognizable. The posterior portion is pro- longed as a broad tail-like continuation, a feature thus far restricted to this member alone of the Urostylae. The right-hand postero-lateral border of this part supports a single series of long arcuate setae similar to the double row on V. gigas, the contractile vesicles are ten to twelve in number, and the peristomal structure is distinctive. To accurately ascertain the number of the pulsating vacuoles is almost as difficult as to count the number of nuclear nodules, but there are not less than ten nor more than twelve, their presence at once separating the Infusorian from all the species and making necessary a slight change in the generic diagnosis as it now stands. This form I have named Urostyla caudata. Urostyla caudata, sp. nov. (Fig. 4). Body elongate-elliptical, soft, flex- ible and extensile, five times as long as broad, widest centrally, the ante- rior extremity rounded and curved toward the left-hand side, the posterior portion narrowed into a straight, broad tail-like prolongation ; frontal styles about twenty ; ventral setae clothing the entire ventral surface in closely approximated longitudinal lines ; anal styles eight to ten, long, slender, in an oblique row, usually projecting beyond the body ; marginal setae projecting posteriorly and developed on the right-hand border of the posterior extremity as a single obliqie series of long arcuate setae ; peris- tome-field confined to the anterior third of the lower surface, the left hand margin finely ciliate in addition to the adoral fringe, the right-hand border bearing a membrane and a prae-oral ciliary series ; nucleus multiple, the nodules numerous, scattered ; contractile vesicles multiple, arranged in a row along the left-hand body-margin ; parenchyma vacuolar ; anal aper- ture opening on the dorsal surface near the posterior extremity. Length of body 1-40 inch. Habitat. — Marsh water, with sphagnum. Previously to the capture of the three forms ot Holosticha here referred to, but a single fresh-water species had been recorded. The structure of these additional sweet-water members of the genus will necessitate a change in the generic description, since the peristomal membrane, the increased number of frontal styles in Z7. hymmophora and U. similis, and the double Proc.Jhn..PhilSoc. . V? 121. Januart/ I8W Ha/) ob 'it ■// ovs Tnfuso / < a 1885.] ->& [Stokes. contractile vesicle of the former, have not been previously noticed, while a moniliforrn nucleus is thus far restricted to H. similis. Holosticha caudata, sp. nov. (Fig. 5). Body elongate, eight times as long as broad, soft and flexible, widest centrally, constricted near the apical extremity of the peristome-field, widened anteriorly, tapering pos- teriorly in a tail-like prolongation, the tip somewhat dilated and curved toward the right-band side ; anterior border rounded, lip narrow, cres- centic ; frontal styles three ; ventral setae in two straight median rows, those on the right-hand side largest ; anal styles five, slender, the extremi- ties often fimbriated ; marginal setae numerous, large, flattened, projecting and most abundantly developed at the posterior border ; peristome-field confined to the anterior one-fifth of the ventral surface, the right-hand margin finely ciliate and bearing an undulating membrane ; contractile vesicle single, spherical, near the left-hand side of the apical extremity of the peristome ; anal aperture dorsal near the beginning of the tail-like prolongation ; immotile dorsal hispid setae numerous, long and fine. Length of body 1-50 inch. Habitat. — Marsh water, with Sphagnum. In Holosticha hymenophora (Fig. 6), a sub-terminal anal aperture exists and has been noticed several times, but whether on the ventral or dorsal surface was impossible to positively determine, as the Infusorian in each instance happened to be rapidly rotating on the long diameter, and the aperture opened and closed before the focus could be changed. My im- pression, however, is that it is dorsal, and I have no hesitation in predict- ing that the cytopyge will be observed in that position, not only among those described in this paper where the dorsal position is the rule, but with many of the Hypotricha, even with those common and seemingly best- known forms in which so important a structural point ought to have been observed long ago. An instance occurs in Oxytricha platystoma (Ehr.) S. K., where the writer has seen the anal aperture on the dorsal surface at the left-hand side of the median line and some distance from the posterior extremity. That it should become developed on the upper surface is cer- tainly a satisfactory and a beautiful adaptation. The lower aspect is needed for the support of the ambulatory organs and anal styles, the pos- terior extremity is occupied by a luxuriant growth of marginal setae, with usually one or more supplementary rows of similar appendages, while the dorsum is either entirely naked or only the bearer of immotile hispid hairs, which can be temporarily crowded out of position, or even permanently displaced, without inconvenience or injury to the Infusorian. Holosticha hymenophora, sp. nov. (Fig. 6). Body elliptical, three to four times as long as broad, soft, flexible and somewhat extensile, narrowed anteriorly and slightly curved toward the left-hand side ; lip prominent, crescentic ; frontal styles five ; ventral setae in two straight closely approx- imated median rows ; the left-hand series beginning at the apical extremity of the peristome ; anal styles five, straight, slender, in an oblique row, the first or right-hand one slightly projecting beyond the body ; marginal setae longest and projecting posteriorly ; peristome-field extending for one-third PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. D. PRINTED OCTOBER 10, 1885. Stokes.] *fo [June 19, the length of the body, the right-hand border nearly straight, finely ciliate and bearing an undulating membrane ; contractile vesicle double, near the center of the left-hand body-margin ; nucleus double, ovate ; anal aperture sub-terminal, presumably dorsal ; immotile hispid dorsal setae short. Length of body, 1-125 to 1-150 inch. Habitat. — Shallow pools in early spring. The form which I have named Holosticha similis (Fig. 7), is readily dif- ferentiated from all other species by the moniliform nucleus. Usually the nodules are arranged in a single row, but individuals occur not uncom- monly with a double row, all the component nodules of each series tben being in contact laterally. Here also the anal aperture is dorsal. Holosticha similis, sp. nov. (Fig. 7). Body elongate-ovate, soft, flexible and somewhat extensile, more than four times as long as broad, the poste- rior extremity rounded, the anterior narrower, rounded, slightly curved toward the left-hand side ; peristome-field oblique, confined to the anterior third of the lower surface, narrow, ovate, the right hand margin ciliate; frontal styles about fourteen ; ventral setae in two straight median rows ; anal styles twelve to fourteen, slender, in a long oblique row, only the most posterior ones projecting beyond the body ; marginal setae conspicu- ous, longest, most abundantly developed and projecting at the posterior border ; contractile vesicle single, spherical, on the left-hand side of the apical termination of the peristome-field ; nucleus moniliform, the nodules ovate or subspherical, in a single or double row, placed near the left-hand body-margin ; anal aperture dorsal, near the posterior extremity ; dorsal inmotile hispid setae small and fine. Length of body, 1-130 inch. Hab- itat.— Marsh water, with Sphaghum. The following animalcule is rather slow in its movements, especially when in contact with debris or algal filaments, then resting for a time, commonly with the dorsal surface upward, a position giving the observer an opportunity to study the numerous hispid setae projecting from that part, but effectually concealing the more important arrangement of ventral styles and setae. When it has reversed its position, the ventral setae are seen to conspicuously differ in size in the two median rows, as well as in numbers. This difference is not uncommon in members of its genus (Uroleptus), but here it is unusually well marked. A similar difference also exists between the right and left-hand marginal setae, the former being abundant and remarkably flat. This is unusual. In many Infusoria the body is prolonged anteriorly as a narrow cres- cent, usually styled the upper lip. In many of these I believe this to be a continuation of the ventral plane and consequently to be in reality a lower lip. Such is the case with Uroleptus dispar, as shown in diagram- matic outline in figure 9. Uroleptus dispar, sp. nov. (Figs 8 and 9). Body elongate-oblanceolate, elastic, four to five times as long as broad, widest centrally, tapering pos- teriorly and terminating in a narrow, flattened, tail-like prolongation ; anterior region depressed ; frontal border rounded, the ventral surface 1885.] ** rstokes. prolonged anteriorly as a short, projecting crescentic lip ; peristome-field extending for about one-third the entire length of the body, the right-hand bolder ciliate and apparently having a narrow band-like undulating mem- brane ; ventral seta? in two median lines continued to the termination of the caudal prolongation, those of the right-hand series largest and most numerous ; marginal seta? large, projecting beyond the body-margin ante- riorly on the right-hand side, and about the caudal extremity where they are longest and most abundantly developed, those of the right-hand body margin largest and conspicuously flattened ; frontal styles three ; contrac- tile vesicle single, spherical, near the center of the left-hand border ; nucleus double, ovate ; dorsal aspect bearing a median and an uninter- rupted marginal series of immotile hispid setae ; anal aperture opening on the dorsal surface near the beginning of the caudal prolongation. Length of body, 1-180 to 1-150 inch. Habitat. — Fresh water. Another member of the preceding genus, whose habitat is the Sphagnum swamp, is so distinctive in form that the diagnosis and figure (Fig. 10) are alone needed for its recognition. It is one of the most active of all the usually frisky members of the genus, darting out of the field, frequently swimming backward at the moment, so as to make its study rather diffi- cult. It is very flexible and elastic, and at the same time one of the brightest, most graceful and beautiful of the handsome group. The extended body is delineated, in Fig. 10, as well as the absence of color, life and motion permit. Uroleptuslongicaudatus, sp. nov. Body narrowly sub-fusiform, elongate, about eight times as long as broad, extensile, widest centrally, tapering posteriorly to a long, narrow, attenuate tail-like prolongation forming one- third the length of the entire body ; anteriorly constricted into a neck- like portion, the frontal region expanded and rounded ; lip narrowly cres- centic ; frontal styles three ; marginal setae large, flattened, projecting, long est and most abundantly developed about the caudal prolongation and posterior extremity ; ventral setae in two closely approximated median rows, one only continued through the caudal prolongation ; peristome- field confined to the anterior fifth of the lower surface, the right-hand border bearing a narrow membrane ; contractile vesicle single, spherical, near the left-hand border of the neck-like constriction ; nucleus double, ovate ; anal aperture dorsal, near the beginning of the tail-like prolonga- tion ; hispid dorsal setae forming several longitudinal rows. Length of extended body, 1-120 inch. Habitat. — Marsh water, with Sphagnum. Among the Hypotrichous Infusoria canal-like contractile vesicles are comparatively rare, but a spherical pulsating vacuole with canal-like diver- ticula, somewhat resembling that of Stentor, has been observed only in the animalcule here referred to under the name of Eschaneustyla brachytona. In Spirostomum the canal-like contractile vesicle possesses an enlargement at its posterior termination ; in Stentor the single spherical vacuole gives off one branch which encircles the peristome-field, and another that extends along one lateral border, thus presenting a likeness to what obtains in this Stokes.] ^" [June 19, Hypotrichous animalcule, where the pulsating channel is interrupted by two spherical vacuoles. The proper position of the following Infusorian in a scheme of classifi- cation would probably be before the next one to be noticed, both then immediately preceding Uroleptus. From both the genera the anal styles are absent, and in Eschaneustyla the ventral setae, which are of vital im- portance in generic diagnosis, exhibit an arrangement not previously observed in the family group. In form it most nearly approaches Urostyla, for which it might readily be mistaken under insufficient amplification. Eschaneustyla (s^arta, the furthest part; avsu} without; arukoq, a style), gen. nov. Animalcules free-swimming, elliptical or ovate, not encuirassed ; frontal styles numerous, more or less uncinate ; ventral setae in three unequal longitudinal lines ; anal styles none ; marginal setae unin- terrupted ; contractile vesicle canal-like, near the left-hand border. Inhab- iting fresh water. Eschaneustyla brachytona, sp. nov. (Fig. 11). Body elongate-ovate, soft, flexible and somewhat extensile, three and one-half to four times as long as broad, both extremities usually rounded, the anterior the narrower, somewhat curved toward the left-hand side, a slight constriction beneath the frontal border ; peristome-field arcuate, narrow, oblique, confined to the anterior third of the ventral surface, the posterior termination widest, deepest and curved toward the right-hand side, the right-hand border finely ciliate ; frontal styles about twenty-five, in oblique lines, two or three supplementary styles forming the first row ; ventral setae in three unequal series, the right-hand row shortest, the central line longest but not extending to the posterior extremity ; no anal styles ; marginal setae unin- terrupted, longest and projecting at the posterior border only ; contractile vesicle canal-like, extending along the entire left-hand body-margin, inter- rupted anteriorly by two spherical or sub fusiform dilatations, one near the posterior termination of the peristome-field, the other near the center of the lateral body margin ; nucleus not observed ; anal aperture postero- terminal. Length of body, 1-112 to 1-150 inch. Habitat. — Standing water, with dead leaves. The last form to be here mentioned is one apparently bridging the space between Holosticha and Uroleptus. In general appearance, in the arrange- ment of the ventral appendages and the conspicuously flattened marginal setae it recalls the latter. The caudal appendage is not constant, therein differing from and separating the Infusorian from the invariably caudate Uroleptus. In this soft and variable posterior extremity it has a peculi- arity not possessed by the remainder of the body, and not possessed by any member of the highly organized group to which the creature belongs. This posterior extremity is changeable in form. When first observed the part may be conspicuously bifid, soon to give place to an obtusely pointed, a truncate or an evenly rounded tip, or, as seen in a single instance and illustrated in figure 13, one point of the bifurcation may be extended in a way to suggest a pseudopodium, with a bulbous termina- 1885.] "" [Stokes. tion, the whole to be finally withdrawn into a rounded, emarginate or otherwise modified border. Consequently the Infusorian has the ability, by the extrusion of a caudal prolongation, to come very close to a Uro- leptus, and by the withdrawal of the tail to return to its proper generic position. The lamelliform marginal setae, as they approach the posterior extremity, gradually leave the ventro-lateral border and are developed on the dorsal surface in a single row passing about the posterior part at a sbort distance from the margin. The utility of this arrangement it is difficult to imagine, unless it is to accommodate the anal aperture. Near the center of the dorsal aspect, in addition to the numerous, immotile hispid hairs arranged in longitudinal lines, there are developed three long flattened setae, volun- tarily vibratile and resembling those on the body-margin. Such an addi- tion to the dorsum of an Hypotrichous Infusorian has not been previously observed. If somewhat more luxuriantly developed, these dorsal appen- dages might, indeed in their present condition they do, lead to interesting suggestions in respect to the affinities of the Infusorian and its order with the Heterotricha. The large adoral cilia somewhat abruptly change their position in rela- tion to the peristome-field as they approach the center of the left-hand border, the free extremities of those most anterior being directed toward the body-margin, while the tips of the posterior ones are vibrated above the peristome-field, the alteration at the point of transition being quite sudden. I have long suspected that this might be the arrangement in other peristomal Infusoria, but have not been previously able to demon- strate it. In its movements the creature is erratic. Remaining for a time quietly lying with the ventral aspect upwards, suddenly with a lunge like that ot a microscopic cetacean it rolls over, and exposes the dorsal surface only to almost immediately begin a series of wild and grotesque backward tum- blings, varying these acrobatic performances by rapid backward swim- ming, occasionally throwing a backward somersault. It was the broad marginal setae and these curious movements that suggested the name as the flat-haired animalcule that tumbles over backward. Platytrichotus {^Xaruq^ broad ; rp^ioru^^ haired), gen. nov. Animal- cules free-swimming, soft and flexible, more or less flask-shaped, widest and inflated posteriorly, narrowest and depressed anteriorly, the ventral surface flattened ; frontal styles five, uncinate ; ventral setae in two straight median lines ; anal styles none ; marginal setae broad, flat, uninterrupted ; nucleus single ; contractile vesicle single, near the center of the left-hand border. Inhabiting fresh water. Platytrichotus opisthobolus, sp. nov. (Fig. 12). Body flask-shaped, less than three times as long as broad ; frontal margin rounded, lip narrow, crescentic ; posterior extremity soft and changeable in shape, obtusely pointed, emarginate, bifid, but usually evenly rounded ; frontal styles five ; ventral setae in two median rows, increasing in length posteriorly, those Genth.J 30 [Oct. 2, of the right-hand series largest and most numerous ; marginal seta? large, lamelliform, obliquely truncate, projecting beyond the right-hand body- margin, the posterior ones continued across the posterior part of the dorsal aspect ; peristome- field extending to the center of the ventral surface, the left-hand margin with a series of fine par-oral cilia, the right-hand border ciliate and bearing a membrane ; contractile vesicle single, spherical, near the center of the left-hand border ; nucleus single, large, ovate, in the posterior body-half ; anal aperture postero-terminal ; dorsal surface bear- ing numerous long hispid hairs in longitudinal lines and three large vibra- tile setae developed anteriorly. Length of body, 1-145 inch. Habitat. — Marsh water, with Sphagnum. Contributions from the Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. No. XXIV. CONTRIBUTIONS TO MINERALOGY. By F. A. Genth. {Bead before the American Philosophical Society, October 2, 1SS5.) During the last two or three years numerous mineralogical observations have been made, some of which I had intended to investigate more fully, but, as I fear that the time which this would require would delay, if not altogether prevent their publication, I give in the following the more in- teresting : 1. Tin, and associated Minerals. A highly interesting occurrence of native tin is that at the headwaters of several rivers in New South Wales. About a year ago Dr. Samuel B. Howell presented me with a specimen, and afterwards sent with another the following letter, giving fuller information about its occurrence : "The washings I gave you sometime back came from Aberfoil river, "about fifteen miles from the town of Oban, N. S. Wales. There is with- " in two or three miles a very valuable diamond field, where corundum " gems are common. The specimens I now send you are from the Sam " river, which runs through the above-mentioned diamond field, twenty " miles from the other locality. These rivers are the headwaters of the "Clarence river, which empties into the South Pacific ocean. From this "locality I have detected platinum, iridosmine, tin and gold ; the mineral "formation appears to be the same." Both specimens showed the same association of minerals. 1885.] **1 [Genth. Tin. — The tin exists in the form of irregular, somewhat globular grains or aggregations of such grains; they are distinctly crystalline, from 0.1 to rarely over lmm in size. When magnified 60 diameters they appear to be of an uneven surface, showing planes which are too indistinct, however, for determining their form. They are grayish-white and of metallic lustre. It was impossible to select enough of the pure grains to determine their specific gravity or to make a quantitative analysis. A portion, treated with hydrochloric acid, dissolved readily with disengagement of hydro- gen, leaving fine scales of iridosmine behind. Not a trace of any other metal but tin could be found in the solution. Platinum. — The sample from the Aberfoil river yielded only a very mi- nute quantity of platinum, when the portion insoluble in hydrochloric acid was treated with aqua regia, whilst that from the Sam river contained a considerable amount of this metal. The grains of platinum are of irregular shape, mostly flattened. Aqua regia dissolves some of the grains very slowly, leaving a crystalline skele- ton of very fine scales, probably of iridosmine. Other grains are hardly acted upon and are probably iridium or platin-iridium. The solution con- tained principally platinum, but also iridium and palladium. Iridosmine. — The so-called iridosmine seems to be present, both as new- janskite in tin white, flat scales and as sisserskite in grayish- white or lead- colored scales. Some of the scales are indistinct hexagonal plates, but mostly have an irregular shape. Gold. — The gold which I have observed in these washings is associated with quartz and of a deep yellow color, showing its high degree of fine- ness. Copper. — The Sam river washings contain fine particles of native copper in the wire form. Cassiterite. — I have observed this mineral more largely in the Aberfoil river sample ; it is mostly in small, rounded grains, the largest about 10mm in size; some are of a deep aurora red color, others are hyacinth red, red- dish-brown or variegated, black, red and white ; crystals could not be ob- served. Corundum. — Sapphires in rounded grains, also in asteriated crystals, the largest 12mm in diameter, and of a deep blue color occur most abundantly in the washings of the Aberfoil river, but also, with other varieties of co- rundum, in those of the Sam river. Besides these and an abundance of quartz I have observed topaz of a yellowish-white color, orthoclase, garnet, brown tourmaline and other minerals, too small to distinguish. 2. Joseite and Tetradymite. The peculiar telluride of bismuth from San Jose\ Minas Geraes, Brazil (DufrSnoy's bornine, which afterwards was named joseite by Kenngott), was analyzed by Damour in 1845. The composition being so peculiar, Genth. Damour. 14.67 15.93 ^~^"l5\68 1.46 2.84 1.48 3.15 — | 4.58 81.23 79.15 — 78.40 Genth.] ^2 [Oct. 2, and not in accordance with the present views of chemical combination, a new analysis was very desirable. Mr. Clarence S. Bement, who has in his magnificent cabinet a fine cleavage mass of about four inches in diameter, has kindly presented me with the material for this purpose. The specimen received is of a dark steel-gray color and shows the most perfect lamination and cleavage. Between the laminae could be observed a greenish and yellowish coating, which when magnified 100 diameters showed a crystalline structure. I also observed, under the microscope, a very minute quantity of yellowish-white globular aggregations. These coatings are the product of a partial oxidation of the mineral and were readily removed by dilute hydrochloric acid. They are probably mon- tanite. The analysis of the purified material gave results very close to those ot Damour : Te = Se = S = Bi = 100.20 99.71 98.66 This composition cannot be expressed by a rational formula. There is also a doubt about its crystalline form, which is generally taken as hexago- nal, with an eminently basal cleavage, although crystals, as far as I know, have never been found or examined. Similar doubts exist about the form and rational composition of tetrady- mite, a question left open by Groth and others. On crystals from Schubkau, in Hungary, Haidinger determined the form as rhombohedral, with perfect basal cleavage. I am not aware that since then a crystallographic examination of this mineral has been made. These crystals are mostly dull, distorted and striated and not the best material for measurement. No other locality has furnished specimens in well defined crystals. It is very probable, how- ever, that Haidinger's determination is correct, judging from a pseudo- morph of gold after tetradymite from the Whitehall Mine, Spottsylvania county, Va., in the collection of the University of Pennsylvania, showing forms which appear to be combinations of a rhombohedron with a scale- nohedron and the basal plane. This does not exclude, however, that tetradymite may not also occur in rhombic forms and that the characteristic eminent cleavage may not be basal, but brachydiagonal, as in bismuthinite, stibnite and orpiment, which have an analogous composition. It was Gustav Rose who first suggested that tetradymite was bismuth with a variable quantity of isomorphous tellurium, and this opinion has 18S5.1 33 [Genth. been adopted by maDy chemists and mineralogists, although many facts do not sustain it. Bismuth and tellurium are not strictly isomorphous. It is true that both crystallize in rhombohedra of nearly the same angles ; bismuth, how- ever, has an eminently basal and rhombohedral cleavage, while tellurium shows a very imperfect basal and no rhombohedral at all, but a very per- fect cleavage parallel to the planes of an hexagonal prism. There is also in all the tetradymites, excepting the two from Fluvanna county, Va., and from Highland, Montana, a portion of the tellurium re- placed by sulphur, and, if therefore tellurium replaces bismuth, sulphur necessarily does it also.* That tetradymite is not a native bismuth, mixed with an indefinite quan- tity of tellurium, becomes more than probable from the fact that all reliable analyses agree very closely with the formulae of either of the two modifi- cations, viz : Bi2 Te3 or Bi2 S3 -j- 2 Bi2 Te, ; there are only the Cumberland (England) tetradymite, which, according to Rammelsberg, contains : Bi = 84.33, Te = 6.73, and S = 6.43, and the jos&te, for the expression of a rational composition of which we must look for another explana- tion. This seems to be very easy, if G. Rose's suggestion would be reversed, and that, instead of making tellurium (and sulphur) to replace bismuth, we make the latter substitute tellurium and sulphur. This view is supported by numerous examples, and, if we examine the constitution of the natural sulphides, tellurides, arsenides, &c, &c, we find such substitutions very frequently ; the hexagonal millerite, Ni S, becomes niccolite, NiAs, or breithauptite, NiSb ; the isometric pyrite FeS2, by substituting the greater portion of the iron by cobalt or nickel, smaltite (CoNiFe) As2, or chloanthite (NiCoFe) As2 or bismuth-chloan- thite (NiCoFe) (AsBi)2 ; the rhombic markasite, FeS2, in the same man- ner gives : lollingite FeAs2, safilorite (CoFeNi) As2, and rammelsbergite (NiCoFe) As2 ; or, if only a portion of the sulphur is replaced, we get as analogues for pyrite : cobaltite CoAsS, Ullmannite NiAsS or corynite Ni (SbAs) S, and for the rhombic marcasite wolfachite (NiFe) (AsSSb)2, mis- pickel Fe (AsS)2 and alloclasite (CoFe) (BiAs) S. In the sulphosalts the substitution of bismuth for arsenic and antimony is still more frequent, but it suffices that in the examples given it is shown that sulphur is very often replaced by arsenic and antimony, and that bis- muth, being analogous to these, can therefore replace sulphur and tellu- rium as well. These views applied to tetradymite and allied minerals would lead to *I have already repeatedly called attention to the fact that the analysis of the Virginia tetradymite, made by Coleman Fisher, in which he found 7.23 p. c. of selenium, was made with a part of the identical material which I have analyzed, and which contains not more than a trace of selenium. Notwith- standing these statements it seems to be impossible to eradicate this error, as I find it continually repeated in our best books on Mineralogy. PROC. AMEB. FHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. E. PRINTED OCTOBER 12, 1885. Uenth.] ^>4: [Oct. 2, the general formula : Bi2 (TeSeSBi)^ and the Cumberland tetradymite (I) and the joseite (II) would be : I. II. Bi2S3 = 34.57 — 15.27 Bi2Se3 = — 4.04 Bi2Te3 = 14.19 — 30.72 BLBi, = 48.84 — 50.17 97.51 100.20 It would be interesting if a modification of bismuth of a rhombic form with brachydiagonal cleavage would be discovered, as it would throw some light upon the cause of dimorphism. S. Seleniferous Galenobismutite. H. Sjogren in 1879 gave the name galenobismutite with the formula : PbS. B^Sj, to a mineral which is found massive and of a somewhat radiat- ing structure at the Ko Mine, Nordmark, Sweden. Mr. F. L. Garrison presented me last fall with a specimen of what was considered a selenide of bismuth, which he had received in Fahlun, Sweden, and which was said to have been found a short time ago in that celebrated mine. The mineral has one very eminent cleavage, very similar to the brachy- diagonal cleavage of bismuthinite, no other cleavage could be observed ; color, lead gray, but much darker than bismuthinite ; lustre eminently metallic; H = 2. Sp. gr., corrected for the pure mineral, = 7.145. Very brittle. It is associated with quartz, chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite in a rock composed of greenish-black fibrous and radiating hornblende and quartz. Unfortunately, only a limited quantity was at my disposal, and the material for analysis could not be obtained in a perfect state of purity, but, as the admixtures were only quartz, chalcopyrite and pyrrhotite, these could be easily calculated and deducted. They were : in analysis I, 3.96 % ; in II, 4.25 % ; in III, 5.11 % ; in IV, 8.73%, and in V, 8.80 %. The following results were obtained : I. II. III. IV. V. Mean. Atomic ratio. Sulphur = 9.71 - not det. - 10.54 - 9.21 - 9.55 - 9.75 - 0.305 1 _ j 94 Selenium = not det. 13.65 - 11.20 - not det. 12.43 - 0.156 i Silver) _ 2g 23 _ o8 18 ~ °-38^ °-39 - °-32 - 0.33 - 0.0021 j j Lead > - 28.27 - 27.72 - 27.69 - 27.88 - 0.135 J Bismuth = 50.19 - 49.49 - 49.35 - 50.49 - 49.90 - 49.88 - 0.238 2.— 99.64 100.27 This gives the formula : Pb (S2 SeJ. Bi2 (S^Se^, giving 3 3 3 5 Sulphur = 10.43 % Selenium = 12.94 — Lead = 25.30 — Bismuth == 51.33 — 100.00 1885.] 35 fGenth. Another specimen from the same locality, which was considered the same mineral, gave very different results : T'his mineral, while it showed an eminent brachydiagonal cleavage, was much whiter, and less brittle. It had the same associations, but there appeared to be also some granular native bismuth in its immediate neigh- borhood. The analysis, after deducting 3 per cent of impurities, gave : Sulphur = 11.87 % Selenium = 4.25 — Lead = 5.36 — Bismuth = 74.44 — 95.92 There is a loss of about 4 per cent, for which I cannot account, possibly selenium. There was only a small quantity of the mineral obtainable for analysis, which would indicate that it is a mixture of probably about 20 per cent of the seleniferous galenobismutite with 63 per cent of bismuthinite and about 17 per cent of the native bismuth. 4. Argentobismutite (Silberwismuthglanz). Prof. C. Rammelsberg described, in 1876, under the name silberwis- muthglanz, a compact gray mineral from the Matilda Mine, Peru, corres- ponding to the formula : Ag2S, Bi2S3. Amongst the minerals which the late J. F. L. Schirmer presented me about eleven years ago, was a specimen of granular quartz penetrated by thin needle-shaped iron black crystals, about lmm in thickness and 10-25mm in length, showing a deep longitudinal striation, apparently no cleavage, but an uneven fracture. It came from Lake City, Colorado, and was evidently a surface specimen. In vain I have endeavored since to get the same mineral again from the mines near Lake City. I have made several rough tests and found in one about 24 per cent of silver and 55 per cent of bismuth. I have sacrificed the greater portion of my specimen, and by crushing and washing off the quartz and oxidized portion of the mineral, I obtained a small quantity for analysis, consisting of the nearly pure sulphide and quartz with ferric oxide, which latter were left undissolved by nitric acid . The analysis gave : Atomic Ratio. Silver = 26.39 f0 0.121 Lead = 4.06 — 0.020 Bismuth = 52.89 — 0.252 Sulphur, by difference = 16.66 — 0.521 The lead may be an admixture of galenite, although the mineral had Geiith.] ^ [Oct. 2, not that appearance, but it is more probably replacing some of the silver, the analysis nearly agrees with the formula : (Ag2Pb) S. Bi2Ss. The pure Ag2S. Bi2S3 would have the composition : Ag = 28.27 Bi = 54.97 S = 16.76 5. Cosalite. The name rezbanyite was given, in 1858, by R. Hermann, to a mtxture of a sulphobismutite of lead, silver and copper and sulphate of lead ; the unoxidizod mineral was not analyzed, although he states that the interior mass of his specimen was quite fresh, and of a lead-gray color. A sulphobismutite of the formula 2(PbAg2) S. Bi2S3 from Cosala in the Province of Sinaloa, Mexico, was described by me in 1868 as cosalite. In 1874, A. Frenzel reexamined the rezbanyite and proved its identity with cosalite. For another mineral 4PbS. 5Bi2S3, also found at Rez- banya, he now adopts the name rezbanyite. In 1877 A. E. Nordenskiold distinguished as bjelkite a mineral from the Bjelke Mine in Nordmark, Sweden, of which Nilson Lundstrom gave the formula : FePb2Bi2S6. H. Sjogren, however, showed, in 1879, that the iron in Lundstrotn's analysis was owing to an admixture of pyrrhotite, and that the pure mineral was identical with cosalite. About two years ago I received, through the kindness of Mr. F. M. Shideler, of Lake City, Colorado, a mineral from the Gladiator Mine in Ouray county, Col., which contained, besides bismuth, lead and silver, a considerable quantity of copper, but gave the atomic ratio of cosalite ; a similar mineral was described at the meeting of the Colorado Scientific So- ciety of Dec. 3, 1883, by W. F. Hillebrand, as coming from the Comstock Mine, near Parrott City, La Plata Co., Col., and finally G. A. Koenig, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. xxii, 211, made an analysis of that which occurs associated with his alaskaite (galenobismutite) from the Alaska Mine- about six or eight miles above the Gladiator Mine. The cosalite of the Gladiator Mine occurs associated with galenite, bis- muthinite, chalcopyrite and pyrite in quartz. It forms small irregular masses more or less mixed with its associates, the largest which I have seen was not over 25mm in diameter. It is compact, without any apparent crystalline structure ; where it appears to be fibrous it is mixed with bis- muthinite. Some portions have a fringe of crystalline galenite, surround- ing the whole patch of the cosalite. The bismuthinite is present in small particles of a few millimeters in size, and frequently occupies the centre of the cosalite (one fragment of about 4mm long was examined and found to be perfectly pure Bi2S3). The cosalite is between lead gray and iron black, fracture uneven. For the analysis I selected material which was perfectly free from bismuthi- nite, galenite and chalcopyrite, but I was not able to obtain any which 1885.J 37 [Genth. was not slightly contaminated with, pyrite and quartz. From the amount of iron found, the quantity of pyrite was calculated, and this and the quartz deducted from the material taken for analysis. For comparison I have analyzed the cosalite from the Alaska Mine. This is free from pyrite, but contaminated with chalcopyrite, the amount of iron found gave that of chalcopyrite, which, together with quartz, were deducted from the material used for the analysis. The following results were obtained after deducting in analysis I, % of 4.03 % quartz and chalcopyrite ; in II, 20.67 % and in III, 19. 6< pyrite and quartz : I. ir. III. Mean of Atomic Alaska Mi ne. Ilaudlll. Gladiator Mine. ratio. Sulphur = 16.80 — 16.72 — 17.52 — 17.17 0.537 Selenium = trace — — Arsenic = 0.04 — trace — trace — Antimony = 0.51 — not det. — 0.84 — 0.84 0.001 ; Bismuth = 44.95 — 45.20 — 44.97 — 45.09 0.215 | Copper = 8.00 — 5.87 — 5.80 — 5.84 0.046 1 Silver = 1.44 — 5.67 — 5.82 — 5.75 0.027 Lead = 28.10 — 24.50 — 24.72 — 24.61 0.119 j Zinc = 0.24 — 0.65 — 0.50 — 0.58 0.009 j 0.216 0.201 100.08 100.17 Atomic Ratio of (PbCu2Ag2) : Bi : S 99.88 2:2:5 = 2 (PbAg2Cu2) S. Bi2S, 6. Schirmerite and Beegerite. Under the name schirmerite I described, in 1874, a mineral from the Treasury Mine, Geneva District, Park county, Col., of the formula PbS. 2Ag2S. 2Bi2Ss, which I had received about twelve years ago from Mr. Schirmer. Later, he sent me as schirmerite several specimens from the Treasury Vault Mine, Summit county, Colorado, and has furnished the latter mineral to numerous friends. He has not been able to give me another specimen of the original schirmerite, ami I do not know that it has been preserved in any collection. When I took up the investigation of the sulphobismutites above described, I observed that the original schirmerite, which was bright and fresh when received, had tarnished, was quite dull, and some portions almost black, while the mineral from the Treasury Vault 3Iine was quite fresh in appearance. As this indicated a diflerence in the composition, its true nature was endeavored to be established by an analysis. That from the Treasury Vault Mine occurs in small particles and patches, the largest about 10mm in size, disseminated through quartz, asso- ciated with cubical crystals of pyrite, very little chalcopyrite, and, in some of the cavities, a yellowish earthy coating, probably of bismite. Genth.] 38 [Oct. 2, Only a very small quantity, not over 0.0312 grm., could be taken for analysis, in which the metals were determined, and the sulphur required by them calculated. It gave : Atomic ratio. Silver = 15.40 — 0.072 = 1.5 Lead = 50.16 — 0.242 = 5.1 Bismuth = 19.81 — 0.095 = 2 Sulphur = 14.59 — 0.456 = 9.7 100.00 This seems to indicate that the mineral from the Treasury Vault Mine agrees with the formula of argentiferous beegerite : (Agi!Pb)6. Bi2S3. Dr. Kcenig described, in 1881, Am. Chem. Journ., ii, 379, under the name of beegerite, a mineral from the Baltic vein, Park county, Colorado, which, however, he found to be entirely free from silver. Lately he described another variety from the Old Lout Mine near Lake City, Colo- rado, containing about 10 per cent of silver. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. xxii, 211. 7. Tetrahedrite. Sylmnite. Already about eleven years ago I have received from Mr. Schirmer specimens of a variety of tetrahedrite in quartz, associated with crystal- lized gypsum and a yellowish waxy oxidation product containing largely oxide of antimony, which came from the Hotchkiss Mine in the San Juan District, Colorado. Almost identical in appearance and associations in the tetrahedrite from Governor Pitkins' Mine near Lake City, of which Mr. F. M. Shideler sent me a number of specimens. The tetrahedrite does not show any signs of crystallization, but is mas- sive, compact, disseminated through quartz ; in the cavities are small crystals of gypsum. Iron black. Its specific gravity = 4.885. The material for analysis was slightly contaminated with quartz which was deducted, in I, 2.46 per cent ; in II, 3 per cent. I. II. Mean. Sulphur = 25.97 — not det. 25.97 Arsenic = 3.30 — 3.14 3.22 Antimony = 25.51 — not det. 25.51 Bismuth = 0.41 — 0.32 0.37 Silver = 0.51 — 0.69 0.60 Copper = 37.80 — 37.56 37.68 Zinc = lost — 7.15 7.15 Iron =: 0.57 — } 0.77 0.64 Manganese = 0.10 — 0.10 101.24 1885.] "^ (Genth. The atomic ratio leads to the accepted formula : 4(Ag2Cu2ZnFe) S. (SbAsBi)2 S3. An exceedingly interesting association of this tetrahedrite is that of sylvanite. There was in the lot of samples from Governor Pitkins' Mine a small piece of quartz, showing very few specks of tetrahedrite and also the antimony oxide coating, which showed a few silver-white, bright me- tallic particles, 2-3mm in length and less than lmm broad, with one eminent cleavage. A qualitative examination showed that, when nitric acid was added, the particles at once became black, and on boiling dissolved, leav- ing bright brown gold ; the filtrate gave an abundance of silver chloride on addition of hydrochloric acid, and the filtrate evaporated to dryness yielded crystalline tellurous oxide, readily soluble in ammonium hy- drate and ammonium sulphide, which latter solution, on acidulation, gave a black precipitate of tellurous sulphide. Thus the mineral is proved to be sylvanite, which, I do not believe, has ever before been observed in this part of Colorado. 8. Polybasite. Occurs with argentiferous galenite and pyrite at the Terrible Lode, Clear Creek Co., Colorado. A crystal had a spec. grav. of 6.009 and contained : Silver = 62.70 Copper = 9.57 Iron = 0.07 Arsenic = 0.78 Antimony = 10.18 Sulphur (by difference) = 16.70 100.00 9. Arsenopyrite and Scorodite. A number of years ago I received, from Northern Alabama, several lumps of ore, consisting of quartz with pale grayish-green granular scoro- dite, showing on some of the fissures microscopic crystals of the usual form of this mineral, the pyramidal planes predominating. The scorodite results from the oxidation of arsenopyrite, a portion of which is left un- altered in the form of grayish-white, granular patches with metallic lus- tre. Dilute hydrochloric acid dissolved the scorodite and left the arseno- pyrite with a little quartz. After deducting 3.34 per cent of the latter the analysis gave : Sulphur = Arsenic = Iron = Copper = 1:1:1 = FeSAs. Atomic ratio. 18.32 — 0.573 1 47.10 — 0.628 1.1 33.84 — 0.566 1 0.70 Genth.] 40 [Oct. 2, 10. Alteration of Magnesian limestone from Berks Co., Pa. The magnesian limestones in the neighborhood of Reading, Berks Co., Pa., at Fritz's island, and about two miles east of Fritztown, two miles south of Sinking Spring, at the Wheatfield and Ruth's Mines, frequently undergo very interesting changes. Evidently by the infiltration of siliceous waters the magnesian limestone is decomposed and from the magnesium carbonate, deweylite and serpen- tine are formed, while another portion of the magnesia separates as bru- cite ; the calcium carbonate crystallizes, both in the form of aragonite, in small acicular crystals and radiating columnar masses, and in the form of calcite, in crystals and coarse granular masses. Some of these minerals have already been described by E. F. Smith, jointly with D. B. Brunner and J. Schoenfeld. I am indebted to Prof. Brunner and Dr. Schoenfeld for numerous specimens of these interesting occurrences. Brucite. — At Fritz's island brucite occurs in several varieties. a. In coatings of indistinct crystals 3-4mm in diameter and crystalline masses upon a granular limestone, largely altered into serpentine. It is colorless in thin laminae and shows the characteristic pearly lustre. There is also, on some portions of the limestone, a thin, white coating with slight silky lustre, which may be brucite ; analysis a\. This brucite has already been analyzed by E. F. Smith (Am. Chem. Journ., v, 281), whose analysis I give for comparison, a 2. b. A second variety is found in thin seams from 4 to 15mm in thickness. I could not observe any crystals but masses which are highly crystallized, eminently showing the basal cleavage, but always in curved surfaces. It has a slightly brownish-yellow tint, and on ignition becomes dark brown from the oxidation of the considerable quantity of manganous oxide which it contains. Spec. grav. = 2.382. From the analysis it will be seen that in its composition it stands between pure brucite and Igelstrom's mangan- brucite, although not so rich in manganous oxide, the latter containing as much as 14.16 per cent. c. The brucite from near Sinking Spring, as Dr. Smith states, occurs in thin colorless laminae in thin seams in the limestone, but also in silky fibrous masses or even pulverulent, with but a faint silky lustre. Dr. Smith has observed the fine silky fibres, but, not having had a sufficient quantity for analysis, mistook them for hydromagnesite. The brucite is associated with deweylite, coarse grained calcite and aragonite, in dolomite. I have analyzed a perfectly pure piece of the silky fibrous brucite, which weighed nearly one gram, c 1, and for comparison give E. F. Smith's analysis of the laminated mineral, r 2, from the same locality : 1885.] 41 [Genth. Fritz's Island. Sinking Spring. al a 2 61 6 2 cl c2 Water = 30.92 — 32.52 — 29.70 — 29.47 — 29.91 — 31.05 Carbon dioxide = 2.42 — Silica and alumina = — 0.46 — Ferric oxide = 0.82— 0.44— 0.30— 0.04— 0.75— 1.24 Manganous oxide = 0.63 — 4.04 — 4.66 — Magnesium oxide = 67.64 — 66.78 — 65.38 — 64.30 — 66.62 — 66.19 Calcium oxide = 0.11 — 1.68 100.01 — 99.74 — 99.42 — 98.93 — 99.81 — 100.16 The 2.42 per cent of carbon dioxide in analysis c 1 indicate the presence of 0.20 per cent of calcium carbonate, and about 4.45 per cent of mag- nesium carbonate or about 6 per cent of hydromagnesite, resulting from a conversion of a small quantity of brucite into these minerals — there are still, however, over 90 per cent of unaltered brucite present. Deweylite, Aragonite, Calcite. — In the magnesian limestone occur these three minerals, more or less mixed together and associated with brucite. The deweylite is white, yellowish-white or brownish, amorphous, some- times in rounded grains or in stalactites or botryoidal forms, in thin plate- like masses or slabs occasionally over one inch in thickness, or in irregular coatings. These slabs are often arranged in layers of white or brownish deweylite of greater or less purity, often intimately mixed with aragonite, which sometimes separates in the form of radiating columnar masses, some of the individuals being over 50mm in length. The layers often sepa- rate very easily and the surfaces of such planes of separation are covered with small brilliant crystals of aragonite. Calcite is also present, both in small and insignificant crystals and in coarse crystalline masses. This deweylite has been analyzed by E. F. Smith (1. c), also by my assistant, Mr. H. F. Keller, who found a pure yellowish fragment of waxy lustre to contain : Silicic oxide = 39.32 Ferrous oxide = 0.51 Calcium oxide = trace Magnesium oxide = 41.14 Water = 18.41 99.38 Neither the aragonite nor calcite have been analyzed. Pseudomorph, of deweylite after aragonite. — The needle-shaped crystals of aragonite and the radiating masses undergo a change and are gradually altered into brownish-yellow deweylite. It begins with a very thin coating of colorless and brownish-yellow deweylite upon the aragonite, .which gradually becomes thicker and final- ly changes the entire aragonite into pure deweylite. PllOC. AMEK. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. F. PRINTED OCTOBER 12, 1885. Genth.] 42 [Oct. 2, Serpentine. — Another very important alteration of the magnesian lime- stone of Berks county is that into serpentine, which can be observed in all its stages, from the pure dolomite into the pure serpentine. The latter is generally of a greenish-yellow, greenish-white or yellow color, but also sometimes brownish and grayish. Aragonite and calcite are frequently associated and magnetite in fine grains is occasionally disseminated through the mass. Several analyses of these serpentines have been made by my assistant, Mr. Harry F. Keller, who found in those of : Ruth's Mine. "Wheatfield Mine, Silicic oxide = 42.14 — 41.46 Ferrous oxide = 2.06 — 0.99 Magnesium oxide = 41.61 — 44.68 Calcium oxide = trace — Water = 14.20 — 14.07 100.01 101.20 M. E. Wadsworth, in his Lithological Studies, Cambridge, 1884, page 152, speaks of the serpentine of Fitztown (Fritztown), Berks Co., Pa., as a product of the alteration of olivine, showing yet unaltered olivine. I can- not imagine how olivine could be present in this rock and what it is which he has taken for that mineral. The alteration of dolomite has produced, directly and indirectly, espec- ially at Fritz's Island, a great variety of interesting minerals. Besides serpentine and deweylite, there are grossular, vesuviante in a beautiful yellow and orange-colored variety, apophyllite, chabazite, gismondite (?), thomsonite, mesolite, stilbite (at Rautenbush), datolite and others. In a subsequent paper I may give a fuller account of some of these. 11. Ilmenite from Carter's Mine, N. G. Oligoclase. In the chrysolite rock (unnecessarily called dunite by some authors) occurs a vein which contains corundum, and some cross-fissures furnish a white plagioclase feldspar, others a peculiar variety of ilmenite. My assistant, Mr. Harry F. Keller, has made analyses of both. The ilmenite has been found in two varieties (a) of a brownish-black color of a somewhat purplish hue, in small masses which show an indistinct crystal- line structure and basal cleavage. On the margin it becomes somewhat columnar ; fracture uneven. Sp. gr. = 4.67. H = 5.5 ; the second va- riety (b) occurs in rounded modules of about 1.5 to 2" in diameter, irreg- ular in shape, very brittle and breaking up into small fragments of about 5 to 10mm in diameter, without any regular form, with subconchoidal frac- ture and tarnished with bluish and purplish colors. It much resembles the so-called Schlackige Magneteisen from Unkel on the Rhine, although the composition is quite different. Sp. gc = 4.68. Neither variety is magnetic. 1885.] 43 [Genth. Titanic oxide = 52.73 — 52.71 52.64 Ferric oxide = 8.08 — not det. 10.07 Ferrous oxide = 33.08 — 32.96 31.11 Magnesium oxide = 5.33 — not det. 5.33 Silica = 0.14 — 0.16 — trace 99.36 99.15 The feldspar which is found associated shows large cleavages and is dis- tinctly striated. It gave the composition of oligoclase : Silicic oxide = 62.32 Aluminum oxide = 25.19 Calcium oxide = 5.01 Sodium oxide = 8.02 Potassium oxide = 0.25 100.79 12. Topaz from Stoneham, Maine. I have made last fall, at the suggestion of Mr. G. F. Kunz, an analysis of the Stoneham topaz, of which he furnished me with a perfectly trans- parent and colorless fragment, in order to clear up the doubt then existing about its composition, on account of an analysis published by Mr. C. M. Bradbury (Chemical News, xlviii, 109), which had given very unusual results. Although by the very elaborate investigation of F. "W. Clarke and J. S. Diller (Am. Journ. Sc. [3] xxix), the main question has been settled by showing that the Stoneham topaz has the accepted composition of topaz, I may put on record the results which I have obtained : Spec. grav. Si02 A1203 Fl Deduct oxygen 3.553 32.03 57.18 18.83 108.03 7.92 100.11 13. Orthoclase from French Creek, Chester Co., Pa. A peculiar variety of orthoclase has lately been found at the iron mines of the French Creek region, of which Dr. A. E. Foote has presented me with several specimens. The crystals are columnar, very imperfect, but ap- pear to show the planes P, M and n (Naumann) ; they are deeply striated and the slender crystals from 1 to 2mm in thickness and about 50mm in length are radiating from a centre, forming sheaf-like or club-like aggre- Genth.] ^4 [Oct. 2, gations. Some portions show the orthoclase cleavage. Color reddish- white to flesh red. Sp. grav. = 2.528. Associated with a chloritic min- eral, supposed to be glauconite, and magnetite. The analysis gave : Loss by ignition = 0.67 Si02 = 62.68 Fe2Os = 0.23 A120 = 20.90 CaO = 0.15 Na20 = none KaO = 15.99 100.62 14. Muscovite, pseudomorphous after Nephelite ? Dr. A. E. Foote brought last year from Wakefield, Canada, peculiar hex- agonal crystals occurring there in the granular limestone, which he gave me for analysis. The form seems to be hexagonal, the angle, between two prismatic planes, measured 120° ; the larger crystal 20mm broad and 18mm high shows the basal plane, but no pyramid, some of the smaller but less perfect crystals appear to have a very small pyramidal plane also. Yellowish-white, finely crystalline, rarely some larger cleavage planes are visible, which are probably calcite ; lustre pearly to slightly vitreous. II = 3.0 ; spec. gr. = 2.755. The analysis gave : C02 = 0.69 H20 = 4.25 Si02 = 45.90 A1203 = 36.03 Fe203 = trace MgO = 0.68 CaO = 0.92 K90 = 12.08 100.55 This is muscovite slightly contaminated with calcium carbonate. The form suggests a pseudomorph after nephelite. In the same range at Diana, N. Y., as Geo. J. Brush has shown, nephelite is found altered into gieseckite, which latter in all probability is only a more compact and less pure variety of muscovite. 15. Stilpnomelane pseudomorphs. Ankerite. Velvety coatings of a dark olive-green color and submetallic lustre, in pseudomorphs after an unknown tabular mineral. The specific gravity, taken in alcohol, was found to be, 2.957. Powtler pale olive-green. This variety has been analyzed in 1858, hy G. J. Brush (Am. Journ. Sc. 1885.] *0 IGenth. [2] xxv, 198), who showed that the so-called chalcodite of C. U. Shep- ard, in all probability belongs to stilpnomelane, and, if this suggestion is correct, that this mineral contains both ferrous and ferric oxides, while Rammelsberg (Mineralcheniie, 1875), assumes only ferrous oxide. From Dr. A. E. Foote, who has lately collected this mineral at the Sterling Mine near Antwerp, N. Y., I have received some very pure mate- rial, which made it desirable to reexamine it, especially with reference to the state of the oxidation of the iron. For the determination of the ferrous oxide, 0.3522 grm. were dissolved in dilute sulphuric acid, after the air had been driven out by carbonic dioxide ; and the ferrous oxide determined by titration with potassium permanganate ; the water was determined directly in a chloride of calcium tube from 0.3635 grm. and 0.9854 grm. taken for the other determinations. The analysis gave : Atomic ratio. Si02 = 44.75 % 0.746 A1203 = 4.36 — 0.042 Fe203 = 4.99 — 0.031 MnO = trace FeO = 30.34 — 0.421 MgO = 5.47 — 0.137 H20 = 9.18 — 0.510 10.2 } = 0.073 = } = 0.558 = 7.6 = 7. 99.09 The empirical formula: (FeaMgi)8 (FeAl)2 Sii0O31 -f- 6H20 agrees closely with the above results. Ankerite. — Associated with the stilpnomelane is ankerite in groups of curved rhombohedral crystals of a yellowish-white color. The analysis gave : CaC03 MnCOs FeC03 MgCOa = 54.98 = 0.78 = 19.28 = 24.91 99.95 Calamine. 16. A peculiar variety of calamine, which closely resembles hydrozincite, occurs as an incrustation upon a ferruginous calamine, the principal ore, at the Bertha Mine, Pulaski county, Va. It is earthy and cryptocrystalline and some of the incrustations had a thickness of 5mm. I observed that after ignition it was dissolved by dilute hydrochloric acid almost instantaneously, far more readily than the hydrous mineral. Genth.] 4b [0ct< 2, The analysis gave : Si02 = 25.01 ZnO = 67.42 H,0 = 8.32 100.75 17. Titanite. Some time ago Mr. J. A. D. Stephenson, of Statesville, N. C, sent me a fragment of a crystal of titanite from the mica schist of the neighborhood, which also carries a beautiful variety of sunstone-oligoclase. It was IS™™ broad, 2mm thick, of a yellowish-white color, a greasy, vitreous lustre and a sp. gr. of 3. 477. The analysis gave : Si02 = 29.45 Ti02 = 38.33 Fe,0, = 1.61 MnO| MgO| - CaO = 29.11 traces 29.11 Ignition 0.60 99.10 18. Vanadinite. The vanadinite from Wanlockhead, Scotland, occurs associated with cal- amine, a pale, greenish fibrous coating of pyromorphite, and rarely with minute black crystals of descloizite, in brownish-yellow barrel-shaped hexagonal prisms, generally united into globular groups, the surface of the globules often perfectly smooth and not showing a trace of the form of the crystals which produce them. They have been analyzed by A. Frenzel (Jahrb. Min., 1875, 673), but as it is very difficult to get material perfectly free from admixtures, some of his analyses do not fairly represent the com- position of vanadinite. As I had some perfectly pure globules, I made an analysis which gave : CI = 2.53 PbO = 78.39 As205 = 0.34 P205 = 0.27 V,Os = 18.04 99.57 10. Annabergite. In a previous paper, read before this Society, August 18, 1882, 1 mention under niccolite that an apple-green mineral is found with it at the Gem Mine, near Silver Cliff, Colorado. 1885.] 47 [Gentb. It occurs as a crystalline coating or in minute somewhat globular aggre- gations, of a pale green to a rich apple-green color, in limestone associated with niccolite. It is frequently associated with aragonite in fine needle- shaped crystals, which often give it a superficial coating. I was able to obtain a small quantity of a state of fair purity, slightly contaminated with aragonite. After treating it in the cold with very dilute hydrochloric acid, to dissolve the aragonite, I had 0.0722 grm. for analysis, which gave : H20 = 23.94 NiO = 32.64 CoO = 0.50 MgO = 3.74 CaO = 3.51 As90, = 36.64 100.95 20. Dr. Clemens Winkler and Herderite. Dr. Winkler published (Jahrb. Min., 1875, i, 172), a justification of his work on herderite in which he says that my reproach that he had sacrificed valuable material by the use of incorrect methods, is unwarranted and that he must firmly repel it. I had intended to reply to Dr. Winkler, but really do not see any neces- sity for it, because, he fails to show any error in my work, but only tries to find excuses for his own shortcomings, and mentions experiments made with apatite, a mineral with which herderite has no resemblance, either physically or chemically. That the minerals from Ehrenfriedersdorf and Stoneham are identical, as I have suggested, he now admits, and as this settles the main question it would be a waste of words to say more about this matter. University of Pennsylvania, August 8, 1885. Brinton.| 4o [Oct. 2, On Polysynthesis and Incorporation as Characteristics of Ameri- can Languages. By Daniel G. Brinton, M. D. {Read before the American PhilosopJiical Society, October 2, 1S85.) Synopsis. Races of mankind as co-extensive with linguistic groups. — Problems of American languages. — History of the doctrines of Polysynthesis and Incorporation. — Preliminary cautions. — Erroneous statements about aboriginal tongues. — Teachings of Duponceau. — Of Wilhelm von Humboldt. — Of Francis Lieber. — Of H. Steinthal. — Of Lucien Adam. — Of Friedrich Miiller. — Of J. W. Powell. — Definitions of Polysyn- thesis, Incorporation and Holophrasis. — Examples of these processes. — Examinations of American tongues in which they are alleged to be absent. — (1) The Othomi and associated dialects — (2) The Bri-Bri and other Costa Rican dialects — (3) The Tupi-Guarani dialects — (4) The Mutsun. — Conclusions. The division of the species Man into subspecies or races is not as yet a settled point in ethnology. The tendency, however, is to return to the classification proposed by Linnaeus, which, in a broad way, subdivides the species with reference to the con- tinental areas mainly inhabited by them in the earliest historic times. This is found to accord with color, and to give five sub- species or races, the White or European, the Black or African, the Yellow or Mongolian (Asiatic), the Brown or Malayan (Oceanic), and the Red or American Races. No ethnologist nowadays will seek to establish fixed and ab- solute lines between these. They shade into one another in all their peculiarities, and no one has traits entirely unknown in the others. Yet, in the mass, the characteristics of each are promi- nent, permanent and unmistakeable ; and to deny them on account of occasional exceptions is to betray an inability to estimate the relative value of scientific facts. In the Science of Language it becomes of the highest impor- tance to ascertain whether any such general similarity can be demonstrated between the tongues spoken by members of the same race. 1885.] 4 J [Brintbn. On the surface, this is not apparent. Only one of the races named — the Malayan — is monoglottic. All the others seem to speak tongues with no genetic relationship, at least none in- dicated by etymology. The profounder study of language, how- ever familiar to modern science, leads to a different conclusion — to one which, as cautiously expressed by a recent writer, teaches that " every large, connected terrestrial area developed only one, or scarcely more than one, fundamental linguistic type, and this with such marked individuality that rarely did any of its lan- guages depart from the general scheme."* This similarity is not to be looked for in likeness between words, but in the inner structural development of tongues. To ascertain and estimate such identities is a far more delicate undertaking than to compare columns of words in vocabularies ; but it is proportionately more valuable. This has yet to be done in any general way for the native tongues of America, and what I here present may be considered as merely clearing the road for some later investigator, well equipped from the arsenal of the higher linguistics. The task — no light one — which such an investigator would have, would be, first, to ascertain what structural traits form the ground-plan or plans (if there are more than one) of the lan- guages of the New World. Upon this ground-plan he would find very different edifices have been erected, which, nevertheless, can be classified into groups, each group marked by traits com- mon to every member of it. These traits and groups he must carefully define. Then would come the separate question as to whether this community of traits has a genetic explanation or not. If the decision were affirmative, we might expect conclu- sions that would carry us much further than etymological com- * "Diese thatsachen scheinen darauf hinzudeuten, dass jeder grossere in sich zusamrnenhangende Kindercomplex nur einen Oder doch nur ganz wenige sprachgrundtypen herausbildet, so eigenartig, dass selteu eine sprache ganz aus dern allgemeinen rahmen heraustrit.t." Dr. Heinrich Winkler, Uralaltaische Volker unci Sprachen, s. 147 (Berlin, 1884). PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. G. PRINTED OCTOBER 17, 1885. Brinton.] *>V fOct. 2, parisons, and will form a truly scientific basis for the classifi- cation of American nations. Acting merely as a pioneer to this vast scheme, I shall con- fine myself to the examination of two closely-related traits, said by some to be common to the ground-plan of all American tongues, while by others they are dropped from consideration altogether, or are asserted to be absent in many instances. These traits are Poly synthesis and Incorporation. I shall first sketch the history of these linguistic doctrines ; next explain their nature ; and then proceed to examine in detail several groups of tongues of this continent in which they are said not to appear. If I succeed in showing that when correctly understood, one or the other, or both of them, are really present in these tongues, then I shall have taken a step towards defining the " ground-plan " which I have referred to. As I shall show that they are both expressions of the same psychological motive, if either is present in a tongue it will make for my position, and the propriety of discussing them together will be obvious. I would note at the outset that there are a few cautions which one must observe in the search for structural peculiarities in general, and especially of these. Thus, it will become obvious to the student of the subject that those American languages which have been lauded for their sim- plicity are quite sure to be those of which we know very little ! The Bri-Bri, the Mutsun, Chibcha, and the Othomi, ai-e exam- ples. Just in proportion as our means of studying them in- crease, their complexity becomes apparent. The little we know about a tongue is often the safe refuge of those who claim for it an exceptional character. There is good reason to believe that 6uch apparent simplicity arises from the slight knowledge of the tongues possessed by the whites, to whom we are indebted for our information about them. The trading jargons are always extremely simple, and even the most complex native language readily lends itself to the formation 1S85.] U1- [Brinton. of a lingo as simple as " pigeon English." I have illustrated this in a recent work by a specimen of the Lenape (Algonkin) lan- guage, as in use by the settlers on the Delaware river in the seventeenth century. We know that an early missionary trans- lated a catechism and preached sermons in this jargon. No doubt he thought he was using pure Lenape, and had that dia- lect shared the fate of so many others, and become extinct at an early date, we should at this day be obliged to accept Campa- nia1 works as authentic examples of it, and should thus derive an entirely erroneous notion of its character.* I urge, therefore, that we should be extremely cautious about pronouncing on the structure of a language unless we have specimens of native com- position— texts of aboriginal literature. Even here we are not on perfectly safe ground, for there can be no doubt but that many native tongues have materially changed since their speakers have been brought more or less •directly into eontaet with the whites. On this point, the Rev. John Kilbuck,a very intelligent native Delaware Indian, writes me that most of his people speak Lenape only, but that they have come " to think like white men," and that the structure of the language is materially different from what it was formerly. This difference, as explained to me, is clearly that it is becoming more analytic, and is losing the flexi- bility, the power of polysynthesis, which it formerly possessed to a striking degree. As 1 shall show later, Dr. Amaro Cavaleanti says the same of * See The Lenape and iheirr- Legends. By D. G. Brintoo, pp. 74-5. (No. v. of ^Briiitera's " Library of Aboriginal American Literature.) The Lenape, as pre- sented in Campanius' Catechism, offers no signs of incorporation, although it is really a markedly incorporative tongue; and polysynthesis does not appear, although it was on this very dialect that Duponoeau chiefly founded his theories! TSie pretended, oration by a native chief which Campanius gives in ithe original in his. History of New Sweden is in this same ungrarnniatical jar- gon. His works, should be a stan&a-g warning to students of American languages to be extremely solicitous about their authorities. Campanius lived seven years among the Lenape and studied their language zealously. Even Zeisberger, whedived sixty years among them, does not appear to have recog- nized the sigrvifipance of the vowel changes in the verbs, the use of thoobvia- tives, and sv&h.like delicate poiats-of their syntax,. Brintou.l ^ [Oct. 2, the Tupi ; and the modem Ma}^a, as it appears in the volumi- nous religious writings of Father Joaquin Ruz, is pronounced by so excellent a judge as Senor Pio Perez (author of the Maya Dictionary) and others to be almost a different tongue from the real spoken Maya of the natives themselves.* The generalization that American languages constitute in cer- tain essential structural features an independent group of tongues was first propounded in the second decade of this cen- tury by Mr. Peter Stephen Duponceau, at one time President of the American Philosophical Society, and his statements to this effect first saw the light in the publications of that society. He did not, indeed, fully analyze these features, and from this de- ficiency in comprehending them, was led to retract their appli- cation in certain examples (especially the Othomi) in which I shall endeavor to show they are actually present. He named, indeed, only one of them, to wit, poly synthesis, although it is evident that he perceived the second and equally important pro- cess, now known to linguists by the term incorporation. As even quite prominent authorities have seriously misunder- stood these processes, and in some instances have done grave injustice to their discoverer, I shall give an outline of their history. Mr. Duponceau first developed his theory of the structure of American languages in his correspondence with the Rev. Mr. Heckewelder, in the summer of 1816. Referring to the forms of the Delaware verb as set forth by Zeisberger in his Grammar of that tongue, he observes: " I am inclined to believe that these * Crescencio Carrillo writes in his Disertacion sobre la Historia de la Lengua Maya, sec. xvii, " El estilo del P. Ruz, como escritor maya, no ha sidode buena y general acceptacion en el pais: h&sele censurado por falta de claridad, y de que ha forzado mucho y de una manera extrafia el giro y caricter proprio y genuine- de la lengua yucateca." This was not through ignorance, for Father Ruz was thoroughly conversant with the Maya; but he wished to force it into accordance with the rules and structure of European tongues — a not uncom- mon tendency of missionary writers, and one quite as much to be watched lor by the student of American languages as the simple ignorance of such authors as Campanius. 1885.] 56 [Brinton. forms are peculiar to this part of the world, and that they do not exist in the languages of the old hemisphere." To express this peculiarity, he first employed the adjective syntactic, but later preferred poly synthetic.'1''* In his " Report on the General Character and Forms of Ameri- can Languages," in 1819, he explained his views at greater length, and then first distinguishes, though not with desirable lucidity, between the two varieties of s}mthetic construction, the one (incorporation) applicable to verbal forms of expression, the other (polysynthesis) to nominal expressions. His words are — " A poly synthetic or syntactic construction of language is that in which the greatest number of ideas are comprised in the least number of words. This is done principally in two ways. 1. By a mode of compounding locutions which is not confined to join- ing two words together, as in Greek, or varying the inflection or termination of a radical word as in most European languages, but by interweaving together the most significant sounds or syllables of each simple word, so as to form a compound that will awaken in the mind at once all the ideas singly expressed by the words from which they are taken. 2. By an analogous combination [of] the various parts of speech, particularly by means of the verb, so that its various forms and inflections will express not only the principal action, but the greatest possible number of the moral ideas and physical objects connected with it, and will combine itself to the greatest extent with those con- ceptions which are the subject of other parts of speech, and in other languages require to be expressed by separate and distinct words. Such I take to be the general character of the Indian languages."! * Correspondence between the Rev. John Heckewelder and Peter S. Duponceau, Esq. Letters viii, xvi, and xxiii. t Report of the Corresponding Secretary to the Committee, of his progress in the In- vestigation committed to him of the General Character and Forms of the Lan- guages of the American Indians. Read 12th Jan., 1819, in the Transactions of the Historical and Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society. Vol. i, 1819, pp. xxx, xxxi. Brinton.] °^ [Oct. 2, In his thesis, which received the prize of the Institute of France, in 1835, he was less explicit in his statements, defining the distinguishing trait of the American languages to be " the formation of words, not only by prefixes and suffixes, but by the intercalation, not merely of sjdlables, but of significant simple sounds, by which they can multiply words indefinitelj'."* It should be distinctly stated on the part of Mr. Duponceau, that he at no time claimed this as a peculiarity universal to American languages. His mind was of altogether too scientific a cast to venture such a rash generalization. He guards himself repeatedly and with care against being so understood, and re- iterates that his opinion must not be held to extend beyond the tongues he had studied, although he was inclined to believe that all would be found to reveal these characteristics. f The incorporative plan — das Einverleibungssystem — of Ameri- can languages attracted early the attention of Wilhelm von Humboldt, and in his monumental treatise, Ueber die Verschie- denheit des menschlichen Sprachbanes und ihren Einfiuss auf die geistige Enhoickelung des Menschengeschlechts, he explains, illustrates, and analyses it at considerable length. In a previous essay I have dwelt in detail on Humboldt's theory of ihe psy- chology of the incorporative system, and shall here confine my- self to his objective description of it.J Its purpose he defines to be, " to impress the unit}r of the sentence on the understanding by treating it, not as a whole composed of various words, but as one word."§ A perfect tj^pe of incorporation will group all the elements of the sentence in and around the verbal, as this alone is the bond of union between the several ideas. The designation of time and manner, that is, the tense and mode signs, will include both * M&moire sur le Systeme Grammatical des Langnes de quelques Nations Tndiennes de VAmerique rfu Nord, p. 247 (Paris, 1S36). t Ibid, pp. 07, 436. % The Philosophic Grammar of American Languages as set forth by Wilhelm von Humboldt. By Daniel G. Brinton, pp. 24 27 (Philadelphia, 1885). (S Ueber die Verschic denheit des Menschlichen Sprachbaues, etc., s. 166. 1S85.] ®& [Brinton. the object and subject of the verb, thus subordinating them to the notion of action. It is " an indispensable basis " of this system that there should be a difference in the form of words when incorporated and when not. This applies in a measure to nouns and verbals, but especially to pronouns, and Humboldt names it as "the characteristic tendency" of American lan- guages, and one directly drawn from their incorporative plan, that the personal pronouns, both subjective and objective, used in connection with the verbs, are of a different form from the independent personal pronouns, either greatly abbreviated or from wholly different roots. Outside of the verbal thus formed as the central point of the sentence, there is no syntax, no in- flections, no declension of nouns or adjectives.* Humboldt was far from saying that the incorporative system was exclusively seen in American languages, any more than that of isolation in Chinese, or flexion in Aryan speech. On the con- trary, he distinctly states that every language he had examined shows traces of all three plans ; but the preponderance of one plan over the other is so marked and so distinctive that they afford us the best means known for the morphological classifica- tion of languages, especially as these traits arise from psycho- logical operations widely diverse and of no small influence on the development of the intellect.^ Dr. Francis Lieber, in an essay on " The Plan of Thought in American Languages,"! objected to the terms poly synthesis and incorporation that " they begin at the wrong end ; for these names indicate that that which has been separated is put together, as if man began with analysis, whereas he ends with it." He there- fore proposed the noun holophrasis with its adjective holophras- * See Ueoer die Verschiedenheit, etc., pp. 170-173, 323-6, etc. t Ibid, p. 167. All references are to the edition of 1818. For a full discussion of Wilhelm von Humboldt's views on this and allied topics see the work above referred to, The Philosophic Grammar of American Languages as set forth by Wil- helm von Humboldt ; with the Translation of an unpublished Memoir by Mm on the American Verbs (Philadelphia, 1885). X Published in H. R. Schoolcraft's History and Statistics of the Indian Tribes of th: United Stales. Vol. ii, pp. 316-310 (Washington, 1S53). Brinton] °t> [Oct. 2, tic, not as a substitute for the terms he criticized, but to express the meaning or purpose of these processes, which is, to convey the whole of a sentence or proposition in one word. Polysyn- thesis, he explains, indicates a purely etymological process, holo- phrasis " refers to the meaning of the word considered in a philosophical point of view." If we regard incorporation and polysynthesis as structural processes of language aiming to accomplish a certain theoretical form of speech, then it will be convenient to have this word holophrasis to designate this theoretical form, which is, in short, the expression of the whole proposition in a single word. The eminent linguist, Professor H. Steinthal, has developed the theory of incorporation more fully than any other writer. He expresses himself without reserve of the opinion that all American languages are constructed on this same plan, more or less developed. I need not make long quotations from a work so well-known as his Gharakteristik der hauptsachlichsten Typen des Sprach- baves, one section of which, about thirty pages in length, is de- voted to a searching and admirable presentation of the character- istics of the incorporative plan as shown in American languages. But I may give with brevity, what he regards as the most strik- ing features of this plan. These are especially three : — 1. The construction of words by a mixed system of derivation and new formation. 2. The objective relation is treated as a species of possession ; and 3. The possessive relation is regarded as the leading and sub- stantival one, and controls the form of expression. The first of these corresponds to what I should call polysyn- thesis; the others to incorporation in the limited sense of the term. Some special studies on this subject have been published by M. Lucien Adam, and he claims for them that they have refuted 1885.] 57 [Brinton. and overturned the thesis of Duponceau, Humboldt, and Stein- thal, to the effect that there is a process called incorporative or poly synthetic which can be traced in all American languages, and though not in all points confined to them, may fairly and profit- ably be taken as characteristic of them, and indicative of the psychological processes which underlie them. This opinion M. Adam speaks of as a " stereotyped phrase which is absolutely false."* So rude an iconoclasm as this must attract our careful con- sideration. Let us ask what M. Adam understands by the terms poly synthesis and incorporation. To our surprise, we shall find that in two works published in the same year, he advances defi- nitions by no means identical. Thus, in his " Examination of Sixteen American Languages," he says, " p>oly synthesis consists essentially in the affixing of subordinate personal pronouns to the noun, the postposition and the verb." In his " Study of Six Languages," he writes : " By polysynthesis I understand the ex- pression in one word of the relations of cause and effect, or of subject and object, "f Certainly these two definitions are not convertible, and we are almost constrained to suspect that the writer who gives them was not clear in his own mind as to the nature of the process. At any rate, they differ widely from the plan or method set forth by Humboldt and Steinthal as characteristic of American languages. M. Adam in showing that polys3rnthesis in his un- derstanding of the term is not confined to or characteristic of American tongues missed the point, and fell into an iynoratio elenchi. * " Je suis done autoris6 a conclure qu'il faut tenirpour absolument fausse cette proposition devenue faute d'y avoir regards de pres, une sorte de cliche : que si les langues Americaines different entre elles par la lexique, elles posse- dent neanmoin's en commun une seule et meme grainmaire." Examen gram- matical compare de seize langues Americaines, in the Compte-rendu of the Con- gres international des Americanistes, 1877, Tome ii, p. 242. As no one ever main- tained the unity of American grammar outside of the Einverleibungssystem, it must be to this theory only that M. Adam alludes. t Etudes sur Six Langues Americaines, p. 3 (Paris, 1878) ; and compare his Ex- amen Grammatical above quoted, p. 24, 243. PROC. AMER. PHTLOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. H. PRINTED OCTOBER 17, 1885. Brinton.] OO Oct. 2, Equally narrow is his definition of incorporation. He writes, " When the object is intercalated between the subject and the verbal theme, there is incorporation.''1 If this is to be under- stood as an explanation of the German expression, Einverlei- bung, then it has been pared down until nothing but the stem is left. As to Dr. Lieber's suggestion of holophrastio as an adjective expressing the plan of thought at the basis of polysynthesis and incorporation, M. Adam summarily dismisses it as "a pedantic succedaneum " to our linguistic vocabulary. I cannot acknowledge that the propositions so carefully worked up by Humboldt and Steinthal have been refuted by M. Adam ; I must say, indeed, that the jejune significance he attaches to the incorporative process seems to me to show that he did not grasp it either as a structural motive in language, or as a wide reaching psychological process. Professor Friedrich Midler, whose studies of American lan- guages are among the most extended and profitable of the present time, has not given to this peculiar feature the attention which we might reasonably expect. Indeed, there appears in the standard treatise on the science of language which 'he is now engaged in publishing almost the same vagueness as to the nature of incorporation which I have pointed out in the writings of M. Adam. Thus, on one page he defines incorporating languages as those "which do away with the distinction between the word and the sentence ;" while on another page he explains incorporation as " the including of the object within the body of the verb." * He calls it " a peculiarity of most American languages, but not of all." That the structural process of incorporation is by no means exhausted by the reception of the object within the body of the verb, even that this is not requisite to incorporation, I shall en- deavor to show. *4 [Oct. 2, onictemacac, I have given something to somebody ; which is analyzed as follows : o, augment of the preterit, a tense sign. m, pronoun, subject, 1st person. c, " semi-pronoun," object, 3d person. te, "inanimate semi-pronoun," object, 3d person. maca, theme of the verb, " to give." c, suffix of the preterit, a tense sign. Here it will be observed that between the tense-signs, which are logically the essential limitations of the action, are included both the agent and the near and remote objects of the action. Or we may take the Cakchiquel xbina camizah, Thou wilt not kill me. Composed of x, sign of the future tense. 6, for ba, negative. in, for quin, pronoun, 1st person, object. a, pronoun, 2d person, subject. camizah, verbal theme, " to kill." Here t*he object does not come between verb and subject, but precedes the latter ; but it is a true specimen of incorporation, as is proved by the prefixed tense sign. In the modifications of meaning they undergo, American ver- bal themes may be divided into two great classes, either as they express these modifications (1) by suffixes to an unchanging radical, or (2) by internal changes of their radical. The last mentioned are most characteristic of synthetic tongues. In all pure dialects of the Algonkin the vowel of the verbal root undergoes a peculiar change called " flattening " when the proposition passes from the " positive " to the " suppositive " 1885.] ^ [Brinton. mood.* The same principle is strikingly illustrated in the Choc- taw language, as the following example will show :f takchi, to tie (active, definite). t&kchi, to be tying (active, distinctive). tak'chi, to tie (active, emphatic). taiakchi, to tie tightly (active, intensive). tahakchi, to keep tying (active, frequentative). tahkchi, to tie at once (active immediate). tullakchi, to be tied (passive definite). ta,llakchi, to be the one tied (passive distinctive), etc., etc. This example is, however, left far behind by the Qquichua of Teru, which by a series of so-called " verbal particles " affixed, to the verbal theme confers an almost endless variety of modifi- cation on its verbs. Thus Anchorena in his Grammar gives the forms and shades of meaning of H75 modifications of the verb munay, to love.J These verbal particles are not other words, as adverbs, etc., qualifying the meaning of the verb and merely added to it, but have no independent existence in the language. Von Tschudi, whose admirable analysis of this interesting tongue cannot be too highly praised, explains them as " verbal roots which never reached independent development, or fragments handed down from some earlier epoch of the evolution of the language. "§ They are therefore true synthetic elements in the sense of Du- ponceau's definition, and not at all examples of collocation or juxtaposition. In contrast to this we may take the Maya-Quiche dialects, where there are only slight traces of these internal changes, most of the modifications being effected by affixes. Thus Francisco *This obscure feature in Algonkin Grammar has not yet been satisfactorily ex- plained. Compare Baraga, Grammar of the Otchipive Language, p. 116 (Montreal, 1878), and A. Lacombe, Grammaire de la Langue cles Oris, p. 155 (Montreal, 1871). fSee Grammar of the Choctaw Languages. By the Rev. Cyrus Byington. Edited by D. G. Brinton, pp. 35, 36 (Philadelphia, 1870). X Gramdtica Quechua, 6 del Idioma del Imperio de los Incas. Por el Dr. Jos6 Dionisio Anchorena, pp. 163-177 (Lima, 1874). '£ Orgaaismus der Khetsua-Sprache. Von J. J. von Tschudi, p. 368 (Leipzig, 1884). PR0C. AMER. PHILOS. S0C. XXIII. 121. I. PRINTED OCTOBER 16, 1883. Brinton.] 66 [Oct. 2, Ximenez in his Quiche Grammar gives twenty-four variations of the theme bak, bored, all by suffixes, as :* bak, first passive. bakatuh, second passive. bakou, first absolute. bakon, second absolute. bake, first neuter. baker, second neuter, etc., etc. While the genius of American languages is such that they per- mit and many of them favor the formation of long compounds which express the whole of a sentence in one word, this is by no means necessary. Most of the examples of words of ten, twenty or more syllables are not genuine native words, but novelties manufactured by the missionaries. In ordinary intercourse such compounds are not in use, and the speech is comparatively simple. Of two of the most synthetic languages, the Algonkin and the Nahuatl, we have express testimony from experts that they can be employed in simple or compound forms, as the speaker prefers. The Abbe Lacombe observes that in Cree " sometimes one can employ very long words to express a whole phrase, although the same ideas can be easily rendered by periphrasis. "f In the sylla- bus of the lectures on the Nahuatl by Prof. Agustin de la Rosa of the University of Guadalaxara I note that he explains when the Nahuatl is to be employed in a synthetic, and when in an ana- lytic form. J I shall now proceed to examine those American tongues which * Gramatica de la Lengua Quiche. Ed. Brasseur de Bourbourg, p. 8 (Paris, 1862). f"Ces exemples font comprendre combien qnelquefois on pent rendre des mots tr&s longs, pour exprimer toute une phrase, quoiqu' aussi on puisse facile- ment rendre les mernes idees par des periphrases." Laconibe, Qrammaire de la Langue des Oris, p. 11 (Montreal, 1874). J " Se explicara la razon nlos6flca de los dos modos de usar.las palabras en Mexicano, uno componiendo de varlas palabras lino solo, y otro dejandolas separadas y enlazandolas solo por el regimen " From the programme of Prof. A. de la Rosa's course in 1870. It is greatly to be regretted that the works of this author on the Nahuatl, though recent, are so scarce as to be unobtainable. 1885.] " • [Brinton. have been authoritatively declared to be exceptions to the general rule? of American grammar, as being devoid of the incorporative and polysynthetic character. The Othomi.* As I have said, the Othomi was the stumbling block of Mr. Duponceau and led him to abandon his theory of polys}rnthesis as a characteristic of American tongues. Although in his earlier "writings he expressly names it as one of the illustrations sup- porting his theory, later in life the information he derived from Senor Emmanuel Naxera led him to regard it as an isolating and monosyllabic language, quite on a par with the Chinese. He ex- pressed this change of view in the frankest manner, and since that time writers have spoken of the Othomi as a marked excep- tion in structure to the general rules of synthesis in American tongues. This continues to be the case even in the latest writ- ings, as, for instance, in the recently published Anthropologic du Mexique, of Dr. Hamy.f Let us examine the grounds of this opinion. The Othomis are an ancient and extended family who from the remotest traditional epochs occupied the central valleys and mountains of Mexico north of the Aztecs and Tezcucans. Their *The original authorities I have consulted on the Othomi are : Sec/las de Orthographia, Diccionario, y Arte del Idioma Othomi. By Luis de Neve y Molina (Mexico, 1767). De Lingha Othomitorum Disserlalio. By Emmanuel Naxera (Philadelphia, 1835). Cateiesmo en Lengua Otomi. By Francisco Perez (Mexico, 1831). fHe speaks of the Othomi in these terms:—" Une langue aux allures toutes spficiales, fondamentalement distincte de toutes les langues qui se parlent au- jourd' hui sur le continent amfiricain." Mission Scientiflque au 3fezigue, Pt. i. Anthropologic, p. 32 (Paris, 1884). This is the precise opinion, strongly ex- pressed, that it is my object to controvert. Many other writers have maintained it. Thus Count Piccolomini in the Prolegomena to his version of Neve's Othomi Grammar says: "La loro lingua che con nessuna altradel mondoconosciuto ha la menoma analogia, e semplice. * * * La formazione dei loro verbi, no mi • ed altri derivati ha molta semplecita,'' etc. Grammalica delta Lingua Otomi. p. 3 (Roma, 1811). This writer also offers an illustration of how imperfectly Du- ponceau's theory of polysyntbesis has been understood. Not only does Picco- lomini deny it for the Otomi, but he denies that it is anything more than merely running several words together with some phonetic syncopation. See the Anno- talioni at the close of his Othomi Grammar. Brinton.] t>8 rQct. 2, language, called by themselves nhidn hiu,, the fixed or current speech* (nhidn, speech, hiu, stable,, fixed), presents extraordinary phonetic difficulties on account of its nasals, gutturals and ex- plosives. M. A. Pinart has informed me that of the many Ameri- can tongues which he has studied from the lips of the natives, it is far the most difficult to catch. It is one of a group of related dialects which may be arranged as follows : C The Othomi. J The Mazahua. } The Pame and its dialects. I The Meco or Jonaz. It was the opinion of M. Charencey, that another member of this group was the Pirinda or Matlazinca ; a position combatted by Senor Pimentel, who acknowledges some common property in words, but considers them merely borrowed. f At the outset, it is well to express a caution about accepting without reserve Naxera's opinions on the tongue. No doubt he had practical familiarity with it in its modern and rather corrupt form, but his treatise was largely written to prove that it was not only structurally similar but lexico- graphically related to the Chinese : — and we all know how such a prepossession obscures the judgment. Thus, part of his object was to prove that every syllable of the polysyllabic words had an independent meaning which it always retained in the compound. It is easy to think out deceptive etymologies of this kind, especially in languages where there are many monosyl- lables. Thus the participle rowing might plausibly be com- pounded of the two monosyllables row, and wing, as the oarmen are seated in a row, and the blade of the oar resembles a wing. *This is the orthography of Neve. The terminal vowels are both nasals; nhidn is from the radical hid to breathe, breath. fSee the "Comparacion del Othomi con el Mazahua y el Pirinda," in the Cuadro Descriptivo y Comparative de /as Lenguas Tndigenas ile Mexico, por Fran- cisco Pimentel. Tomo iii, pp. 431-415 (Mexico, 1875). 1885.1 UJ [Brinton. Bayard Taylor's humorous derivation of restaurant — res, taurus, "bully thing" — is of similar character. That Naxera was, led into this false route by his anxiety to prove the Othomi mono- syllabic is evident, for example, from his treatment of the verbal terminations tza, tze, tzi; he makes them independent words, characterizing the imperative, and meaning to happen, to effect, and to carry ; whereas Neve treats them as mere terminations, which is shown to be correct by the fact that they are retained with syncope and elision in other moods as well as in the im- perative itself.* Thus Da phdx Oghd : Thee aid God. Where phdx is an abbreviation of phatzi. Naxera made the statement that the Mazahua is monosyllabic, an error in which his copyists have obediently followed him ; but Pimentel pointedly contradicts this assertion and shows that it is a mistake, both for the Mazahua and for the Pame and its dialects.f We may begin our study of the language with an examination ot the Tense signs in Othomi. PRESENT TENSE. ]. I wish, di nee. 2. Thou wishest, gui nee. 3. He wishes, y nee. PAST AORIST. 1. I wished, da nee. 2. Thou wished, ga nee. :j. He wished, hi nee. * Compare Naxera, Dissertatio, p. 286, with Neve, Reglas, p. 149. t See Pimentel, Cu.ad.ro Descriptivo, etc. Tomo iii, pp. 429 ami 455. Brinl ion.] i IU 1 PERFECT. 1. I have wished, xta nee. 2. Thou hast wished, xca nee. 3. He has wished, xpi nee. PLUPERFECT. 1. I had wished, xta nee hma. 2. Thou hadst wished > xca nee hma. 3. He had wished, xpi nee hma. FIRST FUTURE. 1. I shall wish, ga nee. o_ Thou wilt wish, gui nee. 3. He will wish, da nee. SECONI 1 FUTURE. [Oct. 2, 1. I shall have wished, gua xta nee. 2. Thou wilt have wished, gua xca nee. 3. He will have wished, gua xpi nee. The pronouns here employed are neither the ordinary per- sonals nor possessives (though the Othomi admits of a posses- sive conjugation), but are verbal pronouns, strictly analogous to those found in various other American languages. Their radicals are : I, d — Thou, g — . He, it, b — . In the present, the first and second are prefixed to what is really the simple concrete form of the verb, y-nee. In the past tenses the personal signs are variously united with particles de- noting past time or the past, as a, the end, to finish, ma and hma, yesterday, and the prefix x, which is very noteworthy as being precisely the same in sound and use which we find in the Cakchiquel past and future tenses. It is pronounced s/i (as in sftove) and precedes the whole verbal, including subject, object, 71 1885.J * x LBrinton. and theme ; while in the pluperfect, the second sign of past time hma is a suffix to the collective expression. The future third person is given by Neve as da, but by Perez as di, which latter is apparently from the future particle ni given by Neve. In the second future, the distinctive particle gua pre- cedes the whole verbal, thus inclosing the subject with the theme in the tense-sign, strictly according to the principles of the in- corporative conjugation. This incorporative character is still more marked in the objec- tive conjugations, or "transitions." The object, indeed, follows the verb, but is not only incorporated with it, but in the com- pound tense is included within the double tense signs. Thus, I find in Perez's Catechism, di un-ba magetzi, He will give-theni heaven. In this sentence, di is the personal pronoun combined with the future sign ; and the verb is un-nl, to give to another, which is compounded with the personal ba, them, drops its final syllable, forming a true synthesis. In the phrase, ocpi un-ba hma magetzi, he had given-thein (had) heaven, both subject and object, the latter inclosed in a synthesis with the radical of the theme, the former phonetically altered and co- alesced with a tense particle, are included in the double tense- sign, x-hma. This is as real an example of incorporation as can be found in any American language. Ordinary synthesis of words, other than verbs, is by no means rare in Othomi. Simple juxtaposition, which Naxera states to be the rule, is not all universal. Such a statement by him leads us to suspect that he had only that elementary knowledge of the tongue which Neve refers to in a forcible passage in his Reglas. He writes ; — " A good share of the difficulty of this tongue lies in its custom of syncope; and because the tyros who make use Brintou.J ' ^ [Oct. U, of it do not syncopate it, their compositions are so rough and lacking in harmony to the ears of the natives that the latter count their talk as no better than that of horse-jockeys, as we would say."* The extent of this syncopation is occasionally to such a degree that only a fragment of the original word is retained. As : The charcoal-vendor, na mathid. Herewa, is a demonstrative particle like the Aztec in, and mathid is a compound of pa, to sell, and thehnd, charcoal. The expression, y mahny oqha, he loves God, is to be analyzed, y mdhcll nuny oqha ; he loves him God ; where we perceive not only synthesis, but the object standing in apposition to the pronoun representing it, which is incorporated with the verb. So : yot-gua, light here ; from yotti, to light, nugua, here. These examples from many given in Neve's work seem to me to prove beyond cavil that the Othomi exhibits, when properly spoken, precisely the same theories of incorporation and poly- synthesis as the other American languages, although undoubtedly its more monosyllabic character and the extreme complexity of its phonetics do not permit of a development of these peculi- arities to the same degree as many. Nor am I alone in this opinion. It has already been announced by my learned friend, the Count de Charencey, as the result of his comparison of this tongue with the Mazahua and Pirinda. *' The Othomi," he writes, " has all the appearance of a language which was at first incorporative, and which, worn down \>y attri- *" Parte de la diflcultad de este idioma consiste en la syncopa, pues el no syncopar los prlncipiantes artistas, es causa de que sus periodos y oraclones sean tan rispldos, y faltos de harmonia, por cuyo motive- los natlvos los mur- murau, y tienen (como vulgarmente deciinos), por quartreros." Heglas de Or- fhographia, etc., p. 140. 73 1885.] *° [Brinton. tion and linguistic decay, has at length come to simulate a lan- guage of juxtaposition."* Some other peculiarities of the language, though not directly bearing on the question, point in the same direction. A certain class of compound verbs are said by Neve to have a possessive declension. Thus, of the two words puengui, he draws, and hid, breath, is formed the verb huehid, which is conjugated by using the verb in the indefinite third person and inserting the posses- si ves ma, ni, na, my, thy, his ; thus, ybuemahia, I breathe. ybuenihia, thou breathest. ybaenahia, he breathes.f Literally this would be " it-is-drawing, my-breath," etc. In the Mazahua dialects there is a remarkable change in the objective conjugations (transitions) where the whole form of the verb appears to alter. In this language ti = I ; ki or khe = thou. I give, ti une. I give thee, ti clakke. He will give us, ti yakme.% The last example is not fully explained hy my authorities ; but it shows the verbal change. Something like this occurs in the Pame dialects. They re- veal a manifest indifference to the integrity of the theme, charac- teristic of polysynthetic languages. Thus, our only authority on the Pame, Father Juan Guadalupe Soriano, gives the pret- erit forms of the verb " to aid :" Ku pait, I aided. Ki gait, thou aidedest. Ku mail, he aided. *"L'Othomi nous a tout l'air d'une langue primitivement incorporante, et qui, parvenu au dernier degr6 d'usure et d61abrement, a flni par prendre lea allures d'un dialecte a juxtaposition." Melanges de Philologie et de Paliographie Amiricaine. Par le Conite de Uharencey, p. 80 (Paris, 1883). t Neve, Reglas etc., pp. 159, 160. % Pimentel, Cuadro Bescriptivo, Tom. iii, p. 424. PROC AMER PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. J. PRINTED OCTOBER 16, 1885. Brinton.] '4 [Oct. 2, So, of " to burn :" Knu aum, I burned. Kuddu du taum, they burned.* A large number of such changes run through the conjugation. Pimentel calls them phonetic changes, but they are certainly, in some instances, true syntheses. All these traits of the Othomi and its related dialects serve to place them unquestionably within the general plan of struc- ture of American languages. The Bri-Bri Language. The late Mr. William M. Gabb, who was the first to furnish any satisfactory information about it and its allied dialects in Costa Rica, introduces the Bri-Bri language, spoken in the high- lands of that State, by quoting the words of Alexander von Humboldt to the effect that " a multiplicity of tenses character- izes the rudest American languages." On this, Mr. Gabb com- ments : " This certainly does not apply to the Costa Rican family, which is equally remarkable for the simplicity of its in- flections.f" This statement, offered with such confidence, has been accepted and passed on without close examination b}^ several usually care- ful linguists. Thus Professor Friedrich Miiller, in his brief des- cription of the Bri-Bri (taken exclusively from Gabb's work), inserts the observation — " The simple structure of this idiom is sufficient to contradict the theories generally received about American languages. "| And M. Lucien Adam has lately in- stanced its verbs as notable examples of inflectional simplicity.§ * Pimentel, Cuadro Descrijitlvo, Tomo iii, p. 462. t Wm. M. Gabb, On the Indian Tribes and Languages of Costa Rica, in the Pro- ceedings of the American Philosophical Society for 1875, p. 532, J"Dessen einfacher Ban die (lber die Amerikanischen Sprachen im Allge- meinen verbreiteten Theorien zu widerlegen im Stande ist." Qrundriss der Sprachwixsenschaft , ii Band, s. 318 (Wien, 1882). j5 Le Tacnxa a-f-il (/(■forge de toutes Pieces'! ROponse A M. Daniel G. Brinton. Par Lucien Adam, p. 19 (Paris, Maisonneuve et Cie, 1885). 7^ 1885.1 [Brinton. The study of this group of tongues becomes, therefore, of pecu- liar importance to my present topic. Since Mr. Gabb published his memoir, some independent ma- terial, grammatical as well as lexicographical, has been furnished by the Rt. Rev. B. A. Thiel, Bishop of Costa Rica,* and I have obtained, in addition, several MS. vocabularies and notes on the languages prepared by Prof. P. J. J. Valentini (now of New York City) and others. The stock is divided into three groups of related dialects, as follows : — I. The Brunka, Bronka or Boruca,now in Southwestern Costa Rica, but believed by Gabb to have been the earliest of the stock to occupy the soil, and to have been crowded out by later arrivals. II. The Tiribi and Terraba, principally on the head-waters of the Rio Telorio and south of the mountains. III. The Bri-Bri and Cabecar on the head-waters of the Rio Tiliri. The Biceitas (Yizeitas^) or Cachis, near the mouth of the same stream, are one of the off-shoots of the Bri-Bris ; so also are the small tribes at Orosi and Tucurrique, who were removed 10 those localities bj' the Spaniards. The Bri-Bri and Cabecar, although dialects of the same original speech, are not sufficiently alike to be mutually intelligi- ble. The Cabecars occupied the land before the Bri-Bris, but were, conquered and are now subject to them. It is probable that their dialedt is more archaic. The Bri-Bri is a language of extreme poverty, and as spoken at present is plainly corrupt. Gabb estimates the total number of words it contains as probably not exceeding fifteen hundred. Some of these, though Gabb thinks not very many, are borrowed from the Spanish ; but it is significant, that among them is the pronoun " that," the Spanish ese. * Apuntes Lexicograficos de las Lenguas y Dialeclos de los Indicts de Costa-Hica. Por Bernardo Augusto Thiel, Obispo de Costa-Rica (San Jos6 de Costa-Rica, 1882. Imprenta Nacional). Brinton.] ' " [Oct. 2, Let us now examine the Bri-Bri verb, said to be so singularly simple. We are at once struck by Mr. Gabb's remark (just after he has been speaking of their unparalleled simplicity) that the inflections he gives " have been verified with as much care as the difficulties of the case would admit." Evidently, then, there were difficulties. What they are become apparent when we attempt to analyze the forms of the eighteen brief paradigms which he gives. The personal pronouns are je, I. sa, we. be, thou. ha, you. ye, he, etc. ye-pa, they. These are both nominative and objective, personal and, with the suffix cha, possessives. The tenses are usually, not always, indicated by suffixes to the theme ; but these vary, and no rule is given for them, nor is it stated whether the same theme can be used with them all. Thus, To burn, v-norka. Present, i-nyor-ket-ke. To cook, i-lu'. " l-luk. To start, i-be-te. " i-bc-te. Here are three forms for the present, not explained. Are they three conjugations, or do they express three shades of meaning, like the three English presents ? I suspect the latter, for under ikiana, to want, Gabb remarks that the form 'm-etke, means " he wants you," i. e., is emphatic. The past aorist has two terminations, one in -na, and one in -e, about the uses and meaning of which we are left equally in the dark. The future is utterly inexplicable. Even Prof. Miiller, just after his note calling attention to the " great simplicity " of the tongue, is obliged to give up this tense with the observation, " the structural laws regulating the formation of the future are still in obscurity 1" Was it not somewhat premature to dwell on 1885.] • ' [Brinton the impliscity of a tongue whose simplest tenses he acknowl- edges himself unable to analyze ? The futures of some verbs will reveal the difficulties of this tense : — To burn, i-nyor-ka; future, i-nyor-wane-ka. To cook, i-lu' ; " i-lu'. To start, i-bete\- " i-bete. To want, i-ki-ana ; " i-kie. To count, ishtaung ; " nxia shta'we. In the last example mia, is the future of the verb, raw, to go, and is used as an auxiliary. The explanation I have to suggest for these varying forms is, either that they represent in fact that very "multiplicity of tense-formations " which Humboldt alluded to, and which were too subtle to be apprehended by Mr. Gabb within the time he devoted to the study of the language ; or that they are in modern Bri-Bri, which I have shown is noticeably corrupted, survivals of these formations, but are now largely disregarded by the natives themselves. Signs of the incorporative plan are not wanting in the tongue. Thus in the objective conjugation not only is the object placed between subject and verb, but the latter may undergo visible synthetic changes. Thus : Je be sueng. I thee see. Ke je be wai su-na. Not I thee (?) see-did. In the latter sentence na is the sign of the past aorist, and the verb in synthesis with it drops its last syllable. The wai Gabb could not explain. It will be noticed that the negative precedes the whole verbal form, thus indicating that it is treated as a collective idea (holophrastically). Prepositions always appear as suffixes to nouns, which, in com- Brinton.] , ubi supra, p. 539. 1885.] •" [Brinton. To forget. Present, I forget, atqui chita uringera. Perfect, I have forgotten, ochita uringea. These examples are sufficient to show that the Brunka con- jugations are neither regular nor simple, and such is the em- phatic statement of Bishop Thiol, both of it and all these allied dialects. In his introduction he states that he is not yet ready to offer a grammar of these tongues, though well supplied with lexicographical materials, and that " their verbs are especially difficult."* The Cabecar dialect, in which he gives several native funeral poems, without translations, is apparently more complicated than the Bri-Bri. The words of the songs are long and seem much syncopated. The Tupi-Guarani Dialects. Several writers of the highest position have asserted that these dialects, spoken over so large a portion of the territory of Brazil, are neither polysynthetic nor incorporative. Thus the late Prof. Charles F. Hartt in his " Notes on the Lingoa Geral or Modern Tupi," expressed himself: — " Unlike the North American Indian tongues, the languages of the Tupi-Guarani family are not poly- synthetic in structure." f With scarcely less positiveness Pro- fessor Friedrich Miiller writes : — " The objective conjugation of the Tupi-Guarani does not show the incorporation usually seen in American languages, but rather a mere collocation." J It is, I acknowledge, somewhat hazardous to venture an opin- ion contrary to such excellent authorities. But I must say, that while, no doubt, the Tupi in its structure differs widely from the * " Especial diflcultad ofrecen los verbos." Apuntes Lexfcograficos, etc. Introd. p. iv. This expression is conclusive as to the incorrectness of the opinion of M. Adam, and Prof. Miiller above quoted, and shows how easily even justly emi- nent linguists may fall into error about tongues of which they have limited means of knowledge. The proper course in such a case is evidently to be cau- tious about venturing positive assertions. t Transactions of the American Philological Association, 1S72, p. 58. X Grundriss der Sprachwissenschafl, Bd. ii, p. 387. Brinton.J oO [Oct. 2, Algonkin or Nahuatl, it yet seems to present unmistakeable signs of both an incorporative and polysynthetic character such as would be difficult to parallel outside of America. I am encouraged to maintain this by the recent example of the erudite Dr. Amaro Cavalcanti, himself well and practically versed in the spoken Tupi of to-day, who has issued a learned treatise to prove that " the dialects spokea by the Brazilian savages present undoubtedly all the supposed characteristics of an agglutinative language, and belong to the same group as the numerous other dialects or tongues of America."* Dr. Caval- canti does not, indeed, distinguish so clearly between agglutina- tive and incorporative languages, as I should wish, but the trend of his work is altogether parallel to the arguments I am about to advance. Fortunately, we do not suffer from a lack of materials to study the Tupi, ancient and modern. There are plenty of dictionaries, grammars and texts in it, and even an " Ollendorff's Method," for those who prefer that intellectual (!) system, f All recent writers agree that the modern Tupi has been materially changed by long contact with the whites. The traders and missionaries have exerted a disintegrating effect on its ancient forms, and often directly in the line of erasing their peculiarities, to some of which I shall have occasion to refer. Turning our attention first to its synthetic character, one can- * The Brazilian Language and Us Agglutination. By Amaro Cavalcanti, LL.B., etc., p. 5 (Rio Janeiro, 1883). fThe most valuable for linguistic researches are the following: Arte de Grammatica da Lingua wris usada na Costa do Brazil. By Joseph de Anchieta. This is the oldest authority, Anchieta having commenced as mis- sionary to the Tupis in 1556. Arte, Vocabutario y Tesoro de la Lengua Guarani, 6 mas bien Tupi. By Antonio Ruiz deMontoya. An admirable work representing the southern Tupi as it was in the first half of the seventeenth century. Both the above have been republished in recent years. Of modern writings I would particularly name : Aponlamentos sobre o Abaheknga tambem chamado Guarani ou l^upi. By Dr. B. C. D'A. Nogueira (Rio Janeiro, 1876). O Selvagem i Curso da Lingua Geral. By Dr. Couto de Magalhaes (Rio de Taneiro, 1876). 1885.] ol [Brinton. not but be surprised after reading Prof. Hartt's opinion above quoted to find him a few pages later introducing us to the fol- lowing example of " word building of a more than usually poly- synthetic character." * akdyu, head ; ayu, bad. akayayu, crazy. muakayayu, to seduce (make crazy). xayumuakayayu, I make myself crazy, etc. Such examples, however, are not rare, as may be seen by turn- ing over the leaves of Montoya's Tesoro de la Lengua Guarani. The most noticeable and most American peculiarity of such com- pounds is that they are not collocations of words, as are the agglutinative compounds of the Ural-Altaic tongues, but of particles and phonetic elements which have no separate life in the language. Father Montoya calls especial attention to this in the first words of his Advertencia to his Tesoro. He says : — " The foundation of this language consists of particles which frequently have no meaning if taken alone ; but when compounded with the whole or parts of others (for they cut them up a great deal in composition) they form significant expressions ; for this reason there are no independent verbs in the language, a3 they are built up of these particles with nouns or pronouns. Thus nemboe is composed of the three particles ne, mo, e. The ne is reciprocal ; mo an active particle ; e indicates skill ; and the whole means 'to exercise oneself,' which we translate, 'to learn,' or 'to teach,' indeterminately; but with the personal sign added, anemboe, ' I learn '." This analysis, which Montoya carries much further, reminds us forcibly of the extraordinarily acute analysis of the Cree (Algonkin) by Mr. James Howse. f Undoubtedly the two * Notes on the Lingoa Oeral, as above, p. 71. t James Howse, A Grammar of the Cree Language (London, 1844). A remark- able production which has never received the attention from linguists which it merits. PROC. AMEK. PHILOS: SOC. XXIII. 121. K. PRINTED OCTOBER 26, 1885. Brinton.] <->-> [Oct. 2, tongues have been built up from significant particles (not words) in the same manner. Some of these particles convey a peculiar turn to the whole sentence, difficult to express in our tongues. Thus the element ' e attached to the last syllable of a compound gives an oppositive sense to the whole expression; for example, ajur, "I come" simply; but if the question follows: "Who ordered you to come?" the answer might be, ajure, "I come of my own accord; nobody ordered me." * Cavalcanti observes that many of these formative elements which existed in the old Tupi have now fallen out of use. f This is one of several evidences of a change in structure in the lan- guage, a loss of its more pliable and creative powers. This synthesis is also displayed in the Tupi, as in the Cree, by the inseparable union of certain nouns with pronouns. The latter are constantly united with terms of consanguinity and generally with those of members of the body, the form of the noun undergoing material modifications. Thus : tete, body ; cete, his body ; xerete, my body. tuba, father ; oguba, his father ; xerub, my father. mymbaba, domestic animal ; gueymba, 4iis domestic animal. tera, name ; guera, his name. Postpositions are in a similar manner sometimes merged into the nouns or pronouns which they limit. Thus : tenonde, before ; guenonde, before him. It appears to me that the substratum, the structural theory, of such a tongue is decidedly polysynthetic and not agglutina- tive, still less analytic. Let us now inquire whether there are any signs of the incor- porative process in Tupi. We are at once struck with the peculiarity that there are two special sets of pronouns used with verbals, one set subjective * Anchieta, Arte de Grammatica, etc., p. 75. t The Brazilian Language, etc., pp. IS-!). 1885.] 83 [Brinton. and the other objective, several of which cannot be employed in any other construction.* This is almost diagnostic of the holo- phrastic method of speech. The pronouns in such cases are evidently regarded by the language-faculty as subordinate acces- sories to the verbal, and whether they are phonetically merged in it or not is a secondary question. The Tupi pronouns (confining myself* to the singular number for the sake of brevity) are as follows : Independent personals. Possessives. Verbal affixes. Subject. Object. ixe or xe. se or xe. a. xe. inde or ne. ne or re. re, yepe. oro. ae or o. ae or i. o. ae or i. The verbal affixes are united to the theme with various pho- netic changes and so intimately as to form one word. The gram- mars give such examples as : — areco, I hold ; guereco, they hold him. ahenoi, I call ; xerenoi, they call me. ayaca, I dispute him ; oroaca, I dispute thee. In the first person, singular, the two pronominal forms xe and a are usually merged in the synthesis xa ; as, xamehen, I love. Another feature pointing to the incorporative plan is the loca- tion of the object. The rule in the old language was to place the object in all instances before the verb, that is, between the verb and its subject when the latter was other than a personal suffix. Dr. Cavalcanti says that this is now in a measure changed, so that when the object is of the third person it is placed after the verb, although in the first and second persons the old rule still holds good.f Thus the ancient Tupis would say: boia ae o-sou, snake him he-bites. * See Anchieta, Arte de Grammatica, etc., p. -52-. t The Brazilian Language, etc,'p. 111. Brinton.] o4 i0ct 2> But in the modern tongue it is : boia o-sou ae. snake he-bites him. With the other persons the rule is still for the object to pre- cede and to he attached to tbe theme : xeoroinca, I thee kill. xepeinca, I you* kill. xeincayepe, me killest thou. Many highly complex verbal forms seem to me to illustrate a close incorporative tendency. Let us analyze lor instance the word, xeremimboe, which means " him whom I teach " or " that which I teach." Its theme is the verbal mboe, which in the extract I have above made from Montoya is shown to be a synthesis of the three ele- mentary particles Tie, mo, and e ; xe is the possessive form of the personal pronoun, "my "; it is followed by the participial expression temi or tembi, which, according to Montoya, is equiva- lent to " illud quod facio ;" its terminal vowel is syncopated with the relative y or i, "him, it"; so the separate parts of the ex- pression are : — xe + tembi + y + Tie + mo + e. I will not pursue the examination of the Tupi further. It were, of course, easy to multiply examples. But I am willing to leave the case as it stands, and to ask linguists whether, in view of the above, it was not a premature judgment that pro- nounced it a tongue neither polysynthetic nor incorporative. The Mirfsun. This is also one of the languages which has been announced as " neither polysynthetic nor incorporative," and the construc- tion of its verb as " simple to the last degree."* *"Kein polysynthesis nnd keine incorporation," says Dr. Heinrich Wink- ler (Uralaltaische VOlker und Sprachen, p. Hit), who apparently has obtained all his knowledge of it from the two pages devoted to it by Professor Friedrich Muller, who introduces it as "Kusserst elnfacb." Grundrisa der Sprachwissen- scha/t, Bd. ii, p. £37. 1885.] ®b [Brinton. We know the tongue only through the Grammar and Phrase- Book of Father de la Cuesta, who acknowledges himself to be very imperfectly acquainted with.it.* With its associated dia- lects, it was spoken near the site of the present city of San Francisco, California. Looking first at the verb, its " extreme simplicity " is not so apparent as the statements about it would lead us to expect. In the first place, the naked verbal theme undergoes a variety of changes by insertion and suffixes, like those of the Quiche and Qquechua, which modify its meaning. Thus : Ara, to give. Arsa, to give to many, or to give much. Arapu, to give to oneself. Arasi, to order to give, etc., etc. Again : Oio, to catch. Oirii, to come to catch. Oimu, to catch another, etc. The author enumerates thirty-one forms thus derived from each verb, some conjugated like it, some irregularly. With re- gard to tenses, he gives eight preterits and four futures ; and it cannot be said that they are formed simply by adding adverbs of time, as the theme itself takes a different form in several of them, aran, aras, aragts, etc. In the reflexive conjugation the pronoun follows the verb and is united with it : As, aragneca, I give myself, where ca is a suffixed form of can, I ; ne, represents nenissia, oneself ; the g, is apparently a connective ; and the theme is ara. This is quite in the order of the polysynthetic theory and is also incorporative. Such syntheses are prominent in imperative forms. Thus from the above-mentioned verb, oio, to catch, we have, oiomilyutSi gather thou for me, * Grammalica Mutsun ; Por el R. P. F. F. Arroyo de la Cuesta; and Vocabulario Mutsun, by the same, both in Shea's "Library of American Linguistics," Brinton.] OO ^0cti 2) in which mit is apparently the second person men, with a post- position tsa, mintsa ; while yuts is a verbal fragment from yuyuts, which the author explains to mean " to set about," or " to get done." This imperative, therefore, is a verbal noun in synthesis with an interjection, " get done with thy gathering." It is a marked case of polysynthesis. A number of such are found in the Mutsun phrases given, as : Rugemitithsyuts cannis, Give me arrows. In this compound cannis, is for can + huas, me + for ; yuts is the imperative interjection for yuyuts ; the remainder of the word is not clear. The phrase is given elsewhere Rugemitit, Give (thou) me arrows. Without going further into this language, of which we know so little, it will be evident that it is very far from simple, and that it is certainly highly synthetic in various features. Conclusions. The conclusions to which the above study leads may be briefly summarized as follows : 1. The structural processes of Incorporation and Polysynthe- sis are much more influential elements in the morphology of language than has been conceded by some recent writers. 2. They are clearly apparent in a number of American lan- guages where their presence has been heretofore denied. 3. Although so long as we are without the means of examin- ing all American tongues, it will be premature to assert that these processes prevail in all, nevertheless it is safe to say that their absence has not been demonstrated in any of which we have sufficient and authentic material on which to base a de- cision. 4. The opinion of Duponceau and Humboldt, therefore, that these processes belong to the ground-plan of American languages, and are their leading characteristics, must be regarded as still uncontroverted in any instance. 1885.] o* [Krauss. Aus Bosnien und der Hercegovina. By Dr. Friedrich S. Krauss. Bead before the American Philosophical Society, Oct. 2, 1885. Die Ethnograpliie als die Wissenschaft von der geistigen Entwicklung und dein geistigen Wachsthuin und Reifen der Volker in Bezug auf ihre innersten gesellschaftlichen Einricktungen, Sitten, Gebraucke, Volks- glauben und was drum und dran sick kniipft, diese Wissenschaft ist in diesem Sinne und Umfange neu, wenn auck nock nickt modern. Wokl kat es seit Herodot bis auf die Gegenwart eine Unzakl Reisender gegeben, die fremde Lander und Volker besuckten und liber dieselben be- rickteten. Die s. g. Reisebesckreibungen rnogen zuweilen reckt wertk- volle Angaben darbieten, dock unsere neue Wissensckaft kann sick damit nun und nimmer begniigen. Dank den ausgezeickneten Verkekrsmitteln der Gegenwart sind Volker und Lander auf friiher unerkorte Weise ein- ander nake geriickt. Fiir den Etknograpken gibt es keine Wunder und keine Fremde mekr. Die Wissensckaft der Etknograpkie spiirt den seeli- scken Ersckeinungen des Volkerlebens iiberall nack, tracktet ihre Wesen- keiten aufs Genaueste festzustellen und iknen auf den Grund zu kommen. Es ist gewiss sckon Nambaftes auf diesem Gebiete geleistet worden, namentlick kat der deutsche Forscher auch hier wie sonst in den Geschiif- ten der geistigen Arbeit Baknbreckendes gesckaffen. Tkatsacklick sind uns nun Volker aufs Eingekendste bekannt von den nordlicken Cthuc'ken bis zu den Patagoniern auf der aussersten Siidspitze Amerikas, iiber die man nock vor funfzig Jakren nur sagenkafte Nackrickten besass. Leider bewakrte sick auck kier die alte Bemerkung, class weite Fremde mekr zur Betracktung und Beobacktung reise als die Heimat. Das ist leickt be- greiflick, denn das Fernliegende, Versckwommene, das undeutlick Ausge- sprockene entziindet die Pkantasie und spornt mekr an als das Nakelie- gende, das Eiukeimiscke. Daraus erklart sick die bedauerlicke Tkatsacke, class uns mancke kleine Volkersckaften, die mit unserer Volkersippe in keiner Weise in Beriik- rung steken, fast bekannter sind als unsere niicksten Nackbaren, unsere uns durck gemeinsame Abstammung, Spracke, Sitte und Brauck enge verwandten Siidslaven. Sie werden sick verwundert fragen : ,,Ware es denn moglick, dass die Siidslaven nickts clazu getkan kiitten, class man iiber ikrVolkstkum ausrei- ckenden Besckeid von iknen selbst erkielte?" Diese Frage ist ebenso be- recktigt als der Vorwurf den einige siidslaviscke Sckriftsteller gegen miek erkoben : ,Aber das sind ja lauter altbekannte Dinge, iiber welcke man- ckcr Bauer mekr weiss als Du !' Freilick, gewisse Ersckeinungen, der Gegenwart zum Mindesten, sind denjenigen zum Tkeil wokl bekannt, die an jenen Sitten und Gebraucken festkalten, gerade so wie der Bauer die Pfla.nzen seiner Fluren, die Kniut- lerin ikre Heilwurzeln kennt, 1st aber deskalb, der Bauer, der die Fruckt Krauss.] OO [Oct. 2, saet und einlieimst, ist die Krautlerin bei alien ihren getrockneten Krau- terbiiscbeln ein Botaniker ? Die Siidslaven konnen sich wohl einiger ausgezeickneten Sammlungen von Volksliedern, Sagen, Marcken, Spriickwortern und audi zweier grosser Sammelwerke iiber Sitten und Gebriiucke beriikmen. Zu einer eigentlick wissensckaftlicken Verarbeitung dieses Stofies finden sick bei iknen nickt viel mekr als wenige Anliiufe. Ein wustes, bracbliegendes Gebiet eroffnet sick kier dem Forscker. Die antkropologiscke Gesellsckaft in Wien nakm sick der Sacke zuerst an, um die Wissensckaft der siidslaviscken Etknograpkie allzeitig zu kegen und zu pflegen. Von der Gesellsckaft ermuntert, publizirte ick in ikren Mittkeilungen zwei grossere Abkandlungen iiber siidslaviscke Pest- und Hexensagen, und bald darauf wieder im Auftrage der Gesellsckaft, auf Grundlage zaklrei- cker gedruckter und ungedruckter keimiscker Quellen, mein grosses Werk Sitte und Branch der Sudslaven. Durck die Veroffentlickung ei- nes etknograpkiscken Fragebogens iiber die Sudslaven — der Bogen ent- kalt an tausend Fragen — kat sick die Gesellsckaft ein besonderes Verdienst um die Erforsckung siidslaviscken Volkstkums erworben. Wokl gelang- ten die meisten Fragen zur Beantwortung, dies allein konnte aber nickt geniigen, deskalb sandte mick die Gesellsckaft im Sommer des Vorjakres auf eine etknograpkiscke Forsckungsreise nack dem Balkan aus, damit ick an Ort und Stelle Erkebungen pfiege. Vor Kurzem kabe ick meine Reise bcendet. Ick begieng einen Tbeil von Slavonien und Dalmatien, kauptsiicklick aber das Occupationsgebiet, Bosnien und die Hercegovina. Der Weg den ick durckgemessen betiagt nickt viel mekr als Dreitau- send Km. Auf den ersten Blick gewiss wenig im Verkaltniss zu der auf- gewandten Zeit. Im Flug und im Vorubergeken gewinnt man aber keine bedeutenden etknograpkiscken Ergebnisse. Hier gilt es unermiidlick be- obacbten und wieder beobackten. Die Gekeimnisse des Volkslebens mussen abgelausckt, konnen nickt mit Hast ergriffen werden. Ick bereiste die Flussgebiete der Bosna mit ikren Hauptzufiussen der BobovaZa, Lama, Tesanjka und der Spreca, ferner das Gebiet der Drina und der Brinata, des Vrbas, der Neretva und der Rama und der Cetina und den grossten Tkeil des ebenen bosniscken Lavelandes. Das katte seinen guten Grand, deun kings der Fliisse wokntimmer eine dicktere und reickere ackerbautreibende Bevolkerung, bei welcker sick die Aeusserungen des Volksgeistes reger betbatigen als bei dem vereinzelt im Hockgebirge kausenden Hirten. Indessen besuckte ick auck das ganze Hockgebirge der Hhtjevica und der Ireskavica planina und zog von Livno iiber das Hockplateau von Malovan nordlick bis zu den Auslaufern des Kunar, des Otrosa und der Oralwvica. Der Reiseplan kiitte gewiss nock zweckmiissiger eingericktet sein kon- nen, ware es mir nur moglick gewesen irgendwie vor der Reise die etkno- grapkiscken Verbiiltnisse des Landes genauer kennen zu lerneu. Wokl 1885.] "J [Krauss. bewahrheitet sich kier ein altes "Wort in neuer Fassung: ,,Der Zigeuner, der Hausirer und der Ethnograph finden iiberall eine Auslese. " Uebrigens lachelte mir auf meiner Reise sonniges Gliick zu, indem icb ein ethno- grapbiscbes Material in unerhorter Menge und von unscbiitzbareni Wertbe aufgesammelt. Der blosse Abdruck dieses Stoffes diirfte bei sieben starke Biinde in Grossoctav unifassen. Mebr als in fliichtigen Umrissen die Art dieses Stoffes anzudeuten, ist nicht rnoglich innerbalb des engen Rabmens dieses Vortrages. Bosnien und die Hercegovina werden von nabezu 1,300,000 Seelen be- wohnt. Davon sind bei 600,000 Maboniedaner, etwas weniger Alt- glaubige, bei 200,000 Katholiken und an fiinftausend Juden, spanischer Abstammung. Letztere bedienen sich untereinander im Umgange eines verballhornten Spanisch, leben von der iibrigen Bevolkerung streng abge- sondert und haben ibre eigenen gesellscbaftlichen und religiosen Ge- braucbe, die in Vielem von den Gebrauchen deutscher Juden abweichen. Die allgemeine Landesspracbe bestebt bauptsachlicb aus zwei von ein- ander unwesentlicb verscbiedenen Mundarten, der serbiscbe-kroatischen Scbriftspracbe. Ricbtiger gesagt, die angenommene Scbriftsprache ist ein Abklatscb der besonderen bercegovinischen Mundart, die von Trebinje und Gacko gesprochen wird. Ethnographisch betrachtet hat man ein Volk vor sich, in Wirklichkeit aber begegnet man drei durch religiose Anschauungen, Erziehung und Bildung streng abgesonderten Religionsekten. Nur dem Ethnograpben gelten Sprachgrenzen als Grenzen eines Volkes. Eine solche Auflassung kann sich freilich nur bei einem geistig hochstehenden Culturvolke allge- meineren Ein gang ver&chaffen. Fragt man einen Deutschen oder einen Franzosen oder einen Englander: ,Was bist Du?' so wird der Deutsche antworten, er sei ein Deutscher, der Franzose ein Franzose, der Englander ein Englander. Frage man einen Bosnjaken und er nennt sich entweder einen Turken oder Altglaubigen oder Katboliken. Seine Sprache heisst der Bosnier sowohl als der Hercegoviner die bosni- sche oder gewohnlich ,unsere Sprache' naski. Diese ,,unsere" Sprache wimmelt von alien moglichen tiirkischen, arabischen und zum Theil per- sischen, deutschen, griechischen, albanesischen, italienischenund magyari- schen Bezeichnungen fiir die gewohnlichsten Gegenstiinde des Alltagsle- bens. Jedes sechste Wort ist ein Fremdwort. Sowohl das Haupt- als das Zeitwort erfuhren dabei slaviscbe Wandlungen. In syntaktischer Be- ziehung hat die tiirkische Sprache vielfach auf die slaviscbe eingewirkt, so wie sich ein nachhaltiger Eintluss auch im Sagen und Marchenscbatze des Volkes unverkennbar geltend macht. Ein ethnographisches Curiosum bildet die handschriftlich weit ver- breitete mahomedanisch-slavische Kunstliteratur. Es sind dies Lieder meist lehrhaften Inhaltes zu Schulzwecken nach arabischen Vorbildern angefertigt. Hier ist jedes zweite Wort ein Lehnwort. Form und Inhalt dieser Lieder widerstreben ganz und gar dem slavischen Geiste. PKOC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. L. PRINTED OCTOBER 26, 1885. Krauss.] ^ [Oct. 2, Geschrieben sind diese Werkclien mit tiirkiscbcn Sckriftzeichen. Von den Mahomedanern sind wohl liber 60% des Scbreibens und Lesens tiirkiscb kundig. Die altbosnische Qlagolica ist gegenwiirtig deui Volke unbekannt, nur in einigen mabomedanischen Adelsfamilien, z. B. bei den Cengic in Sarajevo und bei den Ljubavic in der Hercegovina nocb im inne- ren Verkebr in Uebung. Da der Handel und das Gewerbe fast aus- schliesslicb von altglaubigen Serben betrieben wird, so ist es natiirlicb dass die cyrillische Scbrift mebr als jede andere tiiglicb an Verbreitung gewinnt. Der Bauer auf den Dorfern beniitzt dagegen Kerbstocke, selbst zu Mittheilungen, statt eines Briefes, da die Kerbezeicben auf altberge- brachten Ueberlieferungen bernbend, iiberall im Lande gekannt sind. Die Kerbe sind zum Tbeil der Glagolica, zum Tbeil den romiscben Zahl- zeicben nacbgebildet. Auch recbnet der Bauer wesentlich mit romiscben Zahlzeicben, wie der Rorner vor 2000 Jahren. In Bosnien wobnt der reicbere Mabomedaner in einstockigen, unsaube- ren Holzbausern mit gewaltigen TburmdJicbern. Erkennbar ist das Haus jedes Mabomedaners an der spitzen Wetterstange auf dem Dacbe und an der boben Verzaunung, die den Einblick in den Hofraum wehrt. Arme Leute wohnen in niedrigen, scbmutztriefenden Hiitten. So siebt der ver- korperte Jammer aus. In der Hercegovina sind bei Arm wie Reicb die Bebausungen nach dalmatiniscber Art aus Stein gebaut, denn das Land ist zu dreiviertel graulicb entwaldet. Da kann man oft einen ganzen Tag reisen ohne einen scbattenspendenden Baum zu finden. Die Herce- govina ist ein versteinertes Elend. Die Stadte sind nichts anderes als grosse Dorfer, deren Bewobner sich zumeist von Ackerbau und Viebzucbt nahren. Die beimiscbe Industrie arbeitet jetzt so wie vor Jabrbunderten und vermag kaum den Bediirf- nissen der anspruchslosen Bevolkerung gerecbt zu werden. Da die Stadte zumeist an den Abhiingen steiler Anboben oder in Scblucbten erbaut sind, wo sie von starker Befestigung beschiitzt wurden, so ist nur bei wenigen Stadten Wachsthum und Entwicklung von Vorneberein moglicb. Unge- sund und unrein sind alle, sammt und sonders. Die Dorfer be9teben aus weit von einander abgelegenen Geboferscbaf- ten, von welcben mancbe fur sicb ein kleines Dorf bilden, da nocb die Hausgemeinscbaft mit zablreicbem Kopfbestande ziemlicb biiufig ist. So z. B. leben in dem Dorfe Gornja Dragunja bei Srebrenik sieben verbei- ratete Briider Martinovio sammt ihren Nacbkommen und Seitenverwand- ten in einer Hausgemeinscbaft. In der Hercegovina ist diese gesellscbaft- liche Einrichtung weitaus seltener, weil die Lebensbedingungeu fiir grosse Familien von der Natur nicbt gegeben sind. Indessen bildet als Ersatz fiir die Hausgemeinscbaft die Bruderschaft (bractvo) und der Stamm (plene) ein die kleineren Hausbestiinde einigendes Band. Bedeutsam sind unter den Baulicbkeiten im Lande die zabllosen Rund- tbiirme mit Auslugwarten und die zerfallenen Burgen, deren man iiber- all welcbe findet. Auf jedem Hiigel, auf jeder Anbobe mit weitem Fernblick stebt nocb 1885.] ***■ [Krauss. oder stand einst eine Veste. Selten sind welche Namen von den Ruinen bekannt, man nennt sie einfach bloss Kula oder Grad. Ebenso wenig oder, genau gesagt, gar nichts weiss das Volk liber die altbosnischen Graber und Tunnele sachlicbes zu berichten. Solcher Graber sah ich an 12,000 ; ihre Zabl in Bosnien und der Hercegovina diirfte leicht das Dreifache davon betragen. Dieses Dunkel liber die Vergangenbeit findet darin seine Erklarung, dass die alte Bevolkerung von Bosnien und der Hercegovina vor zwei- bundert Jabren einem machtigen Andrange neuer Ansiedler weichen musste. Nachdem die mahoniedanischen Slaven, die docb den Grundstock der tiirkischen Macbt in Europa bildeten, Ungarn, Kroatien und Slavonien raumen mussten, zogen die mahomedaniscben Likaer in die obere Krajina von Banjaluka bis Udbina, Skoplje, Livno und Glaraol ; die slavoniscben Mabomedaner besiedelten die Hercegovina und Mittelbosnien, wahrend die Mabomedaner aus Ungarn das ganze Drinagebiet, sowobl auf der ser- biscben Seite als auf bosnischer, von Bala bis Srebrenica und die Treska- vica bis Olovo und Maglaj und die Romanija fiir sicb in Ansprucb nahmen. Die cbristlicbe Bevolkerung musste diesem Ansturm weicben. Zu jener Zeit wanderten die Bosnier nacb Slavonien und Kroatien, die Hercegovi- ner nacb der Cruagora, Serbien und Dalmatien aus. Dagegen zogen gegen die Mitte des vorigen Jahrhundertes bei bunderttausend Dalma- tiner nach Ostbosnien ein. Also erklart es sicb, wie in Slavonien die alte ikavische und in Dalmatien die kroatiscbe cakavische Mundart durcb die bosnisch-hercegovinische verdrangt worden, wahrend die letzere durcb ibre weite geograpbiscbe Ausbreitung zur allgemeinen Verkebrsspracbe der Siidslaven sicb erhob. Ueber diese Vorgange erhalt man durcb die Heldenlieder, die zu den Gusle gesungen werden, klarsten Aufscbluss, denn die Auswanderer und Einwanderer baben die Tbaten ibrer Vorfabren getreulich im Liede ver- ewigt. Kein Volk der Erde kann sicb eines so reichen Schatzes episcber Lieder beriibmen als die Siidslaven, und zwar unter diesen besonders die Bosnier und nocb mehr als diese die Hercegoviner. Ich allein notirte liber 60,000 Verse bloss des episcben Volksliedes und zwar hauptsachlich des mahomedaniscb-slaviscben. Das Epos des katholischen Bosniers ist ganz verkiimmert, wie denn iiberbaupt der Katbolike unter der strengen Bevormundung von Seiten seiner Geistlicbkeit am Wenigsten alte slavische Sitten und Brauche bei- bebalten. Unendlicb reicbbaltiger und mannigfaltiger ist das Volksleben der Alt- glaubigen, die sicb Serben nennen. Ibre Geistlicbkeit ist nicbt zum geringsten Tbeil so gut wie illiterat und unterscbied sicb bis vor der Occupation iiusserlich durcb nicbts als durcb langen Bart und lange Haare von der iibrigen Bevolkerung. Der Priester war Bauer, Wirtb oder Kaufmann, wie sonst einer im Lande. Das kircblicbe Ceremoniell iibte keinen bedeutenden Einfluss aus, so Krauss.] "^ [Oct. 2, dass der Bauer an uralthergebrachten heidnischen Vorstellungen noch. irnmer festbiilt. Vile (Waldfraulein), DM (Riesen), Mora (die Trut oder Mar), Vjestiee (Hexen) und noch eine schwere Menge derartiger mysti- scher Gestalten sind ihm gerade so wie den Mahoraedanern thatsachliche Wesen. Noch feiert der Serbe, wie sein Urvorfahr vor eintausend Jah- ren, das Sippenfest und das Fest der winterlichen und sommerlichen Sonnenwende. Alle drei Sekten huldigen aber einem gemeinsamen Alltags-Aberglau- ben, einem wahnwitzvollen Gemisch unverdauter ostlicher und westlicher Angstbrauereien. Madchenraub oder, milder gesagt, Entfuhrung kommt noch ziemlich haufig vor und gilt als Heldenthat. Polygamic gestatten sich nur reichere Mabomedaner. Das Weib ist dem Bosnjaken ein unbesoldeter Knecht fur Alles. Merkwiirdig istauf jeden Fall der iiberhandnehmende Brauch, dass das Madchen von selbst zu ihrem Auserwahlten ins Haus kommt. Eine solche wird samodosla oder uskoMca genannt. Die Trauung findet oft erst nach Jahren statt. Dabei ersparten die Eltern die Ausstattung, der Brau- tigam den kostspieligen Hochzeitsschmaus. Das epische Lied des Serben is wesentlich ein Rachegesang des Unter- driickten und Verzweifelten, der den Mabomedaner fur vogelfrei erklart. Daraus haben sich Rechtsanschauungen heraus entwickelt, die vielfach von den altslavischen abweichen. Ein grosser Theil dieser Lieder ist nach einer gewissen Schablone gearbeitet und strotzt von sagenhaften Uebertreibungen. Uebrigens ist der Grundstock dieser Lieder schon friiher gesammelt worden. Es ist kein Uebelwollen, wenn ich bebaupte, dass man auf Grund die- ser serbischen Lieder das siidslavische Volksthum in seiner Allgemeinheit nicht beurtheilen darf. Mir war es gegonnt, an einem unendlich reiche- ren und klareren Borne der Volksdichtung zu schopfen und zwar die mahomedanisch-slavische Epik zu entdecken. Der slavische Mahomedaner stand zu dem Sultan in Konstantinopel im Verhaltniss des Feudalherrn gegenliber dem obersten Lehensgeber. Die Lehenspflicht bestand darin, dass der Slave die Reichsgrenzen gegen Deutschland zu vor feindlichen Einfallen bewachen musste. Sonst war er unumschriinkt Herr und Gebieter und durfte selbst auf eigene Faust Fehlziige unternehmen. Hier lernt man den Siidslaven als Sieger in grossen Kriegsunternehmungen kennen — einen Slaven, der abenteuerlus- tig bis nach Italien, Malta and Egypten zur See, und zu Lande bis Her- mannstadt und Wien vordringt, und seine alte Sitte und seiner Vorfahren Brauch als Panier hochhiilt. Der Mahomedanismus war zu jener Zeit fur den Slaven nur ein Deckmantel ; deshalb spielt das religiose Moment bei den Kriegsziigen fast gar keine Rolle. Ilier haben wir ein allseitig aus- gebildetes slavisches Ritterthum vor uns, mit alien den uns durch mittel- alterliche Dichtung wohlbekannten Ritterspielen, Gelageu, Miidchenprei sen bei Wettrennen und dergl. Und audi der Sanger fehlte nie. 1885.] J& [Krauss. Nur der Freie hat ein freies Lied. Der slavische Mahomedaner ist mit Nichten der Fanatiker, als den ihn Priester anderer Religionen ver- schrieen. In seinen Liedern erkennt er des Nichtmahoinedaners Tugen- den ebenso gerecbt an als wiiren es die seinigen. Selbst der eigenen erlittenen Niederlagen schiimt er sich nicht. Sein Epos ist, wie das der alten Griechen, objectiv gehalten, grossartig in der Darstellung und zuweilen von einer bedeutenden Gedankentiefe. Welch gewaltige Selbst- ironie liegt z. B. in den Worten, mit welchen der Sanger die Schilderung einer Schlacht bei Mohd6 abschliesst : Bilojada i tamo i amo. Sve je polje Khrvca potopila, Crna khrvca turska ko i vlaska. Tupo khrvi vlah i turcinbraca. Jammer gab es driiben so wie hiiben. Ueberschwemmt vom Blute war das Schlachtf'eld. Schwarz ist gleich das Blut von Christ wie Tiirke, Tiirke und Christ sind bier durch Blut verbriidert. Das mahomedanisch-slavische Lied gestattet uns den weitesten Einblick in die Verhiiltnisse der engeren Familie, der Sippe und des Stammes. Die Rechtsverwicklungen, welche Anlass zu verschiedenen Fehden geboten, und wie diese Fehden ausgetragen wurden, machen uns mit den slavi- schen Rechtsanscbauungen auf s Eingehendste vertraut, zeigen uns den Siidslaven als bedeutsames Glied in der Kette indogermanischer Volker- schaften. In Mostar erscheinen in wenigen Tagen zwei Biichlein solcher Lieder und in Ragusa werden gegenwiirtig zwei grosse Epen gedruckt, von welchen das eine, Smailagi6 Meho, 2173 Verse, das andere, Golotinja Bogjulagib Ibro, 1725 Verse ziihlt. Ein reichhaltiger Commentar er- leichtert das Verstiindniss der Dichtungen. Die zwei letzteren Epen behandeln Episoden aus der Abenddammerung tiirkischer Macht in Ungarn, wo die Tiichtigkeit der tiirkischen Waffen schon der Vergan- genheit augehorte, wo der mahomedanische Slave allein noch der Schiitzer des Reiches war. Hatte sich durch irgend einen Zufall das ganze Siidslaventhum um die grime Fahne des Propheten geschaart, wohl ware die serbiscbe Sprache von Wien bis Konstantinopel zur allgemeinen Volkssprache geworden. Die tausend slavischen Lehnworte im magya- rischen Sprachschatze sind wiihrend der hundertundsechzigjahrigen ma- homedanisch-slavischen Herrschaft in Ungarn aufgenommen worden, nicht aber, wie man annimmt, zur Zeit der magyarischen ersten Einwan- derung. Aus diesen Liedern erwirbt man Kenntniss liber ethnographische Verhiiltnisse einer Zeit, iiber die uns sonst keine ausreichenden Nachrich- ten zur Verfiigung stehen. Doch nicht bloss inhaltlich, sondern auch formell, sind die mahomeda- nisch-slavischen Lieder bemerkenswerth. Diese Lieder sind Meisterstiicke Cope.] J4 [0ct> 2, volksthiimlicher Erzahlungskunst. Nicht fiinf Verse konnte man daraus ausscheiden, ohne das Ganze zu schadigen. Solche Schopfungen eines urwiichsigen Volksgeistes gehoren, ebenso wie die Homerischen Gesiinge und das Nibelungenlied, der Weltliteratur an. Ausser den 60,000 Versen meiner Sainrnlung erlangte die Gesell- schaft von Herrn Prof. Miroslav Alacevic in Spalato eine ungedruckte Sammlung dalrnatinischer epischer Volkslieder. Diese Sammlung ziihlt iiber 30,000 Verse. Ferner sind uns noch von anderen Correspondenten von alien Seiten des slavischen Sudens iiber 50,000 Verse, nebst zahlrei- chen anderen Beitriigen zur Volkskunde eingescbickt worden, so dass wir mit gerechtem Stolze behaupten diirfen, dass durcb die Verarbeitung und Veroffentlichung dieses gewaltigen Stofies das Siidslaventhum in ethno- graphischer Hinsicht endlich aucb eine der neuen Wissenschaft wiirdige Beleuchtung erfahren wird. Das kann dann, als das endgiltige Ergeb- niss meiner Reise gelten. Catalogue of the Species of Batrachians and Reptiles contained in a collection made at Pebas, Upper Amazon, by John Hauxwell. By E. D. Cope. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 2, 1SS5. ) The contents of a previous collection made at Pebas by Mr. Hauxwell are enumerated in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society for 1870, page 553. It included ten species of batrachians, four of lizards, and nine of snakes. The present collection embraces six species of ba- trachians, eleven of lizards, and fifteen species of snakes. The total num- ber of species obtained is, fifteen batrachians, fourteen lizards, and twenty-three species of. snakes. A considerable collection was made in the same region by the late Professor Orton, and the species are enumer- ated and described in the Journal of the Philadelphia Acadamy of 1875, p. 159. A previous collection, made by Professor Orton, is described in the Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy for 1868, and one from Western and Central Peru is reported on in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society for 1877. These collections form the basis of a general review of the herpetology of Peru, which the writer hopes to publish with illustrations at no distant day.* * Some species were obtained in the same region byProf. Steere of Ann Arbor, Mich., and my thanks are due to this gentleman for the opportunity of exam- ining them. From near Tarapota come the following species: Dendrobates triviltatus Spix; Leptodactylus pacilochilus Cope; Neusticurus ecplcopus Cope; Polychrus marmoratus L. From Tombez : Bufo hcematiticus Cope ; Hyla phccota Cope. From the MamorC River in Eastern Bolivia, Dr. E. R. Heath presented to the museum of Ann Arbor the following species: 1. Amphisbama alba L.; 2. Pseu- doSryx mimeticus sp. nov. The genus Pseudoeryx Tsch., 1826, is the Hydrops Wag- ler, 1830, and Dimadcs Gray, 1843. It includes two banded species, the present 1885.] -JO [Cope. Batrachia. Hyla favosa, sp. nov. The internal nares are about as large as the choanal, and are a little longer than wide. The patches of vomerine teeth are between them, opposite a point anterior to their middle. The head is short and wide, and the canthus rostralis is rounded and concave. The muzzle is truncate viewed in profile, and the nostrils, though opening laterally, are terminal in position. The tympanum is small, being one-half the long diameter of the eye-slit, or a little less than half that of the eyeball. It is a little larger than the digital palettes of the anterior foot. On all the upper sur- faces the skin is smooth.. The usual areolation covers the abdomen and part of the femora. The three external fingers are about half webbed, the web not reaching the palettes of the third and fifth digits. The toes are more than half webbed, the membrane reaching the dilatations of all the toes except the fourth, where it reaches the base of the penultimate phalange. When the posterior limb is extended, the heel reaches the front border of the orbit. The upper arm is bound to the side for the greater part of its length by a strong extension of the skin. A trace only is seen at the anterior base of the femur. one and the P. plicatilis Linn., and two ringed species, the P. martii Spix and P. callostictus Gthr. The P. mimeticus has a remarkable resemblance to the 'Hydro- calamus guinguevittatus (D. & B.) Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc, 1884, p. 176. The scuta of the head are as in the P. plicatilis. Dorsal region brown for a width of five and two half rows of scales. Sides, on the third and fourth and half of the second and fifth rows, marked with a black band, which extends from the orbit to end of the tail, and is yellow-bordered above. Below yellow with two small brown spots on each gastrostege and one on each urostege. Lips black, yellow spotted ; a yellow band from eye to angleof mouth. Afewsmall blackish spots on top of muzzle. Gastrosteges 163 ; anal 1-1; urosteges35. Total length M. .490 ; of tail .056. 3. Liophis almadensis Wagl. 4. Herpetodryas fuscits Linn. 5. Xencdon biprceoculis, sp. nov. Body much compressed, and scales in nine- teen longitudinal rows, and scarcely alternating. Anal plate entire. Eye large, profile convex. Superior labials eight, fourth and fifth entering orbit; seventh very wide above. Oculars 2-2, the anterior narrow, permitting the posterior angle of the large loreal to almost reach the orbit. Temporals 1-5; the anterior asdeepaslong. Bothinternasalsandprefrontalsalittle widerthan long. Frontal- large, wide in front, longer than common suture of parietals. Parietals as wide as long. Ten inferior labials, the sixth much the largest. Geneials very short, the anterior a little the longer. Gastrosteges, 136; urosteges, 44. Color above olivaceous with three rows of equidistant spots. These are composed of coarse, black punctulations, and are without definite outline. Every third spot of the median line is in the centre of a pale ground, while the pairs between are con- nected by a dark shade. Inferior surfaces yellow; every other, or every second gastrostege, with a blackish edging at each end. Top of head olive, with black punctulations symmetrically arranged, so as to leave a curved unspotted space between /the orbits and on the external border of the parietals. Labial plates unspotted. A very narrowblack line from eye to superior border of last labial. Total length M. .590; of tail, .101. From its compressed form and natural coil, this species might be supposed to have arboreal habits. It agrees with three other species in its entire anal plate ; vis., X, suspectus Cope ; X. colubrinus Gunth ; and X. anguslirostris Pet. In X. rhabdocephalus Boie, I find the anal plate entire or divided. 6. Elaps surinamensis Cuv. Cope.] Ju [0cfc< 2, The color of the upper surface is a brown, which is interrupted by a coarse honeycomb or net-like pattern of a bright yellow color. The inclosed spaces are as large or larger than the eye, excepting on the sides of the head and body and on the foreliinbs, where they are smaller. They are distinct on the external two digits on both feet. The posterior faces ot the femur, with all the inferior surfaces are uniform brown. The eyelids are of a paler brown, but whether this is due to the condition of the speci- men or not, is uncertain. Measurements. M. Length of head and body 635 Length to line connecting posterior borders of tympana. .010 Width of head at do 012 Length of fore limb 0233 " " foot 010 " hind limb 056 " tibia 019 " " posterior foot 026 " " astragalus 011 This species belongs to the same type as the Hyla leucophyllata. Its coloration is unique in the genus. An allied species or subspecies has been brought from the Purus river, Brazil, by Prof. Steere, of Ann Arbor, Mich. It agrees in all respects with the H. favosa, but the heel reaches the end of the muzzle, and the color of the superior surfaces differs. The yellow covers the dorsal region, an imperfect reticulate pattern being only visible on the sides of the head and body. Hyla marmorata Daud. PlTHECOPCS TOMOPTERNUS Cope. Ceratophrys dors ata Wied. Dendrobates tinctorius Schn. Dendrobates trivittatus Spix. Lacertilia. Mabuia agilis Raddi. Mionyx parietalis Cope, gen. et sp. nov. In his monograph of the Ecpleopodine division of the Teidae, Professor Peters referred the known species to five genera, three of which were divided into subgenera. The definitions of most of these groups were derived from the pholidosis, the exception being Iphisa (Gray), which was defined by the lack of claws on the pollices. I am of the opinion that Professor Peters was not fortunate in his selection of the pholidosis as the basis of generic and subgeneric divisions. Although such a system may associate species which agree in general appearance, and hence be thought by some to be "natural," it is certain that the various forms of scales pass into each other by such gradations, as to be unavailable for the Q7 1885.] '" [Cope characterization of tangible divisions. On the other hand, Professor Peters quite overlooked important characters of the squamation of the head, such as are usually found to distinguish natural genera in other families, includ- ing them only in his descriptions of the species. I propose to give a syn- opsis of the genera of this group as they appear to me. One result is a con- siderable reduction in the number of names. Agreeing with Dr. Boulen- ger that these species do not form a family distinct from the Teidse, I define them as a group in that family with the nostril pierced in a single plate. I. " Thumbs without claws." A series of scuta on the nape ; frontonasal and frontoparietal scuta present. Iphisa Gray. II. Claws all straight, conic. No nucleal scuta ; frontoparietals and frontonasals present. .Mionyx Cope. III. Claws curved, present on all digits. a. Dorsal series of large scuta. Scuta in separate longitudinal series ; forming keels on the tail Neusticurus D. & B. Scuta continuous, transverse ; frontonasal and frontoparietal scuta Placosoma Tsch. aa. No larger series of dorsal scuta. Frontonasals and frontoparietals present Leposoma Spix. Frontoparietals, but no frontonasals Proctoporus Tsch. No frontoparietals or frontonasals Emphrassiotis O'Sh. In the above arrangement there is included, under Iphisa, Perodactylus R. & L. Leposoma includes nearly all the reputed genera of Peters and other authors, viz : Loxopholis Cope : Cercosaura "Wagl. ; Pantodac- tylus D. & B. ; Ecpleopus D. & B. ; Aspidolmmnus Pet. ; Euspondylus Tsch. ; Aryalia Gray (Peters) ; Chalcidolepis Cope ; Xestosaurus Pet. ; and Pris- tidactylus O'Sh. Proctoporus Tsch. includes Pholidobolus Pet., Oreosaurus Pet., and species referred to Ecpleopus by O'Shaughnessy. Of the species referred to the group Leposoma, as originally restricted, but two have the abdominal scuta acute posteriorly, viz : the L. scincoides Spix, and the L. carinicaudatum Cope. The other species referred by O'Shaughnessy and Peters to that group have, according to them, the abdominal scuta trun- cate posteriorly, and must hence be referred to the group Loxopholis Cope, of which L. rugiceps Cope is type. These are the L. dispar Peters, and L. buckleyi O'Sh. The species thus arranged will be as follows : Mionyx parietalis Cope. Leposoma carinicaudatum Cope. Iphisa elegans Gray. " rugiceps Cope. '* modesta R. & L. " dispar Pet. Neusticurus bicarinatus L. " buckleyi O'Sh. ecpleopus Cope. " ocellatum Wagl. Placosoma cordylinum Tsch. " humile Pet. Leposoma scincoides Spix. " olivaceum Gray. PROP. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. M. PRINTED NOVEMBER 7, 1885. Cope.] *'o [Oct. 2, Leposoma reticulatum O'Sh. Leposoma guenUieri O'Sli. " picticeps Cope. " olivaceum Gray. " vertebrate O'Sh. " marmoratnm Gray . " schreibersii Wiegm. " poecilochilus L. & Von M. " bivittatum Cope. " metalticvm, Cope. " concolor Tsch. " bogotense~Pe[. " argulusVet. Proctoporus pacliyurus Tsch. " gaudicJiaudi~D. & B. " unicolor Gray. " affinisPet. " fraseri O'Sh. " maculatum Tsch. " oculatus O'Sh. " rhombiferum Gthr. " montium Peters. " acutirostre'Pet. " striatus Pet. ' ' ocellatum Gray. ' ' luctuosus Pet. " strangulatum Cope. Emphrassiotis simoterus O'Sh. The species numher as follows : Mionyx , 1 Iphisa 2 Neusticurus 2 Placosoma 1 Leposoma 28 Proctoporus 7 Emphrassiotis 1 Total ,42 The characters of the genus Mionyx are the following : First toe of both anterior and posterior extremities with rudimental straight claw ; claws of other digits small, straight and conic. Prefrontal and fronto- parietal plates present and distinct from each other. Ear-drum exposed. No distinct collar. Femoral pores present. Pholidosis squamous, nearly homogeneous. Char, specif. These resemble those of the group Leposoma within that genus. The scales are imbricate and keeled, with acute posterior borders above and below. When the epidermis is lost the inferior scales are nearly truncate.* The dorsal and ventral scales are subequal and form twenty- one transverse series between the anterior and posterior limbs, across the back. Behind the auricular meatus, and in the axilla, they are coarsely granular. The upper and lower arms are covered with large keeled scales, although those of the posterior side of the former are smaller than those on the anterior side. The hind leg is similarly surrounded by large keeled scales, excepting on a band on the posterior side of the femur where they are granular. There is a transparent disk of the lower eyelid, which is covered by two scales. The plates of the head are smooth. There is a loreal plate * The truncation of the abdominal scales in the L. rwgiceps is seen in the epi- dermis as well as the true skin. 1885.1 ' ' ' I Cope. which is higher than long, and projects at an angle between two preocu- lars. Of these the superior is large and extends partly over the eye, leaving only three narrow superciliaries. There are four well-developed supra- orbitals. The large internasal is about as wide as long. The frontonasals are well in contact by suture. The frontal is considerably longer than wide, as are also the frontoparietals. The interparietal is large, as wide as long, and would be a regular hexagon, but that the posterior border is rounded. The parietals are much smaller and trapezoidal, and longer than wide. No occipitals. Temporals small, squamous. Superior labials seven, separated from the orbit by a row of narrow suborbital scales. Inferior labials five. A symphyseal and an undivided postsymphyseal. Four infralabials, of which the first two are in contact, and the last two separated by flat scales, the fourth truncate posteriorly ; no distinct pec- toral scales. The limbs are slender ; when pressed to the side, the fingers reach to the middle of the tibia, and the toes to a little beyond the elbow. The toes themselves are weak and slender. The first digit is rudimental, and the second and fifth are very short, and of subequal length on the fore foot ; and on the posterior foot, the second is a little the longer. The third digit is shorter than the fourth on both feet. They are all protected by a single row of flat scales below. The femoral pores extend entirely across in front of the anal scuta ; there are ten on each side of the middle line. Of anal scuta there are six, arranged as follows : Two small ones on the middle line, one of which is marginal, and the other anterior to it ; one large one on each side of these, also marginal ; and a small one on the external side of these, also marginal. Color, brown ; dark above, pale below, darkest on the sides. The exact color is probably lost, as the specimen is not in the best condition. Side of head with some yellow spots. Lips and throat white, the former with a dark brown spot on some of the labial scuta. Measurements. M. Length from muzzle to vent . . , 032 " " " to axilla 015 " " " to auricular meatus 0075 "Width at auricular meatus 005 Length of fore limb 0105 " hand 0035 Length of hind limb 0145 "tibia 0048 "foot 0056 Leposoma picticeps, sp. nov. Dorsal scales very narrow, in regular cross-series, the acute extremities of those of one row alternating with those of the rows in front and pos- terior ; each with a strong epidermal keel which is represented by a weak one of the true skin. These scales commence at the interparietal plate, Cope.] 100 [Oct. 2, and piesent nine transverse series to the axilla, and twenty from the axilla to the groin. The scales of the tail are similar. The abdominal scales are smooth and parallelogrammic, being truncate behind, and are in six- teen transverse rows between the axilla and groin. A rather wide space posterior to the auricular meatus, and posterior to the axilla is covered with granular scales. The larger and square scales of the throat are in four transverse rows of two scales each. They are separated from the cross-row that marks the axilla by two cross- rows, and are bounded by some flat scales in front and at the sides. The internasal plate is a little wider than long. The frontonasals are well in contact. The frontal is longer than wide. The frontoparietals are as wide as long, and are regularly five-sided, the supraorbital side a little longer than the others. The interparietal is nearly three times as long as wide. The parietals are larger and their posterior border forms, with that of the interparietal, a straight line. The posterior exterior bor- der is excavated. The loreal is higher than long, and presents an obtuse angle posteriorly between the two preoculars. Of these the superior extends posteriorly over the eye, leaving three narrow superciliaries. Three supraoculars, the posterior with a small round plate posterior to it. Temporal scales rather large, smooth ; no free marginal meatal scales. Seven superior labials ; six inferiors. A short symphyseal and a long postsymphyseal, both undivided. Posterior to the latter two pairs of large infralabials, touching on the middle line, followed by a large pair of infralabials which are separated on the middle line, each of which is followed by two large and some smaller scales. Limbs rather short, posterior feet elongate. The fingers reach to the heel when both limbs are pressed to the side of the body, and the toes to the middle of the humerus. The limbs are covered by large, smooth scales, except on the posterior faces of the humerus and tibia, where they are smaller, and on the posterior face of the femur where they are granu- lar. The claws are present on all the digits and are curved. Second and fifth fingers equal. Second toe longer than fifth, and fourth a good deal longer than third. Seven femoral pores and two preanals on each side. Preanal plates, seven. Of these six are marginal, a large one with a small one on each side of it, on each side of the middle line. The seventh is in front of the two median marginals, and is a large triangle. Color, olive-brown or grayish, shaded with blackish on the head. The plates of the head have pale borders and centres, and the rostral and labial plates are yellow, the latter with a dark brown spot in the centre. A light (? yellow) band over the eye, and two rows of similar spots on the temporal region. Several rows of similar dark-edged spots on the nape. Granular region black, with yellow spots. The spots fade out on the dorsal region, each cross-row of scales has a blackish edge. On the tail two rows of such spots can be made out on each side. Inferior surfaces pale, probably yellow ; lower labials, and the posterior infralabials with a dark brown spot in the centre. 1885.] lUl |Cope. Measurements. M. Length from muzzle to vent . .057 "axilla 025 " " " " auricular meatus 012 Width at auricular meatus 0076 Length of fore limb , 015 " hand 0065 " hind limb 026 "tibia 007 "foot 0132 This species is evidently nearly related to the Leposoma reticulatum of O'Shaughnessy {Ccrcosaura reticulata O'Sh., Proceedings Zool. Society London, 1881, p. 230). It differs in not possessing the following charac- ters of that species, as described and figured. In L. reticulatum there are two parietal plates on each side ; abdominal scales are rounded in pos- terior outline, and in only eight rows, while they are in ten in L. picticeps ; in having an azygous marginal anal instead of two, and in having a stripe on the body, and the tail differently colored from the back. The type of L. picticeps is a considerably larger animal than that of the L. reticu- latum. Centropvx borsalis Gthr. Monoplocus dorsalis Giinth. Centropyx pel- viceps Cope. Mr. O'Shaughnessy finds these supposed species to be identical. Dr. Gtinther having established a new genus (Monoplocus) for the species on the supposed absence of femoral pores, I did not think it worth while to compare my specimens, in which they are numerous, with the one described by Dr. Gunther. Mr. O'Shaughnessy has discovered that Giinther's type possesses the pores. Amiva stjrinamensis Gray. Hypsibatus agamoides Spix. Hyperanodon peltigerus Cope. Enyalitjs laticeps Guich. Anolis buckleyi O'Sh. Anolis bouvieri Boc. O'Sh. Anolis macropus, sp. nov. Tail subround, without crest. Ventral scales small, smooth ; dorsal scales minute, rough. Occipital scale small, well separated from supra- orbitals ; the latter separated from each other by three rows of scales, and not continued as a larger row anterior to orbit. Interorbital region concave ; facial rugse obtuse, separated by a concavity. Facial scales small, keeled, about twenty longitudinal rows at the middle of the muzzle, and ten in the facial concavity. No distinct canthus rostralis, and but two canthal scales distinguishable from those of the muzzle in size. Supraocular disk embracing a dozen scales of unequal sizes, and Cope.l lO-i [Oct. 2, surrounded by granules. Seven or eight loreal rows ; labials, T9ff ; infra- labials all small. Auricular meatus small, but larger than occipital scale. The limbs are slender and long. The anterior appressed reaches the end of the muzzle by the end of the fifth digit ; the posterior reaches the same by the end of the fourth digit. Digital dilatations narrow. Fan small. The general color is blackish, below white, the line of junction of the colors on the sides of the belly, and ragged. A pale line across the chin. Measurements. M. Length of head and body 045 " to posterior border of meatus auditorius 061 Width at posterior border of meatus auditorius 0065 Length of fore leg 021 " fore foot 0072 " " hind leg 041 " tibia 0125 " hind foot .017 This species approaches most closely the A. limifrons Cope from Veragua. In that species the facial ruga? have distinct large scales, which are want- ing in the A. macropus, and the hinder legs are not so long. The facial scales are a good deal smaller, and the posterior legs shorter in A. mac- ropus than in the A. trachyderma, which it otherwise resembles. The long hind legs distinguish it from other allied species. Ophidia. Typiilops reticulatus L. Boa constrictor L. Rhabdosoma brevifrenum Jan. Rhabdosoma microrhynchum Cope. Contia serrata, sp. nov. Rhadin^a nicaga Cope, Lygophis 7iicagus Cope, Proceeds. Phila. Acad- emy, 1868, p. 132. Proceeds. Amer. Philosoph. Soc, 1870, p. 553. Scales in seventeen rows, without fossae, all of moderate width, the first not very wide. Eight superior labials, third, fourth and fifth entering orbit ; fifth, sixth and seventh largest, subequal, their superior borders increasing in length in the order named. Rostral plate very small, barely visible from above. Nasal decurved forwards, deeper posteriorly; loreal deeper than long ; ocular 1-2 ; the preocular narrow and widely separated from the fr6ntal above. Temporals 1-2; the anterior in contact with the inferior postocular only. Internasals small, as wide as long ; prefrontals much larger, wider than long. Frontal elongate, truncate in front, and with parallel sides ; parietals long and large, extending on each side to the inferior postocular. Gastrosteges 160 ; anal divided ; urosteges 52. Total length, M. .245 ; to rictus oris, .0065 ; of tail, .070. Color above dark brownish-gray. A line of darker color extends along the third row of scales, and a similar one on the eighth row, which leaves 1885.1 10d [Cope. the ninth or median row of the ground color. These lines are quite indis- tinct. Ends of the gastrosteges of the ground color, shaded with bluish, so as to give the color border a serrate outline. Under surface of body and tail yellow, immaculate. Top of head paler. The frontal plate with dark edges and some dark specks on the prefrontals. A pair of light dark-edged small spots, close together, one on each side of the common parietal suture. Superior labial dark-edged. Lower labials and adjacent plates obscurely speckled. Near the head the dorsal lines unite and form a serrate dorsal band, which is separated by a paler band from a darker lateral band with the superior edges serrate ; but these markings are obscure. In another spe- cimen which Prof. Steere, of Ann Arbor, brought from the Purus river,* the dorsal band is more distinct and extends to the end of the tail. I originally referred this species to (Lygophis) Aporophis, but its equal teeth exclude it from that genus. Opheomorphus meleagris Shaw. HelicOps angulattjs Linn. Oxyrrhoptjs scolopax Klein. DlPSAS CENCHOA L. Rhinobothyrum lentiginosum Scop. Leptognathus catesbyi Weigel. Leptophis marginatus Cope. Dryiophis argenteus Daud. Elaps lemniscatus L. Bothrops brasilensis Latr. * This collection was made at Canutama, a distance of six hundred miles, and at Marrahan, a distance of seven hundred miles above its mouth on the Purus river, and as the first indication of the reptile fauna of that region possesses considerable interest. It includes the following species: 1. Liophis almadensis Wagl. ; 2. Rhadincea nicaga Cope; 3. Pseudoeryx callosticlus Gtlnth (Hydrops); 4. Tortrix scytale Linn; 5. Bufo apua L. ; 6. Hyla leucophyllata var. Beir; and 7. Lithodyles cinereus sp. nov. This frog has a smooth belly and free toes with truncate pallettes on all the digits. There are no cranial crests, and but slight traces of dorsolateral dermal folds. The vomerine teeth are in J-shaped patches commencing opposite the posterior border of the choanal, and curv- ing inwards and backwards. Ostia pharyngea as large as choanse. Nostril terminal. Tympanic drum round, two-thirds size of eye. Tongue oval, slightly notched behind. Head oval; muzzle truncate; lores straight, grooved; canthus rostralis distinct, straight. Heel of extended hind leg to end of muzzle. First finger longer than second. A prominent sharp metatarsal tubercle attached to base of first toe. No external tubercle. Color above gray, with pale brown markings. The most distinct of these is a cross-band between the orbits. Lower surfaces dirty-white; concealed surfaces brown. Upper lip with three yellowish spots extending from the orbit; to which two or three marks on the lower jaw correspond. Limbs faintly brown cross-banded. Length of head and body M. .053: width of head at tympana .018. Length of fore-leg .029; of hind leg .0S4 ; of hind foot .038. Ruschenberger.] l\Jrk |Nov. 6, A Sketch of the Life of Robert E. Rogers, M.D., LL.D., with Biographical Notices of his Father and Brothers. By W. S. W. Ruschenberger, M.D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 6, 18S5.) The life of Dr. Robert E. Rogers was interwoven in many- ways with the lives of his brothers. All were able university professors. They labored jointly as well as separately to increase and diffuse knowledge. On this account they were more or less distinguished. All were members of the American Philosophical Society. All are dead. No obituary minute of either has been recorded in its archives.* Therefore it seems proper to group together sketches of the four brothers in such manner as may give to each, if possible, his characteristic features. Each followed his routine course ; but often they engaged jointly in one investigation, so that the public sometimes confounded their labors and gave credit to one which truly belonged to another. Their works were frequently mentioned at home and abroad as of " the brothers Rogers," and always in respectful and kindly terms. Mistakes of the sort never disturbed the perfect harmony that always existed between them, as they might have done had the brothers been rivals or competitors for repu- tation. Their days of boyhood were passed together in delight- ful companionship with their father, whom they regarded with profound respect. Their tastes and pursuits were similar. Their home-training taught them to love one another, so they went through life practising, unconsciously, no doubt, the affectionate ways which they had inherited and learned from their mother, a sensible woman of a gentle and loving nature. From their earliest youth the brothers were ardent students, and learned to concentrate their energies to do in the best man- ner possible whatever they undertook. To them the axiom that whatever is worth doing at all is worth doing well, was an in- flexible law. From the start they knew that their worldly suc- cess was contingent upon the quality of their work. They could look to no valuable bequest. None of their near kinsmen was * Dr. Joesph Carson presented to the library of the Society a printed copy of a memoir, written by him, of the late James 15. Rogers, M.D., and was excused from his appoint incut to prepare an obituary notice of Dr. Rogers for the So- ciety;— See Proceedings Am. Phil. Hoc. Dec. Ill, 1856, vol. vi,p. — S. 1S85.J 1UO [Ruschenberger. opulent; none occupied high social or political station from which patronage might possibly flow to them. They had little patrimony besides those qualities which the human organism has when it comes into the world. And yet they might be justly thankful for their ancestral gifts, gifts which have no equivalent value in coin. Their organic inheritance included a healthy though not robust body, a sound mind, quick perceptivity and capability, a ready aptitude for toil, with many of the constit- uent attributes of that sort of nobility which needs neither title nor rent-roll to set it off. Titled ancestors had no part in the genesis of their endowments. Robert Rogers, the fifth in lineal descent, was born about the year 1753, and lived on the Edergole, or Knockbrack estate, which he owned in fee, and held on lease acres of land adjoining. This estate lies between Omagh and Fintano, in Tyrone county, Ireland. Newtown Stewart, in the barony of Strabane, then a good market for cloth and yarn,* ten miles off, is the nearest town, and Londonderry, forty miles distant, the city nearest to it. The number of his tenants or extent of acreage held by him is not now known. His social grade in the community is not indicated by his estate alone. When the Presbyterian church which he attended was reconstructed, he rebuilt and furnished anew the large central pew in it, which he had inherited. He was disposed to favor what was then termed the new light doc- trine, but tolerant enough to listen to the religious and political opinions ascribed to the French philosophers. In the small villages and rural districts of Ireland at that period — more than a hundred years ago — those whose wardrobe was limited to a single suit and an extra shirt or two (and they were largely in the majority there, as well as everywhere), de- termined social position in the community by the interval be- tween the family wash-days. In their estimation those whose wardrobe was extensive enough to have their washing done once a year constituted " the great families ;" and those who needed to have a family wash-day every six months composed the second class in society. The washing of the Rogers family was done only twice a year, at the brook which flows through the estate. In the winter of 1774-75, when twenty-one years old, Robert * Statistical Survey of the County of Tyrone for 1801-2. By John McEvoy, Dub- lin, 1802. PKOC. AMER. PUILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. N. PRINTED NOVEMBER 7, 1883. Ruschenberger.] lUU [Nov. 6, Rogers married Sarah Kerr, of about the same age, who, tradi- tion avers, was sprightly, conspicuous in conversation, and ever ready to discuss and advocate the new light doctrines of the Presbyterian Church, of which she was a member. This mar- riage had been delayed a year by her father, a recognized " gen- tleman " in the community, who insisted that Robert Rogers must attain his majority before he could lawfully make a mar- riage settlement of all his lands upon the children of this union, share and share alike, and that without compliance with this stipulation his assent to it would not be given. Robert Rogers was a well-to-do Irish gentleman, liberal in his views, hospitable, convivial, and duly appreciated education and learning. Patrick Kerr Rogers, the father of the subjects of this notice, was the first born, in 1770, of the twelve children of Robert Rogers and his wife Sarah Kerr. Four of them died infants. The rudiments of Patrick's education were received in a school-house built upon the estate. It is described as having clay walls, a thatched roof, clay seats covered with bits of car- pet and warmed by a turf fire. The teacher was a lame rustic boy, whom his aunt, Margaret Rogers, a lady of notable intelli- gence, had trained for the office. It is conjectured that he acquired his classical learning from a private tutor at the house of a kinsman. His mother died in 1790, and his father married again in 1791, a lady who bore him three sons and two daughters. At the age when he should choose a profession, he found him- self one of a numerous family of brothers and sisters and, though the eldest, without the right of primogeniture in his father's estate. Entertaining opinions not rigidly orthodox he was unwilling to enter the clerical profession, though he had the example of two uncles who were clergymen. At the time a commercial career seemed best, and therefore he entered a counting-house in Dublin. How long he lived there, or was thus employed has not been ascertained. But about the time of the Irish rebellion, which broke out in May, 1798, he contributed to Dublin newspapers articles inimical to the government, which, his friends believed, were likely to cause his arrest and punishment. A kinsman furnished the means which enabled 1885.] J-Ul [Ruschenberger. him to reach Londonderry and emigrate thence to the United States. The indiscretion of those publications is manifest in their consequence. It brought expatriation, permanent separation from his kinsfolk and friends. But he was young, only twenty- two years old, sanguine, self-confident, earnest, and though usually cool and judicious in conduct, on critical occasions he acted indiscreetly — on the impulse of the moment. He arrived in Philadelphia August, 1 798, probably on the ship Rising Sun, after a passage of eighty-four days. At that period ships plied directly between Ireland and Phil- adelphia. There was then quite a colony of people from the north of Ireland settled in this city. The risks. many of them had run and escaped in unsuccessful efforts to resist the political oppression which exasperated and harassed them at home prob- ably begot a fellow feeling, stronger than that of race affinity. The fugitive, no doubt, was cordially received, and at once made a welcome member of this Irish circle, which included persons of social influence. In May, 1799, Mr. P. K. Rogers was appointed a tutor in the University of Pennsylvania, and probably in the same year be- gan to study medicine under the immediate direction of Dr. Benjamin Smith Barton, Professor of Materia Medica, Natural History and Botany. It is evident that a warm friendship between preceptor and pupil was soon established. In dedicating his thesis he ascribes to Dr. Barton's example, instruction and kindness any happi- ness he may enjoy, in the course of his life, from his attachment to the sciences connected with medicine, and declares that he cannot help regarding the day on which he became his pupil as truly auspicious. Mr. Rogers was married by the Rev. George C. Potts,* Jan- uary 2, 1801, to Hannah Blythe, an intelligent woman, a year older than himself, endowed with a cheerful and affectionate disposition. He is described then as a tall, erect man of grave *The Rev. George Charles Potts had recently immigrated from Ireland. He had been a licentiate of the Presbytery of New Castle, Del., for some months, when he was ordained and installed the first pastor of the Fourth Presbyterian Church of Philadelphia, May 22, 1800, which was founded by about a score of Irishmen, June, 1799. — A Historical Discourse, delivered at the Fourth Presbyterian Church, Philadelphia, Nov. 9, 1879, by Rev. George Benaugh. ftuschenberger.] lUo [Nov. 6, deportment, having dark hair well sprinkled with gray, and soft, sleepy eyes. He played the violin and sang well ; but never in company or in the presence of strangers, because such perform- ance or display seemed to him inconsistent with the dignity of a gentleman. That those personal characteristics noted in this paper which are ascribable to heredity may be apparent, a summary of the bride's history seems desirable. It is conjectured that the female organism possesses even more genetic energy than the male — that the child is indebted to the mother as much at least as to the father for its engendered qualities. A distinguished botanist has observed that only the highest t}^pes of vitality in plants take the female form. " The law in this instance," he ssljs, " seems clear, that with a weakened vitality comes an increased power to bear male flowers, and tbat only under the highest condition of vegetative vigor are female flowers produced."* He conjectures that this law of the vegetal also prevails in the animal world. Hannah Blythe was the youngest daughter of James Blythe, native of Glasgow, but a resident of Londonder^, and his wife Bessie, a daughter of James Bell, an English citizen of London- deny. James Blythe was a publisher and stationer. He founded, in 1772, the Londonderry Journal, the first tri-weekly paper printed in the north of Ireland. It became a daily and is still published. No evidence of his right to this honor is recorded in it because, believing himself suspected of opposition to the government, and desiring to obtain the patronage of both political parties, he considered it expedient that his partner, a Mr. Douglas, who was a printer, should publicly appear to be the sole proprietor and editor. This is the reason assigned why his name was not re- corded in connection with the enterprise. The paper was printed and issued from the house in which he lived. His daughter, Mrs. Ramsay, who died at the advanced age of ninety-two years, often mentioned among the reminiscences of her early childhood the gathering of a crowd reading a placard on the front of their house, headed, " Bloody News From America," announcing the *On the sexes of plants. By Thomas Median, of Qermantown, Philadelphia. Proc. Amor. Assoc, for the Advancement of Science. Salem Meeting, August, 1869, vol. IS, pp. 23G-260. 1885.] 1UJ LRuschcnberger. battle of Lexington, April, 1775. She stated also that many- Protestant citizens rejoiced over this resistance of Americans to the British administration. James Blythe died in 1787, leaving a widow and three daughters, Elizabeth, Mary Ann and Hannah. The widow, Bessie Bell, who was an intelligent and energetic woman, removed to Strabane, about fifteen miles southward from Londonderry, took into partnership a foreman from the old establishment, set up and conducted a newspaper till she died, in 1794. The business was unprofitable. The daughters were left without support. They promptly determined to emigrate, and embarked in a ship belonging to their cousin, Adam Crampton, of Londonderry, and after a voyage of three months, arrived in Philadelphia the same j^ear. They were received by their cousin, wife of Thomas Moore, merchant, who had left Coleraine some time before on account of his affiliation with the " United Irishmen." They are described as quick, active, intelligent women, and being like most ladies of that period, proficient in the use of the needle, set to work with it and supported themselves respectably and independently. The city directory for 1802 states that P. K. Rogers, A.M., lived at No. 55 Lombard street, implying that he had established a home for himself very soon after his marriage. Where his de- gree of Master of Arts was conferred has not been ascertained. In June, 1802, he received the degree of Doctor of Medicine from the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania. His thesis was on Liriodendron tulipifera, or poplar tree, in which he records the results of his experimental observations of its chemical and therapeutic properties. Now he was a householder, with wife, infant son and a profes- sion. He started to maintain and improve his condition. He obtained some practice, had private pupils, lectured to classes of students, demonstrated in public the exhilarating effects of the inhalation of nitrous oxide or laughing gas, which were dis- covered in 1800, by Sir Humphrey Davy, delivered popular lectures on botany and scientific subjects, and contributed histories of cases to Dr. Barton's Medical and Physical Journal. In successive years he gave a course of lectures upon the Rusclienberger.] 11U [Nov.fi, History of Medicine and Medical Philosophy. Subsequently he devoted himself to chemistry, upon which he delivered, it is supposed, the first complete series of popular lectures ever given in this city, or in the country. The death of his father, who was drowned in a brook which flows on the place, called him to Ireland in 1807. He sold the family seat and settled the bereaved second family on the leased lands. This business, which occupied some time, being com- pleted, he returned to Philadelphia, bringing with him two younger brothers and a sister, and resumed his work. In 1809 the professorship of chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania was made vacant by the death of Dr. James Wood- house. Dr. P. K. Rogers addressed a letter, June 12, 1809, to Dr. Ben- jamin Hush, from which the following are extracts. They are characteristic of the writer in some degree : " The chemical chair being vacant, I intend to become a candi- date for the professorship. Your influence in my behalf is the favor which I am anxious to obtain. It would bind me in chains of gratitude for life. " My indigence has compelled me to make some attempts as a medical teacher, and unless some fortunate change should take place in my affairs, the same indigence may still urge me to the same exertions. Arrangements have been made in relation to my library which place it on a permanent foundation. Of course I will be enabled, as far as books can do it, to take a more ad- vantageous stand as a private lecturer, or as a professor." " I could wish to secure your patronage only by deserving it. As neither the professors nor trustees have had any adequate opportunity of judging of the real qualifications of candidates, I would be willing to deliver a series of experimental lectures in competition with others. I venture to mention this, because I hope the appointments are not solely regulated by the partiality of friends."* Dr. John Redmond Coxe was elected to the vacant chair July 10, 1809.f * MS. Correspondence of Dr. Benjamin Rush, vol. 22, R to W., Ridgway Library , Philadelphia. t History of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania. By Joseph < arson, M.D., Professor of Materia Medica and Pharmacy in the Univer- sity of Pennsylvania. Lindsay A Blakiston, Philadelphia, 1869. 1885.1 J. IX [Ruschenberger. Dr. Rogers attempted to establish a circulating medical library in the city, and spent considerable part of his patrimony in it. The enterprise failed from want of patronage.* Hoping to obtain better compensation for his toil, he settled in Baltimore about the close of 1812, taking with him his wife and their three boys. Some near kinsmen, who were engaged in trade, had been settled there sometime. He seems to have been more prosperous in his new abode. At first he lived at Fell's Point, and had an apothecary shop, and sub- sequently in South Charles street. He was elected physician of the Hibernian Society in 1816. The same year it was charged that " Dr. P. K. Rogers, at Fell's Point, persists in the use of variolous matter in preference to vaccine, against the public re- monstrance of Dr. James Smith. "f The controversy on this question, carried on in the news- papers, was detrimental to his professional business. His in- come was inadequate to his need ; still, he worked on zealously. In 1819 his qualifications and capacity to teach were recognized. He was elected Professor of Natural Philosophy and Mathe- matics in the ancient College of William and Mary, founded at Williamsburg, Va., 1692, in place of Dr. Robert Hare, resigned. Dr. Rogers was soon settled in the Brofferton house, on the college campus, with his wife and four boys. He was earnest in his work. He made all the apparatus required to illustrate his lectures. In this making and mending he was habitually aided by his sons, who thus acquired unusual facility in the use of tools for working wood and metals. He also prepared and printed a syllabus of his course of instruction. During the summer of 1820, after the close of ihe session of the college, July 4, Mrs. Rogers was attacked with malarial fever and died, leaving the four boys, the youngest in his seventh and the eldest in his eighteenth year, to the care of their father. The boys became almost foster children in families of the pro- fessors. To avoid the malarial fever always prevalent in the locality * At this time the College of Physicians of Philadelphia has a library of 35,000, the Pennsylvania Hospital about 12,000, and the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania nearly as many, all accessible to the medical pub- lic. t Medical Annals of Baltimore. By John R. Quinan, M.D. 8vo,pp. 274. Balti- more, 1881. Ruschenberger.] 112 [Nov. 0, during summer, Dr. Rogers habitually left Williamsburg, as soon after July 4 as practicable, to pass the vacation. After the close of the college in 1828, he spent several days in Balti- more and then went to Ellicott's Mills. A few days later he was seriously ill. All his children came to his bedside. He died of malarial fever, August 1st, 1828, in the fifty Tsecond year of his age. This sketch of his trying career is presented because the pro- found, affectionate respect with which the sons always regarded their father, suggests that this commemoration would be unsatis- factory to them in their graves if he were not associated in it. Besides, he seems to have been the mental type of his sons to a considerable degree, though they were indebted to their mother largely for their moral constitution. Of their seven children four sons survived them. The eldest, James Blythe Rogers, was born in Philadelphia, February 11, 1802.* His preliminary education was acquired in Baltimore and Williamsburg, Va., at the College of William and Mary (182U-21). He studied medicine in the office of Dr. Thomas E. Bond, and in 1822 received the degree of Doctor of Medicine from the University of Maryland. Epilepsy was the subject of his thesis. There is a tradition that while he was a student he assisted his brothers, William and Henry, in teach- ing a school. After graduation, to eke out his too scant income, he taught a class of girls, in conjunction with a Dr. McClellan who had a school for boys in Baltimore. This connection proved to be unsatisfactory and the enterprise was given up. He was needing employment, and thought of seeking the post of surgeon to a colony of free negroes which it was proposed to es- tablish at Cape Mesurado and consulted his father on the sub- ject. He wrote in reply — " What is the use of your complaining of, mankind? The world as yet owes you nothing. Up to this time you have been simply a recipient of its benefits. Make yourself worthy of a place here, and you will find one." The projedt of going to Africa was abandoned. He had formed an intimate friendship with a fellow-student and graduate, Dr. Henry Webster. They became partners to practise medicine at Little Britain, in Lancaster county, Pa., about two miles from the Maryland line. * His parents then lived at No. 55 Lombard street. 1885.] -L-L^ [Ruschenberger. The experience of a few years satisfied him that the career of a practitioner of medicine was uncongenial, repugnant to the sensitiveness of his nature and mental habits. He returned to Baltimore, and was soon appointed superintendent of an exten- sive manufactory of chemicals. Here he sedulously cultivated scientific and applied chemistry. While thus employed he accepted, but after some hesitation based on a notion that he lacked fluency of speech, a quality for which he was subsequently distinguished, the professorship of chemistry in the Washington Medical College, of Baltimore. The position was not remunerative. During the same period he lectured on chemistry before the Mechanics' Institute, which was designed for the encouragement of the mechanic arts in imi- tation of the Franklin Institute of the State of Pennsylvania, and was also occupied in original investigations. In September, 1830, at the age of twenty-eight, he married Rachel Smith, of Baltimore, who was a birth-right member of the Society of Friends. During the winter of 1831-32 he lectured twice a week on natural philosophy and chemistry in Baltimore. When the Medical Department of the Cincinnati College was established in 1835, he was appointed professor of chemistry, and filled the office until the establishment was closed in 1839. The summer vacations of these four years were spent in field work and chemical investigations in connection with the Geo- logical Survey of Virginia, as an assistant of his brother Wil- liam, who was the State Geologist. While in Cincinnati he declined the office of melter and refiner in the branch Mint at New Orleans, offered to him by the Presi- dent of the United States. He became a permanent resident of Philadelphia in 1840, and in August of the same year he was elected a member of the Franklin Institute. His brother Henry, then Geologist of Penn- sylvania, engaged him as an assistant in field and laboratory work. During seasons of leisure he delivered lectures to classes of medical students and examined them. He was appointed lecturer on chemistry, 1841, in the Philadelphia Medical Insti- tute, then a flourishing summer school, founded by Dr. Nathaniel Chapman. August 21, 1844, he was unanimously elected Pro- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. S0C. XXIII. 121. O. PRINTED NOVEMBER 10, 1885. Ruschenberger.] i-l'± [Nov. 6, fessor of General Chemistry in tlie Franklin Institute, and re- ceived a vote of thanks for his services when he resigned, Octo- ber 20, 1847. In conjunction with his brother Robert, he com- piled from the works of Dr. Edward Turner and. Dr. William Gregory, a volume on inorganic and organic chemistry, designed to be a text-book which was published in 1 846. These many occupations yielded him a modest income. In April, 1846, he was chosen a member of the American Philosophical Society. In 1847, in the forty-sixth year of his age, he succeeded Dr. Robert Hare as Professor of Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania. He was a representative of the Franklin Medi- cal College (in which he was at the time Professor of Chem- istry), in the National Medical Convention, assembled in Phila- delphia, May 5, 1847. This convention then became the Amer- ican Medical Association, which is still prosperous. In October of the same year, he was elected a member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. He was one of the representatives of the Univers^ of Pennsylvania in the National Convention for the revision of the Pharmacopoeia of the United States, in 1850. He was never robust. His frame was light and elastic. In latter years his constitution was considered to be delicate. At times he suffered from nervous exhaustion and defective nutri- tion, ascribable to long and incessant labor. An attack of albuminuria closed his life, June 15, 1853, in the fifty-first year of his age. He left his widow, who died in 1882, with their two sons and a daughter. He was an eminently efficient, interesting and popular teacher. "Disinterested and generous in his relations with the world, mild and conciliating in deportment, open and affable when ap- proached, urbane to every one, his virtues shone conspicuously within the circle of his friends."* William Barton Rogers, the second child of his parents, was born in Philadelphia, December 7, 1804.f * A memoir of the Life and Character of James B. Rogers, M.D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania. By Joseph Carson, M.D., Pro- fessor of Materia Medipa and Pharmacy In the University of Pennsylvania. Delivered by request of the Faculty, October 11th, 1852, and published by the Class. t They resided at the time at No. 262 North Second street, probably between Vine and Callowbill streets. 1885.] *-*-& [Ruschenberger. The middle name is a loving memorial record of his father's respect and friendship for his medical preceptor, Dr. Benjamin Smith Barton. William B. Rogers obtained his early education in Baltimore and Williamsburg, Va., at the College of William and Mary, of which he was an alumnus 1820-21. For a time, while a youth, he was employed in Baltimore by a dealer in crockeryware, and acquired such facility in wrapping packages that he subsequently reckoned it among his accomplish- ments. About 1821, in conjunction with his brother Henry, he set up a school in the suburbs of Baltimore. How long, or with what degree of success they taught, has not been ascertained. In 1827, then in his twenty-third year, he delivered a course of lectures on natural science before the Mechanics Institute. In 1828 he was appointed Professor of Natural Philosophy and Mathematics in the College of William and Mary, to fill a vacancy caused by the death of his father. His attention was directed to natural science, and especially to geology. In 1830 he contributed to the Messenger of Useful Knowledge, edited by his brother Henry, then a professor in Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa., articles on Dew. He was elected a correspondent of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia in 1833. In June, 1834, and May, 1835, he pub- lished in the Farmers' Register three papers on the Green Sand of Virginia.* About this period he was allowed to advocate before the Legislature the institution of a geological survey of the State of Virginia. March 6, 1835, an act was passed directing "the Board of Public Works to appoint a suitable person to make a geological reconnoissance of the State," provided his compensa- tion shall not exceed $1500. To him 1835 was an eventful year. He was appointed Pro- fessor of Natural Philosophy and Geology in the University of Virginia ; chosen a member of the American Philosophical Society July 17, and Director of the Geological Survey of Virginia. * Contained in a Reprint of the Annual Reports and other papers on the Geol- ogy of the Virginias. By the late William Banon Rogers, LL.D., &c, Director of the Geological Survey of Virginia from 1835 to 18U, President of the National Academy of Sciences. 12mo, pp. 832. D. Appleton & Co., New York, 1884. Ruschenberger.] J. ID [Nov. 6, His report of the geological reconnoissance was presented January, 1836. A note on the fertilizing efficacy of marl, taken from the report of Henry D. Rogers on the Geology of New Jer- sey, and a plan of the proposed Geological Survey of Virginia are appended to it. Reports of the progress of the survey were made annually from 1836 to 1841. It was discontinued in 18-12. All his brothers were among his assistants in field and laboratory work. He, as well as his brothers Henry and Robert, participated in the organization of the Association of American Geologists and Naturalists in 1840, and presided at the meetings of 1845 and 1847. At the latter it was changed to the American Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science. At the meeting held in Boston, in 1842, he presented, in con- nection with his brother Henry, a paper on The Laws of Structure of the more Disturbed Zones of the Earth's Crust, embracing what is called the wave theory of mountain chains. This theory was a result of an extensive study of the Appalachian chain in Pennsylvania and Virginia, and was supported by reference to many geological sections and facts. They were first to assert that the structure of mountain chains everywhere is the same in all essential features, an assertion which has been confirmed by the observations of Murchison in the Ural mountains, and by Darwin in the Andes. The meeting was memorable. Dr. Samuel George Morton presided. Among the distinguished naturalists present were the elder Silliman, Professor Hitchcock, Dr. Charles T. Jackson, the French astronomer, Nicollet, Sir Charles Lyell, and the palaeon- tologist, Hall. Several able and elaborate essays were read and discussed, but the prominent feature of the meeting was the Rogers paper, which was delivered as an oral statement. William B. Rogers first described the physical structure of the mountain chain extending 1500 miles, from Vermont to Alabama, and then Henry D. Rogers followed, explaining the phenomena and ex- pounding the hypothesis deduced from them. John L. Hays, of Cambridge, Mass., who was present, says, June 1, 1882: ;' I have frequently read it [the paper] since. To me it is now comparatively tame in expression. It lacks the inspiration of the scene and the man, the illustrative diagrams, 117 1885.] xxi [Ruschenberger. the emphasis of voice and finger pointing out the distinguishing phenomena, and the fervor of spontaneous utterance. The im- pression I have of this exposition as delivered is, that next to the Phi Beta Kappa oration of Wendell Phillips at Harvard, it is the most lucid and elegant effort of oral statement to which I ever listened. It may be true that eloquence is but a secondary qualitj' in the philosopher ; but in respect to the matter of this memoir and the general researches and deductions of the brothers Rogers here named, in their peculiar field of exploration, it may be safely asserted that they have made the most original and brilliant generalizations recorded in the annals of American geology, and have thrown light on the structure of mountain chains generally, which entitles them to a place by the side of the great expositor of this subject, Eli de Beaumont, of France." " The wave theory of mountain chains was the first important contribution to the dynamical and structural geology which had been brought forward in this country. It excited at the time great interest, as well from the novelty of the views as from the eloquence with which they were set forth ; and to-day it is still regarded as one of the most important advances in orographic geology."* William B. Rogers was elected an honorary member of the Boston Society of Natural History, June 1, 1842, and a fellow of the Academy of Arts and Sciences, 1845, of which he was Cor- responding Secretary from 1863 till 1869. In 1844-45 he was Chairman of the Faculty of the University of Tirginia.f June 20, 1840, he married Miss Emma, daughter of the Hon. James Savage, of Boston, and with his bride sailed the same day. They visited England and Scotland, passed some days in Paris, a few weeks in Switzerland, and returned in October, when he resumed his vocation at the University of Virginia. Mrs. Rogers became " the promoter of his labors, the ornament and solace of his middle life, and the devoted companion and support of his declining years. "J Recently she has edited, very *Josiah Parsors Cooke. Notice of William Barton Rogers, Founder of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, vol. sviii, p. 42S-43S. t A Sketch of the History of the University of Virginia. Charlottesville, Va., 1880. J An address delivered before the Society of the Alumni of the University of Virginia, on Commencement day, June 27, 1883. By William Cabell Rives. Kuschenberger.] -LJ-O [Nov. 6, admirably, a reprint of liis annual reports and other papers on the geology of the Virginias. In 1853 he resigned from the University of Virginia, after eighteen j'ears of efficient service, and transferred his domicile to Boston. During the earlier years of his residence here he de- livered two or more courses of Lowell lectures, and contributed to the attractions of the Thursday Evening Scientific Club, of which he was president several years. He was present at a meeting of the British Association in Dublin, 1857, and early in 1859 he began the foundation of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, which was incorporated in 1862, chiefly through his exertions and influence. He was elected president of it, April 8, 1862. Impaired health caused him to resign the office in the autumn of 1868. He was induced to accept it again in 1818, but infirmity compelled him to re- linquish the post in 1881. He was appointed inspector of gas and gas meters for the State of Massachusetts, in 1861, and, accompanied by Mrs. Rogers, he went to Europe in 1864, to collect models of ma- chinery and apparatus for the use of the Institute of Technology. At the meeting of the British Association for that year, he pre- sented a paper entitled An account of apparatus and processes for chemical and photometrical testing of illuminating gas. News of the serious illness of his brother Henry, then Regius Professor of the Natural Sciences in the University of Glasgow, hurried him and Dr. Robert E. to Europe in 1866, but his brother died before their arrival. On this sad errand they were absent only a few weeks. In 1867 he was appointed Commissioner to represent the State of Massachusetts at the Paris Exhibition, and during the sum- mer visited it' almost daily. The Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass., conferred upon him, in 1866, the honorary degree of L.L.D., and he was elected President of the National Academy of Science to succeed Joseph Henry, who died May lath, 18*18. At the meeting of the American Association for the Advance- ment of Science, at Buffalo, N. Y., in 1876, he was elected Presi- dent; but he Was unable to be present at the meeting of 1877. " Had I been able," he wrote from Newport, August 22, to the 11Q 1885.] J.x*J [Ruschenberger. permanent Secretary, uto write the address for which I was pre- paring early in the summer, I should have taken the risk of pre- senting myself at Nashville, though only for a day or two. But the nerve-exhaustion to which I have for many years been liable? aggravated by the season, compelled me soon to suspend and finally give up the work."* In 1875-6 he assisted in establishing at the University of "Virginia, a Museum of Natural History, and in 1876-7 contrib- uted a thousand dollars to the fund of the institution.f At the Commencement of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, May 30, 1882, while delivering an address, he bent forward on the table before him as if to consult notes, then slowly regaining an erect position, he threw up his hands. His life had ended. The last sentence he uttered was, u I remember, that one hundred and fifty years ago Stephen Hales published a pamphlet on the subject of illuminating gas, in which he stated that his researches had demonstrated that 128 grains of bitumi- nous coal " i Thus was closed, probably without pain, his bright career. He had fairly won and received all the compliments and honors that a votary of science in this country can win ; and he was universally esteemed in private life on account of his probity, urbanity and social accomplishments. Henry Darwin Rogers, the third son and fourth child, was born in Philadelphia, August 1, 18084 The name Darwin was given to him by his father in token of his admiration of the poetical works of Erasmus Darwin, par. itcularly of his Botanic Garden, long passages from which he was often pleased to repeat for the entertainment of the family. He was educated in Baltimore and Williamsburg, Va. In his twenty-second year, January, 1830, he was elected Pro- fessor of Chemistry and Natural Philosophy in Dickinson Col- lege, Carlisle, Pa. " Whilst connected with the College he edited The Messenger of Useful Knowledge, a monthly maga- zine of scientific character, and also containing essays on educa- *Proc. Amer. Assoc, for the Advanc. Sc, xxvi, p. 373. 1877. tSee A Sketch of the University of Virginia. Richmond, Va., 18S5. J His parents lived at No. 205 Mulberry, now Arch street, in 1807 and 1808; and at No. 13 S. Ninth street, in 1810, 1811 and 1812— see City Directory. Ruschenberger.] 1ZU [Nov. C, tional, literary and political subjects, and valuable information from foreign journals."* His brother William contributed to it a series of short articles to explain the formation of dew. When the editor resigned his professorship in the college at the end of the year, the publication of the magazine ceased. He accompanied R. Dale Owen to England, in 1831, and enrolled himself a student of chemistry in the laboratory of Dr. Edward Turner, and attended the lectures of De la Beche, on geology, and of other teachers of science in London. He returned to Philadelphia in the summer of 1838. The liberal assistance of his brother William placed the opportunity of this course of study in Europe within his reach. In the winter of 1833-34 he delivered a course of lectures on geologjr, in the hall of the Franklin Institute, of which he be- came a member on the nomination of bis friend Alexander Dal- las Bache, in January, 1834. From Januaiy, 183S, till Decem- ber, 1843, he was a member of the Board of Managers and served on several standing committees. His resignation from the Institute was accepted March 16, 1848. The University of Pennsylvania conferred upon him the de- gree of Master of Arts in 1834, and elected him Professor of Geologj' and Mineralogy the next year. From 1835 until 1846, when he resigned, he gave instruction on the subject, and pub- lished " A Guide to a Course of Lectures on Geology, delivered in the University of Pennsylvania." 8vo, pp. 48. In his twenty-seventh year he was chosen, January 2, 1835, a member of the American Philosophical Societ}r,f and in Novem- ber he was elected a member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and served on its Publication Committee from December, 1835, to December, 1836. The Legislature of the State appointed him, April 21, 1835, to make a geological and mineralogical survey of New Jersej'. His first report (8vo, pp. 175) was made February 12, 1836, * A sketch of Dickinson College, Carlisle, Penna., including the list of Trustees and Faculty from the foundation, and a more particular account of the .Scien- tific Department. By Charles F. Ilimes, Ph.D., Professor of Natural Science. Illustrated by engravings and by photographs executed in the laboratory. 12mo, pp. 153. Lane S. Hart, Harrisburg, 1879. tDuring 1836-37 he was frequently at the meetings and served on several Bpecial committees. 191 1885.] J--jx [Ruschcnberger. and his final report (8vo, pp. 301, with 2 maps) was presented in 1840. Chiefly on the recommendation of the Geological Society of Pennsylvania, which was founded in Philadelphia, April, 1832, and ceased in 1836, the Legislatm-e determined, March 29, 1836, to have made a geological survey of .the State of Pennsylvania. The survey was immediately organized. Henry D. Rogers was appointed geologist, James C. Booth and John F. Frazer assistant geologists, and Robert E. Rogers chemist. Henry D. Rogers was elected an honorary member of the Boston Society of Natural History, June 1, 1842. He partici- pated in discussions at its meetings every year from 1845 to 1858, both inclusive, except the year 1856. All his oral com- munications relate to geological facts or theories. In 1844 he delivered a course of lectures on geologj7 in the Masonic Temple in Boston. He became a resident of Boston in 184 6, and was married there in March, 1854, to Miss Eliza S. Lincoln. He made six annual reports of the progress of the Geological Survey of Pennsylvania ; the first December 20. 1836, and the last February 1, 1842. The Legislature of 1841-42 failed to make an appropriation for the continuance of the survey, and it was therefore suspended. Professor Rogers was employed from 1841 till 1851 by coal companies as an expert. Field-work of the survey was resumed in 1851, and continued through 1852, '53 and '54. Appropriations made by the Legislature for carrying on the survey were always too narrowly restricted, never liberal. Hence obstacles to the progress of the work intervened and delayed its completion. Under an act of March, 1855, it was agreed that the publica- tion of the final report of the survey should be confided to Professor Rogers. He was to own the copyright and receive $16,000, on condition that he delivered to the State, within three years, one thousand copies of it. In order to produce the re- port in an appropriate st}Tle for this sum, it was obvious to him that the work must be clone where the skilled labor requisite for it could be obtained at rates below those prevailing at the time in Philadelphia. For the sake of such advantage he transferred PROC. AMER. PHILOS. S0C. XXXIII. P. PRINTED NOVEMBER 10, 1885. 199 Ruschenberger.] xmi [Nov. 6, his domicile to Edinburgh, where the printing of the report and the engravings to illustrate it were executed. This great work was published according to contract, bearing the imprint of J. B. Lippincott & Co., Philadelphia, 1858. It brought him a harvest of approbation from the scientific community, but no other profit. The cost of the publication exceeded the sum stipulated for it by several thousand dollars. The results of assiduous labor during eighteen years, often em- barrassed by anxiety in surmounting difficulties, are admirably presented in this magnificent report. It consists of two quarto volumes, which together contain 1682 pages, illustrated by 778 intercalated cuts, 69 plates and 18 folded sheets of sections, all executed in the best style of that time. A summary history of the survey, and the names of all the assistants employed in it from beginning to end, are given in the preface, with praise of most of them and grateful mention of assistance in the work from his brother William. The chief of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, Professor J. P. Lesley, a qualified judge, commends the work generally, a summary of the contents of which he gives, and says : " But let any one read the special memoirs with which he closes the second volume of his final report, and there can be no sentiment but one of admiration for the breadth of his views and the clearness, force and elegance of his delineations. No geological paper has ever appeared excelling in ever}' good quality his memoir on coal."* While resident in Edinburgh the University of Dublin con- ferred upon him, in 1857, the honorary degree of Doctor of Laws ; he was elected member of the Geological Societ}' of Lon- don, and a fellow of the Royal Society of Edinburgh; became one of the conductors of the Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, and joined Sir William and A. K. Johnston in the pub- lication of maps of physical geography and geology. In 1858 he was appointed Regius Professor of Natural History in the University of Glasgow. Then he transferred his residence to Shawlands, a suburb of that city. During the last two years of * Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, 1874-5-G. Historical Sketch of Geological Explorations in Pennsylvania and other states. By J. I'. Lesley. Published by the Board of Commissioners for the Second Geological Survey. Harrisburg, 1S7(J. 1885.] J- -"3 [Ruschenberger. his life he was President of the Philosophical Society of Glas- gow. Accompanied by his wite and daughter he visited the United States in August, 1865, and returned without them to Shawlands early in April, 1866, to be in time to begin his courses of instruc - tion in May. His physical constitution was not vigorous. His force bad been slowly waning for some time. Indeed, hope of restora- tion to health was among the motives of his voyage to the United States. On returning to his residence, No. 5 Elgin Villas, he tried to resume his duties, but found his power to labor had been so far expended that he could not work. An obscure disease, which probably had been long seated in the brain, terminated his life May 29, 1866, near the close of his fifty-eighth year. The announcement of his death in the news- papers of Glasgow was accompanied by expressions of praise of his character and approbation of his career, mentioning the honors paid to him by learned organizations. " He was," said one, "a quiet, amiable, and thoroughly lovable man, and much admired by all who had the opportunity of knowing him inti- mately." Another said, among other things, " indeed he actu- ally shone when descanting on the physical conformation of the earth's surface, and the grandeur of the operating forces to pro- duce that conformation. His public lectures were well worth hearing when he confined himself to geology and the allied sub- jects of climatology and physical geography, and his services thus came to be in requisition in many places be}'ond the college class-room. He had keen powers of observation, and his power of generalization reached very high. He was likewise possessed of great literary ability, and frequently contributed excellent articles to scientific and other journals." The career of the youngest and last of these distinguished brothers was as useful and praiseworthy as that of his seniors. Robert Empie Rogers, the sixth child and fourth son of his parents, was born in Baltimore, March 29, 1813. He assumed the name of Empie while a youth as a lasting token of his grateful appreciation of parental care bestowed upon him at the College of William and Mary after the death of his mother, in 1820, when he was only seven years old, by the Rev. Adam P. Empie, D.D., and his wife. Kuschenberger.l X.JA. [Nov. 6, His early education was directed by his father. After his death, 1828, it was managed by his brothers James and William. The intention was that he should be a civil engineer. He started as an assistant to a party making the survey of the route for the Boston and Providence Railroad. When and how long he was so employed is uncertain. His experience, however, was not satisfactory. In a letter, dated New York, May fi, 1 833, and addressed to his brother William, at Williamsburg, Ya., he says: "Henr}' asks what are my plans, and broaches the idea of my again embarking for a time in engineering. For me at least — for me alone — I fear there is little prospect of success, at any rate in connection with those with whom I have been previously engaged. I do not know how it might be elsewhere. " In a letter to Henry, some time since, I stated, as I have be- fore done to you, that my favorite desire always has been, and I thought always would be, to follow, if possible, in your career, to become an instructor; and as preparatory to some higher station, I thought I should like to have charge of a school, either of my own or become teacher in some flourishing estab- lishment of the kind. Such an occupation I think would be a useful schooling for myself, for I conceive that at no time could I learn so fast as when teaching, for then I should be making practical application of what I would be m}- self acquiring, and while occupied I would have also a portion of time altogether apart to myself to devote in mjr own way to my own improve- ment. ****** " Your advice about nvy studies I think correct. I was doubt- ful whether it would be prudent to occupy myself with mathe- matics until I could be under your direction. I will therefore refrain for the present and continue with botany, geology and mineralogy." These few sentences distinctly imply the character of his men- tal tone at that period, as well as the scope of his 3roung ambition, and at the same time suggest that his conduct was swayed and moulded by the opinions and example of his brother William. The project of becoming a civil engineer was abandoned. Probably in the autumn of 1 833 he determined to stwty medi- cine. He became a pupil of Dr. Kobert Hare, Professor of 1885.] \2iiy [Ruschenberger. Chemistry, and worked zealously in his laboratory till the close of his under-graduate course. He duly submitted a thesis, entitled " Experiments on the blood, together with some new facts in regard to animal and vegetable structures, illustrative of many of the most important phenomena of organic life," etc., and graduated from the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania, March, 1836 This thesis, illustrated by many wood cuts, was published in the American Journal of the Medical Sciences.* The practice of medicine was not to his taste. He devoted himself to chemistry. From 1836 to 1842 he was the chemist of the first Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, of which his brother Henry was the chief. He became a member of the Academy of Natural Sciences, of Philadelphia, February, 1837. During nearly a half century he evinced interest in the pursuits of the Society. At irregular intervals he was frequently present at its stated meetings of sev- eral successive years, participated in discussions, delivered lec- tures to promote its interest and contributed to its funds, f Dr. Rogers was elected a member of the Franklin Institute of the State of Pennsylvania, April 18, 1838, and resigned May 18, 1845. He was again elected November 18, 1852, on returning to Philadelphia after several years' absence ; became a "life mem- ber" in 1855, and one of the Board of Managers in 1857. He was one of the vice-presidents during seventeen years, from Jan- uary, 1858. In January, 1875, he was elected President. He de- clined reelection January, 1879,1 and was again returned to the Board of Managers, and continued to be a member of it to the close of his life. * Vol. xviii, 1836. t In the Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philadelphia, from 1859 to 1862, many of his ver- bal communications are noted. JOn vacating the chair for his successor, at the stated meeting, January 15, 1879, he thanked the members of the Institute for their unvarying kindness towards him during the four years of his presidency. And then, on motion of Mr. J. E. Mitchell, the meeting unanimously adopted the following preamble and resolution: "Whereas, our highly esteemed presiding officer, Dr. R. E. Rogers, having declined a re-election to the office he has so acceptably filled for the past four years, it is therefore, Resolved, That in parting with Dr. Rogers we desire to place on record our high appreciation of the courteous and impartial manner with which he has presided over our deliberations, as well as our appreciation of the valuable time Ruschenberger.J 1—0 [Nov. 6, He was prominently active in the work of the Institute, de- livered courses of lectures on chemistry before its classes, assisted in the management of its public exhibitions, served on several of its standing and on many of its special committees, the most notable of which was one on tests of the efficiency of dynamo-electric machines,* and another on the dangers of electric lighting.f At the celebration of the semi-centennial anniversary of the foundation of the society, February 5, 1814, in the Musical Fund Hall, he delivered an eloquent address, narrating in a general way a history of scientific discoveries and their practical appli- cations in the half century, and indicating how the work carried on during that period by the Institute had contributed to the progress of science and the diffusion of knowledge. J Near the close of his thirtieth year he married, March 13, 1843, Miss Fanny Montgomery, a daughter of Mr. Joseph S. Lewis, a gentleman who was prominent among those who established the city's water-works at Fair mount. In the session 1841-42, on invitation, he completed the course of chemical instruction at the University of Virginia which had been interrupted by sickness of the professor, Dr. John P. Emmet, from which he did not recover. Dr. Rogers was elected in his place, Professor of General and Applied Chemistry and Materia Medica, in March, 1842, and discharged the duties of the office satisfactorily to all concerned during ten years. In May, 1852, he was a representative of the University of Virginia at the meeting of the American Medical Association in Richmond, * Journal of the Franklin Institute, p. 1878, lxxv, pp. 303-378. t Journal of the Franklin Institute, 1881, lxxxii, pp. 401-408. J Commemorative Exercises at the Fiftieth Anniversary of the Franklin Institute of the State of Pennsylvania for the Promotion of the Mechanic Arts. Held on Friday evening, February 6, 1874, at the Musical Fund Hall. Hall of the Institute, Seventh street, below Market street, Philadelphia, 1874. 8vo, pp. 96. and talents he has devoted to the service of this Institute, and we indulge the hope that in future as in the past, it may have the benefit of his extensive re- search and great experience " At the stated meeting, September 7, 1881. the President announced the death of Prof. Robert E. Rogers, and that the Board of Managers had appointed Messrs. J. E. Mitchell, E. J. Houston and [saac Norris, Jr., a committee to suit- ably express the sentiments of the Board; and, on motion, appointed Dr. G. M. Ward and Dr. W. H. Wahl, to co-operate with the committee. Their report is published in the Journal, p. 387, lxxxviii, 1884, 197 1885.] -L-j» LRuschenberger. Ya., and so became a permanent member of the society. At its meeting in New York, 1853, he represented the University of Pennsylvania. He was present when the Association met at Philadelphia, in 1855, and again as a representative of the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania in 1872. At that meeting, in behalf of the profession of Philadelphia, he welcomed the delegates.* He was elected Professor of Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania, August, 1852, in place of his brother James, de- ceased, and Dean of the Medical Faculty in 1856. The American edition of Lehmann's great work, Physiological Chemistry, was edited by him and published by Blanchard & Lea, October, 1855.f He was chosen a member of the American Philosophical So- ciety July 30, 1855, and elected one of its Council January 7, 1859. He was frequently present at the meetings of the So- ciety, often took part in discussions, and served on several com- mittees. He was elected a Fellow of the College of Physicians of Philadelphia April 1, 1857, but was rarely present at its meet- ings. At one of them, 1858, he related a case of arsenical poisoning in which he appeared in Court as an expert. The victim had been taking, for some time, subnitrate of bismuth by prescription. He found that a remnant of the same con- tained a small quantity of arsenic, and also that samples of sub- nitrate of bismuth, obtained from ten druggists' shops, were contaminated in like manner, but not sufficiently to render the quantity ordinarily prescribed dangerous. On this testimony the jury acquitted the accused, although circumstances strongly implied his guilt.J Arsenical contamination of the subnitrate of bismuth of the shops had not been previously suspected. While the war of rebellion was in progress Dr. Rogers was appointed an Acting Assistant-Surgeon in the army, July 8, * Trans. Amer. Med. Assoc, pp. 9-11, xxiii, 1872. t Physiological Chemistry. By Professor C. G. Lehmann. Translated from the second edition. By George E. Day, M.D./F.R.S., Fellow of the Royal College of Physicians, and Professor of Medicine in the University of St. Andrews. Edited by R. E. Rogers, M.D., Professor of Chemistry in the Medical Depart- ment of the University of Pennsylvania. With illustrations, selected from Funke's Atlas of Physiological Chemistry, and an Appendix of Plates. Com- plete In two volumes. [8vo, vol. i, pp. 648, vol. 2, pp. 547.] Blanchard & Lea, Philadelphia, 1855. t Amer. Jour. Med. Sc, p. 99, vol. xxxvi, 1858. Ruschenberger.] ±*jo [Nov. 6, 1862, for duty at the West Philadelphia Military Hospital, and served till June 18, 1863. At his suggestion and under his supervision, a steam mangle was set up in West Philadelphia — Chestnut street, east of Thirty-first street — to accelerate the laundry work of the great hospital. The day the machine was ready to be set to work, January 10, 1863, he was present to see it started. It is related that while benevolently showing a woman who was to feed it the dangers to which the work ex- posed her, his own right hand was caught and crushed betwixt the very hot [180° P.] revolving iron cylinders. With charac- teristic alertness he reached out his left hand and instantly threw the leather band off from the revolving drum which gave motion to the machine, and stopped it. Then, in lifting the heavy cylinder [800 pounds] for his release, it slipped from the end of a crowbar in the hands of a workman and fell back upon the hand, thus aggravating the injury already inflicted. In his suffering he was considerate of another. He conjec- tured that his wife might be too profoundly shocked, should he appear before her with the hurt hand concealed in bloody wraps, immediately after the sound of rattling wheels in their quiet street had ceased in front of the house. To coi-ivey to her an impression that his injury was less than it really was, he gal- lantly alighted from the carriage in which he was at the street corner nearest his residence and walked home. His colleague in the University, Dr. Henry H. Smith, Pro- fessor of Surgery, amputated the injured extremity above the wrist at night, January 24. The result of the operation was entirely satisfactory. Por some time he wore an artificial hand, admirably made for him by C. W. Kolbe,a well-known cutler of the city. One day, very soon after the stump had healed, as Professor Smith was about to begin his lecture, Dr. Rogers entered the arena and begged leave to interrupt him for a moment. Then, resting his left hand upon the Professor's shoulder, he ad- dressed the assembled class in his eloquent way, and expressed his grateful sense of obligation to the eminent skill and kind attention of their Professor of Surgery. His speech was re- ceived with rounds of tremendous applause. The scene is not likely to be forgotton by any who was present. Almost ambidextrous, prior to the accident, he speedily learned 1885.] -I-1'-' [Ruschenberger. to write with his left hand and to use the right arm, beneath the shoulder, in prehension with notable skill in his experiments while lecturing. Soon after the loss of his hand a greater sorrow came to him. His happy married life of twenty years was ended. His wife died February 21, 1863. Under an attraction of speculative chances in petroleum, which at the time shrewd men believed to be excellent, many friends, relying upon his scientific judgment in the premises, were in- duced to join Dr. Rogers in organizing the Humboldt Oil Com- pany, February IT, 1864. They contributed a quarter of a million of dollars. Land supposed to be richly stored with oil was purchased, wells were sunk and work carried on for some time without profit. The assets of the company were publicly sold, February 4, 1873, for a sum not more than sufficient to return the stockholders one cent a share. Dr. Rogers owned one-fifth of all the shares, and lost more than any one who had stock in the unhappy enterprise he had prompted. Miss Delia Saunders became his second wife, April 30, 1866. May 10, 1872, the Secretary of the Treasury of the United States appointed Drs. H. R. Linderman and Robert E. Rogers a committee to examine the Melter and Refiner's Department of the Mint at Philadelphia, and ascertain the extent and sources of an alleged " waste of silver in excess of the amount tolerated by law." The processes of assaying and refining the bullion and converting it into coin were carefully investigated and tested by numerous experiments at the Mint, and at the Assay Office in New York. About two months were spent in the ex- amination. The result of it was presented July 25, 1872, in a well considered and elaborate " Report on the wastage of silver bullion in the Melter and Refiner's Department of the Mint." This investigation, valuable in itself, was also valuable in its consequences. His experimental trials to apply the principles of chemical science to the improvement of an industrial process of great importance, suggested modifications in the methods of refining the precious metals which were subsequently adopted.* * "Some important questions of a chemical and metallurgical character hav- ing arisen with regard to various mint manipulations of the precious metals, a series of experiments to determine the same were made at the Philadelphia Mint, in the latter part of the fiscal year, under the supervision of Professor R. E. Rogers. The results obtained were conclusive of several points, and will be of value in future minting operations." Report of the Director of the Mint, November 1, 1873, p. 12. PR0C. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. Q. PRINTED NOVEMBER 11, 1885. 130 Ruschenberger.] xu\j [Nov. 6, He visited the Mint at San Francisco, in 1873, departing from Philadelphia August 5, and returning September 20, carefully- studied its working, and submitted reports upon it to the Director of the Mint in October and December. September 4, 1874, he reported the successful result of his experiments made at the Assay Office in New York, in August, to . rid the establishment of inconvenience from acid vapors. Prior to that time nitrous acid fumes, arising from the nitric acid used in refining silver, were allowed to escape, through the chimney, into the open air, sometimes seriously annojnng neigh- bors. To correct the evil, Dr. Rogers had constructed in the attic of the building a. furnace for burning coke, into which the fumes were conveyed and burned. Instead of extinguishing the fuel these fumes promote its combustion, which is an interesting chemical fact. He visited Washington by request in January and March, 1 875, to confer with the authorities about plans which he had proposed for the equipment of a refinery in the Mint at San Francisco. Those plans, which included the sulphuric acid pro- cess recommended by him October 15, 1873, were adopted May 3, 1875. They included the erection of additional buildings. He arrived at San Francisco May 19. The actual work of construction and equipment of the refinery was begun May 24, and finished July 26, and placed in charge of the Superintendent, in working order, August 25, 1875. At the suggestion of Dr. Rogers, during the progress of the work, an artesian well was sunk within the hollow square of the Mint which supplies 100,000 gallons of excellent water daily for all the uses of the establishment. In reference to this enterprise, the Director of the Mint, in his annual report, November 20, 1875, says: "The arranging of the plan of the refinery and its equipment was intrusted to Robert E. Rogers, Professor of Chemistry in the University of Penn- sylvania, whose eminent qualifications as a chemist and metal- lurgist, rendered him peculiarly qualified for this service, and who performed the duty assigned him in an entirely satisfactory manner. The refinery has been in successful operation since the 2(')th day of August last, and with much advantage to the public interests." 1885.] J- "J- _ [Ruschenberger. Under instructions of the Director of the Mint he made, in November, 1875, "a careful and laborious investigation " of the consolidated Virginia and California Mine in Nevada, for the purpose of estimating " their probable total yield of gold and silver based upon their present explored extent and the quality of their ores as ascertained by assays." And after due consid- eration of the chances of over-estimation he places the production " at not less than $150,000,000," which is one-half of the sum in- dicated by the assays. Besides doing the work just mentioned, Dr. Rogers served as a member of the Annual Assay Commission every year from 1871 to 1879, both years included. From June, 1872, till his death, he was one of the chemists, employed by the Gas Trust of Philadelphia, to make analyses and daily photometrical tests of the gas. He was succeeded in the office by his assistant, Dr. George M. Ward. Very soon after the University of Pennsylvania was trans- ferred to the buildings which it now occupies in West Phila- delphia, it was suggested that the scheme of medical teaching which had been long followed ought to be improved. During the evolution of the plan adopted and the transition from the old to the new ways, personal discussions of the subject were frequent and often warm. The Board of Trustees, it was sup- posed, did not rightly appreciate the injury which the proposed changes might work to its medical faculty. The professors were ready for and in favor of such reform as would make the diploma significant of qualifications higher than obtainable in any other medical school ; but they were not prepared to sacrifice their pecuniary interests to effect at once what might be achieved gradually without much loss. The Trustees seemed to differ from them more about the time and methods of proceeding than the object desired. With comparatively few exceptions, medical education is sought as a means of livelihood where it may be had at least cost of labor, time and money. The diploma, which carries with it license to practise, the public generally accepts as a certificate of qualification. Rivalry and competition of the many medical schools are strong, each striving to attract as many students as possible, because, as a rule, the emolument of the Ruschenberger.] lO-j [Nov. 0, professors is contingent upon the number ; and large classes, in common estimation, vouch for the excellence of the school as well as of the qualification of its graduates. The circumstances of medical teaching suggested that to im- mediately prolong the course of study, thus augmenting the expenses of the student and increase the requirements of gradu- ation to what they should be, must be instantly followed by great reduction of the classes, and consequently of the remun- eration of the professors. The aspect of affairs was to them unpromising. Discontent was prevalent. While matters were still in an uncertain state, Dr. Rogers, without application, was elected, May 2, 187 7, Professor of Med- ical Chemistry and Toxicology in the Jefferson Medical College, a chair just vacated by resignation. He accepted the office and resigned his position in the University, -which he had held during a quarter of a century. The transfer added to his emolument without increase of labor and relieved his anxiety. It was un- derstood that several of his old colleagues expressed at that time willingness to accept position elsewhere under like conditions. The Trustees managed affairs wisely. They established the excellent scheme of medical education now in operation, which, followed thoroughly by the student, places him be}rond the necessity of seeking further instruction after graduation in post- graduate courses, which many to whom diplomas may have been prematurely granted consider essential to properly qualify them for general practice. Discontent has disappeared. The pro- fessors receive annual salaries in place of fees from students. The prosperity of the Medical Department of the University seems to be assured. The reception of Dr. Rogers into the Jefferson Medical Col- lege was cordially manifested at his lecture introductory to the course of 1877-78. It was estimated that not less than 1200 physicians, students and others were crowded into the hall. At the conclusion of the lecture a silver vase was presented to him as a token of the respect felt for him by the great class of med- ical students. In addition to his own work in the college he completed the course of instruction on Materia Medica in the session of 1878, 1885.] ±36 [Ruschenberger. left unfinished by the professor of that branch, Dr. John B. Biddle, who died January 19, 1879. The degree of Doctor of Laws, LL.D., was conferred upon him June, 1883, by Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa. His second wife died January 9, 1883. This loss made a pro- found impression. Abated energy and impaired health followed. He resigned his office, July, 1884, and was elected emeritus professor. He died September 6, 1884, in his seventy-second year. The part given to Dr. Rogers to enact in this world has been well performed. He employed all his time advantageously in one direction or another. He was never idle. Besides his routine official work, he was sometimes engaged as an expert in criminal trials ; often delivered lectures, illustrated by experi- ments, for the benefit of institutions ; helped to release many a student from difficulties ascribable to his own heedlessness, and alwa}rs had several decent poor people, old or enfeebled, depending upon his bounty, whom he cheered by familiar counsels and sub- stantial gifts — little stipends to eke out their meagre earnings. He was ever ready to render aid in any emergency, small or great. Late one summer evening, in 1863, strolling, as was then his wont, in the outskirts of the city, he was overtaken by a market- man slowly driving his wagon and horses in a south-westerly direction towards Gray's Ferry. The man asked if he was on the right road to the Indian Queen, on North Third street. The Doctor perceived that he was too much bewildered to take care of his charge, and with his consent at once took a seat beside him, and with his one hand drove the team to the tavern named. One Sunday, at Long Branch, years ago, a gentleman who was bathing got beyond his depth and was borne seaward by the undertow. Two young men who were bathing at the same time saw his danger and hastened to his assistance; but when they reached him they were able to do little more than care for themselves. They could only now and then give him a little support and encourage him to continue his exertions to save himself. Dr. Rogers saw their peril from the hotel and instantly started for the beach, undressing and throwing his clothes, containing Ruschenberger.] XO*± [Nov. 6, his watch, money, &c, on the ground as he ran, and reached it just in time to jump on board of a boat putting off to the rescue. The boat had proceeded only a short distance when it was swamped. Dr. Rogers seized an oar, swam to the drowning persons, gave it to them and urged them to sustain themselves till aid should arrive. The drifting boat was flung against one of the gentlemen and the oar was wrenched from him. Seeing this. Dr. Rogers placed himself in a manner under him, and thus bearing him up, brought him, as well as those holding fast to the oar, safely ashore. And this was the third time he had heroically saved persons from drowning. He had a remarkable facility in the use of tools of all kinds, and a respectable talent for mechanical contrivance. He was author of many inventions — notable among them the Rogers and Black steam boiler — and of several modifications and improve- ments of electric apparatus. This ability was early manifested, 1835-36, in his original experiments on osmosis, in which he demonstrated how changes in the blood are produced by respira- tion. The tenderness of his nature may be discerned in the follow- ing sentences from the postscript of a letter to his brother William, May 6, 1833 : " My Dear Brother — What can be more grateful to an affectionate heart than to find in others a sympathy and reciprocation of the same warm feelings it proffers. How doubly blessed do I consider myself when I feel that in my brothers I have found such beings. " I had sealed this letter at home, but thinking it well before de- livering it to the mail to inquire for letters, I have been rejoiced to find yours of the 2d of May, and thus I am enabled to acknowledge its receipt and, let me assure you, with a thousand thanks for its contents." The Chairman of the Executive Committee, Dr. Samuel Ash- hurst, of the Society of the Alumni of the Medical Department of the University of Pennsylvania, in the annual report for 1885, says : " Highly endowed with the qualities which make an attractive lecturer, Dr. Rogers was always popular with the large classes who for so many years obtained their elementary knowl- edge of chemistry from his instruction, while his genial man- ners and his amiability of heart made him beloved by very 1885.] X'J,J llluschenberger. many. Dr. Rogers took an active part in the formation of this Society, and acted as its Treasurer for several years. He left the record of a life in which integrity and gentleness were united with courtesy and energy in a high degree, and one of which this Society can affectionately take notice by these few memorial words." When Margaret Rogers installed the lame boy whom she had trained to be master in the clay-walled school hut on the Eder- gole estate, she was probably conscious of doing rightly ; but she did not foresee the benefit she was conferring on future genera- tions of the house. The crop, the outcome of her planting, has been larger and better than she possibly could have dreamed. The inborn desire, the disposition of Patrick to learn, was quickened and fostered there. He imparted it to his sons, the brothers Rogers. All came to be professors, all were recognized by the educational classes to be among the efficient and eminent, and all were prominent among the votaries of science. When their father died their means were insufficient. The appointment of William in the College of William and Mary was a god-send. He generously helped his brothers from the income of his office. Indeed, until all had placed themselves be- yond need, the full purse, no matter who of the four held it, was regarded to be a common resource. They helped each other as occasion required. Their published writings, a list of which is appended, imply industry, as well as harmony of purpose and pursuit. Besides published books and reports, William contributed to scientific serials and periodicals forty-nine, and Henry thirty- four papers. James and Robert were co-laborers. William and Henry were joint authors of eight, and Robert and William of nineteen papers. The brothers were full of zeal for the growth and diffusion of knowledge; and, habitually scanning German, French, English and American scientific periodicals, they Were ever informed of the last step of its progress. Whenever they met, after more or less prolonged separations, the scientific topic of the day was sure to be a chief subject of conversation. In blood and lineage the brothers Rogers were Irishmen ; but the locality of their birth and education made them loyal Amer- icans, and exemplary citizens. Kuschenberger.] J-OO [Nov. 6, It is related that at a dinner party, in Glasgow, just at the close of the rebellion, a guest, who was somewhat enthusiastic in predicting the success of the rebels, in a taunting tone called upon Professor H. D. Rogers, at the opposite end of the table, to tell the company his opinion of the chance of preserving the Union. Thus interrupted while speaking with a guest, seated next to him, he quietly replied, " We shall see, sir," and re- sumed his conversation. The next morning the papers announced Lee's unconditional surrender, and collapse of the rebellion. Professor Rogers saw the gentleman approaching him from a distance, but, as if he wished to avoid a meeting, he crossed to the opposite side of the street and bestowed his whole attention upon a shop window. Professor Rogers was soon at his side and said emphatically, " Good morning, Mr. . We have seen, sir." Then, without waiting for a reply, walked on. The brothers Rogers were highly gifted. They possessed a vigorous and quick understanding, invincibre diligence happily combined with those moral and intellectual attributes which are essential to a truly manly character. They were efficient teachers. The conception of the subject of their lessons was always clearly defined in all its details and relations, which were presented with nicely devised experimental illustrations and apt fluency of speech rarely excelled. They imparted their knowl- edge to thousands of pupils, many of whom in turn imparted it to others. Within the limits of the field which they cultivated, few have wrought more acceptably or more usefully than the brothers Rogers. " Who kindly shows a wanderer his way, Lights, as it were, his torch from his own torch — In kindling others' light, no less he shines." Life — the incomprehensible, intrinsic, conservative force of every organism which imparts motion to its structures without essentially changing their composition or altering their relations during an indefinitely limited period — that earthly life has de- parted from the brothers. Their tasks have been completed, and their value computed ; but their names without a dimmed spot or smirch upon them are fixed along paths of knowledge and may still help to light others on the way, as long as their sheen is discernible. And thus, the influence of their lives may be prolonged through their example and work. 137 1885.] -Lf [Ruschenberger. List of the Published Writings op Patrick Kerr Rogers, M.D., Professor of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry in the College of William and Mary, Williamsburg, Va. An Investigation of the properties of the Liriodendron Tulipifera, or Poplar Tree. By Patrick Kerr Rogers, formerly of Ireland ; now of Philadelphia ; Honorary Member of the Medical and Chemical Societies. "The man who discovers one valuable new medicine is a more important benefactor to his species than Alexander, Csesar or an hundred other con- querors. Even his glory, in the estimation of a truly civilized age, will be greater and more lasting." — Professor Barton. 8 vo, pp. 64. Printed by Benjamin Johnson, Philadelphia, 1802. A case of Epilepsy, successfully treated by the Nitrate of Silver ; in a letter to the Editor, from P. K. Rogers, M.D., of Philadelphia. First Supplement to the Med. and Physical Journal. Philad., 1806, pp. 12-15. A case of Tetanus, cured by injections of Tobacco, &c. In a letter to the Editor, from P. K. Rogers. M.D., of Philadelphia. Philad. Med. and Physical Jour., 1808, iii, pp. 90-95. Papers in defense of Inoculation in preference to Vaccination. Ameri- can and Commercial Advertiser. Baltimore, Jan. 12, Feb. 19, March 19, 1816. Preparation of Mercurial Ointment. By Patrick Kerr Rogers, M.D., of Baltimore. Amer. Med. Recorder, 1819. pp. 331-338. Observations on the Employment of Caustic Issues in the treatment of various diseases. By P. K. Rogers, M.D., Professor of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry, Williamsburg, Va. Amer. Med. Recorder, 1822, v, pp. 216-224. An Introduction to the Mathematical Principles of Natural Philosophy, adapted to the use of Beginners ; and arranged more particularly for the convenience of Junior Students of William and Mary College, Virginia. By Patrick Kerr Rogers, M.D., Professor of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry, William and Mary. Shepperd & Pollard, Printers. Richmond, 1822. 8vo, pp. 144. List of Published Writings of James B. Rogers, M.D. Minutes of Analysis of Soup containing Arsenic. By Dr. James B. Rogers, George W. Andrews and Wm. R. Fisher. Baltimore, April 1> 1834. Amer. Jour. Pharmacy, vi, 94, July, 1834. James B. Rogers and James Green. Experiments with the elementary Voltaic Battery. Silliman, Journ., xxviii, 1835. pp. 33-42. Elements of Chemistry, including the history of the Imponderables and the Inorganic Chemistry of the late Edward Turner, M.D., F.R.S.L. & E., Seventh edition ; and the Outlines of Organic Chemistry. By William PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. R. PRINTED NOVEMBER 11, 1885. Ruschenberger.] lOo [Nov. 6, Gregory, M.D., &c, Professor of Chemistry, University of Edinburgh. With notes and additions. By James B. Rogers, M.D., Professor of Gen- ral Chemistry, Franklin Institute, and Lecturer on Medical Chemistry, &c, and Robert E. Rogers, M.D., Professor of Chemistry and Materia Medica, University of Virginia, &c. 8vo, pp. 'xxii — 848. Thomas Cowperthwait & Co. Philadelphia, 1846. James B. and Robert E. Rogers. On the alleged insolubility of Copper in Hydrochloric Acid ; with an examination of Fuch's method for analyzing iron ores, metallic iron, etc. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1848, p. 39; Silliman, Journ., vi, 1848, pp. 395-396. List of the Published Writings of Wm. B. Rogers, LL.D. Essays on the Weather — On the formation of dew — several articles. The Messenger of Useful Knowledge. Carlisle, Pa. 1830. Analysis of Shells. Silliman, Journ., xxvi, pp. 361-365. 1834. On the Discovery of Green Sand in the Calcareous Deposit of Eastern Virginia, and on the probable existence of this substance in extensive beds near the western limits of our ordinary Marl. Farmers Register, June 26-27, 1834, and May, 1835. Reprinted. Geology of the Virginias. On the existence of bi-malate of lime in the berries of the Sumach ; and the mode of procuring it from them in the crystalline form. Silli- man, Journ., xxvii, 1835, pp. 294-299. Apparatus for analyzing Calcareous Marl and other Carbonates. Silli- man, Journ., xxvii, 1835, pp. 299-301. Self-filling Syphon for Chemical Analysis. Silliman, Journ., xxvii, 1835, pp. 302-303. Report of the Geological Reconnoissance of the State of Virginia. Made under the appointment of the Board of Public Works.. By William B. Rogers, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the University of Virginia. DeSilver Thomas & Co. Philad., 1836. 8vo, pp. 143.* Report of the Progress of the Geological Survey of the State of Virginia, for the year 1836. pp. 24.* Report of the Progress of the Geological Survey of the State of Virginia, for 1837. pp. 43.* Report of the Progress of the Geological Survey of the State of Virginia, for 1838. pp. 56.* An Elementary Treatise on the strength of Materials : Being the sub- stance of the lectures on that subject, delivered in the School of Engineer- ing of the University of Virginia. By Wm. B. Rogers, Professor of Natural Philosophy in that Institution. 8vo, pp. 50. Printed by Tomkins & Noel, Charlottesville, 1838. [Copy Presented to the Franklin Institute by Wm. B. Rogers.] * Reprinted in the Geology of the Virginias, 1SS4. 1885.] lOJ IRuschenberger. Report of the Progress of the Geological Survey of the State of Virginia, for 1839. pp. 167.* Report of the Progress of the Geological Survey of the State of Virginia, for 1840. pp. 127.* Report of the Progress of the Geological Survey of the State of Virginia, for the year 1841. pp.31.* On the Age of the Coal Rocks of Eastern Virginia. Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geologists and Naturalists, 1840-42. pp. 14, plate i.* Some observations of Subterranean Temperature in the Coal Mines of Eastern Virginia. Trans. Amer. Assoc. Geologists and Naturalists, 1840-42. pp. 9.* On the connection of Thermal Springs in Virginia with Anticlinal Axes and Faults. Trans. Amer. Assoc, of Geologists and Naturalists, 1840-42. pp. 23.* On the age of Coal Rocks of Eastern Virginia. Amer. Geol. and Nat. Assoc. Reports, 1843, pp. 298-316. On the connection of Thermal Springs in Virginia with Anticlinal Axes and Faults. Amer. Geol. and Nat. Ass. Reports, 1843, pp. 323-347. Observations of Subterranean Temperature of the Coal Mines of Eastern Virginia. Amer. Geol. and Nat. Assoc. Reports, 1843, pp. 532-538 ; Bibl. Univ., xlv, 1843, pp. 393-394. On the Phenomena of the great Earthquakes which occurred during the past Winter, one in this country and the other in the West Indies, and on a general theory of Earthquake Motion. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, iii, 1843, pp. 64-67. An account of some new Instruments and Processes for the analysis of the Carbonates. Silliman, Journ., xlvi, 1844, pp. 346-359. A system of classification and nomenclature of the Palaeozoic Rocks of the United States, with an account of their distribution, more particularly in the Appalachian mountain chain. Silliman, Journ., xlvii, 1844, pp. 111-112. On the Gold Region of the United States. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Science, 1850. p. 20. On Mechanical Powers. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Science, 1850. p. 16. On Acid and Alkaline Springs. Amer. Assoc. Proc, 1848. pp. 94-95 ; Silliman, Journ., ix, 1850, pp. 123-126. Elements of Mechanical 'Philosophy, for the use of the Junior Students of the University of Virginia. By Wm. B. Rogers, Professor of Natural Philosophy and Geology in the University. 8vo, pp. 339. Thurston, Tony & Emerson, Printers. Boston, 1852. On Binocular Combinations. Proc. Amer. Acad., iii, 1852-57, p. 213. On the Ozonometer. Proc. Amer. Acad., 1852-1857, p. 220. Report on the Pridevale Coal and Iron Ore, West Virginia, 1854. pp. 27.* * Reprinted in the Geology of the Virginias, 1884. Ruschenbergcr.] 1Q\J [Nov. 6, Observations on the Natural Coke and the associated igne'ous and altered Rocks of the Oolite Coal Region in the vicinity of Richmond, Va. pp. 2. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1854-56.* Proofs of the Prozoic Age of some of the altered Rocks of Eastern Mas- sachusetts from fossils recently discovered. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sc, iii, 1852-57. pp. 315-318. Results of Calculations of the Terminal Velocity of Rain-drops of dif- ferent diameters. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, v, 1854-56, pp. 266-268, 282-283. On the Relations of the New Red Sandstone of the Connecticut valley and the coal-bearing Rocks of Eastern Virginia and North Carolina. Silli- man, Journ., xix, 1855, pp. 123-125. Observations on Binocular Vision. Silliman, Journ., xx, 1855, pp. 86-93, 204-220, 318-335 ; xxi, 1856, pp. 80-95, 173-188. On the form of the Curve resulting from the Binocular union of a Straight Line with a Circular Arc or of two Equal Circular Arcs with one another. Edinb. New Phil. Journ., iii, 1856, pp. 210-218. On the Discovery of the Paradoxides in the altered Rocks of Eastern Massachusetts. Edinb. New Phil. Journ., iv, 1856, pp. 301-304. Discovery of Palaeozoic Fossils in Eastern Massachusetts. Silliman, Journ., xxii, 1856, pp. 296-298. On the Origin and Accumulation of the Protocarbonate of Iron in Coal Measures. Silliman, Journ., xxi, 1856, pp. 339-343. On Ozone in the Atmosphere. Silliman, Journ., xxii, 1856, pp. 141-142. Brief Account of the Construction and Effects of a very powerful Indue tion Apparatus, devised by Mr. E. S. Ritchie. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1857 (pt. 3), pp. 15-16. On a New Stereoscopic Slide. Proc. Amer. Assoc, iv, 1857-60. pp. 360-362. Some Experiments on Sonorous Flames, with remarks on the primary source of their vibration. Silliman, Journ., xxvi, 1858, pp. 1-15 ; Proc Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, vi, 1856-59, pp. 333-335, 339-340, 346-352. On the Origin of Sonorous Vibrations produced under certain conditions by flames from wicks or wire-gauze. Silliman, Journ., xxvi, 1858, pp. 240-241 . On the Formation of Rotating Rings by Air and Liquids under certain conditions of discharge. Silliman, Journ., xxvi, 1858, pp. 246-253. On Ozone Observations. Edinb. New Phil. Journ., vi, 1858, pp. 35-42. On some Sonorous Flames. Phil. Mag., xv, 1858, 261-263. Examination of Japanese Vegetable Wax. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, vii, 1859-61, pp. 58-59. Observations on the Coiling of the Tendrils of the "Winter Squash. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, vii, 1859-61, pp. 409-411. Some Experiments and Inferences in regard to Binocular Vision. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1860, pp. 187-192; Silliman, Journ., xxx, 1860, pp. 387-390. *Rep rill ted in the Geology of the Virginias, 1881. 1885.1 J-^fcJ- [Rusclienberger. Oa our Inability from the Retinal Impression alone to determine which Retina is impressed. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1860, pp. 192-198 ; Silliman, Journ., xxx, 1860, pp. 404-409. Experiments and Conclusions on Binocular Vision. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1860 (pt, 2), pp. 17-18. On the Phenomena of Electrical Vacuum Tubes. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1860 (pt. 2), pp. 30-31. Notes on the Aurora of the 28th of August, and several subsequent nights, as observed at Lunenburg, Massachusetts, Lat. 42° 35'. Edinb. New Phil. Journ., xi, 1860, pp.9 0-99 ; Silliman, Journ., 1860, pp. 255-256. Observations on Albertite, or so-called Albert coal of New Brunswick. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philadelphia, 1860, xii, p. 98. On the Causes which gave rise to the generally elongated form and parallel arrangement of the pebbles in the Newport Conglomerate. Silli- man, Journ., xxxi, 1861, pp. 440-442. Coal, working power of. Mechanics Mag. London, 1861. Amer. Jour., Pharmacy, 1862, p. 90. Electric illumination at Boston. Photometrical powers of the light. Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxvi, 1863, pp. 307-308. An Account of Apparatus and Processes for the chemical and photo- metrical testing of Illuminating Gas. Brit. Assoc. Rep., xxxiv, 1864 (Sect), pp. 39-40. On the Gravel and Cobble-Stone Deposits of Virginia and the Middle States, pp. 5. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, 1875.* Infusorial Deposit of Virginia in the Fort Monroe Artesian Well. pp. 4. 1882. Notes from Macfarlane's Geological Railway Guide [corrected to 1883], pp. 14.* By "William B. and Henry D. Rogers. Contributions to the Geology of the Tertiary Formations of Virginia. 5 plates, pp. 13. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, 1835-37. On the Physical Structure of the Appalachian Chain, as exemplifying the laws which have regulated the elevation of great mountain chains gen- erally. 3 plates, pp. 42. Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geologists and Natural- ists.* By William B. and Robert E. Rogers. On the Absorption of Carbonic Acid Gas by Sulphuric Acid. Chemical Gazette, vi, 1848, pp. 477-480. On the Volatility of Potassa and Soda and their Carbonates. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Advanc of Sc, Sept., 1848, pp. 36-38. On the Decomposition of Rocks by Meteoric Agents, and on the action of Mineral Acids on Feldspar. Amer. Jour. Science and Arts, v, p. 401. On the Decomposition of Rocks by Meteoric Water. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Advanc. Sc, Sept. 1848, p. 60. ♦Reprinted in the Geology of the Virginias, 1S84. 149 Ruschenberger.] xtt^j [Nov. 6, On the Absorption of Carbonic Acid by Liebig's dilute solution of Phos- phate of Soda. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Ad vane. Sc, 1848, p. 62. On the Comparative Solubility of the Carbonate of Lime and the Car- bonate of Magnesia. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Advanc. Sc, 1848, p. 95. On the Absorption of Carbonic Acid by Acids and Saline Solutions. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Advanc. Sc, 1850, p. 298-308. List of the Published Writings op Henry D. Rogers, LL.D., &c. Some Facts in the Geology of the Central and Western portions of North America, collected principally from the Statements and unpublished Notices of recent Travellers [1834]. Geol. Soc Proc, ii, 1833-38, pp. 103-106. Report on the Geology of North America. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1834, pp. 1-66. On the Proposed Method [Cohen's] of Analyzing Mineral Waters by Alcohol. Jour. Philad. Coll. Pbarm., v, 1834, pp. 279-284. Analysis of some of the Coals of Pennsylvania. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sc. of Philad., vii, 1834, pp. 158-177. On the Falls of Niagara and the reasoning of some Authors respecting them. Silliman. Journ., xxvii, 1835, pp. 326-335 ; Edinb. New. Phil. Jour., xix, 1835, pp. 281-292 ; Froriep, Notizen xlvi, 1835, col. 305-314. Report on the Geological Survey of the State of New Jersey. 8 vo, pp. 175. DeSilver Thomas & Co., Philadelphia, 1836. A Guide to a course of Lectures on Geology delivered in the University of Pennsylvania. 8 vo, pp. 43. Description of the Geology of the State of New Jersey, being a final re- port. 8vo, pp. 301. C. Sherman & Co., Printers. Philadelphia, 1840. Annual Report of the Geological and Mineralogical Survey of Pennsyl- vania, for 1836, 8 vo, pp. 22 ; for 1838, pp. 93 ; for 1839, pp. 119 ; for 1840, pp. 252 ; for 1841, pp. 179 ; for 1842, pp. 28. Account of the Mammoth Cave of Kentucky. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1841-44. An Inquiry into the Origin of the Appalachian Coal Strata, Bituminous and Anthracite. Amer. Geol. and Nat. Assoc. Reports, 1843, pp. 433-474. Researches in Relation to the recent Earthquakes with a New Theory of Earthquake Action. Silliman, Jour., xlv, 1843, pp. 341-347. Transition Rocks (Palaeozoic Rocks) of North America. Edin. New Phil. Journ., xxxvii, pp. 392-395. Remarks on the prevailing Hypotheses in explanation of the Phenomena of the Drift. Proc. Amer. Geol. and Nat. Assoc, 1845, pp. 12-14. On the direction of the Slaty Cleavages in the Strata of the south-eastern belts of the Appalachian Chain, and the parallelism of the Cleavage Dip with the planes of Maximum Temperature. Proc. Amer. Geol. and Nat. Assoc, 1845, pp. 49-50. Remarks upon the question of the Taconic Rocks, as a separate and in- 1885.] ltfco [Ruschenberger, dependent System of Strata. Proc. Amer. Geol. and Nat. Assoc., 1845, pp. 66-67. On the Geology of Pennsylvania. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1848 (pp. 2), pp. 74-75. On the structural features of the Appalachians, compared with those of the Alps and other disturbed districts of Europe. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1849, pp. 113-118. On the Analogy of the Ribbon Structure of Glaciers to the Slaty Cleav- age of Rocks. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1849, pp. 181-192. On the Origin of the Drift, and of the Lake and River Terraces of the United States and Europe, with an examination of the Laws of Aqueous Action connected with the Inquiry. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1849, pp. 239- 255. On the Coal Formation of the United States and especially as developed in Pennsylvania. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1850, pp. 65-70. On the Connection of the deposits of Common Salt with Climate. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1850, pp. 126-127. On the Position and Character of the Reptilian Foot-prints in the Car- boniferous Red Shale Formation of Eastern Pennsylvania. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1850, pp. 250^251. On the Origin of Salt and Salt Lakes. Edin. New Phil. Journ., li, 1851, pp. 130-132. . On the probable Depth of the Ocean of the European Chalk Deposits. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, iv, 1853, pp. 297-298 ; Silliman, Journ., xvii, 1854, pp. 131-132. On the Epoch of Elephas primigenius. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, v, 1854-56, pp. 22-23. On Fossil Impressions in Red Shale of Anthracite Coal Measures of Pennsylvania. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, v, 1854-56, pp. 182-186. On the Geology and Physical Geography of North America. Proc. Roy. Inst., ii: 1854-58, pp. 167-187. On the correlation of the North American and British Palaeozoic Strata. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1856 (pt. 2), pp. 175-186. Classification of the Metamorphic Strata of the Atlantic Slope of the Middle and Southern States. Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, vi, 1856-59, pp. 140-145. Introductory observations to L. Lesquereux's paper on New Species of Fossil Plants, from the Anthracite and Bituminous Coal Fields of Pennsyl- vania. Boston Journ. Nat. Hist., vi, 1857, pp. 409^413. On the Laws of Structure of the more disturbed Zones of the Earth's Crust [1856]. Edinb. Roy. Soc Trans., xxi, 1857, pp. 431-472. On the Origin of the "Parallel Roads " of Lochaber. Proc. Roy. Inst., iii, 1858-62, pp. 341-345. The Geology of Pennsylvania ; A Government Survey. By Henry Darwin Rogers, State Geologist; Professor. of Natural History in the University of Glasgow; F.R.S.E. ; F.G.S. ; Member of the American Ruschenberger.] i-4t4t [Nov. 6, Philosophical Society; Fellow of the Boston Academy of Arts and Sciences ; Member of the Boston Nat. Hist. Society, &c, &c. In two volumes. Quarto, I. pp. xxiv, 586. 32 full page illustrations and 136 cuts ; II. pp. xxiv, 1045. 42 plates and 778 cuts. Printed by William Black- wood & Sons, Edinburgh. J. B. Lippincott & Co., Philadelphia, 1858. On the Distribution and Probable Origin of the Petroleum, or Rock-oil of Western Pennsylvania, New York and Ohio. Proc. Glasgow Phil. Soc, iv, 1860, pp. 355-359. On the Relations of Deposits of common Salt to Climate. [I860.] Proc. Glasgow Phil. Soc, v, 1864, pp. 7-9. On the Origin of Cyclones. [1861.] Proc. Glasgow Phil. Soc, v, 1864, pp. 57-60. Report on the Wheatley and Brookdale Mines, Chester Co., Penna. New York Mining Mag., pp. 375-387. On the Pleistocene Glacial Climate of Europe. [1865.] Proc. Boston Nat. Hist. Soc, x, 1866, p. 241-245. On Petroleum. [1865.] Proc. Glasgow Phil. Soc, vi, 1868, pp. 48-61. By Henry D. and William B. Rogers. Experimental Inquiry into some of the Laws of the Elementary Voltaic Battery. Silliman, Journ., xxvii, 1835, pp. 39-61. Contributions to the Geology of the Tertiary Formations of Virginia. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans., v, 1837, pp. 319-331 ; vi, pp. 347-377. Observations on the Geology of the Western Peninsula of Upper Canada and the Western part of Ohio. [1841]. Amer. Phil. Soc. Trans., viii, 1843, pp. 273-284. On the Phenomena and Theory of Earthquakes and the Explanation they afford of certain facts in Geological Dynamics. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1843 (pt. 2), pp. 57-59. An Account of two remarkable Trains of Angular Erratic Blocks, in Berkshire, Massachusetts; with an attempt at an explanation of the Phe- nomena. Boston Journ. Nat. Hist., v, 1845-47, pp. 310-329. On the Geological Age of the White Mountains. Silliman, Journ., i, 1846, pp. 410-421. / By Henry D. Rogers and Martin H. Boye. Upon a New Compound of the Deutochloride of Platinum, Nitric Oxide and Chlorohydric Acid. Amer. Philos. Soc. Trans., vii, 1841, pp. 59-66 ; Liebig Annalen, xl, pp. 289-290. List of the Published Writings op Robert E. Rogers, M.D., LL.D., &c. Experiments on the Blood, together with some New Facts in regard to Animal and Vegetable Structures, illustrative of many of the most import- ant Phenomena of Organic Life, among them Respiration, Animal Heat, 14^ 18S5.1 xi'J [Ruschenberger. Venous Circulation, Secretion and Nutrition. Amer. Journ. Med. Sci. xviii, 1836, pp. 277-301. On a New Process for obtaining pure Chlorine Gas. Sillinian, Journ. i, 1846, p. 428. Report on the Consolidated Virginia and California Mines. Appendix No. 4. Annual Report of the Director of the Mint for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1875, p. 81-83. Report on the Equipment of the New Refinery in the Mint at San Francisco. App. No. 4. Ann. Rep. of the Director of the Mint, for the year ending June 30, 1875, pp. 83-88. By Robert E. and William B. Rogers. On a new Process for obtaining Formic Acid, and on the preparation of Aldehyde and Acetic Acid by the use of the Bichromate of Potassa. Silli- man, Journ., ii, 1846, pp. 18-24. On the Volatility of Potassa and Soda* and their Carbonates. Amer. Assoc. Proc. 1848, pp. 36-38. On the Decomposition of Rocks by Meteoric Water. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1848, pp. 60-62. On the Comparative Solubility of the Carbonate of Lime and the Carbo- nate of Magnesia. Proc. Amer. Assoc, 1.848, pp. 95-97. On a new Process for analyzing Graphite, natural and artificial. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1848 (pt. 2), pp. 59-60 ; Edin. Journ. Prak. Chem., 1, 1850, pp. 411-413 ; Journ. de Pharm., 1851, pp. 67-68. Oxidation of the Diamond in the liquid way. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1848, (pt. 2), pp. 60-61 ; Edinb. New Phil. Journ., xlv, 1848, pp. 388-389; Silli- tnan, Journ., vi, 1848, pp. 110-111. On the Absorption of Carbonic Acid by Water, Saline Solutions and various other Liquids [1847]. Silliman, Journ., v, 1848, pp. 114-115. New Method of Determining the Carbon in native and artificial Gra- phites, &c Silliman, Journ., v, 1848, pp. 352-359. On the Decomposition and Partial Solution of Minerals, Rocks, &c, by pure Water, and Water charged with Carbonic Acid. Silliman, Journ., v, 1848, pp. 401-405. Brit. Assoc. Rep., 1849 (pt. 2), pp. 40-42 ; Edinb. New Phil. Journ., xlv, 1848, pp. 163-168 ; Froriep. Notizen, ix, 1849, col. 49-53 ; xi, 1849, col. 305-309. On the Absorption of Carbonic Acid by Liquids. Silliman, Journ., vi, 1848, pp. 96-110. On the Absorption of Carbonic Acid by Acids and Saline Solutions. Amer. Assoc. Proc, iv, 1850, pp. 298-308. On the Use of Hydrogen Gas, to displace Sulphuretted Hydrogen in the analysis of Mineral Waters, &c. Silliman, Journ., xviii, 1854, pp. 213-216. By Robert E. Rogers and Martin H. Boye. On the Analysis of Limestones, especially the Magnesian Kind, and a method of completely separating Lime from Magnesia when both are pres- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. S. PRINTED DECEMBER 2, 1885. Cope.] 14*3 [Oct. 15, ent in large quantity. Journ. Franklin Inst., xxv, 1840, pp. 158-162; Sturgeon. Ann. Elec, v, 1840, pp. 203-208. By Dr. H. R. Linderman and Prof. Robert E. Rogers Report upon the Wastage of Silver Bullion in the Melter and Refiner's Department of the Mint of the United States, July 25, 1872. 8vo, pp. 82. Government Printing Office, Washington, 1872. Report of the Committee [Franklin Institute] on Dynamo-Electric Machines. Journ. Franklin Institute, lxxv, 1875, p. 289-303. Report of the Committee [Franklin Institute] on the precautions to he taken to obviate the dangers of Electric Lighting. Journ. Franklin Insti- tute, Dec, 1881. lxxxxii, pp. 401-408. Note. — In the preparation of the above lists, the Catalogue of Scientific Papers, 1800-1873, compiled and published by the Royal Society of London, has been consulted and used. Report on the Coal Deposits near Zacualtipan, in the State of Hidalgo, Mexico. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Oct. 16, 1885.) Having obtained in the City of Mexico favorable information as to the coal of Zacualtipan, in the State of Hidalgo, I resolved to devote some time to an investigation of that locality. On my arrival at Zacualtipan, I was informed by my friend, Dr. San- tiago Bernad, a French physician, who practices in the town and its sur- rounding region, that the coal beds extend throughout a distance of five leagues north and south, and two and a half leagues east and west. They are owned in large tracts called quadras by different persons. I examined sixteen exposures within a distance of five miles of Zacualtipan, north- east, south- east and south, with the following results : The geological structure of the country is as follows : The town of Zacualtipan is situated on the border of the plateau of Mexico, where it begins to break off to the lower level, which two days' journey on horse- back eastward becomes the Tierra Caliente of the State of Vera Cruz. The plateau is, therefore, much broken by ravines which open to the east- ward. The high plateau just east of Zacualtipan is about 7000 feet above sea-level. The eastern border of the plateau is supported and protected by the lines of several trap-dykes, whose faces form precipitous walls which bound the ravines, generally on one side. To the east and west of the town the high lands consist of a silicious limestone, which looks a good deal like that of subcarboniferous age in the United States, but, is said by M. Barcena, of the National Museum of Mexico, to be of Cre- 14-7 1885.1 [Cope. taceous age. This limestone lies elevated at a high angle against the trap- dyke, at a point on the San Miguel creek ; showing, first, that the trap formation is a dyke which has been thrust up from below, and is not an outflow ; and second, that the age of the elevation of the dyke is later than the Cretaceous period. This conclusion is all important in the deter- mination of the age, and, therefore, probable quality of the coal, and in the determination of its quantity. The coal formation lies horizontally bedded in the intervals between the trap-dykes and the hills of limestone, etc. It consists of regularly strati- fied beds of clay, of volcanic ash, of clay or carbonaceous shales, more or less finely bedded, and of thicker and thinner beds of a frequently very good lignite coal. There are no beds of stone in them, but the carbo- naceous shales are frequently very tough. The bedding has not been affected by the dykes, and indeed sometimes inclines downwards towards them at a low angle, instead of upwards towards them as would have been the case had they been older than the dykes. Further evidence that the coal formation is newer or of later age than the dykes is seen in the fact that beds of coal are found in some localities on top of them. It follows from these facts that although there are beds above the dykes, there is no coal below the precipices which constitute the parts of the dykes which are visible ; or, in other words, that the coal only occupies the spaces be- tween the dykes. Fossil mammalian remains found in the beds of clay near the coal prove that the formation is of Upper Miocene Tertiary age, and perhaps identical with the epoch known in North America as that of the Loup Fork.* The properties which I examined bear the following names : Galiana, Hulla, Juarez, Concha, Providencia, Capa Rosa, Sausz, San Miguel and San Rafael. I take them up in order. I premise by saying, that the coal beds have been rendered accessible by the erosion of the middle parts of the valleys which they occupy, into deep ravines. The coal outcrops are on the sides of these ravines, and extend underground to a line which descends vertically continuous with the faces of the trap precipices, at which point they are cut off by the concealed part of the dyke. The amount of coal is of course to be determined from this dimension, i. e., the distance from the dyke multiplied by the extent of the formation parallel to the dyke, by the thickness of the bed. The coal beds are best exposed on the Galiana property. From the top of the trap dyke to the bottom of the valley at this point, the vertical depth is about one thousand feet. At a depth of about 100 feet from the summit of the hill is a short, open cut in which can be seen a bed of good coal of eighteen inches in thickness. From its position, this bed probably extends entirely across the sum- mit of the hill, and crops out on the other side, forming the San Rafael mine. Below this open cut the summit of the trap precipice is soon *See American Naturalist, May, 1885, where this fact is stated. See also de- scription of fossils at end of this article. Cope.] 148 [Oct. 16, reached. The foot of the precipice is perhaps 400 feet below the coal bed, and at its foot is a gently sloping plateau of perhaps a quarter of a mile in width. The slope than becomes more abrupt, and descends to the bottom of the ravine-like valley, 500 feet below. At a depth of fifty feet verti- cally below the foot of the precipice at the beginning of the steeper slope, the upper bed of this part of the Galiana crops out. It is one foot in thick- ness, and is of good quality. Some eighteen inches of clay intervene between it and a second bed of coal of about three feet in thickness. About forty feet below their level is a bed of impure lignite eighteen inches thick ; and below three or four feet of clay is a bed of better lignite which varies from two to six inches in thickness. Below this are about eighteen feet of carbonaceous clay and shale, and below this fifteen feet of clay with thin seams of lignite. Below this succeed white slates and clay with vertebrate fossils, chiefly three-toed horses, but no more coal. The workable beds of coal in this property are the. eighteen inch bed above the precipice, and the eighteen and thirty-six inch beds below the precipice. At present these beds are only exposed in open cuts. Those below the precipice have a quarter mile (English) extent to the trap dyke, while their extent parallel to the dyke is probably considerable. In fact, the coal formation follows the borders of the dykes at varying dis- tance, and the outcrop thus has many miles of extent. The workings on the Galiana property consist of nothing but the open cuts mentioned. The clay is of excellent quality, and is manufactured by the owner into roofing tile. The Hulla and Juarez mines are on the other sides of the same trap plateau. The highest coal outcrop of the Hulla is above the dyke preci- pice on the opposite side from the highest exposure on the Galiana, and is probably the same bed. This will therefore be about a third of a mile between the two outcrops. The bed is, however, thinner on the Hulla side, being only six inches in depth. The same is tme of the other out- crops on the Hulla side. The second one is perhaps 500 feet lower down towards the bottom of the valley. There are open cuts, but the principal exposure is clay, carbonaceous and otherwise, with a bed of pure lignite of six inches thickness. At the Juarez outcrop, several hundred feet lower down, the lignite bed is only an inch in thickness. The Concha and Providencia mines lie south-east of Zacualtipan, and below the trap precipice already described. They are, however, near to another mass of trap which may be a part of a different, or a branch of the same great dyke. The Concha is developed by both an an open cut and a timbered drift. The bed of coal varies from thirty to eighteen inches in thickness, and lies between more or less shaly beds of clay. They all dip at a low angle towards the trap. This coal looks well, but the extent of the bed in one direction is probably reduced by the not far-distant dyke. Lower down the hill we sought for another outcrop on the Concha prop- erty, but it had been covered up. An eighth of a mile round the hill from this lower level, in the side of a ravine is a cut, which displays the bed of 1885.] 14 J [Cope. the Providencia mine. This varies in thickness from eighteen to thirty- inches. In one direction it is limited by a trap dyke at a distance of about 100 yards, whose exposed face is less than 100 feet in height. South of Zacualtipan are situated the Guadalupe, Capa Rosa, Sausz and San Miguel mines. At the Guadalupe are two timbered drifts, whose length I did not explore, as they contained much water, and were more or less dangerous. The cuts at their mouths in the hillsides reveal their struc- ture and general value. The rock consists of clay and clay shales more or less carbonaceous, not hard, but tough. The lignite proper is from six to ten inches in thickness. This cut is near the base of the trap precipice. The second cut is 150 feet off, and is that much further from the trap. It displayed much the same structure and quantity of lignite. The Capa Rosa exposure is on another side of the same hill, and is a quarter of a mile from the precipice, thus giving promise of greater dimen- sions of the deposit in one direction. It is at nearly the same horizon as the Gaudalupe, and may be the same bed. It is developed by an open cut which shows as follows : Below fifteen feet of soil there are twelve feet of clays and slates. These alternate between more and less carbonaceous layers, and in the bottom there are in sight ten inches of lignite, and how much more I could not ascertain without excavations. Further down the same hill, about 100 feet vertical, is the Sausz mine. The beds are here exposed by an open cut and a drift; the latter in a ruinous condition. In the bottom of the openings is a foot of good looking lignite, and above it is a bed of clay three feet in depth ; above that, six inches of carbonaceous clay slate. A mile farther along the same valley is the San Miguel mine. Its bed is exhibited in one open cut, and in an exposure along the bank of the San Miguel creek at the water level. There are here eight inches of lig- nite like' that of the Capa Rosa and the Sausz. It is now easy to perceive that the aggregate quantity of coal in l he country is large, but that it is spread over considerable space. It is also evident that the mining is easy, as the beds all crop out conveniently on the sides of valleys, and the drainage is also easy. There being no secure roof of hanging wall to the beds, all workings will have to be well tim- bered. This will not be expensive, as timber of excellent quality of oak, pine, etc., covers the hills everywhere, in close proximity to the coal openings. The localities which exhibit the greatest thickness of the beds are the Galiana and Concha properties. Those which promise tbe greatest horizontal extent of the bed in the direction of the dyke are the Galiana, the Capa Rosa, the Sausz and the San Miguel. The property which com- bines the two advantages is then the Galiana. This region is accessible by rail as far as Pachuca, sixty miles distant. From Pachuca to Zacualtipan a railroad could be built by Tulancingo and Apulco, where is now a wagon road. Of this I am informed by various persons, among them by Professor Castillo of the School of Mines of Mex- ico. A direct line of road from Pachuca to Zacualtipan is impracticable or Cope.] 150 [Oct. 16 very expensive, owing to the great inequalities of the country. It is not unlikely that at some future day, this coal will have an outlet to Tuxpan on the coast, which is due east from Zacualtipan. Finally I refer to Dr. F. M. Endlich for information as to the quality of the coal and its availability for industrial purposes. I add that several of the properties are in the state of Vera Cruz just over the line. The Galiana property is near the small village of Tehui- chila, Vera Cruz. Description of fossils. HlPPOTHERIUM PENINSULATUM, Sp. nOV. Crown of superior molar long, curved. Grinding face with anteropos- terior diameter considerably exceeding the transverse. Internal column large, its section a narrow anteroposterior oval, with both borders convex. Internal enamel borders of internal crescents with a prominent loop at junction, the posterior one with its posterior loop much smaller than the column. A subquadrate area between the internal parts of the lakes, is connected by an enamel ridge with the anterior lake. Opposite and adja- cent enamel borders of the lakes, with several close and deep plica- tions, which nearly cut off the adjacent horns. In like manner the poste- rior horn of the posterior lake, and the anterior horn of the anterior lake are almost cut ofl by the deep complex infolding of the anterior and poste- rior borders respectively. The median and anterior external ribs of the crown are well developed, and there is but little cement on the grooves. Measurements. M. Length of root, less crown , 050 _.. , . ,. e f anteroposterior 018 Diameters of grinding lace^ r I transverse 015 This superior molar tooth indicates a small species of the genus, and one which is entirely typical in form. The plication of the enamel is greater than in any other species excepting the E. gracile. It resembles most of all the E. venustum of Leidy, which is of similar dimensions. In that species the style has a nearly circular section according to Leidy, which distinguishes it satisfactorily. From the Loup Fork Shales of Tehuichila, Vera Cruz. Protohippus castilli, sp. nov. This horse is represented by a superior molar tooth of a larger animal than the species last described, and one only a little smaller than the zebra. It possesses the internal loops of the two internal crescents as in Hippi- dium and Protohippus, and without the bones of the feet it is impossible to determine to which genus it should be referred. The indication that it is a Hippidium, is derived from the relative proportions of the internal loops. The anterior of these is much larger than the posterior, and occu- pies the median position of the internal edge of the crown like the column in Hippotherium. Further approach to that genus is made by the con- 151 [Cope. traction of its connection with the corresponding crescent. The section of this loop is a rather wide oval. The posterior loop has half the size, and if isolated would present the same form. The crown of the tooth is of median length and is strongly curved in- wards. Its grinding surface is a little wider than long, and is worn into two transverse angles, which pass through the concavities of the borders of the crown and lakes. It is not certain that this grooving in wear is a constant character. The lakes are strongly convex inwards and their horns are wide and obtuse. Their borders are simple, there being no folds on the remote sides, and on the adjacent borders only one on the posterior and two on the anterior, of no great depth. There is no loop at the junction of the inner edges of the internal crescents. External ribs of crown prominent. Excepting these, the entire crown is enclosed in cementum. Measurements. M. Length of crown 040 Diameters of grinding face { anteroposterior 021 C transverse 023 This species differs from the P. insignis, P. perditus and P. mirabilis, with which it agrees in size, in the posterior production and angulation of the posterior border of the anterior inner column, and in the absence of plication of the borders of the lakes which are remote from each other. In this species the internal loops are of nearly equal size. I have dedi- cated it to my distinguished friend, Prof. Antonio de Castillo, Director of the School of Mines of the City of Mexico, to whom I am indebted for a knowledge of the locality described in the present paper. Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 1. Superior molar tooth of right side of Hippotherium peninsulatum Cope grinding surface from below ; natural size. Fig. 2. The same of Prolohippus caslilli Cope ; same view ; natural size. ±0m [August 21, Stated Meeting, August 21, 1885. Donations for the Library were received from the Depart- ment of Mines, Melbourne ; the New Zealand Institute ; the Asiatic Society of Japan ; the Geological Committee of St. Petersburg; the K. K. Central- Anstalt fiir Meteorologie und Ercl-Magnetismus, Vienna ; the Deutsche Anthropologische Gesellschaft, Munich ; Prof. C. D. E. Weyer of Kiel ; the Zool- ogischer Anzeiger, Leipzig ; the Deutsche Geologische Gesell- schaft, Berlin; the Academie Eoyale de Copenhague ; the K- Akademie von Wetenschappen and the K. Zoologisch Genoot- schap at Amsterdam ; the Societe Botanique, Luxembourg ; the Nederlandsche Botanische Vereeniging; the Academie Eoyale de Belgique ; the Societes de Geographie, Americaine de France, Annales des Mines, Maisonneuve freres et Ch. Le- clerc, Editeurs, Paris ; the Societe Linneene de Bordeaux ; the P. Accademia dei Lincei, Pome ; the Poyal Institution of Great Britain ; the Zoological Society, the Royal Astronomical Society and Society of Antiquaries of London, the Meteoro- logical, London Nature, Journal of Forestry, Messrs. John Kinnersley Smythies, Joseph Prestwich, Benjamin "V^ard Richardson and John Hampden and Charles Ellis, publishers, London ; the Geological Society of Glasgow ; the Geological and Natural History Survey and Museum of Canada ; the Cana- dian Institute; the Natural History Society of Montreal; the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston ; the Bos- tonian Society ; the American Philological Society, American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Museum of Comparative Zool- ogy and Drs. Samuel Abbott Green and H. A. Hagen of Cam- bridge ; the Essex Institute ; the American Journal of Science, Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, American Oriental Society at New Haven ; the New York Academy of Sciences, American Chemical Society, Meteorological Observatory, New York ; Mr. John B. Smith, editor, Brooklyn ; the Young Men's Association, Buffalo; the New Jersey Historical Society; the Franklin Institute, College of Pharmacy, Mercantile Li- brar}', the Real Estate Title Insurance and Trust Company, 1885.] -LOO American Naturalist, Drs. Ei chard B. Westbrook and Persifor Frazer, and Messrs. E. S. Culin, Henry Phillips, Jr., H. Carvill Lewis and Eichard Meade Bache of Philadelphia ; the Book- mart Publishing Company, Pittsburgh; the American Chemical Institute, and Johns Hopkins University ; the Naval Institute ; the War Department, Bureau of Education, United States National Museum, Department of State, United States Geo- logical Survey, and Smithsonian Institution ; Mr. J. Hotchkiss of Staunton, Va. ; the Cincinnati Society of Natural History and Cincinnati Observatory; the Chicago Historical Society; Bev. Stephen D. Peet, and the Kansas Academy of Science. Stated Meeting, September 18, 1885. Donations for the Library were received from Prof. Ferdi- nanclo de Mueller of Melbourne ; the Geological Survey of India ; Mr. N. E. Pogson, Government Astronomer at Madras ; L/Institut Egyptien ; the Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Petersbourg; the Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscow ; the Ungarische Akademie de Wissenschaften'; the Anthropologische Gesellschaft ; the K. K. Geologische Ge- sellschaft in Wien; the K. K. Sternwarte at Prag ; the Zoolo- gische Anzeiger from Leipzig ; the Oberlausitze Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften at Gorlitz; the K. Akademie der Wissen- schaften, and the Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft at Ber- lin; the Acad6tnie Eoyal Suedoise des Sciences at Stockholm; Prof. J. C. Wulff, Eektor of the University at Stockholm ; the Vereins liir vaterlandische in Wurtemberg; the Offenbach Verein fiir Naturkunde ; the Academie Eoyale de Belgique ; the Societe Eoyale des Sciences de Liege ; the Eeale Accade- mia dei Lincei at Eome ; the Comitato Geologico d'ltalia ; the Ministero di Agricoltura at Eome; Societe Zoologique de France; the Societe de Geographie at Paris; the Mu-.ee Gui- met; the Societe d'Emulation d' Abbeville ; the Instituto y Observatorio de Marina de San Fernando ; the Eoyal Society of London ; the Linnean, the Eoyal Astronomical and Eoyal Geographical Societies, the Geological and the Society of An- PROC. AMEE. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 121. T. PRINTED DECEMBER 2, 1885. 154 [Oct. 2, tiquaries ; Loudon Nature ; the Journal of Forestry ; Prof. J. Bennet Lawes ; the Roy al Cornwall Polytechnic Society ; the Scientific Students' Association of Manchester ; the American Antiquarian Society at Worcester ; the Boston Society of Natural History ; the American Journal of Science ; Prof. Daniel Draper of New York ; the New York Entomological Club ; the Entomologica Americana, published in Brooklyn ; the College of Pharmacy, Engineers' Club, the American Natu- ralist, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Mr. Philip H. Law ; the Philo- sophical Society of West Chester ; the Johns Hopkins Uni- versity ; the American Journal of Philology ; the American Journal of Archaeology ; the Departments of State and of the Interior, the War and Navy Departments ; the Smithsonian Institution ; the United States National Museum ; the United States Fish Commission ; the Library of the Surgeon-General's Office; the Catalogue of United States Publications; the Women's Anthropological Society ; Mr. J. Hotchkiss of Staun- ton ; the State Historical Society at Iowa City ; the Wisconsin State Historical Society, and the University of Minnesota. Slated Meeting, October J?, 1885. Present, 4 members. Vice-President, Dr. Ruschenberger, in the Chair. Donations for the Library were received from the Adelaide and Hong-Kong Observatories ; Geological Survey of India ; K. K. Zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft, Wien ; Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipzig ; Dr. G. vom Eath of Bonn ; Universitetet, Lund ; Archives Neerlandais ; Academie Royale de Belgique ; Ecole des Mines, Paris ; Zoological Society of London ; Na- ture ; Cambridge University ; Leeds Philosophical and Liter- ary Society ; Dun Echt Observatory ; Essex Institute ; Ameri- can Journal of Science ; New York Meteorological Observa- tory ; Franklin Institute ; the American Naturalist ; Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr.; Prof. H. Carvill Lewis ; Mr. Philip C. Garrett ; Johns Hopkins University ; United States Naval Institute ; 1885.] 155 United States National Museum ; Department of State ; and Mr. William Harden of Savannah. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the K. Zool- ogisch Genootschap, Amsterdam (116) and Register; South Kensington Museum (117, 118, 119); Musee Eoyale d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique (92-95, 97-119) and Register ; Zoologi- cal Society of London (117-119), Society of Antiquaries, London (116-119) and Register ; Mr. Archibald Geikie of Edinburgh (117, 118, 119); Royal Institution (117, 118, 119); Academie Royale, Amsterdam (112, 114, 115) ; K. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab(115) ; Universite Royale de Norvege (113-116) and Register ; Virginia Historical Society (115, 116) ; University Library, Cambridge, Eng. (117, 118, 119) ; Dr. L. G. de Koninck of Liege (116-119); Observatorio As- tron6mico Nacional Mexicano (116) and Register ; Peabody Institute (118) ; Verein fur vaterlandische Naturkunde in Wiirtemberg (115, 116) and Register; Konigliche Bibliothek, Berlin (116) and Register; Smithsonian Institution (116) and Register; K. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften (117, 118, 119) ; Universite Royale, Lund (109-115); Mr. J. F. Gar- rison of Camden, N. J. (119). Letters of envoy were received from the Musee Royale d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique ; Verein liir Vaterlandische Naturkunde in Wiirttemberg ; Universite Royale, Lund; American Oriental Society ; Colonial Museum of New Zea- land ; Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschap- pen ; United States Geological Survey ; Academie Royale des Sciences, Amsterdam ; Sir J. B. Lawes of London ; United States Naval Institute ; Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society ; Koniglich Preussische Akademie der "Wissenschaften ; Natu- ral History Society of Northumberland, Durham, and New- castle-upon-Tyne ; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Geolog- ical and Natural History Survey of Minnesota ; Manchester Scientific Students' Association ; Academie Royale des Scien- ces, Stockholm ; Musee Guimet; Adelaide Observatory; Madras Observatory; University Library, Cambridge, Eng.; Societe Hollandaise des Sciences. 1 °® [Oct. 2, Letters were read from the Delaware County Institute of Science, Media, Pa., requesting a copy of No. 119, which was ordered to be sent ; from Mr. Joseph Lesley (Princeton, Mass.), dated July 28th, 1885, presenting his resignation from mem- bership on account of ill-health, which was, on motion, ac- cepted ; from Josef Menges, Dresden, offering for sale a collec- tion of East African auimals ; from the Comite Geologique, St. Petersburg, sending its Bulletin and requesting exchanges. On motion the request was granted, to begin with Proceedings No. 117. From George W. Hough, announcing that his address would be Dearborn Observatory, Chicago ; from Prof. T. M. Drown (Easton, Pa.), announcing change of address to Boston, Mass. Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., deposited in the Library, the Lon- don Numismatic Chronicle, 1885, Part II. The following deaths were announced : M. Emile Malezieux (Paris), May 20, 1885, «et. 63. M. Henry Milne-Edwards (Paris), July 29th, 1885. M. J. J. A. Worsaae (Copenhagan), August 15, 1885, set. 61. ■George Leib Harrison (Philadelphia), September 9, 1885, aet, 74. On motion the President, in his discretion, was authorized to appoint a suitable person to prepare the usual obituary notices. The following papers were presented : Dr. F. A. Genth, '•' Contributions from the Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. No. XXIY. Contributions to Mineralogy.1' Dr. Daniel G. Brinton, " On Polysynthesis and Incorporation as characteristics of American Languages." Dr. F. S. Krauss (Vienna), "Aus Bosnien und der Herce- govina." Prof. E. D. Cope, " Catalogue of the Species of Batrachians and Keptiles contained in a collection made at Pebas, Upper Amazon, by John Hauxwell." Dr. Fr. Meinert, " Myriopoda Musei Cantabrigensis. I. Chilo- poda." Pending nominations Nos. 1019-1063 were read, and the Society was adjourned by the presiding officer. 1885.] 157 Stated Meeting, October 16, 1885. Present, 16 members. Vice-President, Dr. Euschenberger, in the Chair. Donations for the Library were received from the Mining Department, Melbourne;- Geological Survey of India; Kong- liga Vetenskaps Societeten, Upsala ; Kongelige Nordiske Old- skrift Selskab, Copenhagen ; Koniglich Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig ; Kaiserliche-Konigliche Geolo- gische Keichsanstalt, Wien ; Naturhistorische Gesellschaft) Niirnberg; Physikalisch-Okonomiscke Gesellschaft, Kooigs- berg; Naturhistorische Gesellschaft and Messrs. Oberlehrer L. Mejer and Fr. Beinholdof Hannover; Musee Eoyal d'Histoire Naturelle and Academie Eoyale des Sciences, &c, de Belgique ; Institution Ethnographique and Prof. Leon de Eosny of Paris ; Eoyal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland ; the Eoyal Society, Forestry and Mr. William Blades of London ; Eev. C. W. King of Cambridge, England ; the Brooklyn Library and Mr. J. B. Smith, Editor of Entomologica Americana; College of Pharmacy, Prof. E. D. Cope and Messrs. Henry Phillips, Jr., and E. A. Gieseler of Philadelphia ; the United States National Museum, Dr. A. S. Gatschet and Mr. J. H. Hickcox, publisher, of "Washington; Mr. Charles C. Jones, Jr., of Au- gusta ; Chicago Historical Society ; Eev. Stephen D. Peet ; State Historical Society, Iowa, and the State Historical Society of Wisconsin. Letters of envoy were read from the K. Sachsische Gessell- schaft, Leipzig ; Naturhist. Gesellschaft zu Hannover ; Societe Eoyale des Sciences a Upsal ; Meteorological Office, London, IT. S. Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C. ; Elliott Society of Science, Charleston, S. C. Letters of Acknowledgment were read from K. K. Central Anstalt fur Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismus, Vienna (117, 118, 119); Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Emden (117, 118, 119) ; Societe Eoyale des Sciences, Upsal (113, 114, 115, 116 and Eegister); E. Accademia dei Lincei, Eome (116 and Eeg- ister), and requesting certain old numbers of Proceedings and Transactions (Procs. I— VI, XII, Trans. O. S., I— IV, N. S. 158 [Oct. 16, I— XI, XIII) ; * Chemical Society of London (117, 118, 119) ; Geological Survey of India (117, 118, 119); Kon. Zoolog. Genootschaf, Amsterdam (117, 118, 119); Societe Hollandaise des Sciences, Harlem (117, 118, 119) ; Fondation de P. Teyler van der Hulst, Harlem (116) ; Horatio Hale, Clinton, Ontario (119); Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa (116, 119); Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Philadelphia ; Uni- versity of the City of New York (N. Y.) ; American Anti- quarian Society, Worcester (Mass.) ; New York Hospital (N. Y.) ; Yale College Library (New Haven, Conn.) ; Essex Insti- tute (Salem, Mass.) ; IT. S. Military Academy ("West Point, N. Y.) ; Wyoming Historical and Geological Society (Wilkes- Barre, Pa.); Cincinnati (Ohio) Observatory; Leander Mc- Cormick Observatory (University of Virginia) ; University of Toronto (Canada) ; Yassar Brothers Institute (Pougk- keepsie, N. Y.)#; Boston Athenasum ; Cornell University Li- brary (Ithaca, N. Y.) ; University of California ; Surgeon-Gen- eral, U. S. A. (Washington, D. C.) ; Public Library (Boston Mass.); California Academy of Sciences (San Francisco, Cal.); Museum of Comparative Zoology (Cambridge, Mass.); Penn- sylvania, Connecticut, Virginia, Georgia, Wisconsin, New Hampshire, New Jersey, Chicago (and all previous numbers), Maryland, and Kansas State Historical Societies ; Prof. John J . Stevenson, New York (N. Y.) ; Prof. J. W. Moore, Easton (Pa.) ; Prof. J. M. Hart, Cincinnati (Ohio) ; Henry Phillips, Jr. (Philadelphia) ; J. H. C. Coffin (Washington, D. C). Mr. William Morris Davis presented to the Cabinet ten French bronze Medals, of which he furnished the following description : MEDALS. No. 1. The dead Napoleon. "Reverse, the Arch of reception at Rouen, and draped steamer. Struck in 1840 in commemoration of the removal of Napoleon's remains from St. Helena, and restoration to France. No. 2. Napoleon le Grand. Reverse, arch of triumph, motto, "AT Armee Francaise." No. 3. Ferdinand Philippe Louis, Due d'Orleans. Ohverse, commemor- ative, "Chapelle Saint Ferdinand. No. 4. Marie d' Orleans. Obverse, "Statue de Jeanne d'Arc." * Referred to Secretaries with power to act. 1885. 159 No. 5. "Cathedrale de Paris." Reverse, "ground plan -with details of dimensions," &c. No. 6. Liberty enlightening Justice, with Despotism prostrated. Motto, "Revolution de 1848." Reverse, "GouvernementProvisoire," with names of the ministers, &c. No. 7. Head emblematic, surrounded with heavy wreath of oak and laurel. Motto, " Republique Francaise." Reverse, three fig- ures, " Liberte, Egalit6, Fraternite, 24 Fevrier, 1848." No. 8. A figure of Liberty, looking back, hand supporting a tablet, inscribed, "Droit de 1' Homme et du Citoyen." Motto, "Re- publique Francaise." Reverse, arraignment of royal govern- ment, and sustaining tbe three revolutions, 1789, 1830 and 1848. No. 9. The three heads of Adam Mickiewicz, Jules Michelet and Edgar Quinet. Reverse, motto, "Ut omnes unum sint," "La France et les auditeurs du college de France, 1844, 1845. " No. 10. Head of Pierre Jean de Beranger. Reverse, is remarkable for its fine lettering of the titles of songs of Beranger. The design is an antique harp, surrounded by rays as from a sun ; alternat- ing with the rays is the following list (enclosed in a circle of two inches) : 1. Adieu Chansons. 18. Les Hirondelles. 2. Le Roi d'Yvetot. 19. Les esclaves Gaulois. 3. Maudit Printems. 20. Brennus. 4. Le Vieux Drapeau. 21. Les tombeaux de Juillet. 5. Vieux habits vieux galons. 22. Les Bohemiens. 6. Louis XL 23. Le Marquis des Carabas. 7. Prediction de Nostradamus. 24. La Vivandiere. 8. La bonne vieille. 25. Les Souvenirs du peuple. 9. Le Dieu des bonnes gens. 26. Les Vendanges. 10. Le Juif errant. 27. A m8s amis devenues Ministres. 11. Les etoiles que filent. 28. Les Gueux. 12. Le Senateur. 29. Les deux sceurs de charite. 13. Les enfans de la France. 30. Le Champ D'asile. 14. Le Grenier. 31. Les Contraband iers. 15. Le tailleur et la fee. 32. Roger Bontemps. 16. L'echelle de Jacob. [in all 487 letters]. 17. L' aveugle de Bagnolet. The death of James McFarlane, Towancla, Pa., October 12, 1885 (born Sep. 2, 1819), was announced and on motion the President was authorized to appoint at his discretion a suitable person to prepare an obituary notice. Prof. Cope presented for the Transactions a paper " On the Species of Iguaninas," which was referred to Messrs. Koenig, Horn, and Harrison Allen* * Reported on favorably, Nov. 20, 1885. 160 [Oct. 16, 1385. Prof. Cope presented for the Proceedings the following papers : * 1. On the Structure and Affinities of three Species of Fishes from the Eocene of Wyoming Territory.* 2. Eeport on the Coal deposits near Zacualtipan, Hidalgo, Mexico. 3. On the Structure of the Brain and Auditory Apparatus of a Theromorphous Reptile, for which a plate was desired. Prof. Houston presented his views on the origin of earth- quakes as shown by the late great explosion of dynamite (285,000 lbs.), at Flood Bock, Hell Gate, upon which a discus- sion ensued, participated in by Messrs. Davis, Koenig, and Cope. This being the stated evening for balloting for candidates, the following gentlemen were declared duly elected members of the Society : 1049. William John Potts, Camden, N. J. 1050. Prof. Scheele de Vere, University of Virginia. 1051. Prof. Edwin North, Hamilton College, Clinton, N. Y. 1052. W. J. A. Bonwill, M. D.. 1721 Locust St., Phila- delphia. 1053. Thos. M. Cleemann, C. E., 2125 Spruce St., Philadel- phia. 1054. Horace Jayne, M. D., 1836 Chestnut Street, Phila- delphia. 1055. Dr. Hermann Rollett, Stadt- Archivar, Baden bei Wien. 1056. Tommaso Cannizzaro, Messina, Italy. 1057. Everard F. im Thurn, M. A., Pomeroon river, George- town, British Guiana. 1058. Prof .John Pomialowsky, Secretary of La Socie!e Im- periale d'Archeologie Russe, St Petersburg. 1059. Dr. Ernest Haeckel, Jena. 1060. Prof. Dr. Josef von Lenhossek, Buda Pesth, Hungary. 1061. Prof. Louis Pasteur, Paris. 1062. Prof. Giuseppe Sergi, University Roma, Rome, Italy. 1063. Prof. Dr. Leopold von Ranke, Berlin. Nominations Nos. 1064, 1065, 1006, were read, and the meeting was adjourned by the presiding officer. * Withdrawn by consent, Nov (i, 1885. Oct. 2, 1883.] K51 r,. . ' J [Meinert Errata in paper by Augustus R. Grote. In the P)'Oceedings American Philosophical Society, No. Hj, Page 136, line 30 for "are quite highly " read "are often quite highly." "one" read "our." "Andela" read "Awdela." "Derideus" read "Deride/is." ' ' Trabulis ' ' read ' ' Trabalis. ' ' "Euthea" read "E/ithea." "Tota" read " Fbt&." "Viasica" read "Viatica "Bettumei" read "Bethunei. " "Sarena" read "S?/rena." "Hulotia" read "Hulstia. " "Adrena" read "Ad^ena." "Trileuca" read "Trileuca ;" this is a generic title proposed for Rectifascia and allies, 'was then " read "has them." "Scole"read "icole," and for "Sole " read "iole." 'nine" read "more." "W. W. Hall" read "W. W. Hill;" the genus is named for my friend Mr. Hill, of Albany, the well-known Lepidopterist. ' Tota " read " i^ota." from bottom for " Arnata" read "Amata. " There are a few other errata to be noticed, but they will have been readily detected by students using the article of which I regret not to have been able to read the proofs. A. R. G. " 137, " 8 for " 142, " 11 for " 142, " 17 for " 145, " 9 for " 145, " 26 for ' ' 148, " 18 for " 150, " 5 for " 150, " 37 for " 151, " 33 for " 153, " 1 for " 153, " 12 for " 153, " 34 for " 154, ' 39 for " 159, " 10 for " 164, " 24 for " 168, " 35 for " 169, ' 26 for " 169, " 2 froi and propriety of these explanations. .Thus I was led to examine the foundation of the whole view of the subject, and when neither Savigny nor any of his school appeared to me to have taken the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. U. PRINTED DECEMBER 17, 1885. 160 [Oct. 16, 1885. Nominations Nos. 1064, 1065, 1066, were read, and the meeting was adjourned by the presiding officer. * Withdrawn by consent, Nov 6, 1885. Oct. 2, 1883.] J-'}-*- [Meinert. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL DOWLEDGE. Vol. XXIII. April, 1886. No. 122. MYRIAPODA MUSEI CANTABRIGENSIS, Mass. Part I. Chilopoda. By Fr. Meinert, Copenhagen. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, Octobers, 1SS5.) Several years since Mr. Alexander Agassiz, the director of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass., through Dr. Hermann A. Hagen, offered to place in my hands the Myria- poda of that museum for examination and description. It was thought necessary at the same time to include the Myriapoda of the Museum of the University of Copenhagen, by which the work certainly gained as to completeness, but was on the other hand not a little delayed. When my report on the first part of the Myriapoda, the Chilopoda, was so far advanced that prepara- tions for the press had to be commenced, there arose some diffi- culty as to a joint publication. I shall therefore begin with the Chilopoda of the Cambridge Museum, while the report upon that class in the Copenhagen Museum will appear in the " Katur- historisk Tidsskrift," in which the greater part of my previous papers on the Myriapoda are to be found. In the years 1866-1872, I treated both groups of Myriapoda in a series of essays, in all of which, in regard to the parts of the mouth, I accepted Savigny's explanation and used terms agreeing with it. Subsequently m}^ studies of the different classes of the Arthropoda raised doubts in my mind as to the correctness and propriety of these explanations. •Thus I was led to examine the foundation of the whole view of the subject, and when neither Savigny nor any of his school appeared to me to have taken the PROC. AMEK. PHILOS. S0C. XXIII. 122. U. PRINTED DECEMBER 17, 1885. Melnert.J ^ 62 [Oct. 2, right starting point, I rejected the old explanation altogether- and based my views on a more general and, I hope, a more correct explanation of the parts of the mouth. I have, in later years, several times attempted to develop them and to apply them to these organs. At present, I shall limit myself to re- ferring to the last of my essays " Caput Scolopendra," of which "both a Danish and an English edition was published in 1883.* In this essay, by means of three plates, I have attempted to de- monstrate the propriety of my new views with regard to the Chilopoda in general and Scolopendra in particular. In con- sequence of this also, several new terms were introduced ; but Latzel and Haase had already, by their demonstration of the in- correctness of the explanation of the first and second pair of maxillae, which Savigny and I also had supported, made some alteration necessary on this point. For the rest such alterations are only made when the old terms refer to an incorrect explana- tion. No reason was found for altering such terms as mandible for example, although formerly I reckoned these organs with the first segment or metamer, and now with the third metamer ; for in the true Insects I consider the mandibles to be the third pair of the parts of the mouth. (That the mandibles of the Myria- poda and of the true Insects are not completely;' homologous is of no importance here). I will now draw up the two series of terms; the old ones which I have used hitherto, and the new, which I proposed in my lately published " Caput Scolopendrae." OLD TERMS. NEW TERMS. Lamina cephalica. Lamina cephalica (head-plate). Labrum. Labrum (upper lip). Maxillae primi paris. Labium (under lip) p. p. Maxillae secundi paris. Labii processus interiores. Pedes maxillares primi paris. Maxilke or palpi maxillares. Mandibular Mandibular Pedes maxillares secundi paris. Sternum (metameri quarti) cum pedibus prensoriis. Coxae (p. maxill.). Sternum (metameri quarti). Dentes pedum maxillarium, se- Dentes prosternales, seu dentes cundi paris. prosterni metameri quarti. * The complete title of the English edition is "Caput Scolopendra: The head of the Scolopendra &pd its rnusculatory system." "With 3 plates. Copenhagen, 1883. 1885.] Ikd [Meinert Furthermore, I ought to remark that at present I reckon the " lamina dorsalis " as scutum dorsale to the fourth metamer. (the venti-al part of which is the raptorial legs or pedes prensorii with their sternum), and the "lamina praebasalis" as scutum dorsale to the third metamer (of which the mandibles are the exponents). In the "Myriapoda Musaei Hauniensis, I. Geophili," p. 9, I have explained the '; lamina basalis " in the same manner as here; but there I referred the "lamina prasbasalis" to the maxillae, or the " pedes maxillares primi paris " as I then named them, because the ventral part of the true third metamer was, at that time, quite overlooked, not by me alone, but by all authors. But the alteration of the explanation is no reason for altering the term. "With regard to the classification of the Myriapoda or of the Chilopoda generally, there is but little reason for inquiring into the matter more extensively, particularly as no species of the aberrant genera Scolopendrella, Potyzonium (and Peripatus), are among those which are the object of my present investiga- tions. I will only refer to my previous papers, in which I have strenuously opposed the views of Alex. Brandt, when he regards the genus Scutigera to be a special type of no less systematic value than all the other Chilopods together. For this reason also, I united the Scutigerini and Lithobiini in one single family, the Lithobii, regarding their systematic value as not being greater than that of the Scolopendrae and the Geophili. At present I willingly admit that I have rather exaggerated, in my endeavors to prove the intimate relation between Scutigera and Lithobius, and that I have thus in some degree underrated the systematic value of Scutigera ; and, therefore, I prefer now to consider the genus Scutigera to be a separate family, of sim- ilar value to the other families of the Chilopoda. But, on the other hand, I must maintain that Scutigera and Lithobius are much more closely related reciprocally, than to either Scolopen- dra or Geophilus, and therefore I prefer, according to Erich Haase, to unite the four families into two groups, the Anamorpha and the Epimorpha, rather than, according to Latzel, to arrange them into a straight line. I. Tribus Anamorpha. Segmeuta corporis pedifera 15, inter se inaequalia. Pedes longi vel longissimi ; omnes coxis magnis, manifestis, tarsis bi- vel- multi-articulatis. Meinert.] ^'J^ LOct. 2, Antennae articulis multis vel plurimis. Ocali ocellis paucis vel plurimis, aggregatis vel compositis. Pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertlo mauifestis, integris. Spiraculorum paria nulla vel maxime 6. Genitalia feminea forcipe externo armata. Pullus ex ovo nuper exclusus pedum paribus 7 modo instructus. The tribus Anamorpba thus corresponds with the family Lithobii, as I have proposed this family in " Danmark's Scolo- pendrer og Lithobier." Naturk. Tidsskr. 3 R., 5 B., p. 246, and the alterations which I have made in the characters here are rather insignificant, although I will remark upon the following. By the addition of "corporis" to the first characters, I in- tended to argue that the pedes prensorii or raptorial legs, to- gether with their segment or metamer, cannot be reckoned with the true segments and the true limbs of the body ; and I must particularly urge this point, as I have given up the denomina- tion "pedes maxillares" in which an explicit reference to the head was contained. To the second character I have added "omnes coxrs magnis, manifestis," by which I maintain that the last pair of legs has large coxae of the same shape as those of the other legs, and with or without excretorial pores. In the next place I have determined the characters concerning the spiracles more exact!}7, but for further explanation I must refer to the characters of the family (or genus) Scutigera. The char- acters concerning the raptorial legs will be treated of more minutely under the second principal group, the Epimorpha. In conclusion I have added the last two characters of Haase. As to the rest, with regard to my character "tarsis bi- vel- multi-articulatis," I must make the following remark. The tjrpical number of joints of the limbs, both in the Chilognatha and the Chilopoda is seven, and it is thus stated by recent authors,* and particularly by Latzel, in his most valuable work on the Austrian Chilopods.-j- According to the rule, these seven ♦Newport, on the contrary, reckons only six joints in the limbs of theMyria- pods, overlooking, or not regarding as a joint the trochanter. " Monogr. Class. Myriap. Trans. Linn.Soc. London," xix, p. 283. Wood has also in this point followed Newport. " Myriap. North Arner. Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc," xiii.p. 111- H2. f'Die Normal zahl der Fussglietler ist sieben," so he writes in spaced types. " Myriap. Oesterr, Ung. Mon,, p. 11." 1885.] lb'J [Meinert. joints are regarded as homologous with corresponding joints of the limbs of the Insects, in this manner : — the first joint is ex- plained to he the coxa, the second the trochanter, the third the femur, the fourth the tibia, and the last three joints to be the tarsus or the foot. (Compare also Latzel, 1. c.,p. 12.) As far as number goes, this explanation is very excellent, particularly as most insects have the same number of divisions, five, and a great multitude of insects precisely three joints in the foot, but in reality it is very superficial and incorrect. Thus, when we re- gard the limbs of insects as the props which support the body and carry it over the ground, four divisions are necessary, viz : the first, by which the prop is fastened to the body, i. e. the coxa; the second, which extends the prop beyond the median line of the animal, i. e. the femur (and the trochanter) ; the third, by which the body is raised from the ground, i. e. the tibia ; and the fourth which supplies the necessary hold upon the ground, i. e., the tarsus. Yet it will clearly appear that the matter de- pends on the arrangement and not on the number or the series of the joints ; for the number varies not only in the fourth divis- ion, the tarsus, but also in the second (the femur). But still, no one has ever regarded the femur as a tibia, when, the trochanter being bipartite, as in many Hymenoptera, the femur became the fourth and not, as is usual, the third joint in the limb, nor the tibia as the first joint of the tarsus, in the same case. Yet of these four divisions, the second is usually divided into two, the fourth into from two to five joints, beside the claw or claws. The third division, the tibia, is unipartite, or whole, in the true In- sects, but in the Spiders, it is bipartite, and the joints here are denominated "patella" and "tibia"; so also in the Chilopoda. Among the Chilopoda, however, no genus can prove more clearly than Seutigera that the fifth and fourth joints are of one set, and that the fifth joint cannot be referred to the tarsus, as well as the sixth and the seventh, for in this genus, the fifth and sixth joints are bent into an angle, and are also very different in structure; furthermore, the fifth joint is, like the tibia of the true Insects, formed with distinct, although small, calcars. The two joints of which the tarsus of the Chilo- pods thus consists, are most frequently separated, more or less distinctly, but often, as in the Geophili and in some Scolopen- Meinert.] 166 [Oct. 2, drini (Cryptops), they are coalesced, or on the contrary, as in the Scutigera, they are both divided into a great number of joints. I have already suggested this explanation in " Dan- mark's Geophiler," where it is said in the diagnosis of the Geophili, 1. c. p. 81, " tarsis integris," and immediately after: " Det normale Antal Led i Myriapodernes Been kan antages at vaere syobaacte hos Chilognather og Chilopoder ;" with regard to the Scolopendrini and Lithobii (Anamorpha), in " Danmark's Scolopendrer og Lithobier," p. 242 and 244, I have maintained this view, and in the " JVtyriapoda Musrci Hauniensis, I. Geophili," p. 7, 1 have reiterated my former explanation of the limbs of the Geophili. In the following table, I will set forth the terminology which I shall use in this paper, together with that which some other authors have used. Newport, L. Koch,* Torath.j Latzel, Author, Coxa, 1. Huften- glied, Coxa, Hufte, Coxa, 2d Joint. Hiiften- glied, Schenkel- ring. Trochanter, 3d Joint. Femur, Oberscbenk- el. Femur, Schenkel, Femur, 4th Joint. 5th Joint. Tibia, Tarsus, Uuterschen- 1 Tarsalglied kel, [da, Tibia prima Tibia secun Schiere, 6th-7th Joint Metatarsus. 2-3 Tarsal- glied. Tarsus. Patella, 1 Tarsalglied, 2-3 Tarsal- glied. Tibia, ' Tarsus. With regard to the denominations of Newport, I will call to mind a correction, which, for the rest, Newport himself has made in the second part of his monograph, saying, 1. c, p. 351, foot- note : " In the first part of this paper, page 283-4, the joint that articulates with the tibia has been described by a mistake as the metatarsus instead of the tarsus, and the remaining joints as tar- sal instead of metatarsal." In the dissertation " Schlesiens Chilopoda I. Chilopoda ana- morpha," 1880, Haase seems to have followed me, at least, he says in the character of his subordo prior, the Chilopodo ana- morpha, "tarsis bi- vel multi-articulatis," 1. c, p. 0, but in the paper published immediately afterward, " Beitrtige zur Phylo- genie und Ontogenie der Chilopoden," he must have joined Lat- zel's side, for he says, 1. c, p. 11, "Die Heine der Chilopoden lassen sich stets auf das typische Insectenbeine zuriickfuhren * "Die Myriapodengattung Lithobius," 1862. f'Myriapocla Africa? australis, in Mnsreo Kegi<> Holmiensi asservata," 1S72. 1835.] I"* IMeinert. unci bestehen normal wie dieses aus Coxa, Trochanter, Femur, unci einem 3-glieclrigen Tarsus." 1. Fam. SCUTIGERINI. Lamina? dorsales alternae manifesto, in medio incisae, alternse evanidae. Pedes longissimi, tarsis multi-articnlatis, unguis singuli, processus binis setiformibus instructi. Antennae setacea?, articulis plurimis composito. Oculi ocellis plurimis compositi. Spiracula nulla. Stomata septem. Palpi maxillares quadriarticulati ungue nullo. Laminae dorsales segmenti septimi atque octavi coalita. Sternum metameri quarti bipartitum ; setis octo longis armatum. Coxae pedum posteriorum simplices (poris execretoris nullis). The fifteen segments of the body have each one pair of limbs and differ but very little among themselves with regard to the size of the laminae ventrales ; but, on the contrary, the difference between the dorsal part of the segments is very great, the lami- nae dorsales of six segments, i. e., the 2d, 4th, Gth, 9th, 11th and 13th, not being fully developed, but only represented by a mem- branous fold which is attached to the front edge of the lamina dorsalis of the following segment, while the laminae dorsales of the eighth and ninth segments coalesce into a common large plate. Thus the number of distinct, well-developed segments in the Scutigerini is only eight. With regard to the second family of this tribus, the Lithobiini, I must remark that the same six laminae dorsales, which in the Scutigerini are evanescent, in the Lithobiini become abruptly smaller than the remaining laminae,- while the two large well-defined laminae dorsales of the seventh and eighth segments in the Lithobiini correspond with the large coalesced lamina of the same segments in the Scutigerini. The posterior edge of the first seven well-developed laminae dorsales is deepl}' excavated in the median line, and in this ex- cavation a narrow chitinous ring encloses the orifice (stoma) of a duct into which a number of glandular tubes open from both sides. A controversy of some length has lately taken place with regard to the function of these stomata and of the glandular organs situated behind them, which are either supposed to be spiracles and tracheae, or regarded only as mere glands. The second view has been several times supported by the author, and I will only refer to my last paper in the controversy : " De Meinert.] lbb [Oct. 2, forineentlige Aarde draetsredskaber og deres Mundinger (Stom- ata) hos Slaegten Scutigera " (" The supposed respiratory organs and their orifices (stomata) in the genus Scutigera"). Yid.Medd. Naturh. Foren. Kjobenhavn, 1882, p. 88. At present, I will only point out that the number of stomata is seven, and that of the pairs of spiracles in Lithobius six, and that if the stomata were homologous with the spiracles in the other Chilopods, certainly the first segment of the body in Scutigera should have spiracles or coalesced spiracles, while that segment in the other Chilopods should be without these respira- tory organs. The limbs are very long, or much elongated, the different joints being all, except the trochanter, elongated, and the last two, the tarsus, being, besides, divided into a great number of little joints. The first seven pairs of legs are nearly of the same length, but each following pair increases in length, and the hindmost pair, particularly in the male, is abruptly elongated into a fine hair. The two joints of the tarsus are each divided into a great num- ber of badly defined little joints, but the length and thickness of the first joint is always greater than that of the second ; on the contrary the number of little joints is much greater in the second tarsal joint than in the first, and we find here even four or five hundred such joints (Latzel, 1. c, p. 21). The length of these little joints varies very much in the same species, nay, even in the same specimen, and, besides, no established order can be detected, so that we cannot possibly follow Newport, when he makes use of the proportion between the lengths of the first two of these little joints as characters of species. I have found the proportion varying in the same species from 1:1 to 1:6, but never have I seen the second joint larger than the first; also, in the same specimen, I have found the proportion 3 : 1 in one leg, but 1 : 1 in the other. Without going further, the circumstance that the different authors who have used this character have mentioned a different proportion in the same species demon- strates that the proportion is not so fixed as Newport intimates (1. c, p. 351). Each leg has a single claw, but this claw has two long setiform processes, which run along the inner side of the claw, from the base; the length of the processes seem to be from one-half to 1885.] J-"'-' IMeiuert, four-fifths of the length of the claw. The anal legs seem to be clawless. The antenna? are setiform, very long, and consist of several hundreds of very minute joints, which are, however, united into two or three fully distinguishable principal joints. The eyes are large, very prominent and composite, the num- ber of ocelli may be some two hundred or more. In the preceding pages I have already mentioned the want of spiracles. The palpi maxillaries are long, slender, four-jointed ; the first three are furnished on the front edge with long stout bristles. The fourth or last joint has preserved the same shape as the preceding ones, and has not, as in the Lithobiini and the other Chilopoda, taken the shape of a claw. The two halves of the sternum of the (fourth) metamer are not united ; each part bears four long stout bristles on the front edge. The coxa? are all plain, without glands or glandular pores. The forceps of the female organs of generation consists of a pair of styli, the first joints of which are nearly joined together with the posterior half of their inner edge, while the forward part is separated and often furnished with a small brush of hair at the corner. As these styli are bent against each other, the shape of the forceps and of the sinus between the two styli is altered and therefore no characters of great value can be drawn from this organ. Most of the characters in use to-day are valueless, except the color and the proportions of the length of the legs and of the antenna? to the body; we seldom find true characters used, but ordinarily the descriptions are drawn now from one part of the body, now from another. Even the characters employed by such accurate observers as Torath and Latzel are partly due either to a fortuitous want, or are characters common to the whole genus. It is evident that a very great number of different spe- cies are needed, before we can hope to find the true special characters. Yet it is far from my intention to claim that I have been more fortunate than my predecessors, and although I believe I have shown man}- deficiencies in the characters in use, I do not mean that I myself have found the right ones ; but I also have had too little material and this must be my excuse. TltOC. AMEB. PHILOS. S0C. XXIII. 122. V. PRINTED DECEMBER 17, 1885. Meinert.1 lii) [Oct. 2, Although the genus Scutigera is very interesting, the different species of the genus are but little so ; and the characters which they offer are, as I have just asserted, often very few and with- out value. Besides, the antennas and the legs, particularly the anal legs, are excessively fragile and are often wanting, even in living specimens ; and thus many of the specimens which are preserved in museums are more or less destitute of the orgaus from which the chief characters are drawn. Frequently we find specimens deprived of all their external organs. Species founded on such organs are indeed of no great value, but nevertheless they are distinguishable, and I myself have proposed such a new species. 1. Scutigera serrattpes. Scutigera serratipes Gervais, Walckenasr Hist. Nat. Ins. Apt. iv, p. 221. ? Scutigera Templetoni Humbert, Essai Myriap. Ceylan, p. 8, pi. i, fig. 1, la-lb. Latiuscula, ante et post paulum angustata, convexa (, ) livida, vittis duabus lateralibus latissimis griseis mediaque post paulum angustata rufo-Hvida notata, antennis tarsisque flavis, cingulis patellarum manifestius, tibiarum binis obsoletius cceruleseentibus ; manifesto tuberosa, spinulis in dorso (extra lineam mediam glabram) subseriatis granulisque perminutis scab- riuscula. Lamina cepbalica fere oeque longa ac lata, post late minus profunde im- pressa, ante canaliculata, sulcis duobus rectis transversis atque sulco singulo antico curvato exarata ; alte marginata (,) margine laeviuscula, fimbriata. Antennae corpore sesqui longiores. Laminae dorsales alte marginatae, margine densissime spinuloso, margine postico in angulnm obtusum producto, obscure flexuoso, in medio late sinuato ; lamina ultima latiuscula, lateribus paulum flexuosis, sat angus- tata, post late rotundata, obscure emarginata. Stomata in aequum porrecta, longa, stomate primo quam linea media laminae dorsalis manifesto breviore. Carinae pedum alte expressae, densissime spinulosae. Pedes paris ultimi tenuissimi, corpore plus duplo longiores (fere 11 : 5); tibia a tarso bene discreta, manifesto clavata, aculeis binis longiusculis, subaequalibus armata. Forceps feminaelongiusculus, articulo altero quam priore multo breviore (fere 3:4). Long. 35 mm. Hob. At Pennaculum, South India, Mr. Scudder; the Isle of St. Mauritius, Mr. Pike. 1885.J 1 i 1 [Meinert. 2. SCUTIGERA CASTANEA, n. Sp. Angustiuscula, ante multum, post paulum angustata, valde convexa ; castanea, concolor ; tuberosa, spinis in dorso medio subseriatis granulisque perrninutis dense scabricula. Lamina cepbalica multo longior quam latior (5 : 4), in crucem impressa, margine laeviusculo. Antennae desunt. Lamina? dorsales alte marginatse, margine manifesto crenulato, margine postico in triangulum obtusum producto, in medio late sinuato ; lamina ultima lata, lateribus rotundatis, valde angustata, post integra. Stomata in aequum porrecta, longa, stomate primo quam linea media laminae dorsalis fere sesqui breviore. Pedes desunt. Forceps feminae longiusculus, angulo interiore articuli prioris longius penicillato. The t}Tpe of this species was deprived of all its legs and the antennae. Hab. Koolloo, Mr. Carleton (the specimen was found in a box together with the last mentioned species of this genus, Scut, microstoma). 3. SCUTIGERA FORCEPS. ? Selista forceps Raffinesque, Ann. of Nature, i, p. 7.? Cermatia coleoptcrata Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philada., ii, p. 5. Cermatia floridana Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 353. Scutigera floridana Gervais, Walck. Hist. Nat. Ins. Apt., iv, p. 225. Cermatia forceps Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc, new ser., v, p. 132. Wood, Trans. Amer. Pbilos. Soc. xiii, p. 145, pi. iii, fig. 1, la. f Cermatia Mexicana Saussure et Humbert, Etud. s. Myriap., p. 112, tab. v, fig. 3, 3a, b. p. Latiuscula, ante vix post paulum angustata, minus convexa vel con- vexa ; supra viridi-lutea, vittis tribus angustis, fuscis vel ccerulescentibus notata, patellis tibiisque cingulis binis ccerulescentibus, per paria sensim latioribus atque manifestioribus ornatis ; obscure tuberosa, spinulis sparsis subseriatis (extra lineam mediam longitudinalem lsevem) scabriuscula. Lamina cepbalica post late, minus profunde impressa, ante canaliculata, carina media obscuriore in transversum notata, minus alte marginata, margine laeviusculo, sparse fimbriato ; manifesto latior quam longior (fere 8:7). Antennae pertenues, corpore plus sesqui longiores (feminas 11 : 7 ; mari 5:3). 179 Meiner'..] ■*- ' -J [Oct. 2, Lamina? dorsales minus alte marginata?, marginc sparse spinuloso, raar- gine postico late rotundato, in medio latissime sinuato ; lamina ultima an- gustiuscula, lateribus rotundatis, sat angustata, post breviter rotundato, in medio obscure sinuato. Stomata praeter primum in a?quum fere porrecta, parva vel mediocria, stomate primo quam linea mediae laminae dorsalis bis vel ter (fere 2 : 5), breviore. Carina? pedum minus alte expressa?, sparse spinulosa?. Pedes paris ultimi pertenues, corpore bis vel ter longiores (fere 5 : 2), tibia a tarso bene discreta, obscure clavata, aculeis binis longiusculis, ina?qualibus armata. Forceps femina? breviusculus, angulo interiore articuli prioris penicil- lato, articulo altero quam priore multo breviore (fere 3:4). Long. 28 mm. I have compared typical specimens of Mr. Wood. Hah. Beaufort, N. C; Texas, Mr. P. W. Putnam ; Boston, Mass., Mr. Corbett (another specimen from Boston was labeled " found Dec'br 27 living in a tobacco store in Boston importing tobacco from the Southern States, perhaps imported "). 4. SCUTIGERA ARGENTINA. Cermatia Argentina Humbert et Saussure, Rev. et Mag. Zool. 2 ser. xxii, p. 202. Saussure et Humbert, Etud. s. Myriap. p. 113. Tab. v, fig. 2, 2a. Angusta, ante et post vix angustata, compressa vel couipressiuscula ; obscure brunnea, pedibus flavis, sanguineo-plagiatis ; parum tuberosa, spinulis in series subdigestis scabriuscula. Lamina cephalica in foveam parum altam impressa, in medio sat pro- funde canaliculata, sulco transverso, valde arcuato obscure impressa ; minus alte marginata, margine la?viusculo, sparsissime fimbriato ; vix latior quam longior. Antennas desunt. Lamina? dorsales minus alte marginata?, margine dense crenulato, mar- gine postico rotundate augustato, in medio in angulum acutum inciso ; lamina ultima angustiuscula, lateribus rotundatis, angustata, post integra. Stomata fere propendentia, perparva, stomate primo quam linea media lamina? dorsalis multoties breviore. Carina? pedum minus alte expressse, sparsissime spinulosa?. Pedes paris ultimi desunt. Forceps feminae breviusculus, angulo interiore articuli prioris aculeo penicilloque brevibus armato, articulo altero quam priore paulo breviore. Long. 18 nam. Hub. Cordova, Argent., Mr. Davis (one 9ingle specimen). 1885.] 1*3 [Meincrt. 5. SCUTIGERA NIGRO-YITTATA, 11. Sp. Latiuscula, ante et post paulum angustata, convexiuscula ; flava, vittis duabus latis, nigris, lateralibus prsetereaque vittis duabus interioribus capiti notata, femoribus patellis tibiisque infra fasciis binis nigris, per paria sensim mamfestioribus atque latioribus signatis, stomatibus nigris ; obscure tuberosa, spinulis sparsis, in series subdigestis (extra lineam niediam longitudinalem glabram) granulisque perminutis scabriuscula. Lamina cephalica post profunde impressa, ante canaliculata, sulcis duobus in transversum impressa ; minus alte marginata, margine sparsius fimbriato ; fere aeque longa ac lata. Antennae tenues, truncata?. Laminae dorsales minus alte manginatse, margine densius fimbriato, margine postico sat breviter rotundato, in medio late sinuato ; lamina ultima angustiuscula, valde angustata, post brevissime rotundata. Stomata paulum dec] i via, parva, stomate primo quam linea media lamina} dorsalis bis vel ter breviore. Carinae pedum minus alte expresses, spinis sparsis vel sparsioribus setis- que serratas. Pedes paris ultimi desunt. Forceps ferninae lougiusculus, latere interiore articuli prioris sparsius birsuto, articulo altero quam priore plus sesqui breviore (fere 3 : 5). Long. 25 mm. Hab. Panama. 6. SCUTIGERA MICROSTOMA, n. sp. Latiuscula, ante et post paulum angustata, parum convexiuscula ; flava, vitta media, lata, gemina, fusca, marginibus laminarum obscurioribus ; laeviuscula, sparsissime birsuta, granulis perminutis aspera. Lamina cepbalica post in figuram ypsiliformem obscure impressa, ante leviter sulcata, parum alte marginata, margine sparse, brevius fimbriato ; multo longior quam latior (6 : 5). Antennas tenues vel perlenues, corpore paulo lougiores (fere 11 : 10). Laminae dorsales parum alte marginata, margine obscurecrenulato, mar- gine postico rotundate angustato, in medio late sinuato ; lamina ultima angustiuscula lateribus flexuosis, paulum angustata, post latissime ro- tundata, in medio obscurissime sinuata. Stomata declivia, parva, stomate primo quam linea media lamina; dorsalis bis vel ter breviore. Pedes paris ultimi desunt. Forceps ferninae breviusculus, angulo interiore articuli prioris breviter penicillato, articulo altero quam priore vix breviore. Long. 21 mm. Hab. A place 70 miles from Amballa, India, Mr. Carleton (10 specimens) ; Koolloo, Mr. Carleton (4 specimens in a box to- gether with Scut, castanea). Melnert.] ' ' "^ [Oct. 2, 2. Fam. LITHOBIINI. Laminae dorsales omnes manifesto? (alternae minores), integrae. Pedes longi, tarsis biarticulatis (in pedibus prioribus saepe indistincte) ; ungues bini (in pedibus posticis saepe singuli), ungue majore processu simplice, parvo armato. Antennae articulis multis vel permultis. Oculi ocellis paucis vel multis, aggregatis. Spiracula manifesta (sena). Palpi maxillares triarticulati, ungue armati. Laminae dorsales segmenti septimi atque octavi discretae. Sternum metameri quarti integrum ; prosternum ante integrum vel in- dentes incisum. Pori excretorii in coxas quaternas (vel quinas) ultimas intrusi. For further explanation of the characters of this family I refer to my preceding essays on the Lithobii (" Danmarks Sco- lopendrer og Lithobier," Naturh. Tidsskr. 3 R. 5 B., p. 241, and " Myriapoda Musaei Hauniensis ii, Lithobiini," ibid. 3 R. 8 B., p. 281) and to the preceding pages of this paper. 1. Gen. Litliobi us. Labrum liberum, in medio profunde incisum, dentatum, lateribus fimbria lata et densa, e laciniis setiformibus, racemosis facta, instructis. Labium setis racemosis et simplicibus instructum, processibus labii sat magnis. Palpi maxillares ungue tri- vel quinque-partito armati. Mandibular serie abbreviata setarum minorum, racemosarum pone setas majores crenulatas armatae. Oculi ocellis paucis vel multis. Pedes omnes vel plurimi calcaribus armati, maxime unguibus binis armati. Genitalium femineorum unguis intus excavatus, integer aut bi- vel tri- lobus. The characters which are here given of the genus Lithobius for the most part conform with those I have proposed in Myriap. Mus. Haun. ii, Lithobii, p. 283, and the apparent great difference arises solely from the introduction of my new terminology and from the altered order of the parts of the mouth, both of which my late investigations have made necessary. Lamina dorsalis 6, 7, 9, 11, 13 angulis productis. Pedes anales ungue singulo armati. Pori coxales in series plures digesti. Genitalium femineorum unguis tripartitus. Pedum analium coxa? calcare armaUu. 1885.] J * '' [Meinert. 1. LlTHOBIUS MULTIDENTATUS. LithoUus multidentatus Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 365. Gervais, Walck., Hist. Nat. Ins. Apt., iv, p. 236. Bothropolys nobilis Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc, new ser., v, p. 15. Bolhropolys multidentatus Wood, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., xiii, p. 152. Dilute brunneus, plagis binis magnis laminarum dorsalium, capite antennisque proeter surumam apicem fuscescentibus ; robustus vel sat robustus, ante obsolete, post manifesto rugulosus ; capite subobcordato, vix latiore quara longiore, sublaevi. Antennae longiores, articulis longis, 20-22 articulatae. Oculi ocellis 20-30, in series 4-6 digestis. Dentes prosternales septeni vel octoni. Pori coxales numerosi, in series 3-4 subdigesti. Pedes corporis primi paris calcaribus 2, 2, 1 ; pedes anales calcaribus 1, 3, 2, 1 armati. Pedes postici sat longi. Genitalium femineorum unguis latus, manifesto tripartitus, aculeis in- terioribus quam exterioribus multo brevioribus. Long. 22-25 mm. Eab. Warwick, Mass. (3 typical specimens of Dr. Wood) ; Marlow, N. H. ; near to the Mammoth Cave, Ky., Mr. Putnam ; Michigan, Mr. E. P. Putnam. Lamina dorsalis 7, 9, 11, 13 angulis productis. Pedes anales ungue singulo armati. Pori coxales pauciores, in seriem singulam digesti. Pedes penultimi unguibus binis armati. Pedum analium coxse calcare singulo, parvo armataa. 2. Lithobius Latzelii, n. sp. Castaneus vel rufo-brunneus, laminis ventralibus pedibusque fiavescen- tibus ; robustus, sublajvis, capite lato, multo latiore quam longiore (fere 4 : 3), vix punctato. Antennas breviusculaj, paulum attenuate, 34-articu- latse. Oculi ocellis 45-48, in series 8-9 obliquas digestis. Dentes prosternales octoni. Pori coxales 5, 7, 6, 4 — 5, 6, 6, 5, magni, plerique transversales. Pedes corporis primi paris calcaribus 2, 3, 1 ; pedes anales calcaribus 1, 3, 3, 2 armati. Pedes postici breviusculi, vix inflati. Long. 23 mm. Mas : Pedum analium femur patellaque infra sulco longitudinali ex- cavata. Hab. Crandall, Virginia. -i rrn Mcinerl.] -1 ' " [Oct. 2, Lamina dorsalis 9, 11, 13 angulis productis. Pedes anales uugue singulo armati. Pori coxales pauciores, ia seriam singulam digesti. Pedes penultimi unguibus binis armati. Pedum analium coxae calcare nullo. 3. Lithobius forficatus (Linn.). Lithobius forficatus Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 3G7. Lithobius Americanus Newport, ibid, xix, p. 365, tab. xxxiii, fig. 29. Lithobius multhlentatus Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc, new ser., v, p. 13. Lithobius Americanus "Wood, ibid., p. 14. Wood, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc, xiii, p. 148. Castaneus vel brunneus, laminis ventralibus pedibusque flavis, robustus, sat rugulosus, scepissime subglaber, interdum hirsutulus, proesertim post, capite magno, subquadrato. Antenna? sat longne, 36-48-articulataj. Oculi ocellis 22-35, in series 5-8 digestis. Dentes prosternales quini vel septeni. Pori coxales 6, 6, 6, 5 — 12, 10, 9, 8, plerique transversales. Pedes corporis primi paris calcaribus 2, 3, 2 ; pedes anales calcaribus 1, 3, 3, 2 armati. Pedes postici longiores, paulum inflati. Genitalium femineorum unguis trilobus. Long. 14-26 mm. For the characteristics of the not fully developed Lithobius forficatus I refer to my Myriap. Mus. Haun., ii, p. 315 and 316, and to the elaborate essay of Latzel, L c, p. 57 ; also for the table of sj'nonymys I refer to Ant. Stuxberg, who in his " Litho- bioidse Americas Borealis " (Ofvers. Kgl. Vet. Akad. Fb'rh., 1875? No. 3, p. 27), gives a list of the synonyms of this animal per- haps complete to his time. The species is doubtless the most common of all Lithobii in the eastern part of North America, and the Museum of Com- parative Zoology also possesses numerous specimens not alone from Massachusetts, but also from other places, as Halifax, X. S. ; Britain Island, N. S. ; Amherst, N. H., Mr. A. M. Edmands ; Bee Spring, Ky., Mr. F. G. Sanborn; Anticosti. Lamina dorsalis 11, 13 angulis productis. Pedes anales unguibus binis armati. Pori coxales pauciores, in seriem singulam digesti. Pedes penultimi unguibus binis armati. Pedum analium coxa' inermes. 1885.] 1' ' [Meinert. 4. Lithobius Cantabrigensis, n. sp. Flavus, capite paulo obscuriore ; gracilis, sublaevis, subglaber, capite subobcordato, fere seque longo ac lato.- Antennae breves, 35-articulata3, articulis perbrevibus. Oculi ocellis 8, in series 2 digestis. Dentes prosternales bini. Pori coxales 2, 3, 3, 2—3, 4, 3, 2. Pedes corporis primi paris calcaribus 0, 0, 1 ; pedes anales calcaribus 1, 3, 1, 0—1, 3, 2, 1 armati. Pedes postici lougiusculi, paulum infiati. Genitalium femineorum unguis trilobus, aculeis brevibus, acutis, in- terioribus quaru exterioribus manifesto brevioribus. Long. 10.5 mm. Hab. Cambridge, Mass., Mr. H. H. James. Laminae dorsales omnes angulis rectis. Pori coxales pauciores, in seriem singulam digesti. Pedum analium coxae calcare singulo arniatae. 5. Lithobius Jowensis, n. sp. Brunneus, capite cum antennis obscuriore, laminis ventralibus pallidi- oribus, pedibus flavis ; sat gracilis, sublsevis, pedibus densius pilosis, capite subobcordato, manifesto latiore quam longiore (fere 8 : 7). Antenme breviusculge, 23 articulatae, articulis pluribus brevibus. Oculi ocellis 12-15, in series 3-4 digestis. Dentes prosternales quaterni. Pori coxales 4, 5, 5, 4, rotundati. Pedes corporis primi paris calcaribus 2, 1, 1 ; pedes paris antepenultimi (pedes anales penultimique desunt) calcaribus 1, 3, 3, 1 armati. Pedes postici breviusculi. Genitalium femineorum unguis integer, aculeis minus tenuibus, longi- tudine subsequalibus. Long. 13.5 mm. The specimen which I had to examine was in a bad condition, and particularly the last pairs of legs were lost. II. Tribus Epimorpha. Segmenta corporis pedifera pauciora vel numerosa, inter se subaequalia vel aaqualia. Pedes sat longi vel breves, coxis parvis vel evanidis, tarsis integris vel articulatis. Antennae articulis paucioribus. Oculi nulli vel ocellis paucis. Pedes prensorii articulo secundo atque tertio parvis vel mimis, in latere exteriore evanidis vel interruptis. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. S0C. XKIII. 122. W. PRINTED DECEMBER 10, lb85. Meinert.] ■«*" [Oct. 2, Spiraculorurn paria segmentis pediferis nurnero subsequalia, vel saltern 9-10. Genitalia feininea externa nulla. Pullus ex ovo nuper exclusus pedibus secundum speciem normatis instructus. 1. Fam. SCOLOPENDRINI. Segmenta pedifera 21-23, inter subsequalia. Pedes sat longi, tarsis, saltern ultiuiis binis, articulatis. Antennae 17-30 articulatae. Oculi nulli vel ocellis paucis. (Pedes prensorii articu'.o secundo atque tertio (saepissirne) in latere ex- teriore evanidis vel interruptis.) Lamina basalis saepissinie evanida. Spiraculorum paria plerumque 9 vel 10. The number of the joints of the antennae is seldom more than 22 or 23 ; yet in some true Scolopendrae, as in Se. heros, I have found a greater number, and thus I have been compelled to place the limit as high as 30 joints. As a rule, the second and the third joint of the raptorial legs (pedes prensorii) are very small. Furthermore, regularly the rings of these joints are not whole but interrupted at their dor- sal or outermost side ; yet, in the genus Cryptops the ring of the third joint is whole, and thus in this genus the dorsal side of the first and of the fourth joint of the raptorial legs is not as in the other genera united or confined. Gervais, in his tables of the genera of the Scolopendrini, 1. c, p. 243, proposes a genus Monops, and in the description of the Cryptops nigra, 1. c, p. 294, he retains this name, but without giving a real description of the genus he only indicates that a pair of eyes is found by him. Now it would be of great interest to have a more full investigation of this new genus ; I do not dare to say that the eyes are wanting, but on the other hand the family Scolopendrini forms such a compact and distinct group of animals, either wanting eyes, or having ihem to the number of four pairs, that it is not likely that in this family one species alone would have one pair ; and, therefore, I believe that the genus Monops must be in many other characters different from the genus Cryptops, if the eyes in reality exist. In the lately published genus Plutonium* the number of spi- » Cavanna, Bull. Soc. Ent. Hal., xiii, p. 10(1, If. tab. 1. I have nut seen this paper, but, according to Bertkau, the genus seems to relate to Opisthemega. 1886.] Xi J [Meinert. racles is said to be 19 on each side, but in the other genera no more than 10 pairs are found. I. Segmenta pedifera 23. 1. Gen. Scolopocryptops. Scolopocryptops Newport.* Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 407. Lamina cephalica larninani primani dorsalem partim obtegens. Oculi null:. Antennae tenuiusculos, subfiliformes, 17-articulatse. Labri fimbria longa, intus e setis ad apicem fissis facta. Labii processus subteretes, barba e setis partim fissis facta instructi ; palporum fimbria e setis paulum uncinatis vel cl a vat is facta. Palpnrum maxillarium unguis in latere interiore dentibus 13-15 mani- festis armatus ; fimbria digitalis unguem procul explens, setis parum uncinatis. Mandibular ante pectinibus 8 juxta et pone lamellam singulum, latam, dentatam coarctatis instructs. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, robustum; prosternum parum promi- nens subtruncatum, vel in angulos breviores productum ; pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertio minimis, interrupts. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula profunda, magna, subrotunda vel breviter ovalia, perpen- dicularia. Pleura? posticaa infra porosoe, in spinam longam post productse. Pedes anales elongati, quinquearticulati, articulo primo(femorali) spini- gero, ungue minus curvato, subgracili, ad basis unguiculis binis minimis armato. 1. Scolopocryptops sexspinosus. Cryptops sexspinosus Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pbilad., ii, p. 112. Scolopocryptops sexspinosa Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 407. Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 297. Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pbilad., new ser., v, p. 37. Wood, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc, xiii, p. 172. Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 54. Porath, So. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bih., B. 4, p. 26. Scolopocryptops spinicauda Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., new ser., v, p. 39. Wood, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc, xiii, p. 174. *This name is formed by Newport against the chief rules of nomenclature; yet it has always been received, and therefore I also shall make use of it. Meinert.| ■*-"*-' [Oct. 2, ? Scolopendropsis helvola C. L. Koch, Die Myriap., ii, p. 34, tab. lxxvi, fig. 156. Flavo brunneus vel rufescens, subtus pallidior, capile cum lamina prima dorsali rubro-castaneo, antennis pedibusque flavis ; minus robustus, sub- laevis ; capite manifesto marginato, suborbiculari. Antennae breviusculse, breviter parcius hirsutae, 17 articulate, articulis ultimis longis vel per- longis. Metameri quarti prosterni margo anterior medius manifesto callosus, leviter productus, subrectus vel obscure sinuatus. Pedes anales glabri, longi, spina inferiore magna, interiore parva. Laminae dorsales praeter priores in lateribus manifesto marginatae. Pleurae postica3 scabrosae, poris majoribus atque minoribus, numerosis perforatae, in spinam robustiorem, breviorem productae. Lamina ultima ventralis latiuscula, valde angustata, post subrecta. Long. 65 mm. Having compared typical specimens, both of the Sc. sexspin- osus and of the Sc. spinicauda Wood, I cannot perceive any true or specific difference between them. This species is very common and spread over the greater part of North America ; I have seen specimens, preserved in the Museum of Comp. Zool., from Frederick county, Md., P. R. Uhler ; Massachusetts, Miss A. M. Edmands, Cambridge, Mass.; Berkshire, Tioga county, N. Y.; Centre county, Pa., Sualer ; Virginia, Crandall ; Pennington's Gap, Lee county, Va.; Ross- well, Ga., Mr. King; Yellow Springs, Ohio; Rocky creek, Gray- son county, Ky., F. W. Putnam ; Macgregor, Iowa, Davis ; Rit- chie county, W. Va., N. E. Ingersen ; San Mateo, Cal., A. Agassiz (Sc. spinicauda, the type of Mr. Wood). 2. Scolopocryptops Georgicus, n. sp. Fulvus, capite rufescente, pedibus flavis ; gracilis, sublaevis, capite ob- scure marginato, subovato. Antennae subglabrae, breves vel breviuscukv, 17-articulatae, articulis prioribus transversalibus, anterioribus brevius- culis. Metameri quarti prosterni margo medius obscure callosus, productus, in angulum incisus, dentibus duobus armatus. Pedes anales glabri, breviusculi, spina inferiore maxima, interiore parva vel perparva. Laminae dorsales praeter sex priores marginata1. Pleura posticee subhevcs, integra, magnam partem obtectaj, in spinam breviorem, acutam product*. Lamina ultima ventralis lata, paruin angustata, post brevissime sinuata. Long. 35 mm. Hub. Georgia ; I have seen two specimens. 1885.] 1"1 [Meinert. 3. SCOLOPOCRYPTOPS MlERSII. Scolopocryptops Miersii Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 405. Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 298. ? Scolopocryptops melanostoma Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 406. ? Scolopocryptops melanosoma Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 298. Scolopocryptops sexspinosus p.p. Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 54. Castaneus, subtus fulvus, antennis pedibusque flavis, posterioribus saepe majorem vel maximam partem cceruleis ; robustus, sublaevis, capite vix marginato, orbiculari. Antennae longiusculae, longius, dense hirsutae, 17- articulatae, articuiis omnibus longis. Metameri quarti prosterni margo anterior medius valde callosus, pro- ductus, manifesto sinuatus, sinu dentibus duobus majoribus vel minoribus armatus. Pedes anales longi vel perlongi (maris ? manifesto pilosi), spina inferiore maxima, interiore majore vel minore. Laminae dorsales praeter sex priores atque duas posteriores vel saltern ultimam immarginatae. Pleurae posticse scabrosae atque porosse, in spirjam longam, acutam (vel maris? longissimam, acutissimam) productae. Lamina ultima ventralis perlata, manifesto angustata, post sat profunde sinuata. Long. 70 mm. Hab. This species seems to prefer the more southern parts of North America, and I have also seen other specimens from the larger Islands of West India; from .leremie, Hayti, Dr. D. F. Wienland ; Grande Anse, Hayti, Uhler ; Kingston, Jamaica, Garman ; Monn (?) Rouge, Martinique, Garman. It is also found in South America. II. Segmenta pedifera 21. A. Segmentum septimum spiraculis instructum. 2. Gen. Heterostoma. 1. Heterostoma trigonopoda. Scolopendra trigonopoda Leach, Zool. Miscell., iii, p. 36. Heterostoma trigonopoda Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 413. ? .Heterostoma sulcidens Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 59, tab. iv, figs. 5-7. One specimen of this genus, from Monrovia in Africa, is re- Meinert.l lOA [Oct. '2, ferred by me to the above named species ; but the specimen is so badly preserved, that no further or closer investigations have been possible either of the characters of the genus or of those of the species. 3. Gen. Bra nchiostoma. Branchiostom-a Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 411. Lamina cephaliea a lamina prima dorsali partim obtecta. Oculi ocellis 4. Antenna? longiusculae, tenuiusculse, manifesto attenuate, 18-21-articu- latae. Labri fimbria brevis, setis simplicibus. Labii processus subconici, barba e setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta ; palporum fimbria e setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis in latere interiore dentibus binis longis, acutis armatus ; fimbria digitalis setis parum uncinatis, ungueni nullo modo explens. Mandibular ante pectinibus 10-12 juxta et pone lamellam dentatam coarctatis instructae. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, sat robustum ; presternum longe prominens, ante in dentes majores incisum ; pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertio minimis, interruptis. Segmentum septimum spiraculis instructum. Spiracnla sat profunda, magna, subovalia vel post subtriangula, fere perpendicularia ; antica abrupte major a minusque profunda. Pleurae posticse infra porosse. in spinam longam productae. Pedes anales elongati, quinquearticulati, articulo primo (femore) spinigero vel inermi, ungue minus curvato, subgracili ad basin unguiculis binis longioribus, rectis armato. 1. Branchiostoma affine. Branchiostoma affine Kohlrauscb, Beit. z. Kenntn. d. Sc, p. 22. Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 68. Fusco-griseum vel flavum, in dorso medio linea angusta, pallida nota- tum, pedibns antennisque flavis ; sat gracile, manifesto sparse punctatum, laminis ventralibus integris, capite subovali, immarginato. Antennae breviusculse, 18-ariiculaiae, prseter articulos lernos priores dense, brevis- sime hirsutae, articulis mediis longiusculis. Dentes prosternnles quaterni, obtusi, per paria approximati, exteriores minores vel evanidi ; dens coxalis obsolete trilaciniatus. Pedes anales perlongi, graciles, in latere interiore femoris spinis parvis 3-5 in seriem singdlam, in latere in feriore spinis 4-7 in series binasdigestis armati. Laminae dorsales quatuor priores omnino, 5-7 fere immarginatae, ceteroe manifesto marginatae. 1885.J 1"'J [Meinert. Pleurae posticae sublaeves, porosae, in anguluni longe productum, spinis ternis parvis armatum desinentes, in latere postico obliquo spina singula armatae. ( Lamina ultima ventralis angustiuscula, rotundate angustata, post mani- festo sinuata. Long. 62 mm. Hah. Pegu, Burmah, C. H. Carpenter ; TO miles from Ambala, E. India, Mr. Carleton ; Mauritius, Mr. Pike ; Zanzibar, Mr. C. Cooke ; and also Basseterre, St. Cristophori. 2. Branchiostoma celek. Branchiostoma celer Humbert et Saussure, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 2 ser., xxii, p. 202. Saussure et Humbert, Etud. s. Myriap., p. 122, tab. vi, fig. 16, etc. Kohlrausch, Arcb. f. Naturg. Jabrg., 47, p. 69. Viride vel viridi-olivaceum, subtus flavo-brunneum vel ochraceum, pedibus praeter posteriores antennisque praeter articulos ternos priores vel totis flavo-brunneis ; sat gracile vel robustius, sublaeve, capite suborbicu- lari, immarginato, margiue postico plus vel minus obtecto. Antennae breviusculae, 20-(18-2l-)articulatae, praeter articulos ternos priores dense, breviter hirsutae, articulis mediis longis vel longiusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni, per paria paulum approximate obtusiun- culi ; dens coxalis sublaevis. Pedes anales perlongi, graciles, inermes. Lamina? dorsales praeter quatuor priores marginatae. Pleurae posticae manifesto scabrosse, dense porosae, in angulum laevem, acutum, spinis binis armatum productae. Lamina ultima ventralis latiuscula, rotundate angustata, post manifesto sinuata. Long. 70 mm. Hab. Kingston, Jamaica, Mr. Garman ; Polvon, Occidental Dept. Nicaragua, Mr. McNiel. B. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. 4. Gen. Otostigma. Otosligmus Poratb, Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bin., B. 4, p. 18. Branclriotrema Koblrausch, Beitr. z. Kenntn. d. Scol., p. 22. Arch. f. Naturg. Jabrg., 47, p. 70. Lamina cephalica a lamina prima dorsali partim objecta, Oculi ocellis 4. Meinert.] lo± [Oct. 2, Antennas longiuscnlse, crassiusculae, manifesto attenuate ; 18-23-articu- latse. Labri fimbria brevis, setis paucioribus, simplicibus. Labii processus subteretes, barba e setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta ; palporum fimbria e setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis in latere interiore dente singulo, longo, acuto armatus ; fimbria digitalis setis parum uncinatis, unguem superans. Mandibular ante 10-12 juxta et pone lamellam dentatam coarctatis in- structae. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, robustum ; prosternum longe prominens, ante in dentes magnos incisum ; pedes prensorii articulo se- cundo et tertio minimis, interruptis. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula sat profunda, magna, subovalia vel post subrotunda, obliqua, per paria sensim magis perpendicularia, antica abrupte majora minusque profunda. Pleurse posticae infra porosae, in spinam longam post productse ; vel truncata;. Pedes anales elongati vel valde elongati, quinquearticulati, articulo primo (feuiore) spinigero vel inermi, ungue minus curvato, subgracili, ad basin unguiculis binis parvis, subrectis armato. 1. Otostigma Ltjzonicum. Branc7iiolrema Luzonicum, calcitrans, ? astenon Kohlrausck, Beitr. z. Kenntn, d. Scol., p. 23. Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 73 and 72. Ochraceum, plus vel minus olivaceum, antennis pedibusque flavescen- tibus ; subgracile vel gracile, laminis dorsalibus sulcis pluribus plus vel minus manifestis esaratis, laminis ventralibus ad latera profunde bisul- catis, in medio obscure bifoveolatis vel sulcatis ; capite subovali, post trun- cate: Antennae longiusculae, ad basin paulum incrassatae, 18-articulatae, praeter articulos binos vel ternos priores manifesto kirsutse articulis brevi- usculis vel brevibus. Dentes prosternales quaterni majores, per paria approximati (exteriore ssepe evanidi) ; dens coxalis in latere carinatus. Pedes anales longi, graciles, teretes, in margine sup. interiore femoris spinis binis minoribus, uniseriatis, angulo apicali evanido spina singula minore instructo, in latere interiore spinis ternis minoribus, uniseriatis, in margine inf. interiore spinulis binis majoribus uniseriatus, in margine exter. interiore spinulis ternis majoribus uniseriatis armati. Laminae dorsales prseter sex priores marginatse. Pleurse posticoe sat amplse, compressiusculaj, sublasves, sparsins, gros- siu8 porosse, in angulum longum, trifidum, in latere Buperiore spinula parva singula, in latere exteriore interdum spinula parva instructum pro- 1885.1 -LoO [Meinert- ductae, rnargine postico in obliquum levissime siauato, spinula minore armato. Lamina ultima ventralis latiuscula, lateribus rotundatis, valde conver- gentibus, post manifesto sinuata. • Long. 45 mm. Hab. Koolloo Yalley, East India, Mr. Carleton (4 spec). 2. Otostigma carinatum. Otostigmus carinatua Porath, Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bill. B. 4, p. 20. Branchiotrema multicarinatum Koblrauscb, Beitr. z. Kenntn. d. Scol., p. 22, fig. 5. Arch. f. Naturg. Jabrg., 47. p. 71, tab. v, fig. 12. Ochraceum vel fusco-griseum, capite cum lamina prima atque ultima dorsali brunneo ; subgracile, laminis dorsalibus prioribus (2-7) sublaevibus, mediis atque posterioribus plus vel minus manifesto septemcarinatis, ad latera rugulosis, laminis ventralibus obscure bisulcatis, capite subcordi- forme, lateribus manifesto marginatis, post truncato. Antennae longius- culae, ad basin paulum incrassatae, 20-23-articulatae, prater articulos binos vel ternos priores birsutae, articulis pluribus vel omnibus breviusculis vel brevibus. Dentes prosternales quaterni, majores, per paria approximati ; dens coxalis in latere nodulis ternis parvis instructus. Pedes anales perlongi, pergraciles, in margine sup. interiore femoris spinulis minutis, saepissime ternis, angulo apicali non producto spinula singula minuta instructo, in latere interiore spinulis 2-6 minutis, in series binas digestis, in latere inferiore spinulis 4-8 parvis, in series binas diges- tis armati. Lamina3 dorsales praeter quatuor vel sex priores marginatae. Pleurae posticae sat amplae, compressiusculae, densius, grossius porosae, in angulum longum, ad apicem spinulis ternis vel quaternis minoribus instructum productae, margine postico in obliquum subtruncato, spinulis binis minoribus armato ; anguli pleurarum plus vel minus approximati. Lamina ultima ventralis latiuscula, lateribus valde rotundatis, valde convergibus, post manifesto sinuata. Long. 66 mm. Hab. Shanghai, Mrs. A. P. Chamberlain. 3. Otostigma occidentale, n. sp. Ochraceum, ante et post plus vel minus virescens, linea media dorsali angusta pallida; subgracile, ante sublaeve, post manifesto hirsutum, in lateribus rugulosum, laminis ventralibus sublaevibus ; capite subcordi- forme, post truncato. Antennae longiusculte, ad basin paulum incrassatae, PROC. AMER. PHILOS SOC. XXIII. 122. X. PRINTED DECEMBER 16, 1885. Meinert] J-"t> [Oft. 2, 21-articulatse, praeter articulos binos vel ternos priores manifesto hirsutae, articulis breviusculis. Dentes prosternales terni vel quaterni minores, acutiusculi ; dens cox- alis acutiusculus, simplex. Pedes anales longiusculi, vix incrassati, articulis binis prioribus vix clavatis, femore inermi, post restricto. Laminae dorsales praeter 12-13 priores marginatae. Pleurae posticse amplae, sparse grossius porosae, area antica glabra, majore, angulo apicali nullo, margine postico leviter arcuato. Lamina ultima ventralis angustiuscula, lateribus rotundatis, valde con- vergentibus, post obscure sinuata. Long. 45 mm. The spiracles of this species are much smaller than the spira- cles of most other species of the genus ; yet, as to their con- struction, they all conform with the scape which ordinarily is found in Otostigma. Also with regard to the pedes anales and to the pleuroe, this is not a little different from the two others here described, perhaps, a new genus ought to be formed. Hab. Grande Anse, Hayti, Mr. Uhler. 5. Gen. Cupipes. Cupipes Kohlrausch, Beitr. z. Kenntn. d. Scol., p. 23. Arch. f. Naturg. Jabrg., 47, p. 78. Lamina cephalica a lamina prima dorsali partim obtecta ; scuta dorsalia metameri tertii manifesta. Oculi ocellis 4. Antenna? breviusculae, crassiusculae, manifesto attenuate, 17-articulatae. Labri fimbria longa, setis paucioribus, simplicibus. Labii processus subteretes, barbae setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta; palporum fimbria e setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis in latere interiore dentibus binis longis, acutis armatus ; fimbria digitalis, setis uncinatis, ad apicem dentatis, un- guem longe superans. Mandibular ante 13 pectinibusjuxta et pone lamellam dentatam coarctatis instructas. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, minus robustum ; prosternum longe prominens, ante in dentes magnos incisum ; pedes prensorii articulo se- cundo et tertio parvis, interrupts. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula profunda vel sat profunda, parva vel minima, subtriangula, priora longitudinalia, postcriora per paria sensim brevius triangula vel rotundata, minus profunda, magnitudine decrescentia. Pleurae postic;e infra porosse, truncate. Pedes anales breves vel perbreves, deplanati, quinquearticulati, articulo 1885.] 1"' [Meinert. primo ffemore) spinigero, ungne crasso, parum arcuato, absque unguicu- lis, infra carina longa, densissiuie crenulata instructo. 1. CUPIPES UNGULATIS. n. Sp. ?? Cormocephalus Brasiliensis Humbert et Saussure, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 2 ser., xxii, p. 203. Etud. s. Myriap., p. 124, tab. vi, fig. 17, etc. Flavus, ante et post fulvescens ; sat gracilis, sparse, brevissime hirsutus, laminis dorsalibus posteribus prseter sulcos ordinarios sulcis binis obsoletis, larninis ventralibus sulcis binis profundis exaratis ; capite subovali, im- marginato, obsolete longitudinaliter bisulcato, post in transversuna arcuato, sulcato. Antennae breviusculse, tenuiusculoe, paulum attenuatae, 17-artic- ulatse, prseter articulos senos vel octonos priores dense, breviter birsutse, articulis breviusculis, subteretibus. Dentes prosternales bini (interiores bifidi vel trifidi, exteriores minores, acuti) ; dens coxalis sat magnus, acutiusculus, nodulis binis in latere ar- rnatus. Pedes anales breves vel perbreves, percrassi, fere contigui, in latere sup. interiore femoris spiuulis ternis parvis, in seriem arcuatam digestis, in latere interiore spinulis quaternis parvis vel perparvis, in series binas digestis, in latere inter, inferiore spinulis binis parvis vel perparvis, uni- seriatis, in latere inferiore saepe spinulis binis armati ; articulus priore tar- sali infra nodo majore instructo. Laminae dorsales proeter ultimam immarginatafe. Pleura? postioae angustae, subrugosse, porosaB, truncata?, in angulo in- teriore spinula perparva, nodiformi armatse. Lamina ultima ventralis latiuscula, lateribus rotundatis, manifesto con- vergentibus, post rotundate truncata. Long. 40 mm. Hab. Grande Anse, Hayti, Mr. P. R. Uhler ; Port au Prince, Mr. W. Wilson ; Pernambuco. 2. CUPIPES QUADRISULCATUS, n. Sp. Purpurascente-olivaceus, capite rufescente, pedibus amtennisque flaves- centibus ; minus robustus, laminis dorsalibus medis manifesto quadrisul- catis, anterioribus et posterioribus obsoletius exaratis, laminis ventralibus mediis profunde, anterioribus atque posterioribus obsolete bisulcatis. An- tennae breves, crassse, attenuatse, 17-articulata?, ad apicem obsolete hirsutse, articulis brevibus vel breviusculis. Dentes prosternales bini (interiores truncati e ternis confluentes) ; dens coxalis minus productus, acutiusculus. Pedes anales perbreves, percrassae, contiguse, in margine interiore femoris post spinulis ternis perparvis, in latere sup. interiore spinula singula perparva armati. Meinert.] 188 [Oct. 2, Laminae dorsales prater undecim priores (obsolete) marginatae. Pleurae posticae angustae, subrugosa?, porosa1, rotundate truncatae. Lamina ultima veutralis lata, brevis, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 40 mm. Hab. Ascension Island, South Sea (one single specimen). 6. Gen. Rhoda, n. gen. Lamina ceplialica a lamina prima dorsali partim obtecta. Oculi ocellis 4. Antenna? breviusculae vel breves, ad basin incrassatae, valde attenuates, 19-articulatae, articulis praeter ultimum brevibus vel perbrevibus, prioribus transversalibus. Labri fimbria Labii processus Palporum maxillarium unguis in latere interiore dentibus binis longis- acutis armato ; fimbria digitalis unguem medium procul complens. Mandibulae. . .. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, robustum ; prosternum perlonge productum, ante in dentes magnos incisuni ; pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertio parvis, interruptis. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula profunda, longa, linearia vel paulum triangula, longitudina- lia, per paria sensim longitudine paulum decrescentia. Pleurae posticae infra porosae, truncatae. Pedes anales breves vel perbreves, deplanati, quinquearticulati, articulo primo (femore) spinigero, ungue crasso, parum arcuato, absque unguicu- lis, infra carina longa, dendssime crenulata instructo. As I have had but one single specimen of this new genus to study, I have not been able to give such full characteristics as I wished. 1. Rhoda Thayert, n. sp. Flava, ante et post paulum fulvescens ; minus gracilis, subhrvis, lami- nis dorsalibus atque ventralibus profunde bisulcatis, capite subovali, im- marginato. Antennae breves, crassae, 19-articulatae praeter articulos senos priores dense, brevissime birsutae, articulis praeter ultimum brevibus. Dentes prosternales terni, validi, truncata1 ; dens coxalis productus acutiusculus. Pedes anales breves, crassae, contigua-, in margine sup. interiore femoris spinulis ternis (postica majore, bicuspide) in latere interiore spinulis binis perparvis, in margine inf. interiore spinulis binis parvis arniati. Lamina' dorsales praeter ultimata immarginatee. Pleurae postica- angustae, subrugosa1, porosa1, truncatae. 1885.] loJ [Melnert. Lamina ultima ventralis longa, angusta, paulum angustata, post late arcuata. Long. 58 mm. Hab. Santarem, Thayer Exped. 7. Gen. isanada, n gen. Lamina cephalica libera vel a lamina prima dorsal i partim obtecta. Oculi ocellis 4. Antenna? perbreves, ad basin incrassatse, valde attenuata?, 17-articulata?, articulis brevibus vel perbrevibus, prioribus transversalibus. Labri fimbria brevis, maxime obtecta, setis paucioribus simplicibus. Labii processus breves, subconici, barba evanida ; palporum fimbria e setis perbrevibus, sparsis, uncinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis simplex ; fimbria digitalis brevis, setis paucioribus, uncinatis, ad apicem dentatis, unguem medium procul coin- plens. Mandibular ante 12 pectinibus juxta et pone lamellam dentatam coarcta- tis instructs. Metameri quarti sternum in medio canaliculatum, robustum ; prester- num longe prominens, ante in dentes majores incisum ; pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertio perparvis, interruptis. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula sat profunda, perparva, producte triangula, longitudinalia, per paria sensim longitudine paulum descrescentia. Pleurae postica? lseves, magnam partem obtecta?, truncatae. Pedes anales breves, crassi, paulum complanati (mari perbreves, per- crassi, deplanati), quinquearticulati, articulo primo (femore) inermi, ungue brevi, crasso, paruni arcuato, simplice. 1. ASANADA BREVICORNIS, n. Sp. Plava vel fulva, subtus pallidior ; gracilis, laevis, laminis dorsalibus bisulcatis, anterioribus obsolete, mediis atque posterioribus manifesto, laminis ventralibus manifesto bisulcatis, capite subovato, immarginato. Antenna? perbreves, ad basin incrassata?, valde attenuate, 17-articulata?, subnuda?, articulis prioribus transversalibus. Dentes prosternales terni, acuti (mediis maximis) ; dens coxalis parvus, acutiusculus. Pedes anales breves, crassi, paulum complanati, ad basin distantes (maris perbreves, percrassi, deplanati, supra profundissime sulcati, fere contigui), inermes. Lamina? dorsales pra?ter ultimam immarginata?. Pleura? postica? triangula?, la?ves, perparva?, tere obtecta?, truncatae. Lamina ultima ventralis lata, brevis, lateribus rotundatis, valde con- vergentibus, post breviter rotundata. Long. 35 mm. Hab. Koolloo, Mr. Carleton. Meinert.] 1^0 [Oct. 2, 8. Gen. Scolopendra. Scolopendra Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 377. Lamina cepbalica laminam primam dorsalem partim saepissirne ob- tegens. Oculi ocellis 4. Antenna? plerumque longiusculae, tenuisculoe, ad basin manifesto in- crassatae, attenuatae, 17-30-attenuatae, articulis plerisque longiusculis vel longis. Labri fimbria longa, setis plus vei minus densis, simplicibus. Labii processus subconici, barba e setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta ; palporum fimbria e setis brevibus, densis, manifesto uncinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis in latere interiore dentibus binis validis, acutiusculis armatus ; fimbria digitalis brevior, setis longis, densis, parum uncinatis, unguis basin plus vel minus superans. Mandibulae ante 10-13 pectinibus juxta et pone lamellam dentatem coarctatis instructae. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, robustum ; prosternum longe prominens, in dentes majores vel minores incisum ; pedes prensorii arti- culo secundo et tertio parvis, interrupts. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula sat profunda, magna, angusta, post paulum dilatata, longi- tudinalia, per paria longitudine decrescentia. Pleura? posticae sat auiplae, infra porosae, post in angulum plus vel minus productum desinentes. Pedes anales plerumque longiusculi vel longi, rare incrassati, quinque- articulati, articulo primo (femore) saepissirne spinigero, ungue sat magno, minus curvato, ad basin unguiculis binis armato. Conspectus speciorum : I. Femora pedium penultimorum (saltern) ad apicem exteriorem spinulis armata. A. Lamina prima marginem pone dorsalis anticum profunde sulcatum in transversum. 1. Sc. gigas. 2. Sc. cristata. 3. Sc. prasina. B. Lamina prima dorsalis integra. 4. Sc. allernans. 5. Sc. crudelis. II. Femora pedum penultimorum ad apicem exteriorem inermia. A. Lamina prima dorsalis pone marginem anticum in transversum profunde sulcatum. a. Pedum ultimorum articulus primus tarsalis calcare armatus. 6. Sc. heros. 7. Sc. viridis. b. Pedum ultimorum articulus primus tarsalis inermis. 8. Sc. occidentalis. 9. Sc. Woodii. B. Lamina prima dorsalis integra. a. Pedum omnium articulus primus tarsalis inermis. J883.] 191 [Meinert. 10. Sc. longispina. 11. Sc. CMlemis. b. Pedum plerorumque articulus primus tarsalis calcare armatus. 12. Sc. morsitans. 13. Sc. rugosa. 14. Sc. subspinipes. 15. Sc. Be Haanii. 16. Sc. Indica. I. Femora pedum penultimorum (saltern) ad apicem exteriorem spinulis armata. A. Lamina prima dorsalis pone marginem anticum in transversum profunde sulcata. 1. SCOLOPENDRA GIGAS. Scolopendra gigas Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xi, p. 383. Newport, Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., xiii, p. 98. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 399. Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 119. Scolopendra insignis Gervais, Ann. Soc. entom. de France, p. xxix. Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 278. Scolopendra gigantea Porat, Soc. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bin., B. 4, No. 7, p. 5. ? Scolopendra gigantea Linne\ Syst. Nat., ed. x, p. 638. Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 400. Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 279. Scolopendra prasinipes, epileptica Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1861, p. 11. Castanea, subtus pallidior, pedibus prioribus in articulis ternis ultimis saepissime olivaceo balteatis, antennis viridi-olivaceis ; valde robustus, sublaevis, laminis ventralibus obscure bisulcatis ; capite suborbiculari, ini- marginato. Antennae longiusculae vel longae, 17-(18-)articulata', articulis septenis vel octonis anterioribus dense brevissime gilvo-hirsutae, articulis praeter priores longis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini vel terni interiores maximam partem coaliti), magni ; dens coxalis magnus, obtusiusculus, in latere nodulo instructus. Femora praeter prima vel bina priora ad apicem exteriorem spinulis ternis (quinis) armata. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus ultimis (analibus) exceptes, calcare armatus. Pedes anales longiusculi, in latere sup. interiore femoris spinulis majori- bus novenis vel duodenis, in series ternas vel quaternas digestis, in angulo exteriore tumido spinulis octonis vel denis, in series binas vel ternas ob- liquas digestis, in latere inf. interiore spinulis minoribus ternis (binis), in latere inferiore spinulis ternis vel quinis, in series binas digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales praeter tres vel quatuor priores marginatae. Pleurae posticae amplae, sublaeves, densissime tenuiter porosae, in angu. lum obtusum, spinulis quaternis vel quinis instructum, products;, margine postico in obliquum fere truncato vel leviter sinuato, inermi. Meinert.] ±J-i [Oct. 2, Lamina ultima ventralis longa, angusta, lateribus sinuatis manifesto convergentibus, post rotundate truncata vel latissime rotundata. Long. 220-280 mm. Eab. Santarem, Chas. Linden; Near Santarem, Brazil; Obidos, Brazil, James & Hunnewell (Thayer Exped.) ; Villa Bella, Brazil, J. C. Hetcher. 2. SCOLOPENDRA CRISTATA. Scolopendra cristata Newport, Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., xiii, p. 98. Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond., xix, p. 398. Porat, Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bih., B. 4, No. 7, p. 6. Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 117. Castanea vel olivacea, antennis pedibusque pallidioribus, concoloribus vel partini balteis olivaceis in articulis omnibus vel exterioribus pedum posteriorum plus vel minus manifestis ornatis, robusta, sublaevis ; capite subovali. Antennae breviusculae vel longiusculte, ad basin multum in- crassatae, 17-articulata3, praeter articulos quaternos priores brevissime hirsute, articulis propter priores longiusculis vel longis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (terni interiores plus vel minus coaliti) magni ; dens coxalis in latere nodulo armatus. Femora terna vel quina posteriora (ante pedes anales) ad apicem exteriorem spinulis binis vel spinula singula armata. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus ultimis (analibus) exceptis, calcare arraatus. Pedes anales breviusculi vel breves, incrassati vel crassi, in latere superiore femoris spinulis parvis binis vel spinula singula, in margine sup. interiore spinulis magnis binis vel ternis, angulo apicali in acu forte, acu- tum, in latere spinulis binis armatum producto, in latere inleriore spinulis sen is, in series ternas digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales prseter quatuor priores marginataa. Lamina ultima in medio alte carinata. Pleurae postica? sat amplae, sublaeves, densissime tenuiter porosae, in angulum minorem, ad apicem spinula singula armatum, product*, margine postico paulum obliquo, subrecto, inermi. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, angustiuscula, multum angustata, post late rotundata. Long. 145-175 mm. Hab. Brazil?, Charles Linden ; Amazon river, Brazil, Rev. J. C. Hetcher. 3. SCOLOPENDRA PRASINA. Scolopendra prasina C. L. Koch, Die Myriap., ii, p. 23, tab. lxxi, fig. 146. Kohlrauscb, Arch. f. Naturg. Jabrg., 47, p. 122. f Scolopendra puncticeps Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat Sc. Philad., 1861, p. 14. 1885.] LJO [Meinert. ?? Scolopendra punctiscuta "Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1861, p. 14. Flava vel flavo-brunnea, laminis dorsalibus prater laminam priraam et ultimain in margine postico viresceatibus, articulis exterioribus pedum posteriorum virescentibus ; sat robusta, tenuiter sparse punctata, laminis ventralibus lsevibus ; capite suborbiculari. Antennie breviusculae ad basin paulum incrassata?, 17-articulata?, pra?ter articulos quaternos priores dense gilvo birsuta?, carinulata?, articulis breviusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini interiores approximati vel coaliti, externi discreti), majores, truncati ; dens coxalis in latere nodulo majore instructus. Femora bina posteriora (ante pedes anales) ad apicem exteriorem spinu- lis binis, femora antecedentia spinula singula armata. Patella? bina? posteriores (ante pedes anales) ad apicem exteriorem spinula singula armata. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus ultimis (analibus) ex- ceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales breviusculi, sat incrassaii, in latere superiore femoris spinulis binis parvis, in margine sup. interiore rotundato spinulis senis majoribus, uncinatis, in margine inf. interiore rotundato spinulis binis minoribus, in latere inferiore spinulis septenis majoribus, in series ternas digestis, armati, in latere interiore articuli sequentis (patella?) spinulis quaternis minoribus, angulo apicali spinula singula instructo, armati. Lamina? dorsales prseter sex priores marginata?. Pleura? postica? ampla?, subkeves, densissime tenuiter porosa?, in angu- lum brevem, spinulis ternis magnis bamatis instructum, producta?, mar- gine postico leviter arcuato, spinula singula armato. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, latiuscula, multumangustata, post late rotundata. Long. 90-105 mm. Hob. Grenada, W. I., Peter Gelliman. B. Lamina prima dorsalis integra. 4. Scolopendra alternans. Scolopendra alternans Leacb, Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond., xi, p. 383. Scolopendra alternans, Grayi, complanata, incerta, multispinosa (mvltispi- nata) Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond.,' xix, p. 402-405. Scolopendru Sagroza Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 281. ? Scolopendra torquata Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Pbilad., 18G1, p. 13. Flavo-brunnea vel pra?sertim ante et post castanea, margine postico la- minarum dorsalium, antennis vel totis vel solummodo in latere inferiore articulorum priorum articulisque pedum exterioribus interdum obscure virescentibus ; robusta vel valde robusta, subkevis, laminis ventralibus sat obscure bisulcatis, capite suborbiculari. Antenna? longiuscula? vel PROC. AMER. PHILQS. SOC. XXIII. 122. Y. PRINTED DECEMBER 31, 1885, Meinert.] i-jQ. [Oct. 2, longse, ad basin paulum incrassatse, attenuate, 17-articulata?, propter arti- culos quinos priores dense brevissime hirsute, carinulata?, articulis longis. Dentes prosternales terni (interiores lati, obtusi), validi ; dens coxalis magnus, obtusiusculus, in latere interiore nodo vel denticulo obtuso armatus. Femora pedum penultimorum angulo, spinulis quinis vel senis armato, instructa ; pedum antepenultimorum ad apicem exteriorem spinulis binis vel spinula singula armata. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus ultimis (analibus) exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales longiusculi, crassiusculi, in latere superiore femoris spinu- lis ternis vel senis, majoribus vel minoribus, in series binas subdigestis, in latere sup. interiore spinis quaternis vel senis subseriatis, angulo postico acutiusculo spinis septenis vel octonis instructo, in latere interiore spinis senis vel novenis subseriatis vel in series binas digestis, in latere inferiore spinis septenis vel duodenis, in series ternas digestis, armati. Laruinse dorsales prater quinque vel septem priores marginatum Pleura; posticse minus am pise, subla?ves, densissime tenuissime porosse, in angulum acutiusculum, spinulis senis vel octonis parvis instructum, products, margine postico in obliquum subtruncato, paulum flexuoso, in medio atque ad apicem exteriorem spinulis parvis armato. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, angustiuscula, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 110-170 m.m. Hob. This species seems to be a very common one in the West India; yet in the collection of the Museum of Comp. Zool,, I have found only five specimens, viz : from Cuba, Mr. Trey, and also from Brazil. •"i. SCOLOPKNDIJA CKUDELIS. ticolopeudra crudeUs Kocli, Syst. d. Myriap. p. 170j Die Myriap., ii, p. 3(j, tab. lxxvii, lxxviii, rig. 158, 159. Porat, Sv. Vet. Akad, Hancll. Bib., B 4, No. 7, p. 7. Scolopendra lovgipex Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Pliilad., 2 ser., v, p. 26. Trans. Amer. Pbilos. Soc, xiii, p. Hi:!. Castanea vel fulva, antennis pedibusqueflavesceutibus, margine postico laminarum dorsalium interdum virescente ; robusta, subhevis, laminis ventralibus obscure bisulcatis ; capite subovali, immarginato. Antenna' longiuscuke vel long;e, ad basin paulum incrassatse, attenuate, 17-articu- latse, prseter articulos quinos priores dense brevissime hirsute, carinulatse, articulis longis, teretibus. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini interiores coaliti, truncati), validi ; dens coxalis magnus, in latere interiore denticulo majore armatus. Femora pedum penultimorum angulo spinulis quaternis vel senis in- 1885.] U5 [Meinert. structo, in latere superiore spiaulis parvis ternis vel spiuula singula armata ; pedum antepenultirnorum ad apicem exteriorem spinulis binis arrnata. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus ullimis (analibus) ex- ceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales longi, tenuiusculi, in margine sup. interiore femoris ro- tundato spinulis majoribus sedenis vel vicenis, in series quaternas sub- digestis, nodo apicali sat producto, spinulis septenis vel octonis majoribus instructo, in latere inferiore spinulis tredenis vel quatuordenis, in series ternas digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales praeter septem priores niarginatae. Pleurae posticae minus amphe, sublaeves, densissime tenuissime (poris majoribus intermixtis) porosae, in angulum majorem, obtusiusculum, spinulis senis instructum product*, margine postico in obliquum sub- truncato, paulum flexuoso, spinulis binis majoribus armato. Lamina ultima ventralis brevisucula, latiuscula, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 150 mm, Hab. Florida, Mr. Wurdemann ; Double-headed-shot Key (TJ. S. Coast Survey. Gulf Stream Exped.) ; Jeremie, Hayti ( F. C. Gray's fund). II. Femora pedum penultimorum ad apicem inermia. A. Lamina prima dorsalis pone marginem anticum in transversum profunde sulcata, a. Pedum ultimorum articulus primus tarsalis calcare armatus. 6. SCOLOPENDRA HEROS. Scolopendra lieros Girard, Marcy Rep. Explor. Red Riv., p. 272, tab. xviii. Wood, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 155. Porat, Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bih., B. 4, No. 7, p. 8. Scolopendra castqneiceps Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1861, p. 11. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, tab. i, fig. 7. Scolopendra polymorplia Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1861, p. 11. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 158. Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 114. Scolopendra Copeana Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phil., 2 ser., v, p. 27. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 165. ? Scolopendra my sieca Humbert et Saussure, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 2 ser., xxi, p. 157. Saussure et Humbert, Etud. s. Myriap., p. 130. Meinert.), lJb [Oct. 2, ? Scolopendra Azteca, Otomita, Maya, Talteca Saussure, Mem. Mex.Myriap., p. 124-126, tab. 5-6, fig. 41-43, 45. Saussure el Humbert, Etud. s. Myriap., p. 12R-129, tab. v, fig. 9, 10, 12, 14. Brunnea vel flavo-olivacea, capite cum lamina prima dorsali plus vel minus rufescente, pedibus antennisque flavescentibus, margine postico laminarum dorsalium ssepe virescente, in medio latius vel manifestus ; robusta vel sat robusta, sublaevis, laminis ventralibus manifesto bisulcatis ; capite suborbiculari, immarginato. Antennae longiusculie vel longa8, ad basin paulum incrassatae, attenuatae, 24-29 articulatas, praeter articulos senos vel denos brevissime hirsutae, articulis pluribus anterioribus brevibus vel breviusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini vel terni interiores plus vel minus coaliti), majores, obtusi ; dens coxalis magnus, acutiusculus, subinermis. Pedes anales longiusculi vel breviusculi, paulum incrassati, in latere sup. interiore femoris spinulis quaternis vel senis majoribus, in series binas digestis, angulo apicali in nodum longiorem, angustiorem, spinulis ternis vel septenis instructum, producto, in latere interiore spinulis binis vel ternis, in latere inf. interiore spinulis binis vel ternis, in latere inferiore spinulis quaternis vel septenis, in series binas digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales prceter octo piiores marginatse. Pleura? posticae amplae, subkeves. dense tenuiter porosae, in angulum breviorem vel longiorem, obtusiusculum, ad apicem spinulis ternis vel senis instructum, productae, margine postico sinuato, spinula parva ar- mato. Lamina ultima ventralis brevis, lata, valde angustata, post subtruncata vel latissime sinuata. Long. 100-130 mm. Hab. This species seems to be common through the most parts of North and Central America; thus I have seen specimens irom Westfield, N. York; near Mammoth Cave, Ky,; Key West; Alexandria, Ga., Anderson ; Seabrook Isl., Ga. ; Mobile, Ala. ; Springhill, Ala. ; Cap Florida, Wurdemann ; Galveston, Tex., Boll; Monteviaz, Mex., Palmer; mountain near St. Louis Potosi, Mex., E. Palmer; Panama; Guatemala, Van Patten; Porto Rico, Cardoge; San Diego, Cal. ; Guaymas, Gulf of Cali- fornia; Ft. M'Pherson, Neb.; Riley, Kansas, H. Biavat. 7. SCOLOPENDKA VIIUDIS. Scolopendra viridis Say, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Pbilad., ii, p. 110. Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Pbilad., 2 ser., v, p. 22. Trans. Amer. Pbilos. Soc, xiii, p. 159. Koblrauscli, Arcb. f. Naturg. Jabrg., 47, p. 112. 1885.] 1J< [Meinert. Scolopendra punctiventris Newport, Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., xiii, p. 100. Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond., xix, p. 38(5. Scolopendra parva Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1861, p. 10. Ochracea vel brunnea, lamina cephalica atque vitta lata dorsali srepe viridibus ; sat gracilis, manifesto sparse punctata, laminis ventralibus pro- funde bisulcatis ; capite subrotundata. Antenna; longiusculae, ad basin sat incrassatse, angustatse, 23-24 articulate, prater articulos senos priores brevissime hirsute articulis pluribus brevibus, longioribus interpositis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini interiores fere coaliti, exteriores magis discreti), minores ; dens coxalis sat magnus, obtusiusculus, inermis. Pedes anales breviusculi, paulum incrassati, in margine sup. interiore femoris rotundato spinulis quaternis majoribus, in series binas digestis, angulo apicali brevissimo, bifido vel spinulis ternis vel quaternis instructo, in latere interiore ante spina singula, in latere inferiore spinulis senis vel octonis, in series quaternas digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales prseter duodecim vel tredecim priores marginate. Pleura postica; ample, dense grossius porose, in angulum brevem, spi- nulis ternis vel quaternis instructum producta?, margine postico leviter sinuato, inermi vel spinula minima armato. Lamina ultima ventralis longiuscula, angustiuscula, multum angustata, post latissime sinuata. Long. 60 mm. Hab. Georgia, A. S. Allanson (an original specimen of this species). b. Pedum ultimorum arliculus primus tarsalis inermis. 8. Scolopendra occidentalis, n. sp. Ochracea vel brunnea, laminis dorsalibus prater primam atque altimam plus vel minus virescentibus ; subgracilis, sublevis, laminis ventralibus profunde bisulcatis ; capite suborbiculari. Antennae longiuscula?, ad basin valde incrassate, attenuate, 23-articulate, prater articulos quinos vel senos priores obscure hirsute, articulis breviusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini interiores approximati), majores ; dens coxalis mediocris, acutus, inermis. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales longi, graciles, in margine sup. interiore femoris spinulis quinis vel septenis minoribus, in series binas digestis, angulo apicali vix prominente, spinulis ternis vel quaternis instructo, in latere interiore spi- nulis ternis parvis, in latere inferiore spinulis quatuordenis vel sedenis, in series ternas digestis, armati. Lamina; dorsales prater sedecim priores marginate. Pleura; postice angustiuscula;, subrugose, sparse tenuiter porose, in an- Meinert.] ±.)b [Oct 2, gulum longius, ad apicem spinulis quaternis parvis in latere spinula singula instructurn, products?, margine postico leviter sinuato, spinulis binis parvis armato. Lamina ultima ventralis brevis, lata, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 50 mm. Hab. West Coast of Mexico, Capt. Goff (a single specimen). 9. SCOLOPENDRA TVOODII. Scolopendra inwquidens "Wood, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 162. Ochracea vel brunnea, antennis laminisque dorsalibus prseter primam atque ultimam sa?pe olivaceis vel virescentibus, linea media dorsali pallida, obscure marginata ; subgracilis, sublaevis, laminis ventralibus profunde bisulcatis ; capite subovali. Antennae breviusculre, ad basin paulum in- crassativ, 17-articulat;*, prater articulos octonos priores manifesto hirsutse, articulis brevibus. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini interiores plus vel minus coaliti), minores ; dens coxalis mediocris, ad apicem obscure carinatus. Pedum omnium articulus primus tarsalis inermis. Pedes anales breviusculi, sat incrassati, in margine sup. interiore femoris spinulis quinis majoribus, in series binas digestis, angulo apicali in spinam acutum, breviorem, simplicem vel bifidum producto, in latere inferiore spinulis senis vel septenis magnis, in series ternas digestis, armati. Laminre dorsales modo tres vel quatuor posteriores marginata-. Pleurae postica' sat amplse, rugosa1, sparsius grossius porosa^, in angulum longum, angustum, ad apicem spinis binis vel quaternis instructurn pro- duct*, margine postico in obliquum profunde sinuato, inerrui. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, latiuscula, valde angustata, post latissime sinuata. Long. GO mm. Mr. Wood has determined this species as Sc. ina^quidens Gervais, but I do not believe that this determination is right, and although the description of Gervais is very incomplete or incertain, yet his original specimen is said to exist in the museum at Paris, and so we may be sure that at some time this same specimen will be more completely described, and then Gervais' name will be attached to another species and not to that of which I am here treating. Therefore it might be better to alter the name at this time, and so I propose the name of Scolopendra Wootlii in honor of Dr. Wood, the first man who has made it clear how much the species of Scolopendra vary in the greater part of the characters, which we have been accustomed to be- lieve to be the most characteristic. 1885.] IJj [Meinert. Hab. Hilton Head, S. C, Dr. Greene; Beaufort, N. C, J. G. Shute ; Pennington's Gap, Lee Co., Va. ; I have seen specimens besides from Massachusetts, and other places in the United States. B. Lamina prima dorsalis integra. a. Pedum omnium articulus primus tarsalis inermis. 10. SCOLOPENDRA LONGISPINA, n. Sp. Ochracea vel brunnea, supra plus vel minus olivacea, linea media dorsali angusta pallida ; subgracilis, sublsevis, laminis ventralibus mani- festo bisulcatis ; capite subovali. Antennae breviusculae, ad basin sat in- crassatae, 17-19-articulatae, praeter articulos quaternos vel quinos priores brevissime birsuta% articulis breviusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini interiores approximati vel coaliti), majores ; dens coxalis in latere nodulis binis vel nodulo singulo armatus. Pedes anales breviusculi, plus vel minus incrassati, in margine sup. in- teriore femoris supra fere planiusculi spinulis term's vel quinis majoribus vel magnis, in series binas digestis, angulo apical i in spinam longiorem, bi- vel quadrifidam producto, in latere interiore spinulis quaternes vel septenis majoribus, in series binas digestis, in latere inferiore spinulis septenis vel novenis majoribus, in series binas digestis, ad basin spinulis ternis vel quinis, in seriem obliquam digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales modo tres vel sex posteriores rnarginatse. Pleurae posticae sat amplae, subrugosae, densius grossius porosae, in an- gulum longum, angustum, ad apicem spinulis quaternis vel quinis, in latere superiore spinulis binis vel quaternis, in latere exteriore spinulis binis vel spinula singula instruction product*, margine posticosubtruncato, spinula singula minore armato. Lamina ultima ventralis brevis, perlata, valde angustata, post late ro- tundata. Long. 60 mm." Hab. Maldonado, Brazil, Mr. T. G. Carey. 11. SCOLOPENDRA ChILENSIS. ? Scolopendra Chilensis Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 285. Ochracea, plus vel minus olivacea, pedibus pallidioribus ; gracilis, sub- laevis, laminis ventralibus leviter vel obscure bisulcatis ; capite subovali. Antennae longiusculae, ad basin paulum incrassata?, 17-18-articulatae, prseter articulos senos priores breviter birsutae, articulis prseter priores longiusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (bini interiores approximate, minores ; dens coxalis mediocris, simplex. Pedes anales longi vel elougati, graciles, teretes, in latere interiore Meinert.] -^0 [Oct. 2, femoris spinalis undenis niinoribus, in series ternas digestis, angulo apicali in spinam brevem, bifidam produclo, in latere inferiore ad marginem ex- teriorem spinulis undenis minoribus, in series binas digestis, armati. Lamina' dorsales modo quatuor vel sex posteriores marginatse. Pleurae posticse ampla?, subrugosse, sparsius tenuiter porosre, in angulum longum, angustam, subteretem, ad apicem spinulis quinque in latere ex- teriore spinulis binis instructum producta?, margine postico in obliquum subtruncato, spinula singula parva armato. Lamina ultima ventralis brevis, perlata, valde angustata, post brevius rotundata. Long.* 50 mm. Dr. Kohlrausch, 1. c, p. 125, has suggested that the Sc. Chi- lensis of Gervais may be a Connocephalus ; in reality the pres- ent species very nearty approaches that genus, but the structure of the lamina cephalica does not permit such a reference. Hub. Zalcuhana, Chili, Hassler Exped.; Cordova, Argent., Mr. Davis. b. Pedum plerorumque articulus primus tarsalis calcare armatus. 12. SCOLOPENDRA MORSITANS. Scolopenclra morsitans Kohlrauscb, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 104. Scolopendra morsitans, angulipes, f varia, platypoides, tigrina, Leachii, angusta, formosa, longicornis, tuberculides, Fabricii, ? Richards onii, Algerina Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc., Loud., xix, p. 378-387. Scolopendra Gervaisiana, Scopoliana, fulvipes, elegans, erythrocepJiala, bilineala, ? Togana, platypus Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 259-280. Scolopendra carinipes, Californica Saussure et Humbert, Etud. s. Myriap., p. 125-127, tab. v, fig. G and 8. Scolopendra pella, porpliyratainia Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1861, p. 13-15. Scolopendra morsitans Wood, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., xiii, p. 161. Scolopendra morsitans, ? Scopoliana, Gervaisiana, planipes, injesta C. L. Kocb, Die Myriap., i, fig. 33, 34, 46 ; ii, figs. 179, 180. Scolopendra picturata, intermedia, cognata, Alfzelii, LcacMi, attenuata, pilosella, chorocephala, Wahlbergi, sallatoria Porath, Ofvers. Vet. Akad. Forb., 1871, No. 9, p. 1144-1151. Scolopendra platypus, longicornis, cognata, impressa Porat, Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bih., 15. 4, No. 7, p. 11-13. Scolopendra Mossambica, ? brachypoda Peters, Pels. Mozamb. Zool., v, p. vj; 529, tab. xxxiii, figs. 1-2. 1885.] * -^1 [Meinert. Ocbracea vel brunnea, sa>pe plus vel minus olivacea, margine postico laminarum dorsalum srepissime, autennis pedibus posterioribus partim pleurisque ssepe virescentibus ; robusta vel minus robusta, sublasvis, la- minis ventralibus plus vel minus manifesto bisulcatis ; capite subovali. Antenna? longiuscuhe, ad basin paulum incrassat*, attenuata?, 17-22 artic- ulata?, prater articulos senos vel septenos priores brevissime hirsutoe, articulis mediis longiusculis. Dentes prosternales qnini vel rare quaterni (bini vel terni interiores plus vel minus coaliti), minores, obtusiusculi ; dens coxalis in latere nodulo parvo armatus. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus ultimis vel binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales breviusculi, plus vel minus incrassati (varissime longius- culi, vix incrassati), articulis binis prioribus deplanatis marginatis, in margine sup. interiore femoris spinulis quaternis vel quinis longis, in series binas digestis, angulo apicali in spinam longiorem, tri- vel quadrifi- dam producto, in latere inferiore spinulis senis vel novenis majoribus, in series ternas concinne digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales posteriores marginata?. Pleura? postica? lata?, sublaeves, dense porosse, in angnlum minorem, tri- vel quadrifidum producta?, margine postico fere in transversum leviter sinuato, spinula perparva armato. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, latiuscula, lateribus sinuatis, valde angustata, post brevius rotundata. Long. 90-130 mm. Perhaps this Scolopendra is the most inconstant species among all the Myriapods, but also very few animals are so com- mon and so widely distributed as Sc. morsitans ; yet through all its variations the short, flat, marginated pedes anales with three rows of larger spines on the under side of the femora seldom are missed. On the other hand, if we are not willing to believe in such variability, we are compelled to accept an infinity of species, such as most conspicuously v. Porat has made ; but I do not hesitate to say that a larger number of specimens from different parts of the world will bring us to follow the views which Dr. Wood and Dr. Kohlrausch have so forcibly declared with regard to the genus Scolopendra. Hab. This species is found in all tropical regions, whence it is often brought alive in ships to more northern localities. For this reason it will be of no value to enumerate all those from which specimens have been received by the Museum. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. Z. PRINTED DECEMBER 3l, 1885. Meinert.] — Uli [0ct# 2j 13. SCOLOPENDRA RUGOSA, n. Sp. Rufo-brunnea, pedibus antennisque flavis ; minus robusta, manifesto rugosa ; capite subcordiformi. Antenna? longiuscula?, ad basin valde in- crassata?, 18-articulata?, prater articulos senos vel septenos priores brevis- sime hirsuta?, articulis breviusculis. Dentes prosternales seni (bini interiores approximati), parvi ; dens coxalis ad apicem carinatus, in latere nodulo instructus. Pedum articulus primus dorsalis, pedibus binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales breviusculi, incrassati, in margine sup. interiore rotundato femoris spinulis ternis magnis, in trigonum digestis, angulo apicali in spinam breviorem, acutam, bifidam producto, in latere inferiore spinis binis magnis seriatis, armati. Lamina? dorsales prater septem priores marginata?. Pleura? postica? ampla?, subla?ves, densissime porosa?, in angulum mino- rem, bifidum producta?; margine postico in obliquum leviter arcuato, in- ermi. Lamina ultima ventralis longiuscula, latiuscula, valde angustata, post manifesto sinuata. Long. 120 mm. Hab. Hong-Kong, Capt. W. H. A. Putnam (one single speci- men). 14. SCOLOPENDRA SUBSPINIPES. Scolopendra subspinipes Koblrauscb, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg., 47, p. 96. ? Scolopendra subspinipes Leach, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xi, p. 383. Scolopendra siibspimpef, Placece, ? Gervaisii, ? Ceylonensis, planiceps, sexspi- nosa, lutea, orna ta, flava Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 389-392. Scolopendra subspinipes, Lucasii, rarispina, Sandwichiana, audax, ? New- portii Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 262-281. Scolopendra byssina, dinodon, parvidens, atra, plumbeolata Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad.. 1861, p. 10-14. Scolopendra byssina Wood, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 164. Scolopendra pulchra, mactans, ferrvginea, sulplmrea, gigantea, ornata G. L. Koch, Die Myriap., i, figs. 21, 79, 80, 92 ; ii, figs. 133, 134. Scolopendra elongata Porath, Ofvers. Vet. Akad. Fork., 1871, No. 9, p« 1143. Ochracea vel brunnea, prater caput laminamque primam dorsalem plus vel minus olivacea, margine postico laminarum dorsalium s;vpe virescente; robusta vel valde robusta, koviuscula, laminis ventralibus obscurius bisul- catis ; capite suborbiculari. Antenna? longiuscula?, ad basin paulum in- crassata?, attenuate, 17-20-articulata?, prater senos priores hirsute, artic- ulis plurimis longis. 1885.] -"d [Meinert. Dentes prosternales quini vel seni, rarissime quaterni vel septeni, minores, obtusiusculi ; dens coxalis magnus, ad apicein carinatus, in latere nodulo parvo instructus. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus ultimis vel binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales longiusculi, sat graciles, in margine sup. interiore rotun- dato femoris paulum deplanati spinulis snepissime binis majoribus, angulo apicali plus vel minus producto ssepissime bifido, in latere interiore spinula singula vel nulla, in latere inferiore spinulis binis, in seriem longitudina- lem digestis, armati. Laminae dorsales prater quatuor vel quinque priores marginato. Pleurae posticse minus ampla3, subrugosae, densissime porosa?, in angu- lum minorem, bifidum product*, margine postico leviter arcuato, inermi. Lamina ultima ventralis longiuscula, angustiuscula, valde angustata, post brevius rotundata. Long. 150-180 mm. "With regard to frequency, distribution and variability Sc. subspinipes comes near to Sc. morsitans, and therefore I can here refer to my preceding remarks. Hah. This species also is so common in all tropical and sub- tropical localities, that I shall not enumerate the many places from which the Museum has specimens. 15. SCOLOPENDRA De HAANII. Scolopendra De Haanii Brandt, Recueil, p. 59. Koblrauscb, Arch. f. Naturg. .Tahrg., 47, p. Scolopendra SiUietensis, ? inermis, ?concolor, Childreni, Har die ickii New- port, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 393-395. Scolopendra flimicolor, ? cephalica, t? gracilis (var.) "Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Pbilad., 1861, p. 12-13. Scolopendra bispinipes Wood, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 166. Scolopendra bicolor Humbert, Essai Myriap. Ceylan, p. 12. Scolopendra histrionica, horrida C. L. Koch, Die Myriap., i, figs. 44, 67. Scolopendra fissispina C. L. Koch, Verh. Zool. bot. Ges. z. Wien, xv, p. 891. Flavo-brunnea, supra stepe, prgesertim in margine postico laminarurn dorsalium, olivacea vel virescens (interdum laminis dorsalibus alternanti- bus totis olivaceis) ; robusta vel valde robusta, sublsevis, laminis ventrali- bus manifesto bisulcatis ; capite suborbiculari. Antennte longiusculie, ad basin valde incrassatte, attenuate, 18-articulatee, prreter articulos senos priores densissime brevissime hirsute, articulis plerisque longis. Dentes prosternales quini, rare quaterni, minores, obtusi ; dens coxalis magnus, obtusiusculus, nodo vel nodis obsoletis instructus. Meinert.] -v '^ [Oct. 2, Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales longiusculi vel longi, sat graciles, in margine sup. interiore femoris paulum vel sat deplanati spinulis biuis tenuibus, interdum evani- dis, angulo apicali in spinam longam angustatam, srepissime bifidam pro- ducts, armati. Laminae dorsales prater sex vel undecim priores marginatae. Pleurae posticae amplae, sublasves, densissime tenuius porosae, in angulum majorem, bifidum productae, margine postico in obliquum leviter arcuato, inermi. Lamina ultima ventralis longiuscula, angustiuscula, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 160-170 mm. Hah. This species also is spi'ead over the whole tropical and subtropical world, and I have seen specimens from : Society Is- lands, Mr. A. Garrett; Pennaculum, S. India, D. C. Scudder (var. : Sc. histrionica C. L. Koch) ; Africa, without further nar- rative of the locality ; San Francisco, Cal., T. Gr. Cary, Jr. (an original specimen of Dr. Wood's Sc. bispinipes). 1G. Scolopendra Lndica, n. sp. Olivaceo-flava, ante et post obscurior, supra saepe viridi-olivacea, capite cum antennis atque fascia media virescentibus, pedibus antennisque flavo- brunneis ; minus robusta, sublaevis, ante sparse leviter punctata, laminis ventralibus manifesto bisulcatis ; capite fere rotundato, post arcuatim sulcato, a lamina prima dorsali partim obtecta vel laminam illam obtegens. Antennae longiusculae, ad basin valde incrassatae, 17-19-articulata?, praeter articulos decern priores dense birsutae, articulis plurimis longiusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (exteriores valde discreti), magni, truncati (exteriores acuti) ; dens coxalis major, acutus. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis, pedibus binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales breviusculi, sat incrassati, deplanati, in latere sup. interiore femoris spinulis ternis parvis, angulo apicali brevi, bi- vel trifido, in latere interiore spinulis ternis vel quinis, in series binas digestis, in latere inf. interiore spinulis binis vel quaternis, in latere inferiore spinulis septenis vel octonis, in series binas digestis, armati. Lamin.-v dorsales modo tres vel quatuor posteriores marginatae. Pleura' posticae angustiusculee, subrugosa\ dense tenuiter porosae, in angulum breviorem vel longiorem, acutiusculum, trifidum, in latere spinula singula instructum producta>, margine postico in obliquum levis- sime sinuato, ad angulum exteriorem spinula parva arrriato. Lamina ultima ventralis brevis, latiuscula, lateribus rotundatis, valde angustata, post latissime rotundata vel rotundate truncata. Lonsr. 60 mm. 1885.] -J'',> [Meinert. In some respects, peculiarly with regard to the structure of the head, Sc. Indica is a connecting link between Scolopendra and the following genus Cormocephalus. Hab. The Rev. Mr. M. Carleton has collected this Scolopendra at some places in East India ; Koolloo, Himalaya; Ambala ; a station 70 miles S. W. from Ambala. 9. Gen. Cwrmoceplialus. Cormocephalus Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 419. Lamina cephalica a lamina prima dorsali partim obtecta vel libera (scuta dorsalia metameri tertii manifesta). Oculi ocellis 4. Antennae breviusculre, ad basin plus vel minus incrassatre, ante plus vel minus attenuate, 17-19-articulata?, articulis plerisque breviusculis. Labri fimbria longa, setis longis, densis, simplicibus. Labii processus subconici, barba e setis brevibus, densis, uncinatis facta ; palporum fimbria e setis brevibus, densis, manifesto uncinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis in latere interiore dentibus binis validis, acutiusculis armatus ; fimbria digitalis longior, setis longioribus, densis, parum uncinatis, unguem medium paulum superans. Mandibular ante 12-13 pectinibus juxta et pone lamellam dentatem coarctatis instruct*. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, robustum ; prosternum longeprom- inens, in dentes majores incisum ; pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertio parvis, interruptis. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula sat profunda, magna, angusta, manifesto triangula, longitudi- nalia, per paria longitudine decrescentia. Pleurae posticre infra porosse, in angulum majorem vel minorem pro- ducts}. Pedes anales breviusculi vel longiusculi, paulum incrassati, quinque- articulati, articulo primo (femore) subcarinato, spinigero, ungue sat parvo, parum. arcuato unguiculis binis armato vel simplice. I. Pedum analium unguis unguiculis binis armatus. 1. COKMOCEPHAXUS AFER, n. sp. Flavo-olivaceus, ante obscurior, linea media dorsali pallida notatus ; sat gracilis, ante robustior, sublrevis, larninis ventralibus manifesto bisulcatis ; capite subovato, truncate Antenna? breves, ad basin crassre, attenuata?, 17-articulat33, prater articulos octonos priores dense brevissime hirsutae, articulis brevibus vel breviusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (exteriores discreti), majores ; dens coxalis niagnus, acutus. Meinert.l "-^b [Oct. 2, Pedum articulus primus tar: J; pedibus binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armatus. Pedes anales breves vel breviusculi, sat incrassati, in latere sup. iutcriore femoris spinulis ternis majoribus, angulo in spinam bifidam producto, in latere interiore spinula singula, in latere inf. interiore spinulis ternis, in latere inferiore spinulis senis, in series binas obliquas digestis, armati. Lamina? dorsales prater ultimam immarginat.-e. Pleura posticpe lata3 vel latiuscula?, hrviuscula*, dense porosse, in angu- lum majorem, acutiusculum, trifidum products, margine postico in obli- quum levissime emarginato, ad angulum exteriorem spinulis binis parvis armato. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, latiuscula, lateribus rotundatis, valde angustata, post obscure sinuata. Long. 45 mm. Hob. Zanzibar, Cooke. 2. COKMOCEPHALUS AURANTIIPES. Scolopendra aurantipes Newport, Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., xiii, p. 99. Vormocephalus aurantiipes Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 420. Koblrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. Jahrg. , 47, p. 87, tab. v, fig. 18. Cormocephalus brevispinatus T . Koch, Verh. Zool. bot. Ges. z. Wien, xvii, p. 248. ? Cormocephalus obscurus, pallipes Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 421-424. Flavo-olivaceus, fusco trilineatus, pedibus flavis ; robustus, subla?vis, ante sparse leviter punctatus, laminis ventralibus bisulcatis ; capite sub- obovato, sa?pe libero (lamina basali magnam partem detecta). Antennse breviuscula3, ad basin paulum incrassata?, attenuate, 17-articulatse, prae.ter articulos quinos vel senos priores dense brevissimehirsuta?, articulis pluri- mis breviusculis. Dentes prosternales quaterni (exteriores discreti), magni obtusi ; dens coxalis magnus, trilaciniatus vel simplex. Pedum articulus primus tarsalis omnium inermis. Pedes anales breviusculi vel breves, incrassati, in latere sup. interiore femoris spinis binis majoribus, angulo in spinam srepe bifidam producto, in latere interiore spinula singula vel nulla, in latere inf. interiore spinulis binis, in latere inferiore cannula curvata, spinulis binis vel quaternis in- structa, armati. Lamina; dorsales prseter sex vel octo priores marginatse. Pleura; posticse latiuscula1, subheves, dense porosie, in spinam brevio- rem, acutiusculam, in apice bifidam, products, margine postico in obli- quum sinuato, inermi. 1885.] Ad i [Meinert. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, latiuscula vel lata, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 85 mm. Hab. Melbourne, Australia, H. Edwards. Also from America (viz : Guatemala, Ferd. von Midler ; Rio de Janeiro, Thayer Exp.), I have seen two specimens, which I cannot separate from this species. II. Pedum analium unguis inermis. 3. CORMOCEPHALTJS AMBIGUUS. Cormocephalus ambiguus Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 423. ? Scolopendra ambigua Brandt, Recueil, p. 63. Gervais, Walckenaer Ins. Apt., iv, p. 263. Flavus vel rufo-brunneus, ante et post rufescens ; sat robustus, sub- lap Ms, ante et post leviter punctatus, laminis ventralibus manifesto bisul- catis ; capite subovali, sa?pe libero (lamina basali magnam partem detecta). Antenna? longiuscuki?, ad basin crassiuseula?, attenuata*, 17- vel 18-artic- 'w*^e, prater articulos quinos priores dense brevissime birsutae, articulis imis longiusculis. entes prosternales quaterni (exteriores discreti), majores ; dens coxalis ;nus, bifidus. edum articulus primus tarsalis omnium inermis. 'edes anales longiusculi, crassiusculi, in latere sup. interiore femoris nulis binis minoribus, angulo in spinam majorem producto, in latere eriore spinula singula, in latere inf. interiore spinulis binis vel quater- ;, in latere inferiore cannula spinulis quinis vel senis instructa, armati. Lamina? dorsalis pra-ter octo priores niarginata?. Pleura? postica? lata?, sublaeves, dense porosa?, in angulum majorem, :utiusculum, bifldum products?, margine posticoin obliquum fere truncato, ?uleo singulo, perparvo armato. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, lata, valde angustata, post sinuate runcata. Long. 90 mm. Hab. Port Elizabeth, Cap. bon. sp., Hanson. 10. Gen. Opistlieniega. Opisthemega Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., new ser., v, p. 35. ? Thealops Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 410. Lamina cepbalica laminam primam dorsalem partim obtegens. Oculi nulli vel evanidi. Antenna? breves, ad basin incrassata?, ante subfiliformes, 17-articulata?, articulis brevibus vel partim longiusculis. Meinert.] —'Uo [Oct. 2, Labri fimbria in medio Lnterrupta, setis paucioribus, margine manifesto dentato. Labii processus product], attenuati, barba brevi e setis paucioribus, simplicibus facta ; palporum fimbria e setis longis, densis, uncinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis duplex (profunde fissus) ; fimbria digi- talis longa, setis longis, densis, uncinatis, unguem manifesto superans. MandibuUe ante 12 pectinibus juxta et pone lamellam dentatam coarc- tatis instructa. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, robustum, medium longe pro- ductum ; prosternum brevius vel longius prominens, ante in dentes majores vel minores incisum ; pedes prensorii articulo primo maximo, secundo et tertio parvis, interruptis, quarto solito multo minore. Lamina basalis partim detecta. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula sat profunda, magna, producte ovalia, fere perpendicularia, ante et post magis obliqua. Pleura? posticse infra pbrosae, magnam partem obtecta?, subtruncata. Pedes anales perbreves, percrassi, contigui (adapti) vel fere contigui. quinquearticulati, articulo primo (femore) inermi, ungue permagno, valido, parum arcuato, inermi. 1. Opisthemega spinicauda. Opisthemega spinicauda Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., new ser., v, p. 36. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 170. ? Cryptops posticus Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., ii, p. 112. ? Theatops postica Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 410. Ocliraceum, ante et post rufescens, minus robustum, sparse punctatum, lamina dorsali prima ante angulatim sulcata, laminis ventralibus fovea media impressis ; capite subovali. Antenna breviuscula, tenuiuscula', paulum attenuate, 17-articulatae, ad basin sublaves, ante sparsius longius hirsuta, articulis mediis longiusculis. Dentes prosternales bini vel terni, evanescentes ; dens coxalis perparvus, obtusus. Pedum tibia, articulusque primus tarsalis, pedibus binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armata. Pedes anales breves, crassati, fere contigui, adapti, margine sup. in- teriore atque inf. interiore acutis crenulatis, in latere sup. interiore femoris spinulis binis (posteriore majore), in margine inf. interiore spinulis binis vel ternis preparvus annati. Lamina? dorsalis prater ultimam immarginata. Pleura angusta, subrugosa, porosse, truncata, inermes. Lamina ultima ventralis longa, lateribus sinuatis, valde angustata, post levissime sinuata. Lons. 35 mm. 1885.] -jUJ [Meinert. I have seen only one specimen, which was labeled " Opisthe- mega postica Wood," and is among the large number of Myria- pods, which are designated as " types determined and described by Dr. H. Wood in his Myriapods of N. America"; but a little note was attached to this species : " the original catal. says spini- cauda," and actually it is to be referred to Opisthemega spini- cauda Wood and not to Op. postica Wood. Hab. Acapulco, Mexico, Mr. A. Agassiz. 2. Opisthemega crassipes, n. sp. Rufo-brunneum, subtus pallidius, pedibus antennisque flavis ; minus vel sat crassum, sparse leviter punctatum, annulo ultimo pedibnsque analibus densius, grossing punctatis lamina dorsali prima ante angulatim sulcata, laminis ventralibus sulco longitudinal! atque transversal! cruciatim ex- aratis; capite subovali. Antennae longiusculae tenuisculse, paulum attenu- ata% 17- vel 18-articulatse, prater latus superius articulorum quaternorum priorum, densius brevius hirsutae, articulis plurimis longiusculis. Dentes prosternales bini vel terni, majores ; dens coxalis parvus acutius- culus. Pedum tibia articulisque primus tarsal is, pedibus articis binisque pos- terioribus exceptis, calcare armati. Pedes anales perbreves, percrassi, contigui, adapti, deplanati, rnargine sup. interiore et inf. interiore carinatis, femore inermi. Laminae dorsales prater ultimam immargiuatae. Pleurae posticas angustae, sublseves, porosae, post late sinuata?, inermes. Lamina ultima ventralis longa, lata, lateribus parum sinuatis, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 36 mm. Hab. Jacksonville, Fla., J. A. Allen; St. Johns river, Fla. ; Pennington's Gap, Lee Co., Va. ; Bee Spring, Ky., F. Gr. San- born. 3. Opisthemega insui^are, n. sp. Flavum vel ochraceum, ante et post rufescens ; sat gracile, sublaeve, lamina ultima dorsali pedibusque analibus sparse leviter punctatis, lamina dorsali prima ante in formam ypsili sulcata, laminis ventralibus sulco longi- tudinali profundo foveam median} secante exaratis ; capite subovali. An- tenna? breviuscuke, paulum crassiuscuhe, attenuata?, 17 articulatae, ad apicem sparsius, brevissime hirsutaa, articulis mediis longiusculis. Dentes prosternalis bini vel terni, parvi ; dens coxalis perparvus, ob- tusus. Pedum tibia articulusque primus tarsalis, tibia pedum primorum pedi- busque binis posterioribus exceptis, calcare armata. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. S0C. XXIII. 122. 2A. PRINTED DECEMBER 31, 1885. Meinert.] ^1^ [Oct. 2, Pedes anales breves, erassi, fere contigui, margine sup. interiore et inf. interiore carinatis manifesto serrulatis, in latere sup. interiore femoris post spinula majore armati. Laminae dorsales prater ultirnam immarginatae. Pleurae posticae angustae, subrugulosae, porosse, post late sinuatae, inermes. Lamina ultima ventralis longa, lateribus sinuatis, valde angustata, post rotundate truncata. Long. 35 mm. Sab. Sandwich Islands, A. Garrett. i 11. Gen. Cryptops. Cryptops Leach, Zool. Miscell., iii, p. 42. Lamina cephalica laminam priniaui dorsalem saepissime partim obtegens. Oculi nulli vel evanidi. Antennae breviusculae vel longiusculae, subfiliformes, 17-articulatae, artic- ulis plurimis longis vel longiusculis. Labri fimbria perbrevis, margine in lacinias setiformes, ramosas vel denticulatas inciso. Labii processus parvi, subconici, barba brevissima, e setis paucis, sim- plicibus facta ; palporum fimbria brevis, e setis simplicibus vel parum un- cinatis facta. Palporum maxillarium unguis integer, inermis, gracilis, fimbria digitalis brevior, setis longis densis, valde uncinatis, unguem explens vel paulum superans. Mandibulae ante 7-10 pectinibus juxta et pone lamellam dentatam coarc- tatis instructae. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, subrobustum ; prosternum baud prominens (obtectum), inerme ; pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertio parvis, secundo parum interrupto, tertio integro. Lamina basalis saepe omnino evanida. Segmentum septimum absque spiraculis. Spiracula profunda, parva, producte ovalia, parum obliqua vel fere prona, per paria sensim latitudine parum, longitudine vix decrescentia. Pleurae posticre amplae, liberae, poros*, subtruncatae. Pedes anales elongati, crassiusculi, quinquearticulati, aculeati, articulo tertio et quarto infra serratis, cum quinto animali mortuo spastice inrk-xis, ungue longo, tenuiusculo, paulum arcuato, inermi. 1. Cryptops validus, n. sp. Ochraceus vel fulvus, pedibus pallidioribus ; robustus, ante sublsevia vel obscure punctatus, post obscure scabrosus, laminia dorsalibus prater binas priores et posteriores quadrisulcatis, laminis ventralibus prseter primam et ultirnam in crucem profunde impressis, posterioribus manifestius scabrosis; 1885.J ^11 [Meinert. capite subquadrato, angulis rotundatis, lateribus arete vnarginatis. An- tennae longiusculae, ad basin pauluni incrassatae, 17-articulatae, post aculeis brevioribus sparsissime vestitae, prajter articulos quaternos prkn-es mani- festo brevissnie birsutae, articulis plerisque breviusculis. Dentes prosternales desunt, margine antico aculeis viginti breviusculis instructo ; dens coxalis deest. Pedes aculeis validis, breviusculis densius vestiti. Pedes anales caduci. Laminae dorsales prseter ultimam irnniarginatae. Pleurae posticae latae, rugulosae, parum hirsutse, dense tenuiter porosae, margine postico subrecto, aculeis paucis perbrevibus instructae. Lamina ultima ventralis longiuscula, angustiuscula, lateribus rotun- datis, multum angustata, post breviter rotundata. Long. 45 mm. Hab. Zanzibar, Mr. Cooke. 2. Cryptops Patagonicus, n. sp, Fulvo-brunneus, pedibus pallidioribus ; gracilis, sublaevis, laminis dor- salibus prseter anticam tresque posteriores sulcis binis arcuatis exaratis, laminis ventralibus prseter tres posteriores in crucern manifesto impressis ; capite subcordiformi, post truncato, immarginata. Antennae breviusculae, ad basin vix incrassatse, 17-articulatae, post sparsissime longe aculeatae; praeter articulos ternos priores manifesto longius birsutae, articulis brevi- usculis. Dentes prosternales desunt, margine antico glabra : dens coxalis deest. Pedes aculeis longis ante sparse, post sparsissime vestiti. Pedes anales caduci. Laminae dorsales praeter ultimam immarginatae. Pleurae posticae angustiusculae, semiobtectae, aculeis paucis vestitae, poris paucis majoribus perforatae, margine postico subrecto, aculeis paucis tenuibus instructae. Lamina ultima ventralis breviuscula, lata, lateribus rotundatis, multum angustata, post latissime rotundata. Long. 18 mm. Hab. Puerto Bueno, Patagonia (one single specimen). 3. CRYrTOPS sulcatus, n. sp. Fulvo-brunneus, pedibus antennisque pallidioribus ; pergracilis, sub- laevis, laminis dorsalibus praeter anticam et ultimam sulcis senis (mediis obsoletioribus, exterioribus arcuatis) in corpore medio profundioribus ex- aratis, laminis ventralibus praeter anticam duasque posteriores in crucern (sulco longitudinali lato, profundo, manifestiore) impressis, capite subovali, post truncato, immarginato. Antennae breves, ad basin pauluni incras- satae, 17(16)-articulat8e, post densius longius aculeatae, sparse biisutae, ante sparsissime, brevius aculeatae, densius birsutae, articulis brevibus. Meinert.] %*■& [Oct. 2, Dentes prostcrnales desunt, margine antico glabro ; dens coxalis evan- idus. Pedes aculeis longis ante sparse, post sparsissime vestiti. Pedes anales caduci. Lamina; dorsales prseter ultimam immarginataB, Pleurae postica? latiusculae, subliberae, subglabra?, poris paucioribus sub- seriatis majoribus perforata;, margine postico subrecto, aculeis paucis tenui- bus instructse. Lamina ultima ventralis, breviuscula lata, lateribus subrectis, valde convergentibus, post latissime sinuata. Long. 15 mm. Hob. Bee Spring, Ky., F. G. Sanborn. 2. Fam. GEOPHILINI. Segmenta pedifera numerosa (31-173 paria), inter se aequalia. Pedes breves, tarsis integris. Antennas 14-articulatae. Oculi nulli. (Pedes prensorii articulo secundo et tertio semper in latere exteriore evanidis vel interrupts. ) Lamina basalis semper manifesta. Spiraculorum paria numerosa, segmentis numero paulo deteriora. 1. Gen. Mecistoceplialus. JfecistocepJialus (Newport) Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geopbil., p. 92. Corpus subdepressum, post plus vel minus angustatum. Lamina cepbalica tropbos pro parte minore obtegens, elongata ; lamina frontalis discreta ; lamina basalis angustata, lateribus ante paulum con-. vergentibus ; lamina i>r;L'basalis obteeta. Antenna', sat long*, vel long*, filif'ormes. Labrum liberum, tripartitum, parte media angustata, margine antico glabro. Labii sternum bipartitum ; processus producti ; palpi simplices, j)ro- ducti, integri. Palporum maxillarium unguis major vel minor. Mandibulse ante lamellis pluribus dentatis instructa?. Metameri quarti sternum subquadratum, ante dentibus duobus parvis armatum; prosternum baud prominens, obtectum ; pedes prensorii arti- culo ultimo (ungue) ad basin dente armato. Scutella spiraculifera parva, prsescutello pluries minora, iiostscutella magnitudinis fere scutelli, discreto ; scutella atque prsescutella media et interna evanida. Laminae dorsales manifesto bisulcatse. Pori ventrales inconspicui. Pori pleurales numerosi, in ventre et dorso siti. 1883.] **■*' [Meinert. Pedes analessexarticulati, inermes ; fernina? tenues veltenuissimi, maris modice incrassali, articulo primo parvo. Lamina ultima ventralis triangula, prsescutis discretis. Palpi genital es maris sat breves, biarticulati. 1. Mecistocephalus punctifrons. Mecistocephalus punctifrons Newport, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1842, p. 179, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 429, tab. 33, fig. 17. Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geophil., p. 97. Mecistocephalus heteropus Humbert, Essai Myriap. Ceylan, p. 19, tab. ii, fig. 4, 4a-4d. ? Mecistocephalus Guildingii Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xix, p. 429, tab. 33, figs. 18-19. Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geophil., p. 9G. Minus robustus, post manifesto attenuatus ; ochraceus vel fulvis, capite cum tropins laminaque prima dorsali dilute castaneis, antennis pedib usque flavis ; sparsissirne.breviter pilosus, pedibus densius pilosis. Pedes prensorii breviter vel brevissime, densius pilosi, flexi articulum primum antennarum explentes ; sternum multo latius quam longius (5 : 4), coxa paulo longius, margine antico in medio altesinuato, dentibus angularibus manifestis, acutis ; coxa dentibus binis magnis armata ; un- guis dente majore, setoso armatus. Lamina cephalica vix duplo longiorquam latior (fere 9 : 5), sparsissime foveolata, foveis sex sulcos duos posticos, breves explentibus, marginem anticum laminae basalis obtegens ; lamina basalis multo latior quam lon- gior (7 : 5). Antenna? breviusculae vel longiuscuhi?, articulis brevibus, primis sub- nodiformibus, paulum compressis. Lamina? dorsales subheves, prefer ter vel quatuor priores atque tot posteriores manifesto bisulcata? (5-20 obsolete foveolata?), pra?scutis ante- rioribus obtectis vel brevissimis, mediis atque posterioribus longis. Spiracula anteriora magna (antica maxima, subovalia, perpendicnlaria) subrotunda ; media et posteriora minuta, rotunda. Lamina? ventrales anteriores prseter primam impressione ypsiliformi notata?, posteriores in medio manifesto sulcata?, scabrosa?. Pedes paris primi perminuti ; ceteri sat longi, anteriores manifesto brevi- ores atque crassiores. Pleura? postica? sat vel parum amplae, densius pilosa?, poris minus nume- rosis, miuutis infra instructae, margine interiore late, breviter hirsuto ; lamina ultima ventralis triangula, lateribus subrectis, breviter hirsuta. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris valde longiores, paulo tenuiores, Meinert.] -jI4 [Oct. 2, breviter hirsuti, articulis prioribus sparsius (?) vel densius (^) breviter hirsutis. Pedes femina? pp. 49, maris 49. Long, femina? 52 mm., maris 50 mm. Lat. femina? 1.7 mm., maris 1.8 mm. Hab. The Rev. Mr. Carleton has presented eight specimens of this species, all from East India; Koolloo, near Himalaya; Am- bala; a station 70 miles S. W. from Ambala. 2. Mecistocephaltjs heros, n. sp. Eobustus, post valde attenuatus ; ochraceus, in dorso atque lateribus dense nigromarmoratus, capite cum trophis laminaque prima dorsali cas- taneis, antennis pedibusque flavis ; ante subglaber, post in ventre atque lateribus dense et breviter hirsutus, pedibus breviter pilosis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi articulum primum antennarum fere ex- plentes; sternum vix sesqui latius quani longius (10 : 7), coxa multo longius (fere 5 : 4), margine antico alte sinuato, simplice ; coxa dente obtuso armata, supra glabra ; unguis dente evanido armatus. Lamina cephalica vix duplo longior quam latior (9 : 5), sparsissime foveolata, foveis decim vel duodecim in duas series digestis, sulcum posti- cum, medium, brevem explentibus, marginem anticum laminae basalis obtegens ; lamina basalis bis vel ter latior quam longior (fere 5 : 2). Antenna; perlonga?, articulis ternis prioribus subclaviformibus, ceteris teretibus, longius vel perlongis. Lamina? dorsales subkeves, prater quatuor vel quinque priores atque tot posteriores manifesto bisulcata?, pnescutis anterioribus obtectis vel brevissimis, mediis atque posterioribus longis. Spiracula anteriora magna (anlica maxima), subovalia, perpendicularia ; media et posteriora minuta, rotunda. Lamina1 ventrales anteriores et media?, pra?ter duas anticas, impressione ypsiliformi notata? ; posteriores in medio sulcata1, sulco post sensim evan- escente. Pedes paris primi brevissimi ; ceteri sat longi, anteriores paulo breviores, manifesto crassiores. Pleurae postica? sat ampla?, dense pilosse, poris majoribus atque minori- bus, numerosis, subseriatis infra et supra instructa' ; latere interiore brev- iter hirsuto ; lamina ultima veutralis trapezoidea, lateribus subrectis, post breviter hirsuta. Pedes anales pedibus paris anteriores valde longiores, manifesto tcnui- ores, pilosi. Pedes maris pp. 49. Long, maris 83 mm. Lat. maris 4.5 mm. Hab. St. Mauritius Island, N. Pike. 3. Mecistocephaltjs bkeviceps, n. s;i. Sat robustus, post modice attenuatus; ochraceus, capite cum tropins 1885-1 s-il-O [Meinert. dilute castaaeo, antennis fulvis, pedibus flavis ; subglaber, pedibus setis sparse vestitis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi articulum primurn anteanarum non explentes ; sternum sesqui latius quam loagius, coxa vix sesqui longius (10 : 7), margine antico in medio alte sinuato, dentibus angularibus mani- festis ; coxa dente obtuso armata ; unguis dente rninuto armatus. Lamina cepbalica sesqui longior quam latior, foveolis pauois subseriatis impressa, marginem anticum laminae basalis obtegens ; lamina basalis (magnam partem obtecta) quater latior quam longior. Antennae breviusculae, articulis mediis longioribus. Laminae dorsales sublaeves, praeter primam atque posteriores leviter bisulcatae, praescutis anterioribus brevissimis, post sensim longioribus, posterioribus longis. Spiracula anteriora magna (antica maxima), subovalia, perpendicularia ; media et posteriora minuta, rotunda. Laminae ventrales anteriores praeter primam in medio sulco profundo vel post magis obsoleto, marginem attingente, exaratae, laminae posteriores sublaeves. Pedes paris primi breves ; ceteri sat longi, anteriores paulo breviores atque crassiores. Pleurae posticae sat amplae, hirsutae, poris majoribus atque minoribus, numerosis, subseriatis, infra et supra instructae ; margine interiore late hirsuto, lamina ultima ventralis triangula, lateribus subrectis, post breviter hirsuta. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris manifesto longiores, breviter- densius pilosi. Pedes maris, pp. 45. Long, maris 65 mm. Lat. maris 2.5 mm. Hab. Nantucket, Mass. 2. Gen. Geopli ilus. Geophilus (Leach) Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geophil., p. 58. Corpus depressum vel subdepressum, ante vix, post modice angusta- tum. Lamina cepbalica troplios non obtegens ; lamina frontalis saepissime discreta, lamina basalis minus lata vel angusta, lateribus ante convergenti- bus ; lamina pnebasalis partim vel omnino obtecta. Antennae plus vel minus longae, filiformes vel subfiliformes. Labrum liberum, tripartitum, in dentes vel lacinias incisum. Labii sternum integrum ; processus sat parvi ; palpi biarticulati, in latere exteriore processibus binis longis instructi. Palporum maxillarium unguis major vel minor. Mandibular ante lamina singula pectinata instructae. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, lineis duabus chitineis abbreviatis vel integris fultum, margine antico inermi vel dentibus duobus parvis in- Meinert.] -Jl" [Oct. 2, structo ; prosternum Laud prominens, obtectuni ; pedes preusorii articulo ultimo (ungue) dente basali ssepissime armato. Scutella spiraculifera parva vel minima, praescutello pluries minora, postscutello majore discreto ; scutella atque praescutella media et interna evanida. Lamina? dorsales manifesto bisulcata? ; praescuta plurima magna vel longa. Pori ventrales plus vel minus manifesti. Pori pleurales multi vel pauciores aut nulli, in ventre solummedo vel etiam in dorso siti. Pori anales duo aut nulli. Pedes anales sexarticulati, ungue armati aut inermes ; feminae graciles, maris graciles vel minus incrassati, articulo primo parvo. Lamina ultima ventralis angusta aut lata, praescutis a lamina discretis, inter se coalitis aut non coalitis. Palpi genitales maris biarticulati. A. Lamina frontalis discreta. (Pori anales nulli). 1. Geophiltjs cephaltctjs. Geopldlus cepJialicus Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., new ser., v, p. 44. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 178. Geophilus tois Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., new ser., v, p. 44. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 180. Sat robustus ante vix, post paulum angustatus ; testaceus, capite cum tropins antennisque dilute brunneo, striga lata, duplice, interrupta, ob- scura in dorso medio notatus ; sublaevis. Pedes prensorii l»ves, flexi margiuem frontalem spatio majore vel magno superantes ; sternum simplex oblingulatum, multo latius quam longius (fere 4 : 3), coxa duplo longius, margine antico in angulum, in medio sinuatum.producto, inermis ; coxa inermis ; unguis incurvus, dente minuto vel rninimo, nodiformi armatus. Lamina cephalica fere* a>que longa ac lata, la'vis, subovalis, angulos priores lamina' basalis obtegens ; lamina basalis quater latior quam longior, ante alte emarginata, lamina praebasali parvam partem libera. Antenna' breviusculse vellongiuscuhe, articulis prioribus prseter primuin longiusculis. Laminae dorsales foveis binis longitudinalibus impressse, manifesto bi- sulcata', pr83scutis anterioribus brevibus, mediis et posterioribus longis. Spiracula rotunda, anteriora (prsesertim antica) magna ; media et posteriora minuta. Laminae ventrales in medio sulcata', in angulis fovea porosa vel rotunda (in angulis prioribus) vel transversali (in angulis posterioribus) obsolete exaratse. 917 1885.] *Jil IMcinert. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores alque tenuiores, anteriores quam posteriores paulo breviores atque crassiores. Pleura? postica? parum inflala?, glabra?, foveis binis obliquis, poriferis, semiobtectis instructa? ; lamina ultima ventralis perlata, lateribus valde convergentibus; rotundatis. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo longiores, paulo (femina?) vel valde (maris) crassiores, subglabri (feniina?) vel hirsuti (maris), ungue valido armati. Pedes femina? pp. 51-53 ; maris 49. Long, femince 47 mm. ; maris 37 mm. Lat. feminas 2 mm/ Bab. Fred. Co., Mel., P. R. TThler (the type of Dr. Wood) ; Michigan, E. P. Austin ; Charl. Co., McL, Bryant. One speci- men was labeled Zanzibar (an recte ?). 2. Geofhilus mordax, n. sp. Minus robustus, post manifesto angustatus ; fulvus, pedibus Mavis ; subglaber, pedibus pilis brevioribus sparsissime vestitis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi marginem frontalem vix attingentes ; sternum lineisduabuscbitineis, integi'is fultum, sesquilatius quam longius, coxa fere duplo longius (20 : 11), margine antico longe producto, in medio alte sinuatus, inermis ; coxa inermis ; unguis valde curvatus, dente minimo, obtuso armatus. Lamina cephalica ferea^que longa ac lata, subglabra, subovalis, angulos priores laminae basalis obtegens ; lamina basalis ter lalior quam longior, lamina pmebasali partem minimam libera. Antennas longiuscula1 vel longae, articulis prioribus prater primum longiusculis, articulo ultimo articulos duos antecedentes conjunctos longi- tudine procul requante. Lamina? dorsales subla?ves, manifesto bisulcatse. Spiracula anteriora ovalia vel subovalia, perpendicularia, magna vel permagna, per paria sensim magnitudine decrescentia ; media et posteriora rotunda, minuta. Lamina ventrales anteriores sulco medio, profundo, abbreviato areaque postica transversali, porosa, media? et posteriores sulco minus profundo, integro exarata\ Pedes paris primi ceteris paulo breviores atque tenuiores, anteriores quam posteriores paulo breviores atque crassiores. Pleura? postica? vix inflate, subglabra?, poris denis vel duodenis magnis, subseriatis instructa? ; lamina ultima ventralis minus lata, lateribus sub- rectis, manifesto convergentibus. Pedes anales caduci. Pedes femina? pp. 51. Long. 25 mm. Lat. 1.2 mm. Hab. The specimen had no more distinct indication than U. S. A. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2b. PRINTED DECEMBER 31, 1885. Meinert.] -olo [Oct. 2, B. Lamina frontalis coalita. a. Pori anales nulli. 3. Geophilus marginaus, n. sp. Sat robustus, post manifesto angustatus ; flavus, capite cum trophis laminaque prima dorsali dilute brunneo, striga lata, duplice, interrupta, obscura in dorso medio notatus, lateribus maculis obscuris, densis irroratis ; pilis longioribus densius vestitus. Pedes prensorii pilis brevibus densius vestiti, flexi articulum primum antennarum spatio majore superantes ; sternum simplex, multo latius quam longius (fere 7 : 6), coxa vix sesqui longius, margine antico in medio pro- funde sinuato, dentibus duobus brevibus armato ; coxa dente majore, obtuso armata ; unguis parum curvatus, dente magno, acuto armatus. Lamina cepbalica vix sesqui longior quam latior (fere 10 : 7), sat grosse, densius punctata, sulcis duobus longioribus obsolete impressa, lateribus subrectis, post paulum convergentibus, marginem anticum laminae prae- basalis obtegens ; lamina basalis ter vel quater latior quam longior (fere 25 : 7). Antenna? longa? vel perlonga?, articulis prioribus prater primum longis vel perlongis, articulo ultimo duobus antecedentibus conjunctis paulo breviore. Laminae dorsales sat grosse punctata?, foveis binis longis manifesto exarata?, obscurius bisulcata?, pnescutis anterioribus brevissimis, mediis et posterioribus longiusculis. Spiracula bina priora ovalia, perpendicularia, magna vel permagna, cetera rotunda, minuta vel perminuta. Lamina? ventrales profunde sulcata?, anteriores areis vel foveis quaternis porosis exaratae. Pedes paris primi ceteris multo breviores atque tenuiores, anteriores quam posteriores paulo breviores, multo crassiores. Pleura? postica? parum inflatse, sparse piloses, poris numerosis, parvis, seriatis in ventre et dorso instruct* ; lamina ultima ventralis angusta, lateribus subrectis, manifesto vel valcle angustatis. Pedes anales (maris) pedibus paris anterioris paulo longiorcs, valde cras- siores. ungue evanido. Pedes maris pp. 01. Long. 4G mm. Lat. 1.6 mm. Hab. Key West, Fla. (one single specimen). 4. Geophilus tjrbicus, n. sp. Minus robustus, post multum attenuates ; fulvns ; pilis brevibus spar- sissime vestitus, pedibus pilis longioribus sparse vestitis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi marginem frontalem procul attingentes; sternum simplex, sesqui latins quam longius, coxa plus sesqui longiorcs (5 : 3), margine antico in nudio late sinuato, dentibus duobus obtusis, 1885.] -jIJ [Meinert. evaniclis armato ; coxa dente parvo, acuto armata ; unguis valde curvatus, dente minuto, obtuso armatus. Lamina cephalica fere aeque longa ac lata, subglabra, sulcis duobus transversalibus ante marginem posticuni impressa, lateribus rotundatis, manifesto convergentibus, angulos priores laminae basalis obtegens. mar- gine postico late sinuato ; lamina basalis vix quater latior quam longior, lamina praebasali partim libera. Antenna? breviusculae, dense hirsutoe, articulis prioribus praeter primum longiusculis, articulo ultimo artieulos duos antecedentes conjunctos longi- tudine manifesto superante. Laminae dorsales foveis binis obsoletis exaratae, obsolete bisulcatse, prae- scutis anterioribus et posterioribus brevibus, mediis longis vel perlongis. Spiracula rotunda, anteriora parva, per paria sensim magnitudine de- crescentia, media et posteriora perminuta. Laminae ventrales anteriores sulco medio profundo notatae, mediae et posteriores sulcis ternis obsoletioribus, post sensim evanescentibus ex- aratae. Pedes paris primi ceteris subaequales, anteriores posterioribus subaequa- les. Pleurae postica? paulum inflatse, pilis longioribus sparse vestitae, poris vicenis magnis vel permagnis (posticis) instructae ; lamina ultima ventra- lis angusta, lateribus subrectis, parum convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo breviores, multo crassiores, ungue magno armati. Pedes feminae pp. 41. Long. 22 mm. Lat. 1.1 mm. Hab. Cambridge, Mass., E. Schwarz (one single specimen). 5. Geophilus Georgianus, n. sp. Sat gracilis, post manifesto attenuatus ; ochraceus vel flavus, capite cum trophis dilute brunneo, pedibus testaceis ; subglaber, pedibus pilis long- ioribus, sparsis vestitis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi marginem frontalem spatio magno superantes ; sternum simplex, multo latius quam longius (7 : 6), coxa vix duplo longius (20 : 11), margine antico in medio late sinuato, inermi ; coxa dente evanido armata ; unguis curvatus, dente minuto armatus. Lamina cephalica multo longior quam latior (9 : 7), pilis paucis, brevi- bus vestita, sulcis duobus longis ante marginem posticum obsolete im- pressa, subovalis, marginem anticum laminae basalis obtegens ; laminae basalis pars libera plus duplo latior quam longior (7 : 3). Antennae longae, in latere exteriore dense pilosae, articulis prioribus praeter primum longis, articulo penultimo articulis duobus antecedentibus conjunctis manifesto breviore. Lamina? dorsales foveolis binis longitudinalibus obsolete notatae, mani- festo bisulcatae, praescutis longiusculis vel longis, posterioribus paulo longioribus. Melnert.] ^i^M [Oct. 2, Spiracnla rotunda, anteriora magna, per paria sensim magnitudine de- crescentia, media et posteriora minuta. Lamina? ventrales anteriores in medio profunde sulcata?, pone sulcum area transversali, angusta, porosa notata?. Pedes paris primi ceteris multo breviores atque tenuiores, anteriores posterioribus paulo breviores atque crassiores. Pleura? postica? parum inflata?, poris singulis, validis, obtectis. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris valde longiores, manifesto crassi- ores, pilis brevibus, sparsis vestiti, ungae evanido armati. Pedes feuiina? pp. 61. Long. 34 mm. Lat. 0.9 mm. Hah. Georgia (one single specimen). b. Pori anales parvi. 6. Geophilus occidentalis, n. sp. Sat gracilis, post manifesto angustatus ; ocbraceus, capite cum tropbis dilute brunneo, antennis flavis ; subglaber, pedibus longe, sparse pilosis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi articulum primum antennarum fere ex- plentes ; sternum simplex, a?que longum ac latum, coxa sesqui longius, margine antico in medio alte sinuato, angulis integris ; coxa dente obtuso armata ; unguis dente nodiformi, minore armatus. Lamina cepbalica vix sesqui longior quarn latior, post paulum angus- tata, foveolis minutis, sparsis, subseriatis sulcisque duobus brevibus, obso- letis notata ; lamina basalis libera, fere ter latior quam longior. Antenna? long;e, articulis plmimis longis. Lamina' dorsales sublaeves, manifesto bisulcata?, pra?scutis anterioribus perbrevibus, mediis longis, posterioribus longiusculis. Spiracula praeter antica parva, rotunda ; antica subovalia. Lamina? ventrales anteriores profunde sulcata?, media1 atque posteriores obsolete impressa?. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores, anteriores quam posteriores paulo crassiores. Pleura? postica> vix inflata?, poris novenisvel denis liberis, majoribus vel minoribus atque singulo magno, distante instructs ; lamina ultima ven- tralis angustiuscula, longa, post manifesto angustata. Pedes anales subglabri, crassiusculi, ungue evanido. Pedes maris pp. 73. Long. 39 mm. Lat. 1 mm. Hab. San Francisco, Cal., T. G. Cary, Jr. (one single specimen.) c. Pori anales magni. 7. Geophilus IIuronicus, n. sp. Sat vel minus robustus, post manifesto angustatus; flavus. capite cum tropins dilute brunneo, pedibus testaceis vel flavis; subglaber, pedibus pilis longioribus sparse vestitis. 18S5.] ^X [Meinert. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi marginern frontalem spatio majore vel minore superantes ; sternum simplex, multo latins quam longius (fere 6 : 5), coxa plus sesqui longius (5 : 3), margine antico altius sinuato, inermi ; coxa dente evanido armata ; unguis dente minuto armatus. Lamina cephalica paulo longior quam latior (fere 10 : 9), sparse minus grosse punctata, sulcis duobus sat longis obsolete exarata, subovalis, par- tem majorem lamina? basalis obtegens ; lamina basilis ter latior quam longior. Antenna? longa? vel perlonga?, articulis pra?ter prirnurn et ultimos longis, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedentibus conjunctis manifesto breviore. Lamina? dorsales fovea media, obsoleta exarata?, manifesto bisulcatse, praescutis anterioribus brevissimis vel brevibus, mediis et posterioribus longiusculis vel brevibus. Spiracula rotunda, anteriora magna per paria sensim magnitudine de- crescentia ; media et posteriora rninuta. Lamina? ventrales manifesto sulcata?, anteriores et media? pone medium area magna, transversali, porosa vel integra (in anterioribus) vel bipartila (in mediis) notata?. Pedes paris primi ceteris multo breviores atque tenuiores, anteriores posterioribus vix breviores, paulo crassiores. Pleura? postica? vix inflata?, pilis brevibus sparse vestita?, poris senis vel octonis majusculis, maximam partem obtectis instructa? ; lamina ultima ventralis lata, lateribus subrectis, paulum convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris valde longiores, i?aulo (femina?) vel multo (maris) crassiores, ungue majore (femina?) vel minore (maris) armati. Pedes femina? pp. 55-57; maris 53-55. Long, femina? 33 mm.; maris 30 mm. Lat. femina? 1 mm.; maris 1.2 mm. Hab. I have seen four specimens of this species; the two were labeled Massachusetts, and the two others " N. Ensfl." 3. Gen. Scolioplanes. Scolioplanes (B. & M.) Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i.^Jeopliil., p. 48. Corpus subdepressum, ante et post attenuatum. Lamina cephalica trophos non omnino obtegens ; lamina frontalis dis- creta aut coalita ; lamina basalis transversalis ; lamina pra?basalis in duas lamellas partita, obtecta aut detecta. Antenna? plus vel minus longa?, flliformes, hirsuta?. Labrum liberum, tripartitum, partis media? margine antico in dentes multos inciso. Labii sternum integrum ; processus sat magni ; palpi integri vel bi- partite shnplices. Palporum maxillarium unguis parvus. Mandibula? ante lamina singula pectinata instructa?. Meinert.] 222 ^Oct. 2, Metarneri quarti sternum integrum, simplex ; prosternum haud prom- inens, obtectum ; pedes prensorii articulo ultimo (ungue) dente basali valido armato. Scutella spiraculifera sat magna, praescutello duplo vel triplo minora, postscutello minore discreto ; scutella et praescutella media et interna evanida. Laminae dorsales laeves ; praescuta longiora vel breviora. Pori ventrales parvi vel minimi, in aream transversalem, posticam dis- positi. Pori pleurales plures vel pauciores. Pori anales duo, parvi. Pedes anales sexarticulati ; feminae gracilis, attenuati, maris percrassi vel crassi, hirsuti, articulo primo parvo. Lamina ultima ventralis longa, lateribus postconvergentibus, praescutis discretis. Palpi genitales maris integri. I. Lamina frontalis discreta. 1. SCOLIOPLANES BOTHRIOPUS. f Strigamia bothriopus Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Pbilad., new ser., v, p. 46. Trans. Amer. Pbilos. Soc, xiii, p. 182. f Strigamia flava Sayer, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., viii, p. 109. Wood, Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc, xiii, p. 183. Minus robustus, ante et post multuin attenuatus ; [fulvus, capite cum tropins dilute brunneo; pilis brevibus sparse vestitus, pedibus pilis breviusculis densius vestitis. Pedes prensorii pilis breviusculis sparse vestiti, flexi marginem fronta- lem spatio magno non attingentes ; sternum stricte cordiforme vix duplo latius quain longius (fere 9 : 5), coxa bis vel ter longius (5 : 2), margine antico in medio alte sinuato, inermi ; coxa inermis ; unguis parum curva- tus, dente valido, acuto armatus. Lamina cepbalica paulo latior quam longior (,10 : 9), pilis longioribus sparse vestita, laeviuscula, lateribus rotundatis, manifesto divergentibus, margine postico a lamina basali obtecta ; lamina basalis bis vel ter latior quam longior (fere 5 : 2). Antennae longiuscula\ articulis prioribus prater primum longiusculis, articulo ultimo articulos duos antecedentes conjunctos longitudine sub- aequante. Laminae dorsales Ueviusculae, praescutis longiusculis vel longis. Spiracula rotunda, magna vel majuscula, anteriora posterioribus paulo majora. Laminae ventrales fovea media, obsolcta ureaque magna, duplice, porosa ante marginem posticum notatee. 1885.] ^" [Meinert. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores, anteriores et posteriores suba?quaies. Pleurae posticse parum inflatse, pilis longioribus sparse vestitse, poris tredenis vel sedenis (prseter ununi distantem in series rotundatas digestis) parvis et majusculis instructor ; lamina ultima ventralis angusta, lateribus curvatis, convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo breviores, vix (feminse) vel valde (maris) crassiores, ungue parvo armati. Pedes feminse pp. 51 ; maris 47-51. Long, feminse 24 mm. ; maris 35 mm. Lat. maris 1.3 mm. The specimen of the Museum of Comp. Zool. was labeled " Strigamia fulva Say," determined by Dr. Wood. Sab. Massachusetts. 2. SCOLIOPLANES CHI0N0PHILTJS. ? Strigamia chionophila Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., new ser., v, p. 50. Trans. Amer. Pbilos. Soc, xiii, p. 189. Minus robustus, ante et post multum attenuatus ; fulvus, capite cum trophis dilute brunneo ; pilis brevibus sparse vestitus, pedibus pilis long- ioribus sparse vestitis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi marginem frontalem non attingentes ; sternum subcordiforme, paulo latius quam longius (10 : 9), coxa bis vel ter longius (5 : 2), margine antico in medio late sinuato, inermi ; coxa in- ermis ; unguis valde curvatus, dente valido, aculiusculo armatus. Lamina cephalica multo latior quam longior (5 : 4), subglabra, lsevius- cula, lateribus paulum rotundatis, manifesto divergentibus, margine postico subrecto, laminam basalem plus vel minus obtegente ; lamina basalis plus ter latior quam longior (fere 10 : 3). Antenna? breviusculae, articulis prseter primum el ultimum breviusculis, articulo ultimo articulos duos antecedentes conjunctos longitudine sub- aequante. Laminse dorsales lseviusculse, prsescutis anterioribus brevibus vel brevis- simis, mediis et posterioribus longis vel perlongis. Spiracula rotunda, anteriora parva, media et posteriora minuta. Laminoe ventrales foveis ternis in seriem mediam transversalem digestis plus vel minus manifesto exaratse. Pedes parium trium priorurn per paria sensim longitudine manifesto crescentes, ceterorum anteriores posterioribus subaequales. Pleura? posticse coxiformes, subglabrse, poris novenis vel tredenis in obliquum subseriatis, magnis et permagnis instructae ; lamina ultima ven tralis triangula.* Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris subarquales, ungue minore (feminai) vel paulo crassiores, ungue longo (maris). Meiuert.] ££&. [Oct. 2, Pedes feminre pp. 39 : maris 41. Long, femimc 22 rum. ; maris 25 mm. Lat. maris 1.3 mm. Hab. Cambridge, Mass., Mr. E. Schwarz. 3. SCOLIOPLANES ROBUSTUS, n. Sp. Sat robustus, ante et post vix angustatus ; fulvus, capite cum trophis la- minaque basali et prima dorsali dilute brunneo ; subglaber, pedibus pilis brevibus sparsissiuie vestitis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi marginem frontalem spatio magno non attingentes ; sternum subcordiforme, plus sesqui latius quam longius (5 : 3), coxa plus duplo longius (9 : 4), margine antico in medio alte sinuato, inermi ; coxa inerrnis ; unguis parum curvatus, dente valido, acuto armatus. Lamina cepbalica paulo latior quam longior (10 : 9), subglabra, Levins - cula, lateribus rotundatis, manifesto divergentibus, margine postico a lamina basali vix obtecto ; lamina basal is quam lamina cepbalica duplo brevior, bis vel ter latior quam longior (5 : 2). A-ntenna; longa}, articulis prioribus praeter primum longis, articulo ulti- mo articulis duobus anteoedentibus conjunctis manifesto breviore. Laminae clorsales lamusculse, pmescutis breviusculis. Spiracula rotunda, sat magna. Lamina} ventrales fovea media oblonga, post sensim obsoletiore, areisque duabus duplicibus, porosis ante marginem posticum exaratse. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores, anteriores quam posteriores paulo breviores et crassiores. Pleura? postica} modice inflata}, glabrae, poris vicenis magnis et per- magnis, subseriatis instruct* ; lamina ultima ventralis angusta, triangula, parva. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo breviores atque tenuiores, ungue majusculo armati. Pedes feminse pp. 53. Long. 40 mm. Lat. 2.1 mm. Hab. This species had no more distinct locality than N. A.? 4. SCOLIOPLANES EXUL, U. Sp. Robustus, ante valde post parum angustatus, fulvus ; pedibus flavis ; pilis brevissimis sparse vestitus, pedibus pilis brevioribus sparse vestitis. Pedes prensorii pilis brevissimis et brevibus densius vestiti; flexi margi- nem frontalem fere attingentes ; sternum subcordiforme, plus sesqui latius quam longius (5 : 3), margine antico in medio alte sinuato, inermi ; coxa inerrnis; unguis curvatus, dente valido, acutiusculo armatus. Lamina cephalica seque longa hc lata, pilis brevibus sparse vestita, laeviuscula, subovalis, margine postico subrecto, laminam praabasalem fere totam obtegente ; lamina basalis quam lamina cephalica vix ter brevior, plus ter latior quam longior. 1885.] ~^° [Meinert. Antennfe longa?, subfiliformes, articulis prioribus prseter primum longis, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedeutibus conjunctis manifesto breviore. Laminae dorsales Iseviusculse, prascutis breviusculis. Spiracula rotunda magna vel permagna, anteriora per paria sensim mag- nitudine decrescentia. Lamina? ventrales anteriores in medio profunde sulcata?, fbveis binis obsoletioribus, lateraliims areisque binis magnis, porosis ante marginem posticum exaratse, media? et posteriores in medio obsoletius (ante) vel manifestius (post) sulcata?, ante marginem posticum area permagna, transversali, porosa notata'. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores et tenuiores, anteriores et posteriores suba?quales. Pleura? postica? coxilbrmes, sat inflata?, pilis brevioribus densius vestita, poris denis magnis, partial obtectis instructse ; lamina ultima ventralis brevis, transversalis, lateribus subrectis, valde convergentibus. Pedes analcs pedibus paris auterioris manifesto longiores, valde in- crassati, compressiusculi, articulo ultimo quam penultimo multoties minore, conico, ungue evanido armato. Pedes maris pp. 65. Long. 4j mm. Lat. 2.2 mm. Hob. This new species was labeled "No Loc." II. Lamina frontalis coalita. 5. SCOLIOPLANES PAUVICEPS. ? Strigamia parviceps Wood, Trans. Amer. Pliilos. Soc, xiii, p. 187. Minus robustus, ante multum post manifesto angustatus ; flavus, con- color, vel ante et post fulvus ; glaber. Pedes prensorii glabri, flexi marginem frontalem procul attingentes; sternum vix duplo latius quam longius (fere 9 : 5), coxa duplo longius, margine antico in medio rectangulatim inciso, inermi ; coxa inermis ; un- guis parum curvatus, dente valido, acuto armatus. Lamina cepbalica fere aque longa ac lata, glabra, lavis, lateribus ro- tundatis, manifesto divergentibus, margine postico rotundatu, laminam prabasalem maximam partem obtegente ; lamina basalis quam lamina ccphalica duplo brevior, bis vel ter latior quam longior (tere 5 : 2), lamina prsebasali in lateribus paulum libera. Antenna longiusculse, articulis prioribus prseter primum longis, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedeutibus conjunctis multo breviore. Lamina dorsales laviuscula, prascutis anterioribus breviusculis vel brevibus, mediis et posterioribus longiusculis. Spiracula rotunda, anteriora permagna vel magna, per paria sensim magnitudine decrescentia ; media et posteriora mediocria. Lamina ventralis prater primam et ultimam foveis septenis porosis, PKOC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2c. PRINTED JANUARY 21, 1886. Meinert.] ^U [Oct. 2, quarum singula rotunda in medium sena?que in binas series laterales digesta?, exarata?. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores et tenuiores ; priores per paria sensim longitudine crescentes. Pleura? postica? manifesto inflatse, glabra?, poris fere tricenis parvis et magnis, subseriatis instructa? ; lamina ultima ventralis angusta, lateribus subrectis, multum convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris manifesto longiores, paulo tenu- iores, ungue parvo armati.- Pedcs femina? pp. 75. Long. 47 mm. Lat. 1.7 mm. A specimen, which was said to be a t}^pe of Dr. Wood, was labeled " Strigamia bidens Wood." Hab. The locality was not more distinct than " jNT. A. Loc. ?" 6. SCOLIOPLANES ? LONGICORNIS, n. Sp. Sat gracilis, ante valde post manifesto angustatus ; fulvus, antennis pedibusque flavis ; subglaber, pedibus pilis longioribus sparse vestitis. Pedes prensorii subglabri, flexi margined frontalem fere attingentes ; sternum subcordiforme, sesqui latius quam longius, coxa fere duplo longius, margine antico in medio alte sinuato ; coxa inermis ; unguis longus, tenuis, curvalus, dente sat magno armatus. Lamina cepbalica multo longior quam latior (11 : 8), glabra, la?vis, lateribus rotundatis, manitesto convergentibus, margine postico marginein anticum lamina1 pnvbasalis obtegente ; lamina basalis quam lamina cepba- lica bis vel ter brevior (2 : 5), plus duplo latior quam longior (9 : 4), la- mina prrcbasali magnam partem libera. Antenna^ ad basin fere contigua1, longse vel perlonga\ filiformes, artic- ulis prioribus pra?ter primum perlongis, articulo ultimo articulos duos an tecedentes conjunctos longitudine suboequante. Lamina? dorsales la?viuscula?, prrescutis anterioribus breviusculis, mediis et posterioribus longiusculis. Spiracula rotunda, magna vel mediocria, anteriora paulo majora, per paria sensim magnitudine decrescentia. Laminae ventrales sulcata?, foveis binis exarata1, sulcis foveisque post sensim obsoletioribus. Pedes paris primi ceteris vix breviores et tenuiores, anteriores posteri- oribus paulo crassiores, vix breviores. Pleura; postiea? parum inflatse, subglabne, poris vicenis magnis, biseri- atis instrueta1 ; lamina ultima ventralis minus lata, lateribus subrectis, manifesto convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris multo longiores, vix crassiores, ungue magno armati. Pedes feminse pp. 107. Long. 65 mm. Lat. 1.2 mm. Perhaps, or rather probably, this species ought to constitute a 18S5.] <2iAi [Melnert. new genus, but solely I have bad for investigation one single spe- cimen, and therefore I have not been able to put the animal and particularly the parts of the mouth to the necessary microscopi- cal examination. Hob. Also the species was labeled " No locality." 4. Gen. Himantarium. Hlmantarium (Koch) Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geophil., p. 21. Corpus depressum vel subdepressum, lincare vel ante et post levissime angustatum. Lamina cephalica trophos obtegens ; lamina cephaliea discreta aut coalita ; lamina basalis latissima, transversalis, lateribus post convergen- tibus vel subparallelis, lamina praebasalis evanida. Antenna? curtae, crassa?, attenuata?. Labium liberum, integrum, dentatum. Labii sternum integrum ; processus parvi ; palpi integri vel biarticulati, extrorsum dente magno armati. Palporum maxillarium unguis minor. Mandibular ante laminis pectinatis pluribus atque lamella dentata in- structse. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, lineis chitineisduabus fultum ; pro- sternum baud prominens, obtectum ; pedes prensorii ungue inermi. Scutella spiraculifera parva, praescutello duplo vel pluries minora, pos- scutello parvo discreto ; scutella atque prascutella media et interna mani- festa. Laminae dorsales obsolete bisulcatae, subglabrae vel scabrosae ; pnvscuta breviuscula vel longiuscula. Pori ventrales in omnibus fere vel in pluribus laminis in aream denni- tam coarctati. Pori pleurales saepissime permulti, Interdum pauciores, obtectivel nulli; pleura? inflatse, inteidum coxiformes. Pori anales nulli. Pedes anales inermes, sexarticulati ; feminae graciles, subflliformes, sub- nudi, maris paulo crassiores, breviter birsuti. Lamina ultima ventralis plus vel minus triangula, proescutlsevanidis vel discretis. Palpi genitales maris manifesto biarticulati. Lamina ultima dorsalis laevis, simplex. Lamina frontalis coalita. 1. Himantarium insigne, n. sp. Ptobustum, ante et post manifesto angusta!um ; olivaceum vel luridum; glabrum. Pedes prensorii glabri, tlexi marginem frontalem procul attingentes; Meinert.] -"^" [Oct. 2, sternum plus duplo latius quam longius (7 : 3), coxa sesqui longius, mar- gine antico ia medio late sinuato, inerrai ; coxa inermis ; unguis valde curvatus, inermis. Lamina cephalica subsemicircularis, vix sesqui latior quam longior (10 : 7), glabra, laeviuscula, margine posiico latissimerotundato, marginem anticum medium lamina basalis obtegente ; lamina basalis quam lamina cephalica plus quater brevior, quater vel quinquies latior quam longior (fere 9 : 2). Antenna1 breves, ad basin contignae, incrassatae, manifesto attenuatae, articulis praeter ultimum transversalibus, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedentibus conjuuctis multo longiore (4 : 8). Laminae dorsales laeviusculse, foveis binis lateralibus, obsoletis exarata-, praescutis longiusculis. Spiracula subovalia, paulum obliqua, mediocria, anteriora posterioribus paulo majora. Lamina: ventrales praeter primam et ultimam pone medium area trans- versali, porosa instructae. Pedes paris primi ceteris paulo breviores atque tenuiores, anteriores et posteriores subrequales. Pleura? postic* coxiformes, non inflatae, integne ; lamina ultima ventralis parva, transversalis, lateribus subrectis, paulum convergentibus, margine postico angulatim sinuato. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo breviores, manifesto tenui- ores, inermes. Pedes feminre pp. 77. Long. 103 mm. Lat. 4 mm. Hah. Koolloo, Rev. Mr. Carleton. 2. HlMANTARIUM IsfDICUM, n. Sp. Sat robustum, ante multum, post paulum angustatum ; fulvum vel flavum, glabrum, pedibus pilis brevibus sparsissime vestitis. Pedes prensorii glabri, flexi marginem frontalem spatio magno non attingentes ; sternum duplo latius quam longius, coxa duplo longius, mar- gine antico in medio late sinuato, inermi ; coxa inermis ; unguis valde curvatus, inermis. Lamina cephalica aque longa ac lata, glabra, laeviuscula, lateribus rotundatis, manifesto divergentibus, margine postico vix rotundato mar- ginem antieum laminae basalis obtegente ; lamina basalis quam lamina cephalica plus quater brevior, quater vel quinquies latior quam longior. Antenna' breves vel perbreves, ad basin distantes, crassa1 attenuata1, articulis prater ultimum transversalibus, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedentibus conjunctis manifesto longiore. Lamina' dorsales laeviusculae vel obsolete rugulosa\ praescutis anteriori- bus brevibus vel breviusculis, mediis et posterioribus longis vel longius- culis. Spiracula rotunda anteriora magna, per paria sensim maguitudine pau- lum decrescentia, media et posteriora parva. 1885.] ^-J [Meinert. Laminae ventrales pra?ter primam et ultimam impressione lineari, trans- versali, porosa notatae. Pedes paris primi ceteris paulo breviores atque tenuiores, anteriores pos- terioribus paulo crassiores. Pleura? posticae coxiformes, pilis brevissimis sparse vestitse, integrae ; lamina ultima ventralis sat parva, lateribus rectis, parum convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris naulto longiores, aut vix (feminae) aut valde (maris) crassiores, articulo ultimo quam penultimo paulo longi- ore, inerrnes. Pedes feminae pp. 67 ; maris 67. Long, feminae 45 mm.; maris 53 mm. Lat. maris 2.2 mm. Hah. Koolloo, Rev. Mr. Carleton. 3. HlMANTARIUM T-EXIOPSE. Strigamia tceniopsis Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Soc. Philad., new ser., v, p. 48. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. xiii, p. 185. Minus gracile, ante et post paulum angustatum ; fulvum vel tlavum ; glabrum. Pedes prensorii glabri, flexi marginem frontalem fere attingentes ; stern- um fere duplo latius quam longius, coxa fere sesqui longius, margin e an- tico in medio late sinuato, inermi ; coxa inermis ; unguis curvatus, inermis. Lamina cephalica multo latior quam longior (fere 4 : 3), glabra, lavius- cula, margine postico subrecto, marginem anticum laminae basalis obte- gente ; lamina basalis quam lamina cephalica plus ter brevior (fere 3 : 10), quater latior quam longior. Antennae longiusculae, ad basin distantes, paulum incrassata, manifesto attenuatae, articulis prioribus prseter primum longiuscul.s, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedentibus conjunctis manifesto breviore. Lamina dorsales laeviusculae, praescutis anterioribus breviusculis, mediis et posterioribus longiusculis. Spiracula subovalia, perpendicularia, anteriora magna, per paria sensim magnitudine paulum decrescentia, media et posteriora minuta. Laminae ventrales anteriores area majore, subovali, transversali, porosa, mediae et posteriores area minore vel parva, rotundata, porosa pone medium exarata. Pedes paris primi ceteris paulo vel vix breviores, anteriores posterioribus manifesto crassiores, paulo breviores. Pleura postica parum inflatae, glabra^, integrae ; lamina ultima ventralis mediocris, lateribus rotundatis, multum convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris vix longiores, manifesto tenuiores, inerrnes. Pedes feminae pp. 143. Long. 130 mm. Lat. 2.4 mm. Hdb. San Diego, Cal. Meinert."! ^\J [Oct. 2, 4. HlMANTAKIUM LATICEPS. Strigama laticeps Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., new ser., v, p. 49. Trans. Anier. Philos. Soc. xiii, p. 186. Gracile, ante et post leviter angustatum, ochraceum, glabrum. Pedes prensorii glabri, flexi marginem frontalem fere attingentes ; sternum oblingulatum, plus duplo latius quam longius (9 : 4), coxa vix duplo longius (fere 9 : 5), margineantico in medio sat alte sinuato, inernii ; coxa inermis ; unguis paruni curvatus, inermis. Lamina cepbalica multo latior quam longior (4 : 3), glabra, la?vis, sub- pentagona, partem anteriorem media m lamina? basalis obtegens ; lamina basalis, quoad liberam, quam lamina cepbalica quater brevior, quinquies latior quam longior. Lamina? dorsales obsolete bisulcata?, area media paulum depressa, prae- scutis breviusculis vel longiusculis. Spiracula rotunda, anteriora magna ; media et posteriora parva. Laminae ventrales prater primam et ultimam area angusta, transversali, porosa in medio vel post sensim marginem posticum proprius exarata?. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores, anteriores posterioribus manifesto crassiores. Pleura? postica? parum inflata?, glabra1, foveis ternis magnis, semiobtec- tis, porosis instructa? ; lamina ultima ventralis sat lata, post angulatim sinuata, profunde sulcata, lateribus rectis, valde convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo breviores, valde crassiores, inermes. Pedes maris pp. 81. Long. 76 mm. Lat. 1.4 mm. Hab. Texas, Chas. Stolley (the type of Mr. Wood). 5. Gen. Orplinaeus. Orphnceus Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geopbil., p. 17. Corpus subdepressum, ante et post minus angustatum. Lamina cepbalica tropbos plus vel minus obtegens ; lamina frontalis coalita ; lamina basalis latior, lateribus post paulum divergentibus ; lamina pmebasalis evanida. Antenna? subteretes, curta?, paulum attenuate. Labrum liberum, integrum, dense dentatum. Labii sternum integrum ; processus breves ; palpi integri, extrorsum processis birds mcmbranaceis instructa?. Palporum maxillarium unguis sat magnus. Mandibula- ante laminis pectinatis quaternis vel quinis instruct;!'. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, transversale, simplex ; prosternum baud prominens, obtectum ; pedes prensorii ungue inermi. Scutella spiraculifera magna, fere magnitudinis ^nvscutelli, postscutello majore discreto ; scutella atque pra'scutella interna evanida. 1885.] -^"1 [Meinert. Laminae dorsales leviter vel levissime scabrosae, bifoveolatse ; prsescuta rnajora. Pori ventrales ia plagas quaternas digesti. Pori pleurales nulli. Pori anales nulli. Pedes anales inermes, pseudo-septemarticulati, pleuris coxas simulanti- bus, hirsuti ; feminae sat graciles, attenuati, maris aliquanto crassiores. Lamina ultima ventralis lata, obtusa, praescutis discretis. Palpi geni- tales maris manifesto biarticulati. 1. Orphn^eus lividus. OrphncBus lividus Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geophil., p. 19. Minus robustus, ante et post paulumangustatus ; ochraceus vel lividus, vitta media, duplice, latiore, fusca in dorso plus vel minus manifesto notatus. Pedes prensorii glabri, fiexi marginem frontal em spatio magno non attingentes ; sternum plus duplo latius quani longius (fere 11 : 5), coxa plus duplo longius (7 : 3), margine antico in medio late siuuato, inermi ; coxa inermis ; unguis curvatus, inermis. Lamina ceplialica multo latior quam longior (fere 5 : 4), glabra, laevius- uula, lateribus rotundatis, manifesto divergentibus, margine postico sub- recto, marginem anticum lamina? basalis obtegente ; lamina basalis quam lamina ceplialica plus duplo brevior (fere 3 : 7), vix ter latior quam longior (fere 11 : 4). Antennas breves vel perbreves, ad basin distantes, crassae, attenuatae, articulis praeter ultimum transversalibus, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedentibus conjunctis paulo breviore. Laminae dorsales leviter scabrosae foveis ternis, media multo majore et obsoletiore, plus vel minus manifesto exaratae, praescutis brevibus. Spiraculaovalia, obliqua, anteriora magna, per paria sensim magnitudine paulum decrescentia ; media et posteriora parva vel minuta. Laminae ventrales praeter primam et sa^pe ultimam fovea media vel foveis ternis in seriem transversalem digestis notatre, poris in plagas quaternas magnas dispositis. Pedes paris primi ceteris vix breviores atque tenuiores, anteriores et posteriores subaequales. Pleurae posticae vix inflates, glabrae, integra1 ; lamina ultima ventralis parva, transversalis, lateribus rectis, valde convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo breviores, vix (feminae) aut aliquanto (maris) crassiores, inermes. Pedes feminae pp. 71-79 ; maris 71. Long, feminae 85 mm.; maris 50 mm. Lat. feminae 2.75 mm. Hab. Sandwich islands, Society islands, J. M. Barnard ; As- cension islands, South sea ; Zanzibar, Mr. Cooke. Meinert.l ^Z |oct. 2, 2. Orphn^us Brasiliensis. OrpluKcus Brasiliensis Meinert, Myriap. Mus. Haun. i. Geopliil., p 20. Minus vel sat robustus, ante multum post paulum angustatus, ocbraceus vel pallide lividus, capite ciun tropins laminaque basali dorsalique ultima fulvo vel brunneo, anlennis fulvis, maculis fuscis, in series plures digestis, notatus ; subglaber. Pedes prensorii glabri, flexi marginem frontalem magno spatio non attingentes ; sternum ter latius quam longius, coxa sesquilongius, margine antico in medio leviter sinuato, inermi ; coxa inermis ; unguis curvatus, inermis. Lamina cepbalica manifesto latior quam longior, glabra, la?viuscula, lateribus rotundatis, paulum divergentibus, margine postico subrecto, marginem anticum laminae basalis obtegente ; lamina basalis quam lamina cephalica plus duplo brevior (9 : 20), ter latior quam longior. Antenna? breves, ad basin distantes, crassa?, attenuate, articulis praeter ultimum transversalibus, articulo ultimo articulis duobus antecedentibus conjunctis paulo longiore. Laminae dorsales bi- vel trisulcata?, sulco medio latiore, obsoletiore, foveis binis lateralibus notatae. Spiracula ovalia, anteriora obliqua, magna, per paria sensim magnitudine decrescentia ; media et posteriora prona, parva. Lamina' ventrales fovea vel area media, post sensim paulo majore atque obsoletiore impressa?, lateribus porosis. Pedes paris primi ceteris manifesto breviores, anteriores posterioribus manifesto crassiores, vix breviores, medii paulo longiores. Pleura* postica? vix inflatae, glabra?, integra? ; lamina ultima ventralis sat parva, lateribus subrectis, valde convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris paulo breviores, vix (feruina') aut aliquanto (maris) crassiores, inermes. Pedes femina? pp. 75-85 ; maris 67. Long, femina? 80 mm. ; maris 47 mm. Lat. femina1 2.1 mm. Hah. Rio de Janeiro, Thayer Exped. ; Panama; Poloon, Oc- cidental Dept., Nicaragua, Mr. McNiel. G. Gen. Notipliilides. Notiphilides Latzel, Myriap. oesterr. ung. Mon., p. 20. Corpus depressum, ante et post angustatum. Lamina cepbalica trophos non obtegens ; lamina frontalis coalita ; la- mina basalis lata, lateribus post paulum divergentibus ; lamina pnebasalis evanida. Antenna' subdepressee, curtae, parum altenuata1. Labrum coalitum integrum, margine antico interne dense, externa sparsim uentato. Labii sternum integrum ; processus breves, perlati, subconici ; palpi lati, integri, extrorsum processibus binis longis instructi. 1885.J Add [Meinert. Palporum maxillarium unguis in marginibus- interioribus in clentes plures incisus. Mandibular ante laminis pectinatis quaternis instructs. Metameri quarti sternum integrum, transversa^, simplex ; prosternum baud prominens, obtectum ; pedes prensorii coxa inermi. Scutella spiraculifera magna, prsescutello paulo minora, postscutello majore discreto ; scutella et pnescutella interna manifesta. Laminae dorsales bisulcata? ; prsescuta brevia. Pori ventrales minimi, in marginem anticum et posticum digesti, incon- spicui. Pori pleuralis nulli. Pori anales nulli. Pedes anales inermes, pseudo-sexarticulati, pleuris coxas simulantibus, feniince subgraciles, parum attenuati, subnudi, maris parum incrassati atque attenuati, subnudi. Lamina ultima ventralis transversalis, praescutis nulles discretis. Palpi genitales maris manifesto biarticulati. 1. NOTIPHILIDES MaXIMILIANI. NotipMlus Maximiliani Humbert et Saussure, Rev. et Mag. Zool., 2 ser., xxii, p. 205. Saussure et Humbert, Etud. s. Myriap., p. 141, tab. vi, figs. 22, 22d, 22v. Pobustus, ante et post manifesto angustatus; brunneo-olivaceus, glaber. Pedes prensorii glabri, flexi marginem frontalem procul attingentes ; sternum ter latius quam longius, coxa duplo longius, margine antico in medio late sinuato, inermi ; coxa biennis ; unguis inermis. Lamina cepbalica multo latior quam longior, lrevis, subovalis, margine postico a lamina basali obtecto ; lamina basalis quater latior quam longior. Antenna; breviusculre vel breves, attenuate, articulis prater ultimum transversalibus, articulo ultimo articulos duos antecedentes conjunctos longitudine suba?quante. Lamina? dorsales manifesto scrobiculata?, pra?scutis brevissimis. Spiracula subovalia, obliqua, anteriora majora, per paria sensim magni- tudine decrescentia ; media et posteriora minora. Lamina? ventrales praeter sulcos binos lateralibus maximam partem porosa?, impressione media, angusta, simplice notatse. Pedes paris primi ceteris multo breviores, paulo tenuiores, anteriores posterioribus sub«quales. Pleura; posticre coxiformes, integra? ; lamina ultima ventralis parva, transversalis, lateribus subrectis, multum convergentibus. Pedes anales pedibus paris anterioris manifesto breviores, multo cras- siores, kiermes. Pedes feminse pp. 97 ; maris 85. Long, feminse 90 mm. ; maris 55. Lat feminse 3.7 mm. Hah. Guatemala, v. Patten. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2D. PRINTED JANUARY 21, 188G. Cope.] ^0± [0ct. 16i On the Structure of the Brain and Auditory Apparatus of a Theromorphous Reptile of the Permian Epoch. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 16, 1SS5.) The following observations are made on a part of a skull of one of the Diadectidse (Pelycosauria with transverse molar teeth*), which is accom- panied by several vertebrae and other fragments of the skeleton, of a single individual of undetermined species. A few characters are derived from skulls of two allied species, Diadectes phaseolinus and Empedias molaris Cope, which, like the first named specimen, were derived from the Permian formation of Texas. A cast of the brain chamber was obtained, thanks to the skill of my assistant, Mr. Geismar, first in the elastic mate- rial patented by Bendernagel & Co., of Philadelphia, for the manufacture of printers inking rolls ; and afterwards in plaster of Paris, in a mould made from the elastic cast. The brain case in the Diadectidre differs from that of the Clepsydropidae much as that of the Varamidse differ from those of other Lacertilia. That is, it is continued between the orbits, so as to enclose the olfactory lobes of the brain within osseous walls. These wralls are thin ; especially at the interorbital region, and in the specimen the anterior extremity is so far imperfect as to leave the form of the anterior fundus in doubt. The brain in reptiles, as is well known, does not fill tightly the cranial chamber as is the case with the Mammalia, there being a wadding of con- nective tissue, with interspaces filled with lymph and fat, between it and the cranial walls. In the present species the postfrontal part of the cranium is so contracted that there could have been but little space of this kind, and the superior walls are clearly impressed by the surfaces of the middle brain and the cerebellum. The form of the inferior surface of the brain posterior to the fifth pair of nerves cannot be determined from the specimen examined, owing to the absence of the basioccipital and basi- sphenoid bones. The conformation of the cranial walls requires preliminary notice. In the first place the vestibule of the ear can only have been separated from the brain by a membranous septum, as is the case in the Protonopsis hor- rida\ (Menopoma). In clearing out the matrix no trace of osseous lamina could be detected on either side, and the edges of the huge foramen thus produced are entire, and present no broken edges. Anterior to the vesti- bule, the prootic bone has a small extension, terminating in a vertical border. In front of this is the huge vertical foramen through which issues the trigeminus nerve, which is even larger than that found in the Testudi- nata and Crocodilidai. The anterior border of this foramen is formed by * For a definition of this family and the included genera, see Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 18.S0, p. 45. fSee Journal Academy Philadelphia, 1SU6, p. 105, where the characters of the skull in the Urodela are pointed out. 1885.J 2o5 LCope- the probable alisphenoid, whose posterior edge is nearly parallel with the anterior border of the prootic, sloping forwards as it descends. Tbe basi- cranial axis is thin at their union on the middle line below, and, thickening forwards, is excavated by rather small conical fossa. Anterior to the fossa is a smaller impressed fossa, and on either side of it, each lateral wall is excavated into a shallow fossa wbich descends towards it. The frontopa- rietal fontanelle is of extraordinary size. 1. The Brain. Wben the superior border of the medulla oblongata at the foramen mag- num is placed horizontally, the axis of the brain ascends at an angle of 45° towards the frontoparietal fontanelle. The superior surface, anterior to the foramen magnum, is subquadrate in outline, the angles being trun- cated, and directed anteriorly, posteriorly and laterally. A posterior con- striction connects it with the medulla ; and an anterior one defines the middle brain and hemispheres. Each lateral truncated angle represents the foramen of the trigeminus nerve. The space thus bounded is divided into two nearly equal areas by a transverse groove, which extends from the posterior edge of one of these foramina to the other. The posterior of these I suppose to represent the cerebellum, and the anterior the optic thalami. The cerebellar surface indicates that, as in many lizards, the cerebellum is simple, and very slightly convex. Anterior to the foramen trigemini, the brain contracts so as to have a transverse diameter scarcely more than one-third its vertical diameter. The cast at a point twice as far in advance of the cerebellar line as the fore and aft width of the cerebellum, rises to fill the frontoparietal foramen, forming a mass which represents the huge pineal sac or epiphysis. The proportions of this body are even greater than they are in any of the exist- ing Lacertilia, and it has a greater transverse diameter than the middle brain inferior to it. Its posterior border is at right angles to the line con- tinued forwards from the superior border of the medulla oblongata at the foramen magnum. At its posterior base a flat horizontal process, as wide as the brain at this point, extends posteriorly in a corresponding fossa of the superior cranial wall. Its posterior margin occupies a transverse groove of the superior wall between the superior and inferior plates. Each lateroposterior angle is produced, and may represent the foramen of exit of a narrow canal which appears to perforate the lateral wall and issue beneath the roof of the temporal fossa. A larger projection of each side of the base of the epiphyseal mass occupies a large foramen of the lateral wall, which has the superior wall for its superior border. This may only repre- sent a vacuity of the wall, but the fossa at the posterior base of the epi- physis has greater significance. What this is I am at present unable to ascertain. Below the epiphysis the transverse diameter of the brain is about one- fourth the vertical, not including a short inferior prominence. The latter is small and conical, and is situated below the center of the epiphysis Cope.] ^ob [Oct. 16, when the cerebellar surface is placed horizontally, or in front of it, when the medulla at the foramen is placed horizontally. Its significance is unknown to me, as it is anterior to the position of the hypophysis. A thickening of the cast on either side of its base converges to the median line posterior to it. I can find no optic foramina, and believe, therefore, that the optic nerves issued from the same large sinus as the trigeminus. The cast diminishes in vertical diameter anterior to the inferior conical process, and increases in transverse diameter of its superior surface. The inferior border continues to be keel-like, so that a vertical section is trian- gular with the base superior. It is impossible to distinguish the outlines of the cerebral hemispheres or the olfactory lobes, both of which are probably included in this part of the cast, although the latter probably extended much anterior to the extremity of the brain case as preserved. The form may or may not give an idea of the forms of the hemispheres. In any case they were narrower than in any known reptile. The prominent features of this brain are then the following : The widest part is at the origin of the trigeminus nerve. Both the cerebellum and optic thalamus are flat and simple. The hemispheres are narrower than the segments posterior to them, and of greater vertical diameter. The epiphysis is enormous, and sends a process posteriorly between the tables of the parietal bone. The olfactory lobes were apparently large, and had a greater transverse diameter than the hemispheres. The reduced diameter of the hemispheres is a character of fishes and Batrachia rather than of rep- tiles, but the thalami are also smaller than is the case in Batrachia. The small, flat cerebellum is rather batrachiau than reptilian. 2. The Auditory Apparatus. As already remarked, the internal wall of the vestibule is not bony, so that the cast of the brain cavity includes that of the vestibule also. On the external wall of the latter are the orifices of the semi-circular canals. These are, one double fossa at the superior anterior part of the wall ; a second double one at the posterior superior part of the wall, and a single orifice at the inferior posterior part of the wall. The external part of the vestibule is produced upwards and outwards to the fenestra ovalis. The "double fossae" above mentioned are the osseous representatives of the membranous ampullae at the junction of two pairs of semicircular canals. On sawing open the periotic bones, which here form a continuous mass, the following is seen to be the direction of the semicircular canals. The superior canal is horizontal. The second canal from the posterior ampulla, descends forwards, and after a course a little longer than that of the hori- zontal canal' turns posteriorly. The inferior canal from t lie anterior am- pulla also descends, and after a shorter course than the canal last men- tioned, also turns backwards and joins it, the two forming a single canal, which enters the vestibule by the single posterior foramen already des- cribed. The lumen of the longer perpendicular canal is much larger than aa oc ■ "'^V ppe hap ap c c o c ,"e h ap « -aa v a p vt c c k \\ aa vap Brain and Internal ear of Diadectidae. 1885.] ^31 [Cope. that of the others. As its ampullar orifice is also the largest of all, I suppose this increased diameter to be partly normal ; but it may be partly abnormal, as its walls are irregular and rough. The fenestra ovalis is not preserved in this specimen, but can be seen in the crania of the species Diadectes jjhaseolinus and Empedias molaris above mentioned.* The vestibule or a diverticulum from it is produced upwards and backwards, and terminates in a round os. This is clearly not a tym- panic chamber, nor is it a rudimental cochlea. It does not appear to be homologous with the recessus labyrinthi, since that cavity is not perforated by the fenestra ovalis. It appears to be a prolongation outwards of the vestibule and sacculus, which may be observed in a less degree in the genus Edaphosaurus (Cope), also from the Texas Permian formation. Here the adjacent bones are produced slightly outwards, and the fenestra ovalis is closed by a large stapes similar in external form to the one I have described in the Clepsydrops leptocephalus.\ Its more intimate structure I have not yet examined. % The result of this examination into the structure of the auditory organs in the Diadectidse may be stated as follows : The semicircular canals have the structure common to all Gnathostomatous Chordata. The internal wall of the vestibule remains unossified as in many fishes and a few batrachians. There is no rudiment of the cochlea, but the vestibule is pro- duced outwards and upwards to the fenestra ovalis, in a way unknown in any other family of vertebrates. I may add that, in the specimen examined, the semicircular canals were filled with a white calcareous powder, probably derived from the commi- nution of otolites. EXPLANATION OF PLATE. Figs. 1, 2 and 3 cast of cranial cavity, natural size. As the basicranial axis is lost, the inferior outline posteriorly is provisional only. Fig. 1, from above. Fig. 2, from the left side. Fig. 3, from behind. The letters signify as follows: m., medulla; cb., cerebellum; opL, optic lobe ; ep., epiphysis ; ppe., posterior process of epiphysis ; If., lateral foramen; h., region of cerebral hemispheres ; v., cast of vestibule; hap., *See skull of E. molaris, Proceedings Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1881, Plate v, figs, a and b, where the fenestra is represented. fSee Proceedings Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1884, p. 41. % Professor Owen has figured (Todd's Encyclopedia, art. Monotremata) a struc- ture in Echidna, which looks remarkably like that here described. This is a tubular elongation of the meatus auditorius externus with more or less carti- laginous walls. This structure might be regarded as homologous with that dis- played by the Empedias, could we imagine that with their diminution in size in tbeMonolreme, theossicula auditus had retreated within this tube preceding the membranum tympani, from a position at its distal, to one at its proximal extremity. But such a supposition has as yet no foundation, and the very similar parts in the two types may have no homology. Brinton.] ^O [Nov. 20, do. of orifice of horizontal anteroposterior semicircular canal; vt., do. of vertical transverse canal ; oc, do of os commune of vertical anteropos- terior and vertical transverse canals; aa., do. of anterior ampulla ; V., cast of foramen of fifth pair of nerves. Figs. 4, 5 and 6 diagrams of the semicircular canals, natural size. Fig. 4, interior view. . Fig. 5, anterior view. Fig. 6, inferior view. The letters signify as follows : aa., anterior ampulla ; ap., posterior ampulla ; hap., horizontal anteroposterior canal ; vap., vertical antero- posterior canal ; vt., vertical transverse canal, enlarged in its upper por- tion, probably accidentally ; cc, canalis communis of the vertical antero- posterior and vertical transverse canals ; oc, os commune of do. Note's on the Mingue ; an extinct Dialect formerly spoken in Nicaragua. By Daniel G. Brinton, 31. D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 20, 1SS5.) Sources. Nothing whatever has been published about the Mangue language, except a list of ninety-five words, by Mr. E. G. Squier in his work, " Nicaragua, its People, Scenery and Monuments." Whence he obtained this short vocabulary he does not state ; but it is evidently the work of some one only slightly acquainted with the character of the language. 1 do not make any use of it in the present notes, except in a few instances for comparison. My authorities are, first, Don Juan Eligio de la Rocha's Apuntamientos de la Lengua Mangue, MS. The author was born in Granada, C. A., June 15, 1815. By profession a lawyer, his taste led him to the study of languages, and he acquired a fluent knowledge of French, English and Italian. He was appointed instructor in French and Spanish grammar in 1848 in the University of Leon, C. A., and ten years later, 1S58, pub- lished his Elementos de Oramatica Castellana (Leon, 1858, small 4to, pp. 199). His death occurred in 1873. While living in Masaya in 1842, he became interested in the surviving remnants of the Mangues, and undertook to collect materials for a study of their language. Unfortunately, lie never completed these investigations, and many of the sheets on which he had recorded his notes were scattered. A few of them, how- 1P85.] AoJ [Brinton. ever, were in the hands of his brother, Doctor Don Jesus de la Rocha, of Granada, who gave Dr. C. H. Berendt an opportunity to copy them in 1874. In that same year, 1874, Dr. Berendt collected the last obtainable fragments of the Mangue. In his (printed) lecture before the American Geographical Society in 1876, he thus describes his efforts in this direction, and at the same time points out the localities where the Mangue speaking populations where located when they first came to the knowledge of the in- vading whites. "The Spaniards on entering the present State of Nicaragua from Nicoya bay, and then marching through the country, came into contact first with the southern section of the Chorotegas or Mangues, as they were also called ; then with a Nahuatl tribe, whose capital and king are mentioned as bearing the name of Nicarao ; and after these again with Chorotegas or Mangues, who, however, did not occupy the whole tract of land up to the Bay of Fonseca, but were again separated from the Chorotegas on the shores of that bay by another foreign tribe called Manbios. Thus we obtain the three sections into which the Chorotegas of Nicaragua were divided at the time of the Conquest. Now, their language seemed to me an object worthy of having some special attention bestowed upon it— not so much for its own sake, but in order that a better understanding might be arrived at of the ethnological features of Nicaragua, which, on account of an insufficient acquaintance with its actual condition as well as with the early writers, and ot the rather precarious speculations and conjectures of modern authors based upon such scanty knowledge, have become greatly confused. Having studied the Chapanecan language on a former expedi- tion, and wishing to compare it with the Chorotegan, I visited Nicaragua in the year 1874. I found that the Indian population near the Nicoya and the Fonseca bays had entirely disappeared, and in both districts only met with some local names belonging to the Chorotegan language. In the third district also, where descendants of the old stock are still living in twelve villages around the lakes of Masaya and Apoyo, I was informed that no other vestiges of the old idiom were left, the inhabitants speaking exclusively the Spanish language. I had, however, the good luck to ferret out some old people who still remembered words and phrases they had heard in their childhood ; and I was enabled to collect material suffi- cient to convince myself and others of the identity of this Mangue or Chorotegan idiom with the Chapaneco language of Mexico. I was not a moment too early in obtaining this information, for the greater number of my informants died while I was staying in the country. I still hope that with the knowledge of the Chorotegan thus gained in Nicaragua and Chiapas, it may be [possible to trace their history and descent backwards Brinton.] ^40 [Nov 20, to one of the nations that were living in Anahuac in the earliest times of which our records speak." The materials were never published by Dr. Berendt, nor, indeed, did the many other projects which occupied him allow him the leisure to collate and arrange them. I have taken them from his original notes, often in pencil and not always perfectly legible. But I believe those here offered can be depended upon as accurate, and have special value as the sole remaining vestiges of an idiom now wholly extinct. Synonyms. It will be seen that Berendt speaks of this people as the " Chorotegas or Mangues." I have given the origin of these names in the Introduction to " The Giiegiience, a Comedy-Ballet in the Nahuatl-Spanish Dialect of Nicaragua," published as Number III, of " Brinton's Library of Aboriginal American Literature " (Philadelphia, 1883). They adjoined on the north-east and south-west the Nahuatl-speaking tribe, who occupied the narrow strip of land between Lake Nicaragua and the Pacific ocean. "They were of one blood and one language, and called themselves Mankeme, rulers, masters, which the Spaniards corrupted into Mangues. The invading Aztecs appear to have split this ancient tribe into two frac- tions, the one driven toward the south, about the Gulf of Nicoya, the other northward, on and near Lake Managua, and beyond it on Fonseca bay. Probably in memory of this victory, the Aztec Nicaraguans applied to them the opprobious name, Chololteca, 'those driven out,' from the Nahuatl verb choloa, in its compulsive form chololtia, and the suffix, tecatl, people ; which was corrupted by the Spaniards into Chorotegas." {The Gueguence, Introduction, p. viii. ) In Squier's work above referred to they are called " Chorote- gans or Dirians." The latter is from the Mangue dirt, a hill or mountain, and was applied to that portion of them who dwelt in the hilly country south of Masaya. The Spanish form of their native name is that which I should recommend for adoption in ethnological works. Early Notices. The old historians and travelers, on whom we depend for our knowledge of Nicaragua, tell us practically nothing about this language, and little about the people who spoke it. The chieftain, called Nicoj'a, living on the bay of that name, was first visited by Captain Gil Gonzalez Davila in 1523. The natives were estimated at about six thousand, who received 1885.] ^41 [Brinton. the Spaniards in a friendly manner, and gave them considerable gold.* Oviedo in his Historia de las Indias gives a few words of the language as follows : mamea, hell. nam bi, dog. nam bue, tiger, the last two of which correspond to those in later vocabularies.! The Auditor Garcia de Palacio (1576) mentions the Mangue as spoken in Choluteca, Nicaragua and Costa Rica, in the last mentioned as introduced from elsewhere. J About a century later a colony of Mangues, several hundred in number, were found by Juan Vazquez de Coronado, almost at the extreme eastern end of Costa Rica, in the Province of Pacaca.§ Those on the Pacific Coast, about the Gulf of Nicoya, were accustomed to cross to the ocean on the north for trading purposes, and to obtain salt.|| They appear to have been a people of moderate cultivation, and rather extended commercial connections. Affiliations. The Mangue is the mother tongue from which the Chapanec (or Chiapanec) of Chiapas branched off. The separation from the ancestral tribe, and the migration from Nicaragua to Chiapas, were distinctly remembered by the Cha- panec off-shoot when first encountered by the whites. Remesal, in his well-known history, gives a brief but clear account of it. The date of this occurrence cannot be specifically stated, but its occasion can be readily surmised. The Mangues at one time occupied the whole coast from the entrance of the Gulf of Nicoya to Fonseca bay. At a period which we may locate some time in the fourteenth century, a large colony of Aztecs de- scended the coast and seized the strip between Lake Nicaragua and the Pacific, thus splitting the Mangues in two, and driving a large portion of them out of their homes. Some of these wan- derers remained with their relatives, but one body of them marched north and west until they reached a lofty peak on the •Letter of Gil Gonzalez Davila to the Emperor Charles V, in Costa-Rica, Nic* aragua y Panama en el Sialo xvi, por D. Manuel E. de Peralta, p. 9 (Madrid, 1833). t historia General y Natural de Indias, Part iii, Lib, iii. X Palacio, Carta, al Rey> Ed. Squier, p. 20. gSee the Report of Coronado in the collection of Peralta above quoted, p. 777. 1 Ibid, p. 701. PROC AMEK. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2E. PRINTED JANUARY 20, 1886. Brinton.] ->4:A [Nov. 20, Rio Grande in Central Chiapas, where they constructed a for- midable fortress, and became the terror of their Nakuatl-speak- ing neighbors.* No connection has been demonstrated between the Mangue (or Chapanec), and any other North American language, although owing to the liberal exertions of M. Alphonse Pinart, we have now in print and easily procurable, a grammar and a number of texts of the Chapanec dialect.f A comparison, the partial results of which I have previously published, proves that the differences between the Chapanec and Mangue are slight and unimportant, and for purposes of colla- tion vvith other stocks the two may be looked upon as identical. In the Introduction to " The Gueguence," I pointed out some singular coincidences between the Mangue aud the Aymara of Peru. Further examination of the two tongues has not added to the list given, and has weakened the belief I entertained of some possible connection in the past between them. 1 take this occasion to point out an error which has crept iuto several philological works, that of confounding the Mangue with the Nagrandan of Nicaragua. Thus, Francisco Pimentel, in his work on the languages of Mexico, falls into the capital mis- take of declaring the Chapanec of Chiapas to be allied to the Nagrandan of Nicaragua ; and to prove his assertion, gives a list of alleged Nagrandan words, all of which belong to the Mangue tongue !J The same confusion marks an attempt of Mr. Hyde Clark, of * " Vinieron antiguamente de la Provinciade Nicaragua unas gentes que can- sados de andar y de las descomodades que la peregrinacion trse eonsigo, se qued- aron en tierradeChiapa, y poblaron en un pefiol aspero orillas deun Rio Grande que pasa por medio dellay fortificaronse alii, porque nunca se quisieron suje- tar & los Reyes de Mejico, antes tenian continuamente guerra con sus capi- tanes." etc. Remesal, Historia de Chiapay Guatemala, Lib. iv, cap. xiii. t Arte de la Lengua Chiapcneca. Por Fray Juan de Albornoz. Doctrina C'risliana en Lengua Chiapaneca. Por Fray Luis Barrientos. These two publications comprise Vol. i of the Bibliothique We are out of breath. rasi pujimo, ) Pangare' manijitare, Be quiet, I will pay you to-morrow. Gugapi, koy ujmi, Let us sleep, it is night. Buusi naa, munikako, Get away from here, you sou of a devil ! Nim bu' tajo pa'yamo ? What were you doing by the water ? Tapame, Be good. Motan atima nyumpia, You come on horseback. Observations on the Vocabulary. Prefixes. — The most frequent prefixes in the vocabulary are nyu and nya. They probably indicate the position of the noun as independent of expressed possessive relations. In the Cha- panec they are also found, but not so commonly. They do not appear to be classificatory particles, as they are prefixed to the names of the most diverse objects. Generic Names. — These are quite common, as is frequently the case in American languages, in spite of what has often been said to the contrary. The word nyu-mbu means any large quad- ruped ; nyu\ any insect ; narimu, any kind of wild fruit, etc. It must be rememhered that the genera into which individuals are grouped have a widely different connotation from those to which we are accustomed. Cat. — The word for cat, misa, seems identical with the Cak- chiquel mez. In Chapanec it is kitu, reminding one of kitten. As the domestic cat was unknown in America before the dis- covery, these words can probably be traced to some European source. 1885.] ->'Jl [Houston. Color Names. — The color names appear difficult to analyze, and vary from those in Chapanee. Thus, as given by the various authorities, they are : Mangue. Chapanee. Black, nanzome, R. dujama. White, nandirime, R. dilima. Yellow, nandiume, R. nandikuma. -o, r. (nandipame, R. ,. .. Blue or Green, ■< - t> ndipama. Red, arimbome, B. nduimii. In these adjectives the termination me or ma does not belong to the root. Father Abornoz tells us that this suffix character- izes adjectives in the singular number, when they qualify a cer- tain class of nouns "in tighe." (Soe his Gram. p. 15.) The nasal or resonant beginning most of them is also a mere prefix. Proper Names. — But few native families of the Mangue dis- tricts of Nicaraugua have retained names drawn from their ancient tongues. In a list before me of several hundred persons in Masaya and Managua, the only surnames from the Mangue are Norori, Namendi, Namullure, Putoi, Nionongue, Macanche, and perhaps Huembes and Piura. Generally, the natives adopted Spanish surnames. On the other hand, a large number of local names, derived from the Mangue language, on the map of Nicaragua still define the region once occupied by this nation. Such are Nindiria (from ninda, shore, diri, hill), Nakutiri (from naku, fire, din, hill), Monimbe (jiimbu, water, rain), Nandasimo (jianda, brook), Mombonasi (nasi, woman), Masaya, Managua, Namotiva, No- rome, Nicoya, Oretina, etc., etc. Photography by a Lightning Flash. By Prof. Edwin J. Houston. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, November SO, 1SS5.) Mr. Albert S. Barker, of Philadelphia, has recently sent me two photo- graphic views of his stable and surrounding objects, the exposure for which were made during an exceedingly dark night, with no other illumi- nation than a single lightning flash for each. The photographic negatives were taken during the severe storm that PROC. AMER. PHILOS. S0C. XXIII. 122. 2G. PRINTED FEBRUARY 5, 1886. Houston.] ^°® [Nov. 20, occurred in Philadelphia and vicinity on the 29th of Octoher, 1885. The exposure was made at 7 p. u. The thick clouds produced pronounced darkness. At the same time the rain was heavy, and the wind high. Considering the circumstances, the negatives secured were very good. TLe circumstances of the exposure were as follows, viz : the camera was placed in an open window, and pointed towards the stahle, its focus for this point having heen previously obtained. The slide was then drawn and the plate left exposed to the night until a lightning flash came. This occurred in less than one minute, when the slide was instantly closed, the plate holder reversed, and another exposure obtained by means of the illumination of the next flash. The plates were developed during the evening. The results obtained were, in Mr. Barker's judgment, about equal to what would have been secured by an exposure of about ^5 of a second in bright sunlight at noon. The plates used were exceedingly sensitive gelatine films. A compara- tively large diaphragm was employed in these exposures. The circumstances under which these exposures were taken were such as thoroughly prevented any illumination of the objects save by the flash itself. The room in which the camera was placed was of course quite dark. Apart from the interest attached to Mr. Barker's photographs as evidence of the recent advances made in what is generally called instan- taneous photography, they appear to present considerable value in the light they throw on the question of the duration of the ordinary light- ning flash. The views generally held as regards the duration of the lightning flash is, that it is practically, if not actually, instantaneous. From experiments made by Wheatstone and others, the duration of a flash, as deter- mined by means of a rapidly revolving disc, it is generally believed to be from the ToVo> to the Tto57 °f a second. Whatever may have been the duration of the flashes thus measured, it would appear probable that flashes of great severity, where the discharge traverses many miles of air, would, under many circumstances, continue for quite an appreciable time. Mr. Barker's photographs appear to show that this was the case during the night in which they were taken. While the fixed objects, such for example as the stable, came out quite sharply, the trees show unmistak- able evidences of violent motion. It is true that these trees were not in sharp focus, being nearer the camera than the stable. Though somewhat blurred, they nevertheless exhibit unmistakable signs of having percept- ibly changed their position during the time of exposure. In other words, the plate was illumined for a sufficient length of time to permit the mo- tion to be clearly shown. The lightning flash, therefore, was not instan- taneous in the sense generally attributed to it, but continued to illumine the plate for quite an appreciable time. It would be interesting for the photographic experiments of Mr. Barker 1885.] ^^ IFrazer. to be repeated under other circumstances to determine this question more certainly. For example, if the camera were focussed sharply on a distant tree, and a negative taken during a violent thunder storm by a lightning flash while the tree is in motion, if the foliage comes out in detail with no perceptible motion shown, the continuance of the illumination would then be proved to be too short a time for its appearance. If, on the contrary, the leaves appear blurred as if moved, then the generally received no- tions concerning the instantaneous character of the lightning flash must be changed. Or, if the camera should be focussed on a rapidly moving wheel, and a photographic picture be taken during its illumination by a lightning flash, then the peculiarities of the negative could be utilized, not only to deter- mine the question of the greater or less duration of the flash, but even to measure the actual duration itself. It will be observed that the method here suggested substitutes the sen- sitive plate of the photographic camera for the retina of the eye. From the results of Mr, Barker's photographs, it might be inferred that the former is far more sensitive than the latter. If this be the case, then the photographs thus obtained would furnish more precise means for measur- ing the duration of the illumination, and hence of the flash itself, than the method followed by Wheatstone and others. The lightning flash contains so large a percentage of the blue rays^of light, that we may fairly suppose that its actinic effects on a photographic plate would be more decided than with equally bright sunlight. This greater sensitiveness of the light of a lightning flash may perhaps account in some degree for the possibility of taking photographic pictures by its means, but it also equally explains the probability of the blurred foliage in Mr. Barker's views being actually due to their movement during the short time they were exposed to the camera, and thus disproves the approxi- mate instaneousness of the flash itself. Central High School, Phila., Nov. 20, 1SS5. Resume of the Work of the International Geological Congress, held at Berlin, Sept. 2S to Oct. 3. 1SS5. By Dr. Persifor Frazer. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 20, 1S85.) An abstract of the Proceedings of the late Geological Congress at Berlin has been published by the writer in Science ; a fuller report is about to appear in the American Journal of Science and Arts. The report, contain- ing all the documents relating to the work of the Congress, and only less complete than the official report, will be presented to the American com- mittee whenever it meets. In the meantime, it will interest Geologists Frazer.] ~oO |Nov. 20, to know at once, ia a general way, what has been done, and also to learn of certain works which the Congress recommended and patronized, but did not undertake. The map of Europe, colored geologically, will be issued in 49 sheets ; or 7 high and 7 broad. Each sheet will be 48 centimetres high and 53 cm. broad. The whole map will form a rectangle of 3.36 by 3.71 metres. Prof. Kiepert, of Berlin, is charged with the duty of making a topographi- cal base from the very latest data. D. Reimer and Co. are the publishers. 930 copies are guaranteed by the Congress at 100 francs per copy, of which each of the great States of Europe, to wit : Great Britain, France, Germany, Austro-Hungary, Scandinavia, Italy, Spain and Russia is entitled to 100 copies. The remaining 100 copies are to be divided between the six small States, Belgium, Holland, Denmark, Switzerland, Portugal andRoumania. The other purchasers are to pay 125 francs a copy to the publishers. The scale of the map is to be 1 : 1500 000. A committee is charged with the duty of receiving the colored maps sent in by each country, and of harmonizing them so that they will make a connected whole. This committee consists of Messrs. Beyrich, Hauchecorne, Daubree, Giordano, Moller, Mojsisovics, Topley and Renevier. But the Committee of Direc- tion, which will really superintend this work, is composed of the first two named, who are on the ground and can better look after the publishing. It was proposed by the committee having in charge the adoption of a uni- form system of coloration, that a greenish-gray tint be adopted for the Silurian (Cambrian included). This was warmly opposed and finally the section was altered so as to give the committee the discretion to adopt some provisional means of distinguishing the series at the base of the Paleo- zoic column, with the understanding that it should not in auy waj- pre- judice the final scientific decision of these questions. The divisions to be made of the Cambrian and Silurian combined will therefore be three- fold, and the three divisions will be different shades of greenish-gray. After the color questions were thus disposed of, M. Dewalque began the more radical questions of the actual divisions themselves. The measures below the Paleozoic column are to be called Archaean, and each geologist is to be left free to distinguish their separate divisions by petrographic char- acters, without as yet attempting to correlate them in different countries. M. de Lapparent did a notable service to science here by proposing that the term "Protogine" which was based upon no important or necessary characteristic, be once for all abolished. This motion was unanimously carried. The Silurian-Cambrian question again coming up, it was decided to leave the debate on the proper coordination of the series till the meeting in England, three years hence. In the meantime, the committee on the map was permitted to make the divisions as well as it could, but to give no names. It was decided to divide the Devonian into the Rhenan, the Eifelian, and the Famennian. (2). That the Calceola beds should form part of the Eifeli m, and fiat the upper limit of the Devonian should be drawn at 1885.1 261 |Cope. the base of the Carboniferous Limestones, {. e., the system that includes the Psammites of Coudroz and the upper "Old Red." The question of asso- ciating the Permian -with the Carboniferous provoked the most heated de- bate. Stur, Blanford, Lapparent, and Newberry spoke in favor of such association ; Hughes, Topley, Nikitin and some others, against it. It was finally decided to leave the question as it was. The Triassic was divided into three parts, but without assigning to them any names. The eruptive rocks were divided according to the scheme of Prof. Lossen, into seven divisions, one of which is "Serpentine." This part of the Con- gress's work appears not to have received the attention it deserved, as all the petrographers who were consulted by the writer as to the advisability of such a heading of a division, agreed that it was unfortunate. Among these were Profs. Zirkel, Stelzner, and among the other geologists, Profs. Hughes, Hall, and a great many others. The Congress formerly approved and voted committees to assist two works of the nature of compendiums. The first of these is a Geographical-Geo- logical Dictionary, by D. Juan Vilanova, Piera Professor in the University of Madrid. The committee appointed at the Bologna Congress to assist in this work consisted of MM. Hughes, Mayer-Eymar, Steinmanu, Meli, Szabo, and Inostranzeff. M. Vilanova explained that this was merely an attempt of his to make a French- Spanish dictionary of terms, but he hoped that it wrould be taken up and improved upon by others, and that especi- ally the parallel terms in other languages would be gradually grafted upon it. I should be glad of the assistance of the members of this Society in extending a knowledge of its scope. The other wTork which the Congress appointed a committee to foster was Xeumayr's Nomenclator Palseontologicus. The names of the members of this committee are MM. Gaudry, Zittel, ISTeumayr, and Etheridge. On the Species of Iguanmce. By E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 16th, 1SS5.) By Iguaninee I mean Iguanida:* without abdominal ribsf or free dermal margins of the digits:): which have the nostrils on the line of the canthus rostralis and not below it, and which possess the compressed form and other characteristics indicating an arboreal rather than a terrestrial habit of life. With one exception§ these animals are confined to the forest re- gions of Tropica] America, the greater number of species being found in the West Indies and Mexico. A few species, as the Conolophus subcris- * Exclusive of the Anolidae, which I have shown to differ in the structure of the lower jaw. Proceedings Academy, Phila., 1864. f Those with abdominal ribs are the Polychrinio. X The Basiliscinse are characterized by the digital margins. 'i The Braehyloplms fasciatus of tbe Fejee Islands. Cope.] 262 [0cL le> tatvs, are entirely terrestrial in their habits. The genera are distin- guished as follows : I. Premaxillary and symphyseal teeth conical. a Posterior digits with separate combs. Tail with much of its length free from spines ; a gular fold, Cyclura Harl. aa No separate combs on posterior digits. Tail with the basal half spinous ; a throat fold Ctenosaura Wieg. Tail short, spinous to the end ; a throat fold Cachryx Cope. Tail not spinous ; a throat fold Brachylophus Cuv. Tail not spinous ; a dewlap which has a crest of spines on its anterior edge Iguana Laur. II. Premaxillary and symphyseal teeth trilobate ; no combs on the posterior digits. A throat fold ; tail not spinous , Conoloplms Fitz. No throat fold ; tail not spinous Amblyrhynchus Bell. CYCLURA Harlan. Journal Academy Natl. Sciences, i, p. 242, 1825. Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen., iv, 214, 1837. 3/etopocerus Wagl., Natiirl. Syst. d. Amphibien, p. 147, 1830. Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen., iv, p. 210, 1837. ? Aloponotus Dum. Bibr., Erpet. Generate, iv, p. 189, 1837. The species of this genus known to me are the following : I. Scales of muzzle all small ; combs on third toe only. Several rows of infralabial scuta ; five scales on canthus rostralis ; crest interrupted at rump only C. carinata Harl. II. Large scuta on muzzle ; combs on third toe only ; one row of large infralabials. Infralabials and other scuta in contact with each other and with labials ; two scales on canthus rostralis ; crest low, much interrupted at nape and rump ; color uniform C. ba>olopha Cope. Infralabial and other scuta separated from each other and from labials by small scales ; four scales on canthus rostralis; green, with bands C. nub il> i Gray. III. Large scuta on muzzle ; one on middle line protuberant ; combs on second and third toes ; several rows of large infralabials. Scales very irregular, often minutely granular on scapular regions ; a trace of whorls on tail ; crest interrupted at nape and rump ; black. . C. cornula Daud. The reputed species Oyclura maclcayi Gray, from Cuba, and O.lophoma Gosse, from Jamaica, are unknown to me by autopsy. Cyci/OBA carinata Harlan, Jour. Academy Philadelphia, iv. p. 250, 1885, pi. 15. Cope, Proceeds. American Philosoph. Society, 1870, American Naturalist, 1885, 1006. Turk's island, Bahamas ; Harlan, Ebcll. 188.5.] 263 [Cope. Cyclura b^olopha Cope. Proceeds. Academy Philadelphia, 1861, p. 123 ; American Naturalist, 1885, 1006. Andros island, Bahamas ; Wood. Cyclura nubila " Shaw." Gray in Griffith's Animal Kingdom, ix, 39 fig. Cope, American Naturalist, 1385, p. 1006. Lacerta nubila Shaw, (teste Gray) Zoology. Iguana cyclura Cuv. Cyclura harlani Cocteau, Hist. S. l'lsle Cuba par de la Sagra Rep., p. 96. C. carinaia Wiegm., Herpet. Mexicana, not of Harlan. Cuba, Cyclura cornuta Dand. Iguana cornuta Daudin, Rept., p. 382. La- treille Hist. Nat. Rept., ii, 2G7, iv, 294. Metopocerus cornutus Wagler, Nat. Syst. d. Amphibien, 1830, p. 147. Wiegmann, Herp. Mex., 1834, i,"p. 16. Dura. Bibr., Erp. Gen., iv, 211, 1837. Giinther, Trans. Zool. Soc, London, 1882, p. 218, Pis. xliii, xliv. Boulenger Cat., Brit. Mus., ii, 1885, p. 188. Cyclura nigerrima Cope, American Nat- uralist, 1885, p. 1006. C. onchiopsis Cope, loc. cit. This species has been until recently but little known, although its name frequently appears in literature. The characters ascribed to it by Dumeril and Bibron do not agree with those of any individuals which have come under my notice. These authors distinguish the genus Metopoceros from Cyclura by the presence of two rows of femoral pores, a character which does not exist in either of the four specimens in the National Museum. The genus Aloponotus of the same authors possesses, according to them, the same peculiarity. M. Boulenger, in the last (1885) edition of the British Museum Catalogue, describes this character as though it only occurs "sometimes" in this species, evidently regarding it as inconstant. My confidence in its constancy leads me to describe as new two forms, which perhaps belong to the C. cornuta, under the names C. nigerrima and C. onchiopsis. These differ from each other very much as the genera Metopocerus and Aloponotus are said by Dumeril and Bibron to differ from each other, *. e., in the character of the scutellation. In the C. niger- rima the scales are distinct everywhere ; in the C. onchiopsis they are minutely granular on the sides of the back and on the nape and withers. In a third specimen (in alcohol, No. 9977), the characters are interme- diate. Thus, in the type of C. onchiopsis, the masseteric protuberances have larger scales set in a general surface of granulations ; in the third specimen, the same surface is nowhere granular, but is scutellate. The anterior dorsal region is less granular in this specimen. I therefore think it necessary to unite my supposed species, as has been done by M. Bou- lenger. If the presence of the second row of femoral pores is not constant in the C. cornuta, then the genus Metopocerus cannot be distinguished from Cyclura. M. Boulenger relies on the rather greater number of denticles in the lateral teeth in the C. cornuta, but my specimens show a tendency Cope.] 264 fOct. 16, to the tridentate form of the C. milila. The character is, I think, even if constant, insufficient for generic distinction. I describe the two specimens -which represent the extreme of variation of this species, commencing with the type of C. nigerrima. In this specimen the scales of the superior regions are smaller than those of the inferior regions, and are in regular transverse rows, each scale surrounded with granules. There are three rows in two millimeters. The scales of the inferior surfaces are about a millimeter in diameter ; like those of the back they have faint traces of keels. The scales of the limbs and tail are keeled. At intervals of about six scales, there are, on the median portions of the sides of the tail, two rows of scales a little larger than the others, which are homologous with those which form the spiny whorls in other species. The crest is rather low on the nape, and is well developed on the dorsal region and anterior part of the tail. On the latter it becomes lower, forming serrate teeth, which are distinguishable to the end of that organ. The crest is interrupted at both withers and rump. Besides the combs on the second and third digits, there is a rudiment of a comb at the base of the first digit. Femoral pores 14-16. The type specimen of this species was partially skeletonized before it was suspected to be other than a Metopocerus cornutus. The plates and scales of the head cannot therefore be described excepting so far as to state that there is a median large scale at the middle of the base of the snout, on an elevation of the nasal bones just behind the transverse line connecting the posterior borders of the bony nares. Between this plate and the canthus rostralis the horizontal surface of the muzzle is covered with rather large anteroposterior^ oval scales, which have a median keel. In the center of these is a larger plate, several times as large as any ot them. The scales on the post-frontal region are similar and those of the zygomatic arch posteriorly are larger. j icaaurements. M. Length of skull to end of quadrate bone 108 Width of skull at front of tympanum 070 Least interorbital width of skull 018 Length of alveolar edge of maxillary bone 050 " " body to vent 340 " tail 500 " "humerus 0G0 " " fore arm 0.~>7 " "femur 07."> "tibia 063 " foot 110 The color is everywhere uniform black. From Navassa island. National .Museum, No. 9974. In a second specimen, the type of Gyclura onchiopsis, the scales of the 1885.1 265 [Cope inferior surfaces are similar in every respect to those of the one described above, while those of the sides, tail, and superior surfaces are quite differ- ent. Those of the tail are flat and keeled, and smaller than those of that species, and of equal size. In the scutellation of the back the granular scales are far more numerous, covering almost the whole of the scapular regions and sides of the neck and body. Where the larger scales appear they are round and not arranged in rows, and are separated by granular interspaces as wide as or wider than themselves. On the temporal and lateral gular regions the larger scales are scattered at wide intervals in the granular surface. On the muzzle there are two pairs of scuta behind the nasal plates, which are separated by a granular interval. Behind these, and separated by another interval, is a knob-like median scutum. Between this and the canthus rostralis, but separated from it by a wide granular space, are several scales like the smaller ones in the same position in the G. nigerrima. There are three rows of small prominent scales over the eye, forming a rough surface. A series of larger scuta on the zygomatic arch, as far as below the front of the orbit. Two prominent scuta not in contact on the anterior border of the tympanum. Two large and two small row9 of infralabial plates. Labials f. Symphyseal plate large, angulate behind. A longitudinal median gular fold, which terminates in a pendulous transverse gular fold. The scales on these folds are like those of the belly, and not granular like those of the lateral gular region. Femoral pores 18. Tail compressed. Dorsal crest low, interrupted at the withers and groin. Color, dark brown ; belly, breast, fore limbs and sides of head black. Measurements. M. Length of head to end of os quadratum 103 Width of head at front of tympanum 055 Length of body to vent 290 " " tail (tip wanting") 370 " " foreleg 140 " " humerus (measured behind) 050 " forearm 057 " " hind leg 200 " " femur (measured above) 058 " tibia 065 " hind foot 095 There are three specimens of this species in the National Museum which agree in all essential respects. They are. from the Island of Navassa. In all of them the temporal and pterygoid muscles are enormously developed, forming swollen enlargements unlike anything seen in any other Iguanid. According to Dumeril and Bibron there are in the Metopoceri/s cornutus three pairs of scuta on the muzzle. According to the description of these authors this animal also differs from the M. cornutus in having eight supe- PROC. AJIER. PHILOS SOC. XXIII. 122. 2h. PRINTED FEBRUARY 5, 1886. Cope.] ^kfr [Oct. 16, rior labials ; in the nasals being subround instead of triangular ; in having a large instead a small symphyseal plate. The specimen typical of C. orchiopxis has a very low and even imperfect dorsal crest, with a wide in- terruption between the shoulders, while in the other two it is better de- veloped, and in the type of C. nigerrima best of all. CTENOSAURA Wiegmann. Isis von Oken, 1828, p. 371. Enyaliosaurus Gray. Catal. Lizards, Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 192. The species of this genus are restricted to the Mexican and Central American regions as Cyclura is to the West Indian. The species known to me are six in number, as follows : I. Caudal whorls complete ; dorsal crest extending only on the an- terior dorsal region. Tail round, whorls separated by one row of scales : brown with a few black cross-bands on anterior dorsal region C. hemilopha II. Caudal whorls complete ; dorsal crest extending to rump. a Caudal whorls separated by one row of scales. Three scales on canthus rostralis ; dorsal crest interrupted at rump ; black or dark brown C. laultispinis. aa Caudal whorls separated by two or three rows of scales. Head short, obtuse ; three scales on canthus rostralis ; dorsal crest inter rupted at rump ; black with yellow cross-bands ; sides of neck yel low , C. brevirostris Head wedge shaped ; three or four scales on canthus rostralis ; all, excep the posterior one, deeper than long ; dorsal crest interrupted a rump ; black, with yellow and green cross bands and speckles.. . . C. teres Four canthal scales, the posterior longer than deep ; head elongate, wedge shaped ; dorsal and caudal crests continuous at rump ; tail com pressed ; green with narrow black cross-bands to belly. . C. completa, III. Caudal whorls interrupted ; each represented by a median dor sal spine and two on each side at the base. Tail depressed, shorter ; dorsal crest widely interrupted at rump ; pale brown with black cross-bands on anterior dorsal region C++- guinquecarinata. Ctenosaitka hemilopha Cope, Proceedings Philadelphia Academy, 18G3, p. 105. Ctenosaura acanthura Bocourt, Miss. Scient. Mexique Kept. p. 138. Cyclura acanthura pars, Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen. iv., p. 224. This species is regarded by DeBlainville and Bocourt as the Lacerta acanthura of Shaw.* This cannot be correct, as Shaw distinctly states that the dorsal crestof his species extends to the rump. It is probably one of the species of the next section of the genus (II), but which one I am unable to ascertain. Lower California only ; Botta ; Xantus. • /oology iii. 1885.] ~u ' [Cope. Ctenosaura multispinis sp. nov. Head elongate, flat above, muzzle narrowed ; nostril in the second third of the length to the orbit. Three scales on canthus rostralis, each deeper than long. Seven flat scales across muzzle between anterior angles of orbits. Two rows between supraorbital series. Scales above temporal muscles rather large, weakly keeled. Five series of infralabial plates, not separated by smaller ones. Dorsal crest rather elevated in adult, termina- ting at the rump. Median caudal crest composed of conical scales, com- mencing above the posterior margin of the femora. Tail cylindrical at base, covered by whorls of prominent scales with conical points which project strongly, and which are separated by one row of smaller flat scales on the upper half of the tail. On the inferior side of the tail the whorl rows are separated by two intervening rows, which are just like them, having a keel and a mucronate apex. Beyond the middle of the length (end lost) the tail is stronghr compressed, but whether this is due to shriveling on drying, I am not sure. Median series of spinous scales uninterrupted. The abdominal scales are larger than the dorsal, which are longer than the lateral scales ; all are subquadrate, and none are keeled. Seven femoral pores. Color above and below, black. Measurements. M. Length from end of muzzle to vent 255 " to line of axilla 125 " " line of auricular meatus 062 Width of head at auricular meatus 042 " " " above " " 035 Length of anterior limb 093 foot 037 " " posterior limb 150 foot 076 I have before me two stuffed specimens of this species, a large one and probably adult, and a smaller and younger one. The former, which I described above, is No. 201 of Sumichrast's collection, and was procured by him at Dondomingvillo, in the State of Oaxaca, and sent to the Smith- sonian Institution. The other specimen was obtained near Batopilas, Chi- huahua, by Mr. Edward Wilkinson, and was recorded by me as Cyclura acantliura in the catalogue of his collection, Proceedings American Philo- sophical Society, 1879, p. 201. It agrees with the type specimen in having the distal two-thirds of the tail strongly compressed. The dorsal crest is much less elevated, probably owing to its younger age. The colors are paler, the prevailing tint being light brown with indistinct darker brown cross-bands. I find a specimen of this species enumerated as var. B. of Ctenosini.ni, acantlmra by Boulenger in the vol. ii of the Catalogue of the Lizards in the British Museum, p. 197, which has just reached me. Cope.1 268 [Oct. 1G, Cte^osaura brevirostris, sp. nov. Head short, -with obtuse muzzle with decurved profile. Eyes large ; nostril near end of muzzle, in the anterior third of distance between end of muzzle and orbit. The scales of the top of the muzzle and of the frontal region, are subquadrate or subhexagonal, and those of the temporal regions are but little longer than wide. All are more or less convex, the temporals most so. There are six rows of scales between the nasal plates, some of which are wider than long. Three canthal scales, of which the anterior is horizontally divided in one specimen. Four rows of wide loreal scales above four rows of narrow scales above the supralabials. Labials 13. Infralabials graduating in size to gulars, but there are five rows of subcarinate scales distinctly larger. Two rows between the subquadrate supraorbitals. Scales of lateral temporal region convex. Scales of belly larger than those of back and sides, which are equal, except those of the axillar, scapular and lateral cervical regions which are nearly granular. Dorsal crest very low, continuous, excepting for a short distance at the base of the tail. Tail nearly cylindric. The scales of the median superior crest are not more prominent than those of the sides of the tail, but they are not interrupted as are the latter. For the terminal three-fifths of the length, the scales of the tail (except below) are equally spinous. For the basal third they are separated above by two rows of non-spinous scales, and on the lower parts of the sides by three rows. In both the specimens the femoral pores are exceedingly small and in- distinct and are five in number on each thigh. The throat is distinctly cross-folded, but very indistinctly longitudinally folded on the middle line. The sides of the neck have two longitudinal folds. The general color of the head and body is a blackish-brown, paler below. This is crossed on the back between the sacral and postscapular regions by five yellow marks, which are bands posteriorly, but become spots an- teriorly. The sides of the neck are of the same color, contrasting strongly with the black of the throat and nape. This yellow space is partially divided by a black line, which extends posteriorly from the angle of the lower jaw. The limbs are blackish, and on the fore arm are numerous yellow scales, and the tibia is faintly cross-banded. The digits and the tail are annulated with blackish brown and yellow rings of about equal width. Measurements. M. Total length to end of tail (end of latter imperfect) 645 Length from muzzle to vent -42 ** " " " line of axilla 097 " " " " " " meatus of ear 045 Width at front of auditory meatus 040 Length (axial) from orbit to end of muzzle 022 " of fore leg 090 " " fore foot 047 1885.] 269 lCope Measurements. M. Length of posterior leg 162 " " posterior foot 085 " " tibia 045 Two specimens of this species are in the National Museum, which were sent from Colima, in Western Mexico, by John Xantus. Ctenosaura teres Harlan, Bocourt, Miss. Sci. Mexique, Reptiles, p. 142 Cyclura teres Harlan, Journ. Acad. Philada., iv, 1825, p. 24G, tab. 16 Wiegmann, Herpert. Mex., 1834, p. 42. " Ctenosaura armata Gray Synopsis Griff. Anim. Kingdom, ix, 1831," Bocourt. Cyclura pectin- ata Weigmann, Herpetol. Mexican a, 1834, p. 42, tab. 2. Dum. Bibron, Erp. Gen., iv, 1837, p. 221. Cyclura acanthura Sumichrast, Univ. et Eevue Suisse ; Archiv. des Sciences Phys. et Nat., 1864, p. 49. Cteno- saura, pecimata Wiegm., Gray Catal. Lizards, Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 49. Boeourt, Miss. Scientifique Mexique, Reptiles, p. 140. Tehuantepec, Sumichrast ; Colima, Xantus; Tampico, Dallas; Vega de Alatorre, Vera Cruz, Comision Geograjica. Subspecies brachylopha Cope. Pour stuffed specimens from Mazatlan differ from others of equal size and age from other localities in the extreme shortness of the processes which compose the dorsal crest. They are in fact merely elongated com- pressed scales, longer than high, except on the interscapular region, where they are as high as long. The same character is seen in young specimens of the ordinary variety. There are three scales on the canthus rostralis, of which the posterior is longer than deep, the second deeper than long, and the third, adjacent to the nares, is deeper than long, and divided into a superior and an inferior plate. The color is apparently green in life, punctulated with blackish brown. The punctulations arrange themselves into a row of median dorsal spots, and in three of the specimens into two transverse bands near the middle of the sides of the abdomen. Tail with broad blackish rings. The measurements of the largest specimen are : Total length, 630 mm ; to vent, 263 mm ; to posterior border of mem- branum tympani, 59 mm ; width of head at front of mem. tympani 40 mm ; length of posterior leg and foot, 124mm ; of posterior foot 52 mm. Mazatlan Bischoff ; Nos. Natl. Museum, 7180-81-82-83. Ctenosaura completa Bocourt, Miss. Scientif. Mexique, Reptiles, p. 145. Ctenosaura pectinata Cope, Proceedings Academy Philada., 1866, p. 124 ; Proceedings Amer. Philos. Soc, 1855, p. 388. Aspinwall, Panama, Gill; Guatemala, San Salvador, Miss. Scientif.; Yucatan, Schott ; Cozumel Id., Ridgicay. Ctenosaura quinquecarinata Gray. Cope, Proceedings Amer. Philo- sophical Society, 1869, 161. Cyclura quinquecarinata Gray, Zoologi- cal Miscellany, p. 59. Enyaliosaurus quinquecarinatus Gray, Csutal. Lizards, Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 192. Tehuantepec, Sumichrad. Cope.] -1 ' v) [Oct. 16, CACHRYX Cope. Proceedings Academy Philada., 1866, p. 124. This genus is of the type of Ctenosaura, differing only in the characters of its tail. It lacks the terminal portion which is in that and other genera free from spinous scales. It is not in my opinion allied to Urocentrum or Hoplocercus as suggested by Bocourt, genera which belong to the terres- trial division of the family, or Humivagie. Cachryx defensor Cope. Proceeds. Acad. Phila., 1866, p. 124. Pro- ceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc, 1869, p. 169, pi. 10. Bocourt, Miss. Sci. Mexique, Reptiles, p. 148, pi. xvii. bis. figs. 12, 12a. Yucatan, Schott. BRACHYLOPHUS Cuvier. Regne Animal, edit, ii, p. 41. Dumeril Bibron, Erp. Gen., iv, p. 225. Gray, Catal. Brit. Mus., 1845, 187. Fitzinger Systema Reptilium, 1843, p. 55. Chloroscartes Giinther, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1862. Brachylophus fasciatus Brong. Cuv. Regne Animal, ii edit., p. 41. Dum. Bibron, Erp. Gen., iv, 1837, p. 226. Gray, Catal. Liz. B. M., 187. Chloroscartes fasciatus Giinther, Proceeds. Zool. Soc. London, 1862, pi. xxv. Feejee Is. IGUANA Laurenti. Specimen Synopsis Reptilium, 1768, p. 47. Dumeril Bibron., Erp. Gen., iv, 1837, p. 199. Gray, Catal. Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 186. Hypsilophus Wag- ler, Nat. Syst. Amphib., 1830, p. 147. AmbUjrhynchus "Bell" Wagl., 1. c, p. 148 (nee Bellii.). Iguana tuberculata Laurenti. Subspecies tuberculata Laurenti, 1. c, p. 49. Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen., iv, p. 203 ; Gray. Catal. Liz. Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 186. South America, east of the Andes ; Lesser Antilles. Subspecies rhtnolopha Wiegm. Iguana rMnolopha Wiegmann, Her- petol. Mexicana, 1834, i, p. 44. Dum. Bibr., Erpet. Gen., iv, p. 207. Iguana tuberculata var. "Wiegmann, Isis, 1828, p. 364 ; Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1869, p. 161. Costa Rica, Oabb ; Tehuantepec, SumicJirast ; Colima, Xantus ; Cozu- mel, Yucatan, Ridgway. Tierra Caliente of Mexico. Iguana delicatissima Laurenti. Specimen Syn. Reptilium, p. 48, 1768. Gray, Catal. Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 187. I. nudkollis Cuv., Regne Animal, ii, p. 40. Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen., 1837, iv, p. 208. Guadalupe, Nevis, Obcr. 1885.J £ i 1 LCope. CONOLOPHUS Fitzinger. Systema Eeptilium, 1843, p. 55. Boulenger, Catal. Lizards, Brit. Mus., 1885, ii, p. 1S6. Amblyrhynchus pars Dum. Bibr., iv, p. 197. Trachycepha- lus Gray, Catal. Liz. Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 188. M. Boulenger (Catalogue Lizards Brit. Museum, 1885) first pointed out the characters which distinguish this genus from Brachylophus. Conolophus subcristatus Gray. Amblyrhynchus subcristatus Gray, Zool. Misc., p. 6, 1831. Zoology Beechy's Voyage Rept., p. 93, 1839. Amblyrhynchus demarlii Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen., iv, p. 197, 1837 ; Bell Zool. Beagle, iii, p. 22, 1843, pi. ii. Conolophus demarlii Fitz., Syst. Rept. Conolophus subcristatus Steindachner, Festschr. K. K. Zool. Bot. Gess. "Wien ; Die Schl. u. Eid. d. Galapagos Ins. 22, 1876, tab. iv, v, figs. 6-9 ; vi, figs. 4-6 ; vii, 5-8. Trachyphalus subcristatus Gray, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 188. Galapagos Ids. AMBLYRHYNCHUS Bell. Zoological Journal, London, 1825, p. 195. Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen., iv, 204 pars. Oreocephalus Gray, Catal. Liz., Brit. Mus., 1845, p. 189. Steindachner states that the Arnblyrhynchus cristatus possesses no gular cross-fold. I know of no other ground for separating it generic-ally from the Conolophus subcristatus. Amblyrhynctius cristatus Bell, loc cit. Tab. xii. Do. Voyage of the Beagle, iii, p. 23. Steindnachner Festschrift der K. K. Zoolog. Botan. Gess., "Wien, 1876 ; Die Schlangen u. Eidechsen der Galapagos Ins., p. 16, tab. iii, v, vi, figs. 1-4. Hypsilophus cristatus Fitzinger. Ambly- rhynchus ater Gray. Synops. Rept. Griff. Anim. Kingdom, ix, p. 37. Dum. Bibr., Erp. Gen., iv, p. 196. Oreocephalus cristatus Gray. Catal. Brit. Mus., 189. Galapagos Ids. Thirteenth Contribution to the Herpetology of Tropical America. By E. D. Cope. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, Nov. SO, 18S5.) I. Nicaragua, Bransford. Dr. J. F. Bransford, U. S. N., has sent from time to time collections from Central America to our scientific institutions, which have thrown much light on the zoology of the regions he has visited. In 1874, I had the privilege of publishing a report on a collection obtained by him in Nicaragua* ; and later (1875) I published an accountf of a collection sent * Proceedings Academy Philada., 1S74, p. 64. t Journal Academy Philada., Ib75, p. 155. Cope.l ^ * ^ [Nov. 20, by him from Panama. On these occasions I defined six species not previ- ously known to science. On the present occasion I am able to determine the contents of a new collection obtained by Dr. Brausford in Nicaragua. This embraces thirty species, of which ten are new to science. The col- lection adds very much to our knowledge of the range of various species, both as to their southward and northward extension. The specimens are the property of the National Museum at Washington, which institution placed them in my hands for identification and description. BATRACHIA. Anura. 1. Bufo haematittcus Cope, Nos. 14178, 14181. Abundant. 2. Bufo marinus L., Nos. 14198, 14213. One specimen. 3. Bufo valliceps Wiegm., Nos. 14194-5-88. Three specimens. 4 Dendrobates tinctorius Ichn., No. 14183. Abundant. 5. Dendrobates typographus Keferst. No. 14189. Abundant. 6. Engystoma pictiventre, sp. nov. One small metatarsal tubercle. Muzzle anterior to eye equal to twiee long diameter of latter, and projecting well beyond the mouth. Nostrils lateral-terminal. No fold across occiput. Skin everywhere smooth. First finger shorter than second, which reaches end of muzzle when the limb is extended. When the hind limb is extended forwards, the distal end of the astragalus reaches the extremity of the muzzle. First toe very short ; second a good deal longer than fifth ; fourth elongate. Color above olivaceous brown. A black band with a very narrow pale superior border extends from the end of the muzzle to the lower part of the groin, the superior border descending posteriorly. No inguinal spot. Below black, with white spots. Those on the abdomen are very large ; those on the femora and tibia are smaller, and those on the thorax and gular region are still smaller. Total length of head and body, 22.5 mm. ; of posterior leg, commenc- ing at groin, 29 mm. ; length of posterior foot, 14 mm., of which the astragalar portion measures 4.5 mm. No. 14196 ; National Museum. 7. Hypsiboas miliarius, sp. nov. A species above medium size, in which the pollex is free from the index for most of its length, and terminates in a flattened cone, instead of a curved, acute spine. Vomerine teeth in two transverse series behind the posterior borders of the choanie, and within the lines of their internal borders. Ostea phar- yngea half the size of the cb.oan.ae. Tongue subround, feebly emarginate posteriorly. Eyes large and prominent. Head Hal and depressed, wider than long, muzzle broadly rounded and with perpendicular profile ; and as long as the orbit's diameter. Canthus rostralis almost wanting, very 1885.] 4*3 [Cope. concave. Nostrils terminal and lateral. Tympanum three -fifths diameter of orbit, larger than digital discs. Both anterior and posterior feet pal- mate to the bases of the last phalanges of the longest digits, except be- tween the second and third anterior digits, which is only palmate to the bases of the penultimate digits. When the hind leg is extended the heel reaches the end of the muzzle. The posterior digits are short, but two phalanges projecting beyond the knee when the leg is closed. The pal- mation is wide, and extends a short distance between the external meta- tarsals. A well-marked cuneiform tubercle, with slightly free apex. The under surfaces have the usual areolation. The superior surfaces are thickly covered with small tubercles, which are largest and most prominent on the top of the head, where some of them are subspinous. There is a serrate narrow free dermal margin on the external edge of the fore leg, from the elbow to the end of the fifth digit, and a similar one on the ex- ternal edge of the posterior foot. There is none on the side of the body. Length of head and body M. .062 ; length of head on middle line to line connecting posterior extremities of maxillary bones, .017 ; width of head at same point, .025 ; length of anterior limb from axilla, .03.5 ; do. of fore-arm, .011 ; length of carpus and digit, .019. Length of thigh from groin, .025 ; of tibia, .032 ; of tarsus, .019 ; of foot to end of fourth digit, .025. The color of all the upper surfaces is a dark plum or mulberry, with an obscure coarse reticulation of a darker shade. The color of the inferior surfaces everywhere is yellowish, spotted with the color of the dorsal region. At each heel, and just below the vent, there is a yellow spot. The webs of both fore and hinder feet are plum-color, except the borders, which are yellowish. The digits are yellowish on the under sides. There is a spot of pale color on the upper lip below the space between the orbit and the tympanum, and some less distinct spots on the lip anterior to it. The dermal processes of the fore- arm and tarsus are light yellowish. Collection No. 14193. This fine species approaches nearer in coloration, dermal character, and form of palmation to the Hyla marmorata than to any other species of that genus. The remarkable development of the pollex, however, places it in the genus Hypsiboas, although it differs materially in the details of this part from the known species of the genus. 8. Hypsiboas albomarginatus Spix. Nos. 14190-91-92. One of the three specimens has a yellow dorsolateral band on each side. 9. Hyla quinquevittata, sp. nov. Rather small. External fingers with a slight rudiment of a web at their bases. Toes with web only reaching the middle of the penultimate pha- langes of the third and fifth digits. Vomerine teeth in two rather large rounded fasciculi close together on the anterior half of the space between the choanal Tongue a little longer than wide, feebly notched. Tympanic membrane round, two-fifths the long diameter of the eye-fissure. The PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2l. PRINTED FEBRUARY 11, 1886. Cope.] ^ i ^ [Nov. 20, muzzle is rather acuminate and projects beyond the mouth. The canthus rostralis is distinct and concave. The skin is perfectly smooth on all the superior surfaces. The wrist of the extended fore limb extends to the end of the muzzle ; while the heel extends a little beyond the same point. Length of head and body M. .029 ; of fore-leg, .017 ; of hind leg, .043 ; of hind foot, .019 ; of tarsus, .009 ; of tibia, .015. Color above light gray, with five parallel dark- gray longitudinal bands. The median band is somewhat indistinct posterior to the interscapular region and in front of the sacrum. Anteriorly it expands so as to form a large subtriangular spot between the eyes, the apex being posterior. The femur has one cross-band ; the cubitus two, and the tibia three. Inferior and concealed surfaces unspotted. Coll. No. 14187. This species is, in many technical respects, similar to the Hyla eximia, Baird. The hinder legs are much longer ; the muzzle is more acuminate, and the color bands are much wider. The frog is probably of a different color in life. 10. Agalychnis helen^ Cope. Proceeds. Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1884, p. 182. A larger specimen than the type, in which yellow border of the lateral purple stripe, and the bars which cross it, are wider. There are also traces of pale cross-bands on the back. No. 14186. 11. Lithodytes diastema Cope. One specimen ; No. 14209. 12. Lithodytes bransfordii, sp. nov. Represented by a number of individuals of small size, but which are adult. The characters are well marked. The legs are short, the posterior when extended only bringing the heel to the orbit. The vomerine teeth are in two transverse or slightly arched series, near together well behind the line of the posterior nares, and not extending exterior to the middle of the latter. The tympanic disc is large, in four of the specimens equal- ing the diameter of the eye-fissure, in three others not exceeding two- thirds of that size. The muzzle does not project, and is slightly truncate, and is about equal in length to the diameter of the orbit. The nostril is nearly terminal -lateral. Canthus rostralis distinct, obtuse, nearly straight. The toes are entiiely free, and the dilatations are moderate. Two meta- tarsal tubercles, the inner larger. The skin of the back is thrown into delicate longitudinal parallel folds, which are easily lost. Length of head and body, M. .0255 ; length of anterior limb, .013 ; of posterior limb from groin, .030; of foot, .017 ; of tarsus, .0075 ; of tibia, .012. In the color there is much pink on the upper and concealed surfaces. There are two dark spots on the lip, one below each canthus of the eye. There is a large more or less obsolete spot behind and above the axilla, with an oblique posterior border. There is a dark spot on the parietal region and generally one between the anterior parts of the orbits. There 1885.] 275 [Cope. is generally a light open chevron pointing forwards across the middle of the back, with a dark one in front of it. In the largest specimen a pink hand extends from the orbit posteriorly to the ilium. Posterior face of femur brown with light specks or finely brown mottled. Other lower surfaces -whitish, except that in a few specimens the gular region is obscurely brown mottled. This species belongs to the short legged group represented by the L. diastema, and need not therefore be compared with the L. podiciferus, muricinus and rhodopis, where the heel reaches much beyond the muzzle. From L. diastema it differs in the much longer posterior foot, and in the close approximation of its teeth, which form a row and not a fascicle. The tympanum is at all times much larger and more distinct, although it is variable in diameter. This species is dedicated to Doctor John F. Bransford, U. S. N., whose researches have thrown much light on the fauna of Nicaragua. Museum ; No. 14200. 13. LlTHODYTES KANOIDES, Sp. UOV. This form is a little nearer to some already known than the last de- scribed. The heel of the extended hind leg reaches exactly the end of the muzzle, being thus still shorter than in the group above mentioned, which is represented by the L. rhodopis and its allies. The vomerine teeth, unlike any of the forms mentioned, are in small fasciculi, which are not widely separated, and which are entirely behind the line of the posterior border of the nares, and within that of the internal border. A dis- tinctive character is the presence of a small web between the toes, which is nearly as well developed as in the Hylodes (Lihyla) guentherii Keferst. The diameter of the tympanic disc is about half that of the ball of the eye. The tongue is a parallelogrammic oval, and is entire posteriorly. The head is relatively rather long, and the muzzle is acuminate. The muzzle projects somewhat beyond the mouth, and be- yond the nares, which are above the edge of the symphysis mandibuli. Its length a little "exceeds that of the eyeball, which itself is more than half larger than the interorbital width. The canthus rostralis is distinct and nearly straight. The digital dilatations are truncate. The external metatarsal tubercle is obsolete, and the internal one is small. The skin is nearly smooth, but a pair of feeble folds form an obscure pattern on the scapular regions. Length of head and body, M. .0265 ; do. to line connecting posterior borders of tympana, .10 ; width at anterior borders of do:, .0105 ; length of fore limb from axilla, .0155 ; of hind limb from groin, .041 ; of hind foot, .019 ; of tarsus, .0075 ; of tibia, .014. Color dark ashen above, darker on the head. A pale cross-band across frontoparietal region. Four large dark spots on upper lip, commencing at end of muzzle. Limbs dark cross-banded ; three on tibia and two on femur. Sides and lower surfaces white, the former and the gular and Cope.] ^ i " [Nov. 20, pectoral regions thickly speckled with dark ash ; a few larger splotches of the same in front of aDd at the groin. The cross-hands of the tibia ex- tend on the skin that covers the flexors of the foot so as to be seen from below. Four specimens ; No. 14179. 14. Hylodes polypttchus, sp. nov. Vomerine teeth in two transverse series behind the posterior borders and within the lines of the internal borders of the choanre. Tympanic disc a vertical oval, the long diameter two-thirds that of the orbit. Limbs short, the heel only reaching the muzzle. The toes are rather long, have rather small oval dilatations and are perfectly free at the base. The head is short, and the muzzle has an oval outline, and projects a little beyond the mouth. Its length anterior to the orbit equals the diameter of the same, and the nostril is nearly terminal. Two distinct metatarsal tuber- cles, the internal with a ratber prominent apex. The tubercles below the bases of the phalanges are rather prominent. The skin of the abdomen is areolate. That of the upper surfaces is plicate and tuberculate. The plicae are interrupted, and may be regarded as forming eight longitudinal series, the external of which are dorso-lateral. Below these the sides are tubercular ; as are also the spaces between the dorsal plica1, the superior surfaces of the limbs, and the top of the head, especially the superior face of the eyelids. An external fold on the distal half of the tarsus. Length of head and body, .027 ; of head to posterior line of tympanum, .009 ; width at anterior line of do., .011. Length of fore limb, .015 ; of hind limb, .037 ; of hind foot, .018 ; of tarsus, .0073; of tibia, .012. Color above dark ashen, with indistinct shades. Four dark spots on upper lip ; a dark shade above and posterior to axilla ; four narrow black cross-bands on thigh, two across tibia and four across external side of foot. Inferior surfaces dirty white. Posterior face of thigh and gular region thickly clouded with brown. Two specimens ; No. 14199. 15. Ranula chrysoprasina Cope. Several specimens ; No. 14180. REPTILIA. Lacertilia. 16. Amiva festiva Licht. et Von M. All of the specimens (four) have but three supraocular scuta. Nos. 14204-5. 17. Corytiiophanes CRiSTATus. No. 14202. One specimen. 18. Anolis copei Boc. No. 14210. One specimen. 19. Anolis rodeuiguezii Boc. Cope, Proceedings Amer. Philos. Soc, 1885, p. 391. Three specimens ; No. 13721. 20. Anolis crassulus Cope. One specimen ; No. 14208. 21. Anolis capito Peters. Three specimens ; No. 11203-12. 22. ANOLIS OXYLOPHUS Cope. Four specimens ; No. 14211. 23. Anolis quaggulus Cope. Numerous specimens ; No. 14208. The 1885.] ^ < « [Cope. coloration of none of these individuals agrees with the type in having the vertical black lines, on the sides which I have described. The dorsal chevrons are frequently present, but they are sometimes replaced by large pale brown rhombs or a uniform metallic pale brown. The keels of the ventral scales are sometimes obsolete. The scales round the occipi- tal are generally keeled, as well as those of the rest of the head. 24. Sph^erodactylus hojiolepis, sp. nov. Scales of upper surfaces small, flat, not granular nor keeled, a little smaller than those of the abdomen. Rostral plate large. Labials £, first inferior labial corresponding to three superior labials. Muzzle a little longer than distance from eye to auricular meatus, and one and two-thirds times the length of the eye's diameter. Scales of lower surface of normal tail similar to those of upper surface. Brownish cream color with dark brown bands, longitudinal on the head, and transverse on neck, body and tail. There are seven lines on the head, one median, and three on each side. The inferior is short and is anterior to the auricular meatus ; the second extends from the end of the muzzle through the eye to the neck, and the third runs backwards from the super- ciliary region to an equal length. The cross-bands are not so wide as the spaces between them. One is at the nape, one crosses the shoulders, one the middle of the body and one the groin. There are four complete annuli on the tail. This species is of very small size. Total length M. .024 ; of head and body, .016 ; of head to auricular meatus, .004. No. 14207. This Sphterodactylus is nearest the S. sputator of Cuba. In that species the scales are smaller, there are subcaudal scutella, and the head-bands are less numerous and distinct. 25. Rhadin^ea decorata* Gunther. No. 14217; * A species of this getius in my collection from the State of Hidalgo, Meixco, is apparently uudescribed. I call it Rhadincea qujnquelineaia. It is nearest the H. tceniata Peters, but has a much shorter tail, and differs in coloration. The scales are in seventeen longitudinal rows, and as in other species of Rhadinsea, areporeless. There is b ut one preocular plate, which does not approach the frontal. The loreal is longer than high; postoculars 2 ; temporals 1-2. Superior labials, eight, all higher than long, excepting the last, which is as high as long; the third, fourth and fifth entering the orbit. Parietal plates elongate, exceeding the frontal. Anterior border of frontal angulate, its length about equal to the lateral border. Inferior labials ten, the pregeneials considerably shorter than the postgeneials. Gastrosteges 179; anal 1-1; urosteges 77. Total length M. .438 ; of tail, .115 ; to canthus oris .011. Color light brown above; below to ends of gastrosteges, and upper lip, yellow. A black band runs along the middle of the fourth row of scales, and a dusky one on the adjacent halves of the seventh and eighth rows. A narrow black line along the median row. The lateral band extends through the eye to the end of the muzzle, crossing the tops of the 8th, 7th, 6th and 5th labials, becoming darker anteriorly. The band of ground-color above it extends to the eye, narrowing in front. The three dorsal bands unite into a wide brown one on the nape, which spreads out and covers the top of the head. The last two maxillary teeth are much stronger than the others. Discovered by my friend Dr. Santiago Bernad ; two specimens; a third from the State of Pueblo. Cope.] -"'O [Sov. 26. Ophiboltjs polyzonus micropholis Cope. No. 14214. 27. Herpetodryas melas, sp. nov. Scales in ten longitudinal series, all smooth, those of the median rows larger than those of the lateral, and rather smaller than the parietal scuta. Parietals rather short and wide, openly emarginate hehind. Nine superior labials, all longer than high, the fourth, fifth and sixth entering the orbit. Nasals well developed ; loreal square ; oculars 1-2 ; temporals 1-1-1. Muzzle rather short, and eye large ; diameter of the latter equal length from orbit to nostril. Frontal not much concave at sides. Inferior labials ten, fifth longest, narrow, and the last one in contact with the geneials. Postgeneials longer than pregeneials. Gastrosteges 158 ; anal 1-1 ; uro- steges 139. Total length M. 1.210; length of tail, .470; length to rictus oris, .029. Shining black, except on the superior labial scuta and anterior half of body, which are cream-colored. The ends of the light gastrosteges re- main black. Here and there a black scale has a white edge, and several present this character distinctly just posterior to the angle of the mandible on the neck. No. 14219. This interesting species is nearest to the Herpetodryas grandisquamis Peters (Cope, Journal Academy Philada., 1875, p. 135), but differs in having the scales smaller, without keels, and in ten longitudinal rows. Peters placed the latter in Spilotes, but I have not adopted this arrange- ment, since like the H. melas, it has a divided anal plate, and scales with- out fossae in an even instead of an odd number. These characters indicate clearly that its place is in Herpetodryas. 28. Dendrophidium dendrophis* Shi. Herpetodryas poitei D. & B. Two specimens (Nos. 14215-20) adult and half-grown. The latter has the coloration ascribed to this species, while the cross lines and lateral spots are obsolete in the former. There are no markings on the head and neck of the adult. The top of the head is red in the adult. Oculars * A species allied to the D. dendroph is was sent to the Smithsouian Institution from Guatemala by H. Hague, which has not yet, so far as I am aware, received a place in the system. It may be called Dendrophidium chloroticum. The scales are in seventeen rows, of which four rows on each side are smooth on the ante- rior part of the body, and only two smooth on the posterior. The pari etal plates are a little longer than the frontal, which has straight sides. The eye is large, its anteroposterior diameter equaling the width of the superciliary and frontal scuta combined, and equaling the length of the muzzle to the middle of the prenasal plate. Oculars 1-2. Temporals 2-2, all narrow. Superior labials nine, the last three longer than high. Loreal large, higher than long; nasals rather small. Gastrosteges 169; anal 1-1 ; urosteges, 117. Color above, including ends of gastrosteges, green ; below yellow. On stretching the skin it is seen to be black between tlie scales of the sides of every second or third row, in oblique lines running upwards and forwards. Total length M. 1.018; of tail, .311; to rictus oris .027. This species is abundantly different from the D. melanotropis Cope, but is near to the D. dendrophis Schl. The muzzle is shorter than in our specimens of the latter, and in those figured by Jan, and the number of keeled rows of scales is less, nine to fllteen. The color is entirely different. 1885.] ^* J I Cope. 1-2. Three temporals border the labials above, except on one side of the younger specimen where there are but two, as in the individuals figured by Jan in Iconographic Generale des Ophidiens Livr. 31, PI. iii. The speci- mens of the species hitherto described are from Cayenne. 29. Hapsidophrys saturatus Cope. Leptophis saturatus Cope, Journal Academy Philada., 1875, p. 133 ; PI. 28, fig. 10. The frontal plate, in the single specimen sent, has its lateral borders straight and not contracted as in the type specimen figured. No. 14216.. Hapsidophrys Fisch. differs from Leptophis in having a loreal plate, and from Philothamnus Smith, in having keeled scales. Its American species are H. mexicanus D. & B. ; H. diplotropis Gthr. and H saturatus Cope. To Leptophis belong L. bilineatus (Diplotropis Gthr.) , L. occidentalis Gthr., L. sargii Fisch., and L. prozstans Cope. To Philothamnus must be referred P. mruginosus Cope ; P. modestus Gthr. and P. depressirostris Cope. 30. Elaps nigrocinctus Gird. No. 14214 ; one specimen. 31. Elaps multifasctatus Jan. No. 14218 ; one specimen. General Eemarks. A general analysis of the Herpetological fauna of Nicaragua cannot yet be given, especially as the distribution of species within the State has not been furnished by explorers. It will however be of interest to note the following points : Of the thirty-one species enumerated in the preceding catalogue four are widely distributed South American forms, viz : Bufo marinus ; Hyp- siboas albomarginatus ; Dendrobaies tinctorius and Dendrophidium dendro- phis. Three are especially Mexican forms, although they extend as far south as Costa Rica, viz : Bufo valliceps ; Rhadincea decorata and Ophi- bolus polyzonus. The remainder are especially Central American forms, which have been found either in Guatemala, Costa Rica or Panama, or are new to science. Of these the number having a southern range is considerably in excess of those ranging to the north of Nicaragua. II. Panama Nelson. The following species were obtained at Panama by Dr. George W. Nel- son, and sent to the National Museum at Washington. Two of the spe- cies are new to science. Batrachia. 1. Herpele ochrocephala Cope. Proceedings American Philosoph. Society, 1885, p. 171. Ccecilia ochrocephala Cope, Proceedings Acad- emy Philadelphia, 1866, p. 132 ; Brocchi Mission Scientif. Mexique. One specimen ; No. 14116. Ophidia. 2. Rhadincea fulviceps, sp. nov. Scales in seventeen longitudinal rows. Two preoculars, the inferior Cope.] 280 [Nov. 20, small and occupying a notch between the third and fourth superior labials. Preorbital part of head short. Interuasals and prefontals broader than long. Frontals, supraorbitals and occipitals rather large. Rostral plate wider tban high, rather prominent. Postnasal higher than prenasal, its poste- rior border an arc of a circle. Loreal higher than long. Postoculars two, the inferior the smaller. Temporals 1-2-3. Superior labials eight, all longer than high, excepting the sixth, which is as high as long ; the fourth and fifth bounding the orbit. Inferior labials nine, fifth largest, and the last one in contact with the geneials. Postgeneials longer than pregenials. Gastrosteges 144 ; anal 1-1 ; urosteges 109. Color above dark brown, with three darker brown longitudinal bands. The lateral one is on the second and third rows of scales, and the median stripe occupies four rows. Below yellow, with a serrate blackish border on each side, due to the presence of an angular spot at the extremity of each two gastrosteges, which covers the suture between them. Top of head yellowish-brown, quite distinct from the body, and without markings. Sides of head darker ; lips yellow, each plate with a black border, and more or less numerous black spots. One of these, larger than the rest, extends upwards towards the line of the posterior extremities of the parie- tal scuta. Another extends a short distance posterior to the angle of the mouth. Total length, M. .341 ; of tail, .148 ; to rictus oris, .007. Collection, No. 14118. This small species is nearest to the B. ignita (Cope, Journal Academy Phila., 1875, p. 140), in technical characters, but the inferior preocular has a different position, and the coloration is entirely distinct. No. 14118. 3. Leptognathus stratissima, sp. nov. This species belongs to the section of the genus with elongate colubri- form geneial scuta, smooth scales, and a larger vertebral series. The scales of the vertebral series are longer than wide, and are truncate at the apex, and do not exceed the other scales so much as is seen in some species. This species differs from most of those of the same section, in having the loreal entirely separated from the orbit by the well-developed preocular. Scales in seventeen series. Internasal and prefrontal scuta broader than long. Frontal large, wide. Parietals large, ioreal as high as long at base. Oculars 1-2, the inferior postocular much smaller than the superior. Superior labials eight, the third, fourth and fifth entering orbit. Tempo- rals 2-3. Inferior labials six, in contact with geneials, the sixth separated by a scale from the postgeneial for most of its length. Gastrosteges, 332 ; anal, 1-1 ; urosteges, 130. Total length, M. .381; of tail, .100; to rictus oris, .008. Coll., No. 14121. Ground color light gray, which is covered by the following markings : There are sixty-nine cross-bands of a deep brown, which narrow a little on the sides, and have broadly rounded extremities at the second row of 1885] i"*5-*- [Cope. scales. The centres of the spaces between them on the sides are occupied by a light brown spot. Each gastrostege has a dark brown spot on its extremity, and the rest of the scutum is thickly dusted with brown. Thirty-nine cross-bands on upper surface of tail. Three brown chevrons on the parietal region, directed backwards, the anterior commencing with the superciliary. Muzzle and sides of head brown speckled ; throat and chin immaculate. 4. Dipsas cenchoa L. Nos. 14119-20. 5. Drymobius boddaertii Seetzen. No. 14117. 6. Elaps nigrocinctus * Girard. No. 14115. 7. Bothrops atrox L. No. 14114. III. Chiriqjji. Htla microcephala, sp. nov. Fingers free ; toes webbed nearly to the palettes of the third and fifth digits. Vomerine teeth in two fascicles between the nares, with their anterior edge in line with the anterior edge of the latter. Membranum tympani round, its diameter one-third that of the eye. The latter equals the length of the muzzle, which is short and rather deep, and not promi- nent. The external nostril is at one-fourth the length posterior to the apex. The head is small in its dimensions, its length to the line of the posterior border of the tympana entering the length of the head and body, three and a half times. The eyes are little prominent. The general form is slender, and the hinder legs are long, the heel reaching to beyond the end of the muzzle. The metatarsal tubercles are not distinguishable as dermal differentiations. Digital dilatations not so large as the tympanic membrane. Skin everywhere smooth on superior surfaces. Length of head and body, .0275 ; do. of anterior limb from axilla, .014 ; of posterior * A species of this genus has been obtained by Francis Sumichrast, on the Pacific side of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, which I believe to be undescribed. It is referred to in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 1869, p. 102, as Elops aglceope ; but it is distinct from this species. I propose that it be called Elaps ephippifer. It has the seven superior labials and fifteen rows of scales of the most of 1 lie American Elaps, and the labials are separated from parietals by one row of temporals. The rostral plate is transverse and not par- ticularly prominent, and its posterior border is very openly angulate. The frontal plate has long parallel lateral borders, and much shorter posterior ones. Gastrosteges, 218; anal divided; urosteges, 43. There are seventeen black rings on the body, which encircle the abdomen, covering a length of four and a half scales and five or six gastrosteges. They are separated by nine or ten scales, and have a wide yellow border of one and a half or two scales in width. The entire space between these yellow borders is occupied by a large black spot, which descends on each side to the second row of scales. The remaining space between the yellow borders is red. There is a wide black entire collar, which cuts off the apex of the parietal shields. The muzzle and front are black as far as the anterior part of the parietals. The wide yellow borders in this species are like those of the E. euryxanUuis, while the black saddles represent the black spots of the E. agloeope. PROC. AMER. PHTLOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2j. PRINTED FEBRUARY 11, 1886. Cope.] ^82 [Nov. 20, limb from groin, .0415 ; do. of posterior foot, .019 ; of tarsus, .0095 ; of tibia, .0145. Width of head at anterior border of tympana, .008. Rich cream-color on all the upper surfaces, on one specimen tinged with brown. Below lighter cream-color. A pale brown band with a narrow yellow superior margin from the end of the muzzle to the groin. The brown tint fades out rapidly below, and on the posterior half of the side is reduced to a narrow line. A narrow brown band on each side of the back, which extend as far forward as the orbit. This species is well characterized, having little resemblance to any other member of the genus. It was taken along a mountain stream in the department of Chiriqui. Two specimens ; No. 13473. IV. City op Chihuahua, Wilkinson. Information as to the character of the reptilian fauna of the central part of the State of Chihuahua, has been a desideratum. A few specimens from the region were sent many years ago to the Museum of the Smithso- nian Institution by Mr. John Potts, and are recorded in the report of the Mexican Boundary Survey by Professor Baird. A collection from the southern part of the Sierra Madre in this State, from the mining district of Batopilas, was sent me for study by Mr. Wilkinson, and was reported on in the Proceedings of this Society for 1879, p. 201. That region is how- ever much to the south of the one represented by the present collection, and is much more elevated. The great plain in which the city of Chihuahua stands is arid, and the vegetation is generally sparse. Low mountains bound it on the east and west. The formation of the surface of the plain is a coarse drift composed principally of little or much rounded fragments of basalt, more or less cemented together by a calcareous mud. The same formation composes the plains of Southern New Mexico. The vegetation of this plain consists of mesquit, Fouquieria, Yuccas and Opuntias. South of the city is a considerable tract of grassy country. The city stands on a creek, whose waters are used by the inhabitants for supporting a cultivation which produces a most agreeable contrast to the general aspect of the country. Mr. Wilkinson's collection indicates that reptiles are numerous, since he obtained, in a short time, 471 individuals. These only represent twenty- six species and subspecies. They are as follows. Lacertilia. 1. Phrynosoma cornutum Harl. Abundant ; Nos. 14228-52-90, 14300. 2. Phrynosoma modestum Gird. Abundant ; Nos. 14229-51-91 ; 14301. 3. Holbrookia texana Trosch. Abundant. Nos. 14234-38-43-47, 14309. 4. Holbrookia maculata B. & G. Abundant. Nos. 14239-40-45, 14310. 5. Crotaphytus collaris Say. Moderately abundant. Nos. 14300-7. 1885.1 ^83 [Cope- 6. Uta bicarinata Dumeril. One specimen ; No. 14248. The most northern locality for this lizard. 7. Sceloporus torquatus Green & Peale ; subspecies poinsettii Bd. & Gird. Two specimens ; Nos. 14233-43. 8. Sceloporus undulatus Latr. Abundant ; many of the males are without the undulating cross-lines. The most southern locality in Mexico. 9. Sceloporus grammicus Wiegm. One specimen ; No. 14246. I men- tion here that the range of the S. variabilis has been recently extended a considerable distance to the northward of the limit, Monterey, which 1 gave in my synopsis of the species of Sceloporus in the Pro- ceedings of this Society, 1885, p. 397. Mr. Wm. Taylor has found it near San Diego in S. W. Texas, and Mr. Eugene Aaron has procured it from near Corpus Christi. For specimens from the latter place I am indebted to my friend Mr. J. L. Wortman. 10. Cnemidophorus sexlineatus Linn. Very abundant in three princi- pal subspeciflc forms, which received names from Messrs. Baird and Girard. The characters displayed by these forms are instructive as showing how a longitudinally striped coloration may pass by insensi- ble gradations into a cross-banded one. The subspecies and their forms are distinguished as follows : Six longitudinal narrow stripes with unspotted interspaces subsp. sexlineatus. Six stripes as above, the dark interspaces with small white spots subsp. guttatus. Six stripes as above,- wider, and very obscure ; small obscure spots subsp. No. 3. Six stripes as above, but wider, and the spots enlarged so as to be con- fluent occasionally with the light stripes subsp. No. 4. The stripes wider, and the spots confluent with them, so as to reduce the dark ground color to a series of rows of short transverse cross-lines. . subsp. No. 5. The short black cross-bars more or less confluent across the positions of the light stripes, forming transverse cross-bands, which are generally best developed on the sides subsp. tigris. Of the above forms all are numerously represented in the collection. The modification of the color pattern described, is not entirely due to age, as some of the largest specimens belong to subspecies guttatus, and No. 3. Nevertheless small specimens predominate in the subspecies sexlineatus, and large ones in the subspecies tigris. Subspecies No. 4 presents a good many small specimens. The form I described as G communis (Proceed- ings Am. Phil. Soc, 1877, p. 95), from Southern Mexico, has the colora- tion of the subspecies guttatus and No. 4, but differs from them in possess- ing a frenoocular plate. In a few cases, however, this plate is wanting in Cope.] -"* [Nov. 20, specimens from the same locality, so that the form communis had best be regarded as another subspecies of the G. sexlirieatus. The latter is the only one which is found in the Eastern and Austroriparian districts of North America. Subspecies sexlineatus ; Nos. 14236-41-49-69 ; 14305. Subspecies guttatus B. & G. 14231-41-305-308. Subspecies No. 3 ; 14231-50-308. Subspecies No. 4 ; 14241-50-302-5. Subspecies No. 5 ; 14237-50-302. Subspecies Tigris B. & G. 14237-50-302. 11. Eumeces obsoletqs B. & G. Two specimens ; No. 14244. Ophidia. 12. Salvador^ grahami/e Bd. Gird. Two specimens ; Nos. 14255-95. 13. Rmnechis elegans Kenn. Arizona elegans Kennicott, U. S. Mex. Boundary Survey, Reptiles, page 18, Plate . Pityophis elegans Cope, Check List Reptiles N. Amer., p. 39. This species exhibits all the characteristics of the genus Rhinechis, which is represented by a single species of Southeastern Europe, the It. scalaris. The genus agrees with Pityophis and Spilotes in its entire anal scutum ; but differs from the former in having but two postfrontal scuta, and from the latter in its prominent rostral plate. The Chihuahua specimen of this rare species differs somewhat from the type. It possesses twenty-seven rows of scales. The sides are of the darker tint of the dorsal spots, from which it results that the light inter- spaces of the dorsal region are entirely enclosed. There is no distinct row of lateral spots. No. 14298. 14. Pityophis sati Schl., subsp. mexicanus D. &B. Several specimens ; Nos. 14222-66-93-94. 15. Coluber emoryi B. & G. Five specimens, two with twenty-nine, and three with twenty-seven rows of scales. Most of them have the normal number of labial plates, eight ; but one has nine on one side, and one has abnormally, ten on both sides. Nos. 14223-53-62-84-99. 16. Bascanium: t^eniatum Hallow. One specimen ; No. 14272. 17. Bascanium flagelliforme Catesby, subsp. testaceum Say. Three specimens ; Nos. 14224-79-83. 18. Eut^enia multimaculata Cope. Atomarchus multimaculatus Cope, American Naturalist, 1883, p. 1300. The large numbers of this species taken by Mr. Wilkinson shows that Central Chihuahua is its headquarters. The specimens display a remark- able variability in coloration, and also prove that the azygOS plate which exists between the prenasal plates of the typical specimen, is an ab- normality. In one of the Chihuahua specimens there is an azygos plate between the internasals, which is of shorter form than in the type ; while 1885.] ^"5 [Cope. in another there is an azygos plate between the prefrontals. In ail of the others azygos plates are wanting. The ocular plates are normally 3-3, Lut the following variations occur. 2-3 — 2-3, one ; 2-3 — 3-3, one ; 2-2 — 3-3, one. The loreal is normally quite elongate ; in one specimen it is shortened. The color varies from uniform brown above, to spotted in two styles. In one of these there are seven rows of brown spots with paler or rufous centres ; in the other the brown borders of the spots have disappeared, and the rusty centres are represented by small rusty orange spots. The under surfaces are yellow, the gastrosteges with dark shading at the ends. In young specimens the head is more or less marked with obscure blackish marks. This species is distinguished by its long com- pressed muzzle. The teeth in this species are equal, so that the genus Atomarchus to which I referred it stands related to Eutamia, as Regina does to Tropido- notus. 19. Eut^eniamegalops Kenn. Cope, Proceeds. Anier. Philosoph. Society, 1884, p. 173. Evidentlj7 the most abundant snake of Chihuahua. The large number of specimens sent display very little variation, and agree with one from New Mexico, described by me as above. The lateral baud generally occu- pies only the third row of scales, but sometimes borders the fourth. The dorsal band very frequently occupies but one row of scales, but occasionally covers the halves of the adjacent rows. Nos. 14226-27-58-59-00-67-77- 85-89-92. 20; Eut^nia cyrtopsis Kennicott. Cope, 1. c, 1884, p. 174. Only one specimen ; No. 1425G. The number of urosteges is exactly intermediate between the figures representing the supposed species cyrtop- sis and collaris Jan. As there is no other difference it is probable that the latter name must become a synonym of the former. 21 Hypsiglena ochrorhynchus Cope. One specimen ; No. 14287. 22. Trimorphodon vilkinsonii, sp. nov. Scales in twenty-three rows. Superior labials nine, of which the fourth and fifth enter the orbit, and of which all are higher than long excepting the fifth and the eighth. Loreals two ; oculars 3-3 ; temporals 3-3-3. Ros- tral not prominent, but the apex is recurved on the summit of the snout. Frontal plate rectangular, the lateral and anterior sides equal. Parietals narrowed posteriorly. Inferior labials eleven, the fifth in contact with pregeneials, and none in contact with postgeneials. Postgeneials much shorter than pregeneials. Gastrosteges 231 ; anal 1-1 ; urostoges 77. The body is compressed, and the head is very distinct. Total length, M. .272 ; of tail, .045 ; of head to rictus oris, .0092. General color gray ; the back is crossed by narrow black cross bands, at rather remote intervals. These bands are pale bordered, and narrow to an apex below, which is above the gastrosteges. They become narrower Cope.] 286 [Nov. 20, posteriorly, and on the tail form half- rings. On the extremity of every third or fourth gastrostege there is a small black spot, throughout the length to the tail. There is a larger black spot on the sides between the extremities of a few of the cross-bands. The superior border of the sixth, and the adjacent part of the fifth superior labial, is black. On the top of the head are three large round black spots ; one is on the centre of the frontal and one is on the anterior part of each parietal. No cross-bands on the muzzle. The dark cross-bands are only two scales wide on the posterior part of the body ; on the anterior part they are three or four scales wide. The interspaces vary from twelve anteriorly to seven pos- teriorly. One specimen ; No. 14268. This species is nearest the T. biscutatw D. & B. in squamation, but differs greatly in coloration from this or any other species of the genus. I have given a brief synopsis of the species of this genus in the Pro- ceedings of the American Philosophical Society for 1869, pp. 151-2. In introducing two new species I give another synopsis, the more, as I have received a considerable addition to my material since that date. I. Scales in 21 rows ; superior labials nine. Head with brown chevrons above ; back with diamond-shaped spots T. lambda Cope. Head with a lyre-shaped pattern above ; dorsal spots in pairs. T. lyrophanes Cope. II. Scales in 23 rows ; superior labials seven. Top of head black with a white T-shaped spot ; dorsal spots entire trans- verse diamonds T. tau Cope. III. Scales in 23 (4) rows ; superior labials eight. Top of head brown, with a small brown Y-shaped mark ; dorsal spots transverse diamonds, more or less transversely divided by paler T. upsilon Cope. IV. Scales in 23 (4) rows ; superior labials nine. Top of head brown ; dorsal spots numerous transverse more or less di- vided diamonds T. collans Cope. Top of head white, with three round black spots ; dorsal spot, few trans- verse undivided black rhombs, with pale edges ... 7'. mlkinsonii Cope. V. Scales in 25 (7) rows ; superior labials nine. Top of head with chevron bands ; dorsal spots formed of four confluent spots and enclosing a pale centre T. biscutatus Cope. Of the preceding species I have before me one each of the T. lambda ; tau ; collaris and vilkinsonii. Of the T. lyrophanes there are six speci- mens ; of the T. upsilon six, and of the T. biscutatus four. I append a description of the new species T. lambda. The muzzle is rather elongate, as in the T. biscutatus. There are three loreals, and the oculars are 3-3 ; the temporals are 3-4-3-4! The fourth and fifth labials enter the orbit, and the sixth, seventh and eight are higher than long. Pregeneials longer than postgeueials. Internasals small, wider than long ; 1885.] ^o7 [Lesley. parietals rather short. Gastrosteges 234, anal 1-1 ; urosteges 83. Color above light gray crossed by brown transverse diamond-shaped spots, each with a pale transverse centre. Three or four of the most anterior spots are subhexagonal, being truncate at each side. All are surrounded by a pale shade. Each end of every second or third gastrostege is marked with a small dark brown spot, which extends upwards on the first row of scales, and sometimes is confluent with the lateral apex of the dorsal spot. Total length, .304 ; of tail, .054. From Guaymas, Sonora, presented to the National Museum by Mr. H. F. Emerich. No. 13487. 23 Crotalus adamanteus ateox B. & G. One specimen ; No. 14280. 24. Crotalus adamantetjs scutulatus Kenn. Five specimens ; Nos. 14225-73-78. The tendency to the development of scuta on the head, especially on the parietal region, is greater than in any specimens I have seen from other localities. General Remarks. The preceding investigation shows that the reptile fauna of the plain of Chihuahua is that of the adjacent regions of Arizona, New Mexico and Texas, with the accession of a very few forms which are more distinctively Mexican. Only two species come under this designation, viz: Uta bicar- inata and Sceloporus grammicus. The Eutomia cyrtopsis has also an exten- sive Mexican distribution. An Obituary Notice of James Macfarlane. By J. P. Lesley. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 4, 1SS5.) The Society has suffered, by the recent death of its member, Mr. James Macfarlane, of Towanda, in Bradford county, Pa., the loss of a man of distinguished abilities and sterling virtue, universally loved, respected and confided in, a practical business man of the first rank, a lawyer of great reputation, especially for his conduct of railway litigation, a judicious geologist especially devoted to the subject of coal, the author of valuable books in extensive circulation, and a citizen of the Commonwealth entrusted at various times with the conduct of public affairs. He was elected to membership in this Society, Jan. 19th, 1883, and regarded it with genuine pleasure and pride, as the best recognition of his standing among men of science and literature, not only in his native State, but in this and foreign lands. But his busy life and literary works prevented him from making communications to the Society, at its stated meetings, which he could not attend on account of the distance from his home, the multiplicity of his engagements, and his failing health. He became a member of the American Association for the Advancement Lesley.] ^"^ [Dee. 4, of Science, in 1880, and a fellow in 1882, and assisted at its meetings in Boston, Montreal, Minneapolis, Philadelphia and Ann Arbor, the latter hut a few weeks before his death. In 1872 Pennsylvania College conferred upon him the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. He was appointed by Governor Hartranft, in 1874, one of the ten Com- missioners for the Second Geological Survey, and was punctually present at all the quarterly meetings of that board up to the present year, taking the most lively interest in its proceedings, being an active member of its Publication Committee, and answering readily to every call for business consultation and official action in Harrisburg and Philadelphia around the year. In fact, he completely identified himself with the Survey and thought nothing a trouble which he could do to further its progress, or improve its operations. Its success has been largely due to the devotion of his singular intelligence and disinterested cooperation. His loss is felt severely in many places, but nowhere more severely than in the circle of distinguished men appointed to accomplish the will of the Legislature respecting the Geological Survey. His training in general geology, and his rare acquaintance with the coal measures, his experience in publishing his own scientific works, and his legal acumen, combined to make his appointment to tins official post a foi'tunate event, and to make his sudden death a calamity. It may be said with truth that no other citizen of the State can be found to exactly replace him. Shortly before his death he occupied another most, useful and responsi- ble office, that of Arbitrator for the general coal-trade centring at Buffalo in Western New York. His choice for such a post itself sufficiently marks the character of the man, and the distinguished consideration in which he was held by everybody, as a man of honor, intelligence and experience in affairs. He stood in the midst of many rival interests, both of capital and labor, a referee and mediator, an adjuster and a judge, armed with no powers but such as were voluntarily conceded to him by all concerned for the general good ; and it is needless to say with what tact and skill, and integrity he fulfilled his difficult duties to the general satisfaction. That he was a good citizen, a loving friend and devout Christian will not explain it ; for many a good man would fail to fill such a place for want of other qualities which he possessed. Some men are born to rule ; others live to make themcselves the servants of mankind, and he was one of these, and died in the general public recognition of it ; all honor be to his memory ! Middle Pennsylvania may be proud of its Scotch and Scotch-Irish set- tlement blood ; its Hendersons and Hamiltons, its Rosses and Stewarts and Murrays, its McAlisters, McKinleys, McCormicks, McCaulcys and McFarlanes ; strong wills, bold hearts, long heads and stalwart bodies ; great breeders of handsome and aide children ; a capable race for thinking strongly and executing vigorously the plana and purposes oi men. James Macfarlane was of this fine stock. His face wore the aspect of 1885.] 289 [Lesley. intense vitality ; his forehead was high and massive ; his voice was pitched low, and his speech was decisive ; he had no hesitations. One could divine at a glance why he was an ardent Christian and why he was a powerful legal pleader. He lived the life of a perpetual thinker, whose will was as urgently exercised as his reason and his imagination ; for he lived in the thick of the general battle of life. Such men always come to the fore, and formulate events, and qualify the next generation. They hold the plough by both handles, and deepen the furrow at every tillage, turn- ing up the subsoil sooner or later ; doing all things thoroughly. I speak of James Macfarlane warmly as a personal friend to whom I owe much ; but I may be permitted to say that I regard with a sentiment akin to veneration the Scotch courage which could suffice to deliberately face and execute such an enterprise as the description of all the Coal Regions of America, and follow it with such another enterprise as his geological guide to the Railways of the United States, he, a practising lawyer and practical coal operator, as if he were a man of leisure. Such operations are only for the world's workers, born and bred to much thought and many deeds. His first home was in Gettysburg, where he was born, Sept. 2d, 1819, and graduated at Pennsylvania College in 1837. That same year he joined the corps of civil engineers on the line of the North Branch canal, with headquarters at Towanda. After several years of this employment, he went to Carlisle, read law with Judge Graham, was admitted to the bar in 1845, and settled to practise in New Bloomfield, Perry county, for eight years, serving three years as District Attorney. Here he married Mary Overton, daughter of the late Edward Overton, who survives to lament his loss. In 1851 he returned to Bradford county to practice law at Towanda, being in 1852 elected District Attorney of the county, until 1859. He then accepted the position of General Superintendent of the Barclay Coal Company, which he relinquished, in 1865, to organize the Towanda Coal Company, which afterwards passed under the control of the Erie Railroad. He then became General Sales Agent of the Associa- ted Blossburg Coal Company, with offices at Rochester, Syracuse and Elmira. In 1880 he organized the Long Valley Coal Company and devel- oped its mines. In 1885 he was selected, as I have already said, to be Arbitrator of the Bituminous Coal Combination at Buffalo. When the combination was broken up, he returned to Towanda to work on a second and enlarged edition of his Geologists' Traveling Hand-book, or Ameri- can Geological Railroad Guide, when, without warning, he died of heart disease, Oct. 15th, 1885. He leaves his work half done, about 200 pages being in type, and many pages of MS. in a more or less finished state. The Coal Fields of America is his most noted work and has had a large sale on both sides of the Atlantic. This brought him a considerable prac- tice as an expert in coal operations. He wrote several geological articles for the American Encyclopedia, and one on the Bituminous Coal Fields of Pennsylvania for Gray & Walling's Atlas. He wrote also for the Evan- gelical Review. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2K. PRINTED MARCH 8, 1886 Duges.] 290 [Jan. 1, Sur le Rhinocheilus Antonii. Par Dr. Alfredo Duges. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 1, 1886.) Je dedie cette nouvelle espece de Rhinocheilus a la inenioire de rnon pere, le Prof. Antoine L. Dels. Duges, bien conuu dans les sciences naturelles par ses travaux varies. L'Ophidien qui fait le sujet de cette description avait ete un peu seche avant d'etre mis dans l'alcool, de sorte qu'il est impossible de dire exacte- ment quelle est la forme du tronc. M. Longueur de la tete et du tronc 0 .275 " queue 0.035 Total 0.310 La tete mesure un centimetre de longueur; la queue est contenue 10 fois dans la longueur totale. II y a 17 rangs d'ecailles lisses luisantes, rhomboidales, au milieu du tronc ; les laterales plus grandes que les m6di- anes. Deux-cents gastrosteges. Anale indivise. Ou compte 38 urosteges simples, suivies de trois doubles, la queue 6tant termin^e par un petit bouton allonge et sillonne. Les sous-labiales sont au nombre de 9, dont 4 en contact avec les sous-maxillaires, la 5eme plus grande que les autres. Deux grandes sous-maxillaires allongees suivies de deux autres petites que sont separees par de petites ecailles. Rostrale en forme de cuillere de- primee, saillante, depassant la machoire inferieure, coupee obliquement en dessous, et rabattue en haut ou sa pointe penetre entre les deux prefron- tales anterieures (internasales) sans les separer entierement. Pr6frontales postdrieures plus grandes que les anterieures. Frontale, a six pans, plus large en avant qu'eu arriere, a angle anterieur tres-obtus. Suroculaires triangulaires. Parietales grandes. Nasale double ; la posterieure est plus grande et a son bord anterieur s'ouvre la narine. Fr^nale assez petite, plus longue que haute, largement en contact avec la prefrontale posteri- N^rrV^r^j'^r^^ dessue eure. Preoculaire unique, allong^e verticalement, et separee de la fron- tale par Tangle anterieur de la supraoculaire. Deux postoculaires. Deux 1886.1 '—)*■ [Lilley. temporales assez grandes et allongees, suivies de six ecailles semblables a celles du cou, mais que leur position indique comme des temporales. Huit labiales superieures : la lere depasse la narine ; la 2euie est en con- tact avec la nasale posterieure et la frenale ; la 3eme tonche la frenale seule ; la 4eme est en contact avec la preoculaire et l'ceil ; la Seme avec l'oeil et la postoculaire inferieure ; la Genie avec la postoculaire inferieure et la temporale inferieure du premier rang ; la 7eme avec cette temporale et 1 'inferieure du second rang ; la 8enie avec les deux dernieres temporales inferieures. Les dents toutes egales n'offrent pas d'intervalle libre. Le tete de ce serpent est a peine distincte du cou : elle est convexe a la legion frontale, et le museau se releve legerement en forme de groin. Les formes sont assez elancees. La pupille est circulaire. Une grande tache noire couvre tout le dessus de la tete et s'etend en arriere d'une quantite egale sur le cou. La rostrale, le canthus rostralis, les postoculaires et les levres sont blanchatres tachetees de noir ; le reste du dessous de la tete est blanc. Sur le corps et la queue on voit dix neuf longues tacbes noires occupant cbacune environ une vingtaine d ecailles en seVie longitudinale, separees pardesbandes blanches (surl'in- dtvidu en alcool, du moins) transversales qui couvrent 4 ou 5 ecailles. Ces grands espaces noirs se continuent sous le ventre d'une maniere tres-irregu- liere ; les uns interrompus, les autres formant comme im damier sans ordre. Le seul exemplaire que je possede de cet Ophidien vient des environs de Mazatlan, cote du Pacifique. Guanajuato, 17 Septembre, 1885. A revision of the Section of Chemung Rocks exposed in the Gulf Brook Gorge at LeRoy, in Bradford County, Pennsylvania. By A. T. Lilley, of LeRoy. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 15, 1386.) Feet. 1. Cap of Chemung with Atrypa and many unrecog- nizable forms in light shale, among which are Spirorbis and Rhynchonella 1 2. Productella bed in gray sand 10 3. Green shale 15 4. Red shale 4 5. Green Shale 20 6. Grammysia elliptica bed and gray shale 25 7. Iron ore, with Spirifcr, Plerinea, Crinoids, Grammy- sia, Spirorbis and fish remains 4 Lilley.] ^"^ [Jan. 15» Feet. 8. Green shale 20 9. Red fucoid bed 8 10. Green sandstone 20 11. Red shale and sand with unrecognizable fossils 4 12. Conglomerate with pebbles, lime, Spirifer, Produc- tella and fish remains 6 13. Green shale 10 14. Pink shale 2 15. Green shale 40 16. Green sandstone 2 17. Green sandstone 19 18. Gray sandstone 1 lv». Green shale 52 20. Strophomena bed 1 21. Green sandstone 14 22. Green shale 40 23. Brown sandstone, with Spirifer and Productella 1 24. Gray sandstone, with Crinoids and plants 8 25. Green shale 6 26. Green sandstone and shale, with Crinoids and Spiri- fers 8 27. Gray sandstone and shale 60 28. Green sandstone, with mollusks and Bothriolepis 53 29. Red shale and sandstone, Bothriolepis, Spirifera, Spi- rorbis, Rhynchonella and ferns 14 30. Brown sandstone, with shells and Holoptychius 39 31. Green shale 6 32. Red sandstone, with iron ore and mollusks 8 33. Gray shale 8 34. Calcareous iron ore and sandstone icith crinoids 12 35. Brown shale , 20 36. Calcareous iron ore (red) and sandstone, Bothriolepis 11 37. Grav sandstone and shale, with mollusks, carbonized plant stems, iron and copper pyrites 2 38. Brown sandstone, with Cryptonella 10 39. Brownish sandstone, with Spirorbis and Cryptonella 35 40. Crinoidal limestone 4 41. Bluish shale 8 42. Calcareous red sandstone 9 43. Brown sandstone 18 44. Green sandstone, Pterichthys rurjosus 8 45. Calcareous sandstone 4 46. Green sandstone and shale 90 47. Calcareous sandstone 5 48. Light-gray sandstone and sliale 130 1886.] 29d [Lilley. Feet. 49. Gray shale 63 50. Conglomerate, with mollusks 3 51 . Green shale 12 52. Green sandstone and shale 270 53. Limestone with mollusks 2 54. Gray sandstone and shale, with Zaphrentis and Oram- mysia circularis 220 55. Gray sandstone, with fucoids 1 56. Green sandstone, with Dictyophyton 42 57. Blackish shale, with Lepidodendra and Calamites 50 ■58. Green and brown sandstone and shale 100 59. Green shale 25 60. Upper Ambocodia bed, with Laxonema, Spirifer, Oram- mysia and Bellerophon 2 61. Unexposed for 70 62. Lower Ambocoslia bed in green shale 50 63. Unexposed to line of Granville township 50 64. Green and olive shale, holding Orthis, Chonetes, Cyprieardites, Tentaculites, Pterinea, Tregonia and Rhynchonella 150 65. Unexplored 183 66. Blue shale and sandstone 13 Total 2201 Mr. Lilley says in his letter that Granville Centre is on ground 250 feet lower (geologically) than the township line. Between the two is an exposure of about 150 feet ot shale and sandstone containing Orthis, Cho- netes, Cyprieardites, Tentaculites, Pterinea, Trigonia and Rhynchonella. He adds that Adam Dennis has recently bored a six-inch hole for water to supply his tannery, on the south side of the stream near Granville Cen- tre. It is ninty-six feet deep ; and the bottom thirteen feet was in blue shale and sandstone. By combining these data the original section was enlarged and improved. But Mr. Lilley has used every opportunity during the last two years to increase its value, and has found forms which he is unable to name. Hoffman.] -«^ [Feb. 5*. REMARKS ON INDIAN TRIBAL NAMES. By W. J. Hoffman, M.D. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 5, 1SS6.) During the past fifteen years' experience with the numerous tribes of Indians of the United States, the present writer has frequently observed that certain tribes were not familiar with the names applied to them, as- found in current literature, but that they had distinct tribal designations for themselves, which, for some reason unknown, were seldom met with outside of the tribe itself. Frequently a common term is met with, which may apply to a number ot tribes, as the term Digger, which has been used with reference to at least fifty different tribes and bands along either side of the Sierra Nevada ; so also with the word Snake, being used for several tribes and bands in Nevada, Idaho and Oregon. It is the intention here to present the names of a few well-known tribes, and to give their tribal designations with such explanations as is possible. Many others might be added, but the following are deemed sufficient to illustrate the preceding remarks, and may serve as a contribution to a general woi'k on the Ethnography of North America, which should of necessity embrace a synonomy as complete as practicable. Tsa/nish. The tribe of Indians known as the Ari'kare or Rees, forms the northern- most branch of the Panian linguistic family, and has for a number of years lived in the vicinity of Ft. Berthold, D. T., on friendly terms with the Mandans and Hidatsa. The alliance formed by these three tribes was not based upon friendly feelings for one another, but for mutual resistance against the Sioux on the south, and the occasional incursions of the Crees on the north. At the present day it is seldom that a Mandan, or a Hidatsa, will select an Arikare wife, though the contrary is of frequent occur- rence. The village consisted, at the time of the present writer's last visit in 1881, of one hundred and thirty-four lodges, the eastern half being en- tirely occupied by the Arikare, who numbered about seven hundred and fifty souls, while three-fourths of the other half was occupied by tbe Hidatsa, and the remaining dwellings by Mandans. The total population of the village was about fifteen hundred. The word Arlk'are, is of Hidatsa origin, and was changed by the Man- dans into Ai dik'ada-hu. The word signifies "The-people-of-the-flow- ing-hair," from a'-ra — hair ; ka'-ra (or ka'-da) — to run, or -flowing, and a-hflts' (a-huO — many. The word is abbreviated, by the Hidatsa, into A-rik'-a-htt, and by the Mandans into A'-ri-ka'-ra, from which the com- mon term is derived. The tribal designation is Tsa'nish, a word employed at all times to de- note the tribe in general, or an individual member thereof. The word signifies people, according to themselves, but the tribal designation in. 18S6 J 295 | Hoffman. gesture-signs signifies corn-shellers, and is made by loosely closing the left hand and holding it horizontally in front of the breast so that the thumb is directed forward ; the right is then similarly closed with the thumb almost straight, and a motion made with the right against the left, as if shelling corn. The following synonomy may serve for further study regarding this interesting tribe : Tsa'nish. Ta-nish. 1 Sa-nish'. i Star-rah-he. Starrahe. Aracaris. Aricaree. Aricaris. Aricas. Arikara. Arikkaras. Arricaras. Arrickoras. Auricara. Black Pawnees. Corn Eaters. Eokoros. Eskoros. Pa-da'-ni. Pa-la'-ni. Pa-dai'-na. Pe-nai'-na. Pe-da-nis. Pawnee-Rikasrees. Hacres. 1 Recaro. J Rees. la Ree. Rhea. Ricara. Ricarees. Ricaris. Ricars. Rice Indians. Rickaree. Rikkaras. Tribal designation. Hayden. Eth. & Phil, of the Missouri valley.'; 1862. p. 356. Lewis and Clark. 1806. p. 22. "Tribal name." Bradbury. Travels. Liverpool, 1817. p. 111. Gass. Journal, 1807. p. 400. Saxton, in Rep. N. P. R. R., 1854, p. 239. Gass, op. cit., p. 48. Prichard. Phys. Hist. Mankind, 1847. Vol. v, p. 408. Brackenridge. Views of La. 1815. p. 76. Maximilian. Travels. 1843. p. 143. Keating' s Long's Exped. 1824. i, p. 424. Webb. Altowan. i. 1846. p. 83. Ind. Treaties. 1837. p. 447. Pritchard. op. cit., p. 408. Culbertson. Rep. Smithsonian Inst, for 1850, p. 130. "Their own name." Coxe. Carolina. 1741, map. La Hontan (Schoolcraft's Travels in 1820). Albany, 1821. p. viii. , 1 So called by various bands of Sioux. Signifies enemy. Dialectic forms. Warren. Nebraska and Arizona (1855-7), 1875, p. 50. Nuttall. Journal. Philad'a, 1821. p. 81. Lewis. Travels. 1809. p. 15. Franchere. Narrative. N. Y., 1854. p. 54. Lewis and Clark. 1806. p. 22. Hallam. In Beach's Ind. Miscellany. 1877. p. 134. Lewis. Travels. 1809, p. 3. Maximilian, op. cit., p. ix. Gass. Journal. 1807, p. 48. uass. tiuuniai. joui Lewis & Clark. 1806. p. 24. Franchere. op cit., p. 54. Irving's Astoria. N. Y., 1849. p. 119. Maximilian, op. cit., p. 167. Hoflman.J 296 [Feb. 5, Le Ris. Maximilian, op. cit., p. 167. "So called by Cana- dians." O-no'-ni-o. Hayden. op. cit., p. 290. " So called by Cheyennes." Ka'-nan-in. Hayden. op. cit., p. 326. "So called by Arapahos." A-pan-to'-pse. Hayden. op. cit., p. 402. " So called by 'Crows.' " Sho'shoni. The Sho'shoni tribe of Indians is a part of the Shoshonian ethnic division which formerly occupied the greater portion of country lying between the Sierra Nevada and the Rocky mountains, and from northern Idaho south- ward to the Moki villages, and across Southern California to the Pacific ocean. Within the last few centuries, another branch has extended to- ward the southeast, viz : the Comanche. According to Buschmann, and Gatschet, the Shoshonian tribes are an offshoot of the northern branch of the Nahuatl linguistic division. The following brief synonomy is here presented for further investiga- tion : Tribal designation. Lewis and Clark. Allen's ed. 1817. ii, p. 587, et passim. Parker (S.). Journal. Ithaca, 1842. p. 80. Ex. Doc, H. R., 31st Cong., 1st Session, pt. iii. 1849. p. 1002. — Schoolcraft, vi, p. 697. Irving' s Astoria. 1836. p. 48. Farnham. Travels. N. Y., 1843. p. 74. Coke, Rocky mountains. 1852. p. 275. Ross. Fur Hunters, i, pp. 249, 251. "Are the real Shoshones." De Smet. Letters. 1843. p. 36. Lewis and Clark, Exped. 1814. ii, p. 131. Am. State Papers. IV. 1832. p. 710. Lewis and Clark. Travels. 1809. p. 10. 1806. p. 60. So called by the French. Lewis and Clark. Van Kamper's Dutch ed. 1818. iii, p. 144. Ross. Fur Hunters, pp. 249, 251, and other authors. De Smet's Voyage, p. 47. Many other forms might be cited, but the above appear almost super- fluous. The name Snake, it is said by one author, was taken from the Snake river flowing through the country of this tribe, on account of the numerous puff adders found upon its banks. Be that as it may, the word " snake " has no linguistic relationship whatever to the word " Shoshoni." The word nin/ama is used to denote the tribe as people, first bom, but the word Sho'shoni, sometimes So'soni, is always given to designate the tribal name, at the same time the gesture-sign is added, by placing the closed Sho'shoni. Shoshonee. Shoshonie. Shoshocoes. Shoshokoes. Root Diggers. Shothoucs. Shirrydikas. Soshones. Alliatan. Aliton. Serpentine Indians. Gens des Serpent. Slang Indianern. Snake. Serpents. 1886. J ^J* [Hoffman. right hand near the right hip, forefinger extended and pointing forward, palm down, then as the hand is pushed to the front and toward the left, the hand is rotated from side to side, giving the index a serpentine motion. This is also the sign for snake, as a reptile. It is quite natural to suppose, therefore, that when Lewis and Clark's party met with these Indians they at once considered the tribe to desig- nate itself as Snakes, thinking, possibly, that the word Sho'shoni meant the same. The writer has at no time during his frequent visits to these Indians been successful in obtaining from themselves a clear interpretation of the word. The Rev. J. W. Cook, gives the Yancton Sioux word, as applied to the Sho'shoni, as Pe-ji'-wo-ke-ya-o-ti — Those dwelling in grass lodges. This term may have originated at a time when the Sho'shoni still built their lodges in the primitive form, a process described to the writer by some of the tribe, a short time since. Four poles were placed upright, at equal distances to form a square, each having a fork at the upper extremity for the reception of cross-pieces upon which to construct a roof. The sides of the square were closed by placing thin willow poles, vertically side by side, after which the broad leaves of water-grasses and rushes — sho'nip — were woven into them, horizontally, from side to side. By passing the end of a leaf in and out, or alternately in front of and behind these thin poles, a serpentine motion is observed, when viewed from above, which exactly corresponds to the gesture-sign and which, strange to say, was made when illustrating this method of constructing the walls of a lodge. It is the belief of the present writer, that the sign has reference to the weaving or building of a grass lodge, and that the word Shoshoni signifies something of a similar nature. The term Shoshocoe [Shosho'ki], has been met with in current literature so frequently that a few words respecting it may not be amiss. The word is generally applied to those who go on foot, in contradistinction to Sho'shoni who own horses. Should a Sho'shoni, therefore, lose or dispose of his horse, he at once becomes a Shoshocoe. The term as applied, to signify a tribe or portion of a tribe, i. e., as a tribal designation in the strict sense of the word, is therefore erroneous. What were these people before they possessed horses? According to the chief men of the western Sho'shoni, their tribe was formerly composed of seven bands — which may, in reality, have been gens, as follows, viz : I. Tu'kuari'ka. Mountain-Sheep-Eaters. = Sheepeaters. Rep. Ind. Affairs for 1871, 1872, p. 432. = Tookarikkahs. Bancroft. Nat. Races, i, p. 463. = Mountain Shoshone, or " Sheepeater'' band. Jones' Wyoming Exped. p. 275. =Tuka-ri'ka, "Mountain-sheep Eaters." U. S. Geog. Surveys W. of 100th Meridian, vii, p. 410. PROC. AMEK. PHILOS, SOC. XXIII. 122. 2L. PRINTED MARCH 8, 1886. Hoffman.] 2J8 [Feb. o, II. Taza'aigadi'ka, Salmon-Eaters. = Aggitikkahs or Salmon- Eaters. Bancroft. Nat. Races, i, p. 46:5. = Warareekas, Fish-Eaters. Ross. Fur Hunters, i, p. 249. III. Ti'vati'ka. Pine-Nut-Eaters. = Yampatickara. Brownell's Ind. Races, pp. 533, 537. IV. Sho'nivikidi'ka. Sun-Flower-Seed-Eaters. V. Ho'handi'ka. Earlh-Eaters. = Hohandikahs, Salt Lake Diggers. Bancroft. Nat. Races, i, p. 463. = Hohan-tikara. U. S. Geogr. Survey W. of 100th Meridian. vii, p. 409. VI. Sho'hoaigadi'ka. Cottonwood-Salmon-Eaters. = Boise. Rep. Ind. Affairs for 1871, 1872. p. 432. VII. Ya'handi'ka. Ground-Hog-Eaters. Of the ahove, the Tu'kuari'ka formerly occupied the country about the headwaters of Yellowstone river, the present head of the band Ten'doi, being also chief of the tribe. By birth he is a half Banak — or more properly Panai'ti. The Ti'vati'ka occupied the southern interior of Nevada, and were found, in 1871, living principally in the mountainous regions where there was an abundance of the Nut Pine (Pinus edulis), upon the fruit of which they subsisted to a great extent. Panai'ti. This tribe was formerly located west and north-west of the area appro- priated by the Sho'shoni, embracing the eastern half of Oregon, Western Idaho and possibly a part of Washington Territory. According to exten- sive vocabularies collected by the writer, the languages of the two tribes are linguistically closely related, much more so than one is usually led to believe. The general designation for these Indians, as well as for many more along the coast side of the Sierra Nevada, is Digger. The following is a brief synonomy : Panai'ti. Tribal designation. Banai'ti. So called by the Sho'shoni. Bwanacs. Rep. Ind. Affairs for 1849-50. 1850. p. 49. Bonarks. Sen. Ex. Doc, 31st Cong., 2d Session, i, 1850. p. 198. Bonacks. Wilkes' Narrative U. S. Explor. Exped. iv, p. 502. Bannacks. Rep. Ind. Affairs, for 1871, 1872. p. 432. ' . , T",. < Ross. Fur Hunters, i, pp. 249, 251. Robber Indians. > *l Ponashta. Sen. Ex. Doc, 31st Cong., 2d Session, i (1st part), 1850. p. 158. 18S6.| -JJ [Hoffman. Poor Devil Indians. ) T ,. , . ... , De Smet. Voy. n. pp. 4o, 46. Lesdignesdepietie. J J ll Banak. \ Bannock. > By authors generally. Snake. * But four bands exist at this day, which are known as the Kutsh'undika. Buffalo-Eaters. Sho'hopanai'ti. Cottonwood-Banaks. Yam'badi'ka. Yampa (root) -Eaters. Wara'dika. Rye-Grass- Seed-Eaters. It is more than probable that seven bands existed in earlier times ; but owing to the union of the Panai'ti and western Sho'shoni, it may be that the remaining three bands affiliated with similarly named bands of the latter, resembling in this respect frequent occurrences of like character among other tribes, notably so among those of the Dakotan linguistic division. Coman'che. This tribe is more nearly related to the Sho'shoni, linguistically, than any other of the Shoshonian family. According to several old and intelli- gent members of the tribe, the Comanches came to the country they now occupy, from the Northwest, since the introduction of horses. During their migration the tribe consisted of seven bands. A new band was formed, after leaving the Rocky Mountain divide, which was composed of individuals from all of the seven, and known as the Nau'niem — Ridge Peo- ple, who remained behind to catch wild horses. When a sufficient num- ber of animals had been captured they followed the tribe and the different individuals joined their respective bands. What length of time may have been required for horses (which were brought from Mexico by the early explorers, Coronado and his successors) to escape, and to increase suffi- ciently in number to run in herds along the eastern spurs of the Rocky mountains, is a subject difficult to solve. It may be presumed, however, that, if the story of the Comanches is correct, that their migration must have been made during the latter part of the 16th century. Seven bands exist among the Coman'che, as follows : I. Yam'pari'ka. Yampa (root) -Eaters. = Yampah Indians, of authors. = Yam-pa-se-cas. Rep. Ind. Affairs. 1848. p. 574. = Samparicka. Maximilian (of Wied). Travels. 1843. p. 510. II. Pe'nete'ka. Honey-Eaters. III. Ko'stshote'ka. Buffalo-Eaters. IV. Tist'shinoie'ka. "Bad-Movers," i.e., Those who move with diffi- culty. Hoftnian. 330 [Feb. 5, V. Kua'hadi. Antelope People. VI. Tini'ema. Liver-Eaters. VII. Ti'tsakanai. The-Sewing-People, i. e., Those who sew moccasins. The temporary band, before mentioned as the Nau'nieni — Ridge People — are given in Schoolcraft as Par-kee-na-um. Two other names of bands occur in literature, as well in the recollection of some of the Indians, but as individuals in those bands had the same name as that of the band to which they belonged, it became necessary at their death to rename the band, as the name of a deceased Comanche is never pronounced aloud. Therefore, the No'koni — Movers — became the Tistshnoie'ka — Bad-Movers, and the Wiuini'em — Awl-People, were renamed as the Titsakanai — The- Sewing-People. The following brief synonomy will suffice for further reference and in- formation : Ninam. Tribal designation. Signifies people. Ayutan. Brackenridge. Views of La. 1815. p. 80. Bald Heads. Long's Exped. Rocky Mts. 1823. i, p. 155. Camanche. Brackenridge. Views of La. 1815. p. 80. Cannensis. French. Hist. Coll. ii. 1875. p. 11. Note. GV-tha. Hayden. Eth. & Phil. Mo. River Valley, 1862. p. 326. — Refers to their having many horses. Comandes. Maximilian. Travels. 1843. p. 510. Cumanche. Farnham. Travels. 1843. p. 8. Cumancias. Long's Exped. Rocky Mts. 1823. i, p. 478. Hietans. Lewis and Clark. 1806. p. 76. Iatans. Irving's Astoria. 1849. p. 160. Ietan. Pike. Travels. 1811. p. xiv. lotan. Irving (J. T.). Indian Sketches. 1835. p. 136. Itean. M'Kenney. Wrongs and Rights of the Indians, ii. 1846. p. 94. La Paddo. Lewis and Clark. 1806. p. 64. La Plais. Long's Exped. Rocky Mts. 1823. i, p. 155. La Play. Lewis and Clark. 1806. p. 17. Na-uni. Coues and Kingsley. Standard Nat. Library. 1883. pt. 6, p. 186. Paducas. Lewis. Travels. 1809. p. 15. [Said to signify wet noses. ] Padducas. Pike. Travels. 1811. p. 347. Padoucas. Brackenridge. Views of La. 1815. p. 80. Padoucar. Lewis. Travels. 1809. p. 15. Ni'nam is the tribal designation, the word Comanche being of Spanish (?) origin, and the definition unknown. The Indians themselves generally pronounce it Comantsh. Those who are familiar with thelanguage spoken by most of the Greasers, 1886.] d\)± [Hoffman. or lower class Mexicans, know how corrupted the Spanish language has become in the south-west portion of the United States. The Castilian words caballo, horse, becomes kawa'yo ; cuchillo, knife, kutshi'yo, etc., the 11 invariably becoming y. So also with numerous other words and phrases, as mucho, much, becomes muncho [or mu'ntsho] ; muchos many, munchos ; Adonde va Vd ? — Where are you going ? is abbreviated into Unde va ? Upon the same basis of corruption and alteration, it is pos- sible that the word Comanche may be an abbreviation for many horses, from the greaser words Kawa'yos — caballos, and mu'nchos — muchos, i. e., many horses. Another suggestion might be offered with regard to the word, viz : ca (= casa), an antiquated Spanish word for house, or chief branch of a family, and mancha, a spot, stain, soiled, dirty ; thus by slight alteration and corruption gradually becoming ca-manches— soiled or dirty houses or lodges. These suggestions are mere passing impressions, and are given for what they may be worth. Kawi'a. The numerous bands of Indians formerly scattered over the marshy country bordering on Tulare lake, the plains and western spurs of the Sierra Nevada, and the tributaries of the head of San Joaquin river, Cal., were known as the Tularenos, and later as the Tules. The most import- ant band, being known as the Kawi'a, was located on "Kaweah " creek, and this name was, later on, applied to the Tule Agency bands generally. The various names comprising the sub-divisions of the tribe, given by Powers, in Contrib. N. Am. Ethnol., iii, are chiefly geographic terms and relate to some peculiarity of the region occupied, or to an abundance of some particular kind of vegetation, food, etc. The term Yo'kut or Yo'kuts, previously employed to designate this tribe, as well as a distinctive term for a linguistic family, appears to be erroneous and inappropriate. To more clearly illustrate what may be stated below, it is necessary to present the subdivisions of the Kawi'as linguistically. The entire group of sub-tribes comes, at this date, under two heads, the Kawi'a proper, or Tule Indians, and the Tin'llu or Tejon Indians, the latter being divided, a portion of them living near Tule Agency, and the remainder scattered along the various settlements as far southward as Tahachapi pass. The Kawi'a are composed of the following bands or sub-divisions, viz : Yawitshen'ni. The Tule Indians proper. Wiktshom'ni. = We-chummies. Rep. Ind. Affairs for 1857, 1858. p. 399. = Wichumnies. " " 1872. p. 381. Yo'ko. Badwi'sha. Buder'wium'i. Bongalaa'tshi. Ya'wedmo'ni. Tiq'Iiu. Tribal designation of Tejon Indians. Hoffman.] 302 [Feb. 5, Rep. Ind. Affairs. 1872. P- 381. ibid. " t C 1854. P- 11. ibid. 1856, 1857. p. 252. ibid. 1857, 1858. p. 400. ibid. 1861. p. 218. \ By authors generally. The word Tejon undoubtedly originated with the Spanish and is merely a translation of the Indian word Tiu'liu, a badger hole; in Spanish spelled Tejon from Texon (Portuguese Teixugo ; Provencal Tais, taiso'), and does not originate from the many depressions found in the country occupied by this people, but from a myth having allusion to their origin in peopling the country by coming out of the earth through badger holes, and conse- quently calling themselves Badger-hole People. The Yawitshe'nni or Kawi'a, are called Yaweden'tshi by the WTkts- hom'ni, and the following brief synonomy may be of interest. Kawi'a. Keawahs. Cowiahs. Chow-chillas. Cow-illers. Cowwillas. Tulare. Tule. About the year 1867, the Manache Indians, who had been living with the above named tribe, returned to their "old home " in Owen's Valley, Cal., about one hundred miles distant. It is singular that two tribes of apparently distinct linguistic families should voluntarily unite and live in harmony, especially when there are no hostile tribes from whom to fear attack. A great deal of friendship is also manifested between the, Kawi'a and the Panamint Indians (who are also of the Shoshonian linguistic family). These facts would not be of sufficient consequence by them- selves, but during the present writer s visits to Tule Agency, in 1882, and again in 1884, for the purpose of studying the magnificent pictographs, an astonishing similarity in many characters and figures was found, which had previously been observed in other portions of California, and in Arizona and Nevada, and which had been recognized as the work of various tribes belonging to the Shoshonian stock.* In addition to this, a number of bands belonging to the western Pah-Utes (of the Shoshonian family) lived, until quite recently, in various portions of the country assigned to the Kawi'a. The dialects of these bands was so far removed from the western Shoshoni language of Nevada and Idaho, the parent stem, as to be almost unrecognizable unless followed through the Pah- Ute and its various dialects. Tentative comparisons of Kawi'a vocabularies with those of several bands of the western Pah-Ute, present some striking coincidences, more particu- larly in grammatic structure, but not sufficient to warrant any conclusions respecting linguistic affinity, as the material at present available is entirely too meagre. * For further information, see papers by the present writer in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Washington, ii. 18s3, p. 128, et. seq.; Proc. Davenport Acad. Nat. Sci. iv. 188), p. 105, et seq. 1SS6. 1 303 [Lesley. Absa'roka.. This tribe is generally known as the Crows, a word originating no doubt from the gesture-sign used to designate themselves, which is made by placing the flat hands, palms down, in front of and outward from the shoulders, then imitating the movement of a bird's wings when flying. The first portion of the word absaroka is from abita, ab, an arrow-point, i mouth and 'ta to kill, i. e., to kill with an arrow -pointed mouth, clearly signi- fying the habit of an accipitrine bird. The Indians stated to the writer that the true Absa'roka was a white, or nearly white, bird, exactly resembling the sparrow-hawk — Falco spariverius. No specimen of the true absa'roka has been seen for many years, and it appears probable that the bird is a mythic one, particularly as it is described as white, or partly white. Animals and birds held as sacred are invariably white, and albinos, proba- bly on account of their rarity, being deemed as endowed with supernatu- ral and mystic powers. A partial synonomy is herewith added : Absa'roka. Absoroka. Absarakos. Upsaraukas. Apsaruka. Atsharoke. Gens des Corbeau. Kee-kat-sa. Keeheet-sas. Kiqatsa. Crows, Tribal designation. Drake. Book of Indians. 1818. p. v. Warren. Nebraska and Arizona (1855-7) 1875. Brown (J. M.). Beach's Ind. Miscellany. 1877. 50. 83. Travels. 1843. p. 174. "Their own 41. "So-called by Liverpool. 1817. 1842. i. Maximilian. name." De Smet, Letters. 1843. p. 51. Lewis and Clark. Disc. 1806. p the French." Bradbury. Travels in America. p. 19. M'Vickar. Hist. Exp. Lewis and Clark Map. Am. Naturalist, Oct. 1882. p. 829. By authors generally. On the Hebreio Word ShDl (Shaddai), translated " The Almighty." By J. P. Lesley. {Bead before the American Philosopliical Society, January 15, 1S86.) Several years ago I was led to examine all the Hebrew texts containing this word, and was surprised to see that they lend no countenance to the common translation of it ; and that they teach a derivation of it from sources foreign to the Hebrew theology. In the seven centuries which elapsed between the Seventy translators in Egypt and St. Jerome's Latin translation Christianity effected a great change in the view men took of things, both sacred and profane. The TzavroKpaTwp of the LXX had a very different meaning from the Lesley.] ^"i [Jan. 15, omnipotens of the Vulgate. The "power" of the first was not the "power" of the second. What was destructive ability before Christ became constructive ability after Christ. The terrible had been presented as the beneficent. IJavTOKparcop was to be feared, for what strength could resist his blows, what coat of mail turn the point of his arrow ? Omnipotens was to be confided in ; for the universe was his handiwork ; and he was able to do for his creatures more and better than they could ask or think. In his name there was no hint of violence ; it meant abso- lute and infinite ability of action as against any conceivable hindrance. On the contrary uparos meant destructive, or at least violent force ; as we see from /cpadaecv, Kpadaivscv to brandish weapons ; Kpa^eiv to scream ; Kpazaioq resistless ; uparepoq valiant, cruel, violent ; Kpareiv to rule, sub- due, seize ; allied to our words crush and crash. In view of this Greek habit of language we have a right to say that, when the LXX selected TtavTOKparwp as their synonyme for the Hebrew divine name ShDI, they must have conceived of him as an all-destroyer ; at least as one who had exhibited his power in a violent manner ; if they did not actually regard him as the divine spirit of evil ; which is hardly to be supposed ; although, I have been led by my study of the contexts to believe that this concep- tion lay behind that of which they were avowedly conscious. For they wrote in Egypt, and this was the recognized character of the almighty Set. The Greeks of the Delta identified Set with the typhonic spirit of the universe. The LXX translators being exiles and descendants of exiles from Judaea, must have been perfectly acquainted with the etymological force of the word, and to an extent somewhat, perhaps much, greater than we can be ; for it is not likely that the whole Hebrew language of their day, much less of Salomonic and Mosaic days, was represented in our codex of their sacred books. How many words and phrases are lost we do not know, but the draf hyofisva tell a story of loss. But our reasoning must be based upon the language as preserved in those books, and it happens to be very rich in words for power. Some of them are pure metaphors, such as finger (y32fK), hand (T), right hand (JO'), arm (JHT), horn {pp), shoulder (C2DW), thunder (EDjn), a firman ("W), chariot (|Vn). Some of them rep- resented purely passive power, strength to endure or resist assaults (like that of a bone) or wealth, or high position (Otyi ^P^-) Many of them represented the delegated power of a magistrate, or ruler, or hereditary prince (ttW, 7T\V, |VtK ntin, nj?J, "fityD.) Several of them meant heroic power, strength of body, stalwartness (mi3J, [DTI: niD) and especially as put forth in acts of strength (?#; JTJ\ Pin ; compare rVTJ7 strength of Jehovah, /K'TJ? God's power, 'TJJ my strength). The word "very" P^O) is used as a noun, with the meaning power (11ND, his power). The word "god" (7X,TN) is used in the same sense pJO; and Tn~D). But the abstract idea of strength was expressed by *OT (Ecc. 9 : 16), translated with nice exactness by the LXX into iayo$, which of itself shows that they did not confound it with Kparos, 1886.J '3vJ [Lesley. None of all these words have a basis of ideal violence, but merely in- volve violence as an accident of the exercise of strength, not necessary but occasional. For violence they used NOR mi^D, "p3, p*ia, D^n, ptfj?, p, Su ; all in reference to violation of peace and law, robbery, plunder, destruction of crops and goods, oppression by rulers, &c. For a violent rage they used rjl. But their special word for wasting and desolation, plunder and de- struction, oppression, persecution, devourment, demolition and utter de- struction was "W# ShUD (Masoretic ShOD), the verbal form being ShDaD. Hence they called the demons ShDIM (Deut. 32 : 17), and robbers ShDDI- ShDDIM.* Even in composition ShD keeps its terrible meaning, for ShDF in Gen. 41: 23, 27, means the blasting of grain by the desert wind ; and ShDFUN in Gen. 41 : 6, 1 K. 8 : 37, Amos 4 : 9, Deut. 28 : 22, the same.f The point on which I wish to fix attention is this : The LXX translators must have been alive to the two facts : 1. That if the name of the deity for which they were to find a Greek correlative was a Hebrew name and had a Hebrew etymology, they must select from the list of Hebrew words meaning power the only one which was like ShDI, namely ShD, a demon, or ShDD, to commit violence, lay waste, desolate, oppress, destroy. 2. That in adopting this etymology they did it with the knowledge that ShDD never meant to be strong, powerful, except in a bad sense. For Gesenius himself admits this, while advocating the opinion that El ShDI was a pluralis excellenlice, an epithet of Jehovah as almighty, omnipotent, against the contrary opinion of Verbrugg (De nominorum Hebrseorum, 1752) and Ewald (Heb. Gram. pp. 298, 423)4 Without the points the word is not necessarily a plural ; ShDIM would be plural. It would perhaps be treating the Masorites too harshly to suspect that they pointed the word Shaddai intentionally to assimilate it with Adonai ; but even if the charge was just it would not prove a plural. The ShDI, TravTOKparajp of the LXX, must necessarily therefore if de- rived from a Hebrew root, carry a malign, dreadful, destructive meaning, and it only remains for those who believe it to be an epithet of Jehovah to explain its use by reference to that terrible side of his character so often painted in the Hebrew scriptures. The opposite aspect of Jehovah as a god of long suffering, abundant in goodness and truth, is also frequently presented. A common tone is given *As the Hebrew PRK is represented in the Latin frangere, fractum, English break, broken, so the Hebrew ShD is represented in the English shatter, but not in Latin. t The proper name ShDI AUR of Num. 1 : 5, 2 : 10, is translated by Gesenius the Darting of Fire. Jin Ps. 17:9, Prov. 11: 3, Is. 33 : 1, Jer. 5 : 6, 17 : 4,48 : 1, 19 : 29, it means to practice violence, oppress, destroy. In Is. 15 : 1, 33 : 1 it expresses the horrors of a foreign invasion. In Ob. 5, " robbers of the night." In Judges 5 : 27, murdered. In Ps. 137 : 8, Jer. 25 : 36, 48 : 8, 18, 51 : 55, 56, to desolate a land. In Micah 2 : 4, and other prophets, to lay waste. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2M. PRINTED MARCH 9, 1886. Lesley.] °0t> lJan- 15, to all the Hebrew writings by the frequent adoration of Jehovah in his two moods of affection for his people and violent hatred for those who are not his people. This tone is very harsh in the earlier books, but softens and sweetens in later times, until the modern idea of God as the all- father is almost completely developed. But that is not the subject of this paper. I wish to keep in view the sole question, whether ShDI could have been an epithet of Jehovah ; or whether, on the contrary, he was not a different deity, more ancient, and foreign to Palestine. To help settle this question I shall quote every pas- sage in which the word occurs, both in the earlier and later books, to see what the context in each instance suggests. I hope in another com- munication to discuss the question in a broader way, by comparing data obtainable in countries outside the limits of Palestine. It is necessary however to add one more item to these prefatory state- ments, viz : the fact that the Hebrew language had two words written ShD, which must have been differently pronounced, although it is im- possible to say what the difference was. In the early Christian centuries Hebrew scribes distinguished these two words by marking one to be pro- nounced short and the other long, Shad and Shad, or Shed and Shed, like the English ship and sheep. But whether this Masoretic punctuation preserved correctly the tradition of the ancient difference of pronunciation is a matter of debate among the best scholars.* It is, however, a very convenient way of distinguishing the two words : Sh§D, a demon, as above described, and ShaD, the female breast or teat.f from which I would de- rive a word for wife, ShDE, which occurs only once in the Hebrew Scriptures (Ecc. 2 : 8). It is a curious fact, and bears upon our subject, thatGesenius rejects this plausible etymology and prefers to derive ShDE, from the other ShD (which he now says means simply 'power, although he has elsewhere said that it never meant power except in a bad or destruc- tive sense), translating it not wife, but mistress, domina. I leave to others to explain how two such irreconcilable ideas came to be expressed by the same word ; how ShD could be used to express both destruction and nutrition, a midnight robbery and a woman's breast, the invasion of savage enemies and the suckling of children. But I will show that both these two irreconcilable ideas are involved in the texts relating to the deity ShDI, who is regarded (sometimes in the same passage) as the god of vengeance and destruction and as the god of covenant promise of * I cannot see how it can be of any value, seeing that it is not consistent with itself; for in Lam. 4 : 3, the word is pointed short, "\\ff ; in Job. 21 : 9, Is. 60:16, long "l'ty, and in Hosea 9 : 14, Cant. 4 : 5, Gen. 49 : 25, also long CD'tiy tlie two breasts. Gesenius derives this ShaD from an obsolete Shadah, allied to tbe Chaldee and Arabic verbs "to cast, shoot, pour, moisten, irrigate." In other words, it has no known Hebrew etymology. It certainly has nothing to do with the old Egyptian BNTT (Benti).the two dugs (Pierret's Diet., p. 181), nor with the Coptic form MNOT, mamma. tShD in Hebrew exactly corresponds to rintr^ and teat. 1886.J 307 [Lesley. boundless prosperity and posterity; that he is in a very especial manner re- garded as the god of generation and increase, and in so striking a form is he thus presented, that his name might without any violation of logic be derived from ShD the female breast or teat. Gen. 17 : 1. This is the first appearance of ShDI in the Mosaic books. If El Shaddai meant God the Almighty, his appropriate first appearance ■would be in the stories of the creation. But the word is not used until the story of the Covenant with Abram is reached. This covenant is sealed by a change of Abram's name to Abraham. First a son, and then a countless progeny is promised ; nations and kings are to come from him ; Caanan is to be possessed ; circumcision is enjoined ; Sarai's name is changed to Sarah ; Isaak is only promised ; but Ishmael is blessed, and twelve princes are to come from him and a great nation ; and the story winds up with the act of circumcising Ishmael and the rest of the household. This remarkable story, of unknown date, opens with the words : 'And when Abram was ninety- nine years old, Jehovah appeared to Abram and said to him, 'I am El SheDl, keep walking before me and be faultless.' " After this, Jehovah is not again mentioned, nor is El Shedi repeated, but El recurs eight times. It is evident that the story was borrowed by the Hebrews from the Arabs, for Ishmael is its hero, and Isaac is of no account. A great nation, sub- divided into twelve tribes each, with its own princedom is to descend from Ishmael, for whom Abram pleads, and whom El specially blesses. The promise to Abram of a countless posterity is apparently to be realized through Ishmael ; Isaak is not yet born. The Hebrew compiler seems to have imitated the two great features of the Arab story (the change of Abram's name and the blessing of Ishmael) with the only materials left to him, to save the amour propre of the Hebrews, by changing Sarai's name and promising Isaak. If the story be one thus borrowed, it is easy to understand why the Hebrew writer glossed the first verse in a Hebrew sense by the insertion of the word Jehovah and the explanation that he, Jehovah, was El Shedi. The original story, as told of their own ancestral beginning by the Children of the Desert, probably began : "When Abram was ninety-nine years old the god Shedi appeared to him and warned him to continue always to be his faultless servant." As to circumcision, it is well known that the Egyptians and Libjrans practiced it in ages preceding any date assignable to Abram. Gen. 28 : 3. The next appearance of El Shedi occurs in an Idumaean legend : Esau is overheard by Rebecca threatening to kill Jacob. She advises Jacob to fly, and pretends to Isaac that she fears Jacob will marry some Hittite girl, that is, some young beduine of the Kadish Barnea country. Isaac therefore sends his son to Mesopotamia for a Chaldean wife, saying: "and El Shedi will bless thee and make thee the fruitful Lesley.] ^Ob [jau. 15, sire of a horde of nations, and give thee Abraham's blessing and his prom- ised lands." After describing Esau's marriages and settlement, the story of Jacob's journey is taken up, and then, and not until then, comes in the name Jehovah, "I am Jehovah Elohi Abraham, thy father," &c, who promises him a great covenant people. Jacob, awakened and affrighted, erected a stone and called the place, not Bethjah, but Bethel. Gen. 35 : 11. The third time El Shedi appears it is under precisely similar circumstances ; Jacob returns from Mesopotamia to Bethel, with a great household and builds an altar, this time dedicating it by the name of (not Jehovah, but) El-Beth-El, "because El had appeared there to him when he fled from his brother. ' ' And El now again appears to him and repeats the blessing; changes his name from Jacob to Isra-El, saying, "I am El Shedi, be fruitful and multiply ; a nation, a horde of nations shall be of thee, and kings shall come from thy loins ; " the land was again prom- ised, and then " El ascended from him in the place where he talked with him." Gen. 43 : 14. The fourth place the name appears is in the story of the famine, and from Jacob's mouth. "Take also your brother (Benjamin) and arise, go back to the man (Joseph, now prince of Egypt) and El Shedi give you mercy before the man, that he may send back to me your other brother and Benjamin too.* But if I be bereaved (of my children) I am bereaved." i. e., El Shedi promised them to me at Bethel, and if he takes them away again, I must be resigned. There is here again no mention of Jehovah. El Shedi is evidently the tutelary deity of the Abrahamic nomades. And he is evidently in some mysterious way the god that gives increase. Gen. 48 : 3. The next occurrence of the word carries out this idea ex- actly. It is again Jacob who says to Joseph "El Shedi appeared unto me at Luz (Bethel) and blessed me and said to me, ' Lo, I make thee fruitful * * * a host of peoples, and give this land to thy seed forever.' " There is no reference to Jehovah. Gen. 49 : 25 is very remarkable. El Shedi here occurs in Jacob's bless- ing, and in that part of it addressed to Joseph (Ephraim and Manasseh, the ten tribes, and not at all to Judah), but he divides the El from the Shedi, and assigns them two separate tasks : — "By the El of thy father who shall help thee, and by the Shedi who shall bless thee with blessings," &c. &c. If Shaddai be as the commentors fancy "the Almighty," then Jacob ought to have reversed the parts of his blessing, and said : "By Shedi who shall help thee, and by El who shall bless thee," &c. It is elear that the idea of a blessed posterity, fruitfulness, &c, is organically involved in the word El Shedi as used six times in Genesis. It must be noted no article is prefixed to El nor to Shedi ; but a curious poetic balance is preserved by inserting nx before Shedi. It really means * If Joseph was under the Hyksos, he also must have had the god Setl as his Kod, and this reference to Shedi's Influence over Joseph has a double value. 188C] dVJ [Lesley. nothing, but it balances the 78 El of the first division of the verse. In the five previous occurrences, which are all prose, El and Shedi occur in com- bination ; in this sixth occurrence, in a poem, the El and the Shedi are separated, but instead of El Shedi the poet writes Et Shedi. Exodus 6 : 3. Here we have a legendary commentary on the use of El Shedi in Genesis. "Then Jebovah said to Moses * * * I am Jehovah. I appeared to Abraham, Isaac and Jacob as Q)* El Shedi, and by my name Jehovah was I not known to them ; and I established my covenant with them to give them the land of Canaan * * * I remember my covenant * * * I will bring you out of Egypt," &c, &c. It is surprising how the ideas of covenant and land cling to this term El Shedi, and how not a suggestion of violence, or the need of almightiness, is made in any of the legends which carry the term El Shedi. The god thus named is evidently the family or tribal deity of the Abrahamidte, quite different from the Jehovah of the later Jewish cult. This is the only place in the book of Exodus wbere El Shedi appears, nor does it appear at all in Leviticus. But in Numb. 24 : 4, it turns up again and significantly enough in the rhapsody of the Chaldean prophet Balaam Ben Beor : " And he took up his parable and said : Balaam Ben Beor speaks ; the man of open eyes speaks ; he speaks who hears the words of El, who sees the vision of Sliedi, entranced (?) open eyed," &c. Here again El Shedi are poetically parted for sake of the rythm. But the same old theme is harped upon. It is always El Shedi' s covenant and promise of Canaan to Abram : " How goodly are thy tents oh Israel ! * * * As the valleys * * * gardens * * * trees * * * planted * * * pour water from his buckets * * * seed in many waters * * * his king higher than Agag, his kingdom exalted. El brought him out of Egypt, strong as a unicorn, he shall eat up the nations his enemies, break their bones, pierce them with arrows, crouching like a lion," &c. Here we see the first and current idea of fertility (shet), supplemented at length by the idea of violence (shet), and the two combined in the most poetic style. It is needless to add that all thought of Jehovah is absent. The story belongs to Moab or the lands east of the Dead sea. Ruth 1 : 20, 21. We meet with no El Shedi in Deuteronomy, which is wholly given up to Jehovah worship, nor in Joshua, nor in Judges. But in another Moabite legend — that of Ruth — Naomi says to her old acquaint- ances in Bethlehem, after her return from Moab : "Call me not Naomi (the pleasing), call me Mara (bitterness), for Shedi has dealt very bitterly with me. I went out full and Jehovah has brought me home empty. Why call me Naomi, since Jehovah has testified against me, and Shedi has afflicted me. In the Arabic poem of Job (included among the sacred books of the Jews) we might expect El Shedi to appear frequently, from the facts already mentioned, and also from the striking fact that the name Jehovah occurs * If this 3 were a 3 we could account for it; but an exact translation with 3 should read " I appeared to Abraham . . . in El Shedi," as if it were the name of a place, i. e. Bethel. It is hardly possible that *7frO should here be Baal. Lesley.] *>lt) [Jan. 15, only once in the whole book : "Then Job arose (after hearing of the utter destruction of his whole family and all his possessions) and rent his mantle and shaved his head and fell on the ground and worshiped, and said : Naked I issued from the womb of my mother, and naked shall I return thither ; Jehovah gives and Jehovah takes, let the name of Jehovah be blessed. In all these Job sinned not, and gave not spit (H )DD) to Elohim." This single allusion to Jehovah occurs in an evidently proverbial form, at the close of a historical prose introduction to the original poem ; an introduction which may or may not be ascribed to the Jewish compiler. At all events the total absence of the name of the Jewish deity from the poem itself renders its occurrence in the prologue sufficiently suspicious. In strong contrast to this absence of the name Jehovah is the constant use of the names Eloeh, Elohim, and Shedi. The introduction opens thus (Job 1:1): "There was a man * * * who * * * feared Elohim and avoided sin." And in the beginning of the poem (Job 3 :4): "Job opened his mouth and cursed his day * * * Let that day be darkness ; let Eloeh not look at it from above," &c. It is evident that the race to which Job belonged worshiped a deity called Elohim (or worshiped gods, Elohim, it would be hard to decide which), for in the opening verse of the 2d chapter they are called Beni Elohim, just as the Hebrews were habitually called Beni Israel. The deity name Shedi occurs (not in the introduction, nor in the conclu- sion, but) in the poem itself thirty-one times, and the deity bearing this name is described as inscrutible (11 : 7, 37 : 23), omniscient (24 : 1, 40 : 2) giver of inspiration and life (32 : 8, 33 : 4), just in judgment (8 : 3, 31 : 35, 34 : 10, 34 : 12), paying no regard to complaints that are silly (35 : 13), open to prayer (8 : 5, 13 : 3), punishing the wicked (27 : 13), wrathful when offended (21 : 20), building up, defending, delighting and being with his worshipers (22 : 23, 25, 26, 29 : 5). At the same time Job complains that "the arrows of Shedi&re (sticking) in him (5 : 4), that El has killed his heart ("pH for J1H) and Shedi has troubled him (23 : 16), that Shedi hath vexed his soul (27 : 2). But appa- rently he vents these complaints without feeling any disrespect towards the deity. In the same mental mood, Eliphaz the Temanite, says (5 : 17) "Lo! Happy the man whom Eloeh correcteth, and the chastisement of Shedi City *ID10) despise not." Job replies (6 : 14): "To the afflicted from a friend pity ! and (but) the fear of Shedihe forsaketh." " The wicked man " (15 : 20) is described by Eliphaz as "stretching his hand against ^(nateh el el ido) and making himself a hero against Shedi" (v el Shedi ithgabar) (15 : 23). And Job in his turn describes "the wicked " (21 : 7) as saying, "What is Shedi (men Shedi) that we should serve him, and how shall we profit by praying to him?" Of the hypocrite he asks (27 : 10) "Will he delight himself, or rather, does he make himself an object of pleasure to Shedi (im ol Shedi ithonau), does he ever call on Eloeh (iqra eloe b'col oth)?" 1886.] Oil. [Lesley. Eliphaz seems to have a very unanthropomorplric notion of Shedi. He begins one of his discourses thus (22 : 2) "Can a hero (geber) be profit to ■El, as a sage'is profit to himself? Is it delightful to Shedi that thou art righteous (zedek), and is it gainful (to him) that thy ways are good (tam)?" And then he goes on to show Job that Shedi simply regards him as a sinner and punishes him as such, and not at all out of any personal considerations. One more reference to Shedi is made in this poem, and it requires separate consideration, because it takes us back to the ideas of covenant and in- heritance. Job (31 : 2) is attesting his uprightness. "I madea covenant with my eyes, and why should I think on a maid, and what has Eloeh allotted (as my portion) from on high, and what Shedi as my inheritance? Is not destruction the lot of the unrighteous, and misfortune that of the evil doers? Does he not see my ways, and count my steps? " &c. It remains only to draw attention to the poetical balancing of El {Eloeh) against Shedi, proving that the full name was El Shedi, or Eloeh Shedi, throughout the book. The absence of any article would prove the vulgar translation of Shedi as "the almighty," to be a mistake, apart from all other arguments. It would be just as reasonable to expect an article with El or Eloeh, "the god." Shedi is evidently as personal a proper name, as Baal, or Jehovah, or Seti. The translation " the almighty " falls to the ground with the etymology ■of Shedi, from Shed strong ; and we have seen that Shed, among its various meanings, has one whieh does not mean strong, but violent. It is true that the El Shedi of the poem of Job is rather an amiable deity. But this he would undoubtedly be in the eyes of his original worshipers in Arabia. The poem hints plainly enough that he could be a typhonic demon to " the wicked, " that is to people who worshiped other deities and cared nothing for Shedi. In the Psalms the name Shedi occurs only twice. Ps. 68 : 14. This superb chant, beginning "Let Elohim arise, let his foes be scattered ; let his haters flee before him. As smoke is driven, as wax is melted, let the wicked perish from the face of Elohim; but let the righteous rejoice," &c. "Extol the cloud-rider by his name Jehovah." "Jehovah gave the song of victory, messengers of victory to the great host." "The kings of the hosts flee, they flee, and the housewife divides the booty; when ye rest among the cattle stalls, where doves' wings are silver white, with golden feathers.'' "In Paras Shedi, kings therein, it snowed in Salmon." No clear meaning can be made out of this part of the Psalm, but either Paras Shedi was the name of a place "the scattering of Shedi," or Shedi was supposed to rout the kings on the snow-covered Salmon. At all events the mixture of Jehovah, Elohim and Shedi in this wild war song is very remarkable. Ps. 91 : 1. We have in this song no mention of Elohim, but a mingling of Oliun, Shedi and Jehovah, none of them with an article: "Sitting beneath the protection of Oliun (the highest), resting in the shade of Shedi, Lesley.] ^J--" [Jan. 15, 1886. I say to Jehovah, my safety place, and my fortress, my god CH/K), I con- fide in him." It is evidently a song of the desert. The angels bear him up lest he stumble among the rocks ; he is saved from the lion and the snake and the dragon (whatever that was). It looks as if "under the shade of Shedi," was a proverbial expression among the Beduin. Isaiah has Shedi only once (13 : 6) : "Howl ! for the day of Jehovah comes, it comes like devastation from Shedi (k-ShD ra-ShDI). The alliteration suggests that Shedi was the Ty phonic demon, and nothing could be more appropriate ; for Isaiah is prophesying against Babylon's utter destruction, to be produced by an invasion from the mountains of many nations. DeWitte translates ShD "verheerung." It is not to be supposed that Isaiah would not have frequently employed Shedi, if it meant "almighty" as an epithet for Jehovah. This is the only time he uses the word. Jeremiah appears not to have known the word. Ezechiel uses it only once (1 : 24), in describing the four-visaged creatures which appeared to him out of the fiery cloud in Chaldea ; their heads sup- ported a platform (firmament) of crystal, on which was a throne of sapphire, and on the throne sat a man of amber-colored fire, overarched by a rainbow; "this was the appearance of the likeness of the glory of Jehovah," a well- guarded expression. The creatures had living wheels, self-intelligent, "their spirit being in the wheels," and "the voice (/1p) of their wings was like the voice of mighty waters, like the voice of Shedi" (Jc-qol Shedi); probably meaning "like a roaring storm wind in the desert." Compare "qol Jehovah" breaketh the cedars of Lebanon. "When they moved they made a noise like a whole host." Daniel. This book does not mention Shedi, but it makes mysterious reference to a "god of forces" (11 : 38). Joel alone among the prophets of Palestine speaks of Sliedi, and that only once (1 : 15), and then in the sense of a destroyer. " Alas the day ! for the day of Jehovah, and it will come like destruction from Shedi (u-k- ShD m ■ ShDI ibua). Joel repeats precisely the phrase in Isa. 13 : 6, with its alliteration ; which seems to settle it beyond doubt that Isaiah and Joel used Shad Shedi, as a well understood formula; perhaps a popular expression for &razzia of Beduins, or perhaps for a sandstorm . But whatever special meaning it had must have been based on a conception of the typhonic demon of destruction like the Seti of the Egyptian monuments, and the Shaitan (devil) of Mohammedan literature.* *It is interesting to compare Seti, cut stone and heap of stones with the modern Mohammedan practice of throwing stones at Sheitan, resulting in the accumula- tion of piles of stones, at certain fixed places, all of them [regarded as either sacred or accursed. Nov. 6, 1885.] ^1«5 Stated Meeting, November 6, 1885. Present, 18 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Mr. William John Potts, a newly -elected member, was pre- sented to the Chair and took his seat. Donations for the Library were received from the Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft, Berlin ; Naturhistorischer Verein and Prof. J. Lehmann of Bonn ; Schweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Luzerne ; E. Accademia dei Lincei, Eome ; K. Is- tituto Veneto di Scienze, &c, Venice ; Academie Eoyale de Belgique ; Eoyal Geographical Society, Meteorological Coun- cil, Eoyal Meteorological Society, Nature, Messrs. Joseph Prest- wich, C. W. King, Wm. Barlow and Dr. Benjamin Ward Eichardson of London ; the Philological Society, Cambridge, England ; the Canadian Institute, Toronto ; Natural History Society, Montreal ; Essex Institute, Harvard University, Mu- seum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass. ; and Ameri- can Antiquarian Society, Worcester, Mass. ; American Journal of Science, New Haven ; American Chemical Society, Meteor- ological Observatory of New York ; the Young Men's Library at Buffalo ; Mr. John B. Smith of Brooklyn ; the Engineers' Club, Franklin Institute, Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Dr. J. M. Hays, Prof. E. D. Cope and Messrs. Henry Phillips, Jr., McCalla & Stavelv, and Eev. H. Clay Trumbull, of Phil- adelphia; Johns Hopkins University and Prof. Ira Eemsen of Baltimore ; the United States Fish Commission, National Mu- seum, Naval Observatory, Geological Survey, the Department of State and War Department ; Mr. Jed. Hotchkiss of Staunton, Va. ; the Elliott Society of Science and Art, Charleston, S. C; and the Society of Natural History, Cincinnati. Letters of envoy were received from Die Schweiz. Gesell- schaft (Berne) ; Wm. Barton (London) ; United States Geologi- cal Survey (Washington, D. C.) ; Museum of Comparative Zoology (Cambridge Mass.) ; Canadian Institute, Toronto PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2n. PRINTED MARCH P, 1886. 314 [Nov. 6, (with Yol. XXXI, 143), and requesting exchange ; which, on motion, was granted and the Society placed on Exchange list. Letters accepting membership were read from W. J. A. Bon will, M. D. (October 28, 1885, 1721 Locust St., Philadel- phia); Thomas M. Cleemann, C. E. (October 19, 1885, 2135 Spruce St., Philadelphia) ; Wm. John Potts (529 Cooper St., Camden, N. J., October 20, 1885) ; Prof. Edward North, LL.D. (October 26, 1885, Hamilton College, Clinton, N. Y.); Prof. M. Scheie DeYere (October 20, 1885, University of Yirginia). Letters acknowledging receipt of diploma were read from Prof. Henry S. Frieze (Ann Arbor, Mich.) ; Isaac Sharpless (Haverford College P. O., Pa.) ; Prof. John W. Mallet (Uni- versity of Yirginia) ; Prof. Walter LeConte Stevens (Hoboken, N. J.). Letters were received from the Chief Signal Officer, U. S. A., Washington, D. C, requesting certain Proceedings and Trans- actions. On motion the Signal Office was placed on the Exchange list and ordered to receive Proceedings. A letter was received from Prof. E. C. Pickering of Harvard College Observatory, requesting a copy of Transactions, Yol. IX, containing a paper by the late Eobert Treat Paine, which was ordered to be sent. Letters were received from the Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, acknowledging Nos. 116 and 119 ; E. W. Claypole (Akron, Ohio), acknowledging Nos. 117, 118, 119, 120; Wm. John Potts (Camden, N. J.), acknowledging Nos. 117, 118, 119, 120 ; Mr. Thomas M. Cleemann (Philadelphia), acknowledging Nos. 117, 118, 119, 120. Dr. W. S. W. Euschenberger read, by appointment, a sketch of the life of the late Eobert E. Rogers, M. D., LL.D., with biographical notices of his father and brothers ; after which the President and Dr. Horn made some appropriate and feeling remarks on the subject, The death of Thomas Davidson (Brighton, England), was announced as having taken place on October 16, 18S5, in the 69th year of his age. 18*5.] 315 Nominations Nos. 1064, 1065 and 1066, were read. The Publication Committee, pursuant to the request of the Society of June 19, 1885, made a report which, after discussion, was laid over to the next meeting. Permission was granted to Prof. Cope to withdraw the paper read by himself at last meeting on the Eocene fishes of Wyom- ing Territory and the action of the Secretaries in permitting its withdrawal was approved. Prof. Cope presented estimates for plates for his paper read at last meeting on the Structure of the Brain, &c, # * * of a Theromorphous Reptile, which, on motion, was referred to the Finance Committee for action. The President reported that he had received and paid over to the Treasurer $132.43, amount of Michaux legacy due October 1, 1885. And at ten minutes after ten o'clock, P.M., the meeting was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, November 20, 1885. Present, 16 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Dr. "W. J. A. Bonwill, Mr. Thomas M. Cleemann, Prof. S. "W. Gross, newly-elected members, were presented to the Chair, and took their seats. Donations for the Library were received from the Mining Department, Melbourne; Eoyal Society of Yictoria; Royal Asiatic Society (North China Branch) ; Geological Survey of India; Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipzig; Verein fur Geo- graphic und Statistik, Frankfurt-am-Main ; Prof. G. vom Rath, of Bonn ; the Nordisk Oldkyndighed og Historie Sels- kab, Copenhagen ; Statistika Central Byran, Stockholm ; Musee Teyler, Haarlem ; the Ministere de l'lnterieur and Commission Centrale de Statistique, Bruxelles; R. Acca- 316 INov. 20, demia dei Lincei, Rome ; Societe Nationale des Sciences Naturelles, Cherbourg; Societe des Antiquaires de France; Societe Americaine de France ; Societe d' Anthropologic ; Societe Zoologique and Societe de Geographie, Paris; R. Academia de la Historia, Madrid; Royal Astro- nomical and R. Geographical Societies, Meteorological Coun- cil, Journal of Forestry, and Nature, London ; Literary and Philosophical Society, Liverpool ; Philosophical Society, Glasgow; Boston Society of Natural History, Mr. Robert Nixon Tophan, Cambridge, Mass. ; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester; Meteorological Observatory of New York; the Mercantile Library Association of Brooklyn; Academy of Sciences of Philadelphia, Mercantile Library and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr. ; Johns Hopkins University ; Depart- ment of the Interior, United States Fish Commission and Mr. Samuel H. Scudder, of "Washington ; Washburn College, Topeka, and the University of California. Letters of envoy were read from La Societe Nationale des Antiquaires de France (Paris); Geological Survey of India (Calcutta) ; Fondation de P. Teyler van der Hulst (Harlem) ; Ministere de l'Interieur (Bruxelles). Letters of acknowledgment were read from Konigliche Bibliothek, Berlin (117, 118, 119); K. K. Sternwarte, Prag (116) ; Harvard College Observatory, Cambridge, Mass. (Trans- actions IX); Chief Signal Officer U.S.A., Washington, D. C. (Proceedings 96-121; Transactions XV, XVI, i); Fondation van der Hulst, Harlem (Proceedings 117, 118, 119); Japetus Steenstrup, Copenhagen (116, 117, 118, 119); Royal Society of London (116) ; Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne (114, 115). Letters accepting membership in the Society were read from Prof. Guiseppe Sergi (Nov. 3, 1885 ; via Pastrengo 1, Roma, Italia); Prof. Louis Pasteur (Paris, Nov. 5, 1885); Prof. Ernst Haeckel, Jena, Nov. 4, 1885) ; Prof. Dr. Josef von Lenhossek (Buda Pesth, Nov. 4, 1885) ; Prof. J. Pomialowsky (St. Peters- burg, Oct. 21, 1885) ; Dr. Hermann Rollett (Baden bei Wien, Nov. 5, 1885). 1885.1 317 Letters acknowledging receipt of diploma were read from Lord Coleridge, London, England ; Sir John Lubbock, High Elms, Hayes, Beckenham, England. A letter was received from Dr. Asa Gray and Mr. C. S. Sar- gent, requesting permission to have a copy made of the diary of the elder Michaux, which was presented to the Society by his son in 1824. The request was granted, with the restriction that the copy was to be made in the Society's rooms under the supervision of the Librarian. The Special Committee appointed October 16, 1885, to examine the paper on Iguanidse presented by Prof. E. D. Cope, for the Transactions, reported it to be worthy, and recommended its publication with a suitable plate or plates. On motion, the report was adopted, and the Committee dis- charged. A letter was read from Prof. Cope, requesting that the paper should be printed in the Proceedings with a view to its more speedy publication. The Secretaries stated that in the present condition of the publications of the Society, Prof. Cope's paper would be more speedily printed if, as originally intended, in the Transactions. On motion of Dr. Frazer, it was resolved that the Secreta- ries be requested to inform Prof. Cope of the facts of the case, and to ascertain in which form he prefers that the paper shall appear. The death of W. B. Carpenter (London, Nov. 11, 1885) was announced as having taken place in the seventy-third year of his age. The President reported that, pursuant to resolution of the Society, he had appointed Prof. J. P. Lesley to prepare an obituary notice of the late James Macfarlane, and that Prof. Lesley had signified his willingness. A letter was read from Prof. Weir Mitchell declining, for sufficient reasons, the appointment to prepare an obituary notice of the late George Leib Harrison. Dr. Brinton presented a paper on the Mangue language. Prof. Cope (through the Secretaries) presented the Thir- »>18 [Nov. 20, teenth Contribution to the Herpetology of Tropical Amer- ica. Prof. Houston presented a paper on Photography by a Light- ning Flash during the storm of October 29, 1885. Dr. Frazer presented a resume of the proceedings of the re- cent International Congress of Geologists held at Berlin, which he had attended as one of the delegates from the American Association for the Advancement of Science. Dr. Frazer exhibited an improved prismatic compass (made by Elliott, of London), and a device for printing boundary lines automatic- ally, and explained their advantages. Dr. Frazer also presented four track charts of the North Atlantic ocean, made in 1882, 1883 and 1885. The minutes of the proceedings of the Board of Officers and Council were submitted. Nominations Nos. 1064, 1065, 1066, and new nominations Nos. 1067, 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071, 1072, 1073, 1074, 1075, were read. The Committee of Finance, to which was referred the appli- cation for a plate for Prof. Cope's paper on the brain of a Theromorphous reptile, reported that the Society had in hand funds sufficient for that purpose. The Committee stated that its business was not to pass upon the merits or desirability of any such application, but only upon the question if the Society had funds available for such a purpose. That the ordering of the plates was at the discretion of the Secretaries in their disbursement of the annual appropriation made by the Society for its publications. On motion, the plate was ordered by the Society at estimate price, furnished by Breuker & Kessler. Dr. Frazer exhibited the Geological-Geographical Dictionary of Senor Juan de Villa Nueva y Piera,and UAnnuaire Oeolo- gigue Universelle of D'Agincourt, and offered the following resolution, which was adopted: Resolved, That a Committee, consisting of Prof. Lesley, Prof. Cope, Mr. Franklin Piatt, Mr. C. A. Ashburner and Dr. Frazer be appointed to consider the propriety of assisting the International Geological Congress 1885.] "U in extending the works of MM. Villa Nueva and Neumayer, and thejneans of doing so, and that the Committee he requested to report to the Society at as early a date as possible. And the meeting was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, December 4, 1885. Present, 16 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Dr. Horace Jayne, a newly-elected member, was presented to the Chair, and took his seat. Donations for the Library were received from the Naturfor- schende Gesellschaft and the Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipzig ; K. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin ; Societe de Geo- graphic and L' Alliance Scientifique Universelle, Paris; Nature ; Society of Antiquaries, London ; Canadian Institute ; Geologi- cal and Natural History Survey of Canada ; Boston Society of Natural History ; Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam- bridge; Mr. Charles S. Sargent, of Brookline, Mass.; Yale College ; American Chemical Society and the New York Academy of Sciences; Mr. W. J. Potts, of Camden, N. J; Franklin Institute, the American Fire Insurance Co., Drs. W. S. W. Kuschenberger and Persifor Frazer, Messrs. Alex. E. Harvey, Henry Phillips, Jr., McCalla & Stavely, and Francis Jordan, Jr., of Philadelphia ; Johns Hopkins University, Balti- more ; United States National Museum, United States Geo- logical Survey and the Chief Signal Officer of the United States Army, Washington, D. C. ; Mr. Jed. Hotchkiss, of Staunton, Va., and Mr. G. W. Hough, of Chicago. Letters of envoy were read from the Canadian Institute, Toronto ; the Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore ; U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. 320 [Dec. 4, Letters of acknowledgment were read from the Statistical Society, London (117, 118, 119); the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. (120) ; Annales des Mines (97-120) ; Royal Society of Edinburgh (116, 117, 118, 119). Letters accepting membership in the Society were read from Horace Jayne, M.D. (Phila., 1826 Chestnut St., November 26, 1885), Gaston Plante (Paris, April 12, 1885). A letter was read from Prof. Lesley declining the appointment as chairman of the committee appointed at the last meeting on the works of Villa Nueva and Neumayer. A circular was read from the Trustees of the " Elizabeth Thompson Science Fund," calling attention to the provisions under which the fund was administered. Prof. Frazer, from the Committee on the Works of Villa Nueva and Neumayer, reported progress. An obituary notice of the late James Macfarlane, prepared by Prof. J. P. Lesley, was read by the Secretaries. A MS. record book of the Wistar Association, 1824-1839, was returned to the Society by Prof. Lesley, with a letter stating he had just discovered it among a mass of papers. Dr. Frazer presented a paper entitled a Resume of the Geology of York County, Pa. The Treasurer presented his annual report, which was re- ferred to the Committee on Finance. The Board of Officers and Council submitted certain pro- posed changes in the Laws and Regulations of the Society, which were read, and under the laws laid over until December 18, 1885. Pending nominations Nos. 1067-1075 were read. On motion, permission was given to Prof. Cope to withdraw his paper on Iguanidae, presented and accepted for the Trans- actions, and the Secretaries were requested to add to it his paper " Thirteenth Contribution to the Herpetology of Tropi- cal America." And the meeting was adjourned by the President. 1885.] ^1 Stated Meeting, December 18, 1885. Present, 21 members. President, Mr. Fkaley, in the Chair. Mr. Francis Jordan, Jr., a lately-elected member of the So- ciety, was presented to the Chair and took his seat. Donations for the Library were received from Prof. J. Pomialowsky, of St. Petersburg ; the Astronomische Nach- richten, Kiel ; Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipzig ; Flora Ba- tava, Leiden ; the Academie E. de Belgique ; E. Accademia dei Lincei, Eoma ; Ecole des Mines and Societe de Geographie, Paris; E. Academia de la Historia, Madrid; Geological Society, Meteorological Council, Journal of Forestry, and Nature, Lon- don ; Philological Society, Cambridge, England ; the publishers of the American Architect and Every Other Saturday, Boston ; American Journal of Science ; the publishers of the Critic ; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Brooklyn Library ; College of Pharmacy, Messrs. Edward L. Wilson, Henry Phillips, Jr., and E. S. Culin, Drs. W. S. W. Euschenberger and Charles A. Oliver, and the executors of Mr. Henry Seybert, of Philadel- phia ; Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania ; Johns Hopkins University, editors of the Journal of Philology, and the Chemical Journal, Baltimore ; the War Department and the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey ; editors of the Hoosier Naturalist, Valparaiso, Ind. ; Eev. Stephen D. Peet, of Chicago, 111. ; the Iowa State Historical Society ; University of California ; Observatorio Astronomico Nacional de Tacu- baya, and the Museum National de Eio de Janeiro. Letters of envoy were received from the E. Society of Mel- bourne, Australia ; the Meteorological Commission, London ; the Philosophical Society of Cambridge ; the Canadian Insti- tute, Toronto, Canada. A circular was read from the Nat. Hist, and Physical So- ciety of Geneva, with the conditions of the De Candolle prize. A circular was read from Stearns & Co., Detroit, Mich., PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 20. PRINTED MARCH 15, 1886. 322 [Dec. 18, offering for sale a collection of South American antiquities and inviting bids for the same. The deaths of Dr. Albert II. Smith (December 14, 1885, aet. 51), and Henry S. Hagert, Esq. (December 18, 1885, set. 52), were announced and, on motion, the President was authorized to appoint suitable persons to prepare their obituary notices. Prof. Cope presented for the Transactions a paper by Miss Helen C. de S. Abbott, entitled " A Chemical Study of Yucca angustifolia" which was referred for examination to a com- mittee consisting of Drs. Brinton, Genth and Houston. Prof. Cope made a communication to the Society on the subject of the physical conditions of memory. Nominations Nos. 1061-1075 were read. The proposed change in the Laws and Eegulations of the Society, submitted by the Board of Officers and Council at the last meeting, were taken up, and proof having been made that advertisements had been inserted in two daily Philadelphia newspapers, and that full notice had also been sent to the resi- dent members of the Society, and it appearing that a quorum of at least three of the Officers and Council, and at least thir- teen members of the Society were present, the Society pro- ceeded to the consideration of the proposed alterations, which, after discussion, were unanimously adopted, as follows : That Chapter I, Section 1, shall read as follows : "The election of members shall be by ballot, and shall form part of the stated business of the meetings on the third Fridays of February, May, October and December." That Chapter I, Section 5, shall read as follows: "The names of the candidates and their places of abode shall be desig- nated on the ballots. In voting, the names of the officers shall be called in the order of their seniority by the acting Secretary, the members there- after depositing their ballots. The name of a candidate struck from any ballot or not voted for, shall be considered as a vote adverse to that candi- date." That Chapter I, Section 0, shall read as follows: " After all the other business of the meeting shall have been disposed of, the ballot box shall be opened by the Secretaries, or in their absence by two Tellers to be appointed by the presiding member, who shall then declare to the Society the result pf the poll." 1885.] °^>3 That chapter I, Section 13, be struck out. That Chapter VII, Section 1, shall read as follows : "The Officers and Council shall meet together statedly on the second Friday of February, May and November, respectively, at the same hour in the evening at which the stated meetings of the Society are appointed to be held, and specially at such times as they may judge proper." That Chapter VIII, Section 5, shall read as follows : " He shall give notice of the meetings of the Society and of the Officers and Council, and of all elections, and shall make all such publications on behalf of the Society as are not otherwise devolved by law or special order." That Chapter IX, Section 1, shall read as follows : "The ordinary meetings of the Society shall be on the first and third Fridays of every month from September to June at 8 o'clock in the evening. Special meetings may be called at any time by order of the President, or in case of his absence or disability, by order of a Vice- President. And it shall not be lawful to take up, consider or transact at such special meeting any business other than that which is specified in the call and the notice for the meeting. And no business shall be taken up, considered or transacted at such special meeting, except by such number of qualified voters as would be requisite for a quorum, according to the Laws and Kegulations of the Society." That Chapter IX, Section 2, shall read as follows : "The Chair shall be taken by the presiding member at the hour appointed for the meeting." That Chapter IX, Section 6, shall read as follows : "The Hall of the Society shall be open on every stated meeting at half-past seven o'clock in the evening." That the item " stated business of the meeting " in the Rules of Order (p. 19, Edition 1866) shall be transposed so as to im- mediately follow " Obituary notices of members read and announcements of the decease of members made and acted on ;" and that the numbers prefixed to the respective items in the said order of business be altered to correspond with the said change. That Section 12 of the said Eules of Order (p. 20, Edition 1866) be struck out and the following section be numbered 12. Mr. Phillips presented a list, which he had prepared, of Officers and Councilors of the Society from 1769 to 1886, which was ordered to be printed. ^4 LJan j. On motion, the Secretaries were directed to have the Laws and Regulations of the Society, as adopted this evening, printed for the use of the members. The report of the Finance Committee was presented and accepted and the appropriations passed for the year 1886. And the meeting was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, January 1, 1886. Present, 11 members. President Fraley, in the Chair. Donations for the Library were received from the Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope ; Asiatic Society of Japan ; Anthropologische Gesellschaft, Wien ; Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Anthropologic, &c, Miiachen ; Astronomische Nachrichten, Kiel ; Zoologische Anzeiger, Leipzig ; Archives Neerlandaises, Haerlem; R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome ; Osservatorio della University di Torino ; Societe de Geographie, Societe d' An- thropologic, Musee Guimet, Institut de France and Ecole des Mines, Paris; the Royal Society, Zoological Society, Geological Society, Royal Meteorological Society, the Lords Commission- ers of the Admiralty, Meteorological Council, Greenwich Ob- servatory and Nature, London ; Canadian Institute ; Mr. Par- ker Pillsbury of Concord, N. H.; the publishers of the Ameri- can Architect and Every Other Saturday, Boston ; Meteoro- logical Observatory, New York ; Journal of Medical Sciences, Dr. J. W. Holland, Prof. E. D. Cope, Messrs. Henry Phillips, Jr., E. A. Barber and R. S. Culin, Philadelphia ; Johns Hop- kins University, Baltimore ; Philosophical Society, Washing- ton; the War Department, National Academy of Sciences, United States Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. ; State Board of Health, Ten- nessee; Prof. H. S. Frieze of Ann Arbor, Mich.; Nebraska State Historical Society ; Mr. Wm. M. Stewart of San Fran- cisco ; publisher of the West- American Scientist, San Diego, Cal.; and the Observatorio Meteorologico-Magnetico Central de Mpxico. 1886.1 3^5 The Societe Entomologique de Belgique (by letter dated Bruxelles, Dec. 9, 1885), requested exchanges. On motion, it was placed upon the list to receive Proceedings from No. 96. Geological Society of Glasgow, by letter requested certain missing numbers of the Proceedings, which was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. Letters of envoy were read from the U. S. Coast and Geo- detic Survey ; U. S. Bureau of Ethnology ; La Societe Hol- landaise des Sciences, Hserlem. Mr. Everard F. im Thurn, of British Guiana, accepted mem- bership by letter dated Torquay, England, Dec. 19, 1885. The President reported that he had appointed Dr. Harrison Allen to prepare obituary notice of the late Dr. A. H. Smith, and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., of the late Henry S. Hagert, Esq., and that both had accepted the appointment. The death of Samuel Birch, LL.D. (London, Dec. 29, 1885), in the 72 d year of his age, was announced. The judges of the annual election reported that the follow- ing officers and council had been elected for the year 1886, viz: President, Frederick Fraley. Vice- Presidents, E. Otis Kendall, Pliny E. Chase, W. S. W. Ruschenberger. Secretaries, J. P. Lesley, G. F. Barker, D. G. Brinton, Henry Phillips, Jr. Councilors, Oswald Seidensticker, Richard "Wood, Wm. V. McKean, Persifor Frazer. Councilor for one year, in lieu of W. S. W. Ruschenberger, resigned, Thomas H. Dudley. Curators, Geo. H. Horn, Charles G. Ames, John R. Baker. Treasurer, J. Sergeant Price. <^U [Jan. 15, On motion, Henry Phillips, Jr., Esq., was renominated for Librarian, and the nominations were closed. Prof. Cope presented for the Transactions a paper " On the Intercentrum of the Terrestrial Vertebrata," which was re- ferred to Dr. H. Allen, Dr. H. Jayne, and Dr. Geo. H. Horn. Prof. Allen made a communication on the result of experi- ments on electric light used in photographing animals in motion. Prof. Cope presented for the Proceedings a paper by Dr. Alfredo Duges of Guanajuato, Sur le Rhinocheilus Antonii. Pending nominations Nos. 1064-1075 and new nominations Nos. 1076 -1080 were read. Eeport of the Publication Committee presented November 6th, 1885, was taken up and considered, and the recommenda- tions therein contained were unanimously adopted, as follows : 1. That the Quarterly numbers of the Proceedings shall be confined as nearly as possible to 125 pp. each. 2. That papers containing more matter than will fill about 24 pp. of the Proceedings shall be considered as offered for the Transactions.' 3. That all papers requiring engravings or plates of full page size shall be considered as offered for the Transactions. The committee appointed at last meeting on the paper on Yucca angustifolia, reported progress and was continued. After the reading of the rough minutes the meeting was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, January 15, 18S6. Present, 25 members. President Fraley, in the Chair. Letters of envoy were received from the Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Helsingfors ; Bataafsch Genootschap der Proe- fondervindclijke Wijsbegeerte, Rotterdam ; Royal Society of Victoria : Societe de Naturalistes de la No u veil e Russie, Odessa, 188(5.] 327 and asking for exchanges (on motion, ordered to be placed on the list to receive Proceedings from No. 96). Acknowledgments were received from the Koyal Society of Tasmania for Proceedings Nos. 114, 115, 116 ; Proc. 120, South Kensington Museum, London ; University Library, Cambridge ; Radcliff Observatory, Oxford, also for five duplicate volumes of its publications returned to the Observatory; Triibner & Co., London. Acknowledgments for Proceedings No. 121, were received from the Portland Society of Natural History ; New Hamp- shire Historical Society; Essex Institute; American Anti- quarian Society, Worcester, Mass.; Rhode Island Society for the Encouragement of Domestic Industry ; Connecticut His- torical Society ; New York Hospital ; Library of the U. S. Military Academy ; Yassar Brothers' Institute ; New Jersey Historical Society ; Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Philadelphia ; Engineers' Club of Philadelphia ; Historical Society of Pennsylvania in Philadelphia; Wyoming Historical and Geological Society ; Virginia Historical Society ; Univer- sity of Virginia ; Leander McCormick Observatory ; Georgia Historical Society ; Cincinnati Observatory ; Chicago Histori- cal Society ; Rantoul Literary Society ; State Historical Society of Wisconsin; Chief Signal Officer, Washington, D. C; Cali- fornia Academy of Sciences ; University of California ; David- son Observatory, San Francisco, Cal. The Davenport Academy of Natural Sciences acknowledged the receipt of Proceedings No. 121, also preceding numbers, commencing with No. 81. Acknowledgments for Proceedings No. 121 were received from Prof. Charles Henry Hitchcock, Hanover, N. H.; Hon. R. C. Winthrop, Boston, Mass.; Prof. Walcott Gibbs, Cambridge, Mass.; Mr. James B. Francis, Lowell, Mass.; Mr. Benj. Smith Lyman and Dr. Pliny Earle, Northampton, Mass.; Drs. J. J. Stevenson and Austin Flint, Jr., Prof. Henry M. Baird and Mr. J. Ericsson, New York ; Prof. James Hall, Albany ; Prof. T. F. Crane, Ithaca ; Dr. C. F. H. Peters, Clinton, N. Y.; Rev. Joseph F. Garrison and Mr. William J. Potts, Camden ; Dr. G. D. 328 [Jan. 15, Boardman, Prof. J. P. Lesley, and Messrs. Henry Phillips, Jr., James C. Booth, Isaac Norris, Jr., H. Clay Trumbull, and Eussell Thayer, Philadelphia ; Dr. Henry Hartshorne and Mr. Thomas Meehan, Germantown ; Hon. Washington Townsendj West Chester ; Andrew S. McCreath, Harrisburg ; Prof. J. W. Moore, Easton ; Prof. Leo Lesquereux, Columbus ; Professors Henry Turner Eddy and James Morgan Hart, Cincinnati 5 Prof. Eobert Peter, Lexington ; Prof. Henry S. Frieze, Ann Arbor ; Prof. Joseph L. LeConte, Berkeley, Cal. Photographs for the Society's Album were received from Prof. J. Morgan Hart and Prof. H. Turner Eddy of Cincinnati, Ohio; Prof. James Hall of Albany, N. Y. ; Prof. James C. Booth, Philadelphia. Donations for the Library were received from the Eoyal Society of New South Wales ; Mining Department, Melbourne; Royal Society of Victoria; Hong-Kong Observatory; Societe des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie, Odessa ; Society of Naturalists, Riga ; Society for the Finnish Fauna and Flora, Helsingfors ; Prof. R. F. Reuleaux of Vienna ; the Astronom- ische Nachrichten, Kiel ; Statistika Central Byran, Stockholm ; Bataafsch Genootschap van Proefondervendelijke Wijsbegeerte, Rotterdam ; K. Bibliothek, S'Gravenhage ; Bataviaasch Gen- ootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen, Batavia ; Musee Royale d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique ; R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome ; Museum d'Histoire Naturelle, Societe de Geo- graphic and Societe Amerioaine de France, Paris; Journal of the Society of Arts, Nature, London ; Royal Irish Academy, Dublin ; Mr. W. Douw Lightfall and the Natural History So- ciety of Montreal ; Boston Society of Natural History ; Prof. Eben Norton Horsford of Cambridge, Mass.; American Journal of Science, New Haven ; Essex Institute, Salem, Mass.; Ameri- can Chemical Society and New York Academy of Sciences; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Prof. E. North of Clinton, N. Y.; New Jersey Historical Society ; Library Company of Philadelphia; Franklin Institute, Pennsylvania Museum and School of Industrial Art, the American Naturalist and Messrs. Henry Phillips, Jr., E. A. Barber, R. S. Culm and Wm. V. 1S86.] 329 McKean of Philadelphia ; Prof. Ira Remsen of Baltimore ; Naval Institute, Annapolis ; Mr. J. H. Hickcox, the United States Naval Observatory and the Light-house Board, Washing- ton ; Mr. Jed. Hotchkiss of Staunton, Va. ; and the Cincinnati Society of Natural History. The Committee appointed to examine the paper of Prof. Cope on the Intercentrum of the Vertebrata, reported it worthy of publication in the Transactions. The report was accepted and the Committee discharged. The Committee appointed to examine Miss Helen C. de S. Abbott's paper on Yucca angustifolia, reported in favor of its publication, and was discharged. On motion, the Society ordered the publication of both of the above papers in its Transactions. The death of Joshua B. Lippincott was announced as having taken place at Philadelphia on January 5, 1886, in the seventy- fourth year of his age, and, on motion, the President was au- thorized to appoint at his discretion a suitable person to pre- pare the usual obituary sketch. The stated business of the meeting was then taken up and Henry Phillips, Jr., Esq., was re-elected Librarian for the en- suing year, and the following Standing Committees appointed : Finance, Henry Windsor, J. P. Wetherill, W. B. Eogers. Publication, D. G. Brinton, C. M. Cresson, George H. Horn, Persifor Frazer, J. Blodgett Britton. Hall, J. Sergeant Price, Wm. A. Ingham, Philip H. Law. Library, Henry Phillips, Jr., E. J. Houston, Wm. V. McKean, Thomas H. Dudley, John R. Baker. Mr. Lesley read a paper " On the evident Beduwin origin of the Shedi deity in the Hebrew Scriptures, commonly translated PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 122. 2p. PRINTED MARCH 15, 1886. OdO [Feb. 5. ' the Almighty' "; in which he discussed every text in which it occurs, and drew the conclusion that it bore a manifest relation- ship to the deity Sett, introduced into Egypt and into Palestine from Arabia. After which, a discussion ensued participated in by Messrs. Weil, Law, Trumbull, and Garrison. Mr. Lesley communicated a revision of the section of the LeRoy (Chemung) beds in Bradford county, originally read before the Society, Dec. 7, 1883, giving additions to the list of its fossils and extending it downwards nearly 350 feet, to include a horizon very rich in characteristic forms. Mr. Ashburner made a verbal communication in reference to the late severe storm which began here on Friday, January 8th, and was general over the United States, showing the course of the barometer during its progress. Dr. Persifor Frazer made a communication on the applica- tion of composite photography to handwriting for which, on motion, the Society ordered a plate to cost about $25. The Society ordered that a map to illustrate the paper on the Geology of York county should be printed at a cost of about $40. Dr. Harrison Allen exhibited a specimen of the Ghlamypho- rus truncatus from Mendoza in the Andes, which is now rapidly becoming extinct. He stated that it was described in the Trans- actions of the Society by Dr. Harland about the year 1825. On account of the lateness of the hour, nominations for membership were not read, and, after reading the rough min- utes, the Society was adjourned by the President. Staled Meeting, February 5, 1886. Present, 9 members. Curator, Dr. Horn, in the Chair. Donations were announced from the following: Salskap. Fauna et Flora Fennica, Helsingfors; Astronomischc Nach- richten, Kiel; Zoologischcr Anzeiger, Leipzig; Verein fur Erdkunde, Dresden ; Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesell- 1886.1 331 schaft and Verein fiir Geographie und Statistik, Frankfurt- am- Main ; Fondation Teyler, Harlem ; Academie Royale de Bel- gique ; Societe Royale des Antiquaires du Nord, Copenhagen ; Statistika Central Byran, Stockholm ; R. Accademia dei Lin- cei, Rome; Societe de Geographie, Ecole Poly technique and Societe Linneene de Paris ; R. Academia de la Historia, Madrid ;• Royal Astronomical and Geographical Societies, Meteorological Council, Kew Observatory, Journal of Forestry, Nature, London ; Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford ; American Academy and Boston Society of Natural History ; Harvard University and Professors Eben Norton Horsford and B. M. Everhart of Cambridge, Mass. ; American Antiquarian Society, "Worcester; American Journal of Science, New Haven; New York Historical Society, American Oriental Society and Prof. J. S. Newberry of New York ; Franklin Institute, Numis- matic and Antiquarian Society, College of Pharmacy, Editors of The American Naturalist, Indian Rights Association, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., and Dr. Isaac Lea, of Philadelphia; Johns Hopkins University and the American Journal of Archee- ology, Baltimore ; United States Geological Survey and the Anthropological Society of Washington ; Prof. Henry S. Frieze of Ann Arbor, Mich.; and the Editors of The West- American Scientist, San Diego, Cal. Dr. Pliny Earle presented an engraving of himself for the Society's Album. Letters of envoy were received from Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Helsingfors, Finland ; Royal Society of Northern Antiquaries, Copenhagen; Fondation Yan der Hulst, Haarlem, Holland; Meteorological Office, London, England; U.S. Geologi- cal Survey, Washington ; Prof. Henry S. Frieze, A.nn Arbor, Mich. The Physikalisches Central- Observatorium, St. Petersburg, requested by letter Proceedings No. 109, which, on motion, was granted. A> circular announcing the programme of the U. S. Naval Observatory for the year 1886 was submitted. A letter was read from Henry M. Hugunin (Chicago, Jan. 26, 1886), suggesting that the beginning of the year should more properly be taken from December 21st, as on that day the southward 332 [Feb. 5, march of the sun is terminated and its journey to the north begins. Acknowledgments were received for Proceedings No. 121 from the Museum of Comparative Zoology (Cambridge, Mass.); Messrs. Isaac Burke and Lewis A. Scott (Philadelphia) ; U. S. Naval Institute, Annapolis ; J. H. C. Coffin. Surgeon-General's Office, U. S. Geological Survey, Smithsonian Institution (Wash- ington) ; Prof. Henry S. Frieze (Ann Arbor, Mich.) ; State His- torical Society of Wisconsin ; John F. Carll (Pleasantville, Pa.) ; also from the Philosophical Society of Cambridge (England), for No. 120; Annales des Mines, Paris (117, 118, 120). Dr. A. S. Gatschet (Washington, D. C), by letter, acknowl- edged the receipt of his diploma. Prof. Cope presented for the Transactions a paper on the structure and affinities of the Amphiuma, which was referred to Dr. Harrison Allen, Dr. George H. Horn, and Mr. Charles A. Ashburner to examine. For the Proceedings were presented a paper from Dr. Hoff- man of Washington, on some Indian Tribal Names, and a paper by Prof. A. S. Packard of Providence, K. I., on the discovery of thoracic feet in a carboniferous Phyllocaridan. Dr. Horn exhibited sketches of Chrysobotheris and anatomi- cal details. Nominations Nos. 1064 to 1080 were read. On motion, the Society resolved to appoint a committee to revise its work and to examine into its condition and suggest what, if any, measures are necessary to increase its efficiency. The Chair was desired to announce the committee at the next meeting of the Society. On motion of Prof. Cope it was resolved that the Secretaries be requested to publish the proceedings and papers read before the Society in each year, so far as practicable, within the vol- ume for that year. On motion of Prof. Cope the Committee on Publication was requested to report on the desirability of increasing the size of the edition of the Transactions from 500 to 1000. The rough minutes were read and the Society was adjourned by the presiding officer. 1880. J *>«*> Stated Meeting, February 19, 1886. Present, 19 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Donations were received from the following: Geological Survey of India ; Magyar Tudomanyos Akademie, Buda- pesth ; Numismatische Gesellschaft, Wien ; Deutsche Gesell- schaft fur Anthropologic, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, Mu- nich ; Astronomische Nachrichten, Kiel ; Zoologischer Anzei- ger, Leipzig; Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Frieburg; E. Accademia dei Lincei, Kome ; Ecole des Mines and Societe de Geographie, Paris ; E. Academia de la Historia, Madrid ; Eoyal Geographical Society, Journal of Forestry, "The Asclepiad '* and " Nature," London ; Eoyal Geographical Society of Ireland ; Harvard University ; Ehode Island His- torical Society; New York Academy of Sciences and the Astor Library ; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; College of Pharmacy, Dr. Daniel G. Brinton and Messrs. W. S. Baker, Henry Phillips, Jr., and Charles A. Ashburner, of Philadel- phia; Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania ; War Depart- ment, Department of the Interior, Bureau of Education and U. S. Commission of Fish and Fisheries, Washington, D. C. ; State Board of Health of Tennessee ; Chicago Historical Society, and the California Academy of Sciences. Letters of envoy were received from the Magyar Tudoman- yos Akademie (Buda-Pesth), and the California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Naturfor- schende Gesellschaft, at Emden. A letter was read from the California Academy of Sciences enclosing a list of its duplicates for sale. An obituary notice of the late George Whitney, written by Mr. William Sellers, was read by the Secretaries. The Committee on Prof. Cope's paper, appointed at the last meeting of the Society, reported progress, and was continued. The President announced that he had appointed as the com- 331: [Feb. 19, mittee which he was authorized to appoint by resolution of Dr. Frazer, at the last meeting, Dr. Frazer, Mr. Law, Dr. Horn, Dr. Brinton and Mr. McKean. Dr. Frazer from the committee reported progress, and the committee was continued. The minutes of the Board of Officers and Council were sub- mitted to the Society. This being the regular evening for ballotting for members, an election was held, and the following persons were declared duly elected members of the Society. 2059. Dr. Edward Pepper, Paris. 2060. Prof. Serge Nikotin, St. Petersburg. 2061. Lieut. A. B. Wyckoff, TJ. S. Navy. 2062. Lieut. A. B. Murdock, U. S. Navy. 2063. Ensign Louis Duncan, U. S. Navy. 2064. Lieut. George B. Anderson, U. S. Army, "West Point, N. Y. 2065. Robert Noxon Toppan, Cambridge, Mass. 2066. Prof. Hermann A. Hagan, Cambridge, Mass. 2067. Prof. F. A. Genth, Jr., Philadelphia. 2068. Prof. J. W. Holland, M.D., Philadelphia. 2069. Prof. John H. Brinton, M.D., Philadelphia. 2070. Inman Horner, Philadelphia. 2071. I. Minis Hays, M.D., Philadelphia. 2072. Charles A. Oliver, M.D., Philadelphia. A paper was presented through the Secretaries by Prof. John C. Branner, entitled, " The Glaciation of the Wyoming and Lackawanna Valleys" for which the Society ordered two maps. Prof. Cope presented through the Secretaries a paper on Two new species of three-toed Horses from the Upper Miocene, with notes on the Fauna of the Ticholeptus beds. New nominations Nos.1078, 1079, 1080 and 1081 were read. The President reported that he had received and paid over to the Treasurer, $133.07, the amount of the Miehaux rentes due January 1st, 1886. The minutes were read, and the meeting was adjourned by the President. 188C] ,JO° Stated Meeting, March 5, 1886. Present, 22 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Dr. I. Minis Hays, Dr. John W. Holland and Mr. Inman Horner, newly-elected members, were present and took their seats. Donations were announced from Anthropologische Gesell- schaft, Wien ; Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Anthropologie, Eth- nologie und Urgeschichte, Miinchen ; Astronomische Nach- richten, Kiel ; Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipzig ; Academie Eoyale de Belgique ; Societe Americaine de France and Insti- tution Ethnographique, Paris; Royal Society, Meteorological Council, Royal Astronomical Society, and "Nature," Lon- don ; American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston ; American Journal of Science, New Haven ; American Chemi- cal Society, and the publisher of " The Forum," New York ; Hon. Thomas H. Dudley, Camden, N. J. ; Academy of Natu- ral Sciences ; Mercantile Library ; publishers of the American Naturalist ; Messrs. William Dennis Marks, "William S. Auchincloss, Samuel Wagner, Henry Phillips, Jr., and Hon. Richard Yaux, Philadelphia ; Mr. Waters S. Chillson, Palo Alto, Penna. ; Mr. H. B. Plumb, Peely, Penna.; Johns Hop- kins University, Baltimore ; Chemical Society, Bureau of Education, Census Office and United States Geological Survey, Washington ; State Historical Society, Iowa, and University of California. Letters were read from the Laboratory of Natural History and Biology of Dennison University, Granville, Ohio, request- ing exchanges, which, on motion, was so ordered, to begin with No. 121 of the Proceedings; from Rev. T. P. Hughes request- ing the subscription of the Society to his Dictionary of Islam. Letters accepting membership were read from Lieut. J. B. Murdock, U. S. Navy (Norfolk, Ya., Feb. 27th, 1886); Dr. H. A. Hagan (Cambridge, Mass., Feb. 26th, 1886); Robert N. 00® [March 5, 1886. Toppan (Cambridge, Mass., Feb. 22, 1886); Lieut. A. B. Wyckoff, U. S. Navy (Philadelphia, Feb. 24th, 1886) ; Dr. Charles A. Oliver (Philadelphia, Feb. 20th, 1886) ; Dr. I. Minis Hays (Philadelphia, Feb. 20th, 1886); Dr. J. W. Holland (Philadelphia, Feb. 24th, 1886) ; Dr. John H. Brinton (Phila- delphia, Feb. 24, 1886) ; Inman Horner (Philadelphia, March 2, 1886). Letters of envoy were read from the U. S. Geological Sur- vey ; Wm. S. Auchincloss, C. E., Philadelphia. Letters of acknowledgment were read from Observatorio Nacional, Mexico (Proceedings 120) ; Statistical Society, Lon- don (Proceedings lly) ; Societe de Physique et Histoire Natu- relle de Geneva (Proceedings 115, 116); Maryland Historical Society (Proceedings 121). The Committee on Prof. Cope's paper was, on motion, con- tinued. Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., presented an alphabetical list of the living members of the Society which he had been requested to prepare by the Board of Officers and Council. The Treasurer presented the report of the Trustees of the Building Fund. The Special Committee appointed on February 5, 1886, " to revise the work of the Society, and to examine into its condi- tion, and to suggest, what, if any, measures are necessary to increase its efficiency," made a report, which, after discussion, on motion of Mr. McKean was referred to the Board of Offi- cers and Council for its consideration, and, on motion, the committee was discharged. Pending nominations Nos. 1078, 1079, 1080 and 1081 were read. New nominations Nos. 1082-1 103 were read. The rough minutes were read, and the meeting was adjourned by the President. SKETCH MAP VICINITY°fMQCANAQUA,PA. Scale: L600'-l". < Direction of Glacial Striae. Feb. 19, IS86.J &ol [Branner. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXIII. July, 1886. No. 123. The Glaciation of Parts of the Wyoming and Lackawanna Valleys. By John C. Branner, Ph. D. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 19, 1S86.) Prefatory. It has long seemed to me that the careful study of limited glaciated areas would add some valuable information to our present knowledge of the subject of continental glaciation. By a limited area I mean one suffi- ciently large to have a varied and well-defined topography, when taken in connection with the surrounding country, and small enough to admit of thorough examination, and of a representation upon the map of details which cannot be admitted into maps of large areas without obscuring the subject instead of throwing light upon it. The Wyoming and Lacka- wanna valleys, with their bordering mountains, form such an area, and the work necessary to make of this region a topographical map of unusual detail gave me an excellent opportunity for making the necessary observa- tions. I have hesitated though about presenting observations that would be so much more valuable had they been extended, with the same care and detail, over a wider territory, and especially over the high lands that bound the valley to the north and north-west on one side, and to the east and south-east on the other ; but as I shall, in all probability, have no opportunity for completing the work, and as all knowledge is cumulative, I offer these notes in the hope that others may be induced to add to them, and thus render them more valuable. The glacial geology of this region is exceedingly varied and interesting. The Shickshinny end of the basin, on account of its bold and well-defined topography, is particularly so, especially in the study of the ice currents in their relation to topography. In studying the area under consideration; however, I have never lost sight of the fact that I was dealing with a very small portion of the glaciated part of the continent, and with localized parts, localized movements, and localized facts in a continental glacier. Although the work done and the explanations offered here are entirely PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 2q. PRINTED MARCH 29, 188G. Branner.] OOO [Feb. 10, original, I find that the influence of topography upon the movement of the ice was given, as an explanation of double striation, by Mr. C. E. Hall in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, Novem- ber 5, 1875 (pp. 633-4). The expression in this place of his theory upon the subject, is the most explicit I have seen. Prof. N. H. Winchell published an article in the Popular Science Monthly in 1873 upon "The Drift Deposits of the Northwest," in which he refers to the influence of valleys upon the edge of the ice. Mr. T. C. Chamberlin, in his "Terminal Moraine of the Second Glacial Epoch," refers in many places to the influence of topography on the direction of glaciers, and no doubt there are many other references to, and observations upon this sub- ject which I have not been able to consult. If, in recording the facts observed, I have been led to what may possi- bly be regarded as theorizing, my only defence is that it was quite impos- sible to see all about me the evidences of so wonderful, so awe-inspiring phenomena without coming to some conclusions regarding them. Then, too, in his letter transmitting Report Z of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, Professor Lesley has thrown no little doubt over the physical questions connected with glaciation, and, whether his suggestions there be open questions or not, they are calculated to make young geolo- gists observe the evidences of glacial phenomena with a view to arriving at rational conclusions in regard to these questions. The accompanying maps are necessarily upon a scale too small to con- vey a proper idea of the influence of the topography upon the movement of the ice. To show this a map would need to be very detailed and exact, and upon an unusually large scale, or better still, a large model would be required. I take great pleasure in acknowledging here the kind encouragement of Professor Lesley and of Mr. Ashburner. To Mr. Geo. M. Lehman I am indebted for a number of valuable observations upon the direction of stria; in various places, and to Sheldon Reynolds, Esq., of Wilkes-Barre, for some observations made in the vicinity of that city. Physical Features. The Wyoming and Lackawanna valleys are, properly speaking, a single closed and curved synclinal valley, about fifty miles long by about five miles wide at its widest part, and bounded by mountains which coalesce at the extremities of the valley. The concave side of its crescent form faces toward the north-west, the north-east end of the basin bearing about N. 20° E., and the south-west end bearing S. 70° W. Its mountain barriers thus presented themselves to the ice sheet at various angles, and now offer a valuable opportunity for observing the influence of such barriers upon the ice flow. Within this great basin are many secondary or miniature basins with a general resemblance to the large one, and many low, gently undulating and regu- larly sloping hills, some of which are anticlinals, and some are ridges 1SSG.] do J [Branner. with steep sides and abrupt faces, the latter being somewhat characteristic of the south-west end of the basin, the former of the end north-east of Wilkes-Barre. These irregularities diversify the interior of the basin, and add beauty to its natural scenery, while, in some cases, they have pro- duced marked effects in the glaciation and in the distribution of the drift material. The Susquehanna river enters the basin at Pittston, passes out of it again at Nanticoke, and, flowing thence, parallel to its bordering moun- tains, to Shickshinny, it here cuts square across the end of the basin. The north-eastern end of the basin is traversed by the Lackawanna from above Forest City to Pittston, where it flows into the Susquehanna. In the end of the valley north-east of Scranton there is a striking parallelism of the larger streams that run into the Lackawanna, and, inasmuch as it has been thought that this parallelism was due to drift deposits, I shall give here what appears to be its explanation. The streams referred to run in one of two general directions, which form an angle of about 77° with each other. The first of these is followed by the upper part of Eddy creek, Von Storch's creek, etc., and by the Lackawanna from where it bends, below Archibald, to Olyphant. It should be noted that these streams are parallel with the axes of the anticlinals in this part of the coaljbasin. The second direction is followed by the Lackawanna from Jermyn to the bend below Archbald, and by Fa'.l brook, Coal brook, Elk creek, etc. None of these streams are in the drift, but in the solid rock, or rather, they flow between well defined hills of solid rock, and their courses have been determined largely, if not entirely, by the jointed structure of the locks, possibly by faults in some instances. The south-western end of the basin is crossed by a water-shed that drains it in two directions. The Nanticoke and Mocanaqua road crosses this water-shed about two and a half miles above the latter place, and about a quarter of a mile west of Uplinger's. On the northern side of the road this water-shed reaches the top of the river mountain in a north-wes- terly course. On the south side of the road it runs nearly half a mile south, when it turns east, and keeps this general direction for nearly two miles ; then turning south again, it crosses the Mountain Inn road, just three-quarters of a mile above the Mountain Inn. Here it turns east, and in this bearing reaches the top of the Little Wilkes-Barre mountain. The lowest elevation, or gap, in this water-shed is on the south side of the axis of the coal basin, and a little more than half a mile north of the old Mountain Inn. According to Rothwell's map of this region, this gap is about 375' above the Susquehanna at the Nanticoke dam. The lowest point in the water-shed next after this one, is near where it is crossed by the river mountain road at Uplinger's, and not far from the axis of the basin. This gap, according to the same authority, is about 415' above the water at the Nanticoke dam. To the south and west of this water-shed the water reaches the Susquehanna just below Mocanaqua through Black creek and Turtle run. To the north and east it drains into the Susque- Branner.J 340 [Feb. 19) hanna at Nanticoke through Newport creek and its tributaries. These streams, especially two of the largest of thern, have, at some time in the past, borne an important part in the transportation, modification and re- arrangement of the drift material. Their influence at present, however, is very insignificant as compared with what it doubtless was as the glacial epoch drew to a close. The Surface Rocks. The exposed or surface rocks of this region include the Carboniferous shales and sandstones, some of them easily decomposed, the Pottsville conglomerate, the sub- carboniferous red shales, and the Pocono sand- stones, while the Catskill shales and sandstones lie just beyond the border of the basin. The Carboniferous shales are of various degrees of hard- ness and resistance, spots here and there preserving the striae remarkably well, while in other places the same beds have disintegrated two inches or more below the polished surfaces that remain.* Many of the sandstones have decomposed so rapidly that it is a very common thing to find surfaces that were once rounded, smoothed and striated in the characteristic way, now preserving not a single line that can be identified beyond doubt. But in some places, where these same sandstones have been protected by a considerable layer — say two feet or more — of drift, and only recently uncovered, the striae are still well pre- served. As a rule, the Pottsville conglomerate preserves its ice record most faithfully, and frequently, too, under adverse circumstances. Cropping out around the border of the coal basin, and just inside of the mountains that limit the valley, this formation lies a little below the crest of these ranges, forming a continuous shoulder where the disintegration of the softer rocks, both above and below, has exposed it to the weather along the greater part of its outcrop. In many places this exposed rim has been so thoroughly polished that it is next to impossible to determine the direction of the striation. Indeed not a few of these highly polished rocks had to be passed over, especially during the early part of my observations, with- out my being able to detect a single well defined line, and not until my work was about drawing to a close did I hit upon a method for detect- ing the markings upon such surfaces.-)- *I would not be understood as implying here that two inches represent the total general erosion that has taken place in this region since the glacial epoch. In such places as the one referred to, the surfaces are comparatively well pre- served, while there are others in which the rocks have flaked oil" to the depth of many inches, or even feet, by the action of frost, and from which, of course, all evidences of glaciation have long since disappeared. + A thin covering of soil sometimes permits a slow disintegration of the con- glomerate, which leaves a few of the quartz pebbles in their original position, fast in the body of the rock, with their upper parts cut away and polished by glacial action. Examination of these polished pebbles, under a lens of low power, may slfow minute stria', but it more frequently happens that these 18<*.J Oil [Branner. The Maucli Chunk red shales are wanting about the north-east end of the basin, but they form thick beds in the Shickshinny end. When un- covered and exposed to the action of air, water and frost, these rocks have gone to pieces rapidly, but they have preserved the striation remarkably well wherever they have been covered up by a considerable thickness of earth. Striation on these shales therefore, as indeed upon most of the rocks, is only found along the roads and cuts where they have been re- cently uncovered. The Pocono sandstones, forming the crests of the mountains on both sides of the valley, lie, for the most part, in a desolate, uncultivated, un- inhabited and untraveled region, in which but few striated exposures are to be found. This is particularly unfortunate, for we must, of course, look to the markings upon these high points for the indications of the direction of the ice sheet when it had attained its grandest proportions, and before its margin was here reduced to the condition of local glaciers. This for- mation is the limit of my observations on the glaciation of this region. Striation ; its Indications of Flow, Change and Wear. Scarcely a place can be found in the valley, which, if the rocks have been protected from the weather by a covering of earth, does not retain some signs of wearing by ice. Where the rocks have been long ex- posed to the action of air and water the well denned lines have, for the most part, been defaced. But even in these cases, the rounded faces of the rocks are often still preserved. But though the striae are, in all probability, well preserved over almost the whole of this region, the drift and soil, covered, for the most part, with forest and undergrowth, render it impossible to make the record as complete as desirable. Most of the observations made upon the direction of the striae have been placed upon the accompanying maps, and it is unnecessary to speak of them in de- tail. Some of the observations have been omitted in cases where several similar ones were made too near each other to warrant drawing several arrows upon the map parallel to the first one. Where there are two or markings cannot be detected. I found that by gently rubbing a hard (6 H) pencil across the worn surfaces until they were quite covered with the lead, the fine strise would stand out as white lines. Mr. George M. Lehman of the Survey, who has rendered me valuable assistance by noting the striation in places that I did not visit personally, also found that on a large polished surface, the lines could be detected by the observer taking such a position that the sun would be reflected from it to his eyes. It is necessary in this case, however, that the plane of incidence and reflection should be parallel with the direction of the stria?. I have found this method a useful one, though it is open to the objection that one cannot always have the sun in the desired position. This difficulty may be obviated by making the observations at night, and using a lantern for the re- flections. When good exposures, sufficiently close to each other, can be had, it is not necessary that so much pains be taken to get an observation, but it not infrequently happens that it is very desirable to have one in some particular spot, and where the nature of the rook and the strise require some such methods as the ones mentioned. Branner.] <34*j [Feb. 1±4 [Feb. 19, currents can hardly be regarded as evidence that there was an under-cur- rent filling and flowing down the Wyoming valley, while another upper- current flowed over the tops of the mountains. The existence of different sets of striae in the same place, pointing one set across the mountain, and another down the valley, make such a theory unnecessary at least. Evi- dence that there were no great or extensive undercurrents in the ice may he seen in the gap through which the Lackawanna runs at Archbald. Just above the village, where the track of the D. & H. Gravity railway track crosses the old plank road, the stria? show beyond question that the ice in passing through this gap was not deflected by the topography into undercurrents, but that it was pushed straight ahead, and when there was not room for it in the narrow gorge, it was forced obliquely up and over the steep side of the hill, while the main body of the ice moved square across the hill that here stands out across the valley. If it had been mov- ing in currents, it would have gone around the end of the hill, and the striae would converge in the narrowest part of the gorge. Again, at Mocanaqua, a quarter of a mile from the bridge, up the railway track, the striae on the red shale point up the side of the steep hill at an angle of at least 30°, showing that the ice at the side of this gap flowed straight forward and up the hillside, instead of turning as an undercurrent and going down the channel as water would have done. Just east of Mocanaqua, on the top of the hill above the West End breaker, a few hundred feet from it, and near the side of the road, are ex- posures of striae with the following bearings : S. 30O E. S. 250 E. Due South. s. 450 W. S.65QW. Due West. Those pointing S. 30° E. and S. 25° E. appear to be the oldest of the ones now preserved, while those pointing due south predominate. It seems probable therefore that the oldest striae were made when the ice came over the Shickshinny mountains, and when it was thick enough to disregard such a topographical feature. As the ice became thinner it ran due south, the later striae almost obliterating those previously made. Further thinning of the ice sheet subjected it more and more to local influences until nothing was left here but a thin and narrow body of ice that came down the valley of Black creek, and being turned by the con- glomerate ledge, left these last faint striae that point west over the edge of the precipice. In the Lackawanna end of the valley are several cases of double sets* of *Strise sometimes cross each other at well-defined angles without occuring in sets. Such variations may possibly have been caused by the cut tins: material having been turned in the grasp of the ice. No account was taken of strice of this character. 1886.] ^4:0 [Branner. striae. One of these exposures is near the village of Jessup, on the hillside between Dolph's drift and its air shaft. Here they point due south, S. 25° W., and S. 30° W. Where there are several sets of striae it is not always easy, and indeed it is sometimes quite impossible, to determine, by the striae alone, which of the sets is the oldest. In this case, those pointing south appear to be the oldest, from which it is to be inferred that they were made when the ice was least influenced by the hills to the south, and that those veering to the west were made when the thinner ice began to feel the influence of the topography. In both cases the movement of the ice was up the side of the mountain. Another case of double striatum was found above the track of the Erie and AVyoming railway, and about 1500 feet above the Scranton reservoir on Roaring brook. At this place one set points due south, while the other points S. 15° W. It was im- possible to determine which of these sets was the older, though the strise pointing south were the more numerous. At the Nanticoke gap is a striking instance of local topographical influ- ence upon the glacier. Near the mill-pond on the south side of the Sus- quehanna, and on the low ground, the striae point N. 70° W., and on the north side of the river, near the railway station, they point N. 80° W. and. due west. On top of the conglomerate ledge that rises above Nanticoke, near the gap, and just south of the river, the strise point south, from five to twenty degrees east. Within a mile of each other horizontally, and five hundred feet vertically, these two sets of strise differ in their bearing by 130°. Directly north of those on top of the conglomerate and at the foot of the steep ridge, Mr. Lehman informs me, the striae are parallel with the river. The explanation of these contrasts in the direction of the stria- tum is naturally suggested by the bold and well-defined topography of this region. The earlier ice probably moved nearly south across these ridges, while the localized glacier followed the depressions of the valley and, a part of it, at least, flowed through the Nanticoke gap and down the present channel of the Susquehanna river. The south pointing strise on the mountain west of Nanticoke contrast strongly with those on the top of the same ledge near Mocanaqua. It will be noticed that where the water-shed from across the basin reaches the top of this mountain the striae are parallel with the ridge. When they occur below the crest of the ridge, they are, doubtless, due to the ice moving down the deep, narrow valley, now occupied by the Sus- quehanna river. The explanation of the direction of those near Nanti- coke must be sought in the topography to the north of where they are found. The topography of the surface of the great glacier itself probably had its influence in directing the movements of the ice. If we imagine a perfectly even surface with the ice flowing across it, and h deep gap or notch made in the margin of the ice, it is evident that the tendency would be for the ice to flow toward this gap from both sides, while an ice promonotory be- tween two such gaps would move along lines having a palmate radiation. FROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 2ll. PRINTED MARCH 29, 1886. Branner.] *>*" [Feb. 19, Mr. Chamberlin lias happily represented the glaciers of the second epoch as moving in this manner. I would suggest that the scratches referred to on pp. xxi and xxii of Report Z may have been varied by such means, if the topography itself of the region cannot account for the change. The glacial striae, wherever observed in this valley or along its borders, seem, in every instance, to prove : — 1st. That the glacier, when at its greatest thickness, was influenced only by the great average topographical features of the glaciated region, and, consequently, that what appears to have been the upward movement of the ice is upward only in a local sense. 2d. That as the ice-sheet began to grow thinner and to retreat, its southern margin came more and more under the influence of local topo- graphy, and ended in local glaciers. 3d. That when more than one set of striae are found in the same place, they are clue to the direction of the thinning ice having been changed by topography. Wearing Power. The variation in the direction of striation in the case above the West End breaker at Mocanaqua amounts to 120°, without the original (?) striae being obliterated. Other instances of double striation have also been re- ferred to. I was at first inclined to think that such cases might be taken as conclusive evidence of the small wearing power of ice. But such a con- clusion would evidently be unwarranted, for, whatever the original wear- ing power of the ice may have been, that power certainly diminished as the ice grew thinner and the glacier retreated. The later striae cannot fairly, therefore, be taken to represent the wearing power of the ice when it was thickest. Indeed it is quite evident, from almost any one of the cases found, that the furrows made by the ice when thickest, were very deep, while later ones were so shallow as to fail to entirely obliterate the former ones. Furthermore, we have no means of knowing the compara- tive length of time the ice was moving in the different directions recorded. It may have moved for a long period in the direction indicated by the oldest of the preserved striae, and, so moving, may have worn what the most extravagant claim for it (at least as far as any evidence to the con- trary, found in this region, is concerned) ; while motion in the other direc- tions may have been only of long enough duration to leave the markings we now see upon the rocks. The Drift, its Character, Origin, Distribution and Arrange- ment. The material composing the drift found through this region appears to be almost entirely local. In no instance did I find a single boulder of granite, or of any other archsean rock, though I watched carefully for such speci- mens. Only along the Susquehanna river did I find a few pehhles of archsean origin, but these were so small and water-worn that lam obliged 18SG. | dtfc* [Branner. to believe they were brought down by the river from the glaciated regions lying farther north, rather than by the ice. Even fragments from the Catskill shales cannot be regarded as very common, when compared with those from the Pocono sandstone, the Pottsville conglomerate, and the carboniferous shales, sandstones and coal. Especially is this true of the Lackawanna end of the valley north-east of Scranton. In a cut about forty feet deep, where the Winton Branch of the D. L. & W. railway passes through the drift near Eddy creek, many fragments of the reddish shales and sandstones of the Catskill maybe seen. Judging by the lithological characters of these fragments, and by the direction of striation, they proba bly came from the tops of the hills just south of the Susquehanna County line, near Crystal Lake, in which case they must have traveled at least fif- teen miles. The character of the arrangement of the material changes with its ele- vation. That in the deeper parts of the valley is generally water-worn, and shows, by its being assorted and more or less stratified, that it was de- posited in, or frequently washed by water. Karnes of this material are, in some cases, nearly or quite a hundred feet in height. Higher up the sides of the valley no regular arrangement of the material appears, and the fragments that lie heaped in many of the hollows are rough and angular, and bear no signs of having been worn in a glacier, but appear to have been transported upon its surface. Of the latter kind of drift there is com- paratively but little, while the former kind appears to have originally filled the deeper depressions along the trough of the valley. Here, the streams, seeking their natural channels, have washed away much of the original drift, and spread it out over the flood plains and alluvial lands down stream, leaving our present kames for the most part lying along the foot of the hills. In the upper or north-eastern end of the valley there are comparatively few kames, and these are generally of coarser material, while toward the lower end of the valley, below Scranton, they are more abundant, and have more sand and fine material in them. The valley of the Lackawanna above Carbondale is so narrow, and the fall of the stream so rapid, that but little drift now remains along its course from the gap through which it enters the coal basin above Forest City to Morss' tannery near Carbondale. Below this point the bottom of the valley is restricted at several points, so as to form a series of dams, or, more properly speaking, of narrows, which have acted as dams to spread the floods of post glacial times out over low lands, or flats, immediately above them. The first of these dams below Carbondale appears to have been caused by the proximity of the drift on the south-east side of the % valley to the little hill on the northwest side, at the base of which the bridge of the common road now crosses the Lackawanna in the town of Jermyn.* In this case the dam may have been at or near where Rush brook now *The dams in this part of the valley do not appear to have been as well delined as some of them further down the river. Branner.] d4b [Feb. !9, enters the Lackawanna, or it may have heen in the gorge above Archbald. In the latter case the narrowness of the valley between Jermyn and Arch- bald would not admit of a widespread deposit of silt, while the rapid descent of the stream must have combined with this narrowness to cause the washing away of nearly all the sediment that was thrown down between these two places. The rather unusual deposit of large quan- tities of drift on the east side of the river below the Archbald gorge may have been carried down from this narrow valley. This material, composed for the most part of large cobble-stones, and with but little sand and gravel in it, once filled the lower part of the Laurel Run hollow. But this stream has gradually cut it away, until its southern face is now a steep bank from ten to thirty feet high. Below Archbald the valley is nar- row, and the current rapid, as far as Peckville. The next dam appears to have been at Olyphant. Here .the flood plain of the valley narrows very considerably, the rocky hill upon which part of the town is built standing out from the southeast side across the valley, and thus confining the river to a comparatively narrow channel. The damming back of the floods here probably helped to form what are now the meadow lands be- tween Olyphant and Peckville. Following down stream, the next case of this kind appears to have been at Scrantou. The city of Scranton is built upon a wide terrace of glacial drift, which, possibly, closes now the original channel of the Lackawanna river at this place. Opposite this terrace the hill upon which Hyde Park is built stands out across the valley, leaving a channel only about three hundred feet wide between the two, and through which the Lackawanna now flows. At or near the close of the glacial epoch, the drift must have dammed up the channel in this narrow neck almost entirely, and the muddy waters that have poured down this valley since the retreat of the ice, spreading out over the flats, have precipitated and deposited upon them the sand, silt, and alluvium of which they are formed. But as the river gradually descended to its present bed, it cut away the western side of the Scranton terrace, until it left its edge the abrupt, high bank along which Mifflin avenue now runs. It is particularly true of this, the north eastern, end of the valley, that the drift has been left, for the most part, along the foot of the hills. On the north-western side, along the old plank road, these kames may be seen all the way from Providence to Winton, cut through by the streams flowing down the sides of the mountain. On the opposite side of the val- ley they are not so well exposed, and are, for the most part, overgrown with forest ; but the drift is even deeper and more widespread on this, than on the north-west side. The influence of the drift upon the course of the streams in this region has not been so marked as it would have been in a flatter country, the courses of only a few of the smaller ones having been determined by it.* ♦The change in the bed of the Susquehanna between Plttston and Kingston is referred to elsewhere. 1886-1 "^" [Branner. Drift in the South-west End op the Valley. Having had no opportunity for examining the drift hetween Scranton and Wilkes-Barre, I shall pass over this part of the valley, and speak of its south-western extremity. The great body of the drift in this end of the valley, especially between Nanticoke and the water-shed that crosses it two and a half miles above Mocanaqua, lies below the elevation of the gap in the water-shed. Most of this drift is assorted. The largest and mo9t interesting kames in the whole valley, as might have been expected, are found in the vicinity of Nanti- coke.* Two of these were cut into in making the Newport colliery branch of the Susquehanna Coal Company's railway, one opposite the bridge of the Lehigh and Susquehanna railway over Newport creek, the other three- quarters of a mile further up Newport creek. The horizontal stratifica- tion of the material forming the kames south-west of Naticoke, and par- ticularly those about the Newport colliery, show an absence of any strong current in the waters by and in which it was deposited. The sand of these kames shows, by the presence of much coal in it, that a large part of the material is near its original source. Here may also be seen good examples of distorted bands or strata of sand lying between straight or horizontal ones. The distribution of assorted drift throughout this end of the basin, from Nanticoke to the gaps in the watershed, seems to show that the water was once backed into this space by a dam, or gorge, in the Susquehanna at, or below the Naticoke water gap. The topography and the disposition of the drift also, indicate that the water was backed into this end of the basin, and that some of it, at least, flowed over the water-shed at the gaps already mentioned, and reached the river below Mocanaqua, by the way of Black creek and Turtle run. The valley through which Black creek runs is too narrow, and its fall too great to permit the accumulation of much drift along the stream, and as a matter of fact but little has been left along it above where it passes the conglomerate ledge. Below the ledge and between the West End breaker, and where the Mountain Inn road turns off to the east, are some very large kames. Kettle-holes. But few kettle-holes have been observed, and it is probable that the nar- rowness of the valley through which the glacial floods were obliged to pass has caused most of them to be filled up or otherwise obliterated. The half dozen observed are all small. One of them is in the town of Jermyn, just north of the school-house, and is now partly filled with water. Another smaller one is south of, and about a thousand feet from the resi- dence of Mr. Richmond, of Richmond Hill farm, near Providence. Three * In making this statement it is possible that I should make an exception of the kames in the vicinity of Pittston, which I have had no opportunity of ex- amining. Branner.] 350 [Feb. 10, others are on the water-shed near Uplinger's, in the south-west end of the basin. They are in the fields near the road, and are visible from it. The largest of these is nearly round in outline, from ten to fifteen feet deep, and about seventy-five feet wide. The smallest one is oval, and about twenty-five feet wide, while the intermediate one lies nearest the road and is pear-shaped in outline. Boulders. Large boulders are common throughout the valley, but especially so along the sides and top of the mountain that bounds the south-eastern side of the basin. They are generally of Pottsville conglomerate, and have been brought, at farthest, only across from the outcrop of this forma- tion along the north-western rim, and left stranded where they now stand. Most of them are angular, and show few or no signs of glacial wearing. The largest seen by the writer are grouped together two and three-quarter miles due south-east of Peckville, but within the outcrop of the conglom- erate, on the side of the basin. They are about 8'X 10'XlO', some larger and some smaller. Judging from their thickness and general appearance, their position and the course of the ice hereabout, they appear to have been carried up hill from the outcrop of conglomerate along the edge of a small valley about a thousand feet to the north east of where they now stand. Smaller boulders, both of conglomerate and Pocono sandstone, are also widely distributed in this region, while they are especially common in some of the little hollows that head high up the sides of the mountains on the east. Here they lie heaped together promiscuously. These frag- ments are also local, and generally angular, being but little worn, or not worn at all, as if they had been brought here upon the surface of the ice. When boulders are found heaped together in this way lower down in the valley, they are invariably worn by ice, or water, or both. A striking example of this kind is exposed in the shallow cut along a branch of the Delaware, Lackawanna and Western railway where it runs in toward Dolph's breaker, near Jessup. Here boulders from one to three feet in diameter, and well rounded, are heaped together in the greatest confusion, and often without enough sand and gravel to fill the spaces be- tween them. Soil, as Affected by Glaciation. While the soils of drift-covered regions are frequently very fertile, those of the Wyoming and Lackawanna valleys are, for the most part, poor. The principal exceptions to this are the narrow, broken strips of alluvial lands along the Lackawanna river from just below Carbondale to its mouth, and the broad bottom lands of the Susquehanna. The finer ma- terial of the drift generally being spread out over the south-west end of the valley, and the coarser in the north-east end, the country below Wilkes-Barre is, on the whole, better adapted to agriculture than that along the Lackawanna. The reason for the prevailing barrenness of the 18N6. 351 soil in this region will be understood when it is remembered, that, as I have already stated, the drift here is almost entirely local, and that these carboniferous rocks have but little or no lime in them.* I am decidedly of the opinion, however, that the soil of the Lackawanna valley is not so poor as it is generally believed to be. Very little effort has been made to reclaim and improve the land in this end of the valley. This is doubtless due in some part to the fact that the mining companies, which own the land, object to paying damages to owners or renters of the surface when abandoned workings cave in. They therefore prefer to allow the surface to lie idle. Moreover the great mining and manufacturing interests of this region have tended to draw the population away from less remunerative agricul- ture. The greater part of the uplands now under cultivation — that in the vicinity and to the south-west of Wilkes-Barre — was cleared and tilled before the importance of anthracite coal was known. There is no essen- tial difference between the upland soil above Scranton and that below "Wilkes Barre, and yet, comparatively, there is very little under cultivation in the valley north-east of Scranton. Local Changes — Black Creek. Closely connected with the subject of glaciation are certain local phe- nomena and changes that have taken place, either during or immediately following the glacial epoch, that should be spoken of in this connection. The interesting changes in the bed of the Susquehanna river between Pitts- ton and Kingston are described by Mr. Ashburner. Doubtless similar ones have taken place elsewhere, both in the Susquehanna and in other streams in this region. I would put on record here the evidences that have come under my observation of certain changes in the lower part of Black creek. From the head of the West End breaker the conglomerate ledge to the east and south-east forms a steep precipice, cut through at one point, about 1500' from the breaker by Black creek, and making here a fall some twenty-five feet in height. Below the falls the walls of conglomerate spread apart, forming a V-shaped gorge with the fall at its apex. This gorge is filled with large, angular fragments of conglomerate, the fallen remains of the original conglomerate ledge. The water of Black creek, after falling over the ledge, ordinarily runs, partly underneath and partly over these fragments, for about one hundred and fifty feet, when it enters a pot- hole in the red shale. This pot-hole is about fifteen feet in diameter. Further down, two hundred feet below the fall, is another pot-hole from fifteen to twenty feet in diameter, likewise in the red shale. As these holes are both full of debris, it was not possible to ascertain their depth. Judging from the position and size of the pot-holes, and from the appearance of the material with which they are filled, they could not have been made by the * To this same fact Scranton owes the excellence of the water supplied to the city. The streams from which this clear, soft water is brought, rise in and flow for their whole length over the Catsiill and Pocono formations, both of which and especially the latter, are poor in lime. Branner.l o£>& [Feb. 19, current of the stream that now runs through them. The force of the stream, even when it is swollen to unusual dimensions, is quite broken by the time it reaches these holes, by the large and small fragments through and over which it flows. It cannot stir the stones in these holes, and con- sequently it is incapable at present of wearing them. A little further to the west a reservoir dam has been built across the stream, and, for some distance along the pipe line leading from it, the bed rock has been uncov- ered, in places more than one hundred feet above the stream, as it flows below the reservoir. This uncovered surface has the soft, half-decayed and smoothly rounded appearance characteristic of the rocks in the beds of streams, or where they have been worn by water set with stones. There is no confusing this peculiar smoothing of the surface with that- done by ice — a subject referred to below. The form of the ravine through which this stream now runs, the charac- ter of the debris which fills it, the pot-holes so far below the present posi- tion of the fall, and the water-worn surface of the rocks even below these pools are evidences that the falls were once farther to the south-west than at present. But as the conglomerate here dips to the north and north- west, the ledge over which it falls must have been proportionately higher than at present. Such an elevation of this conglomerate rim — say ten to fifteen feet — would back the water of Black creek until it would leave its present chan- nel near where the road crosses the narrow-gauge railway track, a quarter of a mile above the head of the West End breaker, and send it to the right down the gap through, or near, which the railway is built.* Further evidence that the water once followed the course mentioned is found in the fact that, in mining beneath this old channel, either a pot- hole or the bed of an ancient stream, filled with sand and water-worn drift materia], was cut into by the miners of the West End colliery. The material in this hole was struck some twenty (?) feet below the present surface, but as the workings were abandoned in its immediate vicinity, on account of the inconvenience caused by it, no further developments were made that throw light upon the origin or character of this hole or channel. The removal of some of the drift from the bottom of the mass caused a falling in of the surface. This surface depression made by the hole may be seen north of the track near, and just west of the crossing of the rail- way track and the dirt road. But this gorge, if it did exist, was a very narrow one. and easily choked up, and when the floods of the ice age poured over the water-shed at Uplinger's and near the Mountain Inn, the stream down Black Creek val- ley was probably too large to flow readily through this narrow channel, and so it swept over the low conglomerate barrier which stood more directly in its pathway, and soon wore for itself a broader channel, smoothed the rocks below the falls, and ground out the pot-holes. * The railway does not run exactly through the original gap. This has been quite filled up by drift and debris from the overhanging elid's, and the railway passes through a cut a little to the south of the old channel. Bran curr strep thet and seqi the disti ered belo and of s The don T ter i tion poo at ] wes thai S- woi nel of a dov I fou hoi. mat mat sur; ace mat Tin fall be: wa; E up, Up ley an> dir 8m qui pat 3^3 1886.1 u( two species, Hippotherium peninsvlatum and Protohippus castilli. J8S?S.] »JU1 [Hoffman. described in the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 1885, p. 150. The present animal presents very nearly the same enamel folds as the H. peninsulaUrm Cope, of the same locality, including the subquadrate central loop -which is nearly cut off from the anterior lake. But tbe tooth differs in two essential points, and in some minor ones from that species. It is considerably larger, presenting .6 more area of the grinding surface. The shaft of the tooth, instead of being strongly curved, is straight. Less reliable characters are, first, that the crown is nearly square, while it is oblong in the H. peninsulatum ; and second, that there are two large loops extending inwards towards the column instead of one. This char- acter may or may not depend on the position of the tooth. Diameters of crown, transverse, 21.5 mm. ; anteroposterior, 21.5 mm. ; longitudi- nal, 450 mm. I propose that the species be called TLippotherium rectidens. Vocabulary of the Selislt Language. By W. J. Hoffman, M.D., Washing- ton, d. a (Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 19, 1886.) The Selish. or Flathead tribe of Indians, is one of a group of tribes consti- tuting what may be termed the eastern division of the Selishan linguistic stock. The tribe is at present located in Jocko valley, Northwestern Mon- tana, near the eastern spurs of the Rocky mountains. The surrounding country is extremely fertile, and abounds in game. The tribe numbers less than one hundred and fifty souls, and the primitive customs are fast giving way to the modern innovations of civilization. In the accompanying vocabulary, which was obtained in 1884, a peculi- arity will be observed in the terms of relationship which is of more than ordinary interest, especially terms which indicate a relative as living, or dead, changes being made after the demise of an individual because the name of the dead is not spoken aloud or in the presence of other relatives. The words are spelled phonetically, with the addition of a letter or two to simplify orthography, and a few characters as explained below : a, has the sound of a in father. a, " " " " " " law. q. " " " " ch, in the German nicht. x, " " " " gh, " " Arabic gh, or German nacht. " , ' , placed over vowels indicate respectively, short and long sounds. ', indicates an interruption in sound. ', the accent indicates accented letters, or syllables. n, the superior n, as in e'1, indicates nasalized sounds of letters to which it may be attached. Italicized letters are whispered. FROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 2T. PRINTED APRIL 15, 1886. Hoffman. 362 [March 19, Man, Woman, Old man, Old woman, Old man, another form, Young man, Young woman, Boy, Girl, Infant, Widow, Grass widow, A widow looking for a husband, Indian prostitute, City prostitute, Wife, said by husband, Husband, said by wife, Son, said by father, Father, said by son, Mother, " " '* Daughter, said by father, Father, said by daughter, Mother, " " " Elder brother, Younger brother, Eldersister, said by younger brother, I's'msiimsem'. Elder sou's wife, said by father, Se'pen. Elder daughter's husband, said by "I ¥ , , „ „ , fisne'tslienuq' father, J 1 Wife's father, said by father, Saxe'. Wife'a father, said by father, after "I _ , „ .. .-,,,, J yStsheel'. wife s death, J Wife's mother, N'ilse'tsht. •' " after wife's death, Stsheel'. Wife's elder brother, said by hus- \ y , / IS ftlGSlS. band, > Wife's elder brother, after death of \ . , . , ., wife, ' Wife's eldersister, said by husband, Sestem. Wife's elder sister, after death of wife, Brother's son, " " after brother's death, Sister's son, " " after sister's death, Brother's daughter, Skal'tamiuq. S'um'em'. Paq'pohot skal'tamiuq. Paq'pohot s'um'em'. Sli'optsM'. Sku'kwimelt' skal'tamiuq. Sku'kwimelt' s'um'em'. Ku'ku' se'. She'shumi'um. OqteT. Sluwe'lumpt. 5'tseem'. Tsel'ishkue'. TJi'uqune', lit., one who runs at large. Sin'kale', lit., fresh meat. Na'qQuq, Sqe'lui. S'kusse'. Lie'uq. Skol. Stemtshielt. Inmestem. In turn'. Inketsht. Isim'tse. Inkuit'item. Ismelq'. Is'luquMt. Intuush'. Is'luquelt. Smelq. S.J 363 [Hoffman. Brother's daughter, after brother's death, Sister's daughter, " " after sister's death Eldest child, Youngest child, Intermediate, i. e., the second of three, or the third of five chil- dren, Chief, Friend, Slave, Indian, Whiteman, Frenchman, Indian policeman, People, Great Spirit, Shaman, Doctor, Moccasins, Blanket, Earth lodge, Tule lodge, Skin lodge, Fire, Ashes, Smoke, Bow, of wood, Bow string, Sinew, on back of bow, Arrow, Notch in end of arrow, for string, Arrow feathers, on shaft, Quiver, War- club, Quiver strap, War-spear, Fish spear, Shield, Drum, Fish-line, Fish-net, Pipe (general term), Pipe, of stone, Pipe-stem, of wood, J- iVluquelt. Tuntsh. Is'luqiielt. S'shii'ti. Stee'uti. Kee'usi. I'limi'qu. S'laqt. Sh'men. S'keluq. Sul'api. Se'ame. Squ'neum. Kuits'ke'luq, lit., many, Indian. XoliDtso'ta. Tlekuilsh. Squ'mallel'. Keskil'. Sitsum'. Melta'qulq. Siste'qulq. Spie'qulq. Sa\qlts hi'. Kolmin'. S'mot. StekuI'Itsk ; ski'ullst. Tsha'tsinsht. Tinsh. Tapomin'. S'kuadlaml'. Tshko'. Sinkolxte'. Tshu'lule'. Tshatse'. S'mo'lomen'. Xlomintea'. S's/Ule'. Pomen'. Tshatse'. Ka ka me'. S'she'nsh. S'she'nsh nlmS'. 2'pe'. Hoffman.] 364 [March ly, Spoon, Knife, Scraper, iron, Head, Hair, Face, Forehead, Eye, Eyelash, Ear, Nose, Cheek, Mouth, Tongue, Saliva, Throat, Shoulder, Nipple, Hip, Belly, Navel, Arm, Elbow, Wrist, Hand. Thumb, First finger, Second finger, Little finger, Leg, Foot, Blood, Heart, Lung, Liver, Stomach, Antelope, Buffalo, Cattle, Beaver, Bear, grizzly, " cinnamon, " black, Deer, white tailed, male, " " female, " black-tailed, male, S'xlu'men. Nin'tshemTn'. P'tsha'mln. S'ptlxe'. Kom'k'n. Sk'tlo'. /SfsMtshume'ste. S'tshthuku'. Sfsho'piis. re'ne. /S'pasa'. *S'kultshamus'. S'plt'munt?en'. Sttxusi she'. Spt'auq. Skame'lt'n. Sintshumsh'xelt. Sk'iune'il. Sakame'i. Olin'. Te'mueq. Stshouaqeu'. Stsh'axosaqen. Skul'tshomet'sra. Tshelsh. Stum' sht. Tso'komi'. Siu'lsht. Stauptke'I. St'shamak'tslnn. St'sutsu'she. Ai'qusa' Tsaa'. Hauit'hauii/. Skualtshin'. Stelak'sha. Ua'uia'uk. Noboshiue'. P'kalqke, lit., white head. j-Melkeno'. Ka'xit'lse. Qo'nitnqo'nim. Tseltseltshimu'. Ha'iat. Tsi'uqtsuq'. Samakue'i. Smatske'uq'. Tsa'dlis. Osu'luq. Ueuit'sule'. A'd'n. Hoffman.] 3GG [March l!i Owl, great-horned, " screech, " American long-eared, Prairie hen, Raven, Swift, white-throated, Swan, Turkey buzzard [this probably re- fers to the black vulture], Whip-poor-will (Phahenoplilus nut- tali), Sni'nee'. iV'tshitqe'. iV'spuish'«.'ime\ £*ka. Mela'. Mab'7tkuitsen. S'pk'&mV. •Tsa'kowi'a. Spas. "Woodpecker, Stelqu'. " Sp'ual'xa. Woodpecker, red- shafted (^-}Kul'kuletsh'. tes mexicanus), Eel, Ku'tun. Oyster, Sku'skula'nl. Sturgeon, Tsumtu'. Salmon, Sumqli'. Trout, Pllq. White fish (sp. ?), Xoiu'. Mullet, Tshile'ne. Salmon trout, Xla'i. Bladder, Sintshe'ite'. " common term, Sinl'uaqslen. Scales, Silktshim'. Frog, green (sp. '?), Xllm'xlaxa'. Lizard, newt (sp. ?), Shil'sbiltshe. Rattlesnake, Xau'leuq'. Toad, black (sp. ?), S'nakiikmV'm. Spotted snake, Tshe'uili. Gopher snake, Houpo'. Ant, black, Suqoie'. Bee, Ma'tsup. Flea, Sk'utukn'i. Grasshopper, Tita'tsup. Louse, Kuta'que. Mosquito, Si'laks. Spider, Tshe'it. Yellow jacket, Skol'qt. Cricket, Si'luene. Bed bug, JTs'ku'la. Tree, Tsel'tsil. Stump, Noqto'se. Limb, Tsoltsiltshiuie' Leaf, cottonwood, Pitstshelq. 1886.] « )U4 [Hoffman Leaf, pine leaves, Tshe'me. Bark, outer, Tshlle'uq. " inner, Tsequ'ie. Trunk, 5'tshemep'. Root, Sa'xuep. Clouds, &'tetshiternit'. Sky, TWtWi'nia'skat. Sun = Day moon, S'xalxali' spukani'. Moon Spukani'. " = Night moon, Kwukwuet' spukani'. Stars, K'ku'sum. Rainbow, Skumi'utsshen. Fog, S'hamlp'. Frost, Su'leuq'. Snow, S'mel'kut. Hail, Satlu'se. Ice, Shu'emptku. "Water, Seul'kqu. Rain, Stipe'Is. Thunder, Stel'telam. Lightning, Suuet'shu. Wind, Sne'uwut. Dust, S'ku'ulsk. Mud, S'slatsha'l'uq. Sand, Skapx&'pe'. Stone, S'shgnsh. Day, Salxalt'. Night, SkukiVue. Sunrise, £f!'kleetsht'. Noon, N'to' qken'. Sunset, S'tsha'a. Yesterday, Spistse'. To day, Tet'l'qa. To-morrow, Ne'qali'. Black, K'uai. Blue, — cobalt, K'uali'&'n. Brown, Tsh'VX&hV. Gray, dark, Tsh'xe'. " light, TshTpe'ikTu. Green, chrome, Kue'in. Red, scarlet, Kui'1. Roan [as of a horse], Nua'mukan. Sorrel [applied to color of horse], " light, Pe>'uq. " dark, Tsh'l'km'. White, Piuk ; PIk ; Plk. lioflman.] OUO [March 19, Yellow, Kua'li. Horse, Sen'tshilxtsa'ska ; Irom s'nne— female elk, and xtsa'ska — to ride. Ax, She'lmin ; shilmin'. Log house, Slu'kut'xii. Dog, jVkoko'sanii. Large, Kuiliu.1 xxnt. Small, Kukulumee'. Much, Xuit. Little, Xlu'iiet. No, T'a. Yes, Une'. This, I'c'. That, Shi'e'. When, PistCm'. Where, Tshe'l ; s'tshil. Who, Suwaii'. What, Ste''m ; ste'um'. I, Koi'ie. Thou, 'N'ui' ; nuk'uo. He, Tm'\q\.$,'. We (plural), T'kee'. We (dual), P'le Xe'. You, iP'p'Me'. They, Isetsini'qts. Mine ; me ; I, Koi'iu'. Yours, A'n'ul'. His, Tseniqts. Theirs, Tseni'iqts. Good, Xets. Bad, Tel'ie. Few, Xlu'uit. All, Esila'. To shoot (with gun), Tapske'. (with arrow), Tapske'tapauiu'. Arrow, Tapanin'. Mounted (on horseback), Tshemte'. To ride, Tshil'kalslie'. On foot, S'xuis'tu'. To kill, Puls'la ; pulst'iiui'. To eat, I'xl'n. To drink, Sust. To sleep, I'tshi. I go to sleep, Tshekeksi'tshi. To smoke, K'sme'luqui. To weep, S'kua'kuil. 1886.1 369 [Hoffman. To laugh, I run, You run, He runs, You and I run (dual), We run, They run, O'iemtsu'. Tsin'kexetselsht. K'uke'tselsht. Ke'tselsht. Xeke'tselsht. Kee'tselsht. Xuketselsht. When the runners referred to are visible and at a distance from the speaker, the first syllable of the word is uttered in a high note (prolonged to intensify distance), and the last is expressed in a more subdued and lower key. The word, under such circumstances, is Kee'tselsht. Did you run ? Xa'kuke'tselsht. Knife, Nin'tshemen. " to cut, with, Ni'tshent. Young dog, Sti'titshl. I have a dog, - TshInep/'aji,7i,koko/sami. How many dogs have you ? Kuinsh/n'koko'sami. I am hungry, TsMn'estskame/. We are hungry (plural) Kesi'axee'stskame'. We are hungry (dual), Xe'estskame'. You are hungry, Kuests'kame'. They are hungry, Eseshts'iltine'kame'. I strike myself, Tshen'is pentsot'. I struck myself, Kleu'is peutsot'. I will strike myself, Nem'is pentsot7. You strike yourself, Nem'kst pentof. You struck yourself, Klek'k'sut'pentot'. I was struck, Klek'ku'pentsem. You and I were struck, Ke'spelxlult. What, is it? Stem. Who is it ? Su6t'. What do you want? Stem'aspus'. Numerals. 1, N'x6 ; N'go'. 8, Xeed'num. 2, Sisg'. 9, Xanot'. 3, Tshexles'. 10, Open'. 4, Mos. 11, Opene'xs n'go' . 5, Tsil ; Tail. 12, Opene'xs s'se'. 6, T'a'k'n. 20, fl'sgl o'pen. 7, ySlspxetl. 21, /S"selo'penexs n'go'. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 2u. PRINTED APRIL 30, 1886. Hoffman.] d70 [March 19, 22, £Velo'penexs s'sel'. 80, XeneTno'pen. 30, Tshg'xl'n'o'pen. 90, Xex'tfo'pen. 40, M'a'ln' o'pen. 100, N'kaken. 50, T&Wxl'na'pen. 101, X'kenexsn'go . 60, T'&'ntshilo'pen. 200, S'l'n qo'qi. 70, S'j eltsh'lo'pen. 1000, O'pens'tshit'nke'. Game played with pieces of bone, Mi'tshumtske'. A game, similar to the chunkey n game, played with a ring and \ S'xaTku'. poles, is called, ) The Coyote's youngest child (myth), Satsi'uinsht'. There is no word for strike, in the abstract, but the idea is expressed in connection with the manner in which the action is done. This is also the case with some other verbs. To strike with the hand, Tsu'entem'. " " " a club, Spuntem'teluk'. " " " a gun, Spuiitemtsu'lulminsh/. " " " a bow, Spiintem/Jtekinsht'. " " " an ax, Shilintem' shilmJn'. " " " a knife, Shilintem'tinin'tshumen'. To stab with a knife, Xluntem'tinin'tshumgn'. " " " a bayonet, Xluntem'tsmu'lumen/. " " " a sword, Xluntem'tshu'lulg'. Where you going? = S'tshil nuk'ue s'qui? Where you go f I am going to the Crows. = S'tetshem'tshT 6'tshies s'qui'. Crows [Indians'] 1 go. Don't you wish to trade with me? = 6't^mkes tomis'to min'one'? Give me some sugar. = Koqui'tslsht t'tish. The following myth is presented to illustrate the syntactic structure of the language. Son'-tshe-le' Ko-tump't. Se-huist'-tsSn'tshe-lep, [of the] Coyote Story. He was walking, the Coyote, [and] o-we'-tshes, sko-le'-pi* to-o'-^e, hui'-hue iu' ; he saw they were cooking eggs, many animals and birds; s'a-a-tsu'-qts we titsht' es-tsi-a' o-qol'lu, he looked while they went to sleep all of them he went, * Conking In a depression in the ground, by paving the floor with stones and covering the food with grass, leaves, etc. 1886.1 *** -*• [Hoffman. sen'-tshe'-le', t'l'-ken-tes7 t'lus-kal-ep'. TT-il'-qis the Coyote, [and] removed the dirt from the cooking place. Then he ate [ from the eggs] tsus-penos ; o-ko-es' l'hui'-hue-u-ql's* e-hue'-u-ql'sts everything; [then] he took the little bird [and] he pulled [crosswise] x'lus'-pe lein'-tsis ; o'k-tso'-t&is xlus'-en'k-tsQ'; \ the bill ; he pressed [the head] [of] the lynx; so'-tumst so'-pot xlos-qli-su'-mi-e ; % o-we'-wi' he pulled (stretched) the tail [of] the Panther; the Lark kwa'-wi-lixlts' xlos'-tehi-tshi-ma' uqts ; o-huist'-xlu' sen'-tshe-le' yellow breast the breast he made ; he walked away the Coyote tshil-kut' xlak'-tshilsht we-x'l-stla'-xlsht. Ka-liqts' a short distance he sat down [and] he looked at them. They awoke xlu-hui'-hue-xults. Se'-tsish-tshel', ha'-xle kle'-ke-o'-wl-tse all the birds and animals. What is the matter, already we ate all u'-ke-tltsh'? We'-kol-kwg'-tshi-na' ta'-sin-sd-hui'-ne- before we icent to sleep f Talked one they could not under- min-tem'.g Kwemt'-po-rnin-tsuqt. stand him. Then they all scattered. The following is a list of Indian tribes best known to the Selish, and the names which they apply to them : Pend d'Oreille, Kalispel'. Banak, Aquit'te, " Gopher-skin-blanket. " Shoshoni, S'nu'ue. Blackfeet, S'tshu'kue, "Black-feet." Nez Perces, Saap'tln. Arikare, S'quies'tshi. Dakota, Nuqtu'. Absaroka — Mountain Crows, Ste'amtshi. = River Crows, S'kuistshi. Arapaho, N'tslri'ltshi'lu'su, " Hair -par ted-in- the-mid-dle." Cheyenne, ASA'&'kai'use, "Spotted-arrows." Kutenai, Skalse', "Water-people." Cceur d'Alene, Tshi'tsaui. *The Crossbill. It is said the bird lost his speech at this time. fThis act of the Coyote accounts for the fiat face of the wild cat— Lynx rufus. JThe Panther received his long tail; was a Lynx previously and had a short one. I The Crossbill, previously mentioned. Hoffman.] 372 [March 19, Vocabulary of the Waitshum'ni Dialect, of the Kawi'a Language. Tule Agency, Cal. By W. J. Hoffman, M.D., Washington, D. C. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, March 19, 1SS6.) The material relating to the accompanying vocabulary of the Wait- shum'ni, or Waiktshum'ni, dialect of the Kawi'a language of California, was collected chiefly in 1882, but some verifications were made at a subse- quent visit to Tule Indian Agency in 1884. The agency headquarters are located eighteen miles east of Porterville, on the south fork of Tule river. The Indians occupy log dwellings, and most of them raise cereals and some fruit. The habitable portion of the agency, or reservation, is nearly two miles in length, and varies from one hundred yards to half a mile in width, either side being flanked by towering ridges of the Sierra Nevada. Game is exceedingly abundant, and game birds, especially the valley quail, are found in almost every copse and grassy lawn. These Indians manufacture exceedingly fine and durable basket- ware, the coils consisting of three or more strands of long grass, the stitching together being accomplished by using thin strands of split roots of natural, or artificial colors — usually black, red and white. The design which may be denominated a typical one, consists of a sort of serrated character, run- ning straight,- or diagonally from the centre to the periphery. The figure of the Yo'kut — man, also figures on drinking-vessels, and on women's conical hats. Their food being chiefly obtained from the agent, requires but little exertion on the part of the natives to subsist satisfactorily ; but during the autumn great quantities of acorns are gathered, and pounded into meal at such places where this fruit occurs in greatest abundance. Here too, one finds cavities in the boulders which have been made to serve as mortars. The meal is placed in conical baskets, when water is poured over it to extract the bitter principle, after which it is boiled into a mush and eaten cold, the hand serving as a spoon. But few good crania can be obtained at this day, the one common Indian burial-ground being carefully and unceasingly watched, not so much for fear of losing the bones of their relatives, but on account of their supersti tions regarding the dead. In general appearance, these Indians resemble the Pah-Utes of the Nevada side of the mountains. Their personal clean- liness does not give them much care, but there are times when several may be found taking a wash in the river, after having submitted to a very severe sweat-bath in one of the low and partly underground sweat houses. These are but three or four feet from floor to ceiling, and measure about six feet in diameter. The entrance is low, and about two feet in diameter. A small opening near the ceiling, at the point opposite the entrance, serves as an exit for the smoke from the fire, which is built immediately inside the door, after the bathers have entered and huddled together. During this scorching and sweating process, singing is kept up, and when the proper stage arrives, all of the occupants rush down and into the water. 1886.1 373 [Hoffman. Many of their primitive rites are still practiced, in secret, though the influence of the agent has had considerable effect in modifying their most trying ceremonies, and in causing them to imitate their white neighbors in observing modern customs relating to church services, burials, etc. In the following vobabulary the orthography adopted is that referred to in the remarks preliminary to the Selish : Man, Men, People, Chief, Warrior, "Woman, Child, Father, Mother, Brother, Sister, " younger, Son, Daughter, Wife's brother, Brother's wife, Wife's father, " mother, Grandfather \ paternal and Grandmother / ternal, Brother's son, " daughter, Sister's son, " daughter, Mother's sister's husband, * " brother's wife, Father's sister's husband, " brother's wife, Son's son, " daughter, Daughter's son, " daughter, I, me, my, Thou, He, She, We, You, They, Ko'tun ; yo'kut yo'kutsh. Ma'ni yo'kutsh. Tra'atre. Ti'a ; di'a. Hiau'tra. Mu'kis. Wit'ep ; wit'iep. Na'tet. Na'shush. Na'at. Hu'koisk. No'at nim. Pu'tshung. A'qidam ; a'xit. Napa'tem. Iduwap. Naqa'nnsh. Unlip. ma- f E'nish ; e'nas. t Tu'ta ; du'ta ; tu'da. Tshai'aq. Tshai'aq. Pu'tshung nim tshai'aq. Mu'kis nim tshai'aq. Komo'dis. Mo'koi. Kui'ha. Mo'koi. Pu'tshung nim pu'tshu". Pu'tsung nim a'xit. A'xidin nim e'nash. A'xidiu nim a'xit. Na'. Ma'. Ta. Mukes'. Mai. Kumui'man. Ka'sin. Hoffman.] 374 [March 19, We, dual, You, dual, They, dual, Shaman, God (Great Spirit), Demon, Alive, Dead, Sick, Head, Eye, Eyes, Ear, Hair, Cheek, Chin, Nose, Mouth, Tooth, Teeth, Tongue, Lip, upper or lower, Neck, Adam's apple (Pomum Adami), Hand Thumb, Forefinger, Second finger, Third finger, Little finger, Palm, Wrist, Forearm Shoulder, Mamma?, Back, Thigh, Leg, Foot, Heel, Toes, are named the same as fingers and thumb. Sole, Skin, Heart, Liver, Na'ak. Ma'ak. Tashik'. Ang'tru. In'tshish tie'ditsh. Tawa'tsha. Tad ; dad. Tauwa'tsha ; tauwa'tsa. Tshiga'tsin. Tod, dod. Sesse'. Pungoi' sesse'. Tuk. O'tro. Tran 'gi. Wupoi'si. Tring'ek. Sim'e. Te'di ; de'di. Wu'qunim te'di. Tadxad'. Yipie'pud. Muk'esh. Tsadtsad'itsh. Pu'trung. U'mutru'drung. Tru'trukui'. Tui'nininkui7. Pin'taluk'. Pin'taluk'. Taka'trl. K6trau'shid. Putrung'unka'dit. Puids ; poits. Me'nid ; me'nit. Ee'wid. Yo'kotsh. So'ka. Wut'ung. Hada'shi ; hata'shi. the Taiiuput'wutun'gun. Tshu'du. Hung'hung. Tip. 1886.J 375 [Hoffman. Intestines, Bladder, Lung, Water, Hail, Snow, Cloud, Rain, Vapor, Tears, Perspiration, Rock, Stone, Sand, Mountain, Hill, Valley, Dust, Mud, Tree, Trunk, Branch, Leaf, Stem, Flower, Bud, White, Red — ochreous, Yellow— chrome, Green— chrome, Blue — French, Black, Vermilion, Lake, Here, There, This, That, These, Those. Now, No, Yes, Tos ; dos. Tshuion'. Hung hung'intishe'. Pai'a ; ul'dik ; ll'lik. Howa'tron'id'dlk. Puu'piin. Kud'de. Ko'do. Ma'drak. Mo'ugant. Do'mak. Ia'kau. Putshi'tet ia'kau. Wa'gas. Du'nnt. Pu'kat; bu'kat. Tshodo'win. Shro'wot. Trelie'gut. Iap'kin. Tra/taan. Da'bedup. Dap'dap. Dap'dap in'tratra,. E'dau. Di'bing. Tsbodot'. Pa'tslrigan. Ti'qad. Tri'mad ; Tri'mat. Padi'kan. Tshum'katan ; trum'keten'. Mit'dat pa'tslugan.* Trum'keien' mit'dat pa'tslugan. f Xe'un. N'ga'u. Xe'I. Ta. Xi'sak'. Ka. Tshaan'. Ka'oiu. Ho. *Mit'dat^-little ; i. e., little-red. I Sig. Black-litlle-red. Hoffman.] 376 [March 19, When, Where, None, Across, Bear, black, " grizzly, " cinnamon, Raccoon, Lynx, Panther, Coyote, Wolf, Jack rabbit, Badger, Bird, Crow, Vulture, Jay (Steller's), Quail, valley, Deer, Elk, Fish, Lodge, Sweat lodge, Fire, Smoke, Ashes, Charcoal, Feathers, Wing feathers, Animal hide, To eat, To laugh, To drink, To weep, To hear, To know, To trade, To think, To walk, To run, To fall, To ride horseback, To talk, To sleep, To die, Hau'dau. Hi'deu". Ka'mu". Po'oi'u. Deu'qun ; du'qun. Non/qon. Pa'tshigedu'qun. Kuid'tshu ; kuit'shu. Tung'un. Wunhe'sid. Kai'iu. Iwait'. To'pol ; do'pol. Tan'nau ; tln'nau. Tag'nip. A'dawuf'6. Tau'ka ; tan'ka. Treshu'dStsh. Hu'niut. Hoi. Sholk'koi. Lu'pitsh. Tri'. M6s. O'set. Mo'drek. Ha'pas ; ha'pash. Sa'pan. Pada' ; pata'. Ka'pad. Tshudui'. Du'i. Hai'wis. TJ'kun, A'hin. Dang. Hot. Sited 'awash. Tem'tem ; dem'dem. Hi'wet. Da'wit. Ui'in. Had'hin. Xa'hi. Man'gls. Tau'its. 1886.] 377 [Hoffman. To like, or admire,* Ho'iutsha ; hu'yutsha. To kill, Tau'tra ; tau'trat. To shoot an arrow, T''ui ; Tr''ui. To strike with a club, Witshe'trum wat'r. " •' " knife, Nokoits'un wat'r. " " " stick, Wat'r. To cut with a knife, Tskis. "" " " an ax, A't'r. Much, Wai'idi ; wu'qi. Many, Wu'qoi ; wu'ql. Many bows, Wu'qoi tai'up. Two bows, Pun'goi tai'up. Bow, Taiup. Bow string of sinew, Tooiq'tut. " " loop for securing at end "I _,_, . . ^ ° fPet ; pit ; pet. of bow, J Front side of bow, Ke'wet. Cord side of bow, Ko'tro. Arrow poison, Hai'enit. The parts of an arrow, having a wooden point detachable from the shaft, are as follows : Point of wooden arrow-head shaft, Sha'padan ; tshi'pidun. Body of wooden arrow-head, Slio'toitsh. Shaft of arrow proper, Sik'kid. Feathers, Tshodon'gish. Notch, at base of shaft, Tin'neiu. Sinew fibres at head of shaft to^ prevent splitting upon introduc- [Pik'ked. tion of arrow-head, J Numerals. 1, Yet ; Yet. 13, Sho'pium. 2, Pun'goi ; bun'goi ; pun 'ga. 14, Hatsh'pum. 3, Shi a'pln ; sho'pin ; tro1 'pin. 15, Yit'sum. 4, Hatpun'gl. 16, Tshud'pum. 5, Yit'singlt ; yet'singit. 17, Num'tslmm. 6, Tshu'dipi ; tsho'dipi. 18, Mun'shum. 7, Nump'tsin. 19, Nont'pum. 8, Mu'nus. 20, Pungat'shium'. 9, No'nlp. 21, Pungat'riayet'. 10, Tri'o ; dri'o ; tri'a. 30, Shra'pTntri'a. 11, Ie'tsum. 40. Hatpun'gitri'a. 12, Tshi'ukan. 50, Yit'singatri'a. * Also in the sense of to love, although there is no word for love as>rdinarily recognized. PKOC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 2v. PRINTED APRIL 30, 1880. Hoffman.] 378 [March 19, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, Tshu'dipitri'a. Num'tshetri'a. Mu'natri'a. No'niptri'a. Yet'pitsh. 101, Yet'pitshio yet'. 1000, Tri'apitsh'a. 2000, Pun'gatri'apitsh'a. 3000, Shiapin tri'apitsh'a. Ho'iutsha — To like, to admire. Sing. Present tense. 1. Nim ho'iutsha. 2. Min ho'iutsha. 3. Ta ho'iutsha. Plural. 1. Wai'tung ho'iutshet. 2. Kumuiman ho'iutshet. 3. Kasin'tun ho'iutshet. Dual. 1. Na'aktang ho'iutshet. (We two.) 2. Ma'aktang ho'iutshet. (Ye two.) 3. Tashlk'tang ho'iutshet. (They two.) Past tense. Sing. 1. Ni'amtang yud ho'iutshush. 2. Ma'tang yud ho'iutshush. 3. Ta tang yud ho'iutshush. Plural. 1. Wai'tung yud ho'iutshush. 2. Kumuiman yud ho'iutshush. 3. Kasin'tun yud ho'iutshush. Dual. 1. Na'ak tang yud ho'iutshush. 2. Ma'ak tang yud ho'iutshush. 3. Ta shik'tang yud ho'iutshush. Future tense. Sing. 1. Na tang'he ho'iutshe. 2. Ma tang'he ho'iutshe. 3. Ta tang'he ho'iutshe. Plural. 1. Wai'tung tan ho'iutshe. 2. Kumuiman tan ho'iutshe. 3. Kasin'tun tan ho'iutshe. 1886.] dl.J [Hoffman. Dual. 1. Na'ak tang tan ho'iutshe. 2. Ma'ak tang tan ho'iutshe. 3. Ta shlk'tang tan ho'iutshe. Tau'trat— To kill. Present tense. Sing. l.'iTshan na tang tau'trat. 2. Tshan ma tang tau'trat. 3. Tshan ta tang tau'trat. Plural. 1. Wai'tung tshan tang tau'trat. 2. Kuuiuiman tshan tang tau'trat. 3. Kasin'tun tshan tang tau'trat. Dual. 1. Na'aktang tshan tau'trat. 2. Ma'aktang tshan tau'trat. 3. Ta shik'tanff tshan tau'trat. Past tense. Sing. 1. Hiam'na tang tau'trash. 2. Hiam'ma tang tau'trash. 3. Hiam'ta tang tau'trash. Plural. 1. Hiam'waitung tau'trash. 2. Hiam'kumuiman tau'trash. 3. Hiam'kasin'tun tau'trash. Dual. 1. Hiam'na'aktang tau'trash. 2. Hiam'na'aktang tau'trash. 3. Hiain'tashik'tang tau'trash. Future tense. Sing. 1. Na tang'he hiam'xash tau'tret. 2. Ma tang'he hiam'xash tau'tret. 3. Ta tang'he hiam'xash tau'tret. Plural. 1. Waitung tang'he hiam'xash tau'tret. 2. Kumuiman tang'he hiam'xash tau'tret. 3. Kasintun tang'he hiam'xash tau'tret. Dual. 1. Hlam' xash na'aktang tau'tret. 2. Hiam'xash ma'aktang tau'trat. 3. Hiam'xash taslnk'tang tau'trat. Packard.] ^"^ [Feb. 5, Discovery of the Thoracic Feet in a Carboniferous Phyllocaridan. By A. S. Packard. {Bead before the American Philosophical Society, February 5th, 1S86.) It is a matter of some surprise that notwithstanding the large number of fossil Phyllocarida from the Palaeozoic strata made known to us by the researches of McCoy, Salter, Barrande, H. Woodward, James Hall, J. M. Clark, Pi. P. Whitfield, C. E. Beecher and others, no definite, unmistaka- ble traces of the limbs have been discovered. So far as we are aware, no portions of the antennae of either pair, nor of the thoracic or abdominal limbs (except those next to the telson), have been figured or described, though many specimens of the fossils have been subjected to the scrutiny of our leading paleontologists. While most of the species are represented by the bivalvular carapace alone, which must have been, as in the recent Nebalia, easily detached after death from the body so as to float away by itself, still in some cases, as in that of C'eraliocaris stygia Salter, figured by Messrs. Jones and Woodward in the Geological Magazine for September, 18S5, the abdominal segments, with the hist pair of uropoda and the telson, are distinctly preserved, while in other cases the large toothed mandibles are preserved in place between the valves of the carapace ; the rostrum has also sometimes been preserved. But we should have expected ere this to have become acquainted with the nature of the antennae and the ante- rior abdominal appendages, if, as we have good reason to suppose, they were like those of the modern Nebalia. In their diagnosis of the genus Ceratiocaris, Messrs. Jones and Wood- ward in referring to the body, state : "Body many jointed, with fourteen or more segments, of which 4-7 extend beyond the carapace ; ornamented with delicate raised lines. Some or all of these segments bore small, lamelliform, branchial appendages."* Although Messrs. Jones and Woodward have kindly sent me nearly all their valuable papers on fossil Crustacea, tiiose cited in the foot- note, un- fortunately are not among the number, and hence I am unable to refer to ' them. Mr. Etheridge's note in the Annals and Magazine Natural History is as follows : "At the Brighton meeting of the British Association, Mr. II. Wood- ward, F.R.S., noticed the discover}' of the 'swimming gills' of Ceratio- caris, to which Iliad previously drawn his attention. On a slab of thin flaggy shale from the Upper Silurian series of Lesmahagow are exposed, the caudal segments, telson, and caudal appendages of a Ceratiocaris. From the ventral margin of the terminal segment proceeds abroad paddle- shaped membraneous (?) expansion, presenting a strong marginal outline, ♦See the Sixth Report on Fossil Crustacea, Brit. Assoc. Report for 1872, p. 323, and Geological Magazine, ix, p. 564. Also a descriptive note by Mr. R. Etherldge, given in the Mem. Geol. Surv. Seotl. Explan. Sheet 23, 1873, p. 93, and Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 4, Vol. xiv. I87J, p. 9. 1886] dol [Packard. with a transversely striated surface. This is^fbllowed by another similar appendage, proceeding in the same manner from the penultimate seg- ment. The dorsal edge of the specimen shows that one of the correspond- ing 'foot-gills ' of the opposite side has been bent back upon itself, and thus thrust out of place. The free ends of these paddle shaped appendages are attenuated to more or less rounded points. They do not show any evi- dence of a marginal fringe. These gill feet are no doubt analogous to the same supplementary abdominal organs in Nebalia." I do not understand from the foregoing description, the nature of the so-called appendages, especially since they are not figured, but will now proceed to call attention to those noticed in a specimen sent me a year ago by J. C. Carr, Esq., of Morris, Illinois, which occurred in a nodule from the Carboniferous beds of Mazon creek at Morris. As soon as I examined the fossil, the indications of broad lamellate appendages of several pairs were at once apparent. Owing to the incom- plete state of preservation of the dorsal and ventral edges of the valves I was at a loss to what group to refer the fossil. It was apparently a Phyl- locariclan, but seemed to differ from most of the genera described. I therefore considered it as the type of a new genus intermediate between Ceratiocaris and Aristozoe, and named it Cryptozoe; it may be called Cryp- tozoe problematicus. After, however, comparing the specimen with Dr. "Woodward's figure of the Carboniferous Ceratiocaris oretoneiisisWoodv?. and G. truncatus Woodw. [Geological Magazine, viii, March. 1871), and his figure of G. papilio Salter and G. stygia Salter {Geological Magazine, Sep- tember, 1885), I was inclined to provisionally regard it as belonging to that genus. But on consulting my friend, Mr. C. E. Beecher, who has worked so faithfully on the fossil Phyllocarida, he kindly sent me the following opinion : Albany, Dec. 30, 1885. The typical Ceratiocaris (see McCoy's description) differs from your specimen in its semi-elliptical outline, with the abruptly truncated poste- rior end and evenly convex valves. Your species has a short hinge-line, very broadly rounded posterior end, and the cephalic and thoracic regions of the carapace are well defined. These are characters which do not belong to Ceratiocaris when strictly defined. The contour of the dorso-anterior extremity would seem to indi- cate the presence of a well-developed rostrum. The typical Ceratiocaris are from the Silurian system, and I very much doubt their extension into the Carboniferous, although they have been noted in the Devonian. I have not seen the article by Woodward and Jones which you mention. I should be inclined to consider this as a type of a new genus. It is very interesting, especially as furnishing some information as to the appendages. Chas. E. Beecher. Packard.] OOA [Feb. 5, The generic characters as drawn from the carapace alone are as follows : Valves one half as long as broad ; moderately full and convex, with no definite, straight hinge-margin. It differs from Ceratiocaris in the lack of a long, straight hinge-margin, the dorsal edge being curved, and in the lower edge not being thickened, while the posterior end is well rounded. The anterior end of the valves is about half as wide as the posterior end, and is oblique, the lower part of the edge being directed outwards. From Aristozoe it differs in the lack of a definite hinge-margin, and in its elongated oval valves ; from Nothozoe in its well defined narrow anterior end, and well defined dorsal and ventral edges. As Mr. Scudder's genus Khachura* from the Carboniferous limestone of Danville, Illinois, is only represented by the end of the abdomen, it is impossible to discuss its relationship to that form. The specimen is a cast, and shows no tracings of markings on the exterior of the valves. In form it is ovate, obliquely truncated at each end ; the dorsal edge is not so much curved as the ventral edge, but it is more curved towards the posterior edge than towards the anterior ; the ventral edge is quite regularly curved. The anterior end is obliquely truncated, the lower angle directed outwards. The posterior edge is about a third wider than the anterior end, and is directed obliquely inwards so as to be nearly parallel with the anterior end. While each end of the valves is well preserved, the dorsal and ventral edges have apparently not been preserved, as they are usually thickened in the other species of the genus. The lamellate limhs are situated in the specimen at the posterior end of the carapace ; probably after death the carapace turned around and sepa- rated from the body, which with the extremities became much displaced. Of the lamellate limbs there are traces of four pairs. They are broad and thin, slightly contracted in width near the base, and at the distal extremity quite regularly rounded, with the free ends apparently slightly folded longitudinally, the edges appearing to be slightly crenulated, but Fig. 3.— Outline of O'yptozoe problcmalicus, showing the shape of the lamelJate feet, the valve being upside down. these folds were perhaps due to changes after death. All the feet are of nearly the same size. They are about two thirds as long as the carapace *Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist, xix, 1878, PI. 8, Fig. 3, 3a. Proceedings of the Amer. Philos. Soc. Vol. XXIII, No. 123, Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Crypiozo'e problematicus Pack. 1886.] *'"" IWyckoff. is high ; the length of the hest preserved one 18mm, the breadth 3-4mm. There are no traces of a division into endopodites and exopodites ; but we should regard the parts preserved as the homologues of the exopodites of Nebalia ; there are no traces of seta? on the edges. The general appearance of the appendage is much as in PI. xxxvii, Fig. 6, of our monograph of North American Phyllopod Crustacea. Length of the carapace 46mm : height at the highest part, 26 ; at the anterior end 12-13mm. From the foregoing description it seems reasonable to suppose that in the fossil forms, Ceratiocaris and allied forms at least, the thoracic feet were, in shape and structure, homologous with those of the modern Nebalia. Beyond the feet, at the larger or posterior end of the carapace is the impression of what may have been the basal joint of one of the basal abdominal feet, which joint in Nebalia is as long as the lamellate thoracic appendages ; but this, of course, is quite problematical. It is not a little strange that no undoubted traces of the antennae or basal abdominal limbs of any extinct Phyllocaridan have as yet been brought to light ; but the discovery of these large, broad, thin, lobular appendages which most probably belonged to the thorax, makes it all the more likely that the extinct Phyllocarida had antenna?, and basal abdominal limbs similar to those of the existing Nebalia. Explanation of the Plate. Fig. 1. Cast of carapace of Cryptozoe problematicvs Pack., natural size. Fig. 2. Reverse of the same, showing the impressions of the lamellate feet originally attached to the thorax. The Use of Oil in Storms at Sea. By Lieut. A. B. Wyckoff, U. S. N. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, April 2, 18S6.) My attention was drawn to this subject in 1884, soon after I took charge of the Branch Hydrographic Office in Philadelphia. Several Masters of vessels described their methods of using it, and the striking results of their practical experiments. I became convinced of its great utility ; and in November, 1884, reported the matter in a letter to the Hydrographic Office. Soon afterwards, orders were given the branch offices, to collect all the information they could obtain regarding its use ; and in January, 1885, the data, thus collected, was published upon the monthly North Atlantic Pilot Chart. This has been continued ever since, and the Hydro- grapher, Commander J. R. Bartlett, has done everything in his power to interest mariners in the subject. In consequence, where one vessel for- merly used it, there are probably now fifty prepared for such an emergency. Wyckoff.] £>84 [April 2, In view of the unvarying successful result, the time must soon come, when no vessel will leave port without some cheap fish or vegetable oil, for this purpose. Insurance companies, owners and masters of vessels, are all too greatly interested, to have this precaution longer neglected. The use of oil in calming troubled waters, was evidentljr well known to the ancients, as Aristotle, Plutarch and Pliny refer to it in their writ- ings. The divers in the Mediterranean still use it in the manner described by Pliny — taking oil in their mouths, and ejecting a little at a time, to quiet the surface and permit the rays of light to reach them. Fishermen, who depend upon the spear to capture their prey, pour oil on the water to calm it, and enable them to clearly see the fish. The hardy fishermen of the north of Scotland and along the shores of Norway, have known this use of oil for centuries. When crossing a dangerous bar or tide-rip, or when landing through surf, they press the livers of the fish until the oil exudes, and then throw them in advance of their boats. The Lisbon fishermen carry oil with them, and use it in crossing the bar of the Tagus, in rough weather. Whalers have resorted to oil and blubber, in severe storms, for the last two hundred years. Very recently, an old whaler informed me, that it was their custom to hang large pieces of blubber over each quarter of their vessel, when running before a heavy sea, and- it entirely prevented the water coming on board. The members of this Societ}^ should take special interest in this subject, because its founder made many experiments, and left his views on record regarding the great utility of oil for this purpose. On a stormy day, he calmed the surface of a pond covering a half acre, by pouring a single tea- spoonful of oil upon its windward side. He afterwards made other labo- rious tests upon the waves of the sea, and gave a scientific explanation of the manner in which the oil acted. This explanation is still believed to be substantially correct. Molecules of water move with freedom, and the friction of air in motion upon the surface of a body of water, produces undulations. These increase in size, proportionately, to the depth of water, the distance they can proceed to leeward, the strength of the wind and the time it is acting. There is a limit, of course, to this increase in height ; none probabl}r ever exceeding forty feet. The precursor of a cyclone in the North Atlantic, is often, what is known to seamen, as a heavy swell. It may be perfectly calm when this reaches a vessel. It is simply a long, high undulation ; started by the storm, and traversing the ocean in advance of it. Off the coast of Cali- fornia, I have experienced the tremendous swells, made by a westerly wind across the immense stretch of the North Pacific. These undulations were as high as any I have ever seen, and yet, on calm days, I have often ridden them in an ordinary whale boat. These swells correspond to oiled waves. The boat or vessel slides up their front slope, and down the rear. Let a sudden gale spring up, like the " Northers " in the Gulf of Mexico, and the harmless swells becomes raging seas. How is this change effected ? 1836.] 385 [Wyckoff. The friction of the wind, upon the exposed slope of the swell, produces little irregularities of the surface. These wavelets are driven up the slope to the summit of the undulation. At the same time, the forward slope is more and more protected from the wind, and, because of its inertia, becomes steeper and steeper. Any one who ever saw a sand dune within the limits of the trade winds, has seen the storm wave in permanent form — a long windward slope and abrupt leeward face. The constantly sharp- ening crest of the storm wave, is finally thrown forward and downward with a force proportionate to its weight and speed. "When this storm wave encounters a ship, the vessel cannot rise up the abrupt front. Instead, she checks the progress of the base of the wave, and the crest is thrown forward with tremendous violence, filling her deck and sweep- ing away men, boats and everything movable. The storm wave is, per- haps, no higher than the heavy swell, and only differs from it in shape. Oil changes the storm wave into the heavy swell. How is this done ? The scientific explanations given with great minuteness, that I have seen, would only be confusing to the ordinary mariner. My opinion is : that the oil with its less specific gravity floats on the surface, and spreads rapidly, forming a film, like an extremely thin rubber blanket, over the water. Because of the viscosity of the oil, and its lubricant nature, the friction of the wind is not sufficient to tear this film, and send individ- ual particles rolling up to the summit. At the same time, the molecules of water beneath are protected ; and, although the force of the wind may increase the speed of the undulation as a body, it will be as a heavy swell, and no longer in the shape of a storm wave. This effect can always be obtained at sea, if a suitable oil is used. It has been supposed, that the oil exerts some chemical action in dissolving the foam, as is witnessed, when it stops the frothing of pulp in a paper mill. It is more probable, how- ever, as Dr. Franklin says, that the effect is purely mechanical. I have examined one hundred and fifteen reports of the use of oil in storms at sea, published by the Hydrographic Office, and find all the trials were very successful, except four. In these, refined petroleum was used. In one instance, sperm oil was said to have thickened so that it did not spread freely ; but in four others, it acted very well. Fish oil was used 9 times, crude petroleum 3, pine oil 3, linseed 22, lard 5, neat's-foot 1, colza 2, and varnish 3 times. In 58 trials, the kind of oil used is not speci- fied. It is apparent, that the heavier oils are the most efficacious. The result in every instance, where used by a novice, is of extreme astonish- ment at the wonderful effect. One trial seems convincing, and soon it is hoped, the whole profession of merchant officers will be converts, and always go prepared. In using oil for this purpose, it is evident that it must be spread well to windward, in order to be efficacious. In consequence, a steamer plung- ing into a head sea, or a sailing vessel on a wind, can derive no benefit. But any vessel driving before a gale, or lying to and making a dead drift to leeward, gets the lull protection of its use. As all vessels, except per- PROC. AMER. PHILOS 8QC. XXIII. 123. 2w. PRINTER JUNE 10, 1886. Wyckoff.] *>86 [April 2, haps the rapid passenger steamers of the Atlantic, assume one of these two positions in a storm, the oil is of very general application. Even the fast passenger steamers, in crossing to the eastward before the winter gales, or when, for any reason, their machinery is stopped, will find it invaluable in saving their boats and upper works. Many vessels have found it of great utility, in passing the dreaded trough of the sea, either in heaving to or getting before the wind. The ordinary methods adopted for distributing the oil are : to pour it down the pipes forward, or place oil alone, or oil and oakum, in canvas bags with holes punched in them, or in bags made of coarse material, as gunny or corn sacks. These are hung over the ship's side wherever required. In my opinion, the bags should always be placed over the bows ; as in running, there is time for the oil to spread, and when lying to, it is needed as far forward as possible. From the reports received, I should judge that one gallon of oil, when properly distributed, should last a vessel at least four hours. In lowering a boat in 'a sea-way, oil is of great advantage. If to rescue the crew of a disabled vessel, the rescuer should take a position to wind- ward, and distribute a quantity of oil. After the boats have been started, the rescuing vessel should drop to leeward to pick them up. The boats should carry oil to use in running before the sea. A bottle of oil, with a quill in the cork, should always be kept attached to every life buoy. When a man falls overboard and reaches the life buoy, the oil will prevent the waves breaking over him, and enable the rescuing boat to find him, by the "slick " on the water. There should be an oil tank in every ship's boat, in the event of it becoming necessary to abandon the vessel. Riding to a drogue, made of the masts or oars, a small expenditure of oil will enable a boat to live through a severe storm. At the entrance of a harbor, or river with a deep bar, oil can be used to great advantage, as has been proven by the experiments in England. When, however, the waves strike a beach, the problem becomes very dif- ferent. The base of the wave is then retarded by the shoaling depth and the undertow from its predecessor, and, of necessity, the crest is thrown violently forward. Oil cannot prevent this; but it will certainly have considerable effect upon the outer line of breakers, and enable a boat to approach so much nearer the beach, as to greatly increase the chances of a favorable issue. However, many instances are given of the successful landing of boats, through surf and breakers, that would have overwhelmed them without the use of oil. I append some illustrations of the practical use of oil, in some of the emergencies to which I have referred. In 1881, a Mr. Fondacaro arrived at Naples from Montevideo, in a three- ton boat built by himself. When caught in a gale, a bag was thrown over as a drag ; and two oil bags were put over, one forward and the other aft. The oil circled around the boat, and prevented the seas breaking over her. 1886.1 ^"^ [Wyckoff. One gallon of oil lasted about twenty-four hours. Mr. Fondacaro says, "the oil does not diminish the size of the waves, but renders them com- paratively harmless by preventing them from breaking." The chief officer of the S. S. Diamond, wrecked off the Island of Anholt, describes their escape from the wreck. He provided each boat with a five- gallon can of oil, and stationed a man to pour it gradually over the stern. Immediately the sea, in the wake of the boats, became perfectly smooth, and they passed right through the boiling surf, and reached the land in safety, without shipping a sea. None of the men in the boats believed, when they left the ship, that all would reach the shore alive ; and the peo- ple on land watched their approach in wonder, deeming it impossible for even the life-boat to live in such awful breakers. (The chief officer evi- dently means, that the sea ceased to break in the wake of the boats ; not that it became perfectly level.) Capt. E. E. Thomas, of the S. S. CMllingham, writes, that during a voy- age from Philadelphia to Queenstown in March, 1833, he encountered a heavy gale from S.W. "For forty-eight hours we ran before the gale, and during the whole of the time we shipped very heavy seas, and the decks were continually full of water fore and aft. We then had two oil bags made, filled them, and made one fast to the ring of each anchor over the bows. Within a few moments we saw the effects of it on the seas. In the wake of the ship they did no| break, whereas, outside of our wake the waves were breaking in all directions. Up to then, we had run before the gale for forty-eight hours without heaving the log, none of the crew daring to go aft for fear of being washed overboard. After using the oil we did not ship any heavy seas whatever, and ever since we always use oil when run- ning before a heavy sea. I would also recommend it to be used in ships that are lying to in heavy seas. The bags were slung about two feet below the anchors, so that when the vessel pitched they were, at times, just awash. About one quart of colza oil was put in each bag every four hours." Capt. Jones, of the British S. S. Chicago, while rescuing the crew of the brigantine Fedora, used oil with the best results. It was blowing a heavy gale with very high seas. The Chicago ran to windward of the Fedora, and, during a lull, oil having been poured on the water, the port life-boat was successfully launched and started. A can of oil was taken in the boat, and by using this the seas were kept down in the immediate vicinity, though they broke iu masses of foam a short distance away. As the boat approached the Fedora, the crew of that vessel poured oil on the water, which so calmed the sea that the boat got alongside and rescued the shipwrecked crew without sustaining any injury. About half a gal- lon of paint oil was used by the boat during her trip. The S. S. Menzaleh, in March, 1885, from Italy to Philadelphia, encoun- tered a severe S. W. gale. While running before the sea, the vessel was pooped and the main hatches were stove in. It was determined to heave to, and men were stationed to drip oil dqwn the forward shutes. The Sellers.] """ [Feb. 19, vessel came around without shipping any water, and kept perfectly dry while lying to. Captain J. E. Lewis, master of schooner Lawrence Haines, reports that he used oil when hove to in a terrible N. N. E. gale off Hatteras, on Decem- ber 26th and 27th ; force of wind from fifty to sixty miles per hour. He put over three bags containing oakum and oil ; one forward, one att, and one amidships, and hanging so as to dip as the vessel rolled. Oil used, mixture of linseed, tar and kerosene oil. The bags were used thirty hours, and three gallons of the mixture were expended. He claims that his ves- sel was saved by the use of oil. Captain E. L. Arey, of the schooner Jennie A. Cheney, writes: "I used oil with very satisfactory results during the late severe hurricane of the 25th of August, in latitude 31° N., longitude 79° W. The wind having carried away the mainsail, I bent a storm trysail, and continued under that sail until it also blew away. During the time, the vessel was shipping large quantities of water, the sea being very irregular, nearly every one breaking. After the sails were blown away, finding it necessary to do something to save the ship and crew, I took a small canvas bag and turned about five gallons of linseed oil into it, and hung it over the star- board quarter. The wash of the sea caused a little of the oil to leak out, and smoothed the surface, so that lor ten hours no water broke aboard. I consider that the oil used, during the last and heaviest part of the hurri- cane, saved vessel and crew." An Obituary Notice of the Late George Whitney. By William Sellers. (Mead before the American Philosophical Society, February 19, 1886.) The subject of this memoir was born in Brownville, New York State, October 17th, 1819. He was educated at the Albany Academy, Albany, U", Y„ where he distinguished himself by his quickness of perception and aptitude for learning, which enabled him to carry off the honors of his class in successive competitive examinations and to obtain a large share of the prizes given each term. At an early age George Whitney developed a decided preference for Studies in natural philosophy, drawing and mechanics. In 1832 his father, Mr. Asa Whitney, was appointed Superintendent of the Mohawk and Hudson River Railroad, one of the earliest steam roads in this country, and his son George availed himself, on all holiday occasions, of the opportunity thus presented of acquiring familiarity with the mechanism of the engines and the practical operation of the road. As a draughtsman, George Whitney was equaled by few, and his beauti- ful drawings of some of the first English locomotives sent to America 1886.1 389 [Sellers. (made when he was quite a youth), are still preserved in his family, and are tangible evidences of his skill in this direction. Mr. Whitney's taste naturally led him to choose the profession of civil engineering, and on completing his studies he immediately secured a situa- tion on the surveying corps of the proposed railroad between Hartford and Springfield, Connecticut, the lines for which were run in the middle of a rigorous winter, the engineers being exposed to the hardships of extreme cold and deep snows. On the completion of this survey he was retained by the engineer in charge, the late William H. Talcott, and transferred, in 1840, to the little town of Cuba, Allegany Co., N. Y., where he was placed in charge of a section of the work of enlarging the Genessee Valley canal, being engaged both in preparing estimates of cost, and in supervis- ing the practical construction. Mr. Whitney remained at this post more than two years, and was then transferred to Albany as private secretary to the same engineer. In 1842, Mr. Asa Whitney removed to Philadelphia, having formed a partnership with Matthias W. Baldwin, under the name of Baldwin & Whitney, for the manufacture of locomotives. Mr. George Whitney was soon called to Philadelphia and was employed by this firm until its dis- solution in 1846. We next find him assisting his father, who had been appointed presi- dent of the Morris Canal Co., in the work of preparing drawings for the remodeling and enlargement of the canal, a work of considerable mag- nitude in those days, involving some bold schemes in the substitution of improved inclined planes for the old-fashioned locks, and which, by their successful operation, rescued the company from its financial embarrass- ments and placed it upon a paying basis. The President's "Beport to the Stockholders of the Morris Cnnal and Banking Company, March 17th, 1848," contains an interesting account of the experimental tests made January 27th. 1848, of the first inclined plane constructed under his supervision, in which he says that a boat containing seventy tons of cargo (exclusive of the weight of boat and car) was passed repeatedly up and down the plane, with great apparent ease and without employing more than half the power that had been provided. The boats were carried up the inclined planes at a greater velocity than they were towed on the levels, and the system then introduced is still in successful operation on the canal. The height of the first plane was- fifty-one feet, its inclination one in ten ; the whole distance that the boat was moved by machinery was 000 feet and the time employed was three and a half minutes. Mr. Asa Whitney, realizing, prior to dissolving partnership with Mr. Baldwin, the great necessity for improvement in wheels for locomotives, tenders and cars, had devised a process for annealing wheels made of chilled cast-iron, for which he obtained a patent in 1848. The experiments, which were made chiefly by Mr. George Whitney, under his father's direction, proved so successful that Mr. Asa Whitney, foreseeing the opportunity Sellers.] 390 [Feb. 19, 1886. here presented of developing a large and profitable business, resolved to confine himself to this specialty ; accordingly, in 1847, the firm of A. Whitney & Son was established for the purpose of manufacturing chilled cast-iron car-wheels under this patent. The extensive works covering the ground between Callowhill street, Pennsylvania avenue, and Sixteenth and Seventeenth streets, were erected a few years later, and were by far the finest and most substantial, as well as largest, devoted to this specialty in the country. As an evidence of the extent of the business it may be stated that about one and a half million car-wheels have since that time been made at this establishment and sent to all parts of the world where the iron horse has penetrated. Mr. George Whitney devised many improvements facilitating this manu- facture, and for several years prior to the death of his father, which oc- curred in 1874, he was the practical head of the firm. Outside of this special occupation, Mr. Whitney was well known as a public-spirited citizen, giving aid both by his wise counsels and his gen- erous contributions to all laudable objects. At the outbreak of the late rebellion he was one of the foremost business men in this city to recognize and accept the responsibilities thrust upon him and he never wavered for a moment, or lost courage in the darkest hours of the nation's peril ; he was one of the original members of the Union Club, a liberal subscriber to and treasurer of the Bounty Fund, and he testified, in various other substantial ways, his loyalty to his country. As a business man, Mr. Whitney's reputation was such that his counsels were eagerly sought by many of our largest moneyed institutions, and though failing health compelled him of late years to relinquish some of these labors he was still active in not a few such corporations. At the time of his death he was a Director of the Insurance Company of North America, The Philadelphia National Bank, The Philadelphia Saving Fund, and The Lehigh Coal and Navigation Company. As an art patron, Mr. Whitney has done much to stimulate the higher education in art in this country, both by his judicious selection of foreign paintings of the highest order and by his generous encouragement of native talent ; his collection of pictures is one of the choicest in the United States and is even better known in Europe than in this country. Mr. Whitney was, for many years, a Manager of the Philadelphia School of Design, a member of the Board of Trustees of the Academy of Fine Arts and of the Pennsylvania Museum of Industrial Art ; he was also an honorary fellow of the Metropolitan Museum, and at the time of his death was one of the Board of Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania. In private life Mr. Whitney was an exceedingly modest and unassuming Christian gentleman, generous to a fault, ever ready to assist the unfortu- nate, while carefully concealing his name and his good works from the public eye. He died on the sixth day of March, 1885, after an illness of several weeks. GEOLOGICAL MAP YORK GOT1TY j« tin Colors recommendftl by the International Congress of Geologist! a/ its third I Berlin ) Session . Constructed by Prof Persiforfrazer D. Sc.iUmv. de France.) Scale i' i» Miles to I Inch - M3B77aMtilWl EXPLANATION OF COLORS ^ Dolerite 1 WtrU Quaternary I ' ' n ? _ Transit ^~~ Si Limestone {LowtrSiUrii ■|.s>_ Lower SiUtrie ■H t h _ liinihrii CPotsdam / ,i._ Azoic Schists I Phrllttts i it 2 - trcstitlltm Schists. STATE OF MARYLAND Dec. 4, 1885. ] OJL [Frazer. GENERAL NOTES.— SKETCH ON THE GEOLOGY OF YORK COUNTY, PENNSYLVANIA. By Persifor Frazer. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 4, 1SS5.) The conditions which make York county soil productive, the study of its geology interesting, and that geology itself varied, are due to effects of move- ment in early geological time, which, compared with those which have shaped our continent, are so small that they can hardly be represented upon a geological map of the United States of ordinary size. Yet, in a rough and general way, York county is a partial imitation, on a very small scale, of the United States, inasmuch as, like that part of the American continent, it consists of a belt of Archaean rocks in the north-west ; of another in the south-east; and that its intermediate portions are made up of newer form- ations containing fossils. Cavities in the limestone containing lignite and fossil plants, the latter resembling that of the present day, are not rare. These and possibly a marl in Carroll township near Dillsburp-, which, however, has yielded no fossils, represent the latest geological period ; and thus it may be said that of the five great divisions of the rocks of our planet : viz, the "original" (?) or Archaean ; the "old life " or Palaeozoic; the "middle life" or Mesozoic ; the "new life" or *Cainozoic (including under this head the Quaternary and Recent), and the Eruptive or igneous, each has a representative (or several of them) within the confines of the county. If it were of interest or profit, the analogy might be pushed a little farther to include the occurrence of the igneous rocks in the north-west ; the broad belt of Mesozoic strata which abuts upon the Archaean (but, in the case of the continent, also upon numerous masses of new rocks which are scattered over a great part of their junction) ; the contact of the Palaeozoic (Siluric in both cases) on the south-east border of the Mesozoic and the contact on the south-east of the latter formation with the Archaean. The last feature of the United States' geology, which fails in the case of York county, is the border line of New Life or Cainozoic rocks to the south-east of all the above formations ; and even this might be supplied if the limits of the county were pushed a comparatively short distance across Mason and Dixon's line, and into the State of Maryland. But enough has been made of this fancy, which is only introduced in order to fix more securely upon the memory the fact that, geologically speaking, York county may be considered to be a part of a great accidented plain of which the general trend is east of north and west of south. Its valleys, or portions of them, have successively formed the ocean bottoms of four or five different geo- logical periods, probably extending from first to last over many millions of years. To Rogers' names of "Primal" (or the beginning); "Auroral" (or * Written frequently Cenozoic. Frazer.] OjZ [Dec. 4, the dawn of life); "Matinal" (or the morning. Same metaphor); "Surgent" (or rising), &c., to the lower divisions of the Palaeozoic ; and "Cadent" (or falling) ; " Umbral" (or darkening) ; "Vespertine" (or evening), &c., to the later divisions of the Palaeozoic, the insurmountable objection is made that they do not describe any general state of facts. Thus it might be asked : Of what are these rocks the beginning, dawn, evening? Evidently of the second only of the four arbitrary and artificial divisions by age which geologists have constructed for their temporary convenience. The plan adopted by the New York geologists of giving a name to each formation, which should either recall the locality where it was characteristically displayed, such as the "Potsdam sandstone ;" or describe it lithologically, as the "Calciferous sandrock," the " Mar- cellus shales," the "Oneida conglomerate," &c, would be a good one for provisional use, were it not that in addition to the geographical designation, a lithological definition is added, which, because restricted in the area to which it is applicable, is as often inaccurate as the time de- scription of Rogers. Thus the " Potsdam sandstone " is a "Hellain Town- ship quartzite, " in York county, and Prof. Fontaine, of Virginia, thinks it represented by a peculiar schist containing quartz fragments in Virginia ; and some persons are sure that it occurs in other places as a gneiss. The "Calciferous sandrock " of New York is the same formation which makes up the major part of the broad and fertile limestone valleys of Lancaster, York, Cumberland and Franklin counties, &c, where it is not a sandrock at all. As there are various objections to every system yet proposed, I have adopted here that recommended by the International Congress of Geolo- gists at its Berlin session. The Archaean (or beginning) in this classification comprises those rocks, usually crystalline in structure, but of very varied and divergent charac- ter, in or below which the very earliest known forms of life occur — and those very sparingly — in York county. This series comprises all the rocks which are geologically inferior to the Hellam Township quartzite. The Palmozoic (or " old life ") includes all the rocks from and including the Hellam quartzite to the New Red sandstone, and is made up of the quartzite, hydro-mica schists, and their included iron ores, the great blue and buff limestone on which the city of York is built, together with that of Lower Windsor township ; that near New Holland, in Manchester township ; around Newmarket in northern Fairfax township ; and north of Dillsburg in northern Carroll township. The Mesozoic (or "middle life ") rocks are the reddish-brown sandstones and shales (and perhaps the igneous rocks penetrating them) which cover almost the entire northwestern part of the county. If the fancy might be indulged of likening the outline of the county to that of the lower part of a horse's leg, this formation would constitute the fetlock joint and all that portion immediately above the hoof proper. The Gainozoic (or "new life") includes all those rocks of which the 1885.] "•"* grazer. origin is of later date than the last mentioned, but it is generally used for those before the date of any historical evidences of the appearance of man on the planet. It is not known to me that there is a representative of this age present : that marked "marl" in the geological map being intro- duced without the evidence of fossils so far as I know and with consider- able doubt. The Quaternary and Recent deposits comprise those deposits which have been made from the earliest appearance of man on the planet down to the present time, including of course those of origin so late that they might have been historical. Such are the marks of the denudation which has shaped the meadows and hills as they are at present ; the moulding of the ravines and deepening of the stream-beds ; the distribution along the latter of gravels, &c ; and finally (for the sake of saving one more divi- sion of time, which would otherwise lie wholly within this one, and at best remain very uncertain as to exact date) the works of man's hand, which are discoverable in the arrow-heads and sculptures not infrequently observed along the lower course of the noble river which forms York's north-eastern boundary. One word more is necessary as to the subdivision of the rocks of these different geological ages before their occurrence in York county becomes our theme. It has been said that if the average thickness of all the strata which have been yet recognized as distinct in the State of Pennsylvania were laid one upon the other, the height of the pile would reach something like forty thousand feet. But this is made up almost without taking into account other than the Palaeozoic rocks. If the ordinary methods of calculation were pursued in estimating the thickness of the Mesozoic or New Red sandstone and shale alone which crosses York county, three miles and a half would be added to this column.* No very great thick- ness of Tertiary or Cainozoic rocks is to be found in Pennsylvania, but if, instead of counting upwards, or from the most recent of the Eozoic series, we were able to count downwards to its lowest member ; or to the earliest existing rocks of the globe, it is probable that a thickness of this series alone greater than all of those that we now know put together would be established. That the exposures of rock in York county will not justify the belief that any considerable fraction of this Archaean series can be reached by boring, the following list of its divisions, accepted by many geologists, will sufficiently show. They are given in descending order, the lowest being the earliest known, and the first named the most recent : VI. Keweenian.f III. Huronian. V. Taconian. II. Norian. IV. Mont Alban. I. Laurentian. ♦There are, however, good reasons for rejecting such an estimate, t See volume E. p. 211, Publications of the 2d Geological (Survey of Pennsyl- vania, by Dr. T. Sterry Hunt. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC XXIII. 123. 2x. PRINTED JUNE 10, 1886. Frazer.] 6.)4: [Dec. 4> The Archaean Rocks of Youk County.* Crystalline Schists (a2). I have not seen in York county any rocks which I considered to be of Laurentian age. If there be any, they are to be sought in the portion of the South mountain, which is included in parts of Carroll and Franklin townships, but it is very improbable that any will be found there. The same may be said of the Norian, which is simply another name for what was once called "Upper Laurentian." There remain then only the Huronian, the Mont Alban and the Taconian, for the Keweenian is not known in this part of the United States. The lowest member of the Archaean series, which has been recognized in York county is the Huron- ian, and if I be not in error, the rocks of this age form the greater part, if not all, of its lower strata. On the accompanying geological map it is col- ored a pink of medium tint, and lettered "a2," as well as all that pre- viously referred to in Carroll and Franklin townships forming the South mountain. Crossing the Susquehanna somewhat obliquely a broad fiat arch of these rocks becomes evident in plotting the observations on section lines along either the right or left bank of the river. f The perpendicular thickness of the Huronian rocks which constitute the visible parts of this arch has been calculated by me to amount to fourteen thousand four hundred feet, or 2.7 miles (or 4.3 kilometers), measuring from the lowest rocks exposed a short distance above McCall's Ferry to the base of the Peach-Bottom slates. This arch (or anticlinal) is a very important feature in the geology of this part of the State ; for it is not improbable that it is the leading element in the structure of a broad belt of rocks extending from a point at least north of the Schuyl- kill river (and not improbably even within the New England States) to and into the State of Alabama. But whether this carefully considered hypothesis be true or not, there is not the slightest reason for doubting that the rocks of this part of the county form the floor on which all the others in the county were laid down. Another fact in relation to this flat arch or anticlinal remains to be considered, viz : the line along its crown (or along the top of the arch) appears not to have been an horizontal line after the last great earth- crust movements, of which we can find evidence in this part of the con- tinent, had been completed ; the axis of this arch appears to have sloped upwards, from the west of south to the east of north ; and to say that this axis rises towards the north-east, is to say that, judged from our present surface, the lower (and consequently older) beds of this arch rise nearer to that surface, the farther one follows this direction of north-east ; and of course these same rocks sink lower beneath the surface *See Note 7 at the end. tSee these sections by the author in atlas accompanying volume CCC, 2d Geological Survey of Pennsylvania. 1885.J "«-'5 [Frazer. the farther one follows the direction of the arch to the south-west. I have elsewhere given reasons for the hypothesis that this anticlinal joins and continues the anticlinal of the Buck Ridge * near Conshohocken, a few miles north-west of Philadelphia, on the Schuylkill river, traversing Lancaster and Chester counties, a little south of the Chester valley. But at Conshohocken, the anticlinal is represented by Laurentian gneiss, while in Lancaster and York counties, the Huronian schists, which have been torn off by atmospheric denudation at the former locality, still re- main ; and still farther to the south-west it is not unlikely that.even more recent sheathings may be found, unless the axis be broken or bent, and rise also in this direction. The main fact, which it is my purpose to emphasize here, is that the same structure of arch evidently affects an enormous thickness of beds ; in all probability is traced in the flexed rock masses of at least two entirely different geological periods, and may pos- sibly be discovered in those of yet others outside of the limits of the field which it is my purpose to describe. A somewhat arbitrary division has been made by the writer between the rocks of the Huronian and those of the next following age. The line which constitutes this division may be seen passing through the southern part of Lower Windsor, the middle of Windsor, the eastern part of Spring- field, including Codorus, and reaching the Maryland line a short distance east of the boundary dividing Manheim from West Manheim township. This line does not profess to be, and in all probability is not an accurate line of demarcation between the two formations. It was adopted as an approximate dividing line between two regions which exhibit lithological characteristics diverging from each other in a degree proportional to the distance on either side of it. The same is true of the line which separates these lower rocks from the triangular area in the extreme southeastern corner of the county, in which are found the famous Peach-Bottom roof- ing slates. These two lines, which are in the average parallel to each other, are approximate boundaries only between the two regions, and that filled by the rocks of the McCall's Ferry or Tocquan Creek anticlinal. The rocks of the latter belt are strongly marked crystallteed rocks, f i. e., their structure is coarse, and the minerals which compose them are large and well crystallized, especially along the central parts of the belt. The rocks of the two bordering regions just mentioned are more crystalline, i. e., crystallized imperfectly or in much smaller masses, besides having other differences in kind. For example, the arch-belt (if I may be per- mitted to express it so), contains larger amounts and larger specimens of Muscovite, and more potash micas generally. The rocks are lighter, and not infrequently enough feldspar is found to give them a decidedly gneissic character; and the more so in general terms, the farther one gets away *See "Theses presentees a la Faculte des Sciences de Lille. University de France," &c, 1882, and "History of Lancaster County," &c, Phila., Everst & PeckPubl., 1883, p. 3. fSee note at the end. Frazer.] & J® [Dec. 4, from the bordering regions. The rocks in these latter regions, on the other hand, are more and more magnesian, darker in color (usually greenish or yellowish-green) and softer. They contain large quantities of chloritic minerals, and are remarkable for the great number of white quartz dykes which intersect them. These "arch-rocks" are very generally destitute of valuable minerals, so far as they have been explored in York county, except on the fringe of the South mountain, where they are in close proximity to a series of iron ore deposits similar to and in fact continuous with those known as the ores of the "Great," or "Cumberland Valley." But though this juxtaposition would tempt one to connect these ores with the rocks just spoken of, and though it is conceded that rocks of this age do often carry iron ores, the strong probability is that the proximity is "acci- dental," that is to say, that the ores occur at the foot of the mountain, because having been originally imbedded (as constituents of minerals) in the rocks which covered these slopes during the degradation and destruc- tion of these latter they have been disintegrated, carried away from their original place (sometimes not far off), and segregated in the soft and unctuous clays to which these loose beds have been reduced. But it is not improbable that some of these ores may have owed their origin to the same kind of alteration taking place within the mass of the Huronian rocks themselves. So that wherever the loose debris of higher formations (and notably of the Hellam quartzite (Potsdam sandstone), which everywhere abounds on the slope in boulders and blocks) will permit the undoubted Huronian to appear near one of these great iron mines, it is likely to be found that a part of the wealth of the latter consists in a somewhat pecu- liar ore unlike the rest, which can be traced to its first resting place with- in the bosom of the Huronian rocks. The belt of rocks which represents the Archaean in York county, lies, as it may be said approximately, between two lines, one following Muddy creek from its mouth in the Susquehanna to its ris;ht-angled bend, and thence through Bryantsville to Constitution ; and the other commencing opposite Turkey hill (in Lancaster county), and passing north-west of Windsor post-office, south-east of Dallastown, and nearly through Glen Rock post-office. The portion of the South mountain above referred to as belonging to the same age is small in area within the county limits, and occurring at one end of the chain of crystallophyllites where they appear to sink beneath the newer limestones and shales ; its slopes are gentler ; it has been subjected to greater erosion, and is covered for the most part with the debris of more recent formations. This belt, thus defined, contains no minerals which are yet mined (if we except the iron ores from the cate- gory), but the soil formed by the chemical and mechanical action of the atmosphere on its rocks is next in fertility to that of the limestone belt itself. The rocks of the Archaean belt, thus defined, are intersected by but few igneous dykes or trap, and this fact, taken in connection with the re- markable prevalence of such dykes in the north-western part of the county, 1885.1 &<'* IFrazer. and their frequency throughout the middle belt of limestone and schists, would lead one to conclude either that the seats of the igneous action resided within the beds of the newer rocks, or that the superposition of the latter in some way favored the development of the Plutonic forces which have forced molten rock for miles through narrow crevices and cracks in the envelope of the globe. Perhaps the explanation may be found in the supposition that the number of such dykes would depend upon the number of fractures in the earth's crust, aud that this number would increase with the growing weight due to thickening sediments deposited by water. However this may be (and it does not explain all of the facts connected with the new red sandstone), the only points where have observed trap penetrating and terminating in the rocks of this belt are : First, in a small exposure north of York Furnace on the Susquehanna, and second, a short distance east of Black Rock post-office. The Belt of Azoic Schists or Phyllites (a3). I have preferred to describe this belt under a separate heading, because there are difficulties connected with its assignment, either to that part of the Archaean rocks just considered, or to the Palaeozoic which will next be described. These difficulties arise in great part from the lack of outcrops of "rock in place." The decomposition which has at- tacked this intermediate belt has destroyed the identity of the individual beds and strewn the surface with its products, which are mingled with the remains of rocks of much later date. This is not surprising if we may assume that this belt formed the upper and later portions of the great Archaean series, for we have abundant proof that in contrast to the stability and repose of the broad flat arch to the south east, this new region was the hinge on which the first of a number of severe plications of the strata were operated. This bending and twisting unquestionably crumbled the rocks and left loose material which was easily moulded by the waters of the ocean, which then or subsequently covered it. to forms which more or less resembled those which had originally characterized it. But after its con- solidation with the next succeeding formation, and after an unknown amount of erosion had laid bare their contact line, both were together simi- larly treated, so that in the contorted state in which it was left it exhibits some features which recall the Middle Archaean, and others wliicli remind one of the Lower Palaeozoic of the county. Its precise boundaries being difficult to ascertain on the ground, cannot be given with precision in the text. It will suffice to say that, beginning on the Susquehanna river, a short distance south of the southern outcrop of the Prospect limestone, one part of it occupies all the region lying between the north-western bound- ary of the Archaean already given and the southern and eastern limits of the Hellam quartzite shortly to be described. It is traversed through part of its extent by two large trap dykes, and contains numerous deposits of iron ore which I am disposed to ascribe to segregation from iron minerals in other formations. Some limestone occurs interbedded with these rocks Frazer.] OJO [Dec. 4, (as at Glen Rock), which maybe safely assumed to be of earlier date than the important York limestone, whether or not it be (as seems not improba- ble) a part of the regular Huronian series. The most extensive iron ore banks noted in or on the border of this in- termediate belt are the Brillhart and Feigley banks marked Nos. 11 and 12 on the map. The Peach-Bottom district, including the roofing slates lying to the south of the flat arch, was described by me in volume CCC, Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, in 1877, where I showed that its posi- tion in the series was doubtful, and that these rocks might be interpreted to represent the Upper Archaean (a3) (below the Potsdam) ; or the schists imme- diately above the Potsdam (sj; or (by supposing a fault), a formation still higher — the "Matinal " of Rogers. Since then fossil algae were furnished to Prof. James Hall from the quarries, but he was unable to determine the age of the rocks from them with greater precision, than to refer them to the second or third of these horizons, with a preference to the second.* Photographs of the quarries and of the manner of working them will be found in volume CCC, Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania. f The Palaeozoic Rocks. Cambric (Hellam Quartzite, Potsdam Sandstone), (cb) Prof. H. D. Rogers, in the First Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, marked out and described the members of the different formations repre- sented in the State. This formation, which we may consider the base of the Palaeozoic, was considered by him to consist of three parts : a lower series of "talcose " slates, a middle white sandstone, and an upper series of talcose slates. It will be easily understood, by what has just been said, to what extent the view here offered differs from that of our great pioneer geologist. These "lower talcose slates," in all probability, are identical with the Azoic schists (or phyllites) just described, and, therefore, their position relatively to the beds beneath them and above them is the same, whether they be considered Upper Archaean or Lower Palaeozoic. There are no good exposures of the Hellam quartzite with the slate below it at any place in York county which I recall. On the flank of the South mountain, the quartzite is very much rent and crushed into fragments, while of the small patch on the map about two miles west of Case's ore bank (No. 8 on the map) no accurate dip was recorded. The Hellam quartzite, of which a part composes the "Chikis mountain," exhibits, indeed, in its numerous foldings the rock, called by Rogers, "talcose slate," between its two principal beds of quartzite, but not appreciably lower than the latter. We are forced to look to other parts of the country for a clearer knowledge of the relation to each other of this quartzite, and the schists on which it rests. We find abundant instances •See Peach-Bottom slates of S. K. York and S. Lancaster counties, Proc. Am. Inst, of Min. Engrs. Troy meeting, 1883. fSee note No. 2 at the end. 1885.] 6 J.) |Frazer. of this contact in Chester county north of the valley of that name, and in all of them the quartzite lies " uncomformably " (*. e., with changed dip) upon the schists. The latter, it is true, are somewhat different in minor characteristics from those of which it is here the question, but so also is the quartzite. Yet we have the best reasons for believing that each is of con- temporary origin with its analogue in York county ; and indeed, the dif- ferences, which would not be considered at all important by any but a critical geologist, are what we might expect when we remember that these rocks are sediments laid down at the bottom of successive seas, and that their characters depended upon the kind of material which different streams draining different parts of the country brought down to be strewn out at different localities during different epochs.* It will be explained before long that the physical break between the Archaean schists and the limestone series is rendered highly probable by the observations in York county, but that between the flat arch belt and the Hellam township quartzite must rest upon the direct evidence obtained in other counties, unless here also we may apply the indirect method mentioned above, and conclude that inasmuch as the Hellam quartzite contains one important fossil (Scolithus linearis) and the Archaean schists contain none that have yet been discovered in York county, this fact alone entitles them to be considered different formations. The Hellam or Chikis quartzite is a hard quartzose rock, of which the general color is white or gray, tinted by some other color, usually pink, brown or blue, depending upon the minerals with which it has been asso- ciated. It is almost always crystalline, and in disturbed regions like this is most frequently found in broken fragments rather than in continuous beds. This is probably owing to its brittleness, which prevented it from yield- ing gradually to the strain which has folded and tilted the other rocks of the county. These strains have twisted, broken and crumbled it, but on account of its great hardness and its resistance to the chemical action of the atmosphere, it is the least altered or decomposed of all the rocks to be considered here, and almost always indicates its presence by a hill, whatever be the position of its strata, f It is not necessary to specify the localities within the county where this quartzite occurs, because they are indicated by brown on the accompany- ing geological map ; still less is it desirable to discuss here all the possi- bilities of structure which these scattered outcrops suggest. It is important, however, before leaving the floor of the Palaeozoic column, to say that eleven years of experience in the field have caused me to doubt the cor- * Let any one observe the great differences between the characters of the sand beach of our own Atlantic coast within short distances. See on this subject Delesse's important contribution entitled " Geologie du fond des niers," and tbe writer's notice of the same in the Proc. Am. Philos. Soc. t Of course the reason of this is that the erosion, which has torn off hundreds and perhaps thousands of feet of the other measures, has not been able to reduce it to the same extent, and itremains, consequently, as an elevation, or chain of hills. Frazer.] 4UU [Dec. 4) rectness of ascribing to this formation the iron ores which are found in the schists immediately above the quartzite.* The Grubb ore bank (No. Ill of the map) is the only one which lies wholly within the area of the Hellam quartzite as given on the map, but a reference to the description of this bank (Vol. C, p. 64, 2d G. S. of P.) leads to the belief that the larger part of the ore lies in a small remnant of the bottom schists of the next higher formation, which has escaped the erosion that cut off the higher layers of that formation. Part of it, how- ever, answers to the description of an iron ore which may really belong to the quartzite and which has been noticed in the rocks forming the outer casing of the South mountain .f Siluric. (s) The York Limestone and Schists {Auroral of Rogers, in part the Cal- ciferous Sand rock of the New York Survey). This important member of the Palaeozoic series in York county consists of at least two, and perhaps three, distinct kinds of rocks, and inasmuch as the kind that occurs at the bottom (which resembles strongly that which occurs among the limestone beds themselves, and also above them) has already been mentioned several times by anticipation, it will be advisable to consider it first. Hydro-mica Schists, (sj) It was previously stated that Rogers, and following him, almost all other writers on geology up to the commencementofthe Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, had given the name of " talcose slates " to a group of rocks which he connected in epoch with the quartzite. The word talcose was ap- plied to them because from their softness and greasy feel it was assumed that they were largely composed of "talc;" but subsequent investigations of these rocks in the chemical laboratory have shown tnat they contain little or no magnesia, and that they derive their peculiar characters from large amounts of a group of micas containing potash or soda and water. Prof. James D. Dana conceived the happy thought of naming the group the " Hydro micas " (or water-containing micas), and naturally the rock which is mainly composed of them is called Hydro-mica schist. These hydro-mica, or nacreous schists, are not of uniform appearance. Sometimes, and especially in the beds that underlie the limestone, they are firmly compacted together, making hard rock masses and high hills, as at many places along the Susquehanna, from Wrightsville to Cabin Branch run, and elsewhere in the county. Sometimes they are so much disintegrated as to form dust, which on close view is seen to be mainly *Of course, if the Potsdam have an upper member consisting of schists, the above assignment is correct ; but I know of no instance in which the opposite supposition is not equally supported hy the (acts. It is also to be noted that the limestoneand iron-ore bearing schists are more frequently found together without the quartzite, than the quartzite and schists without the limestone. tCottrel I, Benson's and Smyser's mines (Nos. II and 112) are ou the borderline between the quartzite and limestone. 1885.1 [Frazer. made up of little glinting particles. In the former case the beds are very often strewn with pyrite. Again, in place of these crystals of iron — and occasionally copper— sulphide, are beautiful casts or moulds of the shape of a cube, more or less filled with a dark brown iron rust obtained from the decomposition of the original crystals. These little crystals have been of no small importance to the prosperity of York county, for there is good reason for believing that by far the largest part of its iron ores have been derived from their oxidation, transportation by water and final deposition in the clays formed from the grinding up of the rocks which originally contained them.* These argillites, or limestone schists, as I have sometimes called them, in all probability hold all the important iron oref mines of the county, outside of the formation of red sandstone and shales. It is true that sometimes the iron ore banks appear to be far from the area colored as limestone, and sometimes directly within the boundaries of that area, but in neither case is it under conditions that forbid the belief that they are in the veritable hydro-mica schists, even if the latter may have been reduced by the weather to soft unctuous and variegated clays. It is not assuming too much, therefore, to call this portion of York county rocks the real iron-bearing region. The edges of the rock appear in the right bank of the Susquehanna river, where that river has cut through them, and one would select the part just above Wrightsville to ascertain whether these schists were unconformable upon the quartzite ; but the following records of the dip, or inclination of the two rock series taken from section 1 of my report on the county,}: will show that both formations are so flexed or twisted, that no certainty can be obtained there. First, there are two dips in the Quartzite of South— 50°, and almost at the contact wi h the schists S. 20°, E. — 45°. Next there are three dips in the schists which are respectively S.— 45°, S. 10°, E.— 50°, S.— 10°, E.— 10°. Still, there is every probability that in fact the dips of the two differ, both in direction and amount, while there are no such indications for the dips of the schists and of the limestone proper at this place. § These schists are colored dark-green in the accompanying map. The York Limestone with Argillites. — One of the best opportunities of measuring the thickness of this limestone is afforded by the section referred to along the Susquehanna from a little run half a mile above the Columbia bridge to Creitz's creek. This is evidently a trough with the axis close to the bridge, and measures 2800 feet of limestone and in- cluded schists. If the schists between the quartzite and the limestone be included, it would add some 1600 feet to this, making the limestone * See Volume C, p. 137, 2d G. S. of Pa., by the author. t See Note 3, at the end. % Vol. C, p. 7S. gin the section above referred to it is probable that a further study would enable me to abandon the hypothesis of non-conformability at g,i,k and o, which I considered necessary eleven years ago. PRQC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 2y. PRINTED JUNE 11, 188(5. Frazer.l 4U.Z [Dec. 4, and the schists below It to the quartzite 4400 feet thick. The same heds measured by me in Lancaster county only amounted to 3400 feet. These beds, therefore, thicken 1000 feet in the twelve miles which intervene between this section and the city of Lancaster, and ot this thickening 400 feet belong to the schists below the limestone and 600 leet 1o the limestone itself and its included schists.* The limestone, of which numerous analyses will be found in Reports C, CC, CCC, M and MM, is dolomitic, that is to say, it is a carbonate of lime, containing varjing amounts of carbonate of magnesia. There is also some ground for believing that two kinds of limestone are represented, each having its own peculiarities of physical structure. It was noticed in many cases that two kinds of lime- stone were often exposed in the same quarry, and that they usually showed slight variations ot dip. One, which was apparently the elder, was of a buff or grayish color, and less marked stratification ; the other blue, with white streaks and spots of lighter colored limestone (often calcite). One case was recorded where, in a contact between the two, pebbles of the buff were found in the blue. There seems no doubt that the great mass of limestone now under consideration wTas formed subse- quently to the quartzite, arjd at about the epoch oftheCalcilerous Sand-rock of New York and before the Trenton, or in other words in the Canadian epoch of Dana. But no fossils were found in the county to settle the question. The portions of the beds connecting the limestone near New Market with that of York (a connection which doubtless exists), is covered up by the beds of the Mesozoic. Those which once connected that of Wrightsville with that near Prospect has been washed away in the general planing down of Ihe surface by erosion. The limestone is Indi- cated in the map by white line blocks through the dark green. The Mesozoic Rocks in York County. None of the numerous members of Mesozoic rocks is known to be rep- resented but the groups of sandstones and shales known as the "New Red Sandstone," and sometimes the "Triassic Sandstone." There are many puzzling questions which arise from the study of these rocks, not the least of which is their thickness. If one assumes them to lie naturally without distortion, layer upon layer, in York and Adams counties, their perpendicular thickness in this region will be not less than sixteen thousand four hundred feet.f The lower bed of this formation, * See Note 4, at the end. tSee Volume O', 2d G. S. of Pennsylvania, p. 303, by the author. See also by the same "The American New Red Sandstone." Trans. A. I. M. E. ; "The Meso- zoic formation in Virginia," by C. J. Heinrlch; Trans. A I. M. E., Feb., 1878; Noles on the Mesozoic of Virginia, by Prof. William M. Fontaine, Am. J. of Sc, January, 1879; and "Some Mesozoic ores," Proceedings American Philosophical Society, April 20, 1877, by the writer. In the article ci'.ed second, and in a review of the others In the American Naturalist for May, L879, I have shown that by calculating the thickness of Prof. II. D. Rogers' Yardleyville section of this formation (First Geological Survey of Pennsylvania) by th9 ordinary method, the thickness of beds would appear to be 51,500 feet, or niqe and three-quarter miles. 1885.] 4U tween Centreville and Castle Fin in York county, not far to the north-west- ward of the Peach-Bottom district. Note 2. Peach-Bottom slates. Mr. Andrew S. McCreath gave the fol- lowing report of a specimen of the Peach-Bottom slate taken from J. Humphrey & Co.'s quarry half a mile east of Delta, York county (p. 270, CCC). P. c. Silicic oxide (Si02) 55.880 Titanic oxide (TiO„) 1.270 Sulphuric oxide (Si03) » 0.022 Alumina (A1203) 21.849 Ferrous oxide (FeO) 9.033 Manganous oxide (MnO) 0.586 Cohaltous oxide (CoO) (trace) Lime (CaO) 0. 155 Magnesia (MgO) 1.495 Soda (Na20) 0.460 Potash (K20) 3.640 *Carbon (CO) 1.794 Water (H20) 3. 385 Iron bisulphide (FeS2) 0.051 lotal 99.800 Note 3. The following analysis of two different kinds of ore from York county are given. The first is from the " Lower Auroral," or limestone schists. It is from Earley & Killinger's Mine two miles and one-half east by north of Littlestown. It was analyzed by Mr. McCreath (See C, p. 44). P. C. Insoluble residue 12.320 Iron sesqui oxide (Fe203) 67.000 Alumina (A1203) 0.950 Manganese sesqui-oxide (Mn203) .. 2.341 Phosphoric oxide (P205) 2.804 Sulphuric oxide (S03) 0.277 Lime (CaO) 1.680 Magnesia (MgO) 0.591 Water (H2Oj 11.890 Sum 99.853 In the above there were Metallic Iron 46.900 " Manganese 0.815 Sulphur 0. 1 10 Phosphorus , 1.224 * Average of three determinations. 18F5.1 4U4 [Frazer. The following is the result of an analysis of the Mumper mine in the Mesozoic sandstone, one mile north-east of Dillsburg (C, p. 71.) P. C. Ferrous oxide (FeO) 18.643 Ferric oxide (Fe203) 42.100 Pyrites (FeS2) 4.093 Copper sulphide (CuS) 0.093 Cobalt sulphide (CoS) 0.766 Alumina (A1203) 2.417 Manganese sesqui-oxide (Mn208) 0.186 Lime(CaO) 6.132 Magnesia (MgO) 6.738 Potash and Soda 0.350 Phosphoric oxide (P205) 0.052 Sulphuric oxide (S03) 0.119 Carbonic acid (C02) 1.760 Water(EI20) 1.080 Silica (Si02) 15.120 Sum 99.654 Metallic Iron. 45.880 " Manganese 0.129 Magnetic Oxide of Iron 59.040 Ferric oxide 1.703 Sulph ur 2. 680 Phosphorus 0.023 Note 4. In MM, p. 344, Prof. Lesley gives some analyses which derive their interest from the fact that they are very numerous, and all froin a comparatively small thickness in the Walton limestone quarry opposite Harrisburg. His paper in the Am. Phil. Soc. was presented Dec. 20, 1877, but the article just referred to is dated June 23, 1879. From analysis of 115 layers of the limestone exposed in the quarry, it appears P. C. That the Carbonate of Lime constituted 80.662 " " " " Magnesia constituted 14.215 The insoluble residue constituted 4.715 Those proportions will give a better idea Of the average constitution of the good merchantable York and Cumberland limestone than any number of scattered analyses. Prof. Lesley's attempt to ascertain a connection between a given horizon and a constant proportion of the carbonates of lime and magnesia to each other may have been suggested b}r some analy- ses which I had published previously with the same end in view (See CC, p. 307), in 1875. Frazer.] 40o Tlie analyses made by myself are as follows : [Dec. 4, No. 1. From the west branch of Creitz's creek, near Wrightsville. No. 2. Upper bench ot Pine Grove quarry. No. 3. Lower " " " " No. 4. White limestone 100 yards east of Beeler's Cross roads, 2 miles W. by N. of York. No. 5. Was from Detweiler's quarry, N. W. of Wrightsville. No. G. " " " " S. of Wrightsville. Specific Gravity 2.832 Insoluble Siliceous residue 4.400 Alumina and Ferric . oxide 1.170 Carbonate of Lime . . 49.920 " of Magne sia j 42.980 Sulphur 0.220 No. 1. Sum 198.690 No. 2. 2.735 12.270 1.540 75.320 10.750 0.120 100.000 No. 3. 2.731 12.000 No. 4. No. 5. 2.750 2.737 3.570! 0.490 0.450' 0.210 1.440 81.617 91.5801 91.400 6.400| 4.110 0.422 0.113 100.489:99.583 No. 6. 2.770 41.710 6.350 Av. 2.759 6.546 0.962 43.728,72.260 7.290' 6.4501 12.996 0.003 1.480' 0.175 100.623 99.718 99.850 Note 5. Mr. A. S. McCreath's analysis of the coal referred to is as fol- lows : P. C. Volatile Organic Matter 18.482 Water 4.310 Fixed Carbon (by loss) 74.358 Sulphur 0.528 Ash . . . , 2.322 Sum 100. 000 Eating this coal according to the system proposed by me in a paper in the Trans. Am. Inst, of Min. Eng. and subsequently published as part ot report MM, the p. c. Carbon is to the p. c. Volatile Hydro Carbon : : 80.1 : 19.9 and the "Fuel Ratio " would be 4 or within the range proposed for the bituminous coals : (5 to 0). *No. G not counted in the average. 1885.] 40 J IFrazer. Note 6. The following is an analysis by Dr. Genth of the Trap (Dolerite) clyke, which crosses Beeler's farm two miles S. "W. of York. P. C. Silicic oxide 52.53 Phosphoric oxide 0.15 Titanic oxide 0. 32 Alumina 14.35 Ferric oxide 5.93 Ferrous oxide 5.45 Manganous oxide (trace) Magnesia 7.99 Lime 10.27 Lithia (faintest trace) Soda 1.87 Potash 0.92 Copper (t race) Sulphur 0.08 Ignition 1-23 101.04 By a mineralogical analysis of the results (C, p. 123 &) it appears that there are two molecules of labradorite and one of pyroxene which to- gether essentially make up this rock. Note 7. In a volume entitled " The Azoic system and its proposed sub- divisons," by J. D. Whitney and M. E. Wadsworth, printed as a Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College in August, 1884, but which might well serve as a type of all that a scientific memoir ought not to be, the authors are pleased to dispose of the work on the Archaean rocks of this State as if it were entirely due to four persons representing all grades of experience, and various dates of activity from 1858 to 1880. The two elder and better known of the lour are waved aside osfensibly because they are unreliable, in that they have modified their views, or did not feel justified in drawing sharp divisions on the map which were supported only by a high degree of probability. The younger and less generally known of these, though nowhere claiming to have solved the problem of sequence, are given a prominence which contrasts strangely with their own modest words. The mystery is, how- ever, explained when we observe that the views of Prof. Rogers and Dr. Hunt do not accord with those of the authors of the volume, whereas Mr. Charles E. Hall leans towards the view that the mica schists of the Phila- delphia group, the South Valley Hill rocks, &c, are well within, if not high up in the Palaeozoic column ; and Prof. Prime's merit in the eyes of these authors appears to be that he has differed with Dr. Hunt as to the age of the rocks in a certain mine in Berks county. The PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 2z. PRINTED JUNE 11, 1886. Frazer.l 410 [Dec. 4, 1885. many sections across the crystalline rocks of the South mountain and the hills and plains of Adams, York, Lancaster and Chester counties, with the evidence they contain of the pre-Palseozoic age of these rocks, which were published in Vols. C, CC and CCC, and Ihe part of C4 which Prof. Lesley has permitted to appear as it was written, are easier to ignore than to invalidate. It is not necessary to characterize the conduct of authors who, professing to discuss a subject in the interest of truth, and filling pages of their books, as well as parts of their index, with unjust imputations on the truthfulness and reliability of a geo- logist whose services to his science are recognized throughout the world, give an example of their own possession of this virtue by suppressing all that does not happen to coincide with their own peculiar views, but which (to compensate for this) forms by far the larger part of the literature on the subject. Profs. Whitney and Wadsworth quote Mr. C. E. Hall's paper in the Am. Phil. Soc.'s Proc. of 1880, but do not allude to the criticism of those views in the A. P. S.'s Proc. for Dec, 1882, nor even quote their author's summary of his maturer views printed in part of C4. In the criticism of the views expressed in C6 (which are virtually the same as those read before the A. P. S. and quoted at length) the author was supported at the time by Prof. Lesley (see "The Horizon of the South Valley Hill rocks in Pennsylvania"), and the structure on which he based his argument had received the endorsement of Profs. Gosselet and Barrois on the assumption of the facts of dip, &c, about which there was no dis- pute. Thesection at "Gulf Mills," on which Mr. Hall relied (C6. p. 32) for his structure, is shown in the above paper, where it is independently given, to have been so drawn by Mr. Hall that eveiy synclinal is in reality an anticlinal and vice versa, and this is confirmed by a later section pub- lished in the transactions of the A. A. A. S. of the Philadelphia meeting in 1884. Further information on this subject may be found in the "Theses presentees a la Faculte des Sciences de Lille," "Reply to a paper entitled Notes on the Geology of Chester county and vicinity" (Journal of the Franklin Institute, April, 1884) and "Review of C4" (American Natural- ist, October, 1883). by the writer. Those who would discuss the Archaean of Southeastern Pennsylvania without reference to the lessons to be learned from the South mountain in Franklin, Cumberland, Adams and York counties, or the great flat Tocquan anticlinal of Southwestern Lancaster are incompetent to do so either from ignorance of the facts or from a disingenuous desire to sup- press them. May 7, 1886.] 4^1 [Gatschet. THE BEOTHUK INDIANS. By Albert S. Gatschet. Second Article. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 7, 1886.) ROBINSON'S VOCABULARIES. Since the publication of the first article on the Beothuk Indians (Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc'y, 1885, pp. 408-424), I was so fortunate as to obtain two further vocabularies of their language, which yielded a number of terms not contained in the collections previously used. Both were writ- ten down by Capt. Hercules Robinson, of the vessel "The Favorite." One of these is contained in R. M. Martin's History of Nova Scotia, Cape Breton, etc., London, Whittaker & Co., 1837. 16mo (364 pages); a book which forms volume sixth of the same author's: "The British Colonial Library, etc.," published by Bohn in 16mo. Mr. Martin ex- tracted this vocabulary of ninety words, which stands on pp. 299-301, from the journal of Captain Robinson, and to Mr. Martin the original, from which he copied, had been loaned by the "late Secretary to the Royal Geographical Society;" cf. pp. 238,269. In Martin's text, Robin- son states "that he gathered a vocabulary of Beothuk from Mary March after her capture in 1818," and that in his "paper" he inserted only "the most prominent words collected from her." In this statement are con- tained at least two falsehoods. Mary March was not captured in 1818, but in 1819, and Leigh's and Robinson's printed vocabularies are either copied from a common source, or Robinson, who never saw Mary March, copied from Leigh, which is more probable. The ending -ue (in one nume- ral and elsewhere) is incorrect, Leigh showing the correct form in -uc, -uk ; cf. nine, wind, rain, body. An incorrect form is also contained in Robinson's terms for eye, watch, teeth (there is no / in Beothuk) and per- haps in arrow. But he may be more correct than Leigh in terms like chin, iron, tickle, shoulders, although both are rivalizing in their lack of philologic accuracy. Many terms of this list agree with those in my alphabetic list previously published, and in that case have been omitted. Whenever they agree with the first, but not with the second or third in order of the terms in the previous list, they were omitted also. Enumer- ated in the alphabetic order of the Beothuk terms in my previous list, the excluded words are as follows : cat, feathers, leg, singing, to bite, to lie down, duck, man, egg, oil, knee, to sleep, mouth, eyebrow, tongue, arms, wolf, elbow, ear, ice, nails, I thank you, to swim, salmon, to kiss, husband. At present, no trace can be found of Captain Robinson's manuscript in the library of the Royal Geographical Society, as I have been informed by its courteous secretary, Mr. Clements R. Markham. Concerning the list of terms Mr. Markham writes substantially as follows : "From 1830 to 1836 Gatschet.] 41J [May 7, the Secretary of the R. G-. S. was Capt. A. Maconochie of the Navy, when he emigrated to Tasmania (died there, 1861). He took an interest in philology and I think the vocabulary of Beothuk must have belonged to him personally, and not to the Society." The other vocabulary of Capt. Robinson I have obtained through the kindness of Mr. James P. Howley. Having ascertained that there was in the library of the British Museum a pamphlet entitled, "A History of Mary March (Waunathoake), together with a vocabulary of the Boethuck Language," Mr. Howley had it carefully copied by one of his brothers, then stopping in the British metropolis. The description of Mary March etc., contained in it is from memory, for the paper winds up as follows : " I have written these notes from the recollection of conversations with Mr. Leigh, at Harbor Grace, several weeks ago, and I regret that I neg- lected to note them before many interesting particulars had escaped my memory. Hercules Robinson, H. M. Ship "Favorite;" at sea, November 7th, 1820." The Captain remarks, that the woman showed a remarkable aptitude to obtain a knowledge of English, and her powers of mimicry were so acute she either understood or conveyed her meaning by signs when language failed her, with great calmness. To conclude from this that Robinson saw Mary March himself, would be entirely wrong, for the date of November 7, 1820, does not agree with that of her presence at St. John's ; nor is the vocabulary in the pamphlet anything else but a hasty copy of Leigh's collection, with a few additional words obtained from that clergyman. Its 133 terms are reproduced in full below ; wherever there are two terms, the one copied from the Robinson pamphlet in London stands second in order. Whether Capt. Robinson has copied the same vocabulary which "White- way, the pilot of St. John's, Newfoundland, afterwards loaned to Rev. Lloyd (see Lloyd's first article, p. 23) or another, the chief merit of his two printed collections is that of confirming the fact, that Leigh's vocabu- lary was really obtained from Mary March, for Robinson's paper is dated three years before Nancy was brought to St. John's. ROBINSON'S VOCABULARIES COMBINED. abidemasheek hake-apple ; the New- aparita bedesook sunken seal (prob- foundland name of a wild fruit. ably : aparit abedesook). abidish martin-cat, marten. awoodet singing. abodoesic/owr. abkashamesh boy. abodonee bonnet. barodiisick thunder. abusthibit to kneel. bathue ; bathuc rain. adadiminte spoon. beatathunt gunpowder. adasic two. bedesook seal. adiab wood. bedisoni ; bedesoni sword. adothe boat, vessel. begodor heart. agamot buttons ; money. begomot ; begomat breast. amamoose woman. besdic smoke. 1886.] 413 [Galsohet. bethic necklace. bethiote good "night. bigadosic six. bobbodish pigeon. bobidigimidic berries. bocbodza teeth K. Boeothik ; Beuthook Red Indian. bofomet outhermayet ; bogornet ou- thermayet teeth. boodowit duck. borocl and wieitb lightning (one of these words perhaps lighting). budiseet dancing. bukashaman man. bukashauiesh boy. bushudite to bite. coish ; ooish lip. corrasoob ; conasoob sorrow. debine egg. dedoneet saw, subst. dogemat ; digemat arrow. dronna hair. ebautho ; ebauthe or ebanthe water. edrathu comb. edree otter. emamooset girl. ejibiduish silk handkerchief. eniet oil. emoethuk dogwood; the Newfound- land name for the mountain ash, which in Canada is called Rowan tree (Howley). enano go out. ethewwit/orA. gadgemish rat. gasset stockings. gathet one (numeral). gawzadun raspberries. geen nose. gewzewook or gewzenook mainland. gidgeathue wind. giggarimanet net. givinya eye. guashavet bear. gwoshuawit puffin. haddabothie body. hedyyan to stoop. hodamishit knee. hosket/«M (verb?). • hothamashet to run. howmeshet ducks and drakes. iedesheet ; idesheet neck and throat. ibeath, ibemite to yawn. ihingyam clothes. isedoweet sleep. itweena thigh; not thumb, q. v. izzobauth blood. japathook canoe. yeothodue ; yeothoduc nine. kaduishnite tickle; Howley's copy has sickle. keauthut gonothin head. kius moon. kooret ! kooset ! come hither! kuis sun. madyna leaves. mammasmeet dog. mammateek house. mammausheek islands. mammasameet puppies. mameshuadet drawing knife. mamoose ichortleberries. mangarewius sun. manovorit blankets. matheothuc to cry. matheuis hammer. memasuck tongue. memayet arms. memet hand. methic dirt. moidewsee cold (for comb? cf. moidensu). moisamadrook wolf. momezemethon shoulders. moocus elbow. moosin shoes. mooshaman ear. moo weed trousers. mowazeenite ; mouarzeenite iron. mudyrat hiccough. mushabauth oakum. nethabeat cattle. Gatschet.] 414: [May 7, nijik; nijick _/?£«. shebathoont trap. odeiisook goose. shebohoweet woodpecker. odisi^it to cut. shedsic three. odosook seven. shegamet to blow the nose. odoit eat. toun chin. odoosook eight. theant ten. oothook tinker. thingaya hatchet. osuk ; osuck wife. thoowidgee swimming. osweet deer. traunasoo spruce. ozeru ice. uine knife. peatha fur. uvin hop. pigatbu scab. wasemook salmon. poodybeat oar. washewiush moon. pooetb thumb. wood rat fire. possont back. woothyat ; woothyot to walk. quisb ; guisb nails. zosueet ptarmigan (Lagopus al- ruis; k ius watch. bus); in Newfoundland called sbamye currants. partridge. ADDITIONAL HISTORIC REMARKS. Before entering upon the discussion concerning the Beothuk language, I add a few historic remarks which have suggested themselves since com- pleting the first article. The tradition is generally credited, that Conception Bay received its name from Cortereal, and that therefore that navigator must have visited the Newfoundland coast. Whitbourne annually visited the island from about 1580 and wrote a book : "The Discovery of the Newfoundlande " in 1622. The Baron de la Hontan, who in bis younger years had been Lord Lieutenant of the French colony at Placentia in Newfoundland, does not mention the name of the Beothuks in his "Voyages." About 1690 he wrote : "The Eskimaux cross over to the Island of Newfound Land every day, at the Streight of Belle Isle ; but they never come so far as Placentia, for fear Of meeting with other savages there" (I, 210; Engl, translat. of 1735). "There are no settled savages in the Island of Newfound Land " (I, 226). He had seen Eskimos previously on Lower St. Lawrence River, northern shore. The Jesuit author Charlevoix stales (1721) that no other Indians but Eskimos have ever been seen upon Newfoundland (Journal, Letter xi). From this it follows, that the Beothuks must have confined themselves at that time to tracts distant from white settlements, unless the French would have heard of them. The archa?ologic research after Boethuk dwellings, implements, skeletons and other remains has been diligently prosecuted ever since Cormack's expeditions. Relics have been found even on Funk's Island, about thirty miles northeast of the nearest point upon the mainland, and their usual wintering place seems to have been the Exploits River. The most com- 1886.] 415 [Gatschet. preliensive sketch of all the explorations is contained in Lloyd's articles. Newfoundland has a population of about 120,000, which is exclusively- settled upon the sea shore. The Hudson's Bay Company uses all ils influ- ence to prevent the settling of the fertile lands in the interior of the vast island, for this would reduce the abundance of game and fur animals in those parts, which are the stock in trade of that monopoly. The same exclusive policy* is pursued by lhat Company in the wide territories west and northwest of Lake Superior, and with such success, that the Riel rebellion, or so-called "half-breed war" of 1885 was the immediate out- come of it. The existence of agricultural settlements in the interior of Newfoundland would greatly facilitate and promote all researches concern- ing the relics of the mysterious aborigines who are now occupying our attention. For several reasons it is surmised that Mr. W. E. Cormack took from Shanandithit a much more extensive list of vocables than the one I have obtained through Mr. Howley, which contains only the Beothuk numer- als, month-names and terms corresponding to English words with initial A and B. Researches made in England and on Newfoundland failed to reveal any trace of an ampler collection. From Rennie, a half brother of Cormack still living at St. John's, Mr. Howley gathered the following information : Cormack was educated in Edinburgh under the auspices of the late Prof. Jamieson, resided in .Newfoundland till 1829, afterwards carried on a mercantile business in Victoria, Vancouver's Island as the partner of Mr. Nuttall, and died there single, about 1875 or 1877. Mrs. Scott, his sister, died in England in 1884 at a very advanced age. The late Judge Des Barres of St. John's was vice-president of the Boeothik In- stitute previously referred to, and in Cormack's time took great interest in all his efforts to acquire information on the Red Indians. That Cormack sent his vocabulary, relics and some drawings to a Dr. Yates in England, is stated by himself in his "Notes;" nothing else i3 known concerning his papers and effects. The original of Mary March's vocabulary, taken down by Rev. Leigh, printed with many copyist's errors and since recopied by Mr. Howley, is now in possession of Rev. William Pilot. The final k in the printed copies is a t in most of the verbs in the manuscript. Concerning Ihe localities on Newfoundland which were the principal haunts of the Micmac Indians, Ph. Tocque, Newfoundland (pg. 506), has the following : The Micmacs have wigwams similar to those of the Red Indians. Several families were in Clode Sound, at the head of Bona- vista Bay (48° 30', eastern coast); the last family there was lost in 1841. North of that, others were at Notre Dame Bay ; 60 persons belonging to the Micmacs resided at Bay Despair and in the various parts of Fortune *The mercantile principles followed by the Hudson's Bay Company have re- mained the same throughout its historic existence and maybe studied from the pages of Arthur Dobbs' "Account of the countries adjoiuing to Hudson's Bay," London, 1744. Gatscbet.] 410 [May 7, Bay, in the south of the island. On his expedition, Mr. Cormack saw Micmac Indians in the south-west between King George the Fourth's Pond and St. George's Bay. Although the Micmacs resided chiefly on the west side, there were many points on which they came in hostile (or friendly?) contact with the Red Indians, whose most frequented haunts seem to have been in the east and north of the island. ADDITIONAL NOTES BY MR. HOWLEY. In various books about Newfoundland many misstatements were pub- lished about Shanandithit and her family. The facts are as follows : Shanandithit in 1823 took refuge with the white people, with her mother and sister, and at that time was about twenty-three years old. She learnt what she knew of English from Peyton's family, in whose house she staid at St. John's. Her sister died shortly after coming to St. John's, and her mother, who is described as a morose old hag, died a year or two after, about fifty years old, having never returned to her tribe. Only during the last winter of her life (1828-29), Shanandithit lived in Mr. Cormack's house. The emblems or figures drawn by her (represented in Article First) were called mythological emblems by Cormack, perhaps without sufficient reasons ; Dr. Dawson regards them all as the totems of gentes. The blue jay, whose feathers served for striking sparks, was not the Corvus canadensis, but Cyanocilta cristata, quite common on the west side of the island. The puffin or sea parrot is the Fratercula arctica of Linne. The sea pigeon is the black guillemot, Urea grylle [The Amer. Ornith. Union Check List of 1886, has Cepplms grylle, or Black Guillemot]. Blackbird. The robin, T'urdus migratorius, is there called blackbird. Capelan, a fish, is Mallotus villosus. Ticklas is the kittiwake gull : liissa tridactyla. (Cibo, local name near Cape Breton, is the Micmac term : shibu river.) REMARKS ON THE VOCABULARIES. The precarious condition in which the words of the Beothuk language have come down to us, is due to several causes which have to be fully recognized before inquiries upon the language itself can be undertaken and variant readings reduced to their original forms. This confusion has had the following causes : Indistinct handwriting has caused the uncertainty which in many words exists between n and h, r (ct.fork), v and r, g and y, b and t (cf. trap), ck and ek, t and/ (in: botomet), between the capitals B and R (cf. six) and the final -k and -t in Leigh's vocabulary. Even among us, people of a low degree of education always write n like u, and the same thing was done by some copyists of the Beothuk vocabularies. Faulty copying was the immediate consequence of indistinct chirography. 1886.] 41 i [Gatschet. The use of the Roman letters with the value they have in the English alphabet. This alphabet is wholly preposterous, even for English itself, and much more so for any foreign, especially illiterate languages. If the authors had been more accurate in their transcription of the words re- ceived, they would not have used ch sometimes for /, at other times for tch ; cf. the numerals 2, 13. Instances where the authors failed to hear sounds with sufficient accu- racy ; cf. cattle (p. 421). Insufficiency of the knowledge of English on the side of the two female informants; cf. the mistaking of wet for lohite. It appears that several terms were obtained not by putting questions, but by making gestures ; in many vocabularies of other languages this has become a fruitful source of errors. Compare the term obtained for islands with that for ship, vessel (mamashee), and mouth with tongue. The want of distinction between the noun and verb in English often causes grammatic confusion, as in the case of lead, sleep, scratch, etc. Moreover, the verb is sometimes placed in the participle, sometimes in the infinitive, especially in Rev. Leigh's vocabulary. A few other remarks referring to the present condition of the vocabu- laries are as follows : In several terms the initial sound has been dropped, either through in- accurate hearing or incompetency of the copyists : osweet for kosweet deer, ewis for kewis watch, cf. also obosheen with boobasha, oosuck with woas-sut, eesheet with mamesheet. Instances of contraction by synizesis, ellipsis, etc., are not unfrequent : a'shoging from ashwoging arrow ; bedoret from bogodoret heart ; shuco- dimit from shucododimet "Indian cup." The month-names were obtained by Cormack and are partly misspelt and faulty. It is very doubtful to me that April, June and September were all called by the same term, the two final syllables of which contain the word yaseek one, perhaps signifying one and first. But in American languages two successive Indian moons are often observed to possess the same name, as we see it done here in the case of October and November, whose names coincide pretty closely. GRAMMATIC ELEMENTS. Phonetics. The points deducible with some degree of certainty from the very im- perfect material on hand may be summed up as follows, the sounds being represented in my own scientific alphabet, in which all vowels have the European continental value : Vowels : a a e a o i I u ii Diphthongs : ai, ei in by-yesh birch, madyrut hiccough ; oi in moisamad- rook wolf; ou, au in ge-oun chin; oe may indicate 6 : emoethook (?), etc. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 3A. PRINTED JUNE 12, 1886. Gatschet-1 Consonants . Explosives : surd sonant Gutturals : k g Palatals : tch dsh Linguals : Dentals : t d Labials : P b 418 [May 7, Sounds of duration : Aspirates Spirants Nasals Trills th y cl sh r, 1 s, z u w, (v ?) m The sound expressed by 1th in adolthtek, adolthe boat I have rendered by 81, the palatalized 1, which is produced by holding the tip of the tongue against the alveolar or foremost part of the palate. It appears in many American, but not in Algonkin languages. The sound dr, tr in adamadret, adamatret gun, drona hair, edru otter and other terms is probably a peculiar sound, and not a mere combination of d(t) with r. The articulation dth seems distinct from the aspirate th of the English language ; it occurs in dthoonanyen hatchet, dthoonut ten, used in form- ing the decade in the terms for twenty, thirty, etc. (cf. theant and shansee ten). Perhaps it is th pronounced with an explosive effort of the vocal organ. X is rendered in our lists by gh and sometimes by ch, as in yaseech one, drone-ooch hairs, maduch to-morrow. ts, ds are unfrequent or do not occur at all. sch in deschudodoick to Moid and other terms is probably our sk. / does not occur in Beothuk, but is found in Micmac vocabularies ; per- haps it would be better to have rendered there that sound by v'h, w'h and not by /, for other Algonkin dialects show no trace of it. I is unfrequent and found, as an initial sound, only in the term lathun trap. Whether r is our rolling r or not is difficult to determine. th often figures as a terminal, but more frequently as an initial and medial sound. Consonants are frequently found geminated in our lists, but this is chiefly due to the graphic method of English writers, who habitually geminate them to show that the preceding vowel is short in quantity : cf. dattomeish, haddabothic, immamooset, massooch. The language exhibits the peculiarity not unfrequently observed through- out America, that final syllables generally end in consonants and the pre- ceding syllables in vowels. Accumulations of consonants occur, but are not frequent; e.g. carmtack lo speak, Mamjaesdoo, nom. pr. The majority of all syllables not final consists of a consonant followed by a vowel, or diphthong. Too little information is on hand to establish any general rules for the accentuation. None of the accented words are oxytonized, but several have the antepenult emphasized : bashedtheek, askwoging, dosomite ; the term ejabathook has the accent still further removed from the final 1886.] 41 J [Gatschet. syllable. Very likely the accent could in that language shift, as in other languages of America, from syllable to syllable, whenever rhetorical reaeons required it. By some of the collectors the signs for length and brevity were used to designate the emphasized syllable, placed above or underneath the vowels. * Alternation of sounds, or spontaneous permutation of the guttural, labial, etc., sounds without any apparent cause, is traceable here as well as in all other illiterate languages. Thus the consonantic sounds produced in the same position of the vocal organs are observed to alternate between : g and k : buggishaman, bukashaman man, etc. g and y : bogomot, boghmoot breast. g and h : buggishamesh, buhashamesh boy; bogathoowytch to kill, buha- shauwite to beat. tch and sh : mootchiman, mooshaman ear. dsh and s, sh : wadshoodet, washoodiet to slioot. r and d : merobeesh, madabeesh thread, twine. t and d : tapathook, dapathook canoe. t and th : meotick, mae-adthike house; mattic, mathick stinking. d and th : ebanthoo, ebadoe water. th and z : nunj'etheek, ninezeek five. th and s, sh : mamud-thuk, memasook tongue; thamook, shamook capelan. s and z : osenyet, ozegeen scissors. s and sh : mamset, mamishet alive; bobboosoret, baubooshrat codfish. p and b : shapoth, shaboth candle. In regard to vowels, the inaccurate transmission of the words does not give us any firm hold ; still we find alternation between : a and o : bogomat, bogomot breast; dattomeish, dottomeish trout. a and e : baasick, bethec beads. oi and ei : boyish, by-yeech birch. Morphology. The points to be gained for the morphology of Beothuk are more scanty still than what can be obtained for reconstructing its phonology, and for the inflection of its verb we are entirely in the dark. Substantive. The most frequent endings of substantives are -k and -t, and a few only, like drona hair, end in a vowel. Whether the substan- tive had any inflection for case or not, is not easy to determine ; we find however, that maemed hand is given for the subjective, meeman (in m. monasthus to shake hands) for the objective case ; in the same manner nechwa and neechon tobacco, mameshook and mamudthun mouth. Other terms in -n are probably worded in the objective or some other of the oblique cases : ewinon feather, magorun deer's horns, mooshaman ear, ozegeen scissors, shedothun sugar. Cf. the two forms for head. A plural is traceable in the substantives deyn-yad bird, deyn-yadrook birds; odizeet, pi. odensook goose, drona, pi. drone-ooch hair; and to judge Gatschet.1 420 [May 7( from analogy, the following terms may possibly be worded in the plural form : marmeuk eyebroic(s), messiliget-hook bab(icsf), moisamadrook wol(ves?), berroich clouds, ejabathook sails. Compare also edot fishing line, adotliook fish hook; the latter perhaps a plural of the former. The numer- als 7, 8, 9 also show a suffix -uk, -ook. * Adjectives are exhibiting formative suffixes of very different kinds gosset and gausep dead, gasook dry, boos- seek blunt, homedich good, ass-soyt angry, eeshang-eyghth blue, ashei lean. The phrase shedbasing wathik upper arm would seem to show, that the adjective, when used attributively, precedes the noun which it qualifies. The numerals of our list are all provided with the suffix -eek or -ook ; what remains in the numerals from one to ten, is a monosyllable, except in the instance of six and nine. Yaseek is given as one and as first (in the term for April),* but whether there was a series of real ordinals we do not know. Compound nouns. A few terms are recognizable as compound nouns, and in them the determinative precedes the noun qualified : wash-geuis moon, lit. : "night-sun." bobbiduish-emet lamp; probably : "fire-oil." kaesin-guinyeet blind; probably for "dry on eyes." moosin-dgej-jebursiit ankle; contains moosin moccasin. adasweet-eeshamut December; contains odusweet hare, rabbit. aguathoonet grinding stone; probably contains ahune stone in the initial agu-, agua-. No pronouns whatever could be made out with any degree of proba- bility. Concerning the verbal inflection we are almost entirely without reliable dates, nor do we know anything concerning the subjective and objective pronouns necessarily connected with conjugational forms. (1.) Verbs mentioned in the participle -ing or in the infinitive gener- ally end in -t and -k. -t: amshut to get up, awoodet singing, bituwait to lie down, cheashit to groan, marot to smell, kingiabit to stand, washoodiet to shoot. -k: carmtack to speak, deschudodoick to blow, ebathook to drink, odishuik to cut. (2.) Imperative forms, to judge from the English translation, are the following : deiood ! come with us ! dyoom ! come hither ! dyoot thouret ! come hither ! (Tlob. kooret ! kooset !) nadyed you come back (?) cockab6set ! no fear ! do not be afraid ! bobathoowytch ! beat him! deh-hemin ! give me ! (3.) Participial forms are probably represented by : amet aicake, gosset and gausep dead, apparet sunken (Rob. aparit. ) * Perhaps also in June, July, September. 1886.] 4J1 [Gatschet. (4.) The first person of the singular is, according to the interpretation, contained in the vocables : ajeedick or vieedisk Hike. boochauwit 1 am hungry, cf. dauosett. a-oseedwit I am ileepy, cf. bootzhawet sleep, isedoweet to sleep. thine I thank you. Cf. what was said of betheoate.* (5.) Other personal forms of singular or plural are probably embodied in the terms : pokoodoont, from odoit to eat. ieroothack, jeroothack speak, from carmtack to speak. becket ? where do you, go ? boobasha, cf. obosheen warming yourself. (6.) Forms in -p and -ss, if not misspelt, occur in : athep, athess to sit down, gamyess get up, gausep dead. (7.) No conclusive instance of reduplication as a means of inflection or derivation occurs in any of the terms transmitted, though we may compare wawashemet, p. 4'23, Nonosabasut, nom. pr. Is mammateek a reduplication of meotick? Derivation. Derivatives and the mode of derivation are easier to trace in this insular language than other grammatic processes. Although the existence of prefixes is not certain as yet, derivation through suffixes can be proved by many instances, and there was probably a large number of suffixes, sim- ple and compound, in existence. Some of the suffixes were mentioned above, and what may be considered as "prefixes (?)" will be treated of separately. Suffix -eesh; -eech, -ish forms diminutive nouns : mammusemitch puppy, from mamasameet dog. mossessdeesh Indian boy. buhashamesh boy, from bukashaman man. woaseesh Indian girl, from woas-sut Indian woman. shuwiinyish small vessel, from shuwan bucket, cup. mandeweech bushes (?) ; hanyees finger. Probably the term yeech short is only deduced from the above instances of diminutives, and had no separate existence for itself. -eet, a frequently occurring nominal suffix : a-eshemeet lumpfish, deddoweet saw, gaboweete breath, kosweet deer, kusebeet louse, methabeet cattle, shebohoweet woodpecker, sheedenee- sheet cocklebur, sosheet bat, tedesheet neck, wobesheet sleeve, proba- bly from wobee white, Also occurring as a verbal ending, cf. above ; hence, it is possible that the nouns in eet are simply nomina verbalia of verbs in -eet, -it. *The Algonkin na-, nu-, n- of the first person occurs in none of these exam- ples. Gatschet,] *&a [May 7, ■k, a suffix found in verbs and nouns : ebanthook to drink, from ebanthoo water. obesedeek gloves, perhaps (if not plural form) from obosheen, q. v. Verbs in -k were mentioned supra ; -ook forms plurals of substan- tives, also numerals ; in Micmac the suffix for the plural of animates is -uk, -k, for inanimates -ul, -1 ; in Abnaki-ak,-al. -m occurs in nouns like dingyam clothes, lathum (?) trap, woodum pond ; also in ibadinnam, jewmetchem, etc. ■n, suffix of objective case and of many substantives. ■ oret, nominal suffix in bobboosoret codfish, bogodoret heart, manaboret blanket, oodrat fire, shawatharott man. •uit, -wit occurs in kadimishuite tickle, ethenwit fork, mondicuet lamp, Demasduit, nom. pr., guashuwit bear ; also in sundry verbs. -ut occurs in nouns : woas-sut Indian woman, mokothut fish-species, madyrut hiccough. Prefixed Parts of Speech. Follows a series of terms or parts of speech, found only at the beginning of certain words. "Whether they are particles of an adverbial or prepo- sitional nature (prefixes), or fragments of nouns, was not possible for me to decide. The dissyllabic nature of some of them seems to favor a nomi- nal origin. bogo-, buka-: bogodoret, abbr. bedoret heart. bogomat breast. bogathoowytch to kill, beat. bukashaman man. buggishamesh boy. shema bogosthuc moskito. ee- is the prefix of numerals in the decad from 11 to 19. hada-, ada-, hoda-, odo-, od- is found in terms for tools, implements, parts of the animal body ; a is easily confounded with o by English-speak- ing people. haddabothic body, hadabatheek belly ' hodamishit knee, cf. hothamashet to run. hadalahet glass and glass-vase. hadowadet shovel, cf. od-ishuik to cut, and godawik. adamadret gun, rifle. adadimite spoon. ardobeesh twine ; is also spelt adobeesh (Howley). adothook fishhook. adoltkhtek, odo-othyke boat, vessel, mama-, mema-. The terms commencing with this group are all arrayed in alphabetic order on pp. 420, 421, and point to living organisms or parts of such or dwellings. 1886.] 4Zd [Gatschet. Remarks on Single Terms. For several English terms the Englisli-Beothuk vocabulary gives more than one equivalent, even when only one is expected. With some of their number the inference is, that one of these is Beothuk, while the other is borrowed from an alien language. Thus we have : devil ashmudyim, haoot. comb edrathu, moidensu. hammer iwish, mattuis. money agamet, beodet. The fact that agamet also means button finds a parallel in the Creek language, where the term for bead, ^o'nawa, /o'nap, forms also the one for coined money : tchatu yo'nawa, "stone bead" or "metal bead." bread annawhadya, manjebathook. lamp bobbiduishemet, mondicuet. star adenishit, shawwayet. grinding stone aguathoonet, shewthake. shovel godawik, hadowadet. trap lathun, shabathoobet. See also the different terms for cup (vessel), spear, wife, feather, boy, rain, to hear, etc. Concerning the term trap, one of the terms may be the noun, the other the verb {to trap). Terms traceable to alien languages will be considered below. The term for cat is evidently the same with that for seal and marten, the similarity of their heads being suggestive for name-giving. In the term for cat, abideshook, a prefix a- appears, for which I find no second instance in the lists ; abidish is, I think, the full form of the singular, for all the three animals. Of the two terms for fire, boobeshawt means tchat is warming, cf. boo- basha warm, and oodrat is the proper term for fire. Smoke and gunpowder are expressed by the same word in many Indian languages ; here, the one for gunpowder, baasothnut, is a derivative of basdic smoke. The muskito, shema bogosthuc, is described as a black fly. Whadicheme in King's vocabulary means to kill. Beothik as name for man, Indian and Red Indian is probably more cor- rect than the commonly used Beothuk. botomet onthermayet probably contains a whole sentence. The term for hill, keoosock, kaasook is probably identical with keathut head. Eeshamut appears in the names for December and January ; signification unknown. ETHNIC POSITION OF THE BEOTHUK. The most important result to be derived from researches on the Beothuk people and language must be the solution of the problem, whether they Gatschet.] ^Z4 [May 7, formed a race for themselves and spoke a language independent of any other, or are racially and linguistically linked to other nations or tribes. Our means for studying their racial characteristics are very scanty. No accurate measurements of their bodies are on hand, a few skulls only are left as tangible remnants of their bodily existence (described by George Rusk ; cf. p. 413). Their appearance, customs and manners, lodges and canoes seem to testify in favor of a race separate from the Algonkins and Eskimos around them, but are too powerless to prove anything. Thus we have to rely upon language alone to get a glimpse at their origin or earliest condition. A comparison with the Labrador and Greenland limit language, com- monly called Eskimo, has yielded to me no term resting on real affinity. The Greenlandish attausek one, and B. yaseek one agree in the suffix only. R. G. Latham has adduced some parallels of Beothuk with Tinne" dia- lects, especially with Taculli, spoken in the Rocky Mountains. But he does not admit such rare parallels as proof of affinity, and in historic times at least, the Beothuks dwelt too far from the countries held by Tinne Indians to render any connection probable. Not the least affinity is traceable between Beothuk and Iroquois voca- bles, nor does the phonology of the two yield any substantial points of equality. Tribes of the Iroquois stock once held the shores of the St. Lawrence river down to the environs of Quebec, perhaps further to the northeast and thus lived at no great distance from Newfoundland. All that is left for us to do is to compare the sundry Algonkin dialects with the remnants of the Beothuk speech. Among these, the Micmac of Nova Scotia and parts of the adjoining mainland, the Abnaki of New Brunswick and Maine, the Naskapi of Labrador will more than others en- gross our attention, as being spoken in the nearest vicinity of Newfound- land. The first of these, Micmac, was spoken also upon the isle itself. Here as everywhere else, words growing out of the roots of the language and therefore inherent to it, have to be carefully distinguished from terms borrowed of other languages. It will be best to make here a distinction between Beothuk terms undoubtedly Algonkin in phonetics and significa- tion and other Beothuk terms, which resemble some words found in Algon- kin dialects. Words of these two categories form part of the list of duplex Beothuk terms for one English word, as given on a previous page. (1) Beothuk words also occurring in Algonkin dialects : -eesh, -ish, suffix forming diminutive nouns ; occurs in various forms in all the Eastern Algonkin dialects, mamishet ; mamseet alive, living; Micmac meemajeet, perhaps transposed from almajeet. mattuis hammer; Abnaki mattoo. mandee devil; Micmac maneetoo, Naskapi (matchi) mantuie. odemen, odemet ochre; Micmac odemen. shebon, sheebin river ; Micmac seiboo ; sibi, sipi in all Eastern Algonkin dialects for long river. 1886.1 4Jo [Gatschet. wobee white; Micm. wabaee, Naskapi waahpou, wahpoau white; also in all Eastern Alg. dialects, cf. B. wobesheet sleeve, probably for "white sleeve," and Micrnac wobun daylight. (2.) Beothuk icords resembling terms of Algonkin dialects comparable to them in phonetics and signification. Some of them were extracted from R. G. Latham's comparative list, in his Comp. Philology, pp. 453-455. bathuk rain; Micmac ikfashak, -paesuk in kiekpaesuk rain; but the other forms given in Beothuk, badoese and watshoosooch, do not agree. Cf. ebanthoo water. boobeshawt fire. The radix is boob- and hence no analogy exists with Ottawa ashkote, Abnaki skoutai and other Alg. terms for fire men- tioned by Latham. bukashaman white man, man. Affinity with Micmac wabe akecheenom white man (jaaenan man) through aphaeresis of wa- is exceedingly doubtful. Compare the Beothuk prefixed syllable bogo-. ernet oil; Abnaki pemmee, Ojibwe bimide oil; Micmac mema' oil, fat, grease. kannabuch long ; cf. the Algonkin names Kennebec, Quinnipiac long (inlet), and the Virginian cunnaivwh long (Strachey, p. 190). kewis, kuis sun, watch; watcha-gewis moon (the form kius is misspelt); Micm. nakoushet sun, topa-nakoushet moon (in Naskapi beshung, beeshoon sun and moon). The ordinary term in the Eastern Alg. lan- guages is gisis, kisus, kishis for both celestial bodies ; goos is the Mic- mac month appended to each of their month-names. magaraguis, magaragueis, mangaroouish son. Latham, supposing guis to be the portion of the word signifying son, has quoted numerous analogies, as Cree equssis, Ottawa kwis, Shawano koisso, etc., but Robinson has mangarewius sun, King has kewis, kuis sun, moon, which makes the above term very doubtful. Probably it was the re- sult of a misunderstanding ; cf. magorun deer(f), kewis sun. mamudthun mouth. Latham refers us to Abnaki madoon, Micmac toon, but Leigh has mameshook for mouth and memasook for tongue, which proves that mam-, mem- is the radix of the Beothuk word and not dthun. mamoodthuk dog, mamoosemitch puppy; Micmac alamonch, elmooche dog, elmooieek. puppies, Abnaki almoosesauk puppies (alma- in Abn. corresponds to mama- in Beothuk). manjebathook bread contains in its final part beothuk man, people ; and in its first perhaps Micmac megisee, maegeechimk to eat, mijese I eat, or the French manger, obtained through Micmac Indians. So the sig- nification would be "people's food." manus berries; Micmac minigechal berries may be compared, provided mini- is the basis of the term. moosin moccasin, meoson shoe; probably originated from Abnaki (and other Algonkin) : mkison moccasin through ellipse. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 3b. PRINTED JUNE 12, 1886. Gatschet.] 4Jb [May 7, mootchiman ear; in Algonkin dialects tawa is ear and therefore Latham is mistaken in comparing Micmac mootooween, Abnaki nootawee {my ear), muddy, mud'ti bad, dirty ; could possibly be the transformed Ottawa and Massach. word matche, Mohican matchit, Odjibwe mudji bad, quoted by Latham. Ashmudyim devil is a derivative of muddy, noduera to hear is probably the Micmac noodak I hear {him). woas-seesh girl is a derivative of woas-sut woman, and therefore affinity with the Naskapi squashish girl through aphaeresis is not probable, sehquow (s'kwa) being woman in that language. In the Micmac, epit is woman, epita-ish girl. The lists which yielded the above Algonkin terms are contained in : A. Gallatin's Synopsis, Archteologia Americana, Vol. ii, (1836); in Collections of Massachusetts Histor. Society, I. series, for 1799, where long vocabularies of Micmac, Mountaineer and Naskapi were published ; in Rev. Silas T. Rand's First Reading Book in the Micmac language, Halifax, 1875, 16mo ; also in Abnaki (Benekee) and Micmac lists sent to me by R. G. Latham and evidently taken with respect to existing Beothuk lists, for in both are mentioned the same special terms, as drawing knife, capelan, Indian cup, deer's horns, ticklas, etc. W. E. Cormack or his attendants probably took all these three vocabularies during the same year. In order to obtain a correct and unprejudiced idea of our comparative Beothuk- Algonkin lists, we have to remember that the Red Indians always kept up friendly intercourse and trade with the Naskapi or Mountaineer Indians of Labrador, and that during the first half of the eighteenth cen- tury, when Micmacs had settled upon Newfoundland, they were, according to a passage of Jukes' "Excursions," the friends of the Beothuk also. During that period the Beothuk could therefore adopt Algonkin terms into their language to some extent and such terms we would expect to be chiefly the words for tools, implements and merchandize, since these were the most likely to become articles of intertribal exchange. Thus we find in list No. 1 terms like hammer and ochre, in list No. 2 bread, 7>ioccasin and dog. We are informed that the Beothuk kept no dogs, and when they became acquinted with these animals, they borrowed their name from the tribe in whose possession they saw them first. The term mamoodthuk dog is, however, of the same root as mamishet, mamset alive, which we find again in Micmac,* and it is puzzling that the Beothuk should have had no word of their own for alive. Exactly the same remark maybe applied to wobee white and the suffixes -eesh and -ook, all of which recur in Algon- kin languages. Concerning shebon river, we recall the fact that the Dutch originally had a Germanic word for river, but exchanged it for the French riviere ; also, that the French adopted la crique from the English creek, just as they have formed bebS from English baby. The term for devil could easily be borrowed from an alien people, for deity names travel from land to land as easily as do the religious ideas themselves. The majority of * Micmac :-memaje Hive, memaJoo-5kun life. 1886.] ^i [Gatschet. these disputed terms came from Nancy, who had more opportunity to see Micmacs in St. John's than Mary March. Ir> our comparative list No. 2, most of the terms do not rest upon radical affinity, but merely on apparent or imaginary resemblance. In publishing his comparative list, Mr. Latham did not at all pretend to prove by it the affinity of Beothuk to Algonkin dialects ; for he distinctly states (p. 453) : " that it was akin to the (languages of the) ordinary American Indians rather than to the Eskimo ; further investigation showing that, of the ordinary American languages, it was Algonkin rather than aught else." In fact, no real affinity is traceable except in dog, bad and moccasin, and even here the unreliable orthography of the words preserved leaves the matter enveloped in uncertainty. The suffix -eesh and the plurals in -ook are perhaps the strongest argu- ments that can be brought forward for Algonkin affinity of Beothuk, but compared to the overwhelming bulk of words entirely differing this can- not prove anything. In going over the Beothuk list in 1882 with a clergy- man thoroughly conversant with Ojibwe, Rev. Ignatius Tomazin, then of Red Lake, Minnesota, he was unable to find any term in Ojibwe corre- sponding, except wobee white, and if gigarimanet, net, stood for fishnet, gigo was the Ojibwe term for fish. The facts which most strongly militate against an assumed kinship of Beothuk with Algonkin dialects are as follows : (1.) The phonetic system of both differs largely ; Beothuk lacks f and probably v, while 1 is scarce ; in Micmac and the majority of Algon- kin dialects th, r, dr and-cl are wanting, but occur in Beothuk. (2.) The objective case exists in Beothuk, but none of the Algonkin dia- lects has another oblique case except the locative. (3.) The numerals differ entirely in both, which would not be the case if there was the least affinity between the two. (4.) The terms for the parts of the human and animal body, for colors (except white), for animals and plants, for natural phenomena, for the celestial bodies and other objects of nature, as well as the radicals of adjectives and verbs differ completely. "When we add all this to the great discrepancy in ethnologic particulars, as canoes, dress, implements, manners and customs, we come to the conclu- sion that the Red Indians of Newfoundland must have been a race dis- tinct from the races on the mainland shores surrounding them on the North and "West. Their language I do not hesitate, after a long study of its precarious and unreliable remnants, to regard as belonging to a sepa- rate linguistic family, clearly distinct from Inuit, Tinne, Iroquois and Algonkin. Once a refugee from some part of the mainland of North America, the Beothuk tribe may have lived for centuries isolated upon Newfoundland, sustaining itself by fishing and the chase.* When we look * Linguistic stocks reduced like Beothuk to a small compass are of the high- est importance for anthropologic science. Not only do they disclose by them- selves a new side of ethnic life, but they also afford a glimpse at the former distribution of tribes, nations, races and their languages and ethnographic peculiarities. Gatschet.J 428 [May 7, around upon the surface of the globe for parallels of linguistic families relegated to insular homes, we find the Elu upon the island of Ceylon in the Indian ocean, and the extinct Tasmanian upon Tasmania island, widely distant from Australia. The Harafuru or Alfuru languages of New Guinea and vicinity, are spoken upon islands only. Almost wholly confined to islands are the nationalities speaking Malayan, Aino, Celtic, Haida and Ale-ut dialects ; only a narrow strip of territory new shows from which portion of the mainland they may have crossed over the main to their present abodes. ENGLISH-BEOTHUK VOCABULARY. afraid, to be see geswat. alive mamishet. angry a'ss-soyt. ankle moosindgei-jebursut. April wasumaweeseek. arm wa'thik ; memayet ; see also maemed, memayet Rob. arm, ■wppershedbasing wathik. arm, the whole watheekee. arrow ashwoging ; dogernat ; doge- mat Rob. ash see mountain ash. August wadawhegh. awake amet. baby messiliget-hook. back (subst.?) possont Rob. bad muddy. bake-apple abidemasheek Rob. bat sosheet. bead baasi'ck. bear guashuwit ; Rob. beat, to see bogathuowytch. beaver mamshet. belly see haddabothic. berries bibldegemMlic ; manus ; bobi- digimidic Rob. birch boyish . bird deyn-yad. bird, little obseet. bite, to bashoodite ; bushudite Rob. black mandzey. blackbird woodch. blanket manaboret ; Rob. blind kacsinguinyeet. blood ashaboo-uth ; izzobauth Rob. blow, to deschudodoick. blow the nose, to shegamite Rob. blue eeshang-eyghth. blunt boos-seek. boat adoltkhtek ; adothe Rob. boat, large dhoorado. body haddabothic ; Rob. boil, to oadjameet. bone a-enamin. bonnet abodooneek ; abodonee Rob. bosom see bogomet. bow anyemen. boy buhashamesh ; bakashamesh and bukashamesh Rob. bread annawhadya; maujebathook. breast bogomot. breath gaboweete. brook shebon. bucket shoe-wana. bus7i.es mandeweech. buttons agamet ; agamot Rob. candle sha'poth. canoe tapathook ; japathook Rob. ; see also boat, cap eeseeboon. capelan shamoth. cat, domestic abideshook. cat; see marten. cattle methabeet ; nethabeat Rob. cheek weenoun. child emamooset. chin ge-oun ; toun Rob. clothes dingyam ; ihingyam Rob. clouds berrooick. cocklebur sheedeneeshect. 1686.] 429 [Gatschet. codfish bobboosoret. cold eenoaja ; moidewsee Rob. comb moiclensu ; eclrathu Rob. come, to see cleiood, thooret. come back; see deiood. come hither! kooret Rob. comet anin. consort anwoyding. cream jug motheryet ; nadalahet. cry, to matheoduc ; Rob. cup manune. cup, drinking sboe-wana. currant shamye Rob. cut, to odisbuik ; Rob. dancing badisut ; budisect Rob. darkness washewtcb. dead gausep. death see gausep. December odasweeteesbamut. deer kosweet ; osweet Rob. deer's horns magorun. deer-spear amina. devil asbraudyim ; baoot. dirt methic Rob. dirty muddy. dog mammasaveet ; Rob. dogwood emoetbook ; euioetbuk Rob. drake see mameshet. draicing knife moesbwadit ; mame- sbuadet Rob. drink, to ebatbook. dry gasook. duck boodowit ; eesbeet ; mame- shet ; cf. boodowit and kow- mesbet Rob. eagle gobidin. ear moosbaman ; Rob. eat, to odoit ; Rob. ; pokoodont. egg debine ; Rob. eight adozook ; odoosook Rob. elbow moocus ; Rob. eleven see yaseek. Eskimo Ashwan. eye gbeegnyau ; givinya Rob. eyebrow marmeuk. fall, to koshet ; bosket Rob. fat eeg ; eed Howley. fear geswat. feather abobidress ; ewinon. February kostbabonong bewajo- wit. fifteen see ninezeek. finger banyees. -fire boobeeshawt ; oodrat ; wood- rat Rob. fish baubooshrat. fish (a species) mokotbut fishhook adotbook. fishing line edat. fioe niuezeek ; nijik Rob. flesh asbautcb. fly, to miaotb. foot adyouth. forehead dootbuu. forest see tree, fork etbenwit ; Rob. four dabseek ; abodoesic Rob fourteen; see dabseek. fox dogajavick. fur peatba Rob.; see also geonet. gaping abemite. get up gamyess ; see amsbut. get up, to amsbut. gimlet quadranuek. girl emamooset ; Rob. give me ! deb-hemin ! we give you a knife see wawasbemet. glass badalabet. gloves obsedeek. good homedicb. good night betbeoate ; Rob. goose odensook ; Rob. go, to; to go out see baetba ; euano; enano Rob. go home baetha. go to bed, to poocbauwbat. gooseberry jiggamint. grindstone aguatboonet ; sbew- thake. groan, to cbeasbit. guillemot ostbuk. Gatschet.] 430 [May 7, gun adamadret. gunpowder baasothnut ; beatathunt Rob. hair drona ; Rob. half moon see kewis. halibut banawasutt. hammer iwisb ; mattuis ; matbeuis Rob. hand maemed ; memet Rob. ; see shake hands, to. hare odusweet. harlequin duck raammadronit. hatchet dtboonanyen ; tbingaya Rob. hatfish banawasutt. head keathut ; Rob. hear, to eenodsba ; noduera. heart bogodoret ; begodor Rob. heaven theebone. herring wesboraesb. hiccough madyrut ; mudyrat Rob. Mil keoosock ; see keatbut. hoop woin ; uvin Rob. horn; deer's horns magorun. house meotick ; mamraateek Rob. hungry boocbauwbit ; cf. dauosett. husband anwoyding ; zalbrook. hut meotick. ice ozeru ; Rob. Indian Beotbuk. Indian boy see mozazeosb. Indian cup shucododimet. iron mowageenite ; Rob. islands mammasbeek ; Rob. January kobshuneesamut. July kowayaseek. June wasumaweeseek. kill, to bogatboowytcb ; datyuns ; whadicbeme. kiss, to widumile. knee hodamisbit ; Rob. kneel, to akustbibit ; abustbibit Rob. knife eewa-en ; nine Rob. lamp bobbiduishemet ; mondicuet. lead (subst.?) goosheben. lean asbei. leaves madyna Rob. leg aduse. lie down, to bituwait. life see mamisbet. lightning borod and wieitb Rob. like, 1 ajeedick. lip ooisb ; coisb, ooisb Rob. lobster odjet. long kannabucb. lord bird mammadronit. louse kusebeet. lumpfish a-esbemeet. mainland gungewook ; gewzewook Rob. make haste eeslioo. man bukasbaman ; Rob. March man amiss. marten abidisb ; Rob. Mary March Demasduit ; Wauna- thoake. May bedejamisb bewajowite. meat asbautcb. Micmac Indian Sbauung. milk madaboocb. moccasin moosin. money agamet; agamot Rob. ; beodet moon kewis ; wasba-geuis ; kius and wasbewiush Rob. moskito sbema bogostbuc ; see nipper mountain ash emoetbook. mouth mamesbook. mythologic symbols ; see asbwameet, kewis, owasboslmo-un. nails qnisb, Rob. Nancy Sb.ananditb.it. Naskapi Indians Sho-udamunk. neck tedesbect ; iedesbeet Rob. necklace zeek ; betbic Rob ; see baasi'ek. net gigarimanet ; Rob. night washewtcb. nine y^othoduc ; Rob. nineteen see yeotboduc. nipper (moskito) bebadrook. no newin. 1886.] 431 [Gatschet. nose gheen ; geeu Rob. November godabonyeesb. oakvm musbabautb Rob. oar podibeak ; poodybeat Rob. ochre odemen. October godabonyegb. oil emet ; Rob. one yaseek ; gathet Rob. otter edru ; edree Rob. outdoors see baetba. paddle podibeak ; poodybeat Rob. ; see to row. partridge zosoot. pigeon bobbidist ; Rob. pin dosomite. pitcher rnanune. pond woodum. ptarmigan zosueet Rob. ; see z6soot. puffin guasbawit ; Rob. puppy see mammasavcet ; mainma- sarneet Rob. rain batbuc ; watsboosoocb ; batbue Rob. raspberries gawzadun Rob. rat gadgemisb Rob. red deed-rasbow. Bed Indian (man) Beotbuk ; Sbawa- tbarott ; Boeothik Rob. Bed Indian boy mozazeosb. Bed Indian girl woas-eeasb. Bed Indian woman woas-sut. rifle adamadret. river sbebon. rock abune row, to osavate ; see oar. Bowan tree see dogwood. run, to ibadinnaru ; wotbainashet ; botbamashet Rob. sail ejabatbook. salmon wasemook ; Rob. salt water massooch. saw (subst.) deddoweet ; dedoaeet Rob. scab pigatbu Rob. scissors oseenyet. scollop gowet. scratch baslmbet. sea-gull asson. seal bidesook ; see matliik. bede- sook Rob. seal-spear a-adutb. seal, sunken apparet o bidesook ; Rob. see, to ejew. September wasumaweeseek. seven o-odosook ; odosook Rob. seventeen see o-odosook shake hands kawingjemeesh ; mee- man uionastbus, see maemed hand, ship rnamasbee ; adoltkhtek ; see canoe, shoe see'moosin ; Rob. shoot, to washoodiet. short yeech. shoulder manegemetbon ; moine- zernetbon Rob. shovel godawik ; badowadet. sick asbei. sickle see kaduisbnite Rob. silk handkerchief egibididuisb ; ejibi- duisb Rob. sinew [of deer) modtbamook. singing awoodet ; Rob. sit down, to atbess. six basbedtbeek ; bigadosic Rob. sixteen see basbedtbeek. sleep, to bootzbawet ; isedoweet. sleepy, lam a-oseedwit. sleeve wobesbeet. smell, to marot. smoke basdic ; besdic Rob. snail ae-u-eece. sneeze, to adjitb. snipe aoujet. snow kaasussabook. son magaraguis ; see mangaroonisb. soon jewmetcbem. sore throat anadrik. sorrow corrasoob ; conasoob Rob. speak, to camitack. spear anun. spider woadthoowin. Gatschet.] 432 [May 7, spoon adadimite ; Rob. spruce traunasoo Rob. stand, to kingiabit. star adenishit, sbawwayet. stinking matbik. stockings see gasook ; gasset Rob. stone see rock. stoop, to bedyyan Rob. sugar sbedothun. sun kewis (see mangaroonish); kuis and mangarewius Rob. sunken seal aparita bedesook Rob. swim, to tboowidgee ; Rob. sword bidisoni ; bedisoni Rob. tea butterweye. teeth botomet onthermayet ; bofo- met outbermayet Rob. ; boc- bodza Leigb. ten sbansee ; tbeant Rob. tern geonet, thank, to; I thank you tbine. thin asliei. thigh itweena Rob. thirteen see shendeek, thirty see sbendeek. thread rneroobisb. three sbendeek ; sbedsic Rob. throat tedesbeet ; iedesbeet Rob. throw, to pugatboite. thumb boad ; pooetb Rob. ; itweena is thigh, Rob. thunder baroodisick ; Rob. ticklas gotbeyet. tickle kadimisbuite ; kaduisbnite Rob. tilt camp see nieotick. tinker ostbuk ; ootbook Rob. tobacco necbwa. to-morrow maduck. tongue meniasook ; Rob. trap latbun ; sbabatboobet ; sbeba- tboont Rob. tree annoo-e ; annooce Howley. trousers mowead ; niooweed Rob. trout dattomeisb. twelve see adzeecb. ticenty see adzeecb. twine ardobeesbe. two adzeecb ; Rob. upper sbedbasing. vessel (ship) adoltkbtek ; maraa- sbee ; adotbe Rob. vessel, see cup; small stone vessel, see sboe-wana. walk, to wootbyat Rob. ; see wotba- masbet. tcarm boobasba. warming yourself obosbeen. watch kewis ; ruis Rob. water-bucket shoe-wana. water ebantboo ; ebautbo Rob. ; to drink water, see ebatbook. water, salt, massoocb. wet see wabee. whale's tail owasbosbno-un. ichite wobee, wabee. white man see bakashainan ; and boy. ichite girl emamooset. white wife adizabad zea. white woman emamoose. whole, see watbik, xchortleberrics mamoose Rob. wife anwoyding, oosuck ; osuk Rob. wife, white adizabad zea. wigwam meotick. wind gidyeatbuc ; Rob. icolf moisaniadrook ; Rob. woman emamoose ; amamoose Rob. ; see Red Indian woman, wife, wood adiab Rob. woodpecker sbeboboweet ; Rob. woods see tree. yawn, to ibeatb Rob. yes yeatbun. 1886.J ^O [Frazer. Composite Photography applied to Handwriting. By Dr. Persifor Frazer. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, January 16, 1SS6.) The following preliminary note on this subject appeared in the Journal of the Franklin Institute for February, 1886 : Francis Galton was the first to point out in fugitive memoirs, and nota- bly in his important work, "The Human Faculty," that one could sift the common from the accidental features of a number of objects by exposing them in succession to a sensitized plate in such a manner that the images of the similar parts of the different objects should occupy as nearly as possible the same parts of the plate ; and that each object should be exposed for only a fraction of the length of time necessary to complete a picture on the film used. This fraction depended generally, if not always, on the number of objects and on the sensitiveness of the film. For example, if there were eighteen ob- jects and the plate took thirty-six seconds to develop, each object would ordinarily be exposed for two seconds. It is easy to see that the result in the finished picture would be that those features which all the objects had in common would be re-enforced by each separate exposure, whereas those features which were accidental or variable, and which would be different for every individual, would be exposed for but two seconds and would be so indistinct as practically to fade away. Where the object was to catch a family likeness by exposing all the members male and female to the same portion of the plate, the result xs a curious medley of faint whiskers and moustache ; of hair parted in the middle and at the side ; of female gowns with buttons to the throat and of male shooting jackets thrown open. But out of all this faint halo of confusion and blur, there starts a characteristic face which is the family type. Very often, too, this type-face resembles no- ticeably two different members of a family between whom no one can find a resemblance. It is this latter fact (which might have been expected) that induced me to look to the process for aid in solving the problem of identity of origin in handwriting. When a number of animals of the same race are thus treated, the method secures the fixing of the race or family characteristics, etc., as the case may be. When a number of pictures or coins bearing different representations of the same individual or scene are the objects, the result is to obtain either the average appearance of the same thing under different conditions (as for instance a man at different times of life), or the average of the impression made by identically the same thing on different artists. In this case, the merit of the process is that it constructs its image out of all that many pairs of trained eyes have seen, without giving undue weight to auy one pair. So far, then, these efforts have been directed to re-finding a lost or concealed existence through mul- tiple testimony, very much as the law tries to get at the truth by examin- ing a number of witnesses. At first sight one would suppose, however, that the case of handwriting PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 3C. PRINTED AUG. 7, 1886. Frazer.] 4d4 [jan. ie, was a different one, but I think that the analogy with the above cases will appear strong on due reflection. With a given mental image of what one desires to write before one ; and with a given relation of will-power, nerve sensitiveness and muscular force, the same signa- ture could be repeated a thousand times, provided that all these con- ditions were invariable, and no others were superadded. So far from this being the case, however, every one of the factors just named which pro- duce a signature, depends on physical and mental — in other words, on extraneous influences, to a very large degree. The movement com- menced to effect an up stroke is met by an unexpected obstacle in the paper, a slight twinge in the shoulder, or a sudden noise, and the result- ing line would show (were we sufficiently cognizant of the detailed working of all the complicated parts of our mental machinery to inter- pret it) just the order in which our different sentient and executive func- tions have been affected, and to what extent. But while these ever-recur- ring accidents result in preventing any signature from being made exactly as intended,* the fact that no two of them effect the same kind or amount of deviation leaves it in the power of the experimenter to extract from this process the "ideal" signature — a signature which probably never was seen as it appears, and yet which so combines all the visible results of a par- ticular will acting on a particular arm to trace on paper a known design with a pen or pencil, that it may justly be called the type signature of that writer. What was said of the resemblance of every object of a group of objects which have any claim to be associated together, to the composite made of that group, even tbough it differ widely from other members of the same group ; is true of handwriting. It has been remarked that the composite signature is an ideal, and never was realized. This is because the lines along which the strongest re enforcements are made are those where locally varying deviations most frequently cross. To put it in another form, suppose the lines a b, c and d to be in agreement as follows : At the point a', b does not cross, but c and d do. At b', c does not cross, but d and a do. At c', d does not cross, but a and b do. The line which would represent to the eye part of the ideal signature, would be that traced the points a', b', c', d', because those points having superposed lines of three out of the four signatures and would be darker, while the variations at each of these points would be indistinct. In examining with care a composite signature as just described, it at once arrests the attention that the variations are not equally distributed over the entire body of the letter, but that there are regions of each letter where variations of a particular kind are noticeable, and other regions where there are few or none. The more the manuscripts of an individual are compared the more forcibly does this fact appear, until finally one is tempted to conclude that after a handwriting is once formed, it cannot *The word "intended" is used to imply the effect which would be produced by the action of the will through the hand on the paper if not modified by these accidents, and not solely conscious intention. 1886.] 4dO [Frazer. naturally exhibit deviations except within a defined variation and in cer- tain limited areas adjacent to the separate letters. It is thus as great an assistance to the observer to study the variations, as to study the ideal sig- nature. Indeed, the variations are all important in the matter of identifi- cation, and if tbere were no variations the method would be inapplicable, because an exact copy might be made by tracing. A comparatively small number ot signatures will give the maximum and minimum of variation in any given region of one of the letters forming it. More- over, the kind of variation is easily observed where there are a number together, so that the most perfect adept at forgery could hardly hope to simulate the microscopically minute characteristics of variations which are simply the visible expression of a series of indefinitely complex rela- tions of muscle and nerve. In a case which was recently brought before the Orphans' Court in Philadelphia, this principle of composite photography was for the first time applied by me to the purpose of identifying handwriting, and from the experience thus far gained, it is thought that it will (at least in many cases) more surely lead to the truth than will the mere opinions of the most skillful expert. Philadelphia, January 19, 18S6. We judge of force and weakness ; of the stability and instability ; of ex- pression and character chiefly by applying the experience that we have gained through the observations of our lives to the images we see before us. In the more complex studies of nature the image is rendered in colors and their shades, and all these increase almost indefinitely the deli- cate phases and modifications of the thought which is suggested. They are just so many words added to the language in which external nature speaks to us. But an almost infinite number of facts are impressed on our minds with convincing force without recourse to other than the plainest and simplest combinations of lines. A being, whether civilized or savage, recognizes in- stantly the impossibility of a tree growing with its roots in the air, or a man standing on the vertical face of a wall. The French caricaturists have demonstrated how much of character and expression may be given by a few lines which when looked at minutely resemble the scrawls of an infant on a sheet of paper, yet when viewed from a certain distance in its general effect tell us a whole story without the use of a word. It is undeniable that the power to do this is based upon the fact that certain accentuated lines appear in the figures of men and things under a given set of circum- stances, and by taking these and omitting all else we have a sort of skele- ton image divested of unessentials. This skeleton image is in its way a sort of composite, arrived at, it is true, by a different method from that here employed, but nevertheless representing the sum of the artist's experiences in a great many more or less similar cases, and the greatness of the his- torical painter lies just in his power to represent an important event or Frazer.] 4db [jan. ig, crisis by the effects which it makes visible on those who are participators in and spectators of it. Here is no place to admit variation, the atti- tudes, or, in other words, the lines of the figures in such a composition must be normal and intelligible to the mass of mankind ; must be, in short, a composite or abstraction of the lines that would survive were a hundred thousand such scenes to be instantaneously photographed : all else weak- ens the efiect intended. Composite photography is a method of obtain- ing the essence of a number of objects and, in so far as those objects are typical of similar phenomena, of recording the relations of things to each other, the effects produced by a certain force or certain forces on matter. The composite will enable the mind, armed with some experience in life, to ascend from the individual cases to the underlying cause or motive. Is it necessary, then, to prove that a line made by a human arm and hand is liable to the variations which such an arm or hand must pro- duce when influenced, as they always are, by indefinitely numerous physical and mental forces ? Is it necessary to devote much time to the proof that a line on paper so produced is as much a resultant of organic processes as the outline of the human figure or the expressions of the human face ? It is a kind of fossil like the print of a footstep or of a leat which, while it consists of nothing having life, or that ever need have had life, and possesses none of the material of the body which made it, is ca- pable like the impressions above referred to of telling a great deal of the characteristics of its creator : it is, in fact, as organic as the forms of living things by which we judge them, for their forms or images do not possess life either. Such methods as composite photography, or composite drawing or painting of any kind which can be accomplished when the hand has the skill to reproduce what the memory has stored away, are applicable only to the representation of resultants which do not vary within too wide limits, and are especially applicable where such variations depend upon the influences brought to bear on sentient things, and when they do not occur per saltum, but gradually and by imperceptible steps. If the purpose be to represent an average of some object which presents images differing radically from each other at successive views there must be a very large number of such images selected to photograph, and then an ill-defined but darker blur will show vaguely on what part of the field on the whole the images have been most numerous. For phenomena of this kind the method is not adapted to offer its best results, though it still may be used to ascertain some facts in a general way.* The attempt to apply the composite system of photography to the curves representing the rate of mortality in cities and towns, or to the *Iu a pleasant letter received from Mr. Francis Gal ton, F. R. S„ in answer to a copy of the preliminary note given above, which 1 sent him, he mentions that an attempt was made at the Kew Observatory to apply the principle of compo- site photography to the meteorological charts, without great success, though with more than Mr. Ualton would have anticipated. 1886.1 " [Frazer. changes of the weather, &c, &c, is not likely to be rewarded by striking results, except to the extent which I have stated above, because these curves are composed of data taken at such intervals of time that there is no necessary sequence between them ; they are affected by causes which are in no respect to be likened to the gradual unfolding of human expression by relaxations and constrictions of the muscles, the sum of all the changes not perceptibly altering the field first obtained, but altering the "values," as the artist call3 it, or the relative importance of the roles assumed by each unit of the image to the rest. These changes are as characteristic and delicate in the line made voluntarily by a living being as in the lines which its form involuntarily makes on the retina, and therefore one set is as susceptible of concentration and averaging as the other. The merely formal and always repeated parts of a letter or other document have an entirely different character value from those parts which are composed of words and letters thrown together to represent a certain state of things, and which may never be repeated in exactly the same order. Obviously no composite of phrases can be expected un- less the phrase have a technical significance, but separate words can be selected to form bases of composites, or even the two or three words which enter into an idiom, one of those well-trodden short cuts of lan- guage to a given idea. Such partial phrases (rendered frequently in other languages by a single word), as "in order that;" "as well as;" "not only;" "but also," &c, will be found in the handwriting of any one accustomed to write much, and may be taken as elements out of which to construct composites of the words of which they consist ; but the value of such elements in helping one to a knowledge of the character of the person who penned them, or even of the general character of the writers' handwriting is not as great in these cases as it is in the signature aud the few formal words which precede it in a letter. There are several reasons for this ; one is that these formulas occur in different connections with the accompanying text, indicating very different attitudes of mind in the several cases. The sense of what is written must have a large influence in the manner of writing it, and therefore the letters composing these words will be larger or lighter ; or more or less quickly and angularly writ- ten as the idea of the sentence by reflex action evokes different emotions in the mind of the writer. A circumstance equally noticeable will be the place on the paper which the words occupy ; whether there is an abund- ance of room to write the words, or whether they are cramped in order to bring them into a smaller space. In cases where the words of such a sub- phrase are divided between two lines, they will almost surely not appear as they would when they follow each other in their natural order. But more even than these is the fact that the signature and its connected words, "Yours truly," &c, are always indicative of the task completed, the information conveyed. They are words of ceremony and endorse- ment, no matter what the contents of the letter may be. They are invari- ably repeated and come to be a purely conventional sign, of which the Frazer.] 438 [Jan. 16, parts resemble more or less the letters in the body of the writing in differ- ent people. This symbol usually occupies very nearly the same part of the page— at least as to its distance from the right or left hand edge of the paper—and this tends to fix it as a distinguishing sign. All these facts lead to a distinction between a signature, and that writing by the same hand which accompanies original composition. There are, of course, peculiarities in every hand which can be traced both in the signature and in the body of the text. Such are very appar- ent when the writer labors under a physical disadvantage, such as a maimed or deformed hand or arm, but in lesser degree these peculiarities are present in every handwriting and constitute the general constant of "will-power, nerve sensitiveness and muscular force" employed by a given individual In this perfunctory habit. I say general constant to imply that this relation must be regarded with- out paying too much attention to detail, for probably on no two occasions of a man's life do these factors exist in him in absolutely the same proportions, and even if they did, the least change of environment would alter the results thus accomplished. But the signature of a man being divested as much as pos • sible of the accidents due to his outside influences, it follows that the sig- nature is the production of his hand least likely to yield an insight into his condition when writing it. On the other hand, the fact that he selects one particular way of expressing his identity bestows upon it something of a resultant of the various motives which actuate him, and makes it a sort of digest of the points of his character called into play in the perform- ance of the act. We may look for the same sort of character in a signa- ture that we find in a photograph or a picture, and the same causes may prevent either the one or the other from faithfully representing the peculi- arities of the individual, by representing that individual as he appears when conscious that he is being observed ; or, in other words, a character is as- sumed which corresponds to the taste of the individual and represents more or less how he would like to be seen by the public. When the character is observed to exist throughout the entire mass of his writing, it may be as- sumed that it represents accurately the man, for no amount of patience and study would enable one to retain such peculiarities under all the varied cir- cumstances attending the act of writing, if it were not inherent in the indi- vidual himself. In any case, however, the result is a likeness which all who know the original will recognize, even though one or two features may be made more prominent in pose than in repose, and that constitutes the chief value of the analysis of signatures for identification independently of what we may learn from them of the mental attributes of their signers. It is not swe ylaantirely obvious how signatures with many light flour- ishes, or accompanied by intricate lines connecting their several parts, should be superposed, for these appendices are so easily affected by minute causes that it seldom happens that two will cover each other exactly. It is not to be expected that such parts will survive in the resulting type signa- ture, but the breadth of the space covered by the blur and parallelism of the ]886.] <±do [Frazer. faint lines will give evidence of the extent to which these ornaments have grown from caprice to a habit. As a general rule there are several places — sometimes as many as eight or nine in a long signature — when the darkening of the lines indicates a general conformity ot the pen's path to one direction, and it would seem that these places were not peculiar to any one part of a letter, nor that they were less in a hair line than in a heavy stroke. They appear to be depend- ent upon the anatomy and muscular structure of the individual in connec- tion with his method of performing the act of writing his signature. For instance, some writers can only form one or two letters without moving the writing hand ; only a word or so without shifting the elbow ; others describe with the forearm of the writing hand a curve around the elbow which re- mains stationary ; others slide the forearm along into parallel positions while writing. All these habits have different effects upon the hand- writing which results, though they are not always to be easily detected, owing to the fact that other habits are cultivated at the same time to counteract the defect which each of these methods, when not so com- pensated, would have impressed upon the appearance of the chirography. Thus, he who writes with an elbow pivoted immovably upon the table must learn to move the fingers over a greater space at some part of the liue, to avoid the curve which would unconsciously result. This more vigorous movement of the fingers is likely to produce heavier strokes in the part of the signature where the compensation is naturally applied. So that a fixed elbow and heavy letter in the middle of the signature may stand to each other in the relation of cause and effect. In signatures when the divergence is wide and the agreement corre- spondingly small, it has been my custom to use the dark portions as cen- tres to adjust the various signatures on, and this plan will sometimes fur- nish a good composite when other plans fail. Desiring an illustration to accompany this paper, I sought a signature which would serve as a fair test of the process. Manifestly such a signa- ture must be well known to a large number of persons, and enough ex- amples of it must exist to bring out the type character of their combina- tion. Those individuals whose signatures are known to the largest number of persons are usually bankers or persons authorized to sign firm drafts, checks, &c, and these not unnaturally object to having the minutest characteristics of their writing brought to the knowledge of the public, though for the reasons stated above a study of what the composite teaches would convince the intending forger that his task was a far more difficult one than that of simply reproducing a design. On the other hand signatures of dead bankers and dissolved firms soon pass out of the re- membrance of those who were once familiar with them, and thereto] e have no more significance than the sign manuals of unknown writers, or those which are purely fictitious. George Washington's signature was one of the first to suggest itself, because many persons were familiar with it, and there are numerous Frazer.] 440 [Jan. 16, well-authenticated documents in existence which bear it ; but it has proved to possess otber advantages which were not known when it was selected. As in everything else, Washington was deliberate, pains- taking and uniform in his method ot writing his signature and the conse- quence is that it makes an excellent composite for illustration. In writing his signature Washington put pen to the paper five times. First he wrote the "GW" in one connected line. Secondly, he raised his hand and made the small "o " between the upper parts of the G- and W, and the two dots which appear in all but signature No. 7. Thirdly, his hand and arm were placed in position to write "ashing," these six letters occupying a breadth of almost exactly If inches in every signature except the third, when they are extended to 1|| inches. This is about as much of the arc of a circle (of which the centre is the elbow pivoted on the table) as one with a forearm of average length can cause to coincide with the tangent, or the straight line across the paper which the lower parts of the letters follow, unless unusual effort be made and a great deal more movement be given to the fingers. The "g" ends in a curved flourish, of which the convex side is turned upwards below the right cen- tre of the name. [Note. The lower loop of the " g " in all the signatures and in the composite was cut off in preparing the plate.] Fourthly, he wrote the final " ton." Fifthly, he added the very peculiar flourish above the right centre of the name, with the object of dotting the " i " and cross- ing the "t" at the same stroke. In examining the composite, the effect of these various separate move- ments becomes manifest in its strengthened portions. It is hardly possible that any one during the period of sixteen years, which these signatures represent, or from 1776 to 1792, should have so schooled his hand to write a long name that the first inch or so of the writing should always occupy the same relative position to the body of the signature. It would take at least that much action for the hand and arm and pen to be brought into normal signature-writing condition ; and especially is this so when this part of the writing is accompanied by flourishes as it is in the case we are considering. The "GW" and the little *'o" and the dots at the top were the prelude, after which the arm was moved into position to write the main body of the signature or the " ashing." Of course, from the manner of making the dots, and the extremely small space they cover, their re-enforce- ment of each other in the composite was almost impossible, and, in fact, like other subordinate characters, they disappear almost completely. This latter is the part of the name which one would have expected to exhibit the greatest amount of uniformity, as in point of fact it does, with the exception of its terminal "g," which shows more variation than any of the other letters, because at this point the limit ot coincidence between the tangent line of the writing and the curve, of which the right forearm was the radius, had been passed, and a freer movement of the fingers was compensating for the increasing divergence. [Note. It is likely that Washington sometimes raised the hand between the end of the long " s" X <>??'t?A. <■-'/ <£:/'sl,<£-A-' y^-«?"X c 1886.] 441 [Frazer. and the beginning of "h," but be does not appear to have moved the elbow. All but the second signature are consistent with this view, and in the 1st, 3d and 5th it is plainly indicated. In the others, as in the flourish above the sixth signature, the pen may not have marked.] The fourth separate act of the penman was the formation ot the "ton " after a movement of the arm. The breadth of the space occu- pied by these three letters is from | to J of an inch, or considerably within the range of coincidence of the curve and straight line before referred to ; and owing to this fact there is only a moderate degree of re-enforcement of the letters in the composite, because these letters might fall into the first or last parts of the 2-inch space which was the limit of movement with a fixed elbow. It is worthy of note that even in this case the middle letter of the three is darker in the composite than either of the outside let- ters. The fifth and last movement was the flourish which dots the '• i " and crosses the "t" by one stroke. This was done in the freest of free hands — often, as it seems probable, without resting hand or arm on the table at all. Therefore there is no coincidence of the lines in this part of the composite and the region of variation is wider than that of any other part of the signature. All the signatures used in the accompanying plate (seven in number) are unquestionably genuine. With the exception nf one, which is the property of the writer, they were carefully chosen from a number of au- thenticated signatures in the possession of the Historical Society of Penn- sylvania. No. 1 is on a letter, dated December 18, 1776, from near the Falls of Trenton, and addressed to Washington's brother Samuel. No. 2 is on a letter dated Headquarters, November 4, 1777, and is ad- dressed to the writer's great-grandfather, Lt.-Col. Persifor Frazer, then a prisoner of war in Philadelphia. No. 3 is on a letter dated September 27, 1777, and is to Wni. Henry, of Lancaster. No. 4 is the Composite of all the rest. No. 5 is on a letter dated Headquarters in Morristown, February 22, 1777. The person to whom the letter was addressed is not stated. No. 6, dated September 26, 1793, is affixed to the commission of David Lenox. No. 7, of the same date, is affixed to David Lenox's appointment as agent for the relief and protection of American Seamen. No. 8, dated May 24, 1799, closes a letter to Thomson Mason. PROC. AMEK. PHILOS. SOC. XXIIT. 123. 3d. PRINTED AtJG. 7, 1886. Cope.] *±^ [Feb. 5, On the Structure and Affinities of Hie Amphiumidm. By E. D. Cope. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, February 5, 1SS6.) By all authors, the genus Amphiuma has been included in the same family division with Protonopsis and Megalobatrachus until 1866. At that time the writer of this paper proposed to separate it from the latter genera as the type of a family Amphiuniidre, while the other genera were placed in another family with the name Protonopsidse. This course has not been followed by later writers ; in the Catalogue of the British Museum by Dr. Boulenger (1882), for instance, the three genera being included in one family, the Amphiumidse. The reasons for keeping the Amphiuniidse distinct from the Protonop- sidae were stated to be the following :* Amphiumidm: "An axial cranial bone ('? vomer) in front of orbito sphenoids, and one forming palatal surface in front of parasphenoid. * Parietals prolonged laterally, not reaching prefrontals. Vestibule, wall osseous internally. Premaxillaries consolidated. Occipital condyles on cylindrical pedestal." Protonopsidm : "No anterior axial cranial bone. * * Parietals and prefrontals prolonged, meeting and embracing frontals. Wall of vestibule membranous internally. Premaxillaries separated. Occipital condyles sessile." The following observations were made on the Amphiuniidse: "The occipital condyles and temporocervical tendon are quite as in Desmogna- thus ; they have not been previously described, f In Amphiuma means there is a minute not articulated bone on the suture between the o. o. frontalia and prefontalia in the situation of the lachrymal. There are some approximations to Caecilia in Amphiumidre. It does not appear to have been noticed that the * * free margin cf the frontal seems to fore- shadow the overroofing of the orbit and temporal fossa seen in Caecilia. There is also a very large foramen or canal passing through the o. maxil- lare from near its middle to the orbit, foreshadowing the canalis tentacu- liferus of Ca'cilia : a narrow one occurs in the same situation in Proto- nopsis. Further the prominent horizontal anterior inferior processes of the vertebral centra are the same in Amphiuma and Concilia." Occasion for the revision of these views having presented, the following facts and conclusions have been reached. The characters assigned as above to the two families Ampiriumidse and Protonopsidse are abundantly sufficient for retaining them as distinct. The form of the occipital condyles might be excepted from this estimate, and the axial bone in front of the parasphenoid proves to be abnormally cut off in the specimen then examined. The Protonopsidse agree with other * Journal Academy Philadelphia, 1866, p. 101. t They were described by Dr. J. G. Fischer, Anatomisch. Abhandl. ub. Peren- nibrunch. u. JHrotrein. Erstes lleft, p. 01 1S01. 1886.] 44d [Cope. Urodela in all of the characters given, except in the exclusion of the frontals from the supraorbital border, and in the membranous character- istic of the internal wall of the vestibule. The Amphiumidae differ from other Urodela in the presence of a large ethmoid bone (the one referred to as ? vomer in the diagnosis above quoted), in the presence of temporal ridges, and of two anteriorly directed hypapophyses of the precaudal ver- tebra?. It is interesting to notice that three of the four characters just cited are shared by the Cseciliidse. The presence of the ethmoid is of especial im- portance, as it is an element constantly wanting in the Urodela. I have not found it in Desmognathus, Anaides, Spelerpes, Amblystoma, Sala- mandra, nor Protonopsis ; nor is it present in Necturus or in Siren. It is, on the contrary, always present in Cseciliidae* (see Plate v, E). The double anterior hypapophyses are otherwise confined to the same family. The Cteciliidse are generally regarded as representing a distinct order, which bears the names Apoda, or Gymnophiona. The definition given to this order by Mr. Boulengerf is : "No limbs; tail rudimentary. Males with an intromittent copulatory organ. Adapted for burrowing." Of these definitions none is of ordinal value. The tail in some species is dis- tinct. The intromittant copulatory organ in Dermophis mexicanus, Gym- nopis proxi?nus, and Herpele oclirocephala, is not an especial organ, but is merely the everted cloaca. The hard papillae observed by GuntherJ in the IchthyopMs glutinosus are wanting in the above species. The protrusion of the cloaca is effected by two especial muscles, which are wanting in Amphiumida3. As to limbs, their extremely rudimentary character in Amphiuma is well known. To regard their condition as indicating ordi- nal separation from the Cteciliidse is not in accordance with our practice in similar cases in the Reptilia, as in the order Lacertilia. The characters of these parts and their supporting arches not having been heretofore given, I describe them below. I have endeavored to sustain the order Gymnophiona by the character of the fusion of the nasal and premaxillary bones found in the majority of the genera. § But Stannius|| shows that these bones are distinct in Ichthyophis. Huxley states (Anatomy of Vertebrate Animals, p. 155) that in Icht7iyop7iis glutinosus a distinct bone nearly encircles the orbit. This he compares to the supra and postorbital bones found in the Stego- cephali. But in Chthonerpeton, Ctecilia. Dermophis and other genera, this bone forms part of the maxillary, so that it is not characteristic of the family, and may not be homologous with the bones which occupy the same position in Stegocephali. Wiedersheim calls it maxillary. With these facts in view I have united^f the Creciliidse with the Urodela, *See Wiedersheim, Anatomie der Gymnophionen, Jena, 1879. t Catalogue of the British Museum, 1882, p. 88. X Reptiles of British India (Roy. Society), p. 411. \ American Naturalist, 1884, p. 26. II Zootomie der Amphibien, 1856, p. 11. \ American Naturalist, 1885, p. 211, note. Cope.] 444 [Feb. 5, a proposition which I now fully believe to be sustained by the evidence. The Cmciliidce is a family of Urodela, connected with the typical forms through the AmphiumicUe. Wiedersheim (1. c. p. 95) has attempted to trace the ancestry of the Cscciliidae to the Stegocephali of the Carboniferous period, from which he supposes them to have arisen by a process of degeneration. He remarks that in order to demonstrate this proposition it is only necessary to discover a type with rudirnental limbs which shall connect the two. That the Cseciliidae is a type which has resulted from a degeneration, I have also proposed,* but I have derived them from the Urodela rather than from the Stegocephali direct. They have, like Amphiuma, essentially the same cranial structure as the Urodela, which is widely different from that of the Stegocephali, in the absence of the intercalare, supratemporal and postorbital bones. And these characters are fully maintained in various genera of Stegocephali which have rudirnental limbs. Amphiuma then is the annectant type with rudirnental limbs, which Dr. Wiedersheim sought for. The circumstance that his eyes were turned towards the Stegocephali indisposed him to recognize this fact. The only portion of the shoulder girdle of this genus which is ossified is the scapula. The coracoid cartilages of opposite sides are distinct from each other, and there is a production of the prrccoracoid region. The humerus is truncate at both extremities, making its articulations with cartilage only. The carpus is undivided cartilage. The osseous ilium is quite short and slender ; it has a long superior cartilaginous portion, which is attached to an equally long cartilaginous sacral rib. The infe- rior element is an undivided plate, which is wider than long, and presents an obtuse angle anteriorly. The posterior portion of each is occupied by a round discoid ossification, which forms the posterior border, but does not reach either the acetabulum or its fellow. The femur is rather long and has a distinct trochanter, but no head nor condyles. The articula- tions are cartilaginous, as is the tarsus, which is also undivided. The tibia and fibula are about one-sixth the length of the femur, and the fibula is a little shorter and more slender than the tibia. The phalanges in both feet are well ossified. The general characters of these parts are described in Stannius' Hand- buch der Zootomie.f but only as included in the definitions of the order to which Amphiuma is referred. Plate VI. Amphiuma means Gard. One-third natural size. Original. From Georgia. Fig. 1, skull, left side. Fig. 2, do. from above. ♦American Naturalist, 1885, p. 244. t Rostock, 1856. Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc, Vol. XXIII. No 123, p. Plate VII. *fi s Chthonerpeton indistinctum R. and l. Proc. her. Philos. Boc., Vol. XXIII, No. 123, p. 442. Plate VI. 4 Amphiuma means Gard. 1886.] 445 [Cope. Fig. 3, skull, from below. Fig. 4, do. right half, from within. Fig. 5, left mandibular ramus, external view. Figs. 6-9, an anterior dorsal vertebra ; fig. 6, front ; 7, rear ; 8, bottom ; 9, top. Plate VII. Chthonerpeton indistinctum K. and L. Three-eighths nat. size. After Wiedersheim. From Brazil. Fig. 1, skull, from above. Fig. 2, do. from below. Fig. 3, do. left half, from within. Figs. 4-6, one and parts of two other vertebrae ; 4, from above ; 5, from below ; 6, right side. EXPLANATIONS OF LETTERS. Pmx., Prernaxillary. Mx., Maxillary. Na., Nasal. Npr., Nasopremaxillary. Pef., Prefrontal. F., Frontal. P., Parietal. Tr., Temporal ridge. Sq., Squamosal. Exo., Exoccipital. ProO., Prootic. OS., Orbitosphenoid. Eth., Ethmoid. Par., Parasphenoid. VoPal., Vomeropalatine. PL, Pterygoid. Stp., Stapes. Q., Quadrate. Co., Occipital condyle. Art., Articular. Aug., Angular. D., Dentary, DL, Diapophysis. Pez., Prezygapophysis. Poz., Postzygapophysis. Hy., Hypapophysis. Hsp., Hypapophysial spine. JYSp., Neural spine. Ch., Posterior nares. Ap., Anterior nares. a, Naso-palatal foramen. b, " c, " " " Car., Carotid foramen. Orb., Orbit. 446 [March 19, Stated Meeting, March 19, 1SS6. Present, 19 members. President, Mr. Fkaley, in the Chair. Lieut. A. W. Wyckoff, U. S. N., Dr. Owen Jones Wistar, and Dr. Charles A. Oliver, were presented to the Chair and took their seats. Donations to the Library were reported from China Branch of the Koyal Asiatic Society; Physikalische Central- Observa- torium and K. Akademie der Wissenschaften, St. Petersburg; K. K. Naturhistorische Hof- Museum and K. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien ; Nassauische Verein fur Naturkunde, Wiesbaden ; Astronomische Nackrichten, Kiel ; Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft and Verein zur Beforderung des Garten Baues, Berlin ; Physikalisch-Medicinische Gesellschaft, Erlangen ; Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali, Pisa ; Societe de Geographie and Mr. H. Welter, Paris ; Statistical Society, Hong Kong; Meteorological Office and "Nature," London; Philological Society, Cambridge, England; Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society; Institut Canadien-Fran9aise, Ottawa ; Canadian Institute, Toronto ; Harvard College, New Haven ; Publishers of the " Traveller's Record," Hartford ; Dr. L. B. Bush, of New York ; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Trenton Natural History Society ; Franklin Institute, Pennsylvania Historical Society, College of Pharmacy, Dr. D. Jayne & Son and Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia ; Dela- ware Historical Society ; American Chemical Society and American Journal of Philology, Baltimore ; United States Naval Institute, Annapolis ; Department of State, Hon. Samuel J. Randall, John H. Hickcox, and Engineer Department, Wash- ington ; Editor of " The Industrial South," Richmond ; Denison University, Granville ; Publishers of the " Engineering Era," Cleveland ; Washburn College, Topeka ; University of Cali- fornia ; Mr. Juan Ignacio de Armas of Havana ; Deutsche Wisscnschaftliche Verein zu Santiago. A chair was presented on behalf of the Executors of the 447 1886.] ^" ' late Dr. George Hamilton, of this city, formerly the property of Dr. Chapman, sometime the President of the Society, to whom it had been given by Joseph Bonaparte, ex-King of Spain, from his resideDce at Bordentown, N. J. A letter accompanied the gift from Mr. J. McClure Hamil- ton, the son of the donor, to whom the thanks of the Society were voted. Letters accepting membership were read from Prof. F. A. Genth, Jr. (Philad'a, March 15th, 1886); Ensign Louis Duncan, (U. S. S. S. Juniata, New York Navy Yard, March 15th, 1886). A letter of envoy was read from the Statistical Society of London, and also asking for certain of the Society's publica- tions, which was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. A letter was read from the Institute Canadien-Francaise re- questing exchanges, which was similarly referred. A letter was read from Dr. Clemens Winkler, Freiberg in Sachsen, announcing the discovery by himself of a new non- metallic element to which he had given the name of Germa- nium. The death of Dr. Austin Flint was announced as having taken place at New York on the 13th day of March, 1886, in the 74th year of his age. The Lackawanna Institute of Science at Scranton, Pa., was ordered to receive the Catalogue of the Library of the Society and the Proceedings, to begin with No. 117. Secretary Brinton presented two papers by Dr. W. J. Hoff- man, one on the Selish Language and another on the "Wait- shumni Dialect. Dr. Horn explained the process among the Piutes of sweet- ening acorn meal by percolation with water so as to render the product edible. Lieut. Wyckoff made a verbal communication on the action of heavy vegetable or fish oils in reducing heavy combing waves to long swells that would not injure a vessel. A discus- sion upon the subject ensued which was participated in by Messrs. Brinton, Dudley, Horn, Holland, Ingham and Oliver. 448 [April 2, Various diplomas of Dr. Franklin's were exhibited, lately found in the possession of the Society. Pending nominations Nos. 1078 to 1103 and new nominations Nos. 1104 and 1105 were read, and, after reading the minutes, the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, April 2, 1886. Present, 15 members. Vice-President, Dr. Euschenberger, in the Chair. Lieut. Geo. B. Anderson, U. S. A., West Point, N. Y., and Prof. Serge Nikotin, Geological Survey of Eussia, St. Peters- burg, Eussia, newly-elected members, by letter accepted mem- bership in the Society. Donations to the Library were announced from the following sources, viz: South African Philosophical Society, Cape Town, Africa; Geological Survey of India; Societe Imperiale des Natu- ralistes de Moscow, Eussia ; Zoologischer Anzeiger, Leipzig ; Prof. Eeuleaux of Berlin ; Senckenbergische Naturforsckende Gesellschaft, Frankfort-am-Main; Oberlausitzer Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Gorlitz; Verein fiir Erdkunde, Halle A. S.; Prot. G. vom Eath of Bonn ; Prof. E. Eenevier of Lausanne ; K. Nordiske Oldskrift Selskab, Copenhagen; E. Accademia del Lincei, Rome ; E. Accademia de Scienze Lettere ed Arti, Mo- dena; E. Academiade la Historia, Madrid; Bureau des Longi- tudes, Societe Zoologique de France, Ecole Polytechique, Musee Guimet, Societe de Geographie, and Prof. Leon de Eosny, Paris; Academiede Dijon; Eoyal Society, Eoyal Geographical, Meteorological and Astronomical Societies, Society of Anti- quaries, Geological Society, Bath and West of England Society, and the publishers of the "Diplomatic Eeview," London; Philosophical and Literary Society of Leeds; National Board of Trade, Boston; State Museum of Natural History and Geological Survey of New York, Albany ; Engineers' Club of Philadelphia; University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia Board 1886.1 '"^ of Trade, Publishers of the "American Naturalist," Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., and Dr. J. Minis Hayes ; Dr. J. Curwen of War- ren, Pa.; the Johns Hopkins University; U. S. Fish Com- mission, U. S. Geological Survey, Philosophical Society of Washington, D. C. ; University of Virginia; Georgia Historical Society ; Eev. Stephen D. Peet of Chicago, 111.; Mercantile Library Association, San Francisco, and the Imp. Observatorio do Rio de Janeiro. Photographs for the Society's album were received from Lieut. A. B. Wyckoff, U. S. N., Hon W. Townsend, and E. F. im Thurn. On motion, the President was requested to transmit the thanks of the Society to the Royal Society for the gift of its Catalogue of Scientific Papers. On motion, the South African Philosophical Society (Cape Town), and the Oneida County (N. Y.) Historical Society were placed on the exchange list to receive Proceedings from No. 96. Acceptances of Membership : Prof. Serge Nikotin (St. Petersburg, March 12, 1886), Lieut. Geo. L. Anderson, U. S. Army (West Point, N. Y., March 22, 1886). Letters of Envoy were received from the South African Philosophical Society, Cape Town, Africa ; Bureau of Longi- tudes, Paris ; Royal Society, Bath and West of England Society, and the publishers of the " Diplomatic Review," London ; U. S. Geological Survey, Washington. Acknowledgments for No. 122, as follows: Portland Society of Natural History ; New Hampshire Historical Society ; Profs. Robt. C. Winthrop and S. P. Sharpies of Boston; Prof. H. A. Hagan of Cambridge, Mass.; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester ; Essex Institute ; Rhode Island Historical Society, and Rhode Island Society for the Encouragement of Domestic Industry ; Connecticut Historical Society ; Mr. Geo. F. Dun- ning of Farmington, Conn. ; University of the City of New York ; Astor Library ; Profs. Henry M. Baird and John J. Stevenson of New York ; U. S. Military Academy, West Point; Profs. James E. Oliver and T. Fred'k Crane of Ithaca, N .Y. ; Prof. C. H. F. Peters of Clinton, N. Y.; New Jersey Historical PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 3E. PRINTED AUGUST 9, 1886. 450 [April 2, Society; Prof. W. Henry Green of Princeton, N. J.; Mr. "Wm. John Potts of Camden, N. J.; Pennsylvania Hospital, The Nu- mismatic and Antiquarian Society, College of Physicians, Prof. J. P. Lesley, Dr. Persifor Frazer, Messrs. Samuel Wagner, Henry Phillips, Jr., and Dr. Isaac Norris of Philadelphia ; Mr. Thomas Meehan of Germantown ; Dr. E. H. Alison of Ardmore, Pa.; Profs. Pliny Chase and L. B. Hall, Haverford College; Hon. W. Townsend of West Chester ; Eev. J. A. Murray of Carlisle; the Wyoming Historical and Geological Society; Profs. Traill Green and J. W. Moore of Easton; U. S. Naval Institute ; the Signal Office, and the Surgeon-General's Office, and Prof. J. H. C. Coffin of Washington ; Leander McCormick Observatory ; Virginia Historical Society ; Prof. J. W. Mallet and Messrs. Scheie de Yere and Jed. Hotchkiss of Virginia ; Georgia Historical Society ; Cincinnati Society of Natural History ; Prof. James Morgan Hart, of Cincinnati ; Prof. Leo. Lesquereux of Columbus, Ohio ; Dr. Eobert Peter of Lexing- ton, Ky.; Prof. Daniel Kirkwood of Bloomington, Ind.; Chicago Historical Society; Prof. Henry S. Frieze of Ann Arbor, Mich.; State Historical Society of Wisconsin ; Kansas Histori- cal Society. Dr. Frederick S. Krauss, of Vienna, acknowledged the receipt of his separata; Academia Eoyale Danoise des Science et Lettres (117, 118, 119); Societe de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle, Geneva (115, 116); Sig. G. Battista Eossi of Eome, Italy (117, 118, 119) ; Mr. Eobert N. Toppan, of Cambridge, Mass. (117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122); Lieut. A. B. Wyckoff, Drs. Charles A. Oliver and J. W. Holland of Philadelphia (121, 122); Mr. Heber S. Thompson of Pottsville, Pa. (Diploma and 122) ; Eev. Thos. C. Porter of Easton, Pa. (121, 122). Committee on Prof. Cope's paper was continued. Lieut. Wyckoff read a paper on the Use of Oil in Storms at Sea. Mr. Ashburner gave a review at some length of the struc- tural geological features attending the occurrence of natural gas. 1886.] ^Ol Nominations Nos. 1078 to 1106 and new nominations Nos. 1107 and 1108 were read. The rough minutes were read, and the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. Stated Meeting, April 19, 1886. Present, 11 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the' Chair. Dr. John H. Brinton, a newly-elected member, was presented to the Chair and took his seat. Donations for the library were received from the following : The Eoyal Society of Tasmania ; Prof. Serge Nikitin of St. Petersburg ; Zoologische Anzeiger, Leipzig ; Prof. Gr. vom Path of Bonn; Wiirtembergische Vierteljahrshefte fur Lan- desgeschichte ; R. Nordiske Oldskrift Selskab, Copenhagen ; Academie Eoyale de Belgique; R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome; Societe Toscana di Scienze ISTaturali; Institution Ethnographique, Paris ; R. Academia de la Historia, Madrid ; Royal Society, " Nature," and Mr. William Blades of Lon- don ; Ronsdon Observatory, Devon ; Cambridge Philosophical Society ; Yorkshire Geological and Polytechnic Society ; the publishers of "The Citizen" and Mr. Hamilton Andrews Hill of Boston ; Rhode Island Historical Society ; American Journal of Science, New Haven, Conn. ; New York Shakes- peare Society ; Oneida Historical Society, Utica, N. Y. ; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; College of Pharmacy and Hydrographic Office, Philadelphia ; Johns Hopkins University ; Chief Signal Office, Census Office and Mr. J. H. Hickcox of Washington, D. C. ; Elliott Society of Science and Arts, Charleston, S. C. ; State Historical Society of Wisconsin ; University of California ; Mr. C. B. Bradley of Sacramento, Cal. ; Imperial Observatorio da Rio de Janeiro; Mr. S. H. Scudder, Cambridge, Mass. ; Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Phila- delphia. 452 [May Letters of acknowledgment were received as follows : Eev. H. Clay Trumbull and Eev. Daniel R. Goodwin of Philadel- phia ; Mr. John Haines of Germantown ; Maryland Historical Society ; Mr. Charles V. Riley of "Washington ; Cincinnati Observatory ; Universities of Tennessee and California ; Mr. George Davidson of California (122) ; Royal Society of Vic- toria (116, 117, 118 and Register of Papers) ; R. Accademia dei Lincei and R. Istituto Lombardo (117-120); Royal In- stitution and Radcliffe Observatory (121); Society of Anti- quaries of London (120, 121) ; Mr. Robert N. Toppan of Cam- bridge, Mass. (119) ; Oneida Historical Society (96-122 and miscellaneous pamphlets). Letters of envoy were received as follows: Oneida Histori- cal Society, Utica, N. Y., and the Chief Signal Officer, U. S. Army, "Washington, D. C. Photographs were received for the Society's Album from Charles V. Riley of "Washington, D. C, and Dr. Traill* Green of Easton, Pa. The death of John Welsh was announced as having taken place at Philadelphia on the 10th day of April, 1886, in the 82d year of his age, and on motion the President was author- ized to appoint a suitable person to prepare an obituary notice. The Committee on Prof. Cope's paper was continued. Pending nominations Nos. 1081 to 1108, and new nominations Nos. 1109, 1110, 1111, were read, and the Society was adjourned bv the President. Stated Meeting, May 7, 1886. Present, 4 members. Mr. Law, in the Chair. Donations were announced to the library from the follow- ing sources : Mining Department, Melbourne ; Physical Cen- tral-Observatorium, St. Petersburg ; K. K. Geologische Reichs- 1886.] 453 anstalt, K. K. Zoologisch-Botanische Gesellschaft, K. K. Cen- tral Anstalt fur Meteorologie und Erd-Magnetismus, Vienna ; Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Anthropologic, Ethnologie und Ur- geschichte, Munich ; Prof. Dr. G. D. E. Weyer of Kiel; K. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin ; K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften,Gottingen ; Natur wissenschaftliche Gesellschaft, St. Gallen ; Academie Royale cle Copenhagen ; Statistika Central Byran, Stockholm ; Academie Royale des Sciences, &c, Bruxelles; Societe de Geographie, Societe Americaine de France, Institution Ethnographique and Prof. Leon de Rosny of Paris ; Institute y Observatorio de Marina, San Fernando ; R. Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale di Firenze ; Cav. Damiano Muoni of Milan; Royal Society, Royal Institution, Zoological Society, Royal Astronomical and Geographical Societies, " Nature," Journal of Forestry of London ; Manitoba Histori- cal Society ; Canadian Record of Science, Montreal ; American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Massachusetts Historical So- ciety, Boston; Essex Institute; Yale College, American Journal of Science, New Haven ; Meteorological Observatory and New York Academy of Sciences ; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Buffalo Historical Society ; Geological Survey of New Jersey ; Franklin Institute, American Pharmaceutical Association, Board of Directors of City Trusts, Hydrographic Office, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr. and the publishers of The American Naturalist, Philadelphia ; Board of Commissioners of Public Charities of Pennsylvania, Harrisburg; Prof. Ira Remsen, Johns Hopkins University, and The American Journal of Archaeology, Baltimore; Department of State and War De- partment, "Washington ; Messrs. A. C. McClurg & Co., Chicago ; University of Michigan. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the K. Danske Yidenskabernes Selskab, Copenhagen (116 and Reg- ister of Papers) ; Lackawanna Institute of History and Science (117, 118, 119, 120, 121, Cat. Parts 1, 2, 3, 4) ; South Kensington Museum, Cambridge Philosophical Society, and University Library, Prof. Geikie (121); Dr. J. T. Rothrock and Prof. L. M. Haupt of Philadelphia (122) ; Zoological 454 [May 21, Society of London (120, 121) ; Institut Canadien-Francais, and the Manitoba Historical Society, Canadian Institute (121, 122); Annales des Mines, Paris (Trans. XIV, 2). Prof. Cope requested permission to withdraw the paper offered by him for the Transactions on February 5, 1886, which on motion was granted and the paper was presented by him for the Proceedings. On motion the Committee on same appointed February 5, 1886, was discharged. Prof. Cope offered for the Transactions "A systematic cata- logue of the Vertebrata found in the beds of the Permian Epoch in North America," which was referred to a Committee to be appointed by the President. Dr. A. S. Gatschet of Washington, presented through the Secretaries a paper on The Beothuk Language (second paper) ; with a vocabulary. Pending nominations Nos. 1081 to 1111 were read. Dr. Frazer exhibited the map to accompany his Geology of York County, Pa., stating the colors were in accordance with the new International method of the late Geological Congress at Berlin. Dr. Frazer also exhibited a plate to accompany his paper on the application of Composite Photography to hand- writing. On motion the appropriation for the map was increased to $60 and that for the photographic plate to $56. And the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. Stated Meeting, May 21, 1S86. Present, 37 members. President Fraley in the Chair. Donations to the library were received from the following: Geological Survey, of India ; Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Bremen ; Flora Batava, Leyden; Academie E de Belgique ; 1886.] 455 Societe E. des Sciences de Liege ; R. Accademia dei Lincei, Borne ; R. Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale di Firenze, and Mr. Alessandro Chapelli ; Institution Ethnographique, Paris ; Royal Society, Royal Geographical Society. Meteorological Council, " The Asclepiad," " Nature," of London ; and Sir Lowthian Bell, Prof. C. Piazzi Smyth, of Edinburgh ; Boston Society of Natural History, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge ; Free Public Library of New Bedford ; American Chemical Society, New York ; Historical Society of Pennsyl- vania, Zoological Society of Philadelphia, Engineers' Club, Fairmount Park Association, University of Pennsylvania, College of Pharmacy, Charles A. Oliver, M.D., Hon. Richard Vaux, Henry Phillips, Jr., and Prof. Edward Y. d'Invilliers, of Philadelphia ; Johns Hopkins University and Chemical Journal, Baltimore ; U. S. Naval Institute, Smithsonian Insti- tution ; Col. Charles C. Jones of Augusta, Ga., and the Iowa State Historical Society. Letters of envoy were received from R. Instituto di Studi Superiori in Firenze, and the Meteorological Office, London. Letters of acknowledgment were read from K. K. Central- Anstalt fiir Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismiis (120) ; Fond a - tion de P. Teyler van der Hulst (120, 121) ; Prof. W. P. Blake, of New Haven (122). Notice was received from " The Young Men's Association " and "The Young Men's Library," that they had consolidated, and changed their name to " The Buffalo Library." On motion, the Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale, Firenze, Italia, was placed on the exchange list and ordered to receive the Proceedings of the Society from No. 121. A letter accepting membership was read from Dr. Edward Pepper (Paris, May 7, 1886). Prof. Cope presented for the Proceedings "An Analytical Table of the Genera of Snakes." He requested a plate for his paper on Amphiuma, which the Society ordered at an esti- mated cost. Prof. T. B. Stowell presented through the Secretaries a paper on the " Trigeminus Nerve in the Domestic Cat," accompanied 456 [May 21, by a plate ; on motion the Secretaries were empowered to act on the application. The President announced that he had appointed as a Committee on the paper of Prof. Cope, presented at the last meeting, Messrs. Allen, Jayne and Horn, who reported the paper worthy of publication, which was ordered by the Society. The President reported that he had received and handed over to the Treasurer $129.33, the amount of the Michaux rentes due on the first of April, 1886. The proceedings of the Board of Officers and Council were submitted together with the following resolution recommended by it: "That the further consideration of the Report and the recommendations therein contained, which was referred to the Board of Officers and Council by resolution of the Society, March 5, 1886, be indefinitely postponed." Dr. Frazer offered the following amendment to the resolu- tion : Resolved, That the Report of the Special Committee, appointed Febru- ary 5, 1886, to examine, etc., etc., which has been referred to the Board of Officers and Council by resolution of the Society of March 5, 1886, be recommitted to the Special Committee just appointed with instruc- tions to present it with such alterations and amendments as may seem desirable at the meeting of the Society on October 15, 1886. A point of order was taken and it was decided by the President that a motion to postpone was entitled to precedence. And the question recurring on the resolution submitted by the Board, it was adopted by a vote of 26 yeas to 11 nays, the yeas and nays being demanded by Dr. Frazer. This being the evening for the balloting for candidates for membership, the following gentlemen were declared duly elected members of the Society : 2073. Samuel W. Pennypacker, Philadelphia. 2074. John T. Napier, Philadelphia. 2075. William Spohn Baker, Philadelphia. 2076. Benjamin Sharp, M. D., Philadelphia. 2077. Henry Keed, Philadelphia. 1886.] 457 2078. John Marshall, M. D., Philadelphia. 2079. Merrill Edwards Gates, New Brunswick, N. J. 2080. William K. Brooks, Baltimore, Md. 2081. Herbert B. Adams, Baltimore, Md. 2082. R. Somers Hayes, St. Louis, Mo. 2083. John 0. Branner, Bloomington, Ind. 2084. Abel Hovelacque, Paris, France. 2085. Emil Levasseur, Paris, France. 2086- Victor Duruy, Paris, France. 2087. Marquis de Nadaillac, Paris, France. 2088. Francis Pulzsky, Buda-Pesth. 2089. Otto Donner, Helsingfors. 2090. Angelo de Gubernatis, Florence, Italy. 2091. Paul Albrecht, Bruxelles. 2092. Josef Szombathy, Vienna. 2093. Dionysius Stuer, Vienna. 2094. Edward Suess, Vienna. 2095. Aristides Brezina, Vienna. 2096. W. W. Skeat, Cambridge, England. 2097. J. P. Postgate, Cambridge, England. 2098. Richard C. Temple, Ambala, India. 2099. Lord Rayleigh, London. 2100. William Crookes, London. 2101. Francis Galton, London. 2102. Duke of Argyll, London. 2103. Jesus Sanchez, Mexico. 2104. Antonio Penafiel, Mexico. And the Society was adjourned at 10 o'clock by the Presi- dent. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 123. 3f. PRINTED AUGUST 11, 1886. May 21, 1886.J ^J [Stowell. PROCEEDINGS AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, ERRATUM. Page 456, line 22, for jmt read first. tions which otherwise would be obscure, it is none the less true that morphology must precede physiology ; knowledge of structure forms the basis of knowledge of function. It may be added that human physiology, so called, is almost entirely comparative physiology ; isolated experiments, independent of those performed upon animals exclusive of man, cannot establish law. The influence of the nervous system upon function, and the complexity of physiological experimentation arising from this cause, are familiar to every laboratory student of this subject. These considerations are a sufficient apology for the present "Study of Nervus Trigeminus" as a contribution to comparative neurology. Reasons for the selection of the domestic cat have been stated elsewhere (Anatomical Technology, p. 55, v. Bibliography, 33). The study of N. Vagus (The Vagus Nerve in the Domestic Cat, 27) and the present study cannot fail to convince that in general plan, and even in detail of structure and distribution, the nervous system of the cat forms a desirable basis for comparative neurology, and possesses special advantages as a preliminary to anthropotomic neurology. The writer is not aware that any one has published the details of the distribution of the trigeminus nerve in the domestic cat. He regrets that he has not been able to obtain Swan's work (29), in which are described the cranial nerves of the jaguar. He cannot reconcile the wide discrepancy between the origin, distribu- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124, 3g. PRINTED NOV. 30, 1886. May21,1886.J 45 J [Stowell. PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXIII. December, 1886. No. 124. Ihe Trigeminus Nerve in the Domestic Cat (Felis domestica). By T. B. Stowell, Ph.D. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 21, 1SS6.) The importance of the study of comparative neurology may be argued from the standpoint of anatomy, physiology, pathology and biology. The value attached to such study depends largely upon individual bias, arising from education or from the end to be served by such knowledge. Admitting that physiology may determine or suggest anatomical rela- tions which otherwise would be obscure, it is none the less true that morphology must precede physiology ; knowledge of structure forms the basis of knowledge of function. It may be added that human physiology, so called, is almost entirely comparative physiology ; isolated experiments, independent of those performed upon animals exclusive of man, cannot establish law. The influence of the nervous system upon function, and the complexity of physiological experimentation arising from this cause, are familiar to every laboratory student of this subject. These considerations are a sufficient apology for the present "Study of Nervus Trigeminus " as a contribution to comparative neurology. Reasons for the selection of the domestic cat have been stated elsewhere (Anatomical Technology, p. 55, v. Bibliography, 33). The study of N. Vagus (The Vagus Nerve in the Domestic Cat, 27) and the present study cannot fail to convince that in general plan, and even in detail of structure and distribution, the nervous system of the cat forms a desirable basis for comparative neurology, and possesses special advantages as a preliminary to anthropotomic neurology. The writer is not aware that any one has published the details of the distribution of the trigeminus nerve in the domestic cat. He regrets that he has not been able to obtain Swan's work (29), in which are described the cranial nerves of the jaguar. He cannot reconcile the wide discrepancy between the origin, distribu- PROC. AMER. PHILOS. S0C. XXIII. 124, 3o. PRINTED NOV. 30, 1886. Stowell.] 4b0 [May 21, tion, etc., of this nerve in American cats, and the origin, etc., as published by Mivart (18, p. 271). The ectal origin has been described by Wilder (33, 34). Most of this work was done in the anatomical laboratory of the Cornell University, where special facilities are afforded for original research. Preparation: The cats were injected with the "starch injection mnss" (Anatomical Technology, 2d ed., p. 140-141, 34). Brains were dissected "recent" and "hardened in alcohol;" there are advantages peculiar to each for tracing the ultimate distribution of nerve filaments. Dissections were verified from both kinds of specimens. For preliminary examina- tion, it is suggested that the student begin at the foramina of exit and trace peripherad ; this will avoid confusion in identification and the inad- vertent severing of anastomotic filaments. A more thorough dissection can subsequently begin with any of the peripheral rami — e. g., N. digas- tricus or N. auriculo-temporalis — and proceed centrad. NERVUS TRIGEMINUS. Synonymy: Nervus trigeminus ; N. divisus seu gustatorius ; N. quintus, seu trenullus, seu mixtus, seu sympaiheticus medius, seu sympathicus medius, seu anonymous, seu innominatus ; Par trigeminum seu quintum nervorum cerebralium, seu trium funiculorum ; Trifacial; The fifth pair of nerves. This nerve presents the following characters, viz : General Characters: The constancy of its characters and the striking resemblance, even of details, to the human trigeminus ; the size — it is the largest of the cranial nerves ; the analogy to the spinal nerves — the origin and the double function refer this nerve to that class of cranial nerves which admits of ready comparison with the spinal nerves (this homology is incomplete, by reason of the unequal distribution of the sensory and the motor filaments) ; the two roots, the larger is ganglionic, the smaller is without ganglion ; these root functions are sensory and motor respect- ively. To the ganglionic or sensory division is referred the sensibility of the face, cheek, forehead, external ear (auris ectalis), pili tactiles, vibrissa?, eye (conjunctiva), teeth, lips, mouth, nose, dorsum of tongue ; the non-gangli- onic or motor division is distributed chiefly to the muscles of mastication ; to these functions may be added the influence of this nerve upon the glands (parotid, submaxillary, sublingual, lachrymal, buccal (?)), and its undetermined action upon the middle ear. There are several ganglionic masses ectad of the cranium which sustain intimate relations with this nerve. Each of these ganglia seems to com- municate with a motor, a sensory and a sympathic root or nerve, and thence to distribute filaments to structures more or less contiguous. Physiological Characters : 1. Simple nerves of sensation. 2. Mixed or myelic nerves. 1886.1 - 461 [Stowell. 3. Nerves of common sensation with a specialized function and with motor filaments. 4. Nerves which directly or through their relation with N. sympathicus indirectly control or modify glandular secretion. It is unsatisfactory to attempt to classify the function of N. tensor tym- pani and the filament to the tentorium cerehelli. DESCRIPTION. Origin: The study of the entocranial portions of the trigeminus nerve includes the description of the ental (deep) and the ectal (apparent) origins of both portions. The ental origin has not been satisfactorily determined. Preliminary work based upon Mondino's Golgi's perchloride of mercury method (Jour- nal of Royal Microscopical Society, N. S. V., Part 5, p. 904, 16) indicates a method for the solution of this difficult problem. The method for tracing nerve-tracts in the brain and spinal cord as pub- lished in Brain, Vol. viii, p. 86, may prove serviceable in this connection. The impracticability of positively establishing the relations of the two roots without serial transverse sections leaves the ental origin involved in obscurity ; the following general relations, determined under a magnifying power of 15-20 diameters, may serve to indicate the wide-spread origin of this nerve, and also the necessity of making serial sections along a consid- erable portion of the neuron. The fasciculi, by whose confluence the nerve-trunks are formed, may be designated the Proximate roots: From morphological considerations alone it would be natural to treat this nerve as having two roots, the motor and the sen- sory. Radix motoria : The motor root generally — not invariably — consists of two packets, the dorsal or cerebellar, and the ventral or epicoelian. The fasciculi of the dorsal root often lie free of the pons, or they inter- digitate with the pons ; they may be traced along with medipeduncular fibres to the cerebellum ; the motor root frequently contains fibres from the pons. The larger or ventral root generally lies wholly free of the pons (some of its fibres may interdigitate with the pons). It forms the caudal border of the emarginate pons, and may be traced caudad of the prepeduncle to the floor of the epicoele, about 2 mm. laterad of the meson, at which point the fibres bend abruptly ventrad. The two-fold origin of this root is suggestive of difference of function. Radix 8ensoria: The sensory root seems to have a four-fold origin ; these roots, by virtue of their course, may be nanied cephalic, dorsal, caudal and ventral roots respectively. Rx. cephalica may be traced with some radical fibres of the prepeduncle into the floor of the epicoele, and thence cephalad to the region of the preopticus. Do not these fibres suggest an entaj origin similar to the anthropotomic Stowell.] 462 [May 21, origin demonstrated by Meynert (28, p. 732 et seq.) and by Spitzka (26, The Central Tubular Grey, p. 72).? Ex. dorsalis is apposed to the medipeduncle, and is traceable with it into the cerebellum. Ex. candalis extends parallel with the meson to a region of the meten- cephal just entad of the olive. This considerable fascicle points to an ental origin several mm. caudad of a transection through the caudal border of the pons, and in the region of the olive. Ex. centralis : The fourth radicule comes from the epiccele in the same region as the ventral root of Rx. motoria ; its course is laterad, and lies caudad of the medipeduncle, and ventrad of the medipeduncle and pre- peduncle. Ectal Origin: There is some variation in the ectal origins of this nerve in different animals. This variation may be referred to the variation in general configuration of the brain, and does not prevent homologization. " When the pons is less developed than in man, the nerve (trigeminus) is attached behind (caudad of) that part between it and the trapezium of the medulla oblongata" (30, Vol. ii, 270). Wilder summarizes as follows : "In the cat the nerve is always nearer the caudal than the cephalic border of the pons." "Sometimes the entire nerve passes just caudad of the pons, which is then usually somewhat emarginate at that point." "Sometimes, perhaps more often, some of the fibres of the nerve interdigitate with those which form the caudal margin of the pons" (33). As already indicated, the proximate roots by their confluence form two nerves with distinct ectal origins, but which are intimately related in their distribution. Eadix motoria (Rx. mtr.), the smaller of these nerves, lies upon the mesal border of Rx. sensoria. It is a slender ribbon-like packet composed of 6-9 funiculi ; it sustains this general relation for about 5 mm.; near the cephalic border of the pons it crosses the ventral surface of a large flat- tened ganglion, G. gasseri, q. v., and finds its exit with N. mandibularis through the oval foramen. Its distribution is given with N. mandibularis. Eadix sensoria (Rx. sn.), the larger and ganglionic nerve, takes its ectal origin from the proximate roots which lie chiefly caudad of the pons. The caudal border of the nerve is not infrequently in a line with the caudal border of the pons, but this relation is occasioned by the emarginate bor- der of the pons against which the nerve-trunk rests. • In the examination of the brains of Felis leo and F. conrolor (one of each) and F. dome&lica (a large number), in the museum of Cornell Uni- versity, I have not found a single instance in which any fibre of the pons passes wholly caudad of the trigeminus. Only a lew of the fibres of the cephalic border of Rx. sensoria ever interdigitate with the pons, and this condition does not exist in the majority of brains examined. In some of the brains hardened in alcohol a few filaments from the pons seem to be 1886.] 4fao [Stowell. continuous with Rx. sensoria. In injected brains the sensory root is sepa- rated from the motor by an arteriole, a small twig from A. basilaris interior. In one instance a fascicle from the trapezium crossed the base of the tri- geminus in such relation as to be easily mistaken for fibre from the pons The emargination of the pons may have led to a misconception of the freedom of origin of this root. In one case cited by Wilder (unpublished) a fascicle from the cephalic surface of the sensory root passed centrad near the middle of the pons. - Summary — Ectal Origin: 1. Fibres of the pons aie found caudad of the lateral and cephalic moiety of the motor root. 2. Sometimes the motor root is entirely free of the pons. 3. The entire motor root never penetrates the pons. 4. The sensory root never penetrates the pons. GANGLION GA.SSERI. Synonymy: Ganglion gasseri ; Ganglium gasseri; G. gasserianam ; G. semilunare ; Moles gangliformis ; Intumescentia gangliformis seu semi- lunaris ; Tamia nervosa Halleri ; Ganglion of the fifth nerve, etc. Description (Fig. G.) : At the cephalic border of the pons the sensory root is involved in a large flattened ganglion ; this ganglion is lodged in the fossa upon the dorsal surface of the basi-sphenoid bone caudad ot the foramen ovale, Fm. rotundum and Fm. lacerum anterius ; the lateral angle is covered by the ventral wing of the osseous tentorium ; the tento- rium cerebelli is intimately related with the dorsum of G. gasseri, and is with difficulty separated from it. The ganglion is a flattened, irregular body 8 mm. long by 4 mm. wide ; the cephalic border is trichotomous, and gives origin to the principal rami of the sensory root ; the mesal border is nearly straight, and is in contact with the processus clinoideus ; the lateral border is crescentic, and is characterized by a peculiar enlargement at its caudal extremity ; this eminence is the origin of the first rami of the tri- geminus ; one ramus (Pe) enters the hiatus Fallopii, and gives origin to several funiculi, by which it is related with the facial nerve through three canals in the petrous portion of the temporal bone, and also with the glosso-pharyngeal and vagus nerves (through foramen jugulare). From the lateral angle of the eminence a filament (Tn) is given to the tentorium cerebelli ; it lies apposed to the petrosal ramus ectad of the facial nerve.* Upon its ventral surface G. gasseri is in relation with the motor root, and also with the large petrosal nerve which proceeds from the geniculate ganglion (this nerve follows the aqueductus fallopii, emerges from the hi- atus fallopii, crosses G. gasseri and joins the vidian nerve just centrad of the vidian canal). * This can be best demonstrated by exposing the base of the brain, by the re- moval of the basioceipital and basisphenoid bones, and then with nippers and arthrotome (34, pp. 63. 66), gradually removing the petrous portion of the tem- poral bone. This will expose the tortuous canal with the included nerves. Stowell.] 404: [May 21, The mesal border of G. gasseri is contiguous with the oculomotorins (iii) upon its venter, and with the trochlears (iv) upon the dorsum. The cephalic border is involved more or less in a dense rete arteriale from A. earotidea externa, and receives filaments from the adjacent plexus sym- pathicns carotideus. ECTOCRANIAL RAMI. Eetad of the cranium the trigeminus is represented by three nerve- trunks and their respective rami. These trunks may be regarded as off- sets of the Gasserian ganglion ; they leave the cranium by distinct fora- mina. By virtue of distribution, they are named N. mandihularis, N. maxillaris and N. ophthalmicus. (Fig. Man. Mx. Oph.) NERVUS MANDIBULARIS. Synonymy: N. mandibularis ; Inferior maxillary branch; Mandibular nerve. General Characters: This is the lateral ramus of the trigeminus ; it is also the largest and widest in distribution. The motor root (Rx. motoria) is given exclusively to this trunk just pheripherad of the Gasserian gan- glion— hence its varied character and two-fold function. It supplies sen- sory and motor structures and glandular organs. Its rami are distributed to the integument of the ear, the cheek and the chin \ to the vibrissa?, the labial papillae, the teeth and gums of the mandible, the sensory organs upon the dorsum of the tongue ; to the muscles of mastication and to the salivary glands. Special Description: N. mandibularis is the lateral offset of the Gas- serian ganglion ; just peripherad of the ganglion it is joined by the motor root (Rx. mtr.) of the trigeminus ; peripherad of this union the motor and the sensory fibres require physiological rather than morphological identi- fication ; its foramen of.exit is the foramen ovale ; peripherad of the cra- nium the trunk divides into six or more rami, which require separate de- scriptions : N. temporo-auricularis : Superficial temporal ; temporal cutaneous. Origin : This nerve takes its ectal origin at the foramen ovale ; it is the lateral ramus of the nerve-trunk. (Fig. Tmp. aur.) Course : It is first directed ventrolaterad, entad of the muscles and the A. earotidea externa ; it lies close to the zygomatic process ; at the ven- trad border of the process it bends dorsad over the process, and lies cau- dad of the A. temporalis externa and entad of the submaxillary and the parotid glands. The general course is toward the cephalic border of the external ear (auris ectalis). Entad of the parotid gland it divides into two principal rami, which, by reason of general direction, are designated ce- phalic and caudal. Communicating Rami and Relations : Just caudad of the zygomatic process this trunk gives a small twig to the mandibular articulation ; it sustains relations with the otic ganglion by a slender fascicle which may 1886.] 405 [Stowell. be regarded as the root, or one of the roots, of the ganglion ; it also joins the facial nerve, and gives filaments to the base of the ear (cartilago audi- torius). Dorsad of the meatus auditorius the auriculo -temporal nerve lies entad of the parotid gland ; in this region its course is entad of the facial nerve, with which nerve it assumes plexiform relations (Fig. Tmp. Fac). A. temporalis lies between N. tmp. aur. and N. tmp. fac. ; ramuli (N. N. parotidei) enter the substance of the gland (Gl. par.). Near the middle of the gland the auriculotemporal nerve divides into cephalic and caudal rami (Fig.). N. tmp. aur. cephalicus becomes a distinct nerve at the cephalo-dorsal angle of the parotid gland. Its course is toward the eye until it reaches the zygomatic border of the masseter muscle, when it follows the border of the muscle to the angle of the mouth. It anastomoses freely with N. temporo-facialis (Fig. Tmp. fac), which lies upon the ectal surface of the masseter muscle just dorsad of the Stenon's duct, and terminates in the plexus at the angle of the mouth, plexus labialis (PI. lab.). It sends fila- ments to the integument between the eye and the base of the ear (auris ectalis), to the cheek ventrad of the eye, to the vibrissse, the dorsal lip, and to the papillae on the ental surface of the lip and to the mucosa in the region of the premolar teeth (Fig. p. m.). N. tmp. aur. caudalis is distributed chiefly to the external ear ; it may be traced with the terminal arterioles of A. temporalis, along the cephalic border of the ear ; terminal filaments are given to the long hairs which line the helix (Fig. Pili) ; a considerable ramulus enters the meatus near the tragus (tr.), and descending centrad supplies the external meatus; other filaments are distributed to the frontal region. A small twig from the caudal border of . this ramus just peripherad of the bifurcation of N. tmp. aur. anastomoses with the facial and terminates in the ventro -lateral border of the ectal ear and the hairs (Pili) between the lateral pocket and the tragus. This nerve does not appear to supply the dorsal surface of the external ear. N. massetericus has its origin at the foramen ovale from the dorsum of the mandibular nerve (Fig. Mass.\ in common with N. temporalis in- ternus (Tmp. int.) ; 2 mm. peripherad of the common origin, this nerve becomes a distinct ramus ; its course is dorsad for 8-10 mm., when it pene- trates the masseter muscle and is directed to the caudal border of the malar muscle. Along its dorsal border it gives off 6-10 ramuli to ter- minate in the masseter muscle. N. temporalis interims : The deep temporal has a common origin with the masseter, q. v. About 5 mm. peripherad of the origin an anastomotic filament connects these rami. The course of N. tmp. int. is dorsad and mesad of the temporal artery ; it is therefore concealed by the artery when viewed from the side. About 8 mm. from its origin the ramus divides into cephalic and caudal ramuli (Fig.) ; these supply the fan-shaped temporal muscle ; the length of the caudal ramulus is 45-50 mm. N. pterygoideus externus : This small nerve has its origin from the [Stowell. 4ub [May 21, mesal border of the mandibular nerve (Fig. Pter. ext.) : about 2 mm, from its origin it separates into three rami, which may be traced 8-10 mm. and then penetrate the pterygoid muscle, upon which muscle its terminal fila- ments ramify. N. buccalis is a large nerve which separates from the mesal border of the mandibular nerve (Fig. Buccalis) just ventrad of the defep temporal The first 5 mm. of its course is involved in the dense rete of the carotid artery ; its direction is toward the caudal angle of the maxilla ; it is ap- posed to the buccal artery, and lies between the pterygoid and the tempo- ral muscles. It gives filaments to the mucosa of the mouth (Fig.), a lew filaments to the malar border of the masseter muscle, and at the angle of the mouth it joins the plexus already named — Plexus labialis (PI. lab.). N. dentalis inferior together with N. lingualis form the principal rami or continuation of the mandibular nerve. It becomes a distinct nerve about 5 mm. peripherad of the foramen ovale. It lies ectad of the ptery- goid muscle, and enters the foramen infradentale with the mandibular artery. It lies along the dental canal ventrad of the artery, and gives fila- ments to the teeth (Fig. m., p. m., canine, incis.) and to the cancellous interior of the mandible ; a considerable fascicle continues peripherad through the mental foramen (Fm. men.); the terminal filaments anasto- mose with filaments of its platetrope. N. mentalis is the continuation of the dental nerve peripherad of the mental foramen ; it divides into several fasciculi, which anastomose in plexiform relations upon the ventral lip, the chin and the mucosa of the mandible. (N. digastricus and N. mylohyoideus join this plexus.) N. mylo-hyoideus is given from the mandibular nerve about 10 mm. centrad of the infra- dental foramen ; its course is apposed to the facial artery ; it lies entad of the artery as it crosses the mandible. Ventrad of the mandible it gives an anastomotic filament to the facial ; it continues 1-2 mm. mesad of the submental artery, and, following its arterioles, is distributed to the mylo-hyoid muscle. N. digastricus is a branch of the mylohyoid, or it may be regarded as a branch of the mandibular nerve peripherad of the point where the mylo- hyoid nerve lies ventrad of the mandible. About 3-4 mm. peripherad of this origin it divides into cephalic and caudal rami (Fig.). The cephalic ramus is apposed to the submental artery, supplies the distal half of the digastric muscle, and terminates in plexiform relations with the mental nerve ; the caudal ramus follows the digastric artery caudad about 10 mm., and supplies the digastric muscle as far as the angle of the mandible. N. lingualis has a common origin with the dental nerve ; 5 mm. periph- erad of the foramen ovale it takes a distinct course mesad of the dental nerve ; it lies ectad of the pterygoid muscle, apposed to a small arteriole just entad of the carotid and the dental arteries ; 15 mm. peripherad of its origin it takes three courses : (1) The cephalic ramus, N. pharyngeus (Phar.), is distributed to the 1886.] ^O* [Stowell. pharyngeal mucosa and along the ental surface of the mandible to the symphysis. (2) The middle ramus, the trunk proper, bends around the lateral border of the tongue, and enters its substance with the lingual artery 30 mm. proximad of the tip. (3) The caudal ramus enters the lingual muscle with the lingual artery about 25 mm. caudad of the tip ; this nerve seems to supply the muscle- fibre. The middle and caudal rami assume plexiform relations ; their numer- ous filaments generally accompany ramifying and anastomosing arterioles, and may be traced to the dorsum of the tongue ; the caudal ramus sustains plexiform relations with the hypoglossal nerve. (XII.) The lingual receives a considerable accession from the facial nerve, the chorda tympani (Fig. Chorda). N. submaxillaris : Just mesad of the origin of the digastric artery this branch separates from the lingual nerve ; it lies ectad of the artery ap- posed to Wharton's duct, which it freely supplies, and continues dorsad into the substance of the sublingual and submaxillary glands ; it termi- nates in a small ganglionic mass, G. submaxillare (G. S. max. ), near the origin of Wharton's duct. From this ganglion filaments may be traced to the substance of the gland. Chorda tympani : This nerve is an anastomotic branch between the lingual and the facial. Its physiological action upon salivation, as well as its tortuous course, gives to it a special interest. It separates from the facial as this nerve emerges from the cranium at the ganglion geniculatum (i'ntumescentia gangliformis) ; it returns a short distance in the canal ot the nerve trunk, and enters a canal in the bulla ; it penetrates the bulla, which it crosses dorsad, and enters the tympanum through a small fora- men, iter chordae posterius ; it crosses the tympanum about the middle of the malleus, somewhat mesad of the bone, and emerges through a minute foramen, iter chordse anterius, or the canal of Huguier, into the Gla- serian (?) fossa, thence along the canal to the ectocranial foramen ; as it emerges from the cranium it lies ventrad of the carotid and the pterygoid arteries and ectad of the pter}rgoid muscle ; it joins the lingual nerve 5-10 mm. peripherad of the foramen ovale. N. pterygoideua internus has a common origin with 1ST. tensor tympani from the lateral border of the mandibular nerve just ventrad of the auricu- lo-temporal nerve (Fig. Pter. int.). It lies parallel with the lingual nerve for 5 mm. ; it crosses the cephalic border of the external carotid artery, and accompanies the pterygoid artery ; its course is entad of the chorda tympani, and supplies the distal portion of the pterygoid muscle. N. tensor tympani: As the common nerve (V. supra) crosses the ce- phalic border of the carotid artery, N. tensor tympani (Fig. Ten. tym.) separates and bends around the ventral border of the artery, enters the otic ganglion, thence lies in the Glaserian fissure and terminates upon the PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3H. PRINTED NOV. 30, 1886. Stowell.] 4-bo [May 21, spherical tensor tympani muscle. This nerve does not seem to be incor- porated with the ganglion. G. oticum: Otoganglium ; G. auriculare ; Auricular ganglion, Ganglion of Arnold, etc. (Fig. Otic.) Upon the tensor tympani nerve just dorsad of the carotid artery, at the hiatus fallopii, is a small pinkish ganglion, oval in outline, about 2 mm. in long diameter. It is related by anastomotic filaments with the sympa- thic plexus (Sym.) around the carotid artery ; with the auriculotempo- ral nerve by a twig dorsad of the carotid artery (Fig. root) ; the artery appears to pass between the two roots (?) of the nerve, the ganglion being at their confluence. Two slender fascicles from the otic ganglion enter the hiatus fallopii and join the facial nerve. (Fig. Pe.) NERVUS MAXILLARIS. General Description: This is the middle ramus of the trigeminus ; it is intermediate in size between the other rami ; its course is immediately cephalad from the Gasserian ganglion through the foramen rotundurn, the foramen of exit. The ectocranial trunk crosses the spheno- palatine space, lies along the infraorbital fossa, and penetrates the infraorbital foramen. In its course it is dorsad of the maxillary artery. The length of the trunk from the ganglion Gasseri to the foramen iufra-orbitale is about 40 mm. It supplies the integument of the forehead, cheek, dorsal lip, side of the nose ; the vibrissse, conjunctiva, lachrymal gland, maxillary teeth, palate, pharynx, and the membrane over the turbinated bones. Detailed Description and Rami: N. maxillaris (Fig.), at the foramen of exit, is about 2 mm. in diameter ; at its ganglionic origin G. gasseri, it is somewhat intumescent ; upon the ventral surface of this enlargement it receives a considerable filament from the large superficial petrosal of the facial. This anastomotic filament lies obliquely across the ventral surface of the Gasserian ganglion, and penetrates the rete carotideum to reach the nerve. The central 5 mm. of its ectocranial course is involved in a dense rete of the carotid artery and the carotid plexus, from which plexus it aeems to receive filaments. The distribution of the nerve is given in the description of the rami. N. orbitalis (Fig.) is the first ramus of the ectocranial trunk, and is given off at the foramen of exit ; its course is dorsad, and extends about 2 mm., being involved throughout its course in the rete already described ; it is the common origin of N. temporalis and N. malaris, q. v. N. temporalis (Fig. Tmp.) is the caudal ramus of the orbital nerve ; its general course is toward the post-orbicular process (processus post orbicu- laris) ; 2-5 mm. peripherad of its origin it divides into cephalic and caudal rami. R. cejyhalicus (Fig. Tmp. ce.), the larger ramulus,1 passes ventnul of the post-orbicular process, and is distributed to the conjunctiva and integu- ment of the dorsal lid, and to the lachrymal gland; it sustains anastomotic relations with the palpebral nerve. 1386.1 4b" [Stowell. R. cavdalis (Fig. Trnp. ca.), a small ramulus, passes caudad of the pro- cess, bends caudad, and terminates in the integument over the forehead ; it anastomoses with the auriculotemporal nerve. N. malaris is the lateral ramus of the orbital ; its course is direct to the malar foramen (a small foramen in the malar bone just dorsad of the ce- phalic end of the zygomatic process) ; it penetrates this foramen, lies in a groove entad of the orbicular muscle, which it perforates near the angle of the eye, and is distributed to the ventral lid and cheek over the malar bone (this is the subcutaneous malar nerve of anthropotomy) ; its termi- nal filaments reach the labial plexus. N. palatinus cephalicus (Fig. Pit. ce. ) : About the middle of the rete carotideum three rami are detached from the ventral surface of the maxil- lary nerve ; these remain in the sheath for several mm. The cephalic ramus (Fig. Pit. ce.) lies ventrad of the palatine artery and enters the palatine foramen (the dorsal end of the posterior palatine canal) ; it sends an anastomotic filament to N. palatinus caudalis (Fig. Pit.). Just cen- trad of the palatine foramen (Fig. Fm. pit. p.) a large accession is received from the sphenopalatine ganglion (Sph.). (In some cases a fascicle from this nerve enters a small foramen just cau- dad of the posterior palatine foramen, and, following a canal in the pala- tine bone, joins the nerve at the posterior palatine foramen). Peripherad of this foramen (Fm. pit. p.) the nerve lies close to the hard palate, and joins the nasopalatine nerve at the anterior palatine foramen (Fm. pit. a. ) ; it sends numerous filaments to the ruga upon the roof of the mouth and to the adjacent mucosa. G-. spheno-palatinum (Sph.), Ganglion of Meckel : This ganglion is located just caudad of the palatine and the spheno-palatine foramina ; its cephalic angles or prolongations enter these foramina (Fig.) : it is flesh- colored, 6 mm. X 2 mm., flattened, irregular in outline, the mesal border slightly concave ; the lateral border is irregular by reason of the attach- ment of nerves ; its roots are two large rami (N. N. sph. pit. Fig. root) of the maxillary nerve, which take origin just peripherad of the cephalic palatine nerve, and are included in the common sheath with that nerve for 2-4 mm. ; the roots are inserted into the lateral angle of the ganglion about 1 mm. apart. Relations: This ganglion (Sph.) is related with the maxillary nerve by two roots ; with the carotid plexus (N. sympathicus) by two filaments (Sym.) from the caudal border between the roots and the vidian nerve ; with the cephalic palatine by a large fascicle from the cephalo-lateral angle. It is the origin of the nasopalatine nerve (N. pit.) at the spheno- palatine foramen ; the origin of N. pharyngeus near the vidian nerve ; of N. palatinus caudalis at the lateral border caudad of the palatine foramen, and of N. vidianus at the meso-caudal angle. N. palatinus caudalis (posterior) : This nerve (Fig. Pit.) takes its origin from the lateral border of the spheno-palatine ganglion justcentrad of the palatine foramen ; its course is ventrad and caudad ; 2-5 mm. lrona the Stowell.] 470 [May 21, ganglion it divides into two ramuli, the shorter of which (Fig. cephalic) is distributed to the roof of the mouth caudad of the rugae ; the longer (Fig. caudal) bends caudad and supplies the soft palate to its caudal border ; the caudal ramulus receives an anastomotic twig from N. pala- tinus cephalicus. N. pharyngeus, a small nerve, has its origin from the sphenopalatine ganglion at the origin of the vidian nerve (possibly the nerve is an offset of N. vidianus) ; it supplies the pharyngeal mucosa (not shown in the diagram). N. naso-palatinus is the principal offset of the spheno-palatine ganglion cephalad ; it enters the spheno-palatine foramen (Fm. Sph.), lies upon the floor of the nares, passes ventrad through the anterior palatine foramen (Fm. pit. a.), and anastomoses with the cephalic palatine nerve (Pit. ce.). Numerous filaments from this nerve are traced in plexiform relation upon the membrane which covers the turbinated bones and the floor of the nares. N. N. dentales caudales : Dorsad of the caudal angle of the maxillary bone a single filament is given off which penetrates the alveolus and sup- plies the molar tooth (Fig. m.) ; just cephalad, two considerable fasciculi (Dent, ca.) separate, lie along the infraorbital fossa, penetrate small fora- mina in the bone and terminate in the premolar teeth (Fig. p. m.) ; these dental nerves anastomose freely before they penetrate the bone, and also sustain a similar relation throughout the cancellous tissue of the alveoli ; filaments of these ramuli join the cephalic dental nerve (dent. ce.). N. dentalis cephalicus: Just caudad of t.he infraorbital foramen (Fig. Fm. inf. orb.) a considerable fascicle, X. dentalis cephalicus, penetrates the dental foramen (Fm. d.), together with an arteriole; it lies cephalo- mesad along a canal in the cancellous tissue of the maxillary bone, and gives nerve-supply to the canine tooth ; it continues mesad until the ter- minal filaments anastomose with the nasal plexuses upon the turbinated bone in the region of the premaxilla. This nerve receives filaments from the caudal dental rami, and becomes considerably enlarged in the canal between the canine tooth and the foramen which leads to the prenares. Is this enlargement the ganglion of Bochdalek? (Fig. B.) N. infra-orbitalis is the continuation of the maxillary peripherad of the infra-orbital foramen (Inf. orb.). The nerve-trunk divides into a leash of terminal fasciculi. N. labialis supplies the dorsal lip, the papillae on its ental surface, the adjacent mucosa and the vibrissa?. N. nasalis terminates upon the integument which covers the nasal cartilage. N. palpebralis is distributed to the ventral lid and the conjunctiva as far mesad as the nasal duct. N. lachrymalis takes a dorsal course around the orbit, and terminates in the lachrymal gland, where it anastomoses with the lachrymal nerve, an offset of the orbital (Tmp. ce.), q. v. 1886.] "* i J- [Stowell. N. Vidianus is a ribbon like offset of the meso-caudal angle of the spheno-palatine ganglion (Fig, Vidian) ; its course is caudad to the vidian canal. (The cephalic foramen of this canal is ventrad of the fora- men lacerum anterius ; the canal is 5-10 mm. in length. The caudal foramen opens upon the dorsum of the basi-spbenoid bone.) It lies along the canal, and at the caudal foramen the entocranial nerve lies ventrad of the Gasserian ganglion, and sends filaments to the eustachian tube, to the pharyngeal mucosa, and becomes N. petrosus superficialis major, which relates it to the facial nerve through a foramen in the petrous portion of the temporal bone. At the cephalic end, near the spheno-palatine ganglion, two filaments are given to the ophthalmic nerve ; the nerve is related with the maxillary through filaments which join the nerve-trunk just peripherad of the rete carotideum. NERVUS OPHTHALMICUS. General Description: N. ophthalmicus (Fig. Oph.) is the mesal offset of the Gasserian ganglion ; it is the smallest of the three nerve-trunks which proceed from the ganglion. The entocranial relations are with the trochlear nerve, which rests upon its dorsal surface (a tracer is required to separate the sheaths of these nerves) ; sometimes — not invariably — these nerves are related by anastomotic filaments with the oculo-moto- rius (III) along its ventral surface, and with the carotid artery by the rete carotideum which involves the nerve-trunk. The foramen of exit is the foramen lacerum anterius. The ectocranial relations are described in the distribution of the two rami, N. frontalis and N. oculo-nasalis. It is dis- tributed to the integument of the forehead, dorsal lid, side and end of the nose, to the pili tactiles, to the conjunctiva, the lacus lachrymalis, and the membrane over the turbinated bones ; to the trochlear and the ciliary muscles ; to the lachrymal gland,; to the dura mater. It communicates with the sympathic nerve. Its function is largely sensory. Special Description: Tbe central 5 mm. of the ecto cranial trunk is involved in a dense rete carotideum ; about 3 mm. peripherad of the fora- men lacerum anterius tbe trunk divides into two rami, N. frontalis and N. oculo-nasalis. N. frontalis is directed dorsi mesad, and bends around the caudal sur- face of the globe of the eye, lying ectad of the muscles ; there are really two fasciculi in a common sheath ; when upon the dorsi-meson of the globe the course is abruptly cephalad parallel with the meson to the mus- culus orbicularis palpebise ; before the nerve perforates the muscle, a con- siderable trunk, N. supra trochlearis (Fig. S-tro.), separates, and, follow- ing the supra-orbital ridge just entad of the fascia, it gives filaments to the dorsal lid, to the nasal duct, the angle of the eye (caruncula), and termi- nates upon the nasal integument ; an anastomotic filament relates this ramus with the palpebral branch of the maxillary nerve. Peripherad of the point where N. frontalis pierces the orbicular muscle, it is known as Stowell.J 4
  • . «.t B. ' Heterolepis Bin, DiaphorolepisJa.il. 1886.] 4yd [Cope. II. Anterior maxillaries isolated. a. Subeaudals in two rows. ft. Nareal region with a pit. Scales smooth ; anal entire Bothrolycus Gthr. ft. No nareal pit. j. Longest teeth at middle and posterior end of maxillary hone. Two nasals ; hody round Dinodon* D. & B. yy. Longest teeth at front of maxillary. Scales keeled ; two nasals ; a loreal Ophites Wagl. . Scales smooth ; two nasals ; a loreal Lycodon Boie. Scales smooth ; two nasals ; no loreal Tetragonosoma Gthr. Scales smooth ; one nasal ; a loreal Leptorkytaon Gthr. aa. Suhcaudal plates in one row. Scales keeled Cercaspis Wagl. Scales smooth Cyclocorus D. & B. Leptognathin^e. a. Suhcaudal scuta entire. Teeth of equal lengths Anoplodipsas Pet. Teeth elongate posteriorly Dipsadoboa Gthr. Teeth longer anteriorly Arnblycephalus Kuhl. aa. Suhcaudal scuta in two rows. ft. A median geneial plate. Maxillary bone very short ; one nasal plate Astlienodipsas Pet. Maxillary hone long ; two nasal plates Mesopeltis\ Cope. ftft. No median geneial plate. Teeth weak ; equal ; two nasals Leptognathus D. & B . Teeth longer in front ; one nasal Pareas Wagl. DlPSADINiE. I. Suhcaudal scuta. Parietal plates replaced by scales; other plates normal. .Pythonodipsas Gthr. II. Subcaudal scuteila. a. No teeth anterior to the grooved maxillary. Scales smooth Opist7ioplus Pet. aa. Median maxillary teeth not much shortened. Nostril large, between two nasals and the internasal ; vertebral scales larger Rhinobothryum Wagl. Two nasals enclosing nostril ; body elongate, compressed, anal entire ; vertebrals generally larger Dipsas% Laur. Two nasals enclosing nostril ; body less compressed ; anal double ; verte- bral row not larger ; one loreal Sibonfy Fitz- * Eumesodon Cope. t Aslhenognalhus Boc. % holga Fitz. Triglyphodon et Himantodes D. & B. Eudipsas Gthr. Toxi- codryas Hallow. Crotaphopellis Fitz. LepLodira Gthr. Cope.] 4J4 [May 21, No nasal ; vertebrals equal Hemidipsm* Gthr. aaa. Median maxillary teeth shortened. Two nasals and two or more loreals ; anal double ; vertebrals equal. Trimorphodon Cope. DASYPEIiTINvE. No grooved maxillary tooth ; no loreal plate ; scales keeled ; head very distinct Dasyveltis\ Wagl. A grooved maxillary tooth ; a loreal plate ; scales smooth ; head little distinct Elachistodon Rhdt. Homalopsin^:. % I. A grooved posterior maxillary tooth. * Muzzle with a pair of tentacular processes. One internasal plate ; parietals undivided Herpeton Lac. ** No tentacular processes. a. Scales keeled. /?. One internasal plate. Parietal plates undivided , Homalopsis Kuhl. ftp. Two internasal plates. Parietal plates subdivided Cerberus Cuv. aa. Scales smooth. /9. One internasal plate. v. Gastrosteges with two keels. Parietal plates subdivided HipiHtes% Gray. yy. Gastrosteges not keeled. Nasal plates in contact behind rostral ; eye resting on labial plates Sypsirhina\\ Wagl. Nasal plates in contact ; eye bounded below by scales. .Tachyplotus Rhdt. Nasal plates separate ; eye on labials Fordonia^ Gray. Nasal plates separate ; eye bounded with scales below. . Cantor ia** Gird. j3j3. Two internasal plates. Supraorbital and posterior labial plates subdivided ; two anals Homalophis Pet. Nasals in contact behind rostral ; parietals entire Ferania\ \ Gray. Two pairs of prefrontals ; nasal plates separate, undivided ; eye on labials ; anal double Releophis Midler. II. Posterior maxillary teeth not grooved. * Scales keeled. f Dentition diacranterian. * ChamcBtorlus Gthr. i lihachiodon Jour. Diodon Owen. A notion Smith. JCope, Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1861, p. 167. § Bitia Gray. |! Kurt, si, is I). * B. Pt. ? Phytolopais Gray. If Gerarda Gray. Oampylodon D. <& B. ** Hydrodipsas Peters. -it Trigonurus D. & B. Feranoidcs Carlleyle. 1886.1 ^° [Cope. One internasal plate ; no scale-pits Uelicops Wagl. Two internasals ; no scale-pits , Amplrfesma D. & B. Two internasals ; two scale-pits Bothrodytes* Cope. ft Dentition syncranterian or longer behind. a. One internasal plate. No scale-pits Atretium\ Cope. aa. Two internasal plates. /?. Two nasal plates. Anal plate divided ; two scale-pits Tropidonotm\ Kuhl Anal plate single ; no scale-pits Eutcenia B. & G /?/?. One nasal plate. Anal plate single ; rostral produced laterally 8typocemus% Cope. Anal plate divided ; rostral normal Amaslridium Cope. ftf Dentition isodont, or shorter behind. a. Anal plate divided. A loreal plate Regina || B. & G. No loreal plate Storeria^ B. & G. aa. Anal plate entire. (3. Two internasals. Head well distinguished ; a loreal and preocular plates.. AtomarcJius Cope. Head not distinct ; a loreal and a preocular plate. . . Tropidoclonium Cope. Head not distinct ; a preocular ; no loreal plate Adelophis Duges. A loreal ; no preocular plate Niuia** B. & G. A loreal and preoculars ; teeth longer anteriorly Prymnomiodon ('ope. /5y9. One internasal plate. Scales keeled ; two nasals and a loreal. Haldea\\ B. & G. ** Scales smooth. a. Dentition diacranterian. One internasal Liodytes\% Cope. aa. Dentition syncranterian. One internasal plate ; anals two Limnopliis Gthr. Two internasal plates ; anals two P3eudaspin%% Cope. aaa. Dentition isodont. Two internasals ; anal entire Ablabes\\ || D. & B. *Uen. nov. ; type Amphiesma subminiatum Reitiwt; second species B. tigri- nus = A . tigrinum Boie. t Taehynectes Fitz. Cope, Proc. Acad. Phila., 1864, p. 167. Hydrcethiops Gtluth. (nares superior). I Nerodia B.&Q. § Chilopoma Cope, preoccupied. || Trelanorhinus D. & B. 1[ Ischnognathus D. & B. ** Streptophorus D. & B. ft Conocephalus D. & B. JJType Helicops alleni Garman. gjj Type Coronella cana L. ; D. & B. |||| Nalrix Gthr. Neusterophis Gthr. Lycodonomorphus Fitz. sine dlaguosi; nee Ablabes Gthr. et auct., = Rhadincea, etc. Cope.l 490 (May 21, ACOXTIOPHID.E. Rostral plate deeply grooved below ; nasal single ; cephalic plates nor- mal ; scales smooth ; body round ; teeth, the posterior longest, not grooved Acontiophu Gthr. PROTEROGLYPHA. HYDROPHID^.* I. Gastrosteges wide, flat. Two pairs of frontal shields Platurus Latr II. Gastrosteges wide, with two keels. Scales imbricate ; one nasal Aepysun/s Lacep. Top of head scaly ; two nasals Pelagoplm Pet. & Dor III. Gastrosteges narrow, rudimentary, or absent. * Xasals separated by frontals. Gastrosteges distinct to vent Distira Lacep ** Nasals contiguous. Head covered with scales behind Acalyptus D. & B. Head short, entirely shielded ; no symphyseal notch. . . . HydropMs Daud. Head moderate, entirely shielded ; a deep symphyseal notch Enhydrina Gray. Snout long, spatulate Pelamis Daud. NAJID.E. I. Grooved teeth behind two perforated teeth on the os maxillare. Head-shields normal ; no loreal ; scales smooth ; form fusiform Ogmodonf Pet. II. Solid teeth behind the fang on the os maxillare. A. Loreal plate present. Subcaudals entire ; scales smooth Denisonia Krefft. AA. Loreal plate absent. a. The neck with few scales, not extensible. /?. Subcaudal scuta one-rowed. y. Scales of vertebral row equal to others. Nasals two ; scales smooth ; anal bifid Pseudechix Wagl. One nasal ; scales smooth ; anal single Uoplocephalus\ Cuv. One nasal ; scales keeled ; anal single Tropidechis Gthr. aa. Scales of vertebral line enlarged. Scales smooth ; two nasals ; anal entire Bungarns Daud. ftp, Subcaudal scuta two-rowed. *This table is mostly from Gunther, Reptiles Brit. India, 355. t Labionaris Brocclii. I AIi do Wagl. 1886.] 4. ' » [Cope. v. Scales of vertebral row equal. Rostral plate normal ; two nasals Diemenia* Gray. Rostral plate narrow ; produced backwards above ; two nasals Pseudonaja Gthr. Rostral wide, prominent, depressed ; one nasal Furina\ D. & B. Rostral normal ; one nasal ; anal double CacophisX Gtbr. yy. Scales of vertebral line enlarged. Scales smootb Megmrophis§ Gray. aa. Neck extensible, covered witb more numerous scales. j3. Anal entire ; subcaudals two-rowed. No postparietal plates >Naja\ Laur. Postparietals present. OphiypJiagus Gthr. III. No solid maxillary teeth. a. Subcaudal scuta in two rows, jg. Rostral plate much developed. Rostral free at the sides ; scales keeled Cyrtophis Sund. Rostral not free ; scales smooth ; anal entire Aspidelnps Fitz. Rostral not free ; anal entire ; two nasals Rhinelaps Gthr. fjp. Rostral not enlarged. Scales keeled Sepedon Merr. Scales smooth Callophis Gr. aa. Subcaudal scutella in one row. One nasal ; a spine at end of tail AcanthopJiis Daucl. ELAPID.E. a. Internasal plate touching the nasal laterally. One nasal plate Vermicella'H Gray. Two nasal plates Elaps Schn. aa. Internasal reaching first labial plate. One nasal ; no loreal Microsome, Jan. DENDRASPIDID.E. No solid teeth behind fang ; anal and subcaudal plates divided ; scales smooth Dendraspis** Schl. SOLENOGLYPHA. CAUSID.E. Subcaudals double, anal entire ; scales keeled : rostral prominent, with recurved border Heterophis Pet. *P*eridoeIaps D. &B. Elapsoidea Bocage. HemibimgarusPet.; includes Brachy- soma trisle Gthr. t Rrachyurophis Gthr. i Brachysoma Gthr. Boulengerina Dollo. § Xenurelaps Gthr. | Tomi/ris Eichw. r Homorelhps Jan. Poecilophis Gthr. ** Dinophis Hallow. Cope.] 4 JO [May 2J, Subcaudal and anal plates double ; scales keeled; rostral normal Causus "Wagl. Subcaudals and anal entire ; scales smooth ; rostral normal ; a loreal Dinodipsas Pet. ATRACTASPIDID^E. Head not distinct ; two nasals ; a loreal ; scales smooth; subcaudals entire Atractaspis Smith. VIPERID,^. I. Urosteges two-rowed. Nostril between two plates. Vipera* Laur. "Nostril between three plates " (Gthr.) Daboia Gray. Nostril surrounded by scales and a nasal ; horn-like supraocular scales Cerastes Wagl. Nostril surrounded by scales and a supranasal ; no supraocular nor nasal horns , Bitis-f Gray. Nostril surrounded by scales and a supranasal ; horn-like scales above latter ; no supraocular horns Glotho Gray. II. Urosteges one-rowed. Body and tail cylindric EcMs% Merr. Body and tail compressed and prehensile Atheris% Cope. • CROTALID^. I. No rattle. ft. Urosteges two-rowed. Top ot head scaled ; urosteges four-rowed at end ; a caudal spine Laehesis Wagl. Top of head with small scales ; tail normal .Bothrops\ Wagl. Top of head with large imbricate shield-like scales Peltopelor Gthr. Top of muzzle scaled ; rest of head shielded Hypnale Cope. Top of head with nine shields ; scales carinate Trigonocephalus Oppel. Top of head with nine shields ; scales smooth Calloselasma\ Cope. ftft. Urosteges one-rowed. Body and tail cylindric, not prehensile ; head scaly Bothriopsis Pet. Body and tail compressed, prehensile : head scaly, scales normal Botkrieclus Pet. Body and tail compressed, prehensile ; head scaly ; a row of scales out- side the superciliary shield Teleuraspis Cope. *Pelias Wagl. t Echidna Wagl. not Forster. % Toxicoa Gray. ? Poeciloslolus Gthr. || Trimesurus Gray, Gthr., Peters. Tropidolccmus Wagler. Megwra Gray. Atropos Wagl. 1T Leiolepis J). & B. nee Cuy. 1886.] 4JJ [Cope. Body and tail not prehensile ; nine normal head-shields. Ancistrodon* Beacv. II. A rattle. Head with nine scuta above Crotalophorus\ Gray. Head with scales above Crotalus\ Linn. SYNOPSIS OF THE GENERA. Typhlopidse 6 Colubridse {continued) — Stenostomidae 2 Psammophidai 3 Tortricidae 2 Lycodontinae 17 Rhinophidae 7 Leptognathinae 7 Xenopeltidae 1 Dipsadinoa 7 Pythonidse 8 Dasypeltinae 2 Boidse 16 Homalopsinae 30 Charinida3 1 Acontiophidae 1 Acrochordidae 2 Hydrophidai 8 Nothopidae 2 Najidae .19 Colubridas — Elapidae 3 Calamarinae 58 Dendraspididae 1 Coronellime 23 Causidas 3 Scytalinae 18 Atractaspididae 1 Colubrinae 36 Viperidae 7 Philodryadinae 9 Crotalidae 12 Dryophidinae 7 — Total 317 A number of generic names have been given by authors with defini- tions which do not refer to the dentition. On this account I have been unable to include them in the above tables. I Lave credited generic names to authors who have published the first description, and not to those who have given them as nomina nuda. ERRATA AND ADDENDA. Page 486, middle, line 8, omit word "below." Page 486, below middle, line In other names, the relative position of the objects are signifi- cant, reminding us of the rebus of a well known town in Mas- sachusetts, celebrated for its educational institutions : & Mass. * Tarn, near; uch, scorpion. Diccionario Huasteca- Espaflol, MS., In my posses- sion. This and most of the other instances quoted are to be found in Lord Kingsborough's great work on Mexico, and also in Dr. Penafiel's Caldlogo Alfa- betieo de los Nombres de Lug ares per •teneciente sal Idioma Nahuatl (Mexico, 1885). Brinton.l 510 [Oct. 1, jll II MM (I )) [I /( I) ii Fig. 3.— Itzmiquilpan. wbich is to be read, " Andover, Massachusetts," so in the Aztec scrolls, we have itzmiquilpan represented by an obsidian knife, itztli, and an edible plant, qvilitl, which are placed above or over (pan), the sign for cultivated land, milli, thus giving all the elements of the name, the last syllable by position only. In one respect I believe the ikonomatic •writing of the Mexicans is peculiar ; that is, in the phonetic value which it assigns to col- ors. Like the Egyptian, it is polychromatic, but, so far as I know, the Egyptian polychromes never had a phonetic value ; they were, in a general way, used b}' that people as determinatives, from some supposed similarity of hue ; thus green indicates a vegetable substance or bronze, yellow, certain woods and some animals, and so on. In heraldry the colors are very important and have well-defined significations, but very seldom, if ever, phonetic ones. Quite the contrary is the case with the Mexican script. It presents abundant instances where the color of the object as portrayed is an integral phonetic ele- ment of the sound designed to be conveyed. To quote examples, the Nahuatl word for yellow is cuztic or coztie, and when the hieroglyphics express phonetically such proper names as Acozpa, Cozamaloapan, Cozhuipilcan, etc., the monosyllable coz is expressed solely by the yellow color which the scribe lays upon his picture. Again, the name Xiuhuacan, " the place of grass," is represented b^ a circle colored pale blue, hxiutic. The ZqY name of this tint supplies the phonetic desired. The name of the village Tlapan is conveyed hy a circle, whose interior is painted red, tlapalli, contain- ing the mark of a human foot-print. Such examples are sufficient to prove that in undertaking to decipher the Mexican writing we must regard the color as well as the figure, and be pre- pared to allow to each a definite phonetic value. It must not be understood1 that all the Aztec writing is made up of phonetic symbols. This is far from being the case. We discover among the hundreds of curious figures which it pre- Fig. 4.— Acozpa. 1888.] 511 [Brinton. sents, determinatives, as in the Egyptian inscriptions, and nu- merous ideograms. Sometimes the ideogram is associated with the phonetic symbol, acting as a sort of determinative to the latter. An interesting example of this is given at the beginning of the " Manuscripto Hieratico," recently published by the Span- ish government * It is the more valuable as an example, as the picture writing is translated into Nahuatl and written in Spanish FrG. 5. — Tlamapa. characters. The date of the document, 1526, leaves no doubt that it is in the same style as the ancient Codices. The page is headed with the picture of a church edifice ; underneath is the outline of a human arm, and the legend in Nahuatl is : In Altepetl y Santa Cruz Tlamapa. These words mean, " the town of Santa Cruz Tlamapa." The name "tlamapa " means "on the hillside," and doubtless originally * It is given in the appendix to the Ensayo sobre la Interpretation de la Escri- tura Hieratica de la America Central, by De Rosny, translated by D. Juan de Dios de la Rada y Delgada (Madrid, 1881). Brinton.] 512 [Oct. 1, referred to the position in which the village was situated. But the prefix " tlama " usually signifies, " to do something with the arms or hands," derived from maitl, hand or arm. Hence, the figure of the extended arm gives this dissyllable, tlama, which was sufficient to recall the name of the town. The Aztecs by no means confined the ikonomatic system to proper names. They composed in it words, sentences, and trea- tises on various subjects. In proportion as it is applied to these connected and lengthy compositions, its processes become more recondite, curious and difficult of interpretation. Without a knowledge of the spoken language considerably more than rudi- mentary, it would be hopeless for the student to attempt to solve the enigmas which he meets at every step. Yet every well- directed effort will convince him that he is on the right track, and he will constantly be cheered and stimulated to further en- deavor by the victories he will win day by day. Few indeed have the requisite preliminary knowledge and the gift of insight into verbal puzzles to attain brilliant success. Among those who have pursued with marked and gratifying re- sults this intricate study, it gives me pleasure to name Mrs. Zelia Nuttall Pinart. This lady has unraveled a number of the pages of the Yienna Codex and several of the monolithic inscriptions which have been handed down from ancient Mexico. With com- mendable caution she has refrained from publishing her results until they could be presented, supported by such proofs that they cannot be questioned ; but, from a personal examination of them, I do not hesitate to say that they will be found to come up to the highest standard of scientific requirements.* The analogy which is presented in so many particulars be- tween Mexican and Maya civilization would lead us to infer that the Maya writing, of which we have a number of examples well preserved, should be unlocked by the same key which has been successfully applied to the Aztec Codices. The latest writers on the Maya manuscripts, while agreeing that they are in part, at least, in phonetic characters, consider them mostly ideographic. But it is to be noted that not one of these writers has any prac- tical acquaintance with the sounds of the Maya language, and ♦Several of Mrs. Pinirt's interpretations were exhibited to the Anthropologi- cal Section of the American Association for the Advancement of Science at its tout meeting (Bullalo, I860), and wore favorably received by the members. 1886.] 5 Id [Brinton. scarcely any with its vocabulary. From tliis it is evident that even were these codices in ikonomatic writing, such investigators could make very little progress in deciphering them, and might readily come to the conclusion that the figures are not phonetic in any sense. Precisely the same position was taken by a num- ber of students of Egyptian antiquity long after the announce- ment of the discovery of Champollion ; and even within a few years works have been printed denying all phoneticism to the Nilotic inscriptions. What induces me to believe that much of the Maya script is of the nature of the Mexican is the endeavor, undertaken for a very different purpose, of Professor Valentini to explain the origin of the so-called Ma}a alphabet, preserved by Bishop Landa, and printed in the editions of his celebrated " Descrip- tion of Yucatan."* Professor Talentini shows by arguments and illustrations, which I think are in the main correct, that when the natives were asked to represent the sounds of the Spanish letters in their method of writing, they selected objects to depict, whose names, or initial sounds, or first syllables, were the same, or akin, to the sounds of the Spanish vowel or conso- nant heard by them. Sometimes they would give several words, with their corresponding pictures, for the same sound ; just as I have shown was the custom of the ancient Egyptians. Thus, for the sound b they drew a foot-print, which in their tongue was called be ; for the sound a an obsidian knife, in Maya, ach, etc. Talentini thinks also that the letter E was delineated by black spots, in Maya eelc, meaning black, which, if proved by further research, would show that the Mayas, like the Mexicans, attrib- uted phonetic values to the colors they employed in their painted scrolls. Outside of the two nations mentioned, the natives of the Ameri- can continent made little advance toward a phonetic system. We have no positive evidence that even the cultivated Tarascas and Zapotecs had anything better than ikonographs ; and of the Quiches and Cakchiquels, both near relatives of the Mayas, we only know that they had a written literature of considerable ex- * Valentini's Essay appeared in the Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society, April, 1880. Landa's work was originally published by the Abbe Bras- seur (de Bourbourg) at Paris, 1864, and more accurately at Madrid, 1884, under the supervision of Don Juan de Dios de la Rada y Delgada. Cope.l °^-^ . [Oct. 1, tent, but of the plan by which it was preserved we have only ob- scure hints. Next to these we should probably place the Chipe- way pictography, as preserved on their meda sticks, bark records, and adjidjiatig or grave-posts. I have examined a num- ber of specimens of these, but have failed to find any evidence that the characters refer to sounds in the language ; however, I should not consider it improbable that further researches should disclose some germs of the ikonomatic method of writing even in these primitive examples of the desire of the human intellect to perpetuate its aquisitions, and hand them down to generations yet unborn. Synonymic List of the North American species of Bufo and Rana, with de- scriptions of some new species of Batrachia, from specimens in the National Museum. By E. D. Cope. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 1, 1SS6.) BUFO Laur. Bufo punctatus Baird & Girard, Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1852, p. 173. Bufo beldingii Yarrow, Proceedings U. S. National Museum, 1882, p. 441. Sonoran and Lower Californian regions. Bufo debilis Girard, Proceedings Acad. Philadelphia 1854, p. 87. Bufo insidior Girard, Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1854, p. 88. Sonoran region. Bufo columbiensis Baird & Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1853, p. 378. Bufo boreas Baird & Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1852, p. 174. Bufo halophila Baird & Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1853, p. 301. Bufo chilensis, part, Giinth., Cat. Batr. Sal. Brit. Mus. , 1868, p. 57. Bufo microscaphus Cope, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1866, p. 301. Bufo pictus Cope, Report U. S. G. G. Expl. W. of 100th Mer., v, p. 522, pi. xxv, f. 4-5. Pacific region ; Western Central region. Bufo compactilis Wiegm., Isis, 1833, p. 661. Anaxyrus melancholicus Tschudi, Faun. Per. Ilerp., p. 78, pi. ii, f. 5. Bufo speciosus Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1854, p. 86. Bufo anomalus Giinth., Cat. Batr. Salien. Brit. Mus., 1868, p. 57. Bufo levifrons Bocourt, Bull. Soc. Philom. (7), i, p. 187. Dromoplectrus anomalus Camerano, Atti. Ace. Tor. , xiv, p. 882. Mexican district ; Texas. Bufo alvarius Girard, Baird's Reptilia, U. S. Mexican Boundary Survey, ii, p. 26, pi. xli, f. 1-6. Colorado Desert. 1886.] 515 [Cope. BUFO HEMIOPHRYS Cope. Superciliary crests not distinct on the muzzle, parallel, nearly straight, terminating abruptly posteriorly in a transverse elevation. The latter meet on the middle line, forming a transverse ridge, with an abrupt de- scent to the nape. Externally they extend but a short distance, leaving no representatives of the postorbital ridges except a few tubercles in one or two of the specimens. A small supratympanic tuberosity No pre- orbital ridge. Muzzle vertical at end, nostrils terminal. Membranum tympani a vertical oval, two-thirds the diameter of the eye. Parotoid gland a narrow oval. Dermal tubercles distinguished by their small size and prominence. They form several rows on the back and external face of the tibia. At all other points the skin is closely areolated, the areolae frequently acutely prominent, especially on the superior face of the tibia and on the sides. The heel of the extended hind leg reaches to the posterior border of the orbit. The posterior foot is wider than in the B. lentiginosus, though not relatively shorter. The web is excavated to the line of the middle of the fourth (first) phalange. The metatarsal tuber- cles are especially large. The internal is very wide and prominent, and has an extensive acute edge ; the external is much smaller, but it also has a free cutting edge, transverse to the length of the tarsus. The length of the head to the position of the postorbital crests, enters the total (to the vent) four and a half times. The color is brown, marked on the back with a median yellowish line, and two or three rows of brown spots of medium size on each side of it. These spots have one or two tubercles for their center pieces, which are more reddish than the rest of the spot. There are two brown spots on the upper lip, and one below the tympanum. A large spot extends from below the parotoid gland to near the front of the humerus. Posterior to this, with a slight interval, there extends a longitudinal deep brown band, which extends, with interruptions, to the groin. Below this, on the sides, are other dark -brown bands, which form a more or less reticulate pattern. The limbs and posterior feet have dark-brown cross-bands, and there is a very coarse dark brown reticulation of brown or brownish yel- low on the posterior face of the femur. The belly is more or less black- spotted ; throat immaculate. Measurements {No. 11,927). M. Length of head and body 059 " " " to posterior edge of m. tympani... 015 Width " " at anterior " " , 023 Length of anterior limb 034 foot ..014 " " posterior limb 068 " tibia 020 " " tarsus 010 " " rest of foot 025 Besides the peculiarities of the head crests, and metatarsal shovels, this PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3n. PRINTED NOV. 2, 1886. Cope.] ^lO ^0ct ^ species differs from most of the other North American species in having no postorbital crests, and in having the belly spotted. From the B. lentiginosus fowleri it differs also in the development of the external metatarsal tubercle, and in the connection between the frontoparietal crests behind. No. 11,927. Six specimens from the northern boundary of Montana. Collected by Dr. Elliott Coues. Bufo cognatus Say, Long's Expedition to the Rocky Mountains, ii, 1823, p. 190. Bufo dipternus Uope, American Naturalist, xiii, p. 437. Eastern half of Central region. Bufo kentiginosus Shaw, Zoology, 1803, iii, i, p. 173, tab. 2111. Eastern and Central regions. B. ii. fowleri Putnam, MSS. Cope Check List North American Batr. and Reptilia, 1875, p. 29 (name only). Canadian and Hudsonian districts of Eastern region. B. l. woodhousei Girard. Bufo woodhousei Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1854, p. 86 ; Baird, U. S. Pacific R. R. Reports, x, p, 44. pi. xxv, f. 1. Bufo frontosus Cope, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1866, p. 301 ; Rept. Expl. U. S. Surv. W. of 100th Mer., Capt. G. M. Wheeler, 1877, v, pp. 520, 627. Central region. B. u. amebicanus Lee, Cope Check List N. Amer. Rept. & Batr., 1875, p. 29. Bufo americanus (Leconte) Holbr., N. A. Herp., v, pi. 4 ; Dum. & Bibr., p. 695; Hallow, Proc. Ac. Phila.. 1856, p. 251; Girard, U. S. Mex. Bound. Surv., ii, p. 25 ; Wied., Nova Acta, xxxii, p. 121. Bufo copei Yarrow & Henshaw, Rept. Batr. Expl. W. of 100th Mer., 1878, p. 4. Eastern and Austroriparian regions. B. l. lkntiginosus Shaw, Cope Check List N. American Rept. & Batr., 1875, p. 29. Bufo lentiginosus Shaw, Zool., iii, p. 173; Gird., Proc. Ac. Phila., 1854, p. 86. Chilophryne lentiginosa Cope, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1863, p. 357. Bufo musicm Latr., Rept., ii, p. 127 ; Daud. Rain, p. 9, pi. 33, f. 3, and Rept., viii, p. 190; Merr. Teut., p. 185 ; Gravenh. Delic, p. 59. Austroriparian region. Bufo quercicus Holbrook, North American Herpetolosxy, v, p. 13, 1842. tab. iii. Chilophryne dialopha Cope, Pr. A. N. S. Phila., 1862, p. 341 (erroneous locality). Bufo dialophus Boulenger, Cat. Batr. Sal. Brit. Mus. ed., ii, 1882, p. 319. Austroriparian region. Bufo valliceps Wiegm., Isis, 1833, p. 657. Bufo granuloma Baird & Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1852, p. 173. Bufo nebulifer Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1854, p. 87. Chilophryne nebulifera Cope, Proc. A.C. Phila., 1862, p. 357. Texan district of Austroriparian region ; Mexican region, etc. 1886.] «^1< [Cope. RANA Linn.* Rana halectna Daudin (Kalm), Hist. Nat. Rept., viii (1803), 122, 432. Bana aquatica, Water Frog, Catesby, Carol., ii (1743), 70. Bana pipiens Gra., ed. L. Syst. Nat. (1788), 1052-28. Bana utricularia Harlan, Sillim. Journ., x (1825), 60. BanavirginianaJjam., Syn. Rept., p. 31. Bana palustris Gueriu, Iconogr. Rept., pi. 26, f. 1. Bana oxyrhynclia Hallow, Proc. Acad. Phila. (1856), p. 142. Bana berlandien Baird, U. S. Mex. Bound. Surv. Rept., p. 27, pi. 36, f. 7-10. Bana lecontei "B & G." Glinther Cat. Bat. Sal. Brit. Mus. 1858, 15 ; Brocchi Miss. Sci. Mex. Rept., p. 14, pi. iv, f. 1. Boulen- ger Cat. Bat. Sal., B. M. 1882, p. 42 ; nee Baird et Girardii.f Nearctic realm, except Pacific region. R. h. sphenocephala Cope. B. oxyrhynchaHnWow, Proc. Acad. Phila., 1856, p. 142, nee Sundevalii. Austroriparian region. R. h. halecina Kalm (Cope). Bana berlandieri Baird, 1. c. Eastern and Austroriparian regions. R. h. brachycephala Cope. B. A. berlandien Cope, Check List Batr. Rept. N. Am., p. 32, nee Bana berlandieri Baird. Bana Jialeeina Boulenger, Cat. Batr. Brit. Mus. ed, ii, p. 41, nee Kalmii. Central and Sonoran regions. Rana areolata Baird & Girard. Proceeds. Actid. Phila. 1852, p. 173 ; Baird, U. S. Mex. Bound. Surv., pi. 36, f. 11-12. % Austroriparian region, extending north in Mississippi valley. R. a. areolata Bd. & Gird. Bana areolata Baird & Girard, Proc. Acad. Phila., 1852, p. 173 ; Baird, U. S. Mex. Bound. Surv., pi. 36, f. 11, 12. Austroriparian region. R. a. aesopus Cope, s. sp. nov. / Florida. Length of head two and a half times in the total ; tympanic disk a ver- tical oval ; dorsal spots well separated ; nostril equidistant between end of muzzle and eye. This singular form may be known at once by the short and squat form of the body as compared with the size of the head, resembling in this some of the Australian Cystignathidae. The muzzle is not prominent, and does not project beyond the upper lip. The canthus rostrales are straight, and the top of the head is flat. The tympanic disk is a vertical oval, of which the short diameter is one half the length of the eye. The edge of the vomerine patches of teeth * The determination of the relations between the North American and Euro- pean species of this genus have been greatly facilitated by the admirable re- searches of Boulenger. fThe Mexican specimens referred to in these citations constitute a subspe- cies, which I call £,. h. auslricola. Cope.T ^1" [Oct. 1, are a little posterior to the line connecting the posterior border of the nares. The latter are about as large as the ostia pharyngea. The dorsolateral glandular ridge is thick and extends a little beyond the sacral diapophysis. There are six or seven rows of short longitudinal glandular tubercles in the space between them. There are similar elongate warts on the sides. The posterior and posteroinferior faces of the femora finely granular; rest of the inferior surfaces smooth. The first finger is longer than the second and equals the fourth. The heel of the extended hind leg reaches to the middle of the eye. The foot is of moderate length. Three of the phalanges of the fourth digit are en- tirely free, and the web is excavated to opposite the middle of the first phalange, extending as a margin on each side of the distal half. The inner cuneiform tubercle is not large and has an acute apex ; no external tubercle. A slightly defined tarsal dennal ridge. In alcohol the ground color is light brown, with the dorsolateral ridge and the inferior surfaces straw-color. The spots are a dark brown, and do not appear to have been yellow bordered. The dorsal spots are irregu- larly rounded, and are in three or four longitudinal rows. There are two rows on the top of the muzzle and head, crossing the inner edge of the eyelid. There are two spots near the external edge of each eyelid. Spots on the sides smaller, in about four rows. The lores and upper lips are rather coarsely marbled with brown ; gular region faintly speckled with the same. No band, but a spot on the front of the humerus ; a spot on the elbow, and three cross lines on the fore arm. Four narrow cross lines on the femur, and five across the tibia. Three cross bars on the ex- ternal face of the fifth toe. The posterior face of the femur has numer- ous rounded brown spots on a light ground. Measurements (JSFo. 4743). M. Length of head and body 062 Width of head at posterior edges of tympana 020 Length "to " " " " 024 Length of fore leg 026 *' " forefoot 012 " " hind leg, to groin 074 " tibia 024 " " tarsus 013 " rest of foot 025 The only specimen of this subspecies which I have seen is the follow- ing : No. 4743, Micanopy, Fla. Dr. T. H. Bean. R. A. cat-ito Leconte, Proc. Acad. Phila., 1855, p. 425. Floridan district. R. A. circulosa Rice & Davis. Rana circulosa Rice & Davis, in Jordan's Manual of Vertebrata of Eastern North America, ed. ii, p. 255. North Central Eastern region. (Illinois.) 1886.1 [Cope. Rana palustris Leconte. R. palustris Leconte, Ann. Lye. N. Y., i, p. 282. R. pardalis Harlan, Amer. Journ., x, p. 50. Eastern region. Rana septentrionalis Baird, Proc. Acad. Phila., 1855, p. 51. R. sinnata Baird, 1. c. Eastern region, Canadian and Hudsonian districts. Rana clamata Daudin, Hist. Nat. Rept., viii (1803), 104-431. R. clami- tans Daudin, in Sonn. &Lat. Hist. Nat. Rept., ii (1802), 157. R.fonti- nalis Leconte, Ann. N. Y. Lye, i (1825), 282. Ranaria melanota Rafin, Annals of Nature (1820), No. 25. Rana melanota (Raf. ) Harl., in Sill. Am. Jour. Sc, x (1825), 64. Rana, flavoviridis Harl., in Sill. Am. Jour. Sc, x(1825), 58 ; Rana horiconensis Holbrook, N. A. Herp., 1st ed., iii (1838), 91. Rana nigricans Agassiz, L. Sup. (1850), 379, vi, f. 4, 5. Eastern region. Rana catesbeiana Shaw. Rana catesbiana Shaw, Gen. Zool., iii, Am- phibia (1802), 106, pi. xxxiii. Rana boans Lacep, Hist. Nat. Nuad. Ovip. (1st ed., 1798), ed. Deteoville, i (1819), 270, 315. Rana pipiens Harl. (nee. Linnaeus), Sill Am! Jour. Sc, x (1825), 62. Rana mugiens Merrem., Tentamen Syst. Amph. (1820), 175. Rana scapularisK&r]., Sill. Am. Jour. Sc, x (1825), 59. Rana maxima americana aquatica Catesby, Carol., ii (1743), 72. Rana couspersa Leconte, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1855, p. 425. Eastern region. Rana temporaria Linn., Syst. Nat., ed. 12, p. 357, pars. Rana muta Laur, Syn. Rept., p. 30. Rana temporaria Schneider, Hist. Amph., p. 113. Rana flaviventris Millet, Faun. Maine et Loire, ii, p. 663. Rana cruenta Pallas, Zoogr. Ross. -As., p. 12. Rana alpina Risso, Hist. Nat. Eur. m6r., iii, p. 93. Rana scotica Bell, 1. c, p. 102. Rana platyrrhinus Steenstr., Amtl.-Ber., 24, Vers. Kiel, p. 131. Rana fusca De l'lsle, Ann. Sc Nat., ser. 5, xvii, 1873. Rana temporaria, var. platyrrhina Schreib., Herp. Eur., p. 125. Rana dybowskii Giinth. , Ann. & Mag. N.H., 1876, xvii, p. 387; Catal. Bat. Sol. Brit. Mus., ed. i, p. 16. Europe, Northern and Temperate Asia. R. T. pretiosa Bd. & Gird. Rana pretiosa Bd. & Gird., Proc. Ac. Phila., 1853, p. 378 ; Baird, Proc Ac Phila., 1855, p. 378 ; Gird., U. S- Expl. Surv., xii, part ii, p. 304; Boulenger, Bull. Soc Zool. Fr., 1880, p. 208 ; Cope, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1883, pp. 20^ 33 ; Am. Nat., 1879, p. 435. Pacific region. Rana cantabridgensis Baird, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1854, p. 62. Rana syl- vatica Dekay, N. Y. Fauna, iii, p. 64, pi. 21, 22. Rana temporaria, var. sylvatica pt. Giinth., Cat. Brit. Mus., 1868, p. 17. Rana tem- poraria cantabridgensis Cope, Check. List. N. Amer. Batr. Rept. 1875, p. 32. Canadian and Hudsonian districts of Eastern recion. Cope.] 5^0 [Oct. 1, R. C. LATIREMIS Cope. This form looks very different from the true Rana cantabridgensis. Muzzle rather ohtuse, more so than in the typical R. cantabridgensis, and widened posteriorly ; its length at the posterior edge of the tympana en- tering the length of the head and body three and a half times. The tym- panic drum is very distinct, and its long diameter enters that of the eye two-thirds of a time. The nostrils are equidistant between the orbit and the end of the muzzle, and look upwards. The skin is quite smooth everywhere, and the dorsolateral fold is easily obliterated by immersion in alcohol. The heel of the extended hind leg reaches to the middle of the eye ; the second toe reaches nearly to the apex of the knee. The palmation is remarkably wide, leaving but one free phalange and all the digits except the fourth, where two are free. The internal cuneiform tubercle is quite prominent, with an obtuse convex edge ; there is no ex- ternal tubercle. The internal finger (index) is short and stout, and is very little or not at all longer than, the second (third) finger. Color, above, light brownish-gray ; below, white. There are more or less numerous black spots on the sides, which incline to fuse more or less imperfectly into a longitudinal band along the dorsolateral dermal fold. There are in some specimens a few small black marks on the back between the lateral folds. A dark line along the canthus rostralis. The black "ear patch" is reduced to a black line, which passes from the eye pos- terior to the tympanic disk, and ceases opposite the inferior border of the latter. Measurements (iVo. 18,723). M. Length of head and body 052 Width of head at posterior edge of tympana 019 Length of " " " " " " 015 Length of fore limb 022 " " foot Oil " " hind limb to groin 071 "tibia 020 " "tarsus 012 " " remainder of foot 025 Four specimens from Lake Alloknagits, Alaska ; obtained by C. L. McKay. R. c. cantabridgensis Baird. Hudsonian district of Eastern region. Rana agilis Thomas. Rana temporaria, var. arvalis part Giinth., Cat., p. 16. Rana temporaria Millet, Faune Maine et Loire, ii, p. 664. Rana agilis Thomas, Ann. Sc. Nat., se>. 4, iv, p. 365, pi. 7. Rana gracilis Fatio, Rev. Mag. Zool., seY. 2, xiv, p. 81. Rana temporaria, var. agilis Schreb., Ilerp. Eur., p. 125. Middle latitudes of Europe (Boulenger). 1HS6.J bZx ICope. R. A. aurora Baird & Girard. Bana aurora B. & G., Proc. Ac. Phila., 1862, p. 174, and U. S. Explor. Exped., Herp., P- 18, pi. 11, f. 1-6. Washington and Oregon. Ran a draytoni Baird & Girard. Bana draytoni B. & G., Proc. Ac Phila., 1862, p. 174 ; Girard, U. S. Explor. Exped., Herp., p. 23, pi 11, f. 19-24. Bana lecontei Baird & Girard, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1853, p 301 ; Bana nigricans Hallow, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1854, p. 96 ; Boulen ger, Bull. Soc. Zool. Fr., 1880, p. 207 ; Brocchi, Miss. Sc. Mex. Batr. p. 15, pi. iv, f. 3. Bana longipes Hallow, U. S. Explor. Surv., x 1859, iv, Zool., p. 20, pi. x, f. 1. Epirhexis longipes Yarrow, Check List and Catal. of Specimens of N. Amer. Rept. Batr., 1883, p. 176, not of Baird and Cope. Pacific, and Western part of Central regions. R. d. draytoni Baird & Girard. California. R. d. onca Cope, in Yarrow's Rept. Expl. Surv. W. of 100th Mer. Zodl., Vol. v, p. 528, pi. 25, f. 1-3. Utah. Rana boylii Baird, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1855, p. 62. California. Rana silvatica Lee. Bana sylvatica Lee, Ann. N. Y. Lye, i (1825), 282. Bana pennsylvanica Harlan, Sill. Am. Jour. Sc, x (1825), 58. Eastern region. Rana pachydermia Cope, Proc. Ac. Phila., 1883, p. 25. Northern California and Southern Oregon. URODELA. Plethodon crassulus Cope, sp. nov. This species has a superficial resemblance to the P. oregonensts, but its manifold differences are easily perceived. The form is quite robust, and the head is large, its width going into the length to the thighs only five times. The tail is very much compressed from the base, and is also shallow ; its length equals the distance from its base to the gular fold. The legs are robust, but not very long ; when ap- pressed to the side they fail to meet by the length of the posterior foot. The tongue is large, filling the floor of the mouth. The vomeropala- tine teeth are in two short series, which converge backwards without coming into contact, from behind the internal edge of the choange. The parasphenoid teeth are in a single, undivided patch, which commences well behind the vomeropalatines. The maxillary and mandibular teeth are minute. The head, viewed from above, is oval ; in profile the muzzle is thick and truncate, and projects beyond the mouth. The edge of the lip is slightly angulate below the nares. The eye is rather large, its length Cope.l ^22 [0ct. 1, equaling that of the muzzle. The distance between the nostrils is equal to that between the bases of the eyelids at their middles. The toes are short and free, one phalange of the first digit on each foot projecting. The ends of the toes are obtuse and bulbiform. A gular fold. Lateral folds fourteeu. Measurements (No. 49fl). M. Total length 0625 Length of head and body 034 " to groin 0314 " axilla 0045 " " line of rictus oris 006 " " "eye 0035 of fore leg 0095 " " foot 0032 " hind leg 0095 " " foot 004 Width of head 0077 " between eyes 0025 Color, above, uniform dark reddish-brown ; below, uniform light brown. I have seen but one specimen of this species, as follows : No. No. of specimens. Locality. Collector. 9447. 1. California. Dr. J. G. Cooper. Amblystoma decorticatum Cope, sp. nov. This species has a good deal of affinity in its characters to the A. paroti- cum Baird, but it differs in important points of structure, as well as in its external appearance. Its general proportions are not slender, and the limbs, especially the posterior ones, are very stout. The tail is long and is compressed from the base. It does not bear a fin at any part. Its length, in the single specimen before me, is equal to that of the head and body (including the vent), less the distance from the eye to the end of the muzzle. The head is short and the muzzle is contracted, and is steeply rounded in profile. The distance from the muzzle to the axilla enters the length from the axilla to the groin one and a half times. The width of the head enters the total length to the groin four times. The limbs when pressed to the side overlap by the length of the fingers. There is no canthus rostralis, and the lower jaw does not project beyond the upper. The external nares are almost terminal, and are as far apart as the distance between the inner borders of the choanse. The latter are rather large and are transverse. The vomeropalatine series of teeth form a short transverse band which is within the lines of the internal borders of the inner nares, and a considerable distance posterior to them. The tongue is wider than long, but does not fill the wide floor of the mouth laterally. 1886.1 f>^ [Cope. A dermal groove extends posteriorly from tke eye to the side of the neck above the anterior border of the humerus. A branch groove descends a short distance posterior to the eye and turns forwards to the canthus of the mouth. These grooves divide masses of crypts, those on the inferior side of the groove being most prominent. The tract above the groove re- sembles the parotoid gland of the Ambly stoma par olicum, but is much less distinctly defined, fading out upwards. There are eleven well-defined -lateral dermal folds, and space for a twelfth, which will probably be found well defined in other specimens. The back from the interscapular region posteriorly, and the superior part of the tail, are thickly studded with crypts. There is a slightly defined gular fold. The fore limb is as long as from its anterior base to the anterior margin of the eve. The toes are quite short, and their lengths, beginning with the shortest, are 5-2-3—4. The posterior loot is especially robust, and the sole is wider than the length of the longest finger. There are no distinct tubercles on the sole. The lengths of the toes are, beginning with the shortest, 1-5-2-4-3. Measurements (iVo. 14,4.93). M. Total length 174 Length to base of tail 090 " " groin , 071 "axilla 031 " " line of eyes , 005 " of fore leg 026 " " foot 010 " " cubitus 008 " hind leg 026 " " foot 0105 Width between nostrils 005 " " eyes 006 " of head 016 " " sole c-008 Depth of tail at middle 008 The manner of describing the color pattern of this species depends on what we regard as the ground. We can assume that the ground color is represented by a dark chocolate brown and say that this is closely studded with brownish white spots of irregular forms and sizes. On the back, limbs, and top and sides of the head, the pale spots are so close together as to reduce the brown to a net-work ; on the fore legs the pale spots are larger than anywhere else. The spots are few on the tail, and those chiefly near the base. The inferior surfaces are dirty light brown. The characters which separate this species from the A. paroticum are, the much shorter series of vomeropalatine teeth ; the shorter fingers and toes ; the less distinct parotoid glands ; the shorter and more obtuse head, and the coloration. FttOC. AMER. FHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 30. PRINTED DEC. 1, 1886. Cope.] 524 [Oct. 1 It is the first and only species of Amblystoma yet found in Alaska. No. No. of specimens. Locality. Year. Collector. 14,493. 1. Port Simpson, Alaska. 1885. T.H.Streets, U.S.N. Amblystoma lepttjrum Cope, s.p nov. This species resembles the A. cingulatum, but differs from it in the en- tirely different form and proportions of the tail. Tbis part is very slender in the A. lepturum, with round or vertical oval section, -without keel above, and lacking very little of being as long as the head and body to- gether. The legs are of the same proportions as in the A. cingulatum ; that is, -when appressed they are separated by a space equal to the length of the posterior foot, showing their greatly superior length to those of the A. microstomum. The body is cylindric. The head is an oval, with pro- duced and rounded muzzle, which projects beyond the lower jaw. The animal resembles a Plethodon rather than the species of Amblystoma, but its vomerine teeth and tongue have all the characters of the Amblystoma microstomum. The vomerine teeth form a convex series extending forwards to a point between the choanae, where they are slightly interrupted on the middle line. The tongue is large, filling the floor of the mouth, and is exten- sively free at the sides only. The external nostrils are nearly terminal and are rather near together, the space between them being equal to just half that between the bases of the eyelids, and about three-fifths that be- tween the choanse. The width between the eyes behind is equal to the axial length from the same to the end of the muzzle. The width of the head enters the length to the groin seven times. The length from the muzzle to the axilla enters the distance from the latter to the groin one and three-fifth times. The lateral digits are distinct, and ihe median ones moderately elongate. Their lengths, beginning with the shortest, are, fore foot, 2-5-8-4 ; hind foot, 1-5-2-3-4. The phalanges are, fore foot, 2-2-3-2 ; hind foot, 2-2-3-4-2. No palmar or plantar tubercles. The skin is perfectly smooth, and between the axilla and the groin it is marked by fourteen grooves. There are no dermal margins to the fingers or the tail. The cloacal orifice is a simple slit. There is a distinct post- gular fold. Measurements (No. 14,583). M. Total length 115 Length from end of muzzle to base of tail 092 " " " " " " groin 0515 " " " " axilla 020 " " " " " " canthusoris 0065 " of fore leg 013 " " foot 0055 " " hind leg 010 •< " " foot 0075 Depth of tail at middle 0025 1886.] 5-*° [Cope. The color of the typical specimen in alcohol is purplish hrown above and paler below. There are numerous not well-defined whitish spots on the sides and a few on the belly, and there are some very faint and deli- cate gray lines across the posterior part of the back. The tail is densely speckled with gray on the sides, and delicate gray lines cross the upper surface of thetail in a reticulate manner. The limbs are paler than the back, and the digits are cross-banded with whitish. The habitat of this species is unknown. The only specimen was found in a jar with a specimen of Diemyetylus torosua, and one of Rana tern- poraria, the former Californian, the latter Palsearctic. Amblystoma annulatum Cope, sp. nov. The largest species of the group of the A. microstomum, and resembling that species rather than the A. cingulatum. However it approaches the last-named species in the form and length of its tail, but exceeds that and all the other species of Group V in the length of that part of the body. The muzzle is very short, and the head is not distinguished from the neck. The legs are short, and when appressed to the sides are separated by a space of three and parts of two other intercostal spaces, equal to four spaces. The tail is in section cylindric at base, and widely oval to near the extremity, where it is more narrowly oval. It is not angulate and has no dermal margin on the middle line above or below. Its length exceeds that of the head and body by the length of the anterior foot, and it may have been longer, as the extremity is injured. The head is short, and the width enters the length to the groin six and a quarter times. The front is convex to the upper lip, in profile, and trans- versely between the orbits. Tlie parietal region is very convex trans- versely. The width between the canthi oculorum behind exceeds the length from the same point to the end of the muzzle. The nostrils pres- ent anteriorly, and they are not quite so close together as in A. lepturum, as the distance between them measures two-thirds the width between the eyelids. The vomerine teeth form two transverse fasciculi of several rows of teeth each, between the choanse, convex forwards, and separated on the middle line by a very short interval. The skin is perfectly smooth, there is a postgular fold, and the sides are crossed by thirteen folds with space enough at the axilla for a four- teenth. The tail is also very disti»ctly annulate-grooved. I count thirty- one grooves behind the femora, and the injured extremity is not grooved. Indistinct grooves are apparent on the tails of several of the species of Amblystoma. There are no rows of mucous pores on the head or body of this species, nor accumulations of crypts on the head, body or tail. The palm is wide, and the fingers not long, though of unequal length. The lengths of the fingers, beginning with the shortest, are 2-5-3-4, and their phalanges number 2-2-3-2. The toes of the hinder foot have, in order of length, 1-5-2-3-4, and of phalanges, 2-2-3-4-2. Dudley.] ^26 [0ct. 1 Measurements {No. 11,564). M. Total length 186 Length to base of tail 092 " "groin 077 "axilla 022 " " cantlms oris 009 " of fore limb, from axilla 0172 " ". " foot 007 " " hind limb, from groin 022 " "foot 012 Width of head , 012 Depth of tail at middle 009 The typical and only specimen is preserved in alcohol. The color above, everywhere, is dark brown ; below, very light brown. The sides are paler, perhaps pale yellow in life, and the color ascends at several points, so as to form cross-bands of moderate width and very well defined. One of tbern crosses at the occiput, and one at the axillae ; between the latter and the groin there are five, nearly equidistant. There is an imperfect one at the sacrum, and there are seven on the tail, one of them imperfect. The coloration of this species is quite unique in the genus in its regularity. The locality of the only specimen is unknown. Notes. — I add here that the Plethodon iecanus Cope proves to be a well- marked species of Anaides. The species was described from a young one. Also that a study of all the Amphiumidaa accessible to me, shows that the two and three-toed forms must be referred to a single species, the A. means Gard. Is there Reciprocity in Trade? And the Consumption of Manufactured Com- modities. By Thos. H. Dudley. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, October 1, 1SS6.) One of thp chief arguments used by the free trader against the protect- ive system in the United States, is that of reciprocity in trade. Indeed it may be regarded as one of the chief corner-stones upon which their free- trade theory is based. Their formula is, that if I do not buy of you, you will not buy of me. And from it they argue that if the people of the United States continue their protective system and refuse to buy their manufactured commodities of England, the English people will refuse to buy anything of them. The doctrine, when carried to its legitimate conclusion as they contend for it, is this : We are to repeal our protective laws, so as to enable the Eng- lish to bring into our markets their manufactured commodities and sell to our people free of duty ; and to this extent at least giving the English 1886.] 52 * [Dudley. manufacturer, who pays no taxes in the United States, the right to supplant our manufacturer with his commodities, made in England and by English workmen ; leaving our own people to pay their taxes and to live as best they can without work. If we do not do this, they say, the English peo- ple will not buy our surplus agricultural products. It must be noted here that every dollar's worth of manufactured goods brought from England and sold in the United States, takes just one dol- lar's worth of work from our people. If it is made or produced in Eng- land the workman there gets the benefit, that is, the wages for its produc- tion. If made in this country, the workman here gets the benefit, the wages for making it. When it is remembered that, if it is extended to all our industries, it will amount to hundreds of millions of dollars ; and to hundreds of thousands of working people who will be affected by the transfer of our manufacturing to England, the importance and magnitude of the question is seen, especially upon the working people of this country, the men who have to earn wages by labor in order to live. But the subject we are considering is that of reciprocity ; and as so much stress has been laid upon it by the free traders in England, as well as by those who sympathize with them in this country, it is of some im- portance to learn whether as a principle it is true or untrue. In other words, whether it has the effect upon trade that is claimed for it. The foreign commercial relations or dealings between nation and nation are never carried on* by the governments, that is, one government dealing with another government, but by individuals. The individuals of one nation dealing with the individuals of another nation. If it were the English government dealing directly with the American government, then she might say to us : If you do not repeal your tariff laws and buy your manufactured commodities of us instead of making them yourselves, we, the English, will not buy of you what we may require in agricultural products or anything else. But unfortunately for the argument, it is not the English government dealing with the United States government, or with our people, but it is the English merchant dealing with the American merchant, and the whole transaction is busi- ness with both. It is a question of price that governs all their transac- tions. The English merchant, whether it is provisions or cotton, buys wherever he can purchase what he requires the cheapest. He never looks, considers or cares about the balance of trade, whether it is on the one side or the other. His object in doing business is to make money. And all his contracts and dealings are based on this idea, and he buys wherever he can buy to the best advantage without regard to reciprocity. If it is ten thousand bushels of wheat that he requires, and he can buy it cheaper in New York than he can in Odessa, he buys it in New York ; if on the other hand he can buy it cheaper in the Crimea or India, he buys it there, and not in New York. It is price, and it alone, that controls the matter. And so with every other product or commodity that the English merchant Dudley.] 5^0 [Oct. 1, or American merchant deals in. And as a rule this will apply to every commercial transaction in the United States, in England or in any other civilized country. And with reciprocity falls another favorite doctrine of the free traders closely allied to reciprocity, to wit, barter — that for every import there must be an export. Mr. Mongredien, in his writings for the Cobden Club of England, states it in this way : "The increased imports which abolition of customs duties would bring about, would necessitate increased exports to the same amount to pay for them, for there can be no additional import without a corresponding export.'" The theory of the free traders is, that when you buy a bill of goods in a foreign country and import them, they must be paid for by an export of some product or commodity from the country into the one from which the import came ; that an export will follow the import ; that it is a mere bar- ter or trade of one product for another product. This theory of the free traders has been asserted so often and insisted upon with so much persistency for such a period of time that they seem to regard it as admitted, and not even open to criticism, much less contra- diction ; and they demand that the whole world shall assent to and admit it, and of course all the pernicious and false assumptions and argu- ments which are based upon it. I have had occasion to comment upon this subject before, in my reply to Mongredien, and pronounced it a fal- lacy. I repeat it again, and say no greater fallacy has ever been attempted to be palmed off upon an intelligent people. It is neither true in theory nor in practice, and never has been. However beautiful it might be in theory, that if for every import there was a corresponding export, in prac- tice it never has been true, and the trade of the civilized nations of the world for the last hundred years, if we examine it, proves it to be untrue. An export of a product does not follow every import of a product. In the dealings. between merchants, whether at home or abroad, whether be- tween each other here in the United States or with those who live in Eng- land or in any other country, the contracts or transactions in their dealings with each other are based upon money or cash and not upon barter or trade : that is, are to be paid for in money, and not in barter of one com- modity for another commodity ; and this applies whether the contract is for cotton, wheat, steel rails or woolen goods ; the one who buys agrees to pay for it in cash or money, and a trade of one commodity for another commodity is quite exceptional and out of the common or ordinary mode of mercantile transactions. If Mr. Vanderbilt should want a thousand tons of steel rails, and he should buy them of Naylor, Benson & Co., of Lon- don, he would pay for them in cash or money and not in merchandise ; and there would be no obligation, either expressed or implied, on the part of the London house or anybody else, that because of the purchase of the rails they should buy grain or other merchandise from Mr. Vanderbilt or any other person in the United States. If there were millions ot bushels of wheat piled up in every seaboard city of this country, they would not take it. If you were to appeal to them they would tell you that their 1886.] 5*jJ [Dudley. business was confined to tin plates and metals, &c., and that they did not deal in grain. If Naylor, Benson & Co., who have sold the steel rails, a.e not under obligations to reciprocate, and take a corresponding quantity of merchandise in value to the amount for which they sold the rails, in order to make an export follow the import of the rails, who are under obligations to do so? The answer is, no one. And though our granaries may be full and running over with grain, the corn merchant of Liverpool or London will not buy it unless they can purchase it cheaper than they can elsewhere, and then they will take only the quantity which they require and no more. As has been stated, if they can buy it cheaper in Russia or India than they can of us they will buy it there, and that with- out the least regard to the fact that Mr. Vanderbilt bought his steel rails in England ; and it would be the same if we were to stop manufacturing steel rails in the Uuited States and buy all we require in England, even if it should be to the extent of their whole production. This will apply with equal force to every other manufactured commodity made, or pro- duct which the earth yields. As has been remarked, it is not the nations, as governments, dealing with other nations, but individuals ; and each anx- ious to make out of every transaction or contract, whether domestic or foreign, all that can be made legitimately, and that without regard to the interests of nations or other individuals. If we examine the statistics of every civilized country on the globe, this will be verified. And permit me here to say, that while every writer upon political economy in England is proclaiming and asserting that for every import there must be an export, and claiming the doctrine of reciprocity in trade as I have stated it — the last named of which has been so often used to frighten our people and especially the farmers of our country, that if we do not buy of them they will not buy of us — there is no country in the world where the fallacy and falseness of these doctrines are shown by their own published trade reports more fully than they are in England. Their aggregate imports for the last thirty years, without one single exception, have every year ex- ceeded their exports. They have not shown in any of their writings or reports that in one single instance the export has followed the import. The figures for the last ten years, as taken from their trade reports, printed by order of Parliament, are as follows : Years. Total Imports. Total Exports. 1875 £373,939,577 £281,612,323 1876 375,154,703 256,776,602 1877 394,419,682 252,346,020 1878 368,770,742 245,483,858 1879 362,991,875 248,783,364 1880 411,229,565 286,414,466 1881 397,022,489 297,082.775 1882 413,019,608 306,660,714 1883 426,891,579 305,437,070 1884 390,018,569 295,967,583 £3,913,458,389 £2,776,564,775 Dudley.J 5^0 [Oct. 1, Making the total imports for the United Kingdom more than the total ex- ports for the last ten years £1,136,893,614, or in our money $5,502,- 565,091. It is not pretended, in these published reports of their trade, that there has been an export for every import. So far from this, they show right the contrary. They give us the total value of all their'exports of British and foreign and colonial produce, and all their imports each year, and they show that their exports fall short of their imports by more than five bil- lion five hundred millions of dollars in the last ten years of their trade. And it has been the same for more than thirty years in their dealings. In each of these years they have published a report, of their trade for the year, and in each and every report they give their imports and exports for that year ; and from it we find that each and every year during this period the import has been in excess of the export, virtually admitting that there has not been an export for every import. The appalling figures in these reports of the terrible condition of their trade with foreign nations, stand out in bold relief, and give a crushing denial to their assumed but fallacious dogma. And there is no excuse or explanation given, or pretended to be given, in any one of these annual trade reports that have been published during this time, why the export has not followed the import, as they assert it should have done. If you include the exports and imports of gold and silver in the United Kingdom, they do not get over the difficulty or to any very great extent change the figures given above as to the .excess of the imports over the exports. Persons familiar with the depression of trade in England and the suffering of the working people for want of employment, will find there ample ground to account for the depression and the want and misery that exist there. A nation cannot continue forever to buy more than she sells and be pros- perous any more than an individual can. If the outgoes are more than the in- come, in time ruin and bankruptcy must follow. It is true of individuals and it is equally true of nations. The figures in these annual reports of course are made up from the uni- ted dealings of the people of the kingdom with the people of other coun- tries. In order still further to prove the falseness of this theory, we will examine these same English reports and take their dealings with the peo- ple of some of the other nations. And first let us take France, their nearest neighbor, and see whether in their dealings with this nation the exports have followed the imports. The figures for the last ten years of their trade are as follows : Year. Imports. Exports. 1875 £46,720,101 £27,292,455 1876 45,804,854 29,000,273 1877 45,823,324 25.663.602 1878 41,378,896 26,595,958 1879 38,459,096 26,558,333 1886.] 5dl [Dudley. Year. Imports. Exports. 1880 £41,970,298 £27,990,959 1881 39,984,187 30,085,661 1882 39,090,381 29,758,427 1883 38,363,022 29,409,335 1884 37,437,014 26,339,443 £414,804,173 £278,694,446 278,694,446 £136,109,727 The imports for the last ten years from France are £136,109,727 more than their exports, or in our money $658,771,078. If you go back for twenty years you will find the same disparity between the import and ex- port, except for the year of the German war, when the exports exceeded the imports by a small amount. We will next take Denmark. The figures of their trade with the people of this nation for the last ten years are as follows : Tear. Imports. Exports. 1875 £4, 241, 671 £2,756, 145 1876 4,217,934 2,598,707 1877 3,950,229 2,332,911 1878 4,584,544 1,900,135 1879 4,675,090 4 1,984,767 1880 5,285,767 2,347,573 1881 4,611,999 2,431,193 1882 5,249,467 2,489,182 1883 6,254,998 2,597,807 1884 5,248,244 2,600,591 £48,319,943 £24,039,011 24,039,011 £24,280,932 The imports for the ten years of their trade with Denmark have been more than double the exports, and the imports have been more than dou- ble the exports for the last twenty years. We will now take Sweden and Norway. The figures of their trade with England for the last ten years, are as follows : Year. Imports. Exports. 1875 £8,918,638 £6,296,995 1876 10,654,311 6,323,606 1877 10,454,475 6,197.099 1878 9,127,397 4,324,333 1879 8,392,723 3,928,682 1880 10,989,000 5,132,408 PROC. AMER. PHILOS, SOC. XXIII. 124. 3P. PRINTED DEC. 1, 1880. Dudley.] ^dJ [Oct. 1, Year. Imports. Exports. 1881 £10,054,051 £5,037,236 1882 11,758,635 5,107,502 1883 11,834,314 5,410,972 1884 10,529,115 5,304,429 £102,271,659 £53,063,262 53,063,262 £49,649,397 It will be observed here that the imports are nearly double the exports for the ten years. And if you go back for twenty years the same disparity exists between the imports and exports. We will next take their trade for the last ten years with Spain. The fig- ures are as follows : Year. Imports. Exports. 1875 £8,660,953 £4,294,490 1876 8,763,146 4,796,498 1877 10.842,097 4,267,214 1878 9,115,394 3,794,734 1879 8,398,776 3.758,717 1880 10,669,936 4,078,597 1881 11,027,505 4,393,821 1882 11,488,265 4,847,662 1883 11,623,663 4,876,243 1884 10,157,885 4,750,746 £99,777.620 £43,858,722 43,858,722 £55,918,898 The imports are more than double the exports ; and this holds good with Spain for the last twenty years. The trade with Russia for the last ten years shows the following figures : Year. Imports. Exports. 1875 £20,708,901 £11,346,316 1876 17,574,488 8,635,655 1877 22,142,422 5,443,973 1878 17,803,852 9,458,729 1879 15,876,585 10,607.083 1880 16,029,695 10,967,517 1881 14,053,221 9,277,438 1882 21,047,70-2 8,637.568 1883 20,976,182 7,629,883 1884 16,315,408 7,588,556 £182,528,476 £89,592,718 89,592,718 £92,935,758 1896.] boo [Dudley. It will be seen that for the last ten years the English people have im- ported from Russia more than double what they exported to Russia, and during the last twenty-six years there has not been a single year but what the imports have exceeded the exports, and during this whole time they have been more than double. The figures for the last twenty-six years are as follows : Imports £474,080,882 Exports 213, 144, 167 Excess of imports over exports £260,936,715 From China, during the last ten years, the imports have amounted to £119,440,038, while the exports to have only been £49,091,938; the imports being very much more than double the exports. From Egypt, during the last ten years, the imports were £94,528,335, and the exports to only £28,243,538, not one -third the amount of the im- ports. From Peru, for the past ten years, the imports from were £35,692,075, and the exports to £11,536,330 ; the imports being three times in excess of the exports. In all the above instances in the trade between England and the nations mentioned, the export has not followed the import, but England has bought, each and every year, largely in excess of what these nations have bought of her. The people of these nations, in their dealings, have followed the usual course of business, each taking from the other what they required and nothing more, and that without regard to the balance of trade or the im- port from or export to, proving fully the untruthfulness of the doctrine that an export always follows an import. In the case of Russia, where the excess of the imports over the exports has been going on for so many years, this excess of imports has been made up, in almost every instance, of agricultural products. England has been buying breadstuffs and other agricultural products of Russia without any regard to what Russia bought of her. And as long as the Russian farmer can sell his wheat cheaper than it can be bought in the United States or India, so long will the English corn merchant continue to buy it of Russia, and that without regard to whether the Russian mer- chant buys his woolen goods or hardware of the English merchant or not. And what has been said with regard to wheat applies with equal force to every other commodity that enters into the trade or dealings between man and man in every civilized nation of the world. A man may trade a handsaw for a jackknife, and no doubt this is sometimes done, but it is not the ordinary course of business between merchants ; as a rule they buy what they require and pay for it in cash, and sell it to others in the same manner for cash. If we examine our own trade reports, or those of France, Germany or any other civilized country, we will find the same Dudley.] ^d4 [Oct. 1, disparity between the imports and exports, the figures of their dealings confirming what I have said about the import and the export, and that one very rarely, if ever, follows the other. An export does not always follow an import. And there is no reciprocity in trade between nation and nation, each buying from the other what it requires and nothing more, and that without regard to which side the balance of trade is on in their dealings. Next after ourselves England raises more revenue from custom duties under her tariff laws than any other country in the world ; notwithstand- ing this it has been and is a source of continual complaint on the part of Englishmen that we have tariff laws, and that we make an effort to pro- tect our laboring people and develop our own resources. The English claim that this interferes with their trade, and that we ought to repeal our tariff laws and admit their manufactured commodities into our country free of duty ; and one of the tasks which the Cobden Club of England has undertaken is to break down our protective system and establish free trade in its place ; yet, notwithstanding our tariff laws and restrictions about which they so much complain, we buy more of her manufactured commodities than any other nation, and this has been the case for the last five years. During the whole of this period no nation has bought so much of her as we. We are to-day and have been the best customer England has. In India England has abolished the tariff so that there is absolute free trade, at least so far as her manufactured commodities are concerned ; and she can send and is sending her manufactured commodities there free of Suty and of all tariff restrictions, and yet the two hundred and fifty-three millions of people in India, with free trade so far as English commodities are concerned, take less of England than we do. Our fifty-six millions of people in the United States buy more of England than the two hundred and fifty-three millions of people in India, and more than the ninety-eight millions of people living in the Russian empire. Why is this ? The answer is very easily given. It lies in the fact that the people of the United States consume or use of the manufactured com- modities of the world nearly twice as much as the people of any other country or nation, I mean per capita, man for man. If asked for an ex- planation why we use or consume more goods, &c, in this couutry than they do in England, France or any other country, it is easily given. Un- der our protective system we pay our people double the wages that are paid to the work people of any country in Europe, and this enables them to buy more. Their power to buy depends upon what they receive for their labor. It is the laboring people of a country who more largely than others consume the products of the mills as well as of the earth. In con- sequence our laboring people are better fed, better housed, better clothed than the working people of any other country ; have the means to buy and do buy not only the necessaries of life, but many of the luxuries as well. They thus live better than the working people of other countries, 1886.] 5oO more like human beings ought to live, like God intended that man should live ; for the earth was given to man not only as a place where he is to exist for a time, but as a home with all that is implied in the term, where food and raiment and the comforts of life should be within the reach of every human being who will labor to obtain them, and that in sufficient quantity to enable him to live as a man ought to live, with the comforts of this life about him. And whilst we admit that all human systems of governments and laws are imperfect, we contend that the one which affords to the masses of the people the best homes and more of this world's goods in the way of food, clothing and those things which are necessary for their comfort, happiness and welfare, is the nearest perfect, and therefore the best. We claim this for the American system of protection, and that it has accomplished more for the masses of the people than any other system that has ever been devised or practiced, and at the same time made us in power, grandeur and civilization the first nation in the world. As an evidence of this and the benefit the masses are receiving from it, we point with just pride to the fact which has just been stated, that the people of this country to-day are consuming probably double per capita of the manufactured commodities of the world, and more of the agricultural products than the people of any other country or nation, with all the ben- efits, comforts and advantages resulting from it ; and this of itself, we think, if there was nothing else to commend it, ought to endear it to every human being in our land, and as a system to perpetuate it forever. Slated Meeliny, Sejjtember 3, 1886. Present, 8 members. Vice-President, Dr. W. S. W. Euschenbergek, in the Chair. Letters of acceptance of membership were read from Prof. Otto Donner, Helsingfors, Finland ; Dr. Aristides Brezina and Prof. rMward Suess, Vienna, Austria ; Prof. Paul Albrecht, Hamburg, Germany ; Victor Duruy, Prof. Abel Hovelacque, Marquis de Nadaillac and Dr. Edward Pepper, Paris, France ; Duke of Argyll, Prof. Wm. Crookes and Capt. Eichard C. Tem- ple, London. England ; Lord Eayleigh, London, England ; Mr. William S. Baker, Prof. John Marshall, Prof. John T. Napier, Mr. Samuel W. Pennypacker, Mr. Henry Eeed and Prof. 536 [Sept. 3, Benjamin Sharp, Philadelphia; Prof. Herbert B. Adams and Prof. William K. Brooks, Baltimore, Md. ; Prof. John C. Branner, Bloomington, Ind. ; Prof. Antonio Pefiafiel, Mex- ico, Mo. A letter was read from Mr. Francis Galton, of London, declining membership, for reasons held sufficient by the So- ciety. Letters of envoy were read from the Geological Survey of India ; Societe des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie, Odessa ; Academie Royale des Sciences, Amsterdam ; Bibliotheque de l'Universite Royale, Lund; Reale Accademia dei Lincei, Rome ; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester ; Depart- ment of the Interior ; United States Geological Survey. Circulars were received from the United States Naval -Ob- servatory as to the continuation of the publication of the " Re- sults of Meteorological Observations made at the Naval Ob- servatory ;" from the International Congress of Geology in relation to a proposed geological map of Europe, to be issued under the direction of a specially appointed committee; from the American Public Library and Museum, Frankfurt-am- Main, requesting the Society's publications; from the Verein fur Erdkunde in Leipzig, containing the announcement of its Twenty-fifth Anniversary. Photographs for the Society's album were received from Prof. John C. Branner, of Bloomington, Ind. ; Col. Garrick Mallery, of Washington. Letters indicating a change of address were received from Prof. Japetus Steenstrup, Copenhagen (Frederiksborggade, 18, 2. Copenhagen); Meteorological Office, London (116 Vic- toria St., S. W.). Letters were read from Prof. Joseph Hyrtle, of Vienna, stating that on account of blindness he returns No. 122, and requests that nothing further be sent him; the Verein fur Vat- erliindische Natiirkunde, Wurtemberg. desiring certain of the Society's publications. On motion the request was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. Acknowledgments were received from Connecticut Histori- 1886.] 5d7 cal Society (72) ; Institut Egyptien (81-87 ; 89-122) ; Acade- mie Eoyale cles Sciences, Amsterdam (116-119); Bibliotheque de l'Universite Royale, Lund (116-120); Royal Society of New South Wales (116-121); Verein fur Vaterlaadische ISTa- turkunde, Wiirtemberg, Comite Geologique, St. Petersburg, 117-121); Observatorio Astron6mico National Mexicano (117, 118, 119, 122); K. K. Sternwarte in Prag (120); Prof. Japetus Steenstrup, Copenhagen (120, 121) ; Societe Royale de Zoologie, Amsterdam (120, 121, 122); Prof. E. Renevier, Lau- sanne, Ministre de l'Interieur, Brussels, R. Academia dei Lincei, Rome, Mus-ee Guimet, Paris (121); Fondation de P. Teyler, Harlem, Meteorological Office, London, Society of An- tiquaries, London, Statistical Society, London; Cambridge Philosophical Society, Prof. James Geikie, Edinburgh, Mr. Benjamin Smith Lyman, Denver (122); Deutsche Morgen- landische Gesellschaft, Halle A. S., New Bedford Public Library (121, 122); Department of the Interior; Garten-Bau Verein, Berlin (119). Donations for the Library were announced from Mining De- partment, Melbourne; Royal Asiatic Society, Hong-Kong; Royal Asiatic Society (North China Branch), Shanghai ; Geo- logical Survey of India ; Royal Geographical Society of Rus- sia ; Comite Geologique, Profs. Otto Stuve and Serge Nikitin, of St. Petersburg ; Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes, Moscow ; Society of Naturalists of New Russia, Odessa : Accademia degli Agiati, Roveredo, Austria ; K. K. Geologische Reichs- anstalt, Vienna ; K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften and Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Anthropologic, &c, Munich ; Natur- forschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes, Altenburg; Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft and S. Calvary & Co. (publishers), Berlin ; Naturhistorischer Verein and Prof. G. Vom Rath, Bonn; Verein fur Erdkunde, Dresden; Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Emden ; Prof. Paul Emil Richter of Freiburg ; Oberhessische Gesellschaft fur Natur- und Heilkunde, Geissen ; " Zoologischer Anzeiger," K. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wis- senschaften and Prof. C. F. Zinchen of Leipzig; Naturhistorische G esellschaft, Nuremberg; Verein fiirVaterlandische Naturkunde 538 [Sept. 3, in Wiirtemberg ; Editors of the " Naturforscher," Tubingen; Unterfrank. Kreuxifisherei-Yerein, YViirtzburg ; Societe de Physique, &c, Geneva ; Societe Vandoise des Sciences Natur- elles, Societe Geologique Suisse and Prof. E. Renevier of Lau- sanne ; Prof. Francois W. C. Traffbrd of Zurich ; K. Akade- mie van YVetenschappen and K. Zoologisch Genootschap, Am- sterdam ; Societe Hollandaise de Sciences and Archives Neer- landais, Harlem ; Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale, Florence ; R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze ed Lettere, Milan ; R. Accade- mia di Scienze Lettere ed Arti, Modena ; R. Accademia di Scienze Lettere ed Arti, Padua; Societa Toscana Scienze Natural:, Pisa ; R. Accademia clei Lincei, R. Comitato Geo- logico d'ltalia, Biblioteca N. Centrale Yittorio Emanuele and Prof. Guiseppi Sergi of Rome ; Accademia Reale delle Scienze and Observatorio R. Universita, Turin; R. Istituto Yeneto di Scienze Lettere ed Arti ; Academie Royale de Belgique, Musee Royale d'Historie Naturelle and Prof. Albrecht, Brus- sels; K. Universitet, Lund; Societe de Geographie, Institu- tion Ethnographique, Societe d'Anthropologie, Societe des Antiquaires de France, Musee Guimet, Ecole des Mines, Revue Internationale de l'Enseignement, Ministre de l'Instruction Publique and Marquis de Nadaillac, Paris ; Societe des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles, Bordeaux ; Societe Sericicole, Mont- pellier ; R. Academia de Ciencias Naturales y Artes, Barce- lona ; R. Academia de la Historia, Madrid ; Instituto y Obser- vatorio de Marina (San Fernando) ; Royal Society, Linnean, Zoological, Geological and Statistical Societies, Royal Geo- graphical and Astronomical Societies, Meteorological Society and Office, Society of Antiquaries, Victoria Institute, " Nature," Journals of Conchology and Forestry and Dr. Benjamin Ward Richardson of London ; Cambridge Philological Society ; Royal Cornwall Polytechnic Society, Falmouth ; Philosophical and Literary Society of Leeds ; Royal Dublin Society and Royal Geological Society of Ireland ; Nova Scotian Institute of Nat- ural Science; " The Canadian Record of Science," Montreal; Dr. Robert Bell, Ottawa; Literary and Historical Society, Quebec ; Canadian Institute, Toronto ; Military Academy, 1886.1 5o.) Norwich, Vt. ; Mt. Pleasant Classical Institution ; Boston So- ciety of Natural History, Massachusetts Historical Society, American Statistical Association. Mr. H. Andrews Hill and the editor of " Library Notes," Boston ; Harvard College, Museum of Comparative Zoology and Prof. Samuel H. Scudder, Cam- bridge, Mass. ; Essex Institute ; " American Journal of Science," College and Oriental Society, New Haven ; Entomological Yale Society and Brooklyn Library; Buffalo Library; American Chemical Society and Meteorological Observatory, New York ; Vassar Brothers' Institute, Pouuhkeepsie ; Geological Survey of New Jersey; editor of the " Philosophian Review," Bridge- ton ; College of Pharmacy, Franklin Institute, Historical So- ciety of Pennsylvania, Mercantile Library, Pennsylvania So- ciety for Promotion of Public Economy, Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia Library, Provident Life and Trust Co., Philadelphia Panorama Co., Messrs. S. C. Perkins, Fr. Meinert, Celen Sabbrin, W. S. Baker, R. S. Culin, Henry Phillips, Jr., and McCalla & Stavely, Philadelphia ; Wyoming Historical and Geological Society ; U.S. Naval Institute, Annapolis ; Johns Hopkins University and American Journal of Philology, American Chemical Journal, American Journal of Archae- ology, Peabody Institute, Baltimore; U. S. Fish Commission, U. S. National Museum, U. S. Geological Survey, U. S. Naval Observatory, National Academy of Sciences, U. S. Govern- ment Publications Bureau of Education, Hydrographic Office, Departments of Interior and of State, Virginia Historical So- ciety ; Leander McCormick Observatory ; Society of Natural History, Cincinnati; Transylvania University; Mr. Charles C. Jones, Jr., of Augusta ; Society of Natural History, Brook- ville, Ind. ; Rev. Stephen D. Peet, Chicago; Prof. H. S. Frieze, Ann Arbor; Mr. T. F. Williams, St. Paul; Academy of Natural Sciences, Davenport, la. ; State Historical Society, Iowa City; Washburn College and Kansas Historical Society, Topeka ; Prof. Chas. W. Brooks, San Francisco ; Colorado Scientific Society ; Dr. Antonio Penaflel, Mexico ; Prof. L. Darapsky, Santiago ; Imperial Observatorio, Museo Nacional and Prof. Ladislau Netto, Rio de Janeiro. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3q. PRINTED I}EC. 2, 1886. 540 [Sept. 3, The Secretaries reported that they had communicated with various foreign and domestic societies and periodicals in refer- ende to an exchange of publications, and that the following so far had responded favorably, viz : La Societe de Borda, Dax, France ; Geographische Gesell- schaft, Hannover ; Acadernie de Belles Lcttres, Caen, France ; R. Accademiadegli Agiati, Roveredo, Austria; R. Academiade Ciencias, Barcelona, Spain; Sociele Seriuicole, Montpellier, France ; Societe des Antiquaires de la Marne, St. Omer, France ; Naturforscher, Tubingen, Germany; Cosmos, Paris, France; Verein fur Thiiringische Geschichte, Jena ; Societe des Amis des Sciences Naturelles et d'Ethnographie, Moscow, Russia ; Societe des Sciences et de Geographie, Port-au-Prince; K. Zoolog. Genootschap, Hague ; R. Accademia di Scienze, Pa- dova ; Soc. Historique et Litt. du Cher, Bourges ; Garten-Bau Yerein, Darmstadt ; Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft, Dres- den ; La Societe Polymathique de Morbihan, Yannes, France. On motion, the above societies, &c, were placed upon the exchange list to receive Proceedings from No. 96. La Societe Malocologique de Belgique, Bruxelles, requested certain volumes of Transactions, which were ordered to be sent, and that the Society should receive them as published here- after. Pending nomination No. 1113 was read. Mr. Phillips exhibited a photograph of Mt. iEtna in erup- tion, on May 20, 1886, at 1.30 p.m. On motion, of Mr. Law, the Society appropriated $100 for the mounting on guards and binding the MS. letters of William Temple Franklin, lately found in the Society's attics. On motion of Mr. Jordan, the Society agreed to dispense with the meeting of September 17th, and the Society was adjourned by the presiding member. 1886.1 541 Stated Meeting, October 1, 1886. Present, 15 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Mr. W. S. Baker, a newly- elected member, was presented to the Chair and took his seat. Letters of envoy were received from the Meteorological Office and Statistical Society of London; American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston ; Boston Society of Natural His- tory; Observatorio Nacional, Cordova, ArgentiDe Republic. Letters of acknowledgment were received from L' Academie Royale Danoise des Sciences et des Lettres, Copenhagen (120, 121); Royal Society of London (121); Boston Society of Na- tural History (119-122); Natural History Society, Montreal, Canada (123); Institut Canadian-Francais, Ottawa, Canada (123); Canadian Institute, Toronto, Canada (123); Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Canada (123) ; Portland Society of Natural History, Maine (123); New Hampshire Historical Society, Concord (123); Museum of Comparative Zoology, Prof. Alexander Agassiz, Mr. Robert N. Toppan, Cambridge, Mass. (123) ; Essex Institute, Salem (123) ; American Antiquarian Society, "Worcester, Mass. (123); Rhode Island Historical Society, Providence (123); Connecticut Historical Society, Hartford (123) ; University of the City of New York, New York Historical Society, Prof. Henry M. Baird, Prof. J. J. Stevenson, New York (123); Prof Walter LeConte Stevens, Brooklyn, N, Y. (123); Prof. C. n. F. Peters, Clinton, N. Y. (123); U. S. Military Acad- emy, West Point, N. Y. (123); New Jersey Historical Soci- ety, Newark (123); Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, Mr. Thomas M. Cleemann, Prof. J. Solis Cohen,' Mr. Patterson DuBois, Prof. James W. Holland, Mr. W. W. Jefferis, Prof. John M. Maisch, Dr. Chas. A. Oliver, Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., Mr. Thos. N. Walter, Philadelphia (123) ; Rev. J. A. Murray, Carlisle, Pa. (123); Prof. M. II. Boye, Coopersburg, Pa. (123); Profs. Traill Green and J. W. Moore, Easton, Pa. (123,); Lack- 542 [Oct. 1, awaima Institute of History and Science, Scranton, Pa. (128); "Wyoming Historical and Geological Society, Wilkes-Barie, Pa. (123); IT. S. Naval Institute, Annapolis, Md. (123); Maryland Institute, Baltimore, Md. (123); Prof. J. H. C. Coffin, Messrs. W. B. Taylor and Chas. A. Schott, Washing- ton, D. C. (123); Leander McCorroick Observatory, Univer- sity of Virginia (123); Prof. M. Scheie De Vere, University of Virginia (123); Virginia Historical Society, Eichmond, Va. (123); Elliott Society, Charleston, S. C. (123); Georgia Historical Society, Savannah (123); Cincinnati Observatory, Prof. J. M. Hart, Cincinnati, O. (123); Dennison University, Granville, O. (123); Eev. H. S. Osborn, Oxford, O. (123); Prof. Eobt. Peter, Lexington, Ivy. (123) ; State University Library, Prof. Daniel Kirkwood, Bloomington, Iud. (123); Chicago Historical Society, Illinois (123); Eantoul Literary Society, Illinois (123); Davenport Academy ol Natural Sci- ences, Iowa (123) ; State Historical Society of Wisconsin, Madison (123) ; Kansas State Historical Society, Topeka (123) ; University of California, Profs. John and Joseph LeConte, Berkeley, Cal. (123) ; Prof. George Davidson, San Francisco, Cal. (123). Letters of acknowledgment for the list of surviving members of the American Philosophical Society were received from New Hampshire Historical Society, Concord ; Massachusetts His- torical Society, Boston; Prof. H. A. Hagan, Mr. Eobert N. Toppan, Cambridge, Mass. ; Essex Institute, Salem, Mass. ; American Antiquarian Society, Worcester, Mass. ; Ehode Island Historical Society, Providence ; Connecticut Historical Society, Hartford ; New York Historical Society, Astor Library, New York ; Buffalo Library, Buffalo, N. Y. ; U. S. Military Academy, West Point, N. Y. ; New Jersey Historical Society, Newark ; Mr. Patterson DuBois, Dr. James W. Holland, Dr. Charles A. Oliver, Mr. Eobert Patterson, Eev. J. W. Eobins, Philadelphia ; Prof. J. W. Moore, Easton, Pa. ; Lackawanna In- stitute of History and Science, Scranton, Pa. ; Wyoming His- torical and Geological Society, Wilkes-Barie, Pa.; Prof. M. Scheie DeVere, University of Virginia ; Georgia Historical So- 1836.3 ^^ ciety, Savannah; Chicago Historical Society, Illinois; State His- torical Society of Wisconsin, Madison; Kansas State Histori- cal Society, Topeka ; University of California, Berkeley, Cal. Letters accepting membership in the Society were read from Prof. Merrill E. Gates (Rutgers' College, New Brunswick, New Jersey, September 27th, 1886); Prof. J. P. Postgate (Trinity College, Cambridge, England, September 4th, 1886). .La Societe Litteraire Fmnoise and the University of Illinois requested by letter to receive the Society's Proceedings. On motion, they were ordered to be placed on the list to receive Proceedings from No. 96. The following societies were placed on the exchange list and ordered to receive Proceedings from No. 96 : Verein fur Thiiringische Geschichte und Alterthumskunde, Jena; Berliner AnthropologischeGesellschaft; Berliner Gesell. fur Erdkunde ; Maatschappij der Nederlandsche Letterkunde, Leiden. Donations for the Libi^ry were reported from the following : Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Anthropologic, Munich; Academie Eoyale de Copenhagen; Prof. Giuseppi, Sergi-Rome ; R. Os- servatorio di Torino; La Societe d' Histoire de France; d' Anthropologic de Paris ; de Zoologie de France ; Revue In- ternationale de L' Enseignement, Institut de France, Paris; Societe d' Agriculture de Lyon ; Academie Nationale des Sciences, Belles- Lettres et Arts, Bordeaux; Royal Society, British Association for the Advancement of Science, Royal Geographical Society, London ; Boston Society of Natural History, Boston Athenaeum, American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston; Prof. Edward C. Pickering, Cambridge, Mass.; Essex Institute, Salem; Yale College, New Haven; New York Meteorological Observatory; Messrs. R. S. Culin, Philip II. Law, Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Johns Hopkins University, "American Chemical Journal," "American Journal of Philology," Baltimore ; U. S. National Museum, Natioual Academy of Sciences, Entomological Society, De- partments of the Interior, State and War Department, Hydro- graphic Office, Washington, D. C; Rev. Stephen D." Peet, 544 [Oct. 15, Chicago; California Academy of Sciences; Observatorio Na- cionale Argentino, Buenos Ayres; Observatorio do Rio de Janeiro. Photographs for the Society's Album were received from the following members: Charles A. Ashburner, Philadelphia; Thomas M. Drown, Boston; Thomas H. Dudley, Camden; Wm. W. Keen, Philadelphia; John M. Maisch, Philadelphia. The following deaths of members at Philadelphia were an- nounced: Dillwyn Parrish, September 18th, 1886, aged 77 years; James E. Ludlow, September 20th, 1886, aged 62 years ; and, on motion, the President was authorized to ap- point suitable persons to prepare the usual obituary notices. Dr. Charles A. Oliver read a paper on "Subjective After- Color " (Complementary Color). Dr. Daniel G. Brinton read a paper on " Ikonomatic No- menclature." Mr. Thomas H. Dudley read a paper, " Is there reciprocity in trade and the consumption of manufactured commodities? " Prof. E. D. Cope presented a paper, " A systematic list of the North American species of Bufo and Raua, with descrip- tions of some new species of Batrachia from the specimens in the National Museum." Pending nomination No. 1113 was read, and the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, October 15, 1886. Present, 15 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Prof. Benjamin Sharp, M.D., a newly-elected member, was presented to the Chair and took his seat. Letters of envoy were received from the Zoological Society of London; University of Illinois; U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. ; Hamilton Association, Canada ; Harvard College Observatory. 1886.] 545 Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Uni- versity of Illinois (96-123) ; Historical Society of Pennsyl- vania (L23); Dr. William G\ A. Bon will and Mr. Samuel Dickson of Philadelphia (123); Mr. Richard Meade Bache (123). The State Library of Massachusetts (Boston), the K. Sachs. Alterthumsverein, Dresden, and the Ob.servatoire Astrono- mique et Physique of Tashkend, Turkestan, Russia, were placed on the list to receive the Proceedings of the Society, beginning with No. 96. Donations to the Library were announced from the following: Mining Department, Melbourne ; China Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Shanghai ; Societe de Litteraire Finnoise, Hel- singfors; K. K. Stern warte, Prag; Prof. G. vom Rath, Bonn; " Astronomische Nachrichten,"Kiel; "Zoologischer Anzeiger," Leipsic; Societe Royale des Antiquaries du Nord, Copen- hagen ; K. Zoologisch-Botanisch Genootschap, 'S-Gravenhage ; Societe de Geographie and Prof. Pedro A. Monteiro, Lisbon ; Royal Society and " Nature," London ; Natural History and Antiquarian Society, Penzance ; Hamilton Association, Onta- rio, Canada ; Boston Society of Natural History ; Harvard College Observatory; "American Journal of Science," New Haven; Messrs. E. Steiger & Co., New York; New Jersey Historical Society; Franklin Institute, Hydrographic Office, College of Pharmacy, American Catholic Historical Society, Messrs. A. E. Foote, Isaac Myer, Philip H. Law, Henry Phil- lips, Jr., Gen. Russell Thayer and Dr. I. Minis Hays, of Phila- delphia ; Wyoming Historical and Geological Society, Wilkes- Barre; Naval Observatory, Department of State, U. S. Na- tional Museum, Smithsonian Institution and Government Printing Office, Washington, D. C. ; Illinois University, Champlain ; University of California, Berkeley, Cal. Mr. Alvan Clark, of Cambridgeport, Mass., presented his photograph for the Society's Album, and Mr. W. S. Baker, of Philadelphia, an etched likeness of himself. Mr. William Harden, Savannah, Ga., presented a photo- graph of an Iadian vase, lately exhumed in Georgia. Brinton.] 54b [Nov. 5, Action on proposition No. 1113 was postponed until Decem- ber 17th. Prof. Cope exhibited some crania of Tahitians and made remarks on human dentition, after which a discussion ensued, participated in by Drs. Horn and J. Cheston Morris. The President reported he had received and paid over to the Treasurer the Michaux rentes for July, $133.07. On motion, the Society subscribed to the "Journal of Morphology." And the Society was adjourned by the President. The Conception of Love in some American Languages. By Daniel G. Brinton, M.D. {Read before the American Philosophical Society, Nov. o, 1886.) " The words which denote love, describing a sentiment at once powerful and delicate, reveal the inmost heart of those who created them. The vital importance attached to this sentiment renders these beautiful words especially adapted to point out the exceeding value of language as a true autobiography of nations." This quotation is from an essay by a thoughtful writer, Dr. Carl Abel, in which he has gathered from four languages, the Latin, English, Hebrew and Russian, their expressions for this sweet emotion, and subjected them to a careful analysis.* The perusal of his article has led me to make some similar ex- aminations of American languages; but with this difference in method, that while Dr. Abel takes the languages named in the fullness of their development and does not occupy himself with the genesis of the terms of affection, I shall give more particular attention to their histoi'y and derivation as furnishing illustra- tions of the origin and growth of those altruistic sentiments which are revealed in their strongest expression in the emotions of friendship and love. Upon these sentiments are based those acts which unite man • Linguistic Essays, by Carl Abel, I'b.D. (Loudon, 1&2). 1S86.] °±^ [Urinton. to man in amicable fellowship and mutual interchange of kindly offices, thus creating a nobler social compact than that "which rests merely on increased power of defence or aggression. These sentiments are those which bind parent to child and child to parent, and thus supply the foundation upon ^which the family in the true significance of the term should rest. These are they which, directed toward the ruler or the state, find expression in personal loyalty and patriotic devotion. Surpassing all in fervor and potency, these sentiments, when exhibited in love be- tween the sexes, direct the greater part of the activity of each individual life, mould the forms of the social relations, and con- trol the perpetuation of the species. Finally, in their last and highest manifestations, these sentiments are those which have suggested to the purest and clearest intellects both the most exalted intellectual condition of man, and the most sublime defi- nition of divinity.* These are good reasons, therefore, why we should scan with more than usual closeness the terms for the conception of love in the languages of nations. Another purpose which I shall have in view will be to illus- trate by these words the wonderful parallelism which everywhere presents itself in the operations of the human mind, and to show how it is governed by the same associations of ideas both in the new and old worlds. As a preparation for the latter object, let us take a glance at the derivation of the principal words expressing love in the Ar\an languages. The most prominent of them may be traced back to one of two ruling ideas, the one intimating a similarity or likeness between the persons loving, the other a wish or de- sire. The former conveys the notion that the feeling is mutual, the latter that it is stronger on one side than on the other. These diverse origins are well illustrated by the French aimer and the English love. Aimer, from the Latin amare, brings us to the Greek «,««, o/io<;7 both of which spring from the Sanscrit sam ; from which in turn the Germans get their words sammt, along with, and zusammen, together; while we obtain from this rooi almost without change our words similar and same. Ety- *I scarcely need say that I refer to the marvelous words of St. John: 6 p.?} ayaniuv, duk eyvat rnv deov, ore 6 0so$ ayanrj errrcv (1 John iv, 8); and to the amor intellectualis, the. golden crown of the philosophy of Spinoza as developed in tlie last "book of his Etldra. ""- PROC. AMER. PHIJLOS. S0C. XXIII. 124. 3R. PRINTED DEC. 2, 1886. Brinton.] 54:0 [Nov. 5, mologically, therefore, those who love are alike ; they are the same in such respects that they are attracted to one another, on the proverbial principle that " birds of a feather flock together." Now turning to the word love, German Liebe, Russian lubov, lubity, we find that it leads us quite a different road. It is traced back without any material change to the Sanscrit lobha, covet- ousness, the ancient Coptic lifts, to want, to desire. In this ori- gin we see the passion portrayed as a yearning to possess the loved object; and in the higher sense to enjoy the presence and sympathy of the beloved, to hold sweet communion with him or her. A class of ideas closely akin to this are conveyed in such words as " attached to," " attraction," " affection," and the like, which make use of the figure of speech that the lover is fastened to, drawn toward, or bound up with the beloved object. We often express this metaphor in full in such phrases as "the bonds of friendship," etc. This third class of words, although in the history of language they are frequently of later growth than the two former, probably express the sentiment which underlies both these, and that is a dim, unconscious sense of the unity which exists throughout all objective nature, a unity which is revealed to man most per- fectly in the purest and highest love, which at its sublimest height does away with the antagonism of independent personality and blends the I and the Thou in a oneness of existence. Although in this, its completest expression, we must seek ex- amples solely between persons of opposite sex, it will be well to consider in an examination like the present, the love between men, which is called friendship, that between parents and chil- dren, and that toward the gods, the givers of all good things. The words conveying such sentiments will illustrate many fea- tures of the religious and social life of the nations using them. I. The Algonkin. I begin with this group of dialects, once widely spread throughout the St. Lawrence valley and the regions adjoinhig; and among them I select especially the Cree and the Chipeway, partly because we know more about them, and partly because they probably represent the common tongue in its oldest and 1886.] 54 J [Brinton. purest type. They are closely allied, the same roots appearing in both with slight phonetic variations. In both of them the ordinary words for love and friendship are derived from the same monosyllabic root, aak. On this, ac- cording to the inflectional laws of the dialects, are built up the terms for the love of man to woman, a lover, love in the abstract, a friend, friendship, and the like. It is also occasionally used by the missionaries tor the love of man to God and of God to man.* In the Chipeway this root has but one form, sagi; but in Cree it has two, a weak and a strong form, salci and sakk. The mean- ing of the latter is more particularly to fasten to, to attach to. From it are derived the words for string or cord, the verbs, " to tie," "to fasten," etc.; and also some of the coarsest words to express the sexual relation. f Both these roots are traced back to the priraa^ element of the AlgonUin language expressed by the letters sak or s — k. This conveys the generic notion of force or power exerted by one over another, | and is apparently pre- cisely identical with the fundamental meaning of the Latin afficio, " to affect one in some manner by active agenc3',"§ from which word, I need hardly add, were derived affectus and affectio and our "affection;" thus we at once meet with an absolute par- allelism in the working of the Aryan Italic and the American Algonkin mind. The Cree has several words which are confined to parental and filial love and to that which the gods have for men. These are built up on the dissyllabic radical espi or aspi, which is an instrumental particle signifying "by means of, with the aid of." || Toward the gods, such words refer to those v;ho aid us ; toward children those whom their parents aid ; and from children toward parents, again those from whom aid is received. *Chipewa: ninsagiiwe, I love; iagiiweivin, love; saiagiiwed, a lover. Cree: s&kihituwin, friendship; manilowi s&kihewewin, the love of God. The words from the Chipeway are from Baraga's Otchipwe Dictionary ; those from, the Cree from Lacombe's Dictionnaire de la tongue des Oris, except when other- wise noted. t Chipeway : sagibidjigan, a string or cord. Cree: sakkappitew, he fastens, he ties; sakkahigan, a nail; sakkistiwok, coeunt, copulati sunt. J See Joseph Howse, Grammar of the Cree Language, p. 165. JSSee the remarks in Andrews' Latin Lexicon, s. v. || Cree: espiteyimit kije-manilo, lor the love of God ; espUeyimalijk, for the love of the children. Brinton] ^U [Nov. 5, For love between men, friendship, the Cree employs some words from the radical sdki ; but more frequently those com- pounded with the root wit or ivitcli., which means " in company with,"* and is the precise analogue of the syllable com (Latin, con) in the English words companion, comrade, compeer, con- federate, etc.; it conveys the idsa of association in life and action, and that association a voluntary and pleasure-giving one. In the Chipeway there is a series of expressions for family love and friendship which in their origin carry us back to the same psj'chological process which developed the Latin amare from the Sanscrit nam (see above). They may be illustrated by the melodious term which in that dialect means both friendship and relationship, inawendawin. This is an abstract verbal noun from the theme ni inawa, I resemble him, which is built up from the radicle in. This particle denotes a certain prevailing way or manner, and appears both in Cree and Chipeway in a variety of words."]" r^le principle of similarity is thus fully expressed as the basis of friendship. To see how apparent this is we have but to remember the English " I like him,'' i. e., there is some- thing in him like me. The feebler sentiment of merely liking a person or thing is expressed in the Chipeway by a derivative from the adjective mino, good, well, and signifies that he or it seems good to me.J The highest form of love, however, that which embraces all men and all beings, that whose conception is conveyed in the Greek aya-rh we find expressed in both the dialects by deriva- tives from a root different from any I have mentioned. It is in its dialectic forms kis, keche, or kiji, and in its origin it is an intensive interjectional expression of pleasure, indicative of what gives joy.§ Concretely it signifies what is completed, perma- nent, powerful, perfected, perfect. As friendship and love yield the most exalted pleasure, from this root the natives drew a fund of words to express fondness, attachment, hospitality, charit}1-; *Cree: ni witjiu&fjan, my friend ; wilchettuwih, a confraternity, or society. t Chipeway : ivawema, I am his relative, or, his friend. Cree: ijiiidkusi"*, he has such an appearance. Tins particle of similarity is considered by Howse to be " one of the four primary generic nouns" of the Al- gonkin language. Grammar of the Cree Language, p. 135. J Chipeway: nin miwnima, I like (him, her, it). fjSee riowse, Grammar of the Cree Lang., p. 175. Kec.he (kees) as an interjection of pleasure, he considers in antithesis to at (compare Gerinau ach!) as an inter- jection of pain, and cites abundant examples. 1886.] bOl- [Brlnton. and from the same worthy source they selected that adjective which they applied to the greatest and most benevolent divinity.* II. The Nahuatl. The Nahuatl, Mexican or Aztec language was spoken exten- sively throughout Mexico and Central America, and every tribe who used it could boast of a degree of culture considerably above that of any of the Algonkin communities. Such being the case, it is rather surprising to note how extremely poor in comparison is the Nahuatl in independent radicals denoting love or affection. In fact, there is only one word in the language which positively has this signification, and it, with its deriva- tives, is called upon to express every variety of love, human and divine, carnal and chaste, between men and between the sexes. This word is tlazotla, he loves. It is no easj^matter to trace its history. By well known laws of Nahuatl etymology we know that the root is zo. We have from this same root several other words of curiously diverse meanings. Thus, izo, to bleed, to draw blood, either for health, or, as was the custom of those nations, as a sacrifice before the idols; izoliui, to grow old, to wear out, applied to garments ; tlazofi, to offer for sale at a high price ; and zozo, to string together, as the natives did flowers, peppers, beads, etc. Now, what idea served as the common starting-point of all these expressions ? The answer is, that we find it in the word zo as applied to a sharp-pointed instrument, a thorn, or a bone or stone awl, used in the earliest times for puncturing or transfixing objects. From this came zozo, to transfix with such an instrument and string on a cord ; izoliui, to be full of holes as if repeatedly punctured and thus worn out; and tzo: to bleed, because that was done by puncturing the flesh with the thorns of the maguey or sharp obsidian points. f *Chipeway: nin kijewadis, I am amicable, benevojent ; Tcijfwadisiwin, charity, benevolence, benignity, compassion ; kije manitowin, Godhead, divine nature. Cree: kimtew, he is devoted to (him, her); Knew, she loves (hpr children); kisewatisiwin, charity, the highest virtue; kise manilo, "l'esprit charitable, Dieu," and numerous others. •fThe following words and meanings are from Carochi's Grammar and Mo- lina's Dictionary of this tongue : co, punzar, sangrar. 50?o, ensartar, como flores, cuentas, etc. po ica, estar ensartada la cuenta, etc. tlafvtl, cosa ensartada. The original meaning of zo, a pointed tool or awl, is not given by Molina, but Is repeatedly expressed in the phonetic picture writing of the Aztecs. Brinton.] 5c>2 [Nov. 5( Bat how do we bring these into connection with the sentiment of love and its verbal expression ? We might indeed seek an illustration of the transfer from classical mythology, and adduce the keen-pointed arrows of Cupid, the darts of love, as pointing out the connection. But I fear this would be crediting the ancient Nahuas with finer feelings than they deserve. I gravely doubt that they felt the shafts of the tender passion with any such susceptibility as to employ this metaphor. Much more likely is it that tlazotla, to love, is derived directly from the noun tlazotl, which means something strung with or fastened to another. This brings us directly back to the sense of" attached to " in English, and to that of the root saki in Algonkin, the idea of being bound to another by ties of emotion and affection. But there is one feature in this derivation which tells seriously against the national psychology of the Nahuas: this their only word for love is not derived, as is the Algonkin, from the pri- mary meaning of the root, but from a secondary and later sig- nification. This hints ominously at the probability that the ancient tongue had for a long time no word at all to express this, the highest and noblest emotion of the human heart, and that consequently this emotion itself had not risen to conscious- ness in the national mind. But the omissions of the fathers were more than atoned for by the efforts of their children. I know no more instructive instance in the history of language to illustrate how original defects are amended in periods of higher culture by the linguistic faculty than this precise point in the genesis of the Nahuatl tongue. The Nahuas, when they approached the upper levels of emotional development, found their tongue singularly poor in radicals con- veying such conceptions. As the literal and material portions of their speech offered them such inadequate means of expres- sion, they turned toward its tropical and formal portions, and in those realms reached a degree of development in this direction which far surpasses that in any other language known to me. In the formal portion of the language they were not satisfied with one, but adopted a variety of devices to this end. Thus : all verbs expressing emotion may have an intensive termination suffixed, imparting to them additional force ; again, certain pre- fixes indicating civility, respect and affection may be employed 1886.] 65d [Brinton. in the imperative and optative moods ; again, a higher synthetic construction may be employed in the sentence, by which the idea expressed is emphasized, a device in constant use in their poetry, and especially the strength of emotion is indicated by suffixing a series of terminations expressing contempt, reverence or love. The latter are wonderfully characteristic of Nahuatl speech. They are not confined to verbs and nouns, but may be added to adjectives, pronouns, participles, and even to adverbs and postpositions. Thus every word in the sentence is made to carry its burden of affection to the ear of the beloved object! Add to these facilities the remarkable power of the Nahuatl to impart tropical and figurative senses to words by the employ- ment of rhetorical resources, and to present them as one idea by means of the peculiarities of its construction, and we shall not consider as overdrawn the expression of Professor De la Rosa when he writes : " There can be no question but that in the mani- festation in words of the various emotions, the Nahuatl finds no rival, not only among the languages of modern Europe, but in the Greek itself."* The Nahuatl word for friendship is icniuhtli. This is a com- pound of the preposition ic, with; the noun-ending tli ; and the adverbial yuh, or noyuh, which means " of the same kind." The word, therefore, has the same fundamental conception as the Latin amicus and the Cree inawema, but it was not developed into a verbal to express the suffering of the passion itself.f 777. The Maya. The whole peninsula of Yucatan was inhabited by the Ma3'as, and tribes speaking related dialects of their tongue lived in Guatemala, Chiapas, and on the Gulf Shore north of Vera Cruz. All these depended chiefly on agriculture for subsistence, were builders of stone houses and made use of a system of written records. Their tongue, therefore, deserves special consideration as that of a nation with strong natural tendencies to develop- ment. In turning to the word for love in the Maya vocabulary we are * Ettudio de la Filosofia y Riqueza de la Lengua Mexicana. Par Agostin de la Rosa, p. 78 (Guadalajara, 1877). t There is another word in Nahuatl of similar derivation. It is pohui, to make much of a person, to^like one. The root ispo, which carries with it the idea of sameness, similarity or equality; as itelpocapo, a boy like himself. (Paredes, Promptuario Manual Mexicano, p. 140.) Brinton.] ^o4 [Nov. 5, at once struck with the presence of a connected series of words expressing this emotion, while at the same time they, or otliers closely akin to them and from the same root, mean pain, injury, difficulty, suffering, wounds and misery. Bolh are formed by the usual rules from the monosyllable ya.* Were the ancient Mayas so sensitive to love's wounds and the pangs of passion as to derive their very words for suffering from the name of this sentiment ? No ; that solution is too unlikely for our acceptance. More probable is it that we have here an illustration of the develop- ment of language from interjectional cries. In fact, we may be said to have the proof of it, for we discover that this monosyl- lable ya is still retained in the language as a verb, with the sig- nification " to feel anything deeply, whether as a pain or as a pleasure." f Its derivatives were developed with both mean- ings, and as love and friendship are the highest forms of pleas- ure, the word ya in its happier senses became confined to them. It seems to have sufficed to express the conception in all its forms, for the writers in the language apply it to the love of the sexes, to that between parents and children, that among friends, and also to that which men feel toward God, and that which He is asserted to feel toward men. J The Mayas, therefore, were superior to the Nahuas in possess- ing a radical word which expressed the joy of love ; and they must be placed above even the early Aryans in that this radical was in significance purely psychical, referring strictl} to a men- tal state, and neither to similarity nor desire. It is noteworthy that this interjectional root, although belong- *Thus: ya or yail, love; pain, sickness, a wound ; difficult, laborious, yate, to love. yuc.unah, to love. yaili, painfully, laboriously. yalal, to taste; to have relations with a woman. yalzil, love, charity ; something difficult or painful. ■\"ya: senlir mucho una cosa. yamab : sin sentir [the ma is the negative!. Diccionario Maya-ExpaUol del Convento de Motul. (MS. in my possession ) J Thus: yahtetabal c«h lumen Dins, we are loved by God. 11 yacunah Dios toon, the love of God to us. yacunahil Dios, the love with which God is loved. mehenbi.i yacunah, filial love. bakil yacunah, carnal love. All from the Diccionario de Motul (MS.). 1881.] OOO [Brlnton. ing to the substructure of the language, does not appear with the meaning of love in the dialects of the Maya stock. In them the words for this sentiment are derived from other roots. Thus among the Huastecas, residing on the Gulf of Mexico, north of Vera Cruz, the word for love is canezal. It is employed for both human and divine love, and also means anything pre- cious and to be carefully guarded as of advantage to the pos- sessor.* There is no difficulty in following its development when we turn to the Maya, which preserves the most numerous ancient forms and meanings of any dialect of this stock. In it we discover that the verb can means " to affect another in some way, to give another either by physical contact or example a virtue, vice, disease or attribute." f Here again we come upon the precise correlative of the Latin afficio. from which proceeds our "affection," etc. The Guatemalan tribes, the principal of which were and are the Quiches and Cakchiquels, did not accept either ya or can as the root from which to build their expressions for the sentiment of love. In both these dialects the word for to love is logoh. It also means " to buy," and this has led a recent writer to hold up to ridicule the Spanish missionaries who chose this word to ex- press both human and divine love. Dr. Stoll, the writer re- ferred to, intimates that it had no other meaning than " to buy " in the pure original tongue, and that the only word for the pas- sion is ah, to want, to desire.^ In this he does not display his usual accuracy, for we find logoh used in the sense uto like," " to love," in the Annals of the Cakchiquels, written by a native who had grown to manhood before the Spaniards first entered his couutry.§ *Thus: tatu canel ixalle, my beloved wife. ■ma a canezal a Dios, dost thou love God ? Diccionario Huasteco Espatlol, por Carlos de Tapia Zenteno (Mex., 1767). t A number of examples are given in the Diccionario de Motul (MS.). X " Der blosse Begriff derjenigen Liebe, welche das lateiniscbe Zeitwort amare ausdriickt, dem Cakchiquel Indianer fremd ist " Zur Ethnographie der Repub- lik Guatemala. Von Otto Stoll, M.D., p. 146 (Zurich, 1884). \Xelogox ka chiri ruma Akahal vinak, " they were loved by the Akahal men." Annals of the Cakchiquels, p. 126 (Vol. VI of Brinton's Library of Aboriginal American Literature). In the Quiche Popol Vuh the word has the same mean- ing as (page 102) : chi log u vach, their beloved fuce. In fact, the word Dr. Stoll gives as that now usual among the Cakchiquels for "to love "=to desire, in the Popol Vuh is applied to the price paid for wives (p. 304) : rahilpu mial, the price of their daughters. This word may be a derivative from the Mayaj/a, above mentioned. PROC. AMER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3s. PRINTED DEO. 23, 1886. Brinton.] 55b [Nov. 5, That the verb logoh means, both in origin and later use, " to bu3%" as well as "to love," is undoubtedly true. Its root logh is identical with the Maya loh, which has the meanings '' to ex- change, to bin*, to redeem, to emancipate." It was the word selected by the Franciscan missionaries to express the redemp- tion of the world by Christ, and was applied to the redemption of captives and slaves. It might be suggested that it bears a reference to '' marriage b}T purchase ; " but I think that " to buy," and "to love," majr be construed as developments of the same idea of prizing highly. When we say that a person is ap- preciated, we really say that he has had a proper price put upon him. The Latin earns, which Cicero calls ipsum verbum amo?-ix, * means costly in price as well as beloved ; and the tender En- glish " dear " means quite as often that the object is expensive to buy, as that we dote very much upon it. Nor need we go out- side of American languages for illustrations; in Nahuatl llazoti means to offer for sale at a high price, and in 1 1 uasteca cartel, from the same root as canez:il, to love, means something pre- cious in a pecuniary sense, as well as an object of the affections. Other instances will present themselves when wre come to exam- ine some of the South American tongues. But from what I have already given, it is evident that there is nothing contra- dictory in the double meaning of the verb logoh. IV. The Qquichua. The ancient Peruvians who spoke the Qquichua language had organized a system of government and a complex social fabric unsurpassed by any on the continent. The numerous specimens of their arts which have been preserved testify strongly to the licentiousness of their manners, standing in this respect in marked contrast to the Aztecs, whose art was singularly pure. It must be regarded as distinctly in connection with this that we find a similar contrast in their languages. We have seen that in the Nahuatl there appears to have been no word with a primaiy signification "to love," or any suoh conception. The Qquichua, on the contrary, is probably the richest language on the continent, not only in separate words denoting affection, but in moditications of these by imparting to them delicate shades * De Natur(L Deorum, I, 44. 1880.] 55 / [Brinton. of meaning through the addition of particles. As an evidence of the latter, it is enough to cite the fact that Dr. Anchorena in his grammar of the tongue, sets forth nearly six hundred combi- nations of the verb munay, to love ! * The Qquichua is fortunate in other respects ; it has some liter- ature of its own, and its structure has been carefully studied by competent scholars. It is possible, therefore, to examine its lo- cutions in a more satisfactory manner than is the case with most American languages. Its most celebrated literary monument is the drama of Ollanta, supposed to have been composed about the time of the conquest. It has been repeatedly edited and translated, most accurately by Pacheco Zegarra.f His text may be considered as the standard of the pure ancient tongue. Of Qquichua words for the affections that in widest use is the one above quoted, munay. It is as universal in its application as its English equivalent, being applied to filial and parental love as well as to that of the sexes, to affection between persons of the same sex, and to the love of God. No other word of the class has such a wide significance. It ranges from an expres- sion of the warmest emotion down to that faint announcement of a preference which is conveyed in the English " I should pre- fer."; On looking for its earlier and concrete sense we find that munay expressed merely a sense of want, an appetite and the accompanying desire of satisfying it, hence the will, or the wish, not subjectively, but in its objective manifestation. § Therefore it is in origin nearly equivalent to the earliest meaning of " love," as seen in the Sanscrit and the Coptic. While munay is thus to love on reasonable grounds and with definite purpose, blind, unreasoning, absorbing passion is ex- * Gramdiica Quechua, por Dr. J. D. Anchorena, pp. 1G3-177 (Lima, 187-1). + Ollan'a'i; Drame en vers Quechuas da Temps des Incas. Traduit et comments par Gavino Pacheco Zegarra, (Paris, 1S78). (Thus, from the Ollanta: Ollantaytan mvnarccanqui, thou lovest Ollanta! (line 277). munacu.sccallay, my well beloved ! (the Inca to his daughter, line, 311). munayman, I should prefer (line 1606). Holguin, in his Vocabulario de la Lengua Qquichua, gives: Dios munay, the love of God. inunaricuy, unchaste love. % Holguin (u. s.) gives the definitions: munana, la voluntad que es potentia. munay, voluntad, el querer, el gusto, appetlto 6 amor que es acto. Brinton.] OOO [Nov. 5, pressed by huaylluni. This is nearly always confined to sexual love, and conveys the idea of the sentiment showing itself in action by those sweet signs and marks of devotion which arc so highly prized by the loving heart. The origin of this word in- dicates its sentient and spontaneous character. Its radical is the interjection huay, which among that people is an inarticulate cry of tenderness and affection. * The verb lluylluy means literally to be tender or soft, as fruit, or the young of animals ; and applied to the sentiments, to love with tenderness, to have as a darling, to caress lovingly. It has less of sexuality in it than the word last mentioned, and is ap- plied by girls to each other, and as a term of family fondness. It is on a parallel with the English "dear," "to hold dear," etc.f In the later compositions in Qquichua the favorite word for love is ccuyay. Originally this expression meant to pity, and in this sense it occurs in the drama of Ollanta ; but also even there as a term signifying the passion of love apart from any idea of compassion. % In the later songs, those whose composi- tion may be placed in this century, it is preferred to munay as the most appropriate term for the love between the sexes. § From it also is derived the word for charit}*- and benevolence. As munay is considered to refer to natural affection felt within the mind, mayhuay is that ostentatious sentiment which displays itself in words of tenderness and acts of endearment, but leaves it an open question whether these are an3rthing more than simulated signs of emotion. || This list is not exhaustive of the tender words in the Qqui- chua ; but it will serve to show that the tongue was rich in them, and that the ancient Peruvians recognized many degrees and forms of this moving sentiment. * From the Ollanta : Huay ccoyallay. Huay mamallay, Ay, huayllucusccay ccosallay. Oh, my queen! Oh, my mother! Oh, my husband so beloved ! (305, 306). These lines show both the word and its derivation. j-From the Ollanta: fta llulhispa, caress thee, are fond of thee (931). J From the Ollanta: ccityaccu.scaltay, my beloved one (1758). ccuya.ska, compassionate (1705,). gSeethe Qquichua love songs, harahui and huaynv, as they are called, given by Anchorena in his Brdmdtica Quecliua, pp. 181-18&. || See Holguin, Vocabulario Qquichua, s. v., mayhuay and mayhuayecuni. 1886.] 559 [Brinton. What is also noteworthy is the presence in this language of the most philosophical term for friendship in its widest sense that can be quoted from any American language. It is runaccuyay, compounded of ccuyani, mentioned above, and runa, man — the love of mankind. This compound, however, does not occur in the Ollanta drama, and it may have been manufactured by the missionaries. The usual term is maciy, which means merely "associate," or kochomaciy, a table-companion or convive. V. The Tupi- Guarani. The linguistic stock which has the widest extension in South America is that which is represented in Southern Brazil by the Guarani, and in Central and Northern by the Tupi or Lingoa Geral. The latter is spoken along the Amazon and its tribu- taries for a distance of twenty-five hundred miles. It is by no means identical with the Guarani, but the near relationship of the two is unmistakable. The Guarani presents the simplest and more primitive forms, and may be held to present the more archaic type. The word for love in the Guarani is aihu, in another form haihu, the initial h being dropped in composition. This expres- sion is employed for all the varieties of the sentiment, between men, between the sexes, and for that which is regarded as divine.* For "a friend," they have no other term than one which means a visitor or guest ; and from this their expression for " friendship " is derived which really means " hospitality." f Verbal combinations in Guarani are usually simple, and I do not think we can be far wrong in looking upon aihu as a union of the two primary words ai and hu. The former, ai1 means self or the same ; and the latter, hu, is the verb to find, or, to be present.^ " To love," in Guarani, therefore, would mean, "to find oneself in another," or, less metaphysically, " to discover in ♦Thus: Tupa nande raihu, God loves us. Tupa tiande haihu, the love which we have for God. ahaihu, I love her, (him, it). \yecotiaha, friend ; compounded of coti, a dwelling, and aha. to go,=a goer to a dwelling, a visitor. This, and the other Guarani words given, are taken from Ruiz de Montoya's Tesoro de la Lengua Guarani (ed. Vienna, 1876). J Another possible derivation would be from ahii, desire, appetite (Spanish, gana) ; and hu, in the sense of being present. This would express a longingt a lust, like love (see above). Brinton.] OOO [Nov. 5. another a likeness to oneself." This again is precisely the pri- mary signification of the Latin amare ; and if the sentiment impressed in that way the barbarous ancient Aryans, there is no reason why it would not have struck the Guaranis in the same manner. In the Tnpi or Lingua Geral the word for love is evidently but a dialectic variation of that in the Guarani. It is given by some authors as gaigu, plainly a form of haihu ; and by others as gaufu. * These forms cannot be analyzed in the Tupi itself, which illustrates its more modern type. There are other dialects of this wide-spread stem, but it would not be worth while to follow this expression further in its di- verse forms. It is interesting, however, to note that which appears in the Arawack, spoken in Guiana'. In that tongue to love is kanisin, in which the radical ds ani or ansi. Now we find that ani means "of a kind," peculiar to, belonging to, etc. Once more it is the notion of similarity, of " birds of a feather," which underlies the expression for the conception of love, f Conclusions. If, now, we review the ground we have gone over, and classify the conceptions of love as revealed in the languages under dis- cussion, we find that their original modes of expression were as follows : 1. Inarticulate cries of emotion (Cree, Maya, Qquichua). 2. Assertions of sameness or similarity (Cree, Nahuatl, Tupi, Arawack). 3. Assertions of conjunction or union (Cree, Nahuatl, Maya). 4. Assertions of a wish, desire or longing (Cree, Cakchiquel, Qquichua, Tupi). These categories are not exhaustive of the words which I have brought forward, but they include most of them, and probably * I find caicu given by Dr. Oouto de Magclhaes in his Curso da Lin qua Geral spfiundo OUendorf (Rio de Janeiro, 1S7C); saisu by Dr. Amaro Cavalcanti in The Brasilian Language and its Agglutination (Rio Janeiro, 1883) ; ftueub by Dias, Diccionario da Lingua Tupi/ (-Leipzig, 185<) and by Dr. E. F. Franca iu his Chresiomathia da Lingua Rrasilica (Leipzig, 1859). ■\"Ani, es gehort. isl elgen ; la ani, nnch seiner Art." Arawackineh-Deu'ches Worterbuch. This dictionary, published anonymously at Paris, in 1882, in Tome Vlll, of the Bibliotheque Linguistigue Amiric tine, is the production of the Mo- ravian Missionary, Rev. T. S. Schuh man n. See The Literary Works of the For- eign Missionaries of the Mo-aoian Church. By the Rev. <;. H. Reichelt. Trans- lated and annotated by Bishop Edmund do Schweinitz; p. 13 (Bethlehem, 1886). 1886.] Obi [Brinton. were this investigation extended to embrace numerous other tongues, we should find that in them all the principal expressions for the sentiment of love are drawn from one or other of these fundamental notions. A most instructive fact is that these same notions are those which underlie the majority of the words for love in the great Aryan family of languages. They thus reveal the parallel paths which the human mind everywhere pur- sued in giving articulate expression to the passions and emo- tions of the soul. In this sense there is a oneness in all lan- guages, which speaks conclusively for the oneness in the sentient and intellectual attributes of the species. "We may also investigate these categories, thus sho^n to be practically universal, from another point of view. We may in- quire which of them comes the nearest to the correct expression of love in its highest philosophic meaning. Was this meaning apprehended, however dimly, by man in the very infancy of his speech-inventing faculty ? In another work, published some years ago, I have attempted a philosophic analysis of the sentiment of love. Quoting from some of the subtlest dissectors of human motive, I have shown that they pronounce love to be " the volition of the end," or " the resting in an object as an end." These rather obscure scholastic formulas I have attempted to explain by the defini- tion : " Love is the mental impression of rational action whose end is in itself."* As eveiy end or purpose of action implies the will or wish to obtain that end, those expressions for love are most truly philosophic which express the will, the desire, the yearning after the object. The fourth, therefore, of the above categories is that which presents the highest forms of ex- pression of this conception. That it also expresses lower forms is true, but this merely illustrates, the evolut on of the human mind as expressed in language. Love is ever the wish; but while in lower races and coarser natures this wish is for an ob- ject which in turn is but a means to an end, for example, sensual gratification, in the higher, this object is the end itself, be37ond which the soul does not seek to go, in which it rests, and with which both reason and emotion find the satisfaction of boundless activity without incurring the danger of satiety. * The Religious Sentiment, Us Source and Aim ; a Contribution to the Science and Philosophy of Religion, p. 60, (Xew York, 1876). Stokes.] 5b-/ [Nov. 5, Notices of Ncto Fresh -Water Infusoria. By Alfred C Stokes, 31. D. {Read before the American philosophical Society, November 5, 1SSG.) Mastigamceba longifilum, sp. nov. (Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4). Animalcules tepent, very soft and extremely changeable in shape, emit- ting bom all parts of the surface simple lobate pseudopodia, or wave like expansions of the sarcode ; the single antero-terminalflagellum five times as long as the contracted body, about twice as long as the extended zooid; contractile vesicle single, anteriorly placed ; nucleus subspherical, small, situated near the anterior extremity. Length, when contracted, W^o iQCU '> extended, ^J^ inch. Habitat — Standing water, among decaying vegeta- tion. The figures (1, 2, 3, 4) show four forms of the same interesting little amoeboid creature. The movements are usually slowly repent, while the flngellum is quite active. The zooid not rarely glides forward without the protrusion of distinct pseudopodia, only changing the form of the body by ii regular expansions and contractions, while on other occasions the unbranched obtuse pseudopodia extend from any or all points of the periphery. Anisonema pusilla, sp. nov. (Fig. 5). Body subelliptical, less than twice as long as broad, depressed, the two extremities narrowed and obtusely pointed, the ventral surface often slightly concave, the dorsal convex and longitudinally furrowed ; anterior flagellum subequal to the body in length, the posterior or trailing append- age about three times as long as the zooid, both originating near together on the ventral aspect a short distance back of the frontal apex ; pharyn- geal passage minute, but distinct; contractile vesicle apparently single, subcentrally located ; nucleus not observed ; endoplasm frequently en- closing small dark particles, probably food fragments. Length of body ^zx57 inch. Habitat — Pond-water. Movements oscillating, not rapid. Trentonia, gen. nov. Animalcules free-swimming, soft and somewhat changeable in shape, bitlagellate, one flagellum trailing, one vibratile ; frontal border slightly bilabiate ; trichocysts not observed ; otherwise as in Ruphidomonas Stein. Trentonia flag ellata, sp. nov. (Fig. 6). Body obovate, less than three times as long as broad, the anterior border oblique and somewhat bilabiate, the posterior extremity obtusely pointed ; flagella subequal to each other and to the body in length, one extending arcuately forward, often rapidly and spirally vibrating, ap- parently originating in the oral fossa ; the other taking its origin on the ventral or lower surface a short distance behind the anterior extremity, Proceedings of the ker. Philos. Vol. XXIII. No. Fresh-water Infusoria. Stokes. 1886.] 5uO [Stokes. usually trailing ; oral aperture conspicuous, communicating with a capa- cious subtriangular pharyngeal cavity ; contractile vesicle single, spheri- cal, near the anterior extremity ; nucleus subspherical, situated near the body centre ; endoplasm enclosing numerous small ovate chlorophyl corpuscles forming a bright-green layer near the cuticular surface. Length of body ¥|q inch. Movements rotary on the longitudinal axis, but not rapid. Reproduction by encystment and subsequent binary fission. Habitat — Pond-water. This is very similar to Raphidomonas semen (Ehr.) Stein, with two flagella and no apparent trichocysts. When first observed, more than a year ago, it was without hesitation identified with the above-mentioned European form ; but some evenings later, while again examining the Infusorians, it became evident that the specimens possessed two flagella, while the Raphidomonas has but one ; otherwise they were identical with the form just named, with the exception of the trichocysts. Recently the same Infusoria have been collected in a locality remote from the first, and the previous observations confirmed. The trailing flagellum is ordinarily extremely difficult to see. When the Infusorium is rendered uncomfortable and sluggish by prolonged con- finement beneath the cover-glass, or partially poisoned by iodine, then the vibratile flagellum, which is usually held stiffly in advance, the tip alone trembling, is flashed into sight as a rapidly undulating spiral, and the trailing appendage is also momentarily directed forward. At other times it also becomes visible when the Infusorian is in certain positions or has assumed certain changes of form. How the careful European investigators could have overlooked this trailing appendage is inexplicable, providing, of course, that the present form is Raphidomonas semen, with which two flagella are now for the first time observed. It is scarcely possible to be- lieve that Stein would have failed to notice so important an appendage. Yet these two forms are so nearly identical, with the exception of the bi- flagellate character of the present Infusorian, that I confer the generic title Trentonia provisionally only. If, after re-examination, the European Raphidomonas should prove to be monoflagellate, then will Trentonia flagellata become the type of a new family group necessarily taking the name Trentonidse. Oryptoglena truncata, sp. nov. (Fig. 7). Lorica subspherical, depressed posteriorly, the anterior border rounded, the oral aperture slightly eccentric and somewhat conically projecting ; the posterior margin truncate, often slightly retuse ; the lower or ventral aspect gently concave, the dorsal convex ; enclosed zooid subspherical ; endoplasm green ; contractile vesicle double, anteriorly situated ; amyla- ceous corpuscle single, subspherical and subcentrally located ; lorica minutely punctate, colorless when young. Length r^7 inch or less. Habitat — Pond water. Movements rotary on the long axis. The enclosed body varies much in size. It is usually small, occupying PROC. AJ1ER. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3t. PRINTED DEC. 23, 1886. Stokes.l Ob4: [Nov. 5. but a very limited portion of the lorica cavity anteriorly, to which it is apparently in no way attached. Among the numerous individuals exam- ined, none have been seen with the zooid completely filling the cavity of the sheath, and but one in which the body even approached the posterior and lateral walls. Cyclonexis, gen. nov. (kukIos ; vij^j?). Animalcules laterally joined to form free swimming annular colonies, the zooids illoricate ; flagella two, one long, the other short, both vibra- tile ; endoplasm enclosing two laterally disposed color-bands; eye-like pigment specks absent. Habitat — Fresh water. This differs from Uvtlla, which it most closely resembles, in the lateral instead of a posterior union of the constituent animalcules, in the annular rather than a spheroidal form of the colony, and in the very diverse length of the two flagella. Cyclonexis annularis, sp, nov. (Figs. 8, 9). Colony composed of from ten to twenty zooids, the posterior extremi- ties of the constituent animalcules in young and small clusters occasion- ally in contact, in older and larger colonies remote, leaving a central more or less circular space ; bodies obovate, compressed, about twice as long as broad, obtusely pointed anteriorly, rounded and narrowed posteri- orly ; long flagellum equaling or exceeding the body in length, the short appendage about one-half as long, usually convoluted spirally; contrac- tile vesicle double, small, spherical, located in the anterior body-half, near one lateral border; color-bands yellowish. Length of body TsVff to ssVtt inch ; diameter of the annular colony ?^ inch or less. Movements rota- tory. Habitat — Marsh-water, with Sphagnum. Pyxidium urceolatum, sp. nov. (Fig. 10). Body vasiform, less than twice as long as broad, widest centrally, con- stricted anteriorly, the posterior extremity narrowed to form a short color- less prolongation somewhat broader than the pedicel ; cuticular surface smooth ; peristome border truncate ; ciliary disk but slightly exserted, ciliary circles two, long and fine ; vestibulum large, extending to near the centre of the body ; contractile vesicle in close proximity to the pos- terior part ot the vestibule and apparently emptying into it ; pedicel ex- tremely short ; the contracted zooid ovate, posteriorly invaginate. Length of body 253 inch. Habitat — Pond-water; on rootlets of Lemna. Bhabdostyla invaginata, sp. nov. (Fig. 11). Body vasiform, often slightly gibbous, about one and one-halt times as long as broad, widest centrally, tapering posteriorly to the pedicel, and anteriorly to the slight constriction beneath the peristome ; surface transversely striate ; peristome border not revolute ; ciliary disk promi- nent, conical, ciliary circles two ; pedicel short, about two fifths as long 1880.] ODD [Stokes. as the body. Length of body 71q inch. Habitat — Pond-water ; attached to Cypris. The contracted body is ovate, and the pedicel is then invaginate within the posterior extremity, this margin of the zooid coming into actual con- tact with surface of the object supporting the pedicel. The characteristic conical form of the ciliary disk, either alone or in connection with the invagination of the pedicel by the contracted body, renders the species readily distinguishable from all other members of the genus. Opisthostyla, gen. nov. (0-mjOz • a~u)>oq). Animalcules resembling those of Rhabdostyla, but the rigid pedicel curved near its point of attachment to the submerged object, this part acting, when the zooid is contracted, like a spring, and throwing the animalcule and the otherwise inflexible foot-stalk backward through the water, the whole immediately becoming upright by the recoil of the curved extremity of the pedicel. Inhabiting fresh water. Opisthostyla annulata, sp. nov. (Figs. 12, 13). Body conical campanulate, slightly changeable in form, somewhat gib- bous or the lateral margins nearly straight, the zooid obliquely or verti- cally placed on the pedicel, less than twice as long as broad, strongly striate or annulate transversely; obovate when contracted; peristome border revolute, ciliary circles two ; pedicel as long as the body, the distal extremity suddenly and shortly curved. Body and pedicel each yyV- inch long. Habitat — Pond-water ; attached to Algse. The short curve at the end of the pedicel at its point of attachment to the supporting object seems to act as a spring, as already stated, to assist the zooid in throwing itself backward when the body contracts, the entire Infusorian then describing rather more than a semicircle in the water, having the point of attachment of the foot-stalk as the centre. The move- ment is usually very quickly accomplished, the return of the animalcule to its normally erect position being almost as suddenly achieved. In the "Annals and Magazine of Natural History " for February, 1886, the writer described an Infusorian under the name Rhabdostyla pusilla, which is certainly a member of the new generic group here formulated. The following is an amended diagnosis of the form referred to : Opisthostyla pusilla Stokes (Rhabdostyla pusilla Stokes *). Body campanulate, tapering posteriorly, less than twice as long as broad, the surface transversely striate ; peristome slightly exceeding the body-centre in width, the border revolute ; contracted zooid ovate ; pedi- cel scarcely longer than the body, the distal extremity shortly and sud- denly curved. Length of body TT\5 inch. Habitat — Pond-water ; at- tached to Ceratophyllum. * Annals and Magazine of Natural History, S 5, Vol. xvii, p. 108, PI. I, Fig. 17. Stokes.] ^OU [Nov. 5, This differs from the preceding species of Opisthostyla in the more conical form and less strongly marked transverse furrows of the body, and in the greater proportionate length of the pedicel. Colpoda depressa, sp. nov. (Fig. 14). • Body ovate, depressed, less than three times as long as broad, slightly widest anteriorly, the frontal border rounded, the right-hand side of the posterior margin slightly and obliquely truncate, the right-hand body- margin somewhat flattened, the left hand side convex ; ventral surface flattened, slightly concave ; cilia of the posterior border longest and most conspicuous, a single cilium occasionally longer than the others ; oral aperture ventral, in the anterior body-half, on the right-hand side of the median line ; the projecting ciliary tuft broad, the cilia fine and appearing like an undulating membrane ; contractile vesicle single, spherical, in the posterior body-half on the right-hand side of the median line ; the cuticular surface roughened by minute elevations ar- ranged in longitudinal rows, except in the oral region, where a long obovate space is comparatively smooth ; endoplasm colorless, granular ; trichocysts numerous, arranged perpendicularly to the cuticular surface ; nucleus ovate, subcentrally located ; anal aperture ventral, on the right- hand side of the posterior extremity. Length of body 3^ to ^i^ inch. Habitat — Standing water, with Sphagnum. Reproduction by transverse fission. The most recently formulated generic diagnosis of Colpoda refers to the oral aperture as situated in a cleft like fissure, that orifice in the present form not being so placed but on the flattened ventral surface. It would therefore seem preferable to slightly modify the generic description so as to include the present Infusorian, rather than to form a new generic title upon a difference so slight, especially since the other essential characters are undoubtedly similar. In the previously known species trichocysts have not been observed, neither has the position of the anal aperture been recorded. The form here referred to bears some affinity to Anoplirys, but to admit it within that group a change would also be needed in the generic descrip- tion: Metopides acuminata, sp. nov. (Fig. 15). Body obovate, about twice as long as broad, compressed, the frontal border rounded, the posterior extremity tapering from the body-centre and terminating in a conspicuous acuminate prolongation ; the anterior body-half apparently folded obliquely across the ventral surface, the per- istomal margin strongly ciliate and prolonged beyond the centre of the body to near the right-hand border ; a tuft of long, fine seta? projecting from the posterior acuminatum ; nucleus broadly ovate or subspherical, placed near the body-centre ; contractile vesicle single, near the posterior 1886.] 5b 4 [Stokes. extremity. Length of body, gfj inch. Habitat — Standing pond-water, with decaying vegetation. Movements rotary on the longitudinal axis. Trichophrya sinuosa, sp. nov. (Fig. 16). Body flattened, irregular in shape, the margins undulate and lobulate ; tentacles fascicled, long, distinctly capitate, protruded from the marginal lobes, the clusters seldom exceeding five in number ; contractile vesicles multiple, marginal ; nucleus not observed. Length %^ inch. Habitat — Pond-water ; attached by the entire lower surface to Anacharis. Move- ments slow. This differs from T. epistylidis C. and L., in its much smaller size, and especially in the marginal arrangement of the tentacles. The latter are long, often three times the length of the body. Acinelactis, gen. nov. (Acineta; aicTiq). Animalcules subspherical, soft and changeable in form, free-swimming or temporarily adherent, emitting from all parts of the surface capitate, ray-like pseudopodia ; flagella two, vibratile, one temporarily adherent by its distal extremity. Inhabiting fresh water. The single member of this previously undescribed genus differs from the Actinomonas of Saville Kent in the presence of two flagella and in the distinctly capitate character of the filamentous pseudopodia, the latter often being conspicuously pin-like in appearance. The existence of the temporarily adherent flagellum, in addition to the habitually vibratile appendage, necessitates not only the formation of a new generic title, but a new family group, for the reception of this singular creature, the name of the latter necessarily being Acinetaclidce. Acinetactis mirabilis, sp. nov. (Fig. 17). Body subspherical, soft and plastic, often emitting short lobate pseudo- podia in addition to the fine, capitate rays projecting from all parts of the periphery, the last-named appendages usually bearing one or more minute supplementary protoplasmic globules in the course of the ray, in addition to the globule tipping the free extremity ; rays occasionally exceeding the diameter of the body in length ; flagella subequal, their length about twice the diameter of the zooid, originating from the anterior border, but at some distance from each other ; contractile vesicle double, situated on opposite sides of the anterior body-half; nucleus apparently subcentrally located and subspherical ; endoplasm granular, especially posteriorly. Diameter of the body ^jo inch. Habitat — Stagnant pond-water, among decaying vegetation. Movements rapid. When in the free-swimming phase, the ray-like pseudopodia are usually confined to the posterior region of the body, or they may be entirely with- drawn, thus leaving the animalcule almost entirely smooth. Stokes.] dVO [So\. 5, Acineta lacustris, sp. nov. (Fig. 18). Lorica elongate-obovate or subvasiform, strongly compressed, less than three times as long as broad, widest anteriorly, the sides continuous across the frontal border, leaving a rounded lateral aperture at each angle (or the exit of the tentacles ; slightly constricted beneath the anterior border, and very moderately inflated near the posterior extremity, the frontal margin concave; pedicel very short and hollow; enclosed zooid often entirely filling the entire cavity of the lorica ; tentacles in two antero-lateral fasci- cles, distinctly capitate ; contractile vesicle single, placed near the anterior border; nucleus elongate, vertical ; endoplasm granular. Length of the lorica ^^ to T£7 inch. Habitat — Pond-water ; attached to Anacharis. Acineta stagnatilis, sp. nov. (Fig. 19). Lorica subcircular in outline, rounded and inflated posteriorly, com- pressed anteriorly, the frontal border irregularly convex ; pedicel short, hollow, from one- fourth to one-fifth as long as the lorica, widest at its junction with the sheath, tapering thence and terminating in a button-like point of attachment ; frontal margin pierced by a slit-like fissure, and two anteriorly converging, narrow fissures on the front and rear walls, for the exit of the tentacles ; the enclosed animalcule occupying the centre of the lorica, apparently not attached to the walls, subspheroidal, the anterior border truncate ; tentacles more or less fascicled, capitate ; contractile vesi- cle single, postero-lateral ; endoplasm granular. Length of the lorica, including pedicel, Ti5 inch. Habitat — Pond-water ; on Myriophyllum. EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES. Figs. 1-4. Mastigamceba longifilum ; different forms of one individual. Fig. 5. Anisonema pusilla, X 900. Fig. G. Trentonia flagellata, X 430 ; gen. et sp. nov. Fig. 7. Cryptoglena truncata, X 772. Figs. 8, 9. Cyclonexis annularis, X 030 ; front and side views ; gen. et sp. nov. Fig. 10. Pyxidium urceolatum, X 290. Fig. 11. Rhabdostyla invaginata, X 750. Figs. 12, 13. Opisthostyla annulata, X 730 ; gen. et sp. nov. Fig. 14. Colpoda depressa, X 300. Fig. 15. Metopides acuminata, X 375. Fig. 16. Trichophrya sinuosa, X 255. Fig. 17. Acinetactis mirabilis, X 900 ; gen. et sp. nov. Fig. 18. Acineta lacustris, X 415. Fig. 19. Acineta stagnatilis, X 135. 1886.] 5b J Stated Meeting, November 5, 1886. Present, 16 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the chair. Mr. Samuel W. Pennypacker, a lately elected member, was presented to the Chair and took his seat. Donations were announced from the following : Geological Survey of India, Calcutta ; Geographische Gesellschaft, Wien ; K. P. Adaclemie der Wissenschaften and Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft, Berlin; Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft "Isis," Dresden ; Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Fiankfurt %.; Physikalische OkonomischeGesellshaft, Konigs- berg; Deutsche Gesellschaft Jur Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, Miinchen ; Nassauische Verein fur Natur- kunde, Wiesbaden ; Societe Ilelvetique des Sciences Naturelles, Neufchatel ; Archives Neerlandais, Harlem ; Musee Royale d'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Bruxelles ; Biblioteca Nazi- onale V. E., Firenze ; P. Accademia dei Lincei and Biblioteca Nazionale Vittorio Emanuele, Rome ; Societe de Geographie and Revue Internationale de L'Enseignement, Paris; R. Academia de Ciencias and R. Academia de la Historia, Madrid ; Royal Geographical and Zoological Societies, and the Society of Antiquaries, London ; University Library, Cam- bridge ; Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford ; Royal Observatory, Edinburgh ; Royal Society of Canada, Montreal ; Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa; Massachusetts Historical Society, Boston ; Essex Institute, Salem ; Dr. Samuel A. Green, Groton; Newport Historical Society; "American Journal of Science," New Haven ; " Traveler's Record," Hartford ; Meteorological Observatory, New York ; New York State Library, Albany ; Oneida Historical Society, Utica, N. Y. ; Daniel Draper, New York, N. Y. ; Franklin Institute, Historical Society of Penn- sylvania, Spelling Reform Association, Messrs. Philip C. Gar- rett, Philip H. Law, Henry Phillips, Jr., and McCalla & Stavely, Philadelphia; Dr. Hugh Hamilton, Harrisburg; Johns Hop- kins University and "American Journal of Archaeology," 570 [iiov. 5, Baltimore ; U. S. National Museum, Washington ; Leander McCormick University, University of Virginia ; Mr. William Harden, Savannah; Prof. Henry S. Frieze, Ann Arbor; State Historical Society, Iowa ; Mr. Adair Welcker, Sacramento. Letters of envoy were read as follows : The K. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften ; the Canadian Geological and Natural History Survey. Letters of acknowledgment were received from K. K. Sternwarte. Prag (122) ; Iapetus Steenstrup, Copenhagen (122); State Library of Massachusetts, Boston (96-123) ; Oneida His- torical Society, Utica, New York (123). A letter was read from the Deutsche Morgenlandische Gesellschaft (in answer to one addressed to it by the Secre- taries to know why it had never sent its publications to this Society, although it had received for some years), stating that it had considered the proceedings to have been the gift of the Smithsonian Institution, and that it did not desire to exchange with this Society. On motion, its name was ordered to be removed from the list of exchanges. The "Eevue Litteraire et Scientifique" replied to a similar query, and stated that the Redaction had ordered the exchange to be discontinued. On motion, the exchange was ordered to be discontinued. The death of John S. Haines, Philadelphia, was announced as having taken place on November 4, 18S6, in the sixty- seventh year of his age. The President announced the appointment of Mr. Richard Vaux to prepare the obituary of Judge Ludlow, and Prof. John M. Maisch that of Dillwyn Parrish. Prof. Cope presented for the Transactions a paper on " Lemurine Reversion in Human Dentition." The paper was referred to a Committee, consisting of Drs. Brinton, Oliver and Jayne. Dr. D.G. Brinton read a paper on "The Conception of Love in some American Languages." The Secretaries presented a paper on " The Facial Nerve of 1886.] Oil the Domestic Cat," by Prof. T. B. Stowell, of Cortlandt, N.Y. ; also one from Dr. A.C. Stokes, of Trenton, N. J., on " Notices of New Fresh-water Infusoria." Pending nomination No. 1113 and new nominations Nos. 1114-1150 were read. The President reported that he had received and paid over to the Treasurer the interest on the Michaux rentes due Octo- ber 1, 1886, amounting to $131.80. And the Society was adjourned by the President. Stated Meeting, November 19, 1886. Present, 11 members. President, Mr. Fraley, in the Chair. Acknowledgments were read from the K. Leopold- Carol. Akademie, Halle, a. S. (118, 122) ; Societe Royaledes Sciences, Upsal (117-122); New York State Library, Albany (121-123). Letters of envoy were read from the Societe Royale des Sciences, Upsal ; Naturwissenschaft. Gesellschaft, Marburg ; Meteorological Office and the Statistical Society, London; Col. Charles C. Jones, Jr., Augusta, Ga. Additions to the Library were reported from Department of Mines, New South Wales; Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fen- nica, Helsingfors; Observatory at Tashkend, in Turkistan, Russia; K. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Gesellschaft fur Anthropologic, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, R. Friedlaader und Sohn, Berlin ; Naturhistorischer Verein, Bonn ; K. Leo- poldino-Carolina Akademie der Deutschen Naturforscher, Halle, a. S. ; " Astronomische Nachrichten," Kiel; Naturfor- schende Gesellschaft, Leipsic; Gesellschaft zur Beforderung der Gesammten Natur wissenschaften, Marburg; Editor of "Naturforscher," Tubingen; Societe Royale des Sciences, Upsal; " Flora Batava," Leiden ; Academie Royale, Musee Royale D'Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Bruxelles ; R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome; Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale di Firenze; PROC. AMEK. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3U. PRINTED DEC. 11, 1886. Rothrock.] ^7 & [Nov. 19, Royal Geographical and Astronomical Societies, Statistical Society, British Association for the Advancement of Science, Meteorological Office, "Nature," Mr. John Hampden, Lon- don; Natural History Society, Montreal; Institut Canadien- Francais, Ottawa; Canadian Institute, Toronto ; Prof. Thomas Sterry Hunt, lion. Eobert C. Winthrop, Boston; Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Prof. Samuel H. Scudder, Cambridge ; American Chemical Society, "The Critic," New York ; Brooklyn Entomological Society ; Acad- emy of Natural Sciences, College of Pharmacy, Messrs. Henry C. Lea and Henry Phillips, Jr., Philadelphia; Johns Hopkins University, Prof. Ira Remsen, Baltimore ; United States Civil Service Commission, Smithsonian Institution, Hydro- graphic Office, Washington ; Col. Charles C. Jones, Jr., Au- gusta, Ga. ; Cincinnati Society of Natural History; Rev. Stephen D. Peet, Chicago ; Professors C. F. de Lendero and Raul Prieto, Mexico. Dr. J. T. Rothrock read by appointment an obituary notice of the late Hon. Eli K. Price, LL.D., Vice-President of the Society. And, on motion, the Society was adjourned. Biographical Memoir of the late Honorable Eli K. Price, LL.D., by J. T. Rothrock, Professor of Botany in the University of Pennsylvania. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Nov. 19, 1886.) On the twentieth day of July, 1*7 07, Eli Kirk Price was born in East Bradford township, County of Chester, and State of Pennsylvania. There was nothing in his surroundings, or in his opportunities, which indicated for him a life of more than the average success or usefulness. It is true that his home lay in the centre of wljat, for our young country, is classic soil. *JIe must in later years have heard from those, who witnessed the battle of Brandywine, the tales and trials of that day which was 573 [Rothroek. so unfortunate to our arms. The field itself bad doubtless often been trodden over by him. The very house in which on the first day of each week he was afterwards accustomed to worship still showed on its floors what were said to be the stains of blood from our wounded soldiers who were brought in for medical treat- ment. Whether this was so or not, there is no doubt that the building was used as a temporary hospital. The whole atmos- phere of the region was then, and still is, full of the inspiration of patriotism. Up and down the valley, far as the eye could reach, lay a landscape of singular beauty. The very hills had an individual character, and there was no turn in the roads which wound between them, but brought some new surprise of beauty. To the south and west were " The hills beyond the Brandywine" which, once seen in the soft haze of Indian summer, could never be forgotten. What wonder then that an English officer, as he overlooked the region, said : " I am not astonished that these people fight for such a country." The temper of this fiery lad must often have been sorely tried when he learned how his "peace-loving" parents and neighbors had suffered from the depredations of the enemy. Perhaps the discipline of self-con- trol, early enforced by his watchful parents, was one of the se- crets of his future success. He never wearied in devotion to the memory of those under whose critical eyes he grew to manhood. So far as these externals could go, it is true, they were all in his favor, but, as other boys who never came to fill his place in public esteem shared them with him, we must conclude there was in the lad himself a good measure of that holy ambition which goes so far in moulding higher individual destiny. "Philip, father of Eli, was the fifth in lineal descent from that Philip Price who came into Pennsylvania with the Welsh set- tlers, and took up Merion, Haverford and Radnor townships in 1682. The name of Price was handed down through four gene- rations from the first settler by a single male representative in each generation." Rothrock.] &* "* INov. 10, Rachel, his mother, was a daughter of William Kirk, of East Nantmeal, Chester county, the tenth child of Alphonsus Kirk, who came from the north of Ireland, landed first at Jamestown, Virginia, January 12th, 1689, and shortly after settled in Centre, New Castle county, Delaware. William Kirk's second wife was Sibilla Davis (of Welsh de- scent), the mother of Rachel, and hence Eli Kirk Price's grand- mother. Philip and Rachel were married October 20th, 1184. For generations Eli's ancestors had all been members of the re- ligious society of Friends. Though to all "Friends" human strife is a matter of the ut- most concern and sadness, one must not infer that they were lacking in courage or in enterprise. On the contrary they have been among the very best of pioneers ; often, indeed, the}r were the first, when principle or human life was at stake, to brave any » danger, or to meet any hardship. Under a quiet exterior were often concealed memoiies of thrilling adventures with outward foes, as well as of desperate struggles with the powers of inborn sin tempting them away from the sober teachings of conscience and honest judgment. The life of no real Friend is uneventful. It may not strike the ear or eye of the world, but it is full of striving after perfect purity in thought, word and deed. It may lack the glamour of popular applause, but it is rich in the solid worth of conscious rectitude. From a long line of such ancestors came the subject of this sketch. Integrity through all these generations had matured into an instinct in him It might be said that he despised and hated fraud simply because it was in him to do so, without con- scious effort on his part. Philip Price was among the leading fanners of his day. It was he who introduced the Washington Thorn into Chester county, where for half a century it has been not only a useful hedge, but one of the most characteristic features of the land- scape. He was also among the earliest advocates of the use of 18%.] °t5 [Rothrock. mineral fertilizers in agriculture. Judge Peters wrote: "I have heard of none who have been more remarkably successful in the plaster system than Mr. West and Mr. Price." Philip Price was the first President of the Chester County Agricultu- ral Society. He was furthermore one of the earliest to apply the vaccine crust in this community. With a firm faith in its efficacy, he vaccinated all his children at a time when there were more who doubted than believed in its power. Here he stood out, not only as a moral hero, but as a public benefactor. Moreover, it must be remembered, that in that early day there existed, if not open opposition to vaccination, at least a very strong popular prejudice against it. Neither of the parents of the young Eli was wealthy. Their family was large; eleven in all, of whom he was the eighth. They were industrious and frugal, though unable to give their children what we should call a liberal education. But they did what was perhaps almost as well in encouraging such a thirst for useful knowledge that no' ordinary obstacles could quench it. It is true that Eli entered Westtown school in 1812 (as number T72 of the first thousand pupils), but the course there was mainly what we should regard as the necessary, solid branches. Of one thing, however, we may be sure — what was taught was well taught. There was no more sham then than now in that most admirable school. It may be worth the while to recall how much of our local history and of our advance in the civilized arts Mr. Price was a witness of. West Chester was not made into a borough until two years after his birth. In the year 1800 the population was but 374. This was more than thirty years before the late Dr. William Dai'lington said he had hopes of the town because it had become so large that the inhabitants could live off each other. Mr. Price was thirty-five years old before the first railroad entered the town, and this was about three years before there was an Rothrock.] 5*6 [Nov. 19, Episcopal church there. The Presbyterian church was perhaps a year earlier, but those vigilant workers, the Methodists, had reached the town about twenty-four years before the Episco- palians or Presbyterians were organized. So much for the now nourishing town of more than seven thousand inhabitants which stands almost within sight of his birthplace. Even this great city in 1791 contained less than forty thousand inhabitants. All the region beyond Carlisle was the Great West, then, on the whole, perhaps less fully known than any spot of our national domain south of Alaska is to-day. As late as 1802 the inhabitants of the region west of the Alleghany mountains found it easier to send their flour from Pittsburgh to the Antilles by water than to send it to Philadelphia or Baltimore by land. Pittsburgh contained only four hundred houses. Neither an- thracite coal nor gas, nor even lucifer matches, were then in use. The pumps stood by the side-walks, the corners were lighted by oil lamps, and the old market houses occupied the middle of the chief thoroughfare in your city. Indeed, the market places still adorn some of the less important streets. In the year of Mr. Price's birth, every foreign coin, save the Spanish dollar, ceased to be a legal tender within our dominions. He was five years old when the mouth of the Columbia river was discovered by an American, Captain Gray, the same man who but two years earlier had been the first of our citizens to load an Ameri- can ship with furs on our west coast, trade these in China for tea and bring his vessel back to Boston laden with this precious cargo. This event marked an era in our early commercial history. Mr. Price had heard our early troubles with France discussed in his home, and listened doubtless with a shudder to the details of Burr's atrocious conspiracy. He could remember the Napole- onic wars, and had heard the foolish protests of the Federal party against Jefferson's Louisiana purchase, which opened a magnificent domain for our growing population, and without which our national life would have been in continual jeopardy. 1886.1 Oli [Rothrock. Those were primitive times, though not entirely simple or guileless. Party spirit ran high as now: there was as much elimination and recrimination, as much bribery, billingsgate and official corruption then as now. We look upon them as slow times because there were no railroad monopolies, no corners in grain, no great strikes and only signs of anything like the Wall street of today. Yet those times and those men were the forces which hastened our unprecedented material growth and cemented our national units into a larger, stronger and more productive whole. We may well say, too, that the subject of this sketch stood among the foremost of his contemporaries, for integrity, public spirit and far-sightedness. It is fairly a question whether this generation will leave as much to its credit, or whether we shall as well resist all tendencies toward national or social disin- tegration. Of the successful men of this city a large proportion were country lads, many of them from the counties immediately ad- jacent. It is not improbable that much of Mr. Price's success came from the fact that his duties as a farmer's son had hardened his constitution and given him, along with great endurance, a great tenacity of purpose. There is nothing like regular duty, conscientiously done, to "crystallize vapory intentions." It is, then, to be regarded as a bit of good* fortune that he was born in the country and early inured to toil. In one place he tells us, "In 1809, on my twelfth birthday, I reaped my dozen sheaves" [with a sickle]. Yet, with all this, farm life was not much to his liking, for he says he "was fond of reading and entered the counting-house to escape the farm." But the labor there had done its part. He was hardy, and "temperate in all things." On May 15th, 1815, he entered the famous shipping-house of Thomas P. Cope. Previous to this, however, he had spent a year in the store and family of Mr. J. W. Townsend, in West Chester. This was a good preparation for his duties with the Rothrock.] ^<8 [Nov. 19, Copes. He once stated to the writer that his fondness for read- ing had saved him man}' a temptation after he had left the farm. This shipping-house was well known from its connection with the "Cope Liners," chose justly celebrated packets between Pniladelphia and Liverpool, which before the days of steam vessels were the pride of our city. The}7 were then the most important vessels which came to this port. In size they had but lew superiors in either the American or foreign merchant service. Built as strong as iron and oak could make them, they well reflected the character of the house which owned them. But a few months since, one of these an- cient liners (which is now engaged in the petroleum trade) ap- peared in the river and was tied up at her old Walnut street berth. Immediately she became the centre of attraction to those who could remember the part she had taken in making the com- mercial past of Philadelphia so glorious. Under Thomas P. Cope Mr. Price received a full mercantile education. Then he spent a year with J. C. Jones, Oakford & Co., to prepare espe- cially for the China trade, for which he appears to have had a most intense longing. However, by the time he had become of age, that trade was so depressed that he felt justified in seeking a career in another field. Accordingly he became a student of law in the office of the Honorable John Sergeant. This change of plan was certainly as fortunate for Philadelphia as for Mr. Price. There is no question but that the time spent in acquir- ing the details of mercantile life was of great value to him in his subsequent career. John Sergeant could not help respecting a young man who had won the esteem of the Copes by his sobriety and persistent attention to duty, and the great lawyer became and continued to be a firm friend to his pupil. The field opened by the law afforded a wider career where his relations with his fellows were more intimate, and where, above all, he could, even as an attorney, often act as judge, thus greatly contributing to peace and justice in the conflicting claims between man and man. 1S86.] D i J [Rothrock. On May 28th, 1822, Mr. Price was admitted to the bar. From this time forward his course in life was fixed. No shadow of doubt as to his vocation appeared. The people themselves seem to have made him a real estate lawyer, and no one in this city ever surpassed him in knowledge concerning its land titles. Probably very few ever equalled him. He was universally re- garded as a safe adviser. What stronger testimony in his be- half could be given? It has been remarked, by one who knew him intimately at this period of his life, that his mental concen- tration and singleness of purpose became so intense that he seemed to have no time to think of anything but his profession, and that he wore the appearance of a man wholly engrossed by business. This, however, was from no loss of interest in others. When he was able to tear himself from the cares of an increasing practice, his sympathies were found to be warm. He loved and was loved by children. There is no truer index to a man's heart than this. Mr. Price married Anna, the youngest child of James and Rebecca Embree, of West Bradford, Chester county, Pennsyl- vania. They lived together thirty-four years. His biographi- cal sketch of her is most touching. It was written while his grief was yet fresh. 'Her loss was a great sorrow, following only too fast upon that which came with the death of his daugh- ter Rebecca. He writes: "While her remains are yet with us, 1 take the pen briefly to perform towards her the duty I have endeavored to discharge toward our beloved, departed daughter. I sajr brief! 3', for such I know would be her wish My busy retrospections must now be my only resource." While with Thomas P. Cope, we are told, Mr. Price "familiar- ized himself with shipping and commercial law, and afterwards grappled with the harder law of real estate." It is well to give here a statement made b}T the late Judge Sharswood, on the oc- casion of that gentleman's retirement from the bench as Chief Justice of Pennsylvania: "Mr. Price has not been what we PKOC. AMEK. PHILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3\'. TRINTED DEC. 11, 1886. Rothrock.] 580 [Nov. 19, would term a conveyancer, but in England he would have stood high in that rank which is adorned with the names of Booth and Butler, Fearne and Preston." Mr. Price was chairman of the committee appointed to examine Judge Sharswood lor admission to the bar more than half a century before the following re- marks were made. "His examination," says the Judge, "was a thorough one, for then, as now, everything, which it was his duty to do, was done well. I have no doubt I made a great many mistakes, but he was kind and considerate enough not to correct them." " I doubt if he could tell us, even by approxima- tion, how many titles in this large city (which he has seen grow almost from a village to its present proportions) have passed under his cautious and scrutinizing eyes." He had no desire either to appear in court, or to have his clients appear there. No man was ever more anxious than he that they should settle their differences in a quieter, less expen- sive way; and, above all, that justice should be the basis of such settlement. Indeed, it is hardly too much to say that, if a client were plainly in the wrong, Mr. Price would rather decline than undertake the case. This at once explains why he was so often consulted, and his advice so generally acted upon, in the diffi- culties growing out of the unfortunate division in the Society of Friends, which involved titles to properties that were often very valuable. One of the leading citizens of Chester county inserted a clause in his will that, if certain contingencies arose in the settlement of his estate, the case should be laid before Mr. Price, and his decision should be final. These facts are in- serted here because they show, more plainly than any eulogistic platitudes could, what his real standing with the bar and the community was. They are simply the illustrations which come first to mind. The number could be multiplied greatly. As late as the year 1843 it was quite clear that the State was not receiving from its citizens the amount in taxes which it should, and that the earlier apportionments to the city of Phila- 1886.1 OOL [Rothrock. delphia and the counties of the Commonwealth were unfair. To remedy this, a revenue commission was appointed according to an act of Assembly which was passed April 29th, 1844, and entitled, "An Act to reduce the State debt and to incorporate the Pennsylvania Canal and Railroad Company." In all, there were twenty-one members. Of these Messrs. Eli K. Price, James S. Craft, Maxwell McCaslin, John Krause and Owen Jones were constituted a committee to prepare a final report, which was, after many difficulties and discouragements, completed and pre- sented to Governor Shunk in March, 1848. The value of the work done will be best appreciated by remembering that the entire increase of the returned valuations, after the action of this board, over that fixed by the revenue commissioners in 1845 was $43,477,255. The work of these commissioners was evidently of a most delicate nature. They were empowered to measure practically the depth of Pennsylvania's patriotism and public spirit. The soundings were over tender spots in human character and pos- sessions. It is not to be expected that there was no dissatisfac- tion over the report. But it is doubtful if any similar document could have produced less. One sentence in the report shows that the commissioners were conscious of no dishonorable or dishonest acts. u This work of revision we have intended to per- form in the spirit of moderation, and for the proof of its equal and temperate justice, we confidently refer to the testimony adduced and to the record of our proceedings." At the date of the report it was estimated that Luzerne county, now one of the richest in the State, had of property, subject to a tax of three mills on the dollar, $354,868 less than Huntingdon county. The present enormous coal trade of the Luzerne re- gion was not even dreamed of. In Sullivan county, adjoining Luzerne, the tax on watches amounted to but one dollar and a half, as against $5000 paid in this city at the same time. A wilderness covered vast portions of the State. Rothrock.] ^"^ [Nov. 10, In 1851 Mr. Price published a brief article upon that memorial of the county commissioners which asked for a repeal of the laws exempting churches, graveyards, colleges, schools, asylums, hospitals and other charitable institutions from taxation. After showing that such a repeal was against the spirit of all previous legislation here, that it was antagonistic to the very spirit under which the Commonwealth was founded, he continued: "The public squares, amounting to $1,670,400, yield no revenue to pay taxes with, and are especially of incalculable advantage to the health and enjoyment of the people of our city and county. There is something better than mammon, and more available for security and human happiness, and therefore within the scope of the considerations that must govern the wise statesman and legislator. It will not be forgotten what is due to a considera- tion of a pledged legislative faith, to objects and enterprises in- tended for the public good, for a small sacrifice is better than that the public faith be broken." This evoked a spirited repl}r ; but, as Mr. Price was evidently in the right, he may be said to have won an eas}r victor}'. We now approach the period of Mr. Price's greatest activity as a public-spirited citizen. Fifty-six years of age; for thirt)'- eight years a resident of Philadelphia; for thirty-one years a member of the bar engaged in the transfer of property and ad- vising in matters requiring care, judgment and fidelity: we may fairly assume that he was well known by his fellow-citizens. Honors, clients and emoluments came now without his seeking. In 1853 Governor Bigler requested him to prepare a bill for an act entitled, "An Act relating to the sale and conve3Tance of real estate." Here I quote in full the details of this important measure as given elsewhere by one well qualified to state the case. This is the preamble: "Whereas the general welfare requires that real estate should be freely alienable, and be made pro- ductive to the owners thereof; and, whereas, in matters which 1836.] OOO [Rothrock. the judiciary is competent to hear and decide, it is expedient that the courts should adjudicate them after a full hearing of all parties, rather than that they should be determined by special legislative acts upon an ex parte hearing." " The evils had been that real estate was extensively bound by trusts that made vacant ground and dilapidated buildings inalienable in title, which kept it out of the market and unproductive and unim- provable by the owners or purchasers, without a special act of Assembly, and in some instances such act would not avail. The courts for remedy were enabled to make decrees to sell, lease, mortgage, and convey on ground-rent, or to enable the trustees to build, and the reservation of rents and the purchase moneys were substituted, with security, for the land sold on the limita- tions of the original trusts. Thus the present generation got a better living without loss to the succeeding owners of the trust property; the dilapidations, like those that tell of long chancery suits in England, have disappeared; our city has been improved and beautified, and business accommodated; the public revenue by taxes is increased, and unfettered titles are carried into the world's commerce for the most profitable uses; purchasers hold- ing titles already adjudicated are purged of legal questions. The Act has been in force since April 18th, 185-'', and is popu- larly called the Price Act." "Its beneficence has been often judicially acknowledged."* "In 1857 Mr. Price published his 'Law of the Limitation of Actions and of Liens against Real Estate.' In 1874 his treatise on ' The Act for the Sale of Ileal Estate ' (containing 1 93 pages) appeared, as a reading thereon, embracing the reasons for and the decisions upon the Act." The increase in population in and around what was originally Philadelphia, that is the two square miles contemplated by its *The quotations which refer to the acts Mr. Price aided in having passed by our state Legislature are taken from the History of Chester County, by J. Smith Kuttaey and Gilbert Cope. They were compiled for that work " by Wm. E. Du- bois, assisted by J. S. Price as to legal matters." Rothrock.l OO^: [Nov. 19, founder, had gradually brought in its train a host of evils, which in 1853 were felt by good citizens to be no longer endur- able. The growth, prosperitj", and even the safety of the city, to say nothing of its good name, appeared to be hopelessly com- promised by its faulty organization. Without regard to politi- cal party, the friends of municipal reform, on the 30th day of July, nominated Mr. Price for the State Senate. He promptly replied, directing his letter to Stephen Col well, chairman, and other conferees. It was a thoroughly characteristic letter, and contains much that is even more applicable to the present than to the past state of ou r political affairs. For example : "The exercise of the elective franchise has become almost valueless, since the citizens are under a compulsion to vote for those whom they do not approve, or not to vote at all." It was evident he had recog- nized that the machinery of our elections had practically placed the citizen voter where the constitution never contemplated that he should be placed, subservient to a party, or to parties, either or both of which might be good or bad, according to circumstances. It has become even plainer now than then, that the tendency of political organization is to bury the conscience of the individual beneath the crushing weight of what influential leaders consider expediency. There is no lesson so hard for a demagogue to learn as that what is morally reprehensible can never be politi- cally justifiable or even safe for the party that advocates it. Such a truth is utterly beyond the comprehension, or acceptance, of one who, seeking only present good, can never take the view of a statesman anticipating the forces and results which may follow in the remoter future. In a letter to his friend, the late Judge Haines, Mr. Price ex- presses his opinion very freely concerning methods used in pursuit of office. It bears the date of March 17th, 1854 (he was then a Senator), It deserves reproduction here: "My Dear Sir: — Your letter of 16th Jan'y not being a busi- ness one, I laid it by for a leisure moment, and that moment I 1896.] ^OO [Rotbrock. have not yet found. I must now write to get rid of my self-re- proach. I did not then appreciate so fully, as I now do, these words : ' How contemptible appear the tricks and contrivances of party to secure or retain power! ' You spoke thus from much ampler opportunities of observation than 1 have had, but I have verified the truth of your exclamation. When I went to the Senate, it was with a resolution to do what I sbould be myself convinced was right ; not, it is true, expecting many others to be so transcendental in their views. I have a large confidence, too, in the goodness of human nature, and yet hold to my faith ; and look upon those, who lose character, with a considerable de- gree of charity, as the victims of ignorance or accidental associ- ations. But what is to be thought of Whig leaders and the best that the Senate claims, who have, some of them, high integ- rity in their ordinary transactions and in their duty to the State, yielding their expressed convictions to win capital to their own party and perhaps to their own support as candidates for gover- nor?" In accepting the nomination for the State Senate, Mr. Price did so with the express understanding that he was to give no pledges which would forestall discussion, and that he was to do nothing to ensure his own election. The special reasons for this union of his fellow-citizens upon him were : first, to secure the consolidation of the city; second, to substitute a paid for a vol- unteer fire department; and third, to have legislation which would suppress, or ac least hold in check, the intemperance against which so many of Philadelphia's best citizens were then engaged in an active crusade. Horace Binney had said to his son, "I should think your battle would be half won if you could place Mr. Price's name, with his consent, at the head of your ticket." The history of the consolidation of this city will be alluded to later. We have now to consider the action of Mr. Price in regard to the temperance cause. After Mr. Price's eleclion a Bev. Mr. Rood wrote to ask him Rothrock.] OOO [Nov. 19, what he would attempt for the temperance cause, and what he thought he could accomplish. This called for a reply from Mr. Price of the same date (October 3lst, 1853), in which he favored the passage of a bill to submit the question of prohibition to a vote of the people of the Commonwealth, and from the result to ascertain what legislation public opinion would sanction and sup- port. He saw clearly enough that this was not what the ex- treme temperance people desired; but at the same time he recognized the folly of attempting to enforce a law which the people would not endorse. These are his words: "By taking care to be preceded by an authentic expression of public opinion we will act safely for a good cause, and more effectually promote the good of our fellow-citizens." " While you and your clerical brethren invoke the strong arm of the law and await its enact- ment, there is no occasion to cease your efforts to do good in the cause. You have in hand the work of persuasion, and con- viction must still go on as the necessary preparative measure." " We have all our lives to do good, and we can do nothing better than to be always doing it; and what we leave unfinished, we will enjoin upon our children to finish." "I shall be prepared to go for that which shall be most effective to suppress intemper- ance, that the people can be persuaded and convinced to sustain." Under date of January 30th, 1854, Mr. Rood wrote to Messrs. Trice and Patterson, asking them to support the bill, "To pro- hibit the manufacture and sale of intoxicating drinks as a com- mon beverage, and the sale of alcohol and ardent spirits, except to authorized agents for medicinal, mechanical and artistic pur- poses." It was desired that this should go into effect on March 1st, 1855, and be followed by an enactment authorizing a vote on its repeal by the people on the second Tuesda3r in September. On February 8th, 1854, the Prohibitory Liquor Bill was in order at Harrisburg. When the eighth section, authorizing a warrant of search in case of a complaint of a violation of the law, was read, a motion was made to postpone. Mr. Price 1886.] '^i [Rothrock. then rose and said he was not willing that this motion should prevail, and continued, "But I have been educated in certain sturdy notions of the rights and liberties of the people, inherited from the common law of our ancestors, and embodied in our State Constitution. It is therein declared that among the in- herent and indefeasible rights of all men is that ' of acquiring, possessing and protecting property,' and also, 'that the people shall be secure in their persons, houses, and possessions from unreasonable searches and seizures.' Both of these above pro- visions, bulwarks of our rights and liberties, are invaded by this bill — unnecessarily and unwisely invaded by it." This of course provoked the bitter hostility of extreme temper- ance men. The North American and United States Gazette, in commenting upon Mr. Price's conduct, said: "Still there is an intrepidity of disinterestedness in his course, which is as unu- sual as it is heroic, and which must challenge the respect and confidence even of those who differ with him." Farther on the same article said of this eighth section: "For the usual rule is reversed and the accused must prove his innocence instead of standing guiltless till proved otherwise." What wonder then that a man of Mr. Price's loyalty to law and individual rights refused his sanction to so atrocious a measure. The "Temperance Committee," on February 16th, 1854, sent a letter to Mr. Price. They felt aggrieved at his action concern- ing the eighth section, and also at the suggestion that he pre- ferred to support a modified and more stringent license law, rather than their prohibition bill. The committee also reminded Mr. Price that but for the efforts of the temperance party he would have failed of his election " by more than two thousand votes." Rather an intemperate suggestion one might well ad- mit on remembering that in so far from seeking or desirino- election he was more than indifferent about it, and only con- sented to abandon his more congenial duties because the public without regard to party, requested it. PROC. AMER. PHILOS SOC. XXIII. 124. 3w. PRINTED DEC. 17, 188G. Rothrock.] ^O" [Nov. 19, Mr. Price's reply was written on the following day (February 17th, 1854). It was clear that he had "the courage of his con- victions." He adhered absolutely to all that he had said and all that he had believed prior to his election, and closed with the " sincere hope that so much good feeling and zeal as I believe to actuate you may be made available in a tempered and practical result for the repression of intemperance." The letter should have been convincing as to his sincerity. Especially strong was one sentence in it : " When you nominated me, it is true you knew the 'antecedents' of m}1 life, and when your committee entered my office, the first thing I told them was, that the only pledge I would give them was that which my life would afford." On February 21st, "the intemperate resolutions of the ex- treme temperance men were adopted." The fact, however, that of fifteen Vice-Presidents named at the meeting, "it is believed not more than one or two were present, and six have no known residence among the constituency of Mr. Price," and that three wrote notes and one published a card that their names had been used without their knowledge or consent, should at once show how ill-judged and intemperate some of the proceedings had been. Mr. George H. Stuart's published card was a severe cen- sure, which left these radical gentlemen in rather a sad plight before the public. The Philadelphia Begister,of February 20th, summed up the whole thing in the statement that "Mr. Price has not changed, but a few of the temperance men have." The friends of Mr. Price called a mass meeting on the evening of March 3d. The result was a triumphant vindication of his course by the most influential citizens of Philadelphia. The remarks of Mr. Frederic Fraley (may he long survive) were a heart-felt tribute to the courage and character of Mr. Price. The frequent applause which they elicited showed what entire confidence the community had in the Senator. In nothing did his character appear more admirable than in this unpleasant contest. He stood like a wall between extreme partisans and 18SC.1 <-)OJ [Rothrock. the constitution, which protected and guaranteed equal rights to all men. On April 6th and 7th, 1855, Mr. Price spoke in the Senate on the bill to restrain the sale of intoxicating liquors. It is to be observed that those who had so recently upbraided him for his supposed want of zeal in the temperance cause, were now humbled and disheartened by their failure to induce extreme legislation. Mr. Price ought to have more than redeemed him- self in their eyes by his generous forgiveness of the past and by his earnest efforts to ensure the passage of a bill which would be constitutional and efficient. Aside from the great interests which he was chosen to repre- sent, Mr. Price was also active in other directions in the Senate. "He drafted and had passed the Act of 1855, relating to charita- ble corporations" (P. L. 328); "and also the Act of April 27th, 1855, barring estates tail" (P. L. 368). His S3rmpathies were alwaj^s in the direction of humanity. No one can point to an act of his which tended to increase the burden of any honest toiler. The legislative Act of May 4th, 1855, "relating to certain duties and rights of husband and wife, and parents and children," was one which brought relief to manj- an aching heart. It " enabled the wife to become afemme sole trader; to own her own earnings and dispose of her property while living, and when dying, without his interference; and, if she died intestate, it enabled her next of kin to take it. If by drunkenness, profligacy, or other cause, he shall neglect or re- fuse to provide for his child or children, the mother shall have all the rights of the father and perform his duties; may place the children at employment and receive their earnings, or bind them to apprenticeship, without the interference of such a hus- band, in the same manner as the father now can do by law; but if the mother also be of unsuitable character, the court is to ap- point a guardian of such children with like powers. A husband guilty of such conduct for a year preceding his wife's death for- Rothrock.] O JO [Nov. lit, feits all right to her estate and also the right to appoint a testamentary guardian of his children" (P. L. 430; also His- tory of Chester County, p. 698). This legislation in favor of humanity has well been said to be "an advance on the statute book of any civilized nation, and was necessary, as these pro- tections were not covered by our Act of 1848, passed to secure to married women their own property." In 1856 he "secured the passage of sections enabling a de- serted or unsupported wife, or one divorced from bed and board, to protect her reputation by action of slander and libel, and to sue for her earnings and property, and to receipt for and give refunding bonds for legacies and shares of decedents' estates" (P. L. 315). He was the author and ardent advocate of an "Act for the greater security of title and more secure enjoy- ment of real estate." This became a law in 1856, and embraces so many important points that I quote in full what his son has said about it. It "cuts off all the exceptions to land limitations of twenty-one years after thirty j'ears; requiring all ejectments for land and liens acquired by levies on real estate to be indexed, to give notice to purchasers and mortgagees ; all trusts relating to land to be manifested b}r writing, except when they arise by implication; specific performance, etc., to be demanded within five years; wills duly proved to stand unless objected to within five years; surviving executors and administrators to exercise testamentary powers of sale; regulates subrogation to liens ; and provides that, in partition, the highest bidder is to have the choice of shares (P. L, 532). He also drew up the Act of 1859, which requires action within a year after entiy made on land to stop the running of the statute of limitations in favor of the pos- sessor, and to bar the remainder after the tenant in tail is barred" (P. L. 603). As a citizen his activit}r was always in a safe direction. To illustrate this, I quote again from his son. "He was also the author of many Acts of municipal legislation, passed with a 1886.1 "Jl- [Rothrock. view to the health, comfort and security of the citizens of Phila- delphia; among others, that no street or alley is ever to be laid out of a less width than twenty-five feet. If any house now standing on a street narrower than that shall be taken down, the owner, in rebuilding, must set it back to that regulation. Every new house shall have a curtilage of at least 1 44 square feet of open space. There must be a parapet wall of brick or stone between the roofs of all houses, extending through the cornices, to prevent the spread of fire. A Board of Building Inspectors was also created, to see that all buildings are safely erected, and in accordance with the strict requirements of law. A Board of Revision of Taxes was established, to compel equality of valua- tion for taxation, and to supervise all assessments of property. A Survey Department to lay out plans for streets, culverts, etc., was also created, to which was attached a registry bureau, in which must be registered every deed or conveyance of real estate before it can be recorded, with a plan of the premises conveyed, so that no property shall escape taxation. And if there be conflict of claim of title, it can be promptly known, as no careful conveyancer passes any title without a certificate of search. He also prepared most of the sections of the Park Act of 1868."* How active and efficient his exertions in behalf of our Centen- nial Exhibition were is within the memory of most here tonight. In 1852 Mr. Price published a memorial sketch of the lives of his parents. It appears that he was the sole author, though the name of his brother Philip also appears on the title page, and he helped to print and to circulate the book. Though in this volume Mr. Eli K. Price states that he was not then a member of the " Society of Friends," it is very certain that their moder- ate and just principles were the directing power of his life. This little book (pp. 192) is a most tender tribute to the memory of ♦These quotations, also, come from the valuable " History of Chester County," to which allusion has already been made. It is among the very best works of its class that our county has yet produced. Rothrock.] 5JLj [N()Vi i9j bis revered parents. Probabty better tban any of bis published writings does it reveal the profound religious convictions of the author. In 1864 he read before this Society a brief paper upon the family as an element of government. Some of the ideas ex- pressed in it were worthy of Herbert Spencer, and indeed one may almost say were prophetic of Spencer's views. The argu- ment is at once a noble tribute to woman as the guardian of the race, and also a reflection of the innate purity of his own soul. Love for, and pride in, his ancestry were strongly marked features in Mr. Price's character. Accordingly it does not sur- prise us to see him taking a conspicuous place in the " Centen- nial Family Meeting" of the descendants of Philip and Rachel Price, held at the old homestead, in East Bradford, in 1864. Friend that he was, at heart, there was one sentence in the ac- count of the event (which he subsequently published) that must be quoted here. Our long civil war was drawing to a close. The agony of suspense was well-nigh spent, for it was clear that it was merely a question of time until the flag of the Union should float triumphantly over the entire land. He writes: " And what have the children of Philip and Rachel Price to say for those of their descendants who have been, or who are, absent from their homes, because fighting the battles of their country? On such an occasion, when met to commemorate our parents, we must bring all of ourselves and all that belongs to us into a comparison with these high exemplars and note the disparities. We have to say that, though it has not reached our sense of duty to do as these brave youths of our blood have done, we love them not the less, as our parents would have loved them not the less, for having obeyed their own sense of duty when their government and country were stricken by traitor hands." Bound in the same volume with the last two papers, I find "A Discourse upon the Trial by Jury." It was read May 1st, 1863, before this Society. Tt shows how profoundly its author, Mr. 1886.] OJO [Rothrock. Price, had studied the subject. It is more thau probable that, not only all juries, but many judges might read it with advantage to themselves and to those on trial. In July, 1866, he read before the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Philadelphia a brief commentary upon some im- portant but now obscure allusions to Revolutionary times, to which he added a short notice of the Pemberton family, which he says was ancient in England before the settlement of Penn- sylvania. In 1872 his busy mind was exercised in another direction. This time, upon the phases of modern philosophy, especially such as were attaining a rank luxuriance under the stimulus of the then latest ideas upon evolution. His published criticisms show remarkable acuteness in detection of the weak points in the new lrvpothesis. The facts were many of them strange, the relations of the facts were almost wholly strange: at least they assumed more scientific form and were under a more scientific presenta- tion than ever before. What wonder then that Mr. Price failed, as most others did, to take in the whole subject at the first draught. It is well known that neither Mr. Darwin nor Mr. Spencer comprehended all that their doctrines taught, or even dreamed how widely their conclusions would reach and apply. Evolution itself was slowly evolved out of the best thoughts of the world's scientific leaders. Its propositions were then few, and its corollaries hardly more numerous. Already it has cre- ated* a literature of its own, is as sure as the theory of gravita- tion and not lesa far-reaching. No man accepted more fully than Mr. Price did, in his later years, the abstract idea of evolu- tion. The only question in his mind was, how far can it be con- sidered operative? Here he was judiciously slow in deciding, and it would have been better for science if others had imitated his prudence. The largest task of the next century will be the sifting out and rejecting from the body of science such fancies as have been mistaken for facts and taught accordingly. Mr. Price Rothrock.] O J4 [Nov. 19, intended to act, as a judge with conservative tendencies would do. His paper on this subject, read March 1st, 1872, is one of in- tense common sense, with here and there passages, which are eloquent from earnest conviction. To the average thinking man his argument will always have great weight ; for it is in sympa- thy with human longings which no philosophy can ever moderate or change. Having himself been a most active participant in the measures which led to the consolidation of this city, Mr. Price was by unanimous vote of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, oh October 28th, 1872, requested to prepare "The History of the Consolidation of the City of Philadelphia." The dedication is to the venerable Horace Binney, and bears the date of December, 1872. It is a duodecimo of 1 40 pages. To give a clear idea of the increase in population around the original city, he inArestigates the early charters. The city, as contemplated by its founders, was to contain 1280 acres — exactly two square miles. The first city charter was not granted until October 25th, 1701, though its charter as a borough was about seventeen years older. On March 11th, 1789, a second city charter was obtained. Step by step, outside of the city proper, the following districts were incorporated, and in the following order: Southwark, in 17G2; Northern Liberties, in 1771; Moyamensing, in 1812; Spring Garden, in 1813; Kensington, in 1820; Penn, in 1844; Richmond, in 1847 ; West Philadelphia, in 1851 ; Belmont, in 1853. It is enough to say that each district had its own police force, and that to escape arrest, for the time, it was simply necessary to step across an imaginary line from one district into another. A meeting in behalf of consolidation of these disjointed mem- bers of the body politic into a compact city, whose government should be better and less expensive, and whose further expan- sion should be unlimited, was held on November [6th, 1849. It 1886.] 5Jo [Rothrock. was attended by more than eighty of our then leading citizens. Nothing had done so much to prepare the public for the con- templated change, as the mobs of 1844. They supplied all fair-minded me 1 with ample evidence that in city politics, party lines must be abandoned and concert of action effected on this vital question. There could be neither peace nor progress without it. Added to those riots which sprang out of creed or color, were others more serious (because more frequent) which grew out of the volunteer fire system. In the spring of 1853, another meet- ing was called to consider the latter cause of trouble, and, if possible, to devise means for its suppression. It was a foregone conclusion, this need of consolidation. The only question was, on what basis should it be effected. To accomplish it, legislative action was requisite. Public sentiment settled upon Mr. Price as the man to represent this part of the city's interest in the State capital. He was not offered the office as an honor, for it was felt he would honor the office, but it was tendered as a sacrifice of inclination and of interest, which he must make for the public good. And as such he accepted the nomination for the office of State Senator. To say that for the mere honor of office, which so possesses some small minds, he cared nothing, is to make a very mild statement of the fact. In so far from spending time or money to gain a seat in our legislative halls, Mr. Price would have given freely to be allowed to remain a private citizen. His letter of acceptance, read by his friend, Mr. Joseph B. Townsend, before the nominating convention, is in all re- spects a remarkable one. The expressions, brief and sharp, in which he pointed out the dangers from what has since culminated in that greatest of political curses known as the Boss System, are now recognized as prophetic. Mr. Price (as already stated) was elected "by independent voters who left their party attachment and discipline" in the in- terest of the greatest good of this city. proc. amek. rniLOS. soc. xxui. 124. 3x. ram ted dec. 17, 18S8. Rothrock.] O.fV [Nov. 10, We can go no further into details here, than to say in the words of the memorial presented to the State Senate on January 3d, 1854, that among other things, consolidation "dispenses with a multitude of treasurers, solicitors, clerks, superintendents, or their equivalents, besides a host of subordinates. It dis- penses with 168 tax collectors, and will cause a saving in this one item alone of $100,000 per year." Of course any bill which promised to make such sweeping re- ductions in the number of office-holders would be opposed by that disinterested fraternity ; and at once the specious argument was advanced before its passage by the Lower House, that the consolidation would endanger the city trusts. It is creditable to the men of all parties in the city, and to their representatives at the State capital, that the argument was estimated at its true worth, and the bill passed by an almost unanimous vote. The select committee of the Senators of the City and County of Philadelphia, of which Mr. Price was chairman, in its report to the Senate compressed the whole truth into the single state- ment that, " while nearly all the cities of our continent have been allowed freedom of expansion, and have bounded forward in population and wealth, the City of Philadelphia had fallen, in 1850, from the first to the second in wealth, and the fourth in population." There was no resisting such an argument. It was a great day for Philadelphia when the Consolidation bill passed. One can hardly imagine how dark a day it would have been had the bill been rejected, or even essentially modi- fied. Mr. Price's friend and companion, the venerable and revered Frederic Fraley, had much to do with giving shape to the ideas of the sub-committee and committee appointed to prepare the bill for presentation to the Legislature. His large business ca- pacity and intimate knowledge of the details of city govern- ment were freely offered in the public interest. He may wrell rejoice now in the beneficent results of his labor. It was a 1886.1 *)Ji [Rothrock. master stroke which made the office of City Controller an elective one, in which the people decided who should oversee public ex- penditures. Maladministration thus lay largety at the doors of the voters. Did space permit, this portion of Mr. Price's use- ful life might well receive more extended notice. In November, 1813, he published in some of our leading State papers eight brief articles, giving his objections to our proposed new State Constitution. It is needless to say that his points were well chosen and ably defended. After a lapse of thirteen years, some of the evils he then foresaw have proved gigantic enough to threaten our whole social fabric. It is proper that these objections be here briefly recorded. The first was that, as compared with the rest of the State, Philadelphia was inadequately represented in our Legislature. The second was, that it prescribed limits to the powers of the Legislature, stated rules to be observed, prohibited bribery and corruption, showed how even a clerical mistake might become a law (as it has done); but gave no method of enforcing right or punishing wrong in certain important contingencies. The third showed that the election of judges was practically placed in the hands of a self-elected caucus. The fourth was, that the proposed ecpaality of taxation was not only a hardship in Philadelphia, but an express violation of assurances properly given prior to the passage of the Act of Consolidation, and also that the proposition to tax charitable and educational institutions and churches was in violation of traditional policy so old, and so often expressed, that it had become sacred as unwritten law, even if not actually on the statute books. The fifth point was, that in apportionment of the State reve- nues under the proposed new Constitution, "no monej^s of the State could be applied to any purpose of charity, education, or benevolence, or to develop our resources, or to gratify or in- struct the people; " and that even after payment of the State debt these prohibitions would remain the same. Rothrock.] ^^ ■ [Nov. 19, The sixth exception was mainly in regard to corporations. Mr. Price contended that justice had not been done them in the way of protection. On the other hand this Constitution left room for unjust discrimination, for cutting rates, for bribes in the way of free passes, and yet prescribed no penalty. It is probable Mr. Price recognized that even discrimination in freights might prove in one way a benefit to the masses, however hard it bore upon producers near the points where the products were con- sumed. It can hardly be supposed, however, that even he saw then the disastrous extent to which discrimination could be car- ried by our own corporations against our own citizens. Loyalty to his State, in him, reached the measure of devotion ; and he would have spared no corporation that struck unjustly by dis- crimination at any legitimate business of his fellow-citizens. The seventh objection was an echo of the first on the inade- quate representation for Philadelphia. The eighth, and last, objection concerned, mainly, the methods of administering justice in the city. The manner of electing magistrates placed the franchise practically in the hands of ward politicians. While the State was amply protected, "the citizens of no city have any protection from the evils of bribery, corrup- tion and fraud." Though warned in advance of the needs of the cities, the constitutional convention " left us helpless of remedy, as before, and thus virtually deferred to and perpetuated the municipal rings, and permitted plunder to flourish." These strictures were made before the new Constitution was voted upon by the people. Can any fair-minded man now deny how just they were, or how much needed? Mr. Price was warned by certain persons that he was acting to his own injury. His dignified defiance of all threats was simply characteristic of the man. The peaceful son of a peaceful sect, how often had he proved a very lion in the patli of public plunderers. It is no exaggeration to say that he would have endured martyrdom for his principles. His appearance, conduct and mode of expres- 1886.] ijJtJ [Rothrock. sion told plainly enough that he had a courage beyond intimida- tion. In pursuit of wrong-doers, he was simply merciless and unrelenting. Yet his admiration for industry and honest}' were just as marked. The Pennsylvania Colonization Society requested Mr. Price to prepare a biographical sketch of its former Vice-President, Dr. Edward F. Kivinus, who was also his personal fiiend. This sketch was an affectionate tribute to the memory of one who was an associate in a congenial cause. Early in 187G lie prepared and read before this body a paper upon "The Glacial Epochs." It is a review of the opinions held by tbe leading advocates of glacial action. How far time modified Mr. Price's objections to the hypothesis I have no means of knowing. It is certain, how- ever, that he was more favorably inclined to it during his later years. The paper itself is a marvel of cross-questioning. Hardly any other than a legal mind could have produced it. Prior to 18G1 the question arose as to what were the legal uses of the so-called Penn Squares, which were in the older part of the city. Several citizens, who were joint-committee men of the Academy of Natural Sciences, the Library Company of Phil- adelphia, the American Philosophical Society, the Academy of the Fine Arts, and the Franklin Institute, asked Mr. Price's opinion upon the subject. This was subsequently published. It is well enough that the conclusions reached be given here ; for they cannot be too well known, or too widely circulated among our citizens. Mr. Price held that the Central Square could and should, in justice to Penn's wishes and without any betrayal of public trust, be used as a building site for such edu- cational institutions as were represented by the above commit- teemen ; because these five Penn Squares were laid down by the first surveyor-general (Thomas Holmes), and it was specified, by implication, if not directly, in the "advertisement annexed to the List of First Purchasers," that, whereas the four others Kothrock.J bO\J [Nov. 19, were to be kept open, the central one was to have upon it " houses for public affairs — as a meeting house, assembly or State bouse, market house, school house, and several other buildings for public concerns." That pamphlet should least of all be forgotten by this Society, as it declares our legal status in times of either peace or war. Prior to 1816 the legacy of Andre Francois Michaux became available to this Society. It is worthy of note that our honored chief in botany, Prof. Asa Gray, was present at the preparation of that will, and it is more than possible made suggestions which should be kindty esteemed here. This, however, is conjecture. Mr. Price was made chairman of the committee having in charge the execution of the Michaux trust. In 1876 he read his report here, showing that the income had been judiciously expended, and, almost as enthusiastically as if he had been half a century younger, he stated his plans and the hopes which grew out of the fund. It can hardly be said that this legacy from France started Mr. Price upon the agitation of the timber question and the necessity of a national and state system of forestry. His fondness for trees was an inherited one, and all his life he had been a tree-planter. For a score of years he had wit- nessed with sadness the wholesale destruction and waste of our forest growth. It was thus a happy chance which associated his name with that of Michaux. No man could have had a stronger or more practical leaning toward the execution of such a trust, and no man would have been more certain to see that the testator's wishes were religiously carried out. I thus desire here to record the fact that of all those who, in this State, agitated the timber question before it had commended itself to the public judgment, the most efficient was Eli Kirk Price. He has had his share of sjnnpathy for having gone so wide of the mark (it was thought b}' some) as to predict that there ever could be a dearth of timber in this land. Now that the whole country is awakening to a recognition of the truth of what he ism;. 'jOl [Rrthrock taught, let him have the credit of a prophet and a public bene- factor. In this connection it is but just that I also mention the name of another Pennsylvanian, the Honorable Washington Townsend, who, when a member of Congress, was chairman of the Committee on Public Lands, which started the late Franklin Hough on his productive career as a compiler of forest law and literature for our national use. It is a matter of regret that Mr. Price did not live to witness the observance of Arbor Day, when the school-children all over the State weie engaged in planting the trees under whose shade future generations might rejoice. Those who see what the day has done in Nebraska will recognize something more than senti- ment in its observance. In November and December, 1817, Mr. Price read before the American Philosophical Society a paper on Sylviculture. This apparently was suggested by the duty of utilizing the income from the Michaux legacy. It is, however, important as being among the first studied papers upon that subject published in this city. Considering how much we were then in the dark, as to the precise facts and statistics of American forestry, it is a wonderfully clear statement of wants and remedies as applied to our own soil. A year later he supplemented it by a briefer one. On March 20th, 1879, the Numismatic and Antiquarian Soci- ety of Philadelphia presented him, its President, with a silver medal in commemoration of the twentj^-first anniversary of the foundation of that organization. Dr. Daniel G. Brinton, who has earned so distinguished a place in anthropological science, made the presentation address, after Mr. Henry Phillips, Jr., had delivered and explained the medal itself. On its obverse this medal bore the name and portrait of Mr. Price, and on the re- verse were the seal and date of the foundation of the Society. Mr. Price made a brief and felicitous response. Greatly as Mr. Price valued such a tribute of respect and Rothrock.] "0-j [Nov. in, veneration, the moderation evinced in his reply was thoroughly characteristic. His active interest in the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society appears in his contributions made from time to time. On January 15th, 1884, the friends of Mr. James J. Barclay gathered at the Philadelphia House of Refuge to celebrate his ninetieth birthday. Mr. Price spoke effectively and affection- ately on the occasion. Listening to what was said of Mr. Bar- clay, Mr. Price could hardly avoid recognizing that much of it was also applicable to himself. Age, fidelity, exemplary private life, recognition by the best citizens as Philadelphia's most re- spected men, came in equal measure to them both. Of those who began life with Mr. Price, but few survive. Among them Dr. Ezra Michener stands pre-eminent as a public- spirited citizen and as a scientist. The tribute paid by this venerable gentleman to Mr. Price, who was once his room-mate and always his friend, is of the warmest character. For many years Mr. Price was an active member of the Board of Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania. He gave no stinted measure of care and interest to that great institution, and more than once aided it from his own financial resources. It is not too much to say that his legal knowledge was of the greatest importance in the administration of its real estate. He was also President of the Preston Retreat, one of our noblest charitable institutions. He was also one of the original members of the Park Commission, and, as chairman of its committee on land damages and purchases, passed under his personal supervis- ion all the titles to the large area now occupied by the people's pleasure ground, which aggregates in value nearly eight millions of dollars, this, too, without any charge whatever for his services. In concluding what is here said of Mr. Price as a public char- acter, it appears proper to quote from a letter written by him to a relative twenty years ago. There was no suspicion in his mind that any part of the letter would ever be published. Hence 1886.1 DUO [Roth rock. a peculiar value attaches to the following extract as indicating his own real integrity of character. " Having said so much, I am now going to offer thee some cautions ; but these are also for thy encouragement. But what- ever thee may do I wish to see it over thy own name, or initials, or none. In discussing sacred truths no unusual name should be assumed. For myself, I write nothing that I would not put my name or initials to ; first because they give authenticity to what is written and help the effort that should be kept upper- most to tell the best truth we know in the best manner we can. The writing thus authenticated will have a greater weight with our contemporaries, and if read yet later will be our testimony, borne from one generation to the next. If we write with sin- cerity of purpose under a sense of duty, we need not be disturbed by the apprehension of criticism ; for, if others can do better, let them try it, and for one I shall be thankful to them." His love for this commonwealth was only exceeded by his love of truth. It would be difficult to write a history of this State or City without reference to the services which be has ren- dered directly or indirectly. No movement of public policy which he inaugurated or actively aided was other than a benefit to those in whose times he lived. We can hardly tell when he began to grow old. The erect, commanding frame gradually became a little bent, and the vig- orous step a little more slow ; but up to the evening of Novem- ber 14th, 1884, when he was in his eighty-eighth year, his mind was active and his interest in human affairs warm. He lay down in usual health, and just before the dawn of No- vember 15th, passed quietly to his eternal reward. He saw the sun rise out of a cloudless horizon from near the throne. Anticir pating the change, he had written : " 1 hear celestial billows roll, Before I've reached the parting straud : I listen with transported soul To music from the better land." PROC, AMER. F-HILOS. SOC. XXIII. 124. 3y. PRINTED DEC. 27, 1886. Rothrock.J l)U4: [Nov. 19, He had lived so simply, and cared for himself so systemati- cally, that there was no real disease. The machinery of life quietly stopped when the full measure of work was done, and the world was left the poorer because a great, good man had gone. Admirable as he was in his public relations, he was no less ad- mirable in his family life. He carried to his home all the charm of a gentle, affectionate, thoughtful man. The children of Mr. Price were: I. Rebecca E., married to Hanson L. Withers. II. John Sergeant. III. Sibyl E., married to Starr H. Nicholls. Of these, the son, an eminent lawyer of this city, alone sur- vived him. Whatever we may think of ourselves, the fact is, the example of such a man as the subject of this sketch may be studied witli advantage by all. There was not in his early life anything which plaoed him in a conspicuous light before the world. He entered upon his career with simply honest ancestry and per- sonal rectitude and good health to favor him. Yet without self- seeking, without fawning to powerful patronage, without sacri- fice of self-respect, without ceasing to condemn wrong, he became one of the most conspicuous men in this city, which claims a population of a million inhabitants. Why was it? I. Because his fidelity to trust was absolutely unassailable. No man ever lived in whom this was stronger. A trust was as sacred to him and as binding upon him as though the exact case had been specified in the volume of revelation. II. Because, when called upon to express an opinion, he did so from his honest conviction, without the slightest regard to what friend or foe might think of it; and his actions were always as positive as his opinions. But with all this, he was singularly tolerant of the honest opinions of others. III. Because he was usually in advance of his times, and often 605 [Rothrock. very far in advance. It is only requisite here to specify his re- lations to the park, to the timber, colonization and abolition questions in illustration of the above statement. IV. Because he held to the plan of work which he had laid out for himself with undeviating steadiness through a long, active life. These may be called modest qualifications with which to win the universal esteem in which Mr. Price was held. True, yet it appears they were sufficient. He was not a great genius, nor a man of destiny, but he was something better than either — an honest worker. His intuitions never did dut}' instead of his con- victions, for the latter maintained their supremacy throughout, and were only trusted when fully weighed. This explains why during so long a life Mr. Price was seldom obliged to reverse an opinion once formed. His virtues wer4t OP THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXIII. July, 1886. No. 123 . TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE. The Olaciation of Parts of the Wyoming and Lackawanna Valleys. By John 0. Branner (with two maps) 337 On Two New Species of Three-toed Horses from the Upper Mio- cene, with Notes on the Fauna of the Ticholeptus Beds. By E. D. Cope 351 Vocabulary of the Selish Language. By W. J. Hoffman 367 Discovery of the Thoracic Feet in a Carboniferous Phyllocaridan. By A. S. Packard (with plate) 380 The Use of Oil in Storms at Sea. By Lieut. A. B. Wyckoff, U. S. N. 383 An Obituary Notice of the Late George Whitney. By William Sel- lers 388 Sketch of the Geology of York County, Pennsylvania. By Persifor Frazer {with a map) 391 The Beothuk Indians. Second Article. By A. S. Oatschet 411 Composite Photography applied to Handwriting. By Persifor Frazer {with a plate) 433 On the Structure and Affinities of the Amphiumidse. By E. D. Cope {with two plates) 442 Stated Meeting, March 19, 1SS6 446 Stated Meeting, April 2, 1SS6 * . . 448 Stated Meeting, April 19, 18S6 451 Stated Meeting, May 7, 1886 452 Stated Meeting, May 21, 1SS6 454 IXW It is requested that the receipt of this number be acknowledged. WW Members who have not as yet sent their photographs for the Society's album will confer a favor by so doing. §W Please communicate any change of address or inaccuracy in name. Published for the American Philosophical Society, by McCALLA & STAVELY, NOS. 237-9 DOCK STREET, PHILADELPHIA. Extract from the By-Laws. CHAPTEK XII. OF THE MAGELLANIC FUND. Section 1. John Hyacinth de Magellan, in London, having in the year 1786 offered to the Society , as a donation, the sum of two hundred guineas, to be by them vested in a secure and permanent fund, to the end that the interest arising therefrom should be annually disposed of in pre- miums, to be adjudged by them to the author of the best discovery, or most useful invention, relating to Navigation, Astronomy, or Natural Philosophy (mere natural history only excepted) ; and the Society having accepted of the above donation, they hereby publish the condi- tions, prescribed by the donor and agreed to by the Society, upon which the said annual premiums will be awarded. CONDITIONS OF THE MAGELLANIC PREMIUM. 1. The candidate shall send his discovery, invention or improvement, addressed to the President, or one of the Vice-Presidents of the Society, free of postage or other charges ; and shall distinguish his performance by some motto, device, or other signature, at his pleasure. Together •with his discovery, invention, or improvement, he shall also send a sealed letter containing the same motto, device, or signature, and sub- scribed with the real name and place of residence of the author. 2. Persons of any nation, sect or denomination whatever, shall be ad- mitted as candidates for this premium. 3. No discovery, invention or improvement shall be entitled to this premium, which hath been already published, or for which the author hath been publicly rewarded elsewhere. 4. The candidate shall communicate his discovery, invention or im- provement, either in the English, French, German, or Latin language. 5. All such communications shall be publicly read or exhibited to the Society at some stated meeting, not less than one month previous to the day of adjudication, and shall at all times be open to the inspection of such members as shall desire it. But no member shall carry home with Subscription Price to Non- Members, $4.00 per Annum; to Members not paying an Annual Contribution to the Society, $1.00. Entered at the Philadelphia Post-Office as second-class matter, PTJBLISHED Q,TJJ^S,TE!I2Xiir. ./o,/n PROCEE DINGS AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. Vol. XXIII. December, 1886. No. 124. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE. The Trigeminus Nerve in the Domestic Cat (Felis domestica). By T. B. Stowell (toith a plate) 459 An Analytical Table of the Genera of Snakes. By E. D. Cope. . . 479 Subjective After-Color (Complementary Color). By Charles A. Oliver 500 On the Ikonomatic Method of Phonetic Writing, with Special Ref- erence to American Archaeology. By Daniel G-. Brinton 503 Synonymic List of the North American Species of Bufo and Rana, with descriptions of some new Species of Batrachia, from speci- mens in the National Museum. By E. D. Cope 514 Is there Reciprocity in Trade and the Consumption of Manufac- tured Commodities ? By Thos. H. Dudley 526 The Conception of Love in some American Languages. By Daniel O. Brinton 546 Notices of New Fresh-Water Infusoria. By Alfred C. Stokes (with a plate) 562 Biographical Memoir of the late Honorable Eli K. Price, LL.D. By J. T. Rothrock 572 Obituary Notice of Dr. Albert H. Smith. By Harrison Allen 606 Stated Meeting, September 3, 1886 535 Stated Meeting, October 1, 1886 541 Stated Meeting, October 15, 1886 544 Stated Meeting, November 5, 1886 569 Stated Meeting, November 19, 1886 571 Stated Meeting, December 3, 18S6 611 Published for the American Philosophical Society, by McCALLA & STAVELY, NOS. 237-9 DOCK STREET, PHILADELPHIA. Extract from the By-Laws. CHAPTER XII. OF THE MAGELLANIC FUND. Section 1. John Hyacinth de Magellan, in London, having in the year 1786 offered to the Society , as a donation, the sum of two hundred guineas, to be by them vested in a secure and permanent fund, to the end that the interest arising therefrom should be annually disposed of in pre- miums, to be adjudged by them to the author of the best discovery, or most useful invention, relating to Navigation, Astronomy, or Natural Philosophy (mere natural history only excepted) ; and the Society having accepted of the above donation, they hereby publish the condi- tions, prescribed by the donor and agreed to by the Society, upon which the said annual premiums will be awarded. CONDITIONS OF THE MAGELLANIC PREMIUM. 1. The candidate shall send his discovery, invention or improvement, addressed to the President, or one of the Vice-Presidents of the Society, free of postage or other charges ; and shall distinguish his performance by some motto, device, or other signature, at his pleasure. Together with his discovery, invention, or improvement, he shall also send a sealed letter containing the same motto, device, or signature, and sub- scribed with the real name and place of residence of the author. 2. Persons of any nation, sect or denomination whatever, shall be ad- mitted as candidates for this premium. 3. No discovery, invention or improvement shall be entitled to this premium, which hath been already published, or for which the author hath been publicly rewarded elsewhere. 4. The candidate shall communicate his discovery, invention or im- provement, either in the English, French, German, or Latin language. 5. All such communications shall be publicly read or exhibited to the Society at some stated meeting, not less than one month previous to the day of adjudication, and shall at all times be open to the inspection of such members as shall desire it. But no member shall carry home with 3 2044 093 310 654 Date Due -20Ffih'51 .— HAY 5 9 1954 f4fi Ml 9hI